ERNARD GC. COTTON

WELLING] ON RD., ADELA! IDE

SOUTH AUSTRALIA.

CONTENTS

PART I

Prescott, J. A.: A Relationship between Evaporation and Temperature

Evans, J. W.: Two interesting Upper Permian Homoptera from New South Wales

WomersLey, H.: Australian Species of aac eae Canest. (Acarina) with Notes on

the New Genera

Jounston, T. H., and Meds, Pp. i: ‘Sane Ascarid Nematodes from Australian

Marine Fish

Biack, J. M.: Additions to es F tee of South cael No. ‘41

Wixison, A. F.: A New Occurrence of Monazite in South Australia

Cuapman, F.: Notes on Fossiliferous Rocks from Tertiary besusiheca to the Eich west

of Coonalpyn, South Australia ..

Brake, S. T.: Critical Notes on the Gramineae walk Coperaccae of Eat fekehetin ere

Ccanipalout of New Species

STEPHENS, C. G.. The Hydrology of the Fipaeed ok Belalie, nee adieu Senuh

Australia, and its Significance in Soil Conservation and Flood Control . ae

Womenrs ry, H., and Heasure, W. G.: The Trombiculinae (Acarina) or Tighe mites of as

Austro-Malayan and Oriental Regions .. ie a an

Corton, B. C.: More Australian Freshwater Shells

Jounsron, T. H., and Cre.annp, J. B.. Native Names and Uses of ne a in ifs ‘Mont.

eastern corner of South Australia ae i ae Be oh

Corton, B. C.: Australian Shells of the Family Haliotidae

Womerstey, H.: A Modification of Berlese’s Medium for the Microscopic inate of

Acarina and other small Arthropods

Jounston, T. H., and Mawson, P. M.: Remarks on some Rapes ne Jeicettens

Reptiles

Jounston, T. H., and Mawson, P. M.: Some Nematodes from Australian Elasmobranchs

StepHens, C. G.: The Pedology of a South Australian Fen .. =

EarpLeey, C. M.: An Ecological Study of the Vegetation of Eight Mile Creek se amp ; A

Natural South Australian Coastal Fen Formation ..

Cooper, H. M.: An Exceptional Australian Axe Head .

Jounston, T. H., and Best, E. W.: Austrahan fe Wieeaiads No, a

CresPin, I.: Conodonts from Waterhouse Range, Central Australia .. : op

Mawson, D., and Parkin, L. W.: Some Granitic Rocks of South-eastern South iets

Jounston, T. H.: Aboriginal Names and Utilization of the Fauna of the Eyrean Region :

Prescott, J. A.: The Australian Homoclime of the Zone of Natural Occurrence of

Parthenium argentatum

Finuayson, H. H.: A New eS of Pree viet Piraidapihlia)

BaALANCE-SHEET

List oF FELLOWS

INDEX

A RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN EVAPORATION AND TEMPERATURE

By J. A. PRESCOTT, Waite Agricultural Research Institute

Summary

In the formulation of climatic indices several attempts have been made to develop factors in which

the effect of evaporation in controlling the efficiency of rainfall is expressed as a function of

temperature without taking atmospheric humidity into account. Such indices include those of Lang,

de Martonne, Emberger McKibbin for annual values and of Thornthwaite (1931) for monthly

values. Reference may be made to a previous paper (1934) for a discussion of these indices.

TRANSACTIONS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY

OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA INCORPORATED

A RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN EVAPORATION AND TEMPERATURE

By J. A. Prescorr, Waite Agricultural Research Institute

[Read 12 November 1942]

In the formulation of climatic incices several attempts have been made to

develop factors in which the effect of evaporation in controlling the ethcicney of

rainfall is expressed as a function of temperature without taking atmospheric

humidity into account. Such indices include those of Lang, de Martonne,

Emberger, McKibbin for annual values and of Thornthwaite (1931) for monthly

values. Reference may be made to a previous paper (1934) for a discussion of

these indices.

A more recent attempt is that of Baver (1937) who obtained a useful expres-

sion linking the ratio of rainfall to evaporation with rainfall and temperature.

Tt was later shown (1940) that althcugh evaporation from a free water

surface is roughly proportional to atmospheric saturation deficit, ihe amount js

limited by the amount of solar energy which is available to supply the latent heat

required for the evaporation and that an improved relation ig obtained if both

saturation deficit and radiation are taken into account.

In view of the fact that temperature is important in controlling saturation

deficit and is in itself controlled by solar radiation, there appeared therefore to be

a reasonable probability of being able to express evaporation from a free water

surface as a function of temperature.

It has been previously noted (1942) that the relationship between mean

monthly temperatures and solar radiation is essentially one of difference in phase,

and ai examination was therefore made by the methods of Fourier analysis then

outlined of the phase relationship between temperature and evaporation for a

number of Australian stations, about thirty in number, for which the mean

nonthly values over a reasonable term of years were available. The amounts of

evaporation recorded appear to vary considerably from site to site, although the

records at cach site are usually consistent. The evaporation data used in the

examination are given in Table 1, temperature data were taken from the Com-

monwealth Year Book (1941) and from Pamphlet No. 42 of the Council for

scientific and Industria’ Research. In able I are also given the differences in

phase between temperature and evaporation. As might be expected, the evapora-

tion is intermediate in phase between radiation and temperature, The column

giving the ratios of annual evaporation to saturation deficit gives a measure of the

variability amongst the recording stations,

The phase relationships between metcorological elements may be illustrated

from the records of the Waite Institute, Adelaide, which are given in Table IT.

The probable radiation at the earth’s surface is secn to be some eight days

later than the solar radiation proper—this being due to a lag in relative sunshine

of 26 days. The difference in phase between evaporation and saturation deficit is

4°7 days, and between evaporation and temperature it is 13-0 days.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 67, (1), 30 July 1943

Los I

- : | panier e 7K ore

it | ot g2°0 Lrlg | SS-atler-ot.oG°2 | ge°S i lee vre2 | Lez | 99° | t1'9 | 96g | QI IT BP 'eT 2°2t @TPIBT{009.

ve: - + a'2g | eg tt Sl'é 2f°9 TOT £G'z €r2 | 62-2 26°£ | 6°S ob | eS°tt PL et Orit UTperTEy

cad pte T2'0 0°99 | 0S°6 [6974 LUG /6£°4 | ge'2} Eg'T QL°t | Sore | PLP LE°L | 12°6 | ToO‘oT 2°02 ated

cz 4 if 2'tg | to‘1t!S6g ¢2°9 |90°7 : Pe°s | Bre «29'S | 2O°R | 6L°9 | 26°Q | GlOT gG°tt | g°St uemderg

: | | \ : BTTerjeny wles0K

ve : poe iv'o 0°96 |99°tt glrot) 90°6 |22-L| LEV | GG°E Of E | BOT | 9B°9 | TE "6 | O2* IT) goreT vs sduyids est ly

vI | lge 22-0 1°95 | 1gr2 varg leg-p Joke eec2 | gel get 1 9g°2 | PT | OR'9 | ESL |GV'g okt Oqny FIST OFTey_

: | | i LW pu Sy Teryery Gatos

zt, eae 6T'0 T19 | Pg 199'L [QOS | 16K PH'Z GOT Tg't /ES°2| ggk joT'9 og'd /60°6 | Tb ayeqrey

a9 | 1t9e Gt‘o Toe 1666 HGy lpere 2c2i Get Gort ETL | GbL| The | age . GEG jo2"9 ort emrn0g 18H

; i ‘ ; : BEIGIOTA

de | ove | €T*o TUE (2a pg 262 [G61 Pet 6g'o O60 EET | BET SG-2 | gare (£9°7 | TT 928008

i ' i | i i 1 eTueusEy

6 > 60 | vero TPL | 06'g loztg |9L'°9 | Th'S} 06'S | LovE 92°C [LAV | OLS | Leh | 2dsL 09°98 | PTT vISOTIC

62 962 22'0 2796 | Cl°9 !ga79 1eS°S 1GE-P | ef-< | 652 Tree |gE*2 | fo°7 | 6B RP jog"S TS°9 | 62 ousga tig

| . 1 I | puslsuseny

2 Lzz 61°0 TEP | QS°S | G0°S ety Ivk Wee; Lot O9L |90'2 Gore | PE 06°F -65°S gt Iposdesay youdsorg

peg : CSc légrh oa? [Gee hr], OTL PEL TTT OG'T i kee zee | KEY 6g°7 g°St Leayy poVIEIUY

g6 | tke Lt'0 96h fyeS age leis |Gh-2| tet | Ghee Gert GLtT | POTe PGE. TSP -Ge"G 6°02 feupss

ge 662 (o) ae) €6g |Garttitz-ot lz’g iPa'S | beh | LL°2 ogee | 66°C | E'S | E-g | PV TT OP at Tor TITH SeHoIg

ge 6¢2 ih ene) SSE [gts [ok P '16°2 |26°T | Zot | 69°0 |; OL‘0 cutlore lev | 62° jog*S ob yonfeyaing

v2 = ts ate fogg [ALP (LOE UT! EAGT ak t gat | Pht] kee ehh | et-g og e9 aunoy

Lz got €t'o gdp | 19°9 99°S |90°y 1S6-2 | Le-T! Qt'T fe"t ig't zee 60S | HO Hed romney ysanuy eg

ve gba T2'0 ptS [tock '9E°9 jLovh [QG-2/ SPT ETT Let /OG'T; ate [GV°S [Led garg zg 204 007

gt 992 t2-0 6°66 | Sg jecth [oes jtae lets (ove Get (927s | SBE 919 OBL 2h"6 2g WYIZTIO

02 Gt } eo 1°99 |gtrotivg:2 [LTS [LTE e6T {ORT et [Gre EY jtted Gee Teeot, = web 7 ogand

l “TOV Pie Ba ey UsNds Ae

41n0r0R | | : | |

sr0e84 go ‘suzy ‘Sut ‘SUP! “BUT Buyi ‘SUP “SUP “eUy Buy] ‘SUT ‘Buy ‘su “SUT. “SUT asap }

- i pa did. peal ea? as oe ae

prodey |‘ P's /F s}oTsep UCT es0dea ‘oeg| aon) °320, “deg: “Srey érne aung|, seq ‘ady 2a. ‘usp oyyerodeag |

go] O79ey Uo eanieg Tenuuy - : at i | pue

awysuey yenucy efep oF JO UjuoW JOz vOyywtoduag uuEy Ing steduey

U8dA}0Q &4y R007

aseyd ut

eoue1ezT JIG

SROVLVIS SNIGHOORE KVTIVELSAY EKOS Wows VLYT NOlLVeOavAT

T ®1Qsh

TABLE [LL

Lag between Meteorological Elements and Solar Radiation

at the Waite Institute, Adelaide

Meteorological Element Days

Probable radiation at earth’s surface - - 8:3

Relative humidity - - - - 175

Evaporation - - - - - 21:2

Relative sunshine™ — - . of - 25:6

Saturation deficit “ - - - 25-9

Temperature — - - = = - 34:2

Vapour pressure - - - - 50°6

For each of the stations, the next step was to calculate the temperature

corresponding to a forward displacement in phase equal to the difference in phase

between the curves for evaporation and temperature. It was then found that the

relationship between mean monthly evaporation and the corresponding phase-

displaced temperature could be represented by an equation of the form

Emat bT + ce?

where /: is the monthly evaporation expressed in inches

Tis the corresponding monthly phase-displaced temperature expressed

in degrees Fahrenheit,

and a, b, ¢ and d are constants.

When evaporation is plotted directly against temperature a characteristic loop

represents the relationship. The displacement of the temperature in phase by the

calculated amount gives an excellent curve in all cases examined, and three of these

are illustrated in fig. 1. It is interesting to mote that the phase-displaced teimpera-

ture when evaporation is nil is very close to the dew point of the coolest month.

The methods used for calculating the constants of the equations were in the

main graphical, and it is not intended to quote them in full. These constants have

been examined, however, by statistical methods in order to secure any generalisa-

tion that might prove useful later in atternpting to secure estimates for the evapora-

tion at any site in Australia, at least south of the tropic.

To simplify the handling of the data, logarithms were taken of the third

term in the equation : log ce#? = loge + T.d loge

so that the constants to be examined became a, b, loge and dloge In view of the

fact that it was considered undesirable to introduce humidity factors into the

generalisations, the only other constants permitted were distance from the ocean

and latitude.

The first generalisations attempted related to the phase relationships of the

curves of temperature and evaporation. Doth the lag of the evaporation curve

hehind solar radiation and the difference in phase between temperature and

evaporation show a general relationship with distance from the ocean. These

relationships vary, however, both with latitude and longitude, but the stations in

New South Wales, Victoria and Tasmania appear to belong to a common group.

Jn this group the lag of evaporation behind solar radiation reaches a maximum

for stations about 170 miles from the ocean. For the Western Australian group

this maximum period of lag occurs at a distance of about thirty miles from the

ecean. The Queensland stations appear to belong to yet another group. These

relationships are illustrated in fig. 2. The difference in phase between temperature

and evaporation for stations in south-eastern Australia shows a maximum of

©) Relative sunshine is the ratio of actual to possible sunshine in each month.

twenty-one days at the ocean coast and falls off rapidly to values of the order of

seven days within 150 miles of the coast. ‘This feature is illustrated in fig. 3.

With respect to the constants a, b, c and d, the main feature is a high correla-

tion between values for a and b (r == 0-984) and for loge and dloge (r = 0°950).

F COOLGARDIE !

oe | = -115+026 T +0-0067 eC ORT

8 +

ye .

be : : :

' GRIFFITH

val J. i. | | E=-9-3-022T+0-00082e 7" _|

a mf :

x -

WAITE INSTITUTE

= -8-9+0-20T +0-O00097

40 50 60 7O AO 50 60 7O °F

Fig. 1 Illustrating the relationship between mean monthly cvaporation and

temperatures at three stations. On the left the evaporations and tempera-

tures are those actually observed: on the right the temperature curves

have been displaced in phase by an amount corresponding to the differ-

ence in phase between evaporation and temperature. These differences are:

for Coolgardie, W. Aust., 12-2 days; for Griffith, N.S.W., 8-2 days; and for

the Waite Institute, S. Aust., 13-1 days. For example: the temperatures

corresponding to the monthly evaporations at the Waite Institute are not

those of the corresponding months but are read off from the temperature

curves 13:2 days later. The relationship between evaporation and phase-

displaced temperature can be expressed by an equation of the form

Ea-atob?T +ecé?. The arrows indicate the dew point of the coolest month.

100 200 300 400 MILES

lig. 2) Illustrating the relationship between the distance from the ocean and

the lag in phase between evaporation and solar radiation at Australian stations.

Line S.E. with solid circles: stations in south-eastern Australia; line

WV with open circles: stations in Western Australia; line Q with crosses, two

stations in Queensland.

a ey

100 200 300 MILES

Fig. 3. Illustrating the relationship, for stations in south-eastern Australia,

between the distance from the acean and the difference in phase between

temperature and evaporation.

In the latter case an improvement is to be observed by allowing for latitude

(k = 0°981). Corresponding regression equations are:

-—a = 49:0 b — 0°86

and —loge == 1:60 + 77-1 dloge — 0°0643 Latitude.

The constants a and b are related ta the total annual evaporation. The correlation

between annual E and b for example is 0°616 with the corresponding regression

equation: annual EF = 155 b + 31°8.

There is a suggestion of some relationship between the values for loge and the

difference in phase between temperature and evaporation, but the correlation

is low.

SUM MARY

The relationship between mean mouthly evaporation and mean monthly tempera~

ture for a range of Australian statians can best be expressed in terms of a differ-

ence in phase which is a function of distance from the ocean. ‘The relationship

between evaporation and phase-displaced temperature can be satisfactorily

expressed by an equation of the form

Emat bT + cc

‘This equation has been: fitted to some thirty sets of records and some correlations

have been sought. The records are, however, not consistent enough to enable a

general equation to be applied for all or part of southern Australia.

ACKNOWLEDGMENT!

Acknowledgments are due to Mr. E, A. Cornish for suggesting some aspects

of the statistical treatment, and to Mr. W. H. Maze for securing and verifying

some of the records from New South Wales.

REFERENCES

Juaver, L. D. 1937 Proceedings Soil Science Soc. America, 2, 533

Irescort, J. A. 1934 Trans. Ray. Soc. S. Aust., 58, 48

Prescott, |. A. 1940 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 64, 114

Drescorr, J. A. 1942 Trans. Roy. Soc. 5. Aust., 66, 46

TiorxtHwaire, C. WW, 1931 Geogr. Rey., 21, 633

TWO INTERESTING UPPER PERMIAN HOMOPTERA

FROM NEW SOUTH WALES

By J. W. EVANS

Summary

As by far the sweater part of the available knowledge of extinct insect forms is based on the study

of wing venation, well-preserved remains of other insect parts are of extreme interest. In the present

paper two fossil insects are described in which the principal features are head structure. In one of

them wing venation is also preserved.

TWO INTERESTING UPPER PERMIAN HOMOPTERA

FROM NEW SOUTH WALES

By J. W. Evans

{Read 8 April 1943]

PLATE |

As by far the greater part of the available knowledge of extinct insect forms

is based on the study of wing venation, well-preserved remains of other insect parts

are of extreme interest. In the present paper two fossil insects are described in

which the principal features arc head structure. In one of them wing venation

is also preserved.

The fossils were found in 1942 in Upper Permian strata, near Newcastle.

New South Wales, by Mr. ©. Le M. IXnight. I am grateful to Mr. Knight for

the opportunity to examine and describe these fossils and for making available

the photographs which accompany the paper.

HOMOPTERA-AUCHENORRHYNCHA

SCYTINOPTERIDAE

Permagra gen. nov.

The costal border of the tegmen is thickened, Se is short and curved to

meet R, and R 24.3 extends in a straight line to the apex of the tegmen, M has

only two branches, and both branches of Cu are short. An appendix is developed.

Permagra distincta sp. nov. (Genotype)

(PL J, fg. i; text fig. 1)

Length of the whole insect, 7 mm.. of the tegmen, 5 mm. Head wider than

long with a distinct epicranial suture posterior to the frons. Posterior margin of

the face of the head as in text fig. 1. Tegmen rugose, venation ‘as in text fig. 1.

Holotype—No. 139866, Australian Museum, Sydnev.

Horizon—Upper Permtan of Belmonth, N.S.AW.

‘The single specimen on which this genus and species are based is fairly well

preserved, and of interest because, as well as the outline of the head being visible,

the shape of the frons, or more probably the fronto-clypeus, is well indicated.

The anterior part of the head is not clear, though the impression of the labrum

remains. Posterior to the head, on each side, are a pair of indistinct impressions

which are suggestive of pronotal paranota. Much of the segmentation of the

thorax and abdomen is visible and the greater part of the venation of one tegmen;

the other is somewhat obscured by the hind wing.

The venation has characteristics in common both with Permoscarta belmon-

icusis Tillvard and with present-day Cercopids, such as species in the genus

Philagra Don. It resembles 2. belmontensis in the shape of the media and first

cubitus and differs in having a radial sector with two branches. It resembles

Philagra in the shape of the subcosta, radius and first cttbitus, but differs in hav-

ing a two-branched media; the media in Philagra is undivided.

Tillyard (1926), and others, have suggested that the Cercopidae are descended

from the Scytinopteridae. The discovery of Permagra distincta lends support to

this hypothesis. The possible retention by P. distincta of pronotal paranota, 1s

not evidence of any very close relationship with the Pcloridiidae, although this

group is the only one among present-day Homoptera in which these structures

are developed.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 67, (1), 30 July 1943

TIOMOPTERA-PALAEORRHYNCHA

ARCHESCYTINIDAE

‘The insect described below is preserved in such a fashion that only the ventral

surface is visible; the wings are completely concealed by the body. Its small size

suggesis it may belong to the genus Permopsvlla Tillyard, or to a related genus.

These genera have been placed by Carpenter (1939) in the Archescytinidac. The

head is excellently preserved and, though undoubtedly Homopterous, is not of an

insect belonging to any of the three present-day divisions of the Homoptera, it

is therefore placed in the division Palaeorrhyncha, which Carpenter (1932) has

suggested may well be ancestral to both the Auchenorrhyncha and the Sternor-

rhyncha. As Lugereon boeckingi Dohrn. is very doubtfully Hemipterous, the

head described below is the first well preserved Hemipterous head to be discovered

in Palaeozoic strata.

Fig, 2

Permagra distincta g.ct., sp.n. Permocephalus knighti, lead, g. et., sp.n.

Permocephalus gen. nov.

The head, which is nearly twice as wide as long, is divided by a transverse

ridge into a posterior convex area and a more or less flat anterior area. ‘The arms

of the epicranial sutures join the genal sutures on each side. The genae are wide,

the clypeus wider anteriorly than posteriorly, and the labium is short.

Permocephalus knighti sp.nov. (Genotype)

(PI. 1, fig. 2; text fig. 2)

Teugth, of whole insect, 5mm. Width of head, 1:3 mm. The head is illus-

trated in text fig. 2. Parts of the thorax are visible, abdominal segmentation 1s

distinct, and there are faint indications of the presence of a saw-like ovipositor.

Holotype—No. F39865, Australian Museum, Sydney.

{forizon—Upper Permian of Belmonth, N.S.W,

That part of the head which lies posterior to the transverse ridge needs little

comment, apart from noting that there is no trace of a coronal suture. The broken

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1943 Vol. 67, Plate I

Permocephalus knighti, ©. et., sp. n.

sp.

Permagra distincta, ¢. et.,

line which connects the arms of the epicramial suture in text fig. 2 represents the

epistomal suture. It 1s not distinct and can be seen only with careful lighting. The

antennae appear to arise close to the ends of the epistomal suture. The genae are

wide, and not connected facially with the maxillary plates. Narrow borders,

anterior to the clypeus on each side of the labrum, may represent parts of these

plates.

‘The clypeus is a single undivided sclerite, somewhat raised antero-medially.

The lateral sutures bounding it on each side, which join the epicranial sutures,

are genal and not clypeal sutures. It has been suggested carlier (Evans, 1938)

hat the lora of the Auchenorrhyncha are part of the clypeus, and that a progres-

sive development can be traced from the Peloridiidae (Coleorrhyncha) through

the Fulgoroida to the rest of the groups in the division. A comparison of the

head of P. knighti with that of the head of a nymph of Hemiodoecus fidelis Ev.

(Peloridiidae), lends support to this view. In P, kaighti uo trace oi clypeal

sutures occurs; in H, fidelis incipient clypeal sutures are present which do not

reach to the hind margin of the clypeus. In the Homoptera-Auchenorrhyncha

clypeal sutures divide the ante-clypeus into a central part and a lateral lora, and

connect with the frontal sutures on each side of the head. Snodgrass (1938)

has expressed contrary views and is of the opinion that the lora are part of the

hypopharynx.

The labrum of P. kuighti is distinct, also the three apical segments of a short

labium. The proximal segment of the labium is not preserved, and the wide

structure underlying this segment consists presumably of the entosternal arms otf

the prothorax,

REFERENCES

CARPENTER, I. M. 1932 American Journ. Sci., 24, 1

Carpenter, F. M. 1939) Proc. American Acad. Arts and Sci., 73, No. 3, 29

Iivans, J. W. 1938 Papers Roy. Soc. Tas., 1

SxopeGrass, RL E. 1938 Proc. Ent. Soc., Washington, 40, (8), 228

TVittyArp, R. J. 1926 Proc. Linn, Soc, N.S.W., 51, (2), |

AUSTRALIAN SPECIES OF LISTROPHORIDAE CANEST (ACARINA)

WITH NOTES ON THE NEW GENERA

By H. WOMERSLEY, F.R.E.S., A.L.S., South Australian Museum

Summary

No records of this family of Acarina from Australia appear to have been published since the original

description of the following two genera and species:

AUSTRALIAN SPECIES OF LISTROPHORIDAE CANEST (ACARINA)

WITH NOTES ON THE NEW GENERA

By H. Womerscey, F.R.E.S., A.L.S., South Australian Museum

No records of this family of Acarina from Australia appear to have been

published since the original description of the following two genera and species:

1 Chirodiscus anplexans Trt. and Neum, 1890 (Bull. Sci. Fr. Belg., 22, 392,

pl. 21) from Podargus strigoides (Tawuy-shouldered Frog-mouth or

Mopoke) from South Australia.

2 Campviochirus chelopus Trt. 1893 (C-R Soc. Biol. Paris, 45, 699) from

Pseudocheirus convoluta Oken 1816 = cookii Desm. 1818 (Ringtail

Possum) from Tasmania.

Both these records are repeated in Canestrini and Kramer’s monograph on

the “Demodicidae and Sarcoptidae” in “Das Tierreich,” Lig. 7, 27 and 28, 1899,

but the frst is omitted from Rainbow’s “Synopsis of Australian Acarina (Rec.

Austr. Mus. 6, (3), 1906). Canestrini and Kramer (Joc. cift., 29) regard the

occurrence of C. amplerans on a bird (Podargus strigoides) as accidental and

suggest that its true host was most probably a species of marsupial.

Recently C. Gunther (Proc. Linn, Soc. N.S.W., 67 (3 and 4), 109, 1942), in

erecting a new genus Neolabidocarpus for his species (Labidocarpus buloloensis

Gunther 1940 (ibid 65, (3 and 4), 353) has subdivided the family into a number

of well-defined subfamilies and published a key to the subfamilies and genera

based upon that of Ewing (Manual of External Parasites, 1929).

Unfortunately, several errors and omissions have crept into his paper which

need to be corrected.

In the first place, in his key, in caption 3, the words “Body depressed” have

been transposed with “Body compressed” in the next line. As given by Ewing

1929, however, these respective statements are in their correct place and the error

in Gunther’s key is probably one of transcription,

In this table of generic distribution and hosts, he is in error in giving the

locality of Listrophoroides Hirst as Orange Free State, West Africa; that given

by Hirst was Accra, Gold Coast, No reference is made to Ferris’ record of a

species attributed to Listrophoroides from the Marquesas (Marquesan lnsects,

(1), Bull. 98, B. P. Bishop Museum, 1932). nor does Gunther seem to have been

aware of a species, also attributed to the same genus, described by Radford 1939

(Parasitology, 31) from Cape Town. As will be shown later, however, the first

of these species does not belong to this genus.

Ewing (1929) synonymises IJirst’s Chirodiscoides 1917 with Cainpylochirus

Trt. 1893, and although he is possibly correct in this, Troussart’s original work

is not available to me and Hirst. unfortunately, does not describe the dorsal

surface and has only figured (in 1922) the ventral surface of the male of

Chirodiscoides caviae from guinea pigs.

Listrophoroides acthiopicus Hirst 1923 is, so far, only known from the male,

and here again in his original description he neither mentions nor figures the

dorsal surface, so that it is not possible without reference to the type slide to say

whether it has any dorsal scuta or not. Radford also (1939), in deseribing

Listrophoroides bathyergians from a male from Cape Town ignores, both by

description and figures, the dorsal surface, while his figures of the ventral surface

of both sexes leave much to the imagination.

Trand Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 67, (1), 30 July 1943

SI]

Ferris, however, in his paper gives some excellent detailed figures of his

species Listrophoroides expansus showing both dorsal and ventral aspects.

was rather doubtful about the placing of his species inj the genus, and it certainly

does require a new genus, although one cannot point at present to the differences

of the dorsal surface between this and Listrephoroides Hirst.

KEY TO THE SUBFAMILIES AND GENERA OF LLISTROPHORIDAE

I.egs I and II modified as claspers.

Legs LiL and IV modified as claspers. Myocoptinae Gunth, 1942

Maxillae modified as claspers. Listrophorinae Gunth, 1942

Legs T and IT with caruncles, not highly modified. Sometimes with accessory claspers.

ltopomelinae Gunth. 1942

Legs I and [I] without caruncles, highly modified. Without accessory claspers.

Labidocarpinae Gunth, 1942

Body compressed. Sternal region between coxac IL and JIT with clam-like accessory

claspers. Leg of @ very large. Gen, -ltopomelis Trt. 1918

Body depressed. Sternal region without claspers.

All coxag widely separated medially, Palpi 2-segmented. Three dorsal scuta.

Gen. Marquesania nov. for Listrephoroides Ferris 1932 nee Hirst 1923

Coxae | and IL touching medially, large, inner areas striated, Lil and IV widely

separated.

Alt coxae touching in medial line, without striations. Front lc@s not unduly flattened

and ineurved or hook-like. Leg [IV shorter in g@ than 9, and thicker. Dorsally

with a single anterior sculum., Palpi 2-scgmented. Gen, lustrochirus nov.

Lees | and Il strongly flattened and incurved hook-like on apical segments; tarsus LV

also incurved and hook-like. Dorsal scuta? Gen. Camprylociirus Trt. 1893

= Chirediscoides Hirst 1917

Legs T and TI net flattened or markedly incurved; tarsus IV normal. Coxae IL with

stout blunt inner tooth. Dorsal scuta’ Gen. Listrophoroides Hirst 1923

nec Ferris 1932

Body depressed.

Body compressed.

Lees Land LL broadened distally into a truncate shovel-like shape,

Gen, Schisocarpus Trt. 1896

= Haptesoma Kramer 1896

Legs | and JE about same width for most of their length, i-segmented, flattened,

hollowed internally, curved and pointed distally, Legs TTT and TV normal with

caruncle, Gen, Chirodiscus Trt. and Neum. 1890

Legs III and [V short and stumpy, without caruncles, 3-S-segmented almost vestigial.

One anterior dorsal seutium. Gen. Labidocarpus Trt. 1895

= Alabidecarpus Ewing1929

Legs IIL and LV long, slender with caruncles, 3-seemented, doubled forward beneath

abdomen. One anterier dorsal scutum, Gen, Neolabidecurpus Gunth, 1942

Lees [1] and IV similar in both sexes and ending in a transverse disc, with 2 stout

setae on d stal segments. Gen. Trichoeens Canestri 1899

= Trichobius Can, 1897 pre. occ.

Legs JIT and IV dissimilar in two sexes, not as above. No dorsal scuta. Palpi

3-seemented, apparently. Gen. Afyocoptes Clap. 1869

Coxae III] separated. One anterior dorsal scutum. Gen. Listrephorius Pagenst 1861

Coxae III dilated and fused together. Gen. Luryehtveides nn, for

Eurysonus Trt. 1918 pre. occ.

ae |

nymph,

Koch:

}

THES CLEEELLELY

]

Vis

Vavocoptes

dorsal; Fy nymph, ver

Subfamily MYOCOPTINAE Gunther 1942

Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 67, (304), 109,

Genus Myocorrrs Claparede 1869

Z. Wiss. Zool., 18, 532.

MYOCOPTES MuUSCULINUS C. L. Koch 1844

Sarcoptes musculinus C. L. Koch 1844, C.M.A,, fase. 5, fig. 13.

Mvyocoptes musculinus Can, and Kr. 1899, Das Tierrcich, Lig. 7, 25.

(Trig. 1, A-H)

Numerous specimens of this European species were found on laboratory

white mice by Mr. H. ]. Carter of the MacMaster I .aboratory, Sydney. The mice

were of a strain introduced from England, and the effect of the mites was to pro-

duce a type of mange for which Mr. Carter proposes the name of “Myocoptic

Mange.”

As far as T have been able to ascertain the adult stages only have been

described or figured. In the material sent to me for study the larval and nymphal

stages are represented, and the opportunity is taken to describe and figure the

three stages in detail.

Description—Adult @ (fig. 1, A, B). Length 320», width 160%, Dorsally

with a pair of short setae on capitulum, on shoulders with a very long seta aud

anterior of this a short seta; on dorsum with 5 rows of 2 setae, the anterior row

long and with a pair of short, fine sctae inside; the other four pairs of setae

moderately long. Ventrally with one fairly long seta on coxa T and III, a pair of

about the same length between coxae II and IV, a short median pair between

coxae 1V, and also just anterior of anus; and a very long pair of setae subapically.

The dorsal cuticle is transversly striated in the posterior fourth, anterior of which

the striations become broken and roughly scaliform. Ventrally the cuticle is trans-

versely striated but entirely lacks the fine points of the nymphs and larvae.

Adult ¢ (fig. 1, C, D). Length 210», width 155 p, rather more ovate than

in @. Dorsal and ventral setac much as in @, but the cuticle is only coarsely

marked with striations. Ventrally with the setae also as in % ; posteriorly with

a pair of anal discs and two pairs of long extra setac. Leg IV stout and thick and

differing from III, which is similar to leg IIT and IV of 2 ; penis bent and

2-pronged; no ventral striations.

Nymph, ¢@ (fig. 1, E, F). Length 255 », width 160». Dorsal and ventral

chaetotaxy as in adult ?. Dorsum longitudinally striated laterally and trans-

versely so on posterior fourth, medially with broken transverse lines. Ventrally

longitudinally striated narrowly laterally, and in between with transverse lines

with numerous fine points.

Larva (fig. 1, G, 11). Length 185 2, width 130 », broadly oval, the third pair

of legs modified for grasping hair. Dorsally the cuticle is longitudinally striated

for a narrow width all round, and medially with broken curved transverse lines.

Ventrally with lateral longitudinal and medial transverse lines, both with fine

points, as figured, Leg IV is indicated by a slight tubercle (cf. fig. 1. H}.

Chactotaxy simpler than in nymph.

Subfamily ATOPOMELINAE Gunther 1942

Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 67, (3 and 4), 109.

Genus Marquesania tov.

Ferris, 1932, in describing his species Listrophoroides expansus from the

Marquesas, was somewhat doubtful about the generic placing and had in mind

rpesuaa Pty fyenuoa 6 ce fyesuop & oy yond “A CSMdo.[) usindare onivsotsayy Bt]

the possibility of a new genus being required. There are many points of difference

hetween his species and the genotype of Listrophoroides (aethiopicus Hirst 1923),

and I propose the above new genus with Listrophoreides expansus Ferris as

genotype. It is to be separated from Listrophoroides Tlirst and the other genera

of the subfamily as given in the key. ;

MARQUESANIA EXPANSA (Ferris 1932)

= Listrophoroides expansus Ferris 1932, 3. P. Bishop Museum, Bull, 98.

The typical form of this species is discussed under the new variety queens-

landica, It has been admirably figured and described by Ferris.

Loc, and Hosts—Three specimens, conforming entirely with the description

and figures, were collected trom the debris of a jar containing bats in the South

Australian Museum collections, numbered M4443-53, 3576, 501 and 500. No

locality is given and even the host is doubtful. Ferris’ material was from rats,

and it is quite possible that the spirit in which the bats were preserved may at some

time have been poured off specimens of rats.

var. queenslandica nov.

(Fig. 2, A-D)

Deseription—@. Length 4304, width 170», elongate, flattened dorsally,

with three lightly chitiised finely pitted scuta (cf. fig. 2A), second and third

scuta with irregular transverse lines. VPalpi 2-segmented, short and stout. Front

legs modified for grasping hair; leg 1 with lateral sclerotisations, the outer sclerite

on femur somewhat as in MM. erpansa f.p., but apparently not as pronounced and

not free; leg JT with the terminal segment ending in two lateral anchor-like hooks:

legs IIT and LV long, cylindrical and fairly slender; all legs with small caruncles.

and without claws. Eyes absent. Dorsal setae small and few, as in fig. 2A.

Veutrally the coxae are in two groups. large and finely pitted, not striated as given

for coxae [I and Ll of erpansa; a pair of small setae between coxae |, a seta on

each of coxae II, three setae on coxae I1I, and a pair between coxae LV, a median

pair anterior of anus. Genitalia between coxae III.

6. Length 345 », width 140. Generally as in 2 but legs IIE and IV much

stouter and the subbasal seta on tarsi I], HJ] and LV longer and stronger and

recurved, Subapically on venter are six clavate processes from which arise fine

setae, the median one of cach three being the longest. Apex of abdomen slightly

incised. Genitalia between coxae |] and coxae IV (cf. fig. 2 C).

Loc. and Host--Many specimens of both sexes fron rats, Queensland ;

Cowan Cowan, September 1938, on Raifus youngi, (Smith); Cairns, 1939, on

rat (No, 6) (CW. G. Heaslip).

Remarks—Vhis form, which at the present time T am not relegating to more

than a variety of M. evpansa Ferris from the Marquesas and ? Australia, differs

mainly in the lack of striations on coxae | and IT and the apparent absence of a

pronounced tooth on the femur of leg I.

Genus Austrochirus nov.

Elongate, dorsally compressed, with only an anterior chiunised seutum.

Legs I and Tf curved inwards and modified tor grasping hair, Coxae in two

groups, epimera meeting in mid-linc in all pairs. Teg 1V of é very much stouter

than in @. Caruncles present on all tarsi. Genotype Austrochirus queens-

landicus n. sp.

+ [RTUGA

(a)

€

‘d

:pesiep

:peuos

yo AL BY ES Jo | say “of

‘op fyesdop & ‘yoo sacds‘jo-S snorpueysuaanb snuyoorsny ¢ sly

Austrochirus queenslandicus n. sp.

(Fig. 3, A-G)

Descripltion—@. Length 5154, width 2002; elongate, slightly wider in

anterior half, Palpi 2- (? 3-) segmented (ef. fig. 3G). Legs I and LI fairly short,

apical segments strongly sclerotised laterally to form rounded knobs for grasp-

ing hair, metatarsus (7) with long recurved seta; legs IT] and IV somewhat

longer, segments cylindrical, tarsi apically rather tapering, Coxae large, touching

inedially and partially pitted, not striated. Genjtalia between coxae TV. Dorsuni

anteriorly with a chitinised pitted scutum occupying the whole width of animal

and extending posteriorly to end of coxae II, with two pairs of fine setae; rest of

dorsum coarsely transversely striated. Ventrally as in fig. 3B, a pair of sctae on

coxae I and IIT, a pair between coxae [I and II and between coxae 1V: on the

renter the dorsal striations become scale-like. Apex of abdomen slightly incised

and with two long setae and a pair of small ones.

8. Asin @ but a little smaller, length 480 », width 1704. The transverse

dorsal striations end at about the level of coxae IIL, thereafter they are longi-

tudinal, Ventrally there are two pairs of setae on coxae III. Genitalia between

coxae LV. Leg IV is very much stouter than in the female (fig. 3D). A pair of

small anal discs on each side of the anal opening.

Loc. and Hests—A number of specimens from a possum. Brisbane,

Queensland, 1938 (Smith).

Remarks—Vhat this species will not fit into any known genus of Listro-

phoridae and requires a new one will be evident from the key to subfamilies and

genera.

Subfamily LABIDOCARPINAE Gunther 1942

Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 67, (3 and 4), 109, 1943,

Genus Larpinocarrus Trt, 1895

Sull. Soc. ent. France, 38, 1895, Type L. rollinati Trt. 1895).

= Alaubidocarpus Ewing 1929, 188. (Type L. megalonya Trt. 1895).

Labidocarpus recurvus n. sp.

(Fig. 4, A-C)

Description—@,. Laterally compressed. Length 620, depth 205. With

an anterior chitinised scutum, Abdomen posterior of scutum strongly transversely

striated. Legs | and IT short and stumpy, modified for grasping hair, segmenta-

tion indistinct, thickened and flattened ; legs IIL and 1V long, 5-segmented, tarsus

provided with a long curved claw, and two spurs on ILI, one spur on IV, tibia

with a long apical recurved seta. Apically on the abdomen with a pair of long and

a pair of short setae; on the shoulders between coxae II and III a long seta,

Loc. and Hosts—A single specimen from Bathurst, New South Wales,

15 March 1934 (A. S. Allman), on the hair of a bat.

Remarks—This species would come into Ewing’s genus Alabidocarpus as

differentiated by the presence of a pair of spurs on the tarsus of leg ITI, but this

separation does not seem to be justified as suggested by Gunther, 1942, It comes

nearest to L. nasicolus Lawrence 1938 from Natal, but differs in that the spurs

of tarsus IT are only one-fifth the length of claw instead of nearly one-half, Like

nasicolus it is intermediate in size between megalonyx Trt. and ininor Trt. from

the European horse-shoe bat. Gunther, in his key (1942), also separates

Neolabidocarpus from Labidocarpus in that it has five- and not three-segmented

legs LIT and IV. In both nasicolis and the above new species are these legs.

Fig. 4 Labidocarpus recurvus sp.n.: A, lateral view ot @ |

B, tarsus IV; C. tarsus Hf.

although not slender and not provided with caruncles as in Ncolabidocarpus, with

five very distinct segments. In this respect they differ from the European species

which, as figured by earlier workers, have only 3-segmented legs LI and IV.

Subfamily LISTROPHORINAE Gunther 1942

Proc. Linn, Soc. N.S.W., 67, (3 and 4), 109, 1942.

Genus ListropHorus Pagenstecher 1861

Z. Wiss. Zool., 11, 105, 156, 1861. (Genotype L. gibbus Pgst., 1861.)

Listropmorus Ginnus Pagenstecher 1861

loc, ert., 156, pl. 17. (Fig. 5, A-D)

Descriplion—@. Broadly oval, length 430 », width 275 ». Dorsum with one

anterior scutum (fig. 5A), behind which it is strongly transversely striate, apex

more or less rounded, apparently devoid of setae. Gnathosoma broadly truncate.

Legs short, not specially modified, tarsi all with caruncles, Ventrally striated as

in323. Coxae non-striate.

é. Rather narrower than in @, the dorsal scutum somewhat longer.

Posteriorly produced in a more or less parallel-sided and apically bifurcate process

(ef. fig. 3 C, D), with a pair of anal dises. Genitalia between coxae II] and IV.

|.egs relatively longer and somewhat stouter than in @. All tarsi with caruucles ;

tibiae 11 with a long apical seta. [Length 500, width 205 p.

Vig. 5) Listrophorus gibbus Pgst.: A, 9 dorsal: B, 9 ventral; C, g dorsal; D, ¢ ventral.

Loc, and Hosi-—-TVhis species occurs in the fur of rabbits and is undoubtedly

introduced from Europe. I have specimens as follows:—Australia: on rabbits,

near Melbourne, Vict., Nov. 1941 (W. M. M.). New Zealand: on Angora rab-

bits, Ashburton, 1935 (1.. M.).

Genus Eurychiroides nom. nov.

This name is proposed for Eurysonus Trt. 1918 (Bull. Soc, Zool.. Fr., 42.

155), which is preoecupted by Eurysonns Attems, 1900 (Deusksskr. Akad. Wiss..

Wien. 68, 265), for a Myriapod.

SOME ASCARID NEMATODES FROM AUSTRALIAN MARINE FISH

By T. HARVEY JOHNSTON and PATRICIA M. MAWSON, University of Adelaide

Summary

LIST OF HOSTS AND PARASITES

MUSTELUS ANTARTICUS Gunth. - Port Phillip, Vict.: Capsularia marina (Linn).

larva : Acanthocheilus quadridentatus Molin.

Trans. Roy.

SOME ASCARID NEMATODES FROM AUSTRALIAN MARINE FISH

By T. Harvey Jounsron and Parricra M. Mawson, University of Adelaide

| Read 8 April 1943]

List or Hosts AND PARASITES

Musreius anvrarcticus Gunth.—Port Phillip. Viet.: Capsularia marina (Linn. },

larva; Acanthocheilus quadridentatus Molin.

Tiryrsires AruN Euphr.—Port Jackson and Clarence River, NuS.W.; Derwent

River, Tasm.; Apollo Bay, Viet.; Port Willunga, S. Aust.; Fremantle.

W. Aust.: Capsilaria marina (Linn.), larva,

PLATYCEPHALUS MACRODON Ogilby — Coast of N.S.W.: Capsularia marina

(Linn.), larva; Contracaccum (Lhynnascaris) legendret Dollfus, larva.

SCIAENA ANTARCTICA Castl—Port Willunga, S. Aust., and coast of N.SAW.:

Capsitlaria marina (Linn.), larva.

JSTIOMPAX AUSTRALIS Whitley—Port Phillip, Viet.: Capsudaria imerma (Linn.),

larva.

MipHras EsTARA Phillips—Cronulla, N.S.W.: Contracaecuim (Thynnascaris)

meurcun (Rud.).

Tuunnus MaAccoyvi Castl—Off Green Cape, N.S.W., and Cape Everard, Viet.:

Contracaecuin (Thyunascaris) legendrei Dollfus. Port Willunga, S. Aust. :

Capsularia marina (1inn.), larva.

CorYPILAENA Hppriaus Linn.—Jervis Bav, N.S.W.: Cepsularia inarina (Linn. ),

larva.

“PENEICHTITYS Porosus C. & Vi—St. Vincent Gulf, S. Aust.: Contracaecun

(Thyunascaris) legendre? Dollfus, larva,

We acknowledge gratefully the receipt of material from Professor J. 3B.

Cleland, University of Adelaide; Associate Professor O. W. Ticgs, University

of Melbourne; Dr. BD. Serventy, ot the Fisheries Division, C.S.LR.; 3 on

Roughley, fisheries Branch, Chief Seeretary’s Department, Sydney; and R. Ly:

Melbourne (per National Museum, Melbourne). Unless otherwise stated, th

parasites were collected by the senior author. The preseut investigation was

assisted through the Commonwealth Research Grant to the University of Adclaide.

mM,

NpREL Dollfus

CONTRACAECUM ( THYNNASC ARIS } LF

(lig. 1)

One adult male and one adult female were taken, one from each of two speci-

wens Of Thimnes maccoyt collected by Dr. Serventy in October and November

1919 while on the C.S.T.R. Fisheries Research Ship, “Warreen,” im waters between

Merimbula and Cape Everard. lumature specimens of the same species fave been

taken irom the tiger flathead. Platycephalus imacrodon, from the coast of New

South Wales and from Cpeneichthys porosus from St. Vincent Gulf

The male is 26 mm. and the female 35 mm. in length. “Uhe parts of the body

agree with the description given by Dollfus (1933; 1935), with the exception of

the male tail, on which we are unable to recognise as many postanal papillae as

shown in his figure.

The young worms from Plalycephalus and Upeneichifiys have the charac-

teristic lips and ratios of parts of the alimentary canal as in the adult. but the

reproductive organs are not developed.

Soc. S. Aust... 67, €1). 30 July 1943

CONTRACAECUM (7TILYNNASCARIS) INCURVUM (Rud.)

(Fig. 2)

Several males and females were taken from Niphias estara at Cronulla, New

South Wales. They agree closely with the description of C. (T.) fneurcian given

by Dollfus. In our male specimens there appear to be a pair of adanal and four

pairs of postanal papillae. Dollfus stated that he was unable to see the exact

number in his material. The species was originally recorded (Johnston 1910 bh,

310) as from Niphias gladius, but Whitley (1934) now regards the Australian

spearfish as X. estara Philbps.

Fie, 1, Contracaecuim (Lhyunasearis) teyendrei, male tail; fg. 2, C. (7

(T.) tneurvitn,

male tail: fig. 3, -Icanthecheiius quadridendaius, male tail Fig. 40—Cupsularia

marina larvae from Thorstics atun: fig. 4, head: fig, 5, oesophageal region: fig. 6,

tail. Vig. 7, Capswlaria marina, cesophageal region of young worm from Koyia

hremiceps. Fig. 1 and 4 to same seale; 2 and 6; 5 and 7.

(

ACANTHOCTIFILUS OQUADRIDENTATUS Molin

(Fig. 3)

A male, a female, and an immature worm were taken from JAYustelus

antarcleus From Port Phillip, and were forwarded to us by Professor Ticgs.

A description ot the genus <lcanthocheilits and the species, 4. guadridentatus.

has been given by Wiilker (1930a; 1930b), Since the tail of his only male

specimen was damaged, we are able to emeud his account in this particular, There

are apparently at least nine pairs of preanal and three pairs of postanal papillae.

The spicules of our 43 mm. long male are 1-1 mum, in length, but their tips are not

distinct as they remain inside the worm,

A young specimen, obviously belonging to the same species, was coiled in a

flat spiral, It is 21 mm. long, and its oesophagus and lips are sinular to those of

the adult.

The species had previously been recorded from the southern hemisphere by

Baylis (1929), who gave an account of a young female from Mustelus vulgaris

from South Africa.

CapsuLaria Zeder 1800

lfor reasons indicated later in this paper, we consider the following genera

to be synonyms of Capsularia; Stomachus Goeze 1800, Iilocapsularia Deslong-

champs 1824, Anisakis Duj. 1845, Peritrachelius Dies. 1851, and Conocephalis

Dies. 1861. The characters are those given by Yorke and Maplestone (1926) for

Anisakis, to which we may add—larvae spirally rolled and enclosed in rather flat

disc-like capsules, present chiefly in the mesentery and subperitoneal tissues of

marine fish. ‘The subfamily term Anisakinae will require to be altered to Capsu-

lariinac.

CAPSULARIA MARINA ([.inn.)

(Fig. 4-7)

This widely distributed larval form has been identified by us from: (1) The

barracouta, Thyrs sites atun, from Port Willunga, South Austr alia; Fremantle West-

ern Australia (coll. Professor Cleland) ; Apollo Bay, Victoria ; Port Jackson and

Clarence River, New South Wales; and Derwent River, Tasmania. (2) The

tiger flathead, Platyeephalus macrodon, from New South Wales (coll. T. C.

Roughley, T. H. Johnston). (3) The mulloway, jewfish or butterfish, Sciaena

antarctica, Port Willunga, South Australia. (4) The black marlin, Istiompar

australis, from Mentone, Port Phillip, Victoria (coll. R. Lynn), (5) The blue-

fin tunny, Thunnus macceyi, from Port Willunga. (6) Coryphacna hippuris,

from Jervis Bay, New South Wales (Prof. Cleland). (7) The “gummy” shark,

Mustelus antarcticus, Port Phillip (Prof. Tiegs). Stead’s larval Ascaris from

the viscera of Sciuena antarctica {rom New South Wales (1914, 20) was

C. marina,

The following account is based on material from the barracouta. The parasite

was identified by Dr, Sweet (1909, 516-522) as Ascaris marina, her species com-

ing from the same host species from Port Phillip, Victoria. Soon afterwards it

was recorded under the same name by Johnston (1910, 711-712) who reported

that masses of these spirally-coiled larvae were to be found along the whole of the

inesentery of these fish (Sydney, Clarence River, Tasmania, Western Australia).

Linstow (1906, 1-3) had previously described as Ascaris sphyranurae young

worms from the body cavity of Splyranura barracuda from Tasmania, sent by

Jeffrey Bell, apparently from the British Museum. There has obviously been a

mistake in the name of the host, as there is no fish genus Sphyranira but there is

a genus of heterocotylean trematodes of that name. The true barracuda, a West

Lidia fish, is Sphyraena barracuda, and its ally in southern Australian waters 15

the snook, Sphyraena novachollandiac, Linstow’s name is probably to be regarded

as a lapsus for spiyraenae. Baylis (1916, 369) used the term 4. sphyraenac,

stating that he had examined worms from Sphyracna sp., the parasite being

regarded as belonging to A. cupsularia, a group name which, as we will indicate

later, includes the barracouta worms. As we cannot fiud any other references to

the specific name sphyraenac associated with a nematode, it seems probable that

Baylis examined material (? Linstow’s) from Thyrsites,

The term barracouta applied to our fish, Thursites atun, is due to confusion

with the American fish but, though there is some similarity of form, they belong

to different families. Our barracouta occurs also in South African waters where,

according to Waite (1923, 109), it is termed snoek. Gudger (1918, 81), in his

paper on the West Indian barracuda, referred to Linstow’s record of Ascaris from

Sphyranura barracuda from Tasmania, and suggested that the generic name was

probably a mis-spelling of Sphyracna,

Lord and Scott (1924) do not list the snook, Sphyracna novachollandiuc, as

occurring in Tasmania, “Chere is thus little doubt that Linstow’s material (which

agrees with our own) came from Thyrsifes atun, [ainstow’s record was included

by Miss Young (1939, 77, 113) im her catalogue of Australian helminth parasites.

Linstow (1908, 21) also described Ascaris thyrsitis, a larval form from

Thyrsites atun off South-west Africa. The account is not available to us but the

parasite very probably belongs to the same species as the Australian worm, Baylis

(1929, 546) grouped larval worms from J. afun from Tristan da Cunha, as well

as from other fish from the South Atlantic, under the heading “Perrocaecum or

Anisakis,” but he reported that they had a ventriculus (without an appendix) and

that an intestinal caecum was absent. These remarks indicate that the larvae

helonged to Auisakis, Le. to Capsuluria, as also did the larva (from Sebastes

norvegicus) which the figured in 1916 (pl. xiv, fig. 1) as that of Porrecaecuin, to

which his fig. 2 and 3 (from Sciaena) do belong, His figures (pl. xvi, fig. 1-2)

of worms from Clipea alosa resemble ours so closely that we refer them to our

species.

We recorded (1943) the parasite from the barracouta in southern New

Zealand waters and identified it as the larval stage of Anisakis simpler. The

mode of occurrence of the encapsuled worms is referred to by Sweet (1909, 517).

Each capsule 1s 3-5 mm. in diameter and encloses the spirally rolled worm whose

anterior end is less closely coiled than the remainder. The worms are active when

released from the capsules. In one specimen the capsules formed a compact mass

about 20 nim. in diameter and over 50 mm, long, surrounding the narrowed

intestine of the fish.

Sweet’s measurements of three individual larvae, 25, 27 and 30 mm. long

respectively, indicate some degree of variability in the dimensions of the various

structures. The following are ovr measurements in millimetres of four

specimens :

(1) (2) (3) (4)

Tength s = - - 18 25 27 28

Breadth - - - - -28 “48 “48 “Ad

Oesoph. (muscular) - - 1-76 2:24 2-24 1-84

Ventriculus - - - “6 “8 88 76

Oesoph.: ventriculus - - 1:3 1:2:7 1:2+7 1:2-4

Head to nerve-ring -

7 +22 -36 “48 -44

Tail - ~ - - - oe +12 —- —

The characters of the head and tail ends are indicated in our figures. The

lips are low and broad, the larval tooth prominent, and the head end narrower

than the posterior.

Dr. Sweet has misinterpreted the ventriculus as an intestinal caecum, the

lengths given for it by her agreeing with those mentioned by us. ‘he ventricults

is nearly twice as wide as the muscular oesophagus and is slightly broader than

that of the suecceding portion of the intestine which it enters obliquely. The

posterior part of the ventriculus projects back further ventrally than it does on

its dorsal side and in side view one may get the impression of a developing intes-

tinal caecum. ‘The difference in colour renders the ventriculus a conspicuous

organ. The rather broadly rounded tail region, bearing a short, very narrow tip,

is characteristic. Lingtow’s measurements for his lscaris sphyranurac agree

sufficiently with those given by Sweet and ourselves,

Cleland’s reference (1914, 131) to Ascaris sp. from Corvphacna hippurius

from Jervis Bay, New South Wales, was based on the identification by one of

us tT. H. J.) of the parasites as Immature nematodes resembling Ascaris marina.

It ean now he placed under Capsularia marina,

On the basis of the food relationship between the barracouta and dolphins,

as well as of the similarity in appearance between the larvae from the former and

the common ascarid, 4nisakis simpler, of dolphins, we considered that the larva

was the young stage of the latter worm and accordingly identified it as’A. simplex

in a recent paper (1943), at the same time placing Ascaris filholi Chatin and

4. nelsonis Chatin (both based on similar larval worms from New Zealand or

Campbell Island) under it as synonyms,

Since that paper went to press we have re-examined our celaccan nematodes

and haye searched literature more extensively, The smallest worm amongst our

material from the pigmy sperm whale, Kogia breviceps, was 28 mmm. long, *64 mim,

in maximum breadth, with a tail +12 mm. long, a muscular oesophagus 2-4 mm.

and 2 vettriculus *S mm. in length. The specimen agreed with the larvae from

Thoyrsiles in all dimensions except breadth which had evidently increased after the

worm had reached a suitable host. There is thus no doubt that “uscaris capsu-

luria” larvae are the young stages of the dolphin parasite.

Baslis (1929, 546) reported that larvae found in various fish, including

Thyrsites atu, from the South Atlantic possessed a ventriculus, but had no

caeetin and that similar larvae were found in the stomach of the dolphin, Stene

rosiratus, near Cape Verde, but he did not suggest any relationship between the

larvae and Anisakis simpler. It is of interest to note that Linstow (1880, 45)

identified as A. cupsilaria, a larval form, 40 mm, ieng, with a boring tooth and

undergoing ecdysis. found in the stomach of the porpoise, Phocacna communis.

He stated that, sinee the larva was shedding its cuticle, presumably because of the

presenee vf conditions favourable for further development, it was very probable

that of, capsiaria was the larval stage of A, simpler, but he had no opportunity

to campare various larval measurements and characters with those of the latter.

Yamaguti (1935, 338) gave an account of a larval form occurring in

numerous species of Japanese fish and identified it as daisakis salaris (Gmelin),

listing etnisakis sintpler (Rud) and Cupsmlaria salaris as synonyms. His figure

af the anterior end of the larva agrees with that of our own material, Yamaguti.

as far as we are aware, is the only investigator who definitely associated the

“Cupsidaria’ twpe of larva with the parasite of dolphins.

cnisakis sanplex (a term which we will use for the present) is now known

te oecur very widely as a parasite of the stomach of ectaceans, especially

adentocetes. Its presence in the northern hemisphere has been referred to by

many anthors since Rudolphi named it dycaris simpler in 1804 and deseribed it in

1809, his material coming frem Phocaene. There have been several records of

the adult stage in the southeru hemisphere. Krefft (1873, 212) recorded

eiscuris sp. from Delphinus forsteri from New South Wales. and Cobbold (1879.

426: 1886, 177) suggested that the parasite was 4scaris sintpler. We re-examined

ikreiit’s specimen and reported it to be elaisekis simpler (1941, 433). Cobbold

(1886, 177) identified ihe species from material collected by Darwin trom a

porpoise off Cluloc Island. Chili, and Monticelit (1889, 69) reported it Trom a

dolphin from Patagonia.

Bavlis (1929, 543) recorded A. inpica from Lagenorhynchits off South-west

Africa. and also published an account of 4. catodontis trom a sperm whale trom

Saldhana Bay, South Africa. The latter species appears to us to differ from

al. simplex only in the number ef papillae on the male tail, but Baylis stated that

lie was able to obtain only a lateral view, observing a single pair of papillae, We

consider it probable that 4. catodontis is a synonym of A. siupley.

We described Anisakis Rogiae from the pigmy sperm whale, Kogia breviceps,

from Spencer Gulf, South Australia, and from Moreton Bay, Queensland (John-

ston and Mawson 1939, 263), but the detailed and emended account of 4. simplex

published by Lyster (1940) permitted us to synonymise A. kogiae (incorrectly

indicated by Nicoll 1941, 96, as A. kogianus) with A, simplex which we also

recorded from Lagenorhynchus obscurus from Cook Strait, New Zealand (John-

ston and Mawson 1942, 183).

All records of “nisakis simplex have been based on cetacean material, with

the exception of that by Linstow (1888) who reported Ascaris simplex [rom a

scal from Kerguelen, Baylis (1916, 365) re-examined the Challenger speciniens

and identified them as belonging to Porrocaecum decipiens, a widely distributed

parasite of seals, Stossich (1896), as well as Stiles and Llassall (1899), pub-

lished long host lists for the adult stage, and the latter two authors also assembled

in their Index Catalogue (1920) all the references to literature. Baylis (1932)

brought the list up to date. Baylis (1936) has omitted reference to the presence

af the parasite in Indian waters, though Dujardin (1945) recorded it as having

been taken from a dolphin near the Maldive Archipelago. Synonyms of Aiisakis

simpler are Ascaris dussuntieri Beneden 1870; A. angulivalois Creplin 1851;

oh. kitkenthalit Cobb 1888; Conocephalus (ypicus Dies. 1861; Peritrachelius typicus

( Dies.) Jagersk. 1894; and probably Anisakis catodontis Baylis 1929.

Dujardin (1845, 150-1) subdivided Ascaris (after separating off Heterakis)

into four subgenera, dscaris, Ascaridia, Anisakis and Polydelphis. The first had,

amongst other features, two equal spicules and the oesophageal region with or

without a ventricle and “pyloric appendages”; and Dujardin showed that it was

possible to subdivide it on the basis of these differences in the digestive tract.

these differences are the main characters which are now used to distinguish

genera of the Anisakinae. The subgenus Anisakis with the two species, Ascaris

distens Rud, from moukeys and A, simples from dolphins, was erected to include

species whose males had two unequal spicules (as the name implies), Dujardin

gave an aceount (p. 220) of A. distens based on Rudolph’s description and of

ef, siinpley (p, 220-221) based on material collected by Dussumier west of the

Maldive Archipelago. The oesophagus of .4. shuplex was stated to be followed

hy a slender curved ventricle, while that of 4. distans, according to Rudolphi, was

succeeded by a spherical ventriculus. Though 4. distans has page priority,

-l, sinpler was selected subsequently as the type of 4iisakis, 4. distuns was

iransferred by Railliet and lfenry to Subudura,

Dicsing (1851) did not utilise Dujardin’s subgenera of Ascaris but he erected

(1851, 209) Peritrachelins (type P. insignis from the Amazon dolphin), which is

now regarded as a synonym of Anisakis, Ile also erected Conocephalus (1861),

with C. éprevs from a dolphin as type, and this too is synonyms with uisakis,

The barracouta worms belong to the group of larval parasites to which the

term Ascaris capsularia Rud. has been applied by various authors, more than one

species having been included. Baylis (1916; 1919, 513) believed the true

l. capsularia to be the larva of Porrocaecum decipiens, a widely distributed para-

site of seals, but we have pointed out that he included larval Anisakis as well.

Linstow (1884, 127) suggested that A. capsularia was the larva of Ascaris

(he., Contracarcuin) ineurva, Wulker (1939b, 14) recorded that larvae of

slnacanthocheilus were found coiled on the viscera aud under the peritoneum of

marine teleosts, especially Gadidae, and were often referred to under the group

names, Ascaris capsularia and Filaria pisciuim, ‘Vhis larva ditfers from that of

elnisakis manly in the modification of che dorsal portion of the oesophagus. Kahl

(1938, 513) published further information regarding the larva of Anacanthochei-

fus rotundatus and its eneystment, the parasite occurring as thick clusters of

spirally-rolled worms on the stomach of cod in the North Sea. The larvae of

Porrocaceum decipiens are found especially in the musculature of fish (Kahl,

1938, 415; Witlkker 1930a; Martin 1920; Johnston and Mawson 1943), and will

be considered later in connection with Filarta pisciiwin and other larval forms.

Encysted Contracaecum larvae occur curved, or more or less loosely coiled, in the

subpcritoneal regions of the digestive tract and coclome of marine fish. Those of

C. clavatum (Rud., 1809) have been especially studied by Wiilker 1930; Kahl

1936; and Martin 1920. Since Ascaris clavata was a renaming by Rudolphi of

Ascaris gadi Mueller 1776, the name of this parasite of Gadidae should be Con-

tracaccum gadi (Mueller). Linton referred frequently (1895, 1899, 1901, 1905 )

to various ascarid larvae in North American marine fish, his figures indicating

those of nisakis, Porrocaccum (rarely), and especially Contracaecui, though he

usually called them Ascaris sp. and at times mentioned their resemblance ta

A. capsularia and Agamonema capsularia (1901).

Linnaeus in 1767 (Syst. Naturae, Ed, xii, p. 1075) gave the name Gordins

marinus to worms occurring in Norwegian fish, especially in the viscera ot

Clupea halecis, In 1782 Bloch deseribed G. harengum, also from a herring’:

Schrank in 1788, and Froelich in 1802, transferring it to Ascaris. Goeze (1782.

133-134) made reference to, and figured, an encapsuled spirally-rolled worm from

the liver of a salmon and, though he regarded it as a new species, he did not name

it. Gmelin in 1790 described Ascaris halecis, quoting Gordius harenguin as a

synonym, and also named Cucullanus salaris as a varicty of C. lacustris, the host

being the salmon (Salmo salar). In 1794 Fabricius transferred Ginelin’s halecis

to Cucullanus and gave an account of Ascaris clupearuin (A, harenguim Froelich).

Zeder (1800, 5-7) erected the genus Capsularia for the “capsule worms” of

Goeze (1782) and gave a diagnosis—worms aciculate, but truncate at the ends,

anterior end somewhat more slender, with a stumpy point at the tail end; digestive

canal with a differentiated whitish stomach; worms enclosed in a special capsule.

Ife included Capsularia salaris (based on Goeze 1782, 133, pl. vili, fig. 9-10) and

C. halecis (based on Goeze 1.c., 133; Bloch 1782; Schrank 1788). The figures ot

C. halecis (pl. i, fig. 1-6, especially fig. 4-5) indicate the same species as that from

the barracouta, Zeder also referred 10 Goeze’s remarks regarding the ventriculus,

mentioning (p. 11) that Goeze had suggested the name Stomachus albus for the

worm, on account of the “white stomach.” Since Capsularia has page priority,

Stomachus must be considered as a synonym,

In 1802 Rudolphi described as new species Filaria capsularia (syns. Gordins

harengum, Ascaris halecis, Capsularia halecis) from the viscera of Cluped

harengus,; and Ascaris capsularia (syns. Cucullanus salaris, Capsularia salaris )

from the salmon. We consider the two species synonymous,

In 1803 Zeder named Ascaris trinodosa from Salmo salar, but this was a re-

naming of Capsularia salaris, In 1809 Rudolphi gave an account of Filaria cap-

sularia (p. 61), adding Gordius marinus Linn. to the synonyms mentioned above ;

also of Ascaris capsularia (p. 179) whose synonymy included Capsularia trinodosa

in addition to those given above, the host being Saline salar, He referred to

Goeze’s observations concerning the whitish organ behind the head region. He

also mentioned (p. 203) Ascaris clupcarum Fabricius 1794, and the account leaves

no doubt that the species is the same as A. capsularia, though Rudolpli

regarded them as distinct. His account (p. 134) of A. constrictu suggests that it

may be A. capsularia, as \.instow (1880, 45) and Stossich (1896) believed.

Amongst the “species dubiac” Rudolphi described (1809, 74) Filaria piscintin from

several species of Gadus as well as from some other fish, and mentioned that

Rathke in 1799 jhad reported it as Filaria marina from Lophius as well as from

Gadus spp. Rudolphi stated that the parasite occurred encysted in a folded state

in the muscular tissue as well as in the liver, aod gave several synonyms: Gordius

marinus Linn., Houttuyn, Muller and Fabricius, in part; Ascaris marina Gme’ in;

Fusaria marina Zeder; and Filaria marina Rathke, Houttuyn’s reference was to

inaterial from the liver of Gadus spp. The species has been listed by some authors

(Creplin, Baird, Cobbold) as a synonym of Ascaris capsularia, Martin (1920),

Kahl (1938) and others have shown that the ascarid larvae from the musculature

vf marine fish from northwestern European waters belong to Porroccecnin

decipiens, and our own experience with “fleshworms” from vanous species of sub-

antarctic fish (Johnston and Mawson 1943) confirms their identification,

In 1819 Rudolphi again referred to the parasites mentioned in his work of

1802—Filaria capsularia (p. 6) from Clipea harengus; F. pisctum (p. 10, 218),

<iscaris capsularia (p. 50) and A. clupearum (p. 303), He mentioned amongst

“entozoa generis dubil” a number of nematodes from fish (p. 190-197, 560- 56/).

listing ther under the genitive of the generic and specific names of the host, but

in the host-parasite list he indicated them as Dubium nematoidenm, while in the

index to his work they are arranged under Dub. (ic., Dubreim). Many of these

parasites probably were Contracacciim larvae, but a number of them can be listed

under Capsularia marina, since Rudolphi stated, when briefly describing them

(p. 190-197), that they belonged to Zeder’s Capsularia, Amongst these latter are

(Dub. nemat.) Syngnathi pelagici; Gadi wachniae; Zenis fabri; Zenis apri;

Sparerunt (p. 564), indicated also (p. 194) as Spari boopis. moriyri, imelanurl,

alecdtnis; Percae cirrosac; Percae marinac; and Triglae adriaticac. Many other

ascarid larvae, such as Ase aris argentinae and A, atherinae, w ere recorded ‘by him

as having been taken from the mesemtery or peritoneum of marine fish, but further

identification is not possible without re-examining material. Most of them are

probably larvae of Coutracaecum, though Stossich (1896) included many of them

under the synonymy of A. capsularia,

In 1824 Deslongchamps definitely renamed Capsularia as Filocapsularia

(p. 391), and his diagnosis (p. 398) included as a characteristic the rolled form

of the parasite, enclosed in a dise-shaped capsule. He however stated that the

worms were sometimes not rolled in a disc but were thrown into several irregular

folds within the membrane. The presence of the white spot ventriculus )

near the anterior end was noted, He reported that the parasite was found in a

great number of fish belonging to different orders, genera and species, Since he

failed to find any differences, except thase of length, he included them all under

the same name, F. comininis, quoting as synonyms Gordius marinus, G. harengum,

ge niarina, Ase. halecis, Asc, capsularia, Cucullanus salaris, Capsularia saloris,

. fhalecis, (ilaria capsularia and F, pisctum, as well as seventeen of Rudolphi’s

ntnaon generis dubii,” which he indicated by Rudolphi'’s numbers. Of these

seventeen we have already mentioned eight which we consider to helong to

Capsularia, The remainder were probably larval Contracaecuim. Irom the fore-

yong remarks it is evident that /*locapsularia must fall as a synonym of Cap-

sularia, and /*, communis be accepted as a synonym (in part) of C. marina,

Liellingham (1844, 172) listed <fscaris capsularia from the peritoneum of

fifteen species of fish from the Trish coast, amongst them heing Cinpea harengus

(in which it was very connnonly found) and Salmo salar, The characteristic

ventricults was referred to, as also was the presence of three very sinall “tuther-

cules” around the mouth. He found that the parasite was very active and could

live in fresh water for 29 days.

Dujardin (1845, 187) referred to Ascaris capsilaria, quoting as synonyms,

Cucullanns salaris Goeze, Capsuluria salaris Zeder and C. trinodosa Zeder. “

gave a list of the species of fish from which it had been recorded. is remarks

concerning Bellingham’s reference to the ventriculus and those made in referring

to 4. cilpearunt (p. 188) suggest that he had confused Filaria piscium (p. 205),

at least in part, with A. capsularia. The account of Filaria pisciiin (p, OD), for

which a long host list was given by Dujardin, is that of an Anisakine worm, and

the statement that there was an intestinal caecum lying beside the oesophagus

indicates the larva of Porrocaecum, Amongst the hosts mentioned for £. piserunt

were various Gadidae, Salmo salar and Clupea harengus, and the lengthy

synonymy quoted included Gordius marmus Linn, G. harengun, Capsularta

halecis and Lilaria capsularia. In 1840 Nordmann regarded ©. falecis as a

synonym of Ascaris capsilaria, and in 1846 Creplin stated that J’, piselum was a

synonym of the latter. In 1849 Blanchard mentioned Ascaris salaris from Gadus

and gave synonymy similar to that quoted by Dujardin for Ascaris capsularia,

Diesing (1851, 163) mentioned only a few hosts for 4. capsularia, and his

synonymy related chiefly to C. safaris. ln another part of his work (p. 116-1 17)

he dealt with Agamonema capsuaria Dies. from numerous hosts, amongst them

being Clupea harengus and Gadidae, his synonymy including Gordius HMAP TILES,

G. harengum, Capsularia halecis, Fiaria capsularts (sic) Rud., Filocapsularia

communis Deslougchamps (alecis) and Ascaris capsularia of Bellingham,

Diesing transferred Filocapsularia communis Deslg. (excluding Capsularic

halecis) to Agamonema (p. 120), the synonymy quoted being that given by

Rudolphi (1809, 74) under /ilaria piscium, together with Rudolpln’s species.

The hosts mentioned are chicfly Gadidae, and the sites are liver, muscular tissue,

subcutaneous tissuc, peritoneum and mesentery. Agamoncma cominune (Deslg. }

Dies. is probably, in part, a synonym of Asc, capsularia, but as described by

Rudolphi (under F. pisciuiz), it is quite distinct and, as we have indicated, is the

larval stage of Porrocaccum decipiens, Asc. elupearum Pabr, (syn. A, harengune

Krol.) from Clupea harengus was mentioned by Diesing (1851, 204), and a reter-

ence was made under it to Agamoncia capsularia, though he retained the species

amongst sp. inquir.

Diesing mentioned, amongst others, the various nematodes of doubtful posi-

tion (Dubium nematoideun) of Rudolphi 1819, quoting them as Nematotdeum

dubium. syngnathi pelagici Rud. etc. In most cases the worms were placed under

Agamonena (pp. 118-119), sometimes with a new specific name—thus Ag. syi-

gnathi pelagici; Ag. merlucci vulgaris Dies. (syn. Nemat, dub. gadi nterluccit

Rud.) ; Ag. wachniae Dies. (syn. Nemat, dub. gadi wachniae Rud.) Ag. fabri.

Dies. (syn. Filaria seuis (sic) fabri Rud. (1819, 11); Nentat. dub, seuts fabri

Rud.) ; Ag. triglae lincatae Dies. (syn. Dubinm triglae adriaticae Rud.) : Ag. apri

Dies. (syn. Nemat. dub, seuis (sic) apri Rud.); dg. sparvidum Dies (syn.

Nemat. dub. spari boopis, mormyri, melanuri and Gleedints Rud.) ; Ay. scorpaenae

cirrhosue Dies. (syn. Neimat. dub, percae cirrhosae (sic) Rud.; Ay. serrani

cabrillae Dies. (syn. Nenat. dub. percae marinae Rud.) ; and Ag. triglae lineatac

Dies. (syn, Dubinm triglac adriaticae Rud.) Ascaris argentinae sphyraenac Rud.

(Asc. argentinae Gmelin) was placed under Nematoideum (p. 341).

3aird (1853, 22 )dealt with 4. capsularia and gave the synonymy published

by Rudolphi, as well as some later references, IJiis material came mainly from

Gadidae. He placed the species in that group of Ascaris spp. possessing a simple

vesophagus, with or without a stomach (ventriculus), but without any pyloric

appendages. He also referred to Filaria ? marina (p. 7). giving almost the same

synonymy as that quoted by Rudolphi (1802) for F. capsularia and by Dicsiug

(1851, 117) for Agamonema capsularia; adding Filaria pisciwit of Rudolphi,

Creplin, Siebold and Dujardin, as well as Ag, commune Dies. (p, 106), Baird's

material came from the liver of the cod and the peritoneum of Clupea, but his

mention of the former worms being nearly straight s¢ems to indicate that they

belonged to some other species, perhaps Coutracaecian larvae,

Siebold (1857, 26) mentioned that in many marine fishes the liver was

covered with capsules, each containing a worm more than an inch long. Such

parasites were placed under Ascaris capsularis (sic), Filaria pisctitin and

i? cystica. All were immature but they resembled strikingly certain adult ascarids

such as 4sc. osculata, A. spiculigera, etc., from seals, cormorants, gulls and pre-

daccous fish. Ile suggested that the encysted worms were the larvae of some

such adult ascarids.

Schneider (1862) referred to Ll. pisetui (Agamoncina pisciui) as being a

very common larval nematode found in the abdominal cavity and amongst the

muscles of several species of marine fish. Je stated that haddock were not eaten

im Copenhagen during summer peciiiss ot the abundance of these parasites in

them. The vesophagus was said to have a caecal prolongation posteriorly, Pro-

bably more than one species was included under the name Ff. pisenan.

In 1864 Cobbold published somes synonymy of Ase. capsularia (1864, 406).

He also mentioned (1879, 472) that sesually iumuature flariae were to be found

m1 nearly every marine fish examined, and it was a very common occurrence to

find the small Filaria pisciun sae coiled within the tissues of edible fish such

as herrings, haddock, cod and whiting, all waiting passively to be transferred to

their ultimate hosts, usually cither fish, birds, cetaceans or seals.

Leuckart (1876) made a number of references to I. pisctuin (or Ase. cap-

sularia), but he seems to have been dealing with two kinds of Asearid 1 larvae, vis.,

A. capsularia aud another form occurring sometimes in hundreds in the flesh of

marine fish. This latter is, in our opinion, the true Til, pisciui, 7c., the larva of

Parrocaccum decipiens, He regarded the parasite as the young form of ascarids

whose adult stage occurred in the intestiue of dolphins, seals, swimming birds and

predaceous fish (p, 98), the adult stages being mentioned (p. 124) as tse. acutu,

Al. spiculigera, A, osculata, etc. In another place (p. 417, footnote), when dealing

with 4. spiculigera, he stated that the young form was J*il. pischen. He also used

the latter term (p. 613) for the encapsuled ascarid larva occurring in the museular

part of the body (“muscle flesh”) of numerous marine fish. From what we now

know of larval ascarids from fish, Leuckart must have included several species

(Contracaccum, Porrocaecum, Antsakis and perhaps others) under the term, but

chiefly Porrocaecum,

Apart from references by Leidy (1856, 1878, 1888) little of importance relat-

ing to the species under review appeared until 1896 when Stossich’s monograph

on Ascaris appeared. In it 4. capsilaria was dealt with and a long list of fish

hosts were added. Amongst its synonvms were given 4, salaris Gmel., ot.

clupearum Vabr., A. argentinae Rud., A sciaenae Rud., A. ophidii-barbati Rud..

A, ophidi-imberbis Rud., A. lyrae Rad., A. linguatulae Rud. A. labri-luci Rud..

A, gadi-minuli Rud., A. constricta Rud. A. ceutrisct Rud. and A. spicrae

Dies. With reference to A. constricta it may be mentioned that Linstow (1880,

45) had already stated that this larval form from Tréechinus was indistinguish-

able externally from 4. capsularia, Baylis (1916, 369) placed under the “fatter

some worms from Colfus and Sciwena, previously identified as 4. constricta,

Monticelli in 1889 recorded A, capsularia from Merluctus from Chile, this

being probably the carliest record of the larval parasite from the southern

hemisphere. In 1916 Seurat recorded Fil. capsularia, FP. marina, FP. piscinin,

Filocapsularia communis and Aganoncma coininune as synonyms of Asc. halecis

(1916, 353). In 1899 Stiles and Hassall linked up 4. cap sularia with A, decipicns

from seals, and in 1905 designated the former (== salaris) as type of Capsularia

(1905, 37, 92). In 1920 was published their Index Catalogue (Nematoda)

whose references to literature have been of marked assistance in our present

inquiry. fn 1932 Sprehn (p. 533) referred to Ascaris capsularis as being probably

the larva of Porrocaccum decipicns,

Spiroptera hominis, which was deseribed by Rudolphi (1819), was placed

in the synonymy of J*daria pisciune by Schneider (1862, 275), after a re-

examination of the original material, which was reported to consist of encapsuled

I. piscium, along with fish viscera, the specimens having been, apparently,

deliberately introduced into the urethra by the patient, and thus passed in the

urine, Schneider's F*. pisciun was Ase. capsularia, Amongst the authors accept-

ing this synonymy for S. hominis were Cobbold (1864, 406-409), Leuckart (1876,

151. 395, 611), Beneden (1878), R. Blanchard (1889), and Stiles (1907). The

last-named (1907, 48) included as synonyms of Ay. pisetian, not only Sp. hominis

but also S. rudolphi Chiaje 1825, S. rudolphiana Chiaje 1825, and S. rudolphir

Dies, 1851. Diesing (1851, 223) had previously listed Strongylus gigas pulls

and Sp. rudolphii as synonyms of Sp, hontinis.

Many of the “species” in the Dubituum group of Rudolphi (1809, 561-567) and

placed by Diesing (1851) under Age@moncma and Nematoideuin, sometimes with

new names, obtained from fish and generally encapsuled, probably belong to

al. capsularia, as Deslongehamps (1824) and Stossich believed. — Brazier

(P.LLS.. N.S.W., 5, 1881, 629) exhibited specimens of a J*ilaria taken in Sydney

from imported salt herrings, the reference being probably to C. marina, Leuckart

(1876, 417) suggested that A. capsularia was the larva of 21. (== Contracaccin )

spiculigera, while Ciurea (1921, 532) thought it was the larva of Eustronyylides

sp. Martin (1921, 13), as well as Baylis (1916), considered it to be the larva of

Porrocaecum decipiens, while Schwartz (1925, 6) regarded it as a group name for

larval stages of Porrocaecum spp. Yorke and Maplestone (1926, 279) listed

Cepsularia as >? synonym of Porrocacenm, and C. salaris as a synonym of

BP. decipiens.

MelIntosh (1927) mentioned the names of many fish hosts (including Clipea

and Salmo) of A, capsularia in Scottish waters. There are various references to

the presence of A. capsularia in Mediterrancan fish—Sigalas (1923), Riecardi

(1931), Cercignani (1938), Romboli (1939), Remotti (1933), and Guiart (1938).

Schmidt-Ries’ paper (1939) relating to the parasites of Phocaena phocaena 1s not

at present available to us, nor is Mégnin’s work (1882) relating to the develop-

ment of A, stmpler.

elscavis delphini Rud. 1819, from the dolphin of the Ganges (P/latanista

yungetica) was indicated as A. delphini gangetici Lebeck ? by Diesing (1851, 155)

and placed as a synonym of 4, simplex, Cobbold (1876, 297 ; 1879, 426; 1886,

177). Stossich (1896), and Stiles and [lassall (1899) accepted such synonymy,

but Bavlis (1920, 402; 1932, 402; 1936, 87) listed it as a probable synonym of

Contracaecum lobulatitn (Schneider 1866).

Stiles and Brown (1924, 1958) gave asa character of Capsularia the presence

of an oesophagus with a distinct ventriculus. They stated that the genus seemed

to belong to the Anisakinae and might possibly supplant one of the other genera

such as Anisakis or Porrocaecim.

Our survey of the literature and our examination of material from marine

fish and various odontocetes indicate that Capsularia must replace Aiisakis Duj.,

other svuonyms being Stomachus Goeze and ilocapsularia Deslongchamps. ‘The

true Ascaris capsilaria is the larval stage of the dolphin parasite commonly known

as Anisakis siinpler. A. capsularia, together with Capsilarta salaris and C, halecis

are synonyms of Gordius marina Linn, (in part). The correct name of the

parasite is Capsularia marina (1.inn.). ‘The name of the subfamily Anisakinae, as

emended by Baylis (1920, 260), will require to be changed to Capsulariinae, of

which we regard Acantheocheilinae Wulker to be a synonym.

From Linnaeus onwards many of the earlier names (referred to above)

included at least two, probably more. species. In regions where seals are

frequently met with Porrocaecum larvae would be included. The larvae ot

Contracaccum, Anacanthocheilus and probably Acanthocheilus may also have to

be included, since, as adults, they are parasites of fish-eating vertebrates, The

known distribution of C. marina in its larval and adult stages is now extended

very considerably, Its larva is now known to occur in a great number of marine

fish, In the case of the barracouta, we know that the vast assemblages that occur

al tines off the southern Australian coasts are preyed on by dolphins and by sharks

such as the “whaler,” Carcharinus brachyurus Gnthr. It is of interest to note that

the barracouta is commonly infested with species of tetrarhynch cestodes (John-

ston, 1910, 711), whose adult stage probably occurs in such a shark.

As Baylis (1929) and Johnston (1988, 79) have pointed out, there are three

main types of anisakine larvae found in marine fish. One kind is slender, witl-

out caecum or appendix, and contained in nearly flat lenticular capsules found

chiefly in the subperitoneal and mesenteric tissues (Anisukis = Capsularia). The

larvae of eleanthocheilits and Anacanthocheilus belong to the same general type as

Capsularia, The second kind is larger. has an intestinal diverticulum and is

usually folded in a larger capsule with one axis longer than the other, the worm

heing found mainly in muscular tissue (Perrocuecum), The third kind is variable

in size and is contained in a loose capsule in which it may be merely bent or twisted

or may be loosely rolled; this kind possesses an oesophageal appendix and an

intestinal caecum. This last type (Coutracecciin) occurs particularly in the

mesentery, in the walls of the stomach and intestine and under the capsule or in

the substance of the liver.

With the suppression of Anisakis the recognised species are now transferred

to Capsularia-——C. similis (Vaird). C. rosinar] (Baylis), C. dtomedeae (Linstow ).

and C. phvseteris (Baylis).

The synonymy of C, marina is now very lengthy and is quoted herewith, but

no attempt is made to indicate all the fiterature relating to each synonym. We

consider it probable that many of the synonyms recorded here may also ‘relate, in

part, to the larvae of Acanthocheilus and Anacanthocheilus, especially the latter,

since Wuilker (1930) reported that 4. rofundains was the commonest nematode

occuring In German marine fish. The names marked with a query are amongst

those quoted by other authors as synonyms of A. capsularta or some other of its

many nanies, but the evidence available to us suggests that most of them belong,

at Icast in part, to larval Contracuecunt spp.

We have added a hyphen to the compound names used by Rudolphi and

Diesing,

NAMES BASED ON THE LArvaL STAGE

Gordius marinus Linu, 1767 (in part); Bloch 1779: and others (in part).

. harengum Bloch 1782; Fabr. 1794. Ascaris marina Miler 1780 (in part);

Gmelin 1790; Sweet 1909; Johnston 1910. Ascaris sp. (? marina) Johnston and

Cleland 1914, 0? 4. aryentinae Gmelin 1790: Rud. 1810, 1819: Duj. 1845.

? A, atherinae Rud, 1819; Duj. 1845; Dies. 1851. A. capsularia Rudolphi 1802,

1809, 1819; Bellingham 1844; Creplin 1846; Diesing 1851; Baird 1853; Leicdy

1856; Linstow 1880; Stossich 1896; Stiles and Hassall 1899; Linton 1901 ;

saylis 1916 (in part). a. capsularis Siebold 1857; Sprehn 1932. ? 4, centrisci

Rud. 1819. AL clupearum Fabr. 1794; Rud. 1809, 1819; Dies. 1851. 4. constricta

Rud. 1809, 1819; Linstow 1880. 4. filholi Chatin 1885. ? 4, gadi-minuti Rud.

1819.) A. halecis Gmelin 1790; Bloch 1782. > 4, labri-lusci Rud. 1819. ? 4.

linguatulae Rud, 1819. ? A. Iyrae Rud. 1819. 4. nelsonis Chatin 1885. 2? A.

ophidit-barbati Rud, 1819, ? A. ophidt!-imberbis Rud. 1819. 4. salaris FE. Blan-

chard 1849. ? A. sciaenac Rud. 1819, A. sphyranurae Linstow 1906; Young

1939, 4. sphyracnae Baylis 1916, ? A. spicrae Dies, 1851 (syn. 4. spari-spicre

Rud. 1819). A. thoyyrsitis Linstow 1908. Agamonena apri Dies. 1851. Ag. capsu-

laria Dies. 1851. Ag. commune Dies. 1851 (in part). Ag. fabri Dies. 1851.

Ag. merlucti-vulgaris Dies 1851. Ag. piscium Schneider 1862. Ag. scorpaenac-

cirrhosae Dies. 1851. Ag. serrani-cabrillae Dies. 1851. Ag. sparoidwm Dies, 1851,

Ag. syngnathi-pelagici Dies. 1851. Ag. triglae-lineatae Dies. 1851. Ag. qachniae

Dies. 1851. Anisakis salaris Yamaguti 1935. An. simpler Johnstom and Mawson

1943. Capsularia halecis Zeder 1800, C, salaris Zeder 1800. C. trinodosa Zedet

1803. Cucullanus halecis Fabr. 1794. Cuc. lacustris v. salaris Gmel. 1790. Cuc.

salaris Gmel. 1790, ?Dubiuin argentinae-sphyracnoe Rud, 1819. 2. gadi-

merlucti Rud, 1819. D. gadi-wachniae Rud. 1819, D. percae-cirrosae Rud, 1819.

LD. percae-marinae Rud. 1819. D. spari-boopis, -mormyrt, -melanuri, -aleedinis

Rud, 1819. D. sparorwin Rud, 1819. D. syngnathi-pelagici Rud. 1819. D. triglae-

adriaticae Rud. 1819. D. senis-apri Rud. 1819. D. senis-fabri Rud. 1819. Jilaria

capsularia Rud, 1802, 1809, 1819; Creplin 1846, 4. capsularis Dies. 1851 (for

F. capsularia). F. piscium (in part) of authors (non. Rud. 1809), 2. senis-

fabri Rud, 1819. F. sewis-fabri Dies. 1851. Filocapsularia communis Deslong-

champs 1824 (halecis). Fusaria argentinae Zeder. ? Nematoideum argentinae-

sphyraenac Dies. 1851. N. dubium gadi-merlucii Dies. 1851. N. d. gadi-wachniae

Dies. 1851. N. d. percae-cirrhosae Dies. 1851. N. d. percae-marinae Dies. 1851.

N. d. spari-boopis, -mormyri, -mclanuri, -alcedinis Dies. 1851. N. d. syagnathi-

pelagici Dies. 1851. N. d. seuis-apri Dies. 1851, Porrocaecuin or Anisakis larvae

Baylis 1929 (in part). Spiroptera hominis Rud, 1819. Sp. rudolphi Chiaje 1825.

Sp. rudolphiana Chiaje 1825. Sp, rudolphii Dies, 1851, Stomachus albus Goeze

in Zeder 1800. Strongyius gigas pullus Dies. 1851 (based on Bremser 1819).

NAMEs BASED oN THE AbuULT STAGE

Ascaris simplex Rud, 1809, 1819; Dujardin 1845; Diesing 1851; Cobbold

1886: Stossich 1896; Stiles and Hassall 1899, ete.: not Ascaris simplex Linstow

1888 (from seal, Kerguelen = Porrocaccum decipiens). A, (Anisakis) simplex

Duj. 1845. A. angulivalvis Creplin 1851. A, dussumieri Beneden 1870; Stiles

and Hassall 1899. A. kiikenthalii Cobb. 1888. A. sp. (from dolphin) Krefft

1873. Anisakis catodontis Baylis 1920. A. dussumiert Baylis 1920. A. kuken-

thalii Baylis 1920. A. kogiae Johnston and Mawson 1939. A. kogianus Nicoll

1941. A. simplex Raill, and Henry 1912; Baylis 1920; Lyster 1940; Johnston

and Mawson 1941, 1942, 1943; and other authors. 4. typica Baylis 1920. Cono-

cephalus typicus Dies. 1861. Peritrachelius typicus Jagersk 1894,

PorrocArcuM piscium (Rud. 1809), J. and M. 1943

Rudolphi (1809, 74) included amongst tis doubtful species one which he

named Filavia pisctum, He gave a number of references, including Houttuyn’s

Gordius marinus Linn, (which was figured) from the liver of Gadidac. Rudolphi

stated that the parasite occurred in the musculature, abdominal cavity and liver

of various marine fish. He used the term “membranis implicita,” suggesting that

the worm was rather intricately folded within the cyst. This would imply an

obvious difference from his Filaria capsularia and Ascaris capsularia described

in the same work, both of these being spirally rolled within their cysts. Rudolphi

mentioned as hosts for F. piscium three species of Gadus, as well as representa-

tives of other genera, and stated that Rathke had recorded it as FPilaria qearina

from Lophins and Gadus spp. Ina later work, Rudolphi (1819, 218) mentioned

that many kinds of entozoa had been confused by authors under the name of

F. piscium, and since his time the latter term has been applicd very commonly to

Jarval asearids from fish, as has been indicated earlier in the present paper.

Filocapsularia communis Desig. 1824 is in part a synonym of it, as also is

Agamonema conunune Dies. 1851. Diesing’s list of synonyms is essentially the

same as that given by Rudolphi (1809) for F. piscium and the main hosts men-

tioned are species of Gadidae. Dujardin’s account of I. piscium (1845, 60)

indicates that he was dealing, at least in part, with a larval Porrocaccum, Dies-

ing’s (1851, 347) Dubiuin merlucii-culgaris was stated to have been obtained from

the abdominal muscles of AMferlucius vulgaris. Leuckart (1876, 98, 615) referred

to the presence of J’. pisctum in the muscular tissue of numerous species of marine

fish. Stiles and Hassall (1899) and Baylis (1916) believed that Ascaris capsu-

laria was the larval stage of Perrocaecum decipiens, as we have already indicated.

Martin (1920) wrote concerning the ascarid larvae occurring in the flesh of

North Sea fish and gave an account of the larva of P. decipiens; and Wiiker

(19302) returned to the same subject. Kahl (1938) gave an excellent account of

the larva of P. decipiens, and of the process of its encapsulation in various fish.

The musculature was stated to be the chicf site for infestation, though the para-

sites were found occasionally in the walls of the viscera, such situations probably

indicating the invasion route to the body muscles.

We have investigated the “flesh worms” of fish from subantarctic islands

(1943) and found them to be larvae of P. decipiens. We also regarded

Agamonema campbelli Chatin as a synonym. Under Capsularia marina we have,

in passing, drawn attention to other references in literature relating to larval

Porrocaccumt,

There is no doubt that the true Fil. piscium Rud. (1809) is the larva of

Porrocaecum decipiens of seals, and consequently Krabbe’s specific name must be

superseded by that given by Rudolphi. The chief synonyms of P. piscine are

Fil. piscium Rud, 1809; Dujardin 1845; and of many authors (in part). Dubium

merluci-vulgaris Dies. 1851. Ascaris decipiens Krabbe, 1878. Porrocaecum

decipiens Raill. and Henry 1912. Ascaris capsularia Baylis and others (in part).

Ascaris capsularis Sprehn 1932. Agamonema campbelli Chatin. 1885.

Additional synonymy for the larva was given by Rudolphi (1809) and Diesing

1851; and for the adult by Baylis (1937) and Johnston (1938).

SUMMARY

1 Contracaccum legendrei Dollius is recorded from Thunnus maccoyi (S.E.

Australia), and its larval stage from Platyeephalus macrodon (N.S.W.) and

Upeneichthys porosus (S, Aust.).

2 Contracaccum ineurvunt (Rud.) is recorded from Xiphias estara (N.S.W.).

3. Acanthacheilus quadridentatus Molin is reported from Mustelus antarcticus

( Vict.).

4 Capsularia Zeder 1800 is rehabilitated, with Stomachus Goeze 1800, Filo-

capsularia Deslongchamps 1824, Anisakis Duj. 1845, Peritrachelius Dies.

1851, and Conocephalus Dies. 1861, as synonyms, and with C. marina

(Linn.), in part, as type.

5 Capsulariinae nom. nov. replaces Anisakinae; and Acanthocheilinae Wilker

is a synonym.

6 Capsularia marina (1...) Johnston and Mawson is the larval stage of Anisukis

simplex, a parasite of odontocetes, and occurs in a closely rolled condition in

a flat capsule, especially in the subperitoneal tissue of the body wall and

digestive tract of coastal and pelagic fish. It is now recorded from Austra-

lian fish :—Thyrsites atun (N.S.W., Vict., Tasm., S. Aust., W. Aust.) ; Platv-

cephalus macrodon (N.S.W.); Sciaena antarctica (N.S.W., S. Aust.);

Istiompax australis (Vict.); Thunaus maccoyi (S. Aust.); Corvphacna

hippurus (N.S.W.); and Mustelus antarcticus (Vict.),

7 Extensive synonyiny of Caps. marina is listed, more recent synonyms being

Ascaris sphyraenae Linst., A. tharsitis Linst., Anisakis simpler (Rud.), and

An, catodontis Baylis.

8 New combinations are Cupsularia similis (Baird). C. rosmari (Baylis),

C. diomedeae (linst.), and C. physeteris (Baylis) for valid species pre-

viously assigned to Anisakts,

9 The correct name for Perrececcum decipiens (Xrabbe) appears ta be

P. piscium (Rud. 1809), Filaria pisetiim Rud. beimg the larval stage occurring

is “flesh worms,” rather loosely folded in cysts in the body musculature of

marine lish,

LITERATURE

sarrp, W. 1853) Catalogue of the species of entozua, etc., British Museum

Bayiis, H. A. 1916 Parasitol., 8, 360-378

Bayi, H, A, 1919) A.MLN.II., (9), 3, 501-315

Bayiis, lI. A. 1920 Parasitol, 12, 253-264

Baycis, H. A. 1929) Discovery Reports, 1, 341-559

Bayiis, EL A. 1932 Discovery Reports, 6, 393-418

Bayris. HW. A. 1936 Nematoda, Fauna British India, 1, 408 pp.

Bayiris, JL A. 1937 Parasitol, 29, 121-130

Beppincuan, O'R, 1844 A.M.N.H., 13, 167-174

CERCIGNANI, na 1938 Boll. Pesca Piscicolt. Idrobiol., Rome, 14, 316-321

Cuarix, |. 1885 Bull. Sec. Philomat., Paris, (7), 9, 36-43

Ciurra, J. 1921 ©. RR. Soc. Biol., 85, 532

Crecanxp, J.B. 1914 Rep. Govt. Bur. Microbiol, N.SAV., for 1912, 129-131

Coppotp, Tb. S. 1864 Entozoa, London

Copnonp, P. S. 1876 Pree. Zool, Soe., London, 296

Conporp, VT. S. L879 Parasites, A Treatise on the Entozoa, ete., London

Copnoip, P.S. 1886 Jour. Linn. Soc., London, 19, 174-178

Desrexcciamrs, E, 1824 In [neyclopédie Methodique. Hfist. Nat. des

Zoophytes, 4, 391-397 (Vilaria), 398-400 (Filocapsularia }

Diksinc, K. M. 1851) Sy i ae helminthum, 2, Wien

Dotures, R. P. 1933 Bull. Soe. Zool. France, 58, 7-13

Dottecs, R. P. 19385 Bull. Soc. Zool. France, 60, 88-92

Dorrres., R. P. 1935 Bull. Trav. Stat. Agric. et Peéche de Castigltone,

1933 (1935), 199-278

Dujyarpin, FL 1845 Tlist. Nat. Heliminthes. ete., Paris

Gorze. J, A. 1782 Versuch ciner Naturgeschichte Lingeweidewurmer, ctc..

4 72 pp.

Gurarr, J. 1938 Bull. Inst. Oceanogr. Monaco, 755, 1-15

Geupcer, E,W. 1918 Pap. Dept. Marine Biol., Carnegie Inst., Washington, 12,

55108

Jotxsrox, T. H. 1910a Proe. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 34,, (1909), 710-712

Jounstox, T. H. 1910b Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 35, 309-310

jomnstron, T. H. 1914 in Cleland, 1914, 131

Jounsron, T. H. 1938 Parasitic Nematoda, Sci. Rep. Austr. Antaret. Exp.,

Ser. C., 10, (5), (1937), 31 pp.

founsron, T. H., and Mawson, P.M. 1939 Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 6, (3), 263-274

Jousxsron, T. H., and Mawson, P.M. 1941 Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 6, (4), 429-434

Jounsron, tT. H., and Mawson, P.M. 1942 Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 7, (2), 183-186

Jounxsron, T. H., and Mawson, P. as 1943 Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 7, (3), 237-243

Kati, W. 1936 Z. f. Parasitenk., 8, 509-520

Kaur, W, 19384 Z. £. Parasitenk.. 10, 415-431

Kaur. W. 1938b Z. f. Parasitenk., 10, 513-534

Keerer, G 1873) Tr. Entom. Soc. N.S.W.. 2, (1871), 206-232

Lemy, |. 1856 Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., 8, 42-58

LeucKkart, R. 1876 Die menschlichen Parasiten, 2

Linstow, ©. 1880 Arch. f. Naturg.. 46, 41-54

Luinsrow, O. 1884 Arch. f. Naturg., 50, 125-145

Lixstow, O. 1888 Entozoa. Challenger Reports, Zool., 23, (71), 18 pp.

Linsrow, O. 1906 Zool. Jahrb., Syst., 24, 1-20

Linstow, O. 1908 In Schultze, Zool. u. Anthrop. Ergebn. etc., Stid-Atrika,

Denk. Med. Naturwiss, Gesell., Jena, 13, 19-28

Eixrox, E. 1901 Bull. U.S. Fish Commission for 1899, 19, 267-304, 405-492

Lanron, F.. 1905 Bull. Bur, Fisheries, U.S.A.. for 1904, 24, 321-428

Lorp, C. E., and Scorr, H. {1.1924 A Synopsis of the Vertebrate Animals of

‘Tasmania, Hobart

Lister, L. 1940 Canad, Jour. Res., 18, D, 395-409

Mcinrosu, W.C. 1927 Ann. Mag. Nat. [list., (9), 19, 49-64

Martin, ©. 1921 7%, {. Infektskr, nee 22, 13-36

Monin, J. 1882) CLR. Soc. Biol., 34. (7). 4, 645- 649

Monrticen.i, FS. 1889 Boll. Sci. Nat. Napoli 3, 67-71

Nicotr, W. 1941 Vermes, in Zool. Record (1940), 96

Riecarpi, A. 1931) Clin. Vet. Milan, 54, 356. 265

Rompoir, B. 1939 Boll. Pesca Piscicolt. pei the Rome, 15, 374-385

Rupoiri, C. A. 1802 Wiegm. Archiv. i, Zool., 2, (2)

Rupotpeni, ©C. A. 1809 Entozoorum aa vermium ‘Aiestinaltant: cte., .\mster-

dam, 2, (1), 458

Ruporpin, C. A. 1819 Entozoorvm synopsis, 812 pp., Berlin

SctMipr-Ries, 1H. 1939 Zentrlb, Bakt. Orig., 145, 89-106

ScmNEIpER, A. 1862 Arch. f. Anat. Phys. \Wiss. Med., 273-276. Also translated

by Busk., Q.J.M.S., 2, 302

Scuwartz, A. 1925 Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 67, (17), 1-8

SEURAT, LG. 1916 Bull. Sci. France Belgique, (7). 9, 297-377

siEnoLtp, C. TT. 1857) On the Tape and Cystic Worms, etc. Translated hy

Huxley, Sydenham Soec., Lond., 90 pp.

SIGALAS, R. 1923 Proce. Verb. Soc. Linn. Bordeaux, 75, 64-68

Spreton, C, E, 1932) Lehrb. d. Helminthologie, Berlin

STEAD, 1D). 1914 Proe. Linn. Soc, N.S.W.. 39. 20

Sribes, ©. W. 1907) Hyg. Lab. U.S. Publ, Health Serv., Bull. 34, 31-51

stites, ©. W., and Brown, G. 1924 U.S. Publ. Health Reps., 39, 1,957-1,962

oTives, (. W.. and Hassani, A. 1899) The Fur Seals and Fur Seal Islands

of the North Pacific, 3, 99-177, Washington

Stives, C. W., and Hassatn, A. 1905 Bull, 79, BLA.L, U.S. Dept. Agr.

Stites, C. W., and [Assan A. 1920 Index Cat. Med. Vet. Zool. Round-

worms, U.S. Publ. Health Service, Hyg. Lab., Bull. 114. 886 pp.

srossicit, M. 1896 Boll. Soc. Adriat. Sci. Nat., 17, 9-120

Sweet, G. 1909 Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 21, (1908), 503-527

Waite, E.R. 1923 The Fishes of Seuithy Australia. Adelaide.

WCLKER. G. 1930a Zool. Anz.. 87, 293-302

WELKER, G. 1930b Zool. Anz., 88, 1-16

Yamacuti, 5. 1935 Jap. Jour. Zool., 6, 337-386

Yorke, W., and Mariesronr, P. 1926 The Nematode Parasites of Vertebrates

Younc, M. R. 1939 Helminth Parasites of Australia, ete. mp. Bur. Agr.

Parasit., St. Albans, 145 pp.

Zener, J. G. 1800 Erster Nachtrag zur Naturgeschichie der Kingeweidewiirmer,

320 pp.

ADDITIONS TO THE FLORA OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA NO 41

By J. M. BLACK, A.LS.

Summary

GRAMINEAE

Stipa pubescens R. Br. nov var. maritima. Nonnulla folia caulina plana et 8-10 mm. lata; panicula

densa; arista 5 ", cm. longa, columna 2-2'/5 cm. longa. - Marino.

ADDITIONS TO THE FLORA OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

No, 41

By J. M. Brack, A.L.5.

[Read 13 May 1943]

GRAMINEAE

Stipa pubescens R. Br, nov var. maritima, Nonnulla folia caulina plana et

8-10 mm, lata; panicula densa; arista 54 cm. longa, columna 2-23 cm, longa.—

Marino.

Stipa semibarbata R. Br. nov. var. gracilis. Caulis gracilis; panicula circa

14 cm. longa, interdum laxula; arista 6-7 cm. longa~—Mount Lofty Range; iNan-

garoo Island.

PROTEACEAE

Grevillea biternata Meisn. Extreme western end of the Gaw!er Ranges, Eyre

Peninsula, 1941, C. W. Johns. “Shrub up to 1 m. high, growing in dense com-

iunities and propagating itself by suckers.”—Collector’s note. This is the first

record for South Australia, and the first species of the section Manglesta to be

found here. ‘his section is distinguished by the small straight glabrous flower,

with a globular limb, the erect obtuse stigmatic cone, which is stpported on a

short style narrowed at both ends and swollen in the middle, so as to resemble an

ovary ; the real ovary is globular, glabrous, situated just below the sty:e, and raised

on a gynophore about as long as the style and stigmatic cone. In biternata the

young branches and leaves are pubescent with small appressed basifixed hairs,

the leaves bisect or trisect, usually more than once, ending in two or three necdie-

like segments, The peduncles of the short simple raceme are also pubescent with

similar hairs. This species, like the others of the section, has hitherto been known

only from Western Australia.

CRUCIFERAE

Hymenolobus alatus, nov sp. Plantula annua, sparsissime appresso-pilosula ;

caules ascendentes, 2-8 cm. alti; folia obovata, circa 1 cm. longa, in petiolum

Tiyvmenolobus alatus

4, septum and one sepat; B, pod; C, seed exuding mucus, which appears

like a wing in the illustration; J), embryo; /, horizontal section of seed.

Trans. Roy. Suc. S. Aust., 67, (1), 30 July 1943

angustata, pleraque basilaria, integra vel apice obtuse lobulata; racemi fructiferi

3-5 cm. longi, pedicellis patentibus siliculas subaequantibus; sepala cymbiformia,

patentia, 1 mm. longa, obtusa; petala nulla; stamina 4, filamentis basin versus

dilatatis; silicula fere orbicularis, glabra, circa 4 min. longa et lata, manifeste alata

et cmarginata, parte seminifera turgida, ala 1-14 mm, lata, totam carinam val-

vularum marginante; septum oblongum, circa 3 mm. longum, 2 mim. latum; stylus

nullus ; semina ovoidea, brunnea, i mm. longa, im statu macerato valde mucosa,

4-5 in utroque loculo; cotyledones incumbentes,

In shady spots near Wudinna, Evre Peninsula, 1941, C. LP. Jahiis,

This little plant has the habit of Hl. procumbens (L.) Nutt., but differs im the

absence of petals, in the pedicels shorter in relation to the pods, which are larger

almost orbicular, distinctly winged and have tewer seeds. However, as wittged

and wingless pods are admitted in Lepidium and Thlaspi, it seems to me preferable

to place ‘the new species in Hymenolobus, rather than attempt to create a new and

probably monotypic genus.

LEGUMINOSAE

dlcacia gonophylla Benth. var. crassifolia, Benth. Finniss River, October

1929, J. By Cleland. Agrees with specimens from Eyre Peninsula, except that

the thick phyllodes are rather narrower (about 2 mm. broad). In all our

specimens the peduncles are solitary in the axils, not twin. Until pods have been

found the determinations are somewhat doubtful.

Al. tteaphylla Fo vy. M. Western end of the Gawler Ranges, 1941, CL IP.

Johns, First record for Eyre Peninsula.

*Sutherlandia frutescens R. Br. Tleath country at Venus Bay, Eyre Penim-

sula, 1941, C. HW’, Johns. This handsome South African shrub (Bladder Senna)

has hitherto been fotnd wild only in the Fiinders Range.

STERCULIACEAE

Rulingia craurophylla ¥, v, M. Poldinna railway siding, 5 miles north of

Minnipa, Eyre Peninsula, 1941, C, He. fohins. Lurst record for South Australia.

Discovered by Alexander Forrest in 187i near the present site of Southern Cross;

in 1891 it was collected in the Victoria Desert and the Fraser Range by R. Helms.

A silky-villous shrub about 1 m. high; leaves broad-linear, rigid and_ brittle,

2-4 em. long by 2-4 1m. broad, obtuse, sessile, faintly crenate and puckered above

by the numerous short impressed lateral nerves spreading almost at right angles

to the midnerve; outer bracts of each eyme longer than flowers, ovate, stipitate ;

stamens and staminodes in two rows, the stanunodes forming the miner row, all

free or almost so.

GOODENIACEAE

Vellet cycnopolanica F. v. M. Near Wudinna, Eyre Peninsula, 1941,

HW’, Johns. First record for South Australia—Western Australia.

The capsule is orbicular, white when ripe, rather thin in texture, faintly

reticulate, 2-valved and not splitting inta four valves as in our other two species

(paredaxa and connala), and always longer than the sepals. The basal leaves are

mostly obovate and sharply toothed, but a few are lyrate. with small spreading

acute lobes decreasing in size downwards and a winged rhachis. In the capsules

examined, | tound only two orbicular seeds filling the cavity.

MyrTAcnar

Melaleuca cleutherostachya F. vy. M. Along the road between Wudinna and

Kimba, 1928. C. H’, Johns; 30 wiles north-east of Cowell, Eyre Peninsula,

November 1936, J. B. Cleland. A tall shrub, with small decussate Jeaves and

flowers and fruits in short oblong sessile later ‘al spikes, hitherto found only in

Western Australia.

A NEW OCCURRENCE OF MONAZITE IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By ALLAN F. WILSON

(Communicated by Sir D. Mawson)

Summary

Early in 1942 when examining the area of hornfels and crystalline schists in the neighbouhood of

Strathalbyn, monazite was discovered as occasional tiny crystals in irregular pegmatitic veins.

Much more common in these veins is rutile, which is often in large and perfect crystals.

A NEW OCCURRENCE OF MONAZITE IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

3y ALLAN Ff) WILSON

(Communicated by Sir D. Mawson )

[Read 13 May 1943]

early in 1942 when examining the area of hornfels and crystalline schists in

the neighbouhood of Strathalbyn, monazite was discovered as occasional tiny

crystals in irregular pegmatitic veins.

Much more common in these veins 1S

rutile, which is often in large and periect crystals.

Rutile, in such formations, has been met with from place to place over a

length of several miles in the belt of country extending between Section 1887

Kondoparinga and Section 2863

LEGEND

RUTILE BEARING

PEGMATITES SHOWN

Tes Glam

ingested country rock.

SECTION

Macclesfield. Brilliant heney yellow

crystals of monazite associated with

the rutile were collected both in the

neighbourhood of Section 2740, and

on Section 2863 (Hundred of Maccles-

field), which localities are distant

same two miles apart.

One of the monazite crystals

from the former locality measures

12 mm. across on the cleavage face.

lt was found difficult to secttre com-

plete crystals owing to the facile

cleavage of the mineral: thus when

breaking open the rock matrix ihe

fracture planes often traversed the

monazite. Several erystals from this

area exhibit twinning.

At the second locality black

tourmaline makes iis appearance and

the enclosing hornfels has suffered

considerable bleaching in the vicinity

fs.

{

—

of these mineralised stringers as a

result of pneumatrolysis proceeding

from the latter.

Crystals of rutile and monazite

often make their appearance at the

contact of the vein material with

In some cases the Jatter fragments are observed to have

been in process of alteration to felspar and sericite.

The near-by water-courses yielded, on panning, both monazite and rutile, the

latter mineral being much the more abundant.

The identity of the monazite has been established by qualitative chemical

tests and a limited optical examination.

tive analysis has been made.

Owing to lack of material, no quantita-

The radio-activity of the monazite was established

by its action on photographic plates; in these tests the Strathalbyn monazite

appears to have about the same radio-activity as the monazite from North

Carolina.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 67, (1), 30 July 1943

NOTES ON FOSSILIFEROUS ROCKS FROM TERTIARY OUTCROPS

TO THE SOUTH - WEST OF COONALPYN, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By FREDK. CHAPMAN, A.LS., F.G.S.

Summary

These notes arc based on three specimens “” of limestones collected by Professor Sir Douglas

Mawson. He kindly submitted them to me for detailed examination, as of particular interest on

account of the absence of information concerning the nature of the Tertiary rocks in that particular

district and the paucity of their outcrops. These fossiliferous limestones overlie, unconformably.

massive granite.

NOTES ON FOSSILIFEROUS ROCKS FROM TERTIARY OUTCROPS

TO THE SOUTH-WEST OF COONALPYN, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By Frepr. Cuarasrax, ATS. PGS

[Read 13 May 1943]

These notes are based on three specimens of limestones collected by

Professor Sir Douglas Mawson. Ile kindly submitted them to me for detailed

examination, as of particular interest on account of the absence of information

concerning the nature of the Tertiary rocks in that particular district and the

paucity of their outcrops. These fossiliferous limestones overhe, unconformably.

Inassive granite.

One of the specimens is a dense red limestone of an unusual character; the

others being more or less typical polyzoal rocks.

SpecimEN No, 5158

Locality—lrom a sha'low well in limestone overlying granite at Cold & Wet

Homestead, distant six miles due west-south-west by south from Coonalpyn.

Description—A soft, spongy, polyzoal limestone, of a yellowish to pink colour.

Crushed material shows the component particles to have been re-crvstallised

on the surfaces, whilst the organisms thenrselves were largely corroded before

consolidation.

Finest washings contain numerous minute clongated rhombs of aragonite

or calcite. averaging 12» in Jength, together with abundant rods and plates of a

caleareous nature, some iron-staimed,

ForaMINIFERA—Dentalinag 2 obliqua COrb.; Epontdes repandus (i. and M.);

fi. seubriculus Chapm.; Cibicides lobatulus CW. and J.)3 0 C. ungeriaius

(VOrb.) : C. haidingerii (@Orb.) : Eiphidian feoitbhti (Brady); Lextu-

laria sagittida Defr.

Potyzoa -cf. Amphiblestram sp.; Siittina tatei (CT. Woods); Porina gracilis

(M. Edw.) ; cf. Retepera sp.

CrinoIpEA—Antedon sp. (arm ossicle ).

Horizon and Age—A typical Polyzoan Limestone. Comparable in its faunal

aspect with the bulk of the Mallee Borings below the INalimnan (Chapman, 1916,

Cainozoic Geology of the Mallee and other Bores. Rec. Geol. Surv. Viet., 3, (4) )

Jt may also correspond with Tate’s Middle Murraviz Calciferous ins

stone with polyzoa (Tate. 1885, Notes on the Physical and Geological Features of

the Basin of the Lower Murray River, Trans. Roy, Soc. 5, Aust., 7, 24-46). This

horizen is referred to by Sin gleton (The Tertiary Geology of Austral ia, Proc. Roy.

Soc. Vict.. 53, (1), N.S., 1941) in his “Tentative Correlation Table’ as the upper

part of the Middle Miocene, in which he includes Baleombian with Trilling (at

Muddy Creck), and incidentally the upper part of the Barwonian.,

SpreciMEN No, 5159

Locelity—aA. thin formation on the west-facing slopes of the eranite ridge at

gs i S g

about 3 mile north of Crottie’s Knob. The latter is some 9 miles due west-south-

west by south of Coonalpyn,

©) The specimen sails. rere to the vatle ‘euileetion, ive niversity of i Adelaide.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust.. 67, (1), 30 July 1943

Description—V’ ery hard, pinkish, fine-grained, gritty and sandy limestone,

with organic remains. These include fragments of calcareous algae (chiefly

Lithethaninion ) ; foraminiferal tests; echinoid spines and test fragments; polyzoa

indet.; also fragments of molluscan shells (gasteropods and bivalves), The

foraminifera are well rolled and embedded in a calcitic paste.

The component particles of the rock are often coated with a dense concentric

growth, suggesting algal (cyanophyaceous) structure, but not so well preserved

as to be identified. This appearance might almost introduce an xealian or littoral

element into the question of conditions of accumulation of the deposit.

The foraminifera are abundant. The species, as far as they can be deter-

mined, in the various shees (numbers 1 to 8) examined, are as follows:

Marginulina glabra VOrb. (1); Guttulina sp. (2); ¢f. Sigimoidella sp. (4, 6);

BR ENOERS sp. (2); Patellinclla aunectens Parr and Collins (3); Discorbis sp.

1 (6); Discorbis sp. b (2); Eponides repandus (Vf. & ee (1, 2, 7); Rotalia

unticisltha Parr (1, 2, 3. 4, 5. 6. 7); dnomaling sp. (2); Cibicides lobatulus

(W. and J.) (3)3 deeroulina sp. (2); Gypsia or eee (6); Carpen-

teria sp. (3, 4. 8); Amphistegina sp. (2. 6, 8); Globorotalia truncatulinoides

(POrh.) (4): Elphidiun chapmani Cushman (3, 4, 6, 7); Elphidiuim verricu-

latum (Brady) (4, 6,7, 8.) 3 Quingucloculina sp. (1); Sigmoilina sp. (4); Spiro-

loculina sp. (1); Miliola (Pentellina) sp. (5); Triloculina tricarinata VOrb.

(1,3); Textularia sp. (7); Dorothia sp. (4).

Horizon and Age—This facies, as well as the characters of the rock itself,

strikingly like that of the Batestord Limestone, where, at the type locality, it

appears as a shore-line detritus. At Patesford, in the neighbourhood of the Dog

Rocks, the detrital material has been derived from: granite. Here it is more of a

fine quartzitic nature,

The shallow marine conditions under which this rock (5159) was deposited

is partly responsible for the sub-tropical asvect of its seein! foraniinifera, as

distinguished by the deeper water andl cooler aspect of the typical polyzoal

deposits of the associated rocks in this locality—Coonalpyn,

The redundant and thickened tests of Elphidtian and Rotalia seen in these

rock sections remind one of similar forms found in the shallow water gatherings

on the Great Barrier Reef, Queensland, at the present day, although of different

species.

In slide No. 5 there occurs a very nice section of Patelinella, cut through the

vertical axis. It has a thicker and lower test than the Recent and Post-Tertiary

species, P. inconspicua (Brady). There is little doubt that this example from

Coonalpyn can be identified with the Tower Miocene form described some years

ago by Parr and Collins from Muddy Creek, Victoria (Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict,

43. (1), 1930, 91, pl iv, fig. 6).

The living Patellincila tnconspicus (Brady), Rep. Chall, 1884, 9, 357, pl sin,

fig. 6 a-c (as Textularia), has a wide distribution at the present day, It includes

Monceeur Island, Bass Strait; Nares Harbour, Admiralty Island; south of

Japan; Malay Archipelago ; of New Zealand; and off Portuguese East Africa.

The Post-Tertiary example was found by W. J. Parr im a boring near Boneo,

Victoria, at 177-184 feet. ;

So far as examined in thin slices, the specimen 5159, Coonalpyn, has yielded

no evidence of Lepidoevelinae nor Cycloclypeus, which are characteristic of the

Batesfordian at the Dog Rocks, near Geelong. The association of otalia verri-

culala Parr in ahutiviance. with Garena globulus (Reuss) and probably [i phidtiaim

chepiianl Cushiman, whose type locality is Neumeretla, Fast Gippsland, with marls

and limestones containing a general facies ig in many respects comparable with the

3atesfordian, though not entirely simular lithologically.

SpeciIMEN No. 5160

Locdity—T'rom a shallow well about 1 mile east of Binnie’s Water, which

is about 11 miles due west of Coonalpyn.

Description—A somewhat coarse-textured polyzoal and shelly limestone.

White weathering to grey. Numerous fronds of sea-mats and pecten shells

visible on the surface.

The finest washings contain fragments of shells and crystals of calcite or

aragonite, with an average diameter of 24 y.

The crushed material yields fragmentary organisms, generally corroded.

Polyzoa fairly abundant. Foraminifera scarce and small.

Foramrnirera—Discorbls pileolus (d’Orb.); Eponides scabriculus Chapm.; cf.

Cibicides wigerianus (VOrb.); Globigerinoides ct. conglobatus (Brady);

Ouingueloculina seminuluin (1..); Textilaria sagittula Detr. var. fistilosa

Brady.

Poryzoa—Cellaria sp.; Amphiblestrian sp.; Membranipora marginata McG.;

Crisia scalaris McG.; Crisia gracilis McG.; Hornera sp.; Idimonea semispiralis

MeG,

PrLecyvopa—ct. Austrolima bassi (T. Woods); Netochlamys cf. consobrina

(Tate) ; Callanaitis cainosoica (T. Woods).

Horizon and Age—This shelly polyzoal rock indicates a typical Gambierian

facies. Both the polyzoa (restricted spp.), and some of the foraminifera, would

relegate it to an horizon not older than the top of the Lower Miocene (Bates-

fordian) and the lowest par: of the Middle Miocene (cf. Balcombian).

CRITICAL NOTES ON THE GRAMINEAE AND CYPERACEAE

OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA WITH DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

By S. T. BLAKE, M.Sc., Department of Biology, University of Queensland

(Communicated by J. M. BLACK)

Summary

Since the publication of Black's Flora of South Australia during the years to 1922-1929, a large

amount of intensive work on the flora of Australia has been carried out, both in Australia and

overseas. This has resulted in the discovery of a number of new species and in the recognition of

many other species as undescribed which had previously been misidentified with more or less well-

known species. Bibliographical research into the validity of names has been responsible for many

name-changes. This is particularly the case in the Cyperaceae and Gramineae, two families which

have especially engaged my attention for some years past, and for the study of which Mr. Black has

kindly loaned me very many specimens from his Herbarium.

CRITICAL NOTES ON THE GRAMINEAE AND CYPERACEAE

OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA WITH DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES

By 3. T. Brake, M.Se.. Department of Biology, University of Queensland

(Communicated by J. M. Black )

| Read 13 May 1943 |

Since the publication of Black’s Flora of South Australia during the years

1922-1929, a large amount of intensive work on the flora of Austr: alia has been

carried out, both in Australia and overseas. This has resulted in the discovery of

a number of new species and in the recognition of many other species as un-

described which had previously been misidentified with more or less well-known

species. Bibhographical rescarch into the validity of names has been responsible

for many name-changes. This is particularly ithe case in the Cyperaceae and

Gramineae, two fanalies which have especially engaged my attention for some

years past, and for the study of which Mr. Black has kindly loaned me very many

specimens from his Herbarium.

When, towards the end of 1940, Mr. Black asked me to assist him in the

revision of the Gramineae and Cyperaceac for the Second [Edition of the Flera,

| willingly undertook what proved to be quite a lengthy task. This paper is offered

as an explanation of the many changes found necessary, most of which could not

he adequately discussed within the limits of the Flora.

To avoid overloading the text with lengthy citations, a Bib lhography of the

more frequently cited papers is given at the end of the paper, and this is referred

to as is commonly done in non-taxononic papers.

Vhanks to the courtesy of the Directors of the National Herbaria of Victoria

and New South Wales, | have been able to examine the types or duplicate-types

of many species. some of which were specially loaned for this work. The follow-

ing abbreviations have been used to indicate herbaria, those in small capitals being

in accordance with the international system proposed by Lanjouw in Chroanica

Botanica, 5, 142-150 (1939):

Tate Herbarium, University of -\dclaide - - AD

Black Herbarium # - ~ 4 - Bi

Cleland Herbarium - - - - - CI

National Herbarinui of Victoria, Melbourne - - MEL

National Herbarium of New South Wales, Sydney - NSW

Queensland Herbarium, Brisbane - - - BRL

GRAMINEAE

The genera of the subfanily Panicoideae have been the subject of intensive

study during recent years, and the tendency has been to recognise numerous small

more homogeneous genera instead of the large unwieldy heterogeneous agerega-

tions of species frequently included in such genera as Andropogon and Panicuui.

These smaller genera are not always sharply definable, though. as a rule. they are

at least as sharply marked as Audropogon and Panicum in the broad sense,

The South Australian species of the Andropogoneae were re-arranged under

the smaller genera by Black (1936). but further study has ieee more

changes. Hemarthria uncinata R. Br. replaces Kottboellia compressa 1.4. of the

First. Ldition. The genus Roftboellia, as now understood, is restricted a tropical

Trang, Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 67, (1), 30 July 1948

specics with fragile cylindrical racemes (so-called “spikes’’) and the spikelets of

cach pair dissimilar. Jfemarthria has tough, decidedly compressed racemes with

the spikelets of each pair similar or neariy so; all the Australian specimens appear

to belong to the one species.

The South Australian species referred to as Andropogon in the First Edition

are now distributed hetween the genera Lichanthinm, Bethriochloa, Sorghum,

Cymbopogen, and Chrysopogan, Species of these and other genera are being

fully discussed elsewhere (Blake, 1943). Three species of Bolhriochloa are known

irom South Australia, but unfortunately some confusion has arisen as the result

al a misidentification in pees paper cited above. The description there given

of B, mundata (FF. Muell.) J. M. Black refers to B. Ewartiana (Domin.) C. FE.

Hubbard, a species widely spread in the drier parts of the continent. The basis

of the combination, however, Andropogon mundatus F. Muell., was founded on a

small specimen of what is mow known as 8. mitermedia CR. Br.) A. Camus, col-

lected by Mueller at Crystal Brook in October 1851, and is the only known record

of B, dike for Seuth Australia. The South Australian specimens referred

to B, deciptens (Vack.) C. EE. Hubbard belong to the closely allied B. ambigua

S.UP. Blake.

The plant commonly passing as Andropoyon boimbycinus R. Br. or Cynbo-

pogon bombyeinus (R. Br.) Doin difers irom the plant originally described by

Brown from the eastern coast of (ucensland in the re towed | racemes and mere

numerots nerves on the lower glume of the sessile spikelet, and has to reecive a

new name, C. ebtectiuy S.T. Blake. Lt is widely spread over the Australian main-

land. Likewise. the -Australian specimens generally referred to Andrepogon

Grvllus L. or Chrysepogon Crvllus (L..) Trin. have been found to represent an

hitherto undescribed species, C. fallar 3. T. Blake.

The species of /setlema have been discussed elsewhere by Black (1933, 1938)

fsachue Gustralis KR. Br. The Australian species of /yaehne require further

study, and until this has been carried out the above name should be used for the

South Australian form. Henrard (1940, p. 464) seems to imply that /, australis

is conspecific with £. globose (Thunb.) ©. IX. which was originally described from

Japan, but the specimens so far seen from the southern half of Australia do not

agree with ihe characters given by }lenrard as being distinctive of J, giobusa,

Eriochloa pseudoacrotricha (Staff er Theil.) C. EB. Hubbard in herb, Bris-

bane. comb, nov. £. ramosa var. pseudoacrotricha Stapt ex Thell. in Viertelj.

Naturforsch . Gesellsch., Zurich, 64, 697 (1919). Fi. ramasa var. acrotricha Stapt

ex ‘Vhell. ie Fi, annulata (Fluegge ) ) Kunth var. acrotricha Benth. Fl. Austral, 7,

463 (1879) as to the description and specnnens cited, not Eins acrotrichis

Steud.

Thellung, when publishing £. ramosa var. psedoacrotricha Stapt, gave no

description, merely referring to “FE, annulata var, acrotricha B entham EI, ‘Austral.

(excl, syn.).” This appears to constitute valid publication, im spite of the fact that

Bentham’s combination, based on a misidentification, is a synonym of Ldclopus

ucrotrichus Steud., another species. “The reason advanced is that Thellung has

definitely excluded Bentham’s synonyniy when publishing Stapf’s combination,

thus leaving the description and the specimens on which it was based. In

herbarium’ Melbourne are representatives of the collections of Woolls and Mrs.

Calvert cited by Bentham; these are certainly conspecific, and one must therefore

be part of the type-collection, Leichhardt’s specimens may be excluded, as they

are mentioued as if it were an after-thought-—‘also in Leichhardt's collection.’

The shect in herbarium Brisbane determined by Hubbard as Friochloa pseudo-

uerotricha (Stapf) C. E. H. is a duplicate af a collection sent to Kew and evidently

matched by Hubbard with Stapf’s type there.

The species, which occurs in parts of Queensland, New South Wales and

South Australia, is characterised chiefly by the lanceolate spikelets 4:75-5+5 mm,

long being broadest at about one-third from the base, thence acuminate upwards,

tapering into a rather long bristle-hke point. An amplified description, based

chiefly on Blake 10747 from Yelarbon, Darling Downs District, Queensland, which

is a particularly good match for the Melbourne material, is as follows:

Gramen perenne, caespitosum, viride, plerumque 50-100 cm. altum; innova-

tiones intravaginales. Culm erecti, basi leviter geniculati vel stricti, 2-5-nodes,

ramosi, molles, striati sacpe cliam plus minusve sulcati, laeves, glabri vel prope

nodos pubescentes. Vaginae follorum striatae, laeves, praecipue ad nodos

pubescentes vel omnino glabrae, arctae vel solutae, infimae internodiis saepe

longiores, ccterac breviores; collum pubescens; ligula ad seriem ciliorum circa

0-7 mm. longorum redacta; laminae anguste lineares sensini acutissimac,

plus minusve involutae raro planae, prope hgulam pubescentes, ceterum glabrac

vel subtus breviter pubescentes, usque ad 30 cm. longae, usque ad 4 mm.

latae, nervis 11 primariis percursae. Jnflorescentia angusta, 10-18 cin.

longa, e racenus 3-7 comstructa; axis commutms compresso-triquetra, circiter

0-5 mm. lata, glabra vel nodis pubescens vel parce pilosa, scaberula, striata.

Racen breviter pedunculati, erecti vel suberecti, 2-6 cm. longi, axis communis

internodiis saepissime longiores, densi; rhachis scaberula, axillis pubescens vel

etiam pilosa, ceterum glabra; pedicelli O-5-2°5 mm. longi, clavato-filiformes,

scaberuli ct praecipue prope apicem longe pilosi (pilis usque ad 3 mm. longis).

Spicilae 4°75-5°5 mm. longae, circiter 1-4 mm. latae, dilute virides vel purpureo-

variegatac, lanceolatae, a tertia parte inferiore longiuscule setaceo-acuminatae,

parte majore longiuscule pilosac. Ghana inferior minute denticulata, saepe pur-

purea vel atro-violacea, 0°3-0'45 mm. longa. Gluma superior spiculae formam

congruens et ejus apicem attingens, cxplanata ovato-lanccolata, acuta, aristulata

(aristula 0°5-0°8 mm, longa), 4-3 interiore pilis longis plus minusve appressis

dense pilosa. Lemna imfernm gluma superiore paullo brevius, explanatum ellip-

ticum, acutum, mucronatum, marginibus anguste hyalinis prope apicem ciliolatum,

dorso parte majore pilosum; palea 0. Anthoecium superuim ellipticum, 2-5 mm.

longum, 1-1-1°2 mm, latum, acutum vel subacutum et mucrone circiter 0-7 mm,

longa terminatum, stramineum, minute punctulatum. <Autherae 1-1-1°5 nun.

longae. Caryopsis oblongo-elliptica, utrinque obtusa, dilute olivacea, circiter 2 mm.

longa, circiter 1 mm. lata.

E, australiensis Stapf ex Thell., lc., was published with an extremely scanty

description, but which is nevertheless sufficient to differentiate the species, which

is characterised by the crisped margins of the rather short and relatively broad

leaves as compared with the former species, the more numerous shortcr racemes,

the narrow long-acuminate spikelets 6-8 mm. long, and the relatively short fertile

floret. The third South Australian species, £. longiflora S. T. Blake (1941 b,

p. 18), has still Jarger spikelets, 9:3-11 mm, long, and short broad leaves,

Several smaller genera have now been segregated from the older concept of

Panicum. These were used on pp. 665-667 of the First Ed. and later discussed by

Black (1935, 1939). The genera Paspalidinim and Digitaria are badly in need of

a thorough revision; the latter genus was being studied by Henrard when war

broke out. Urochloa is now to be omitted from the Flora, the indigenous Aus-

tralian species assigned to it by Miss Hughes (1923) now being placed under

Brachiaria, Brachiaria is distinguished from Urochloa by the adaxial position of

the spikelets, so that the lower glume is turned to the axis of the raceme, not away

from the axis as more commonly the cass. In species with divided racemes, such

as B. practervtsa (Domin) C. E, Hubbard, this orientation is often difficult to

observe, but it has been shown by Gardner and Hubbard (1938) that if the tips of

the branches be examined, the orientation is readily seen; further, that the orienta-

tion can also be determined from the lower spikelets on the lateral branchlets.

The genus Spinifer has now been divided into two. The genus Zygochloa

S. T. Blake with one species, Z. paradoxa (R. Br.) 5. T. Blake (1941 ¢, p. 7) has

been erected for Spinifer paradoxus (R. Br.) Benth. The inflorescences of the

two genera are very complicated in structure, but the chief differences between

the genera are that the male spiklets of Zygochloa are paniculate in the head, not

spicate as in Spinifea, the female heads are not spiny hut provided with prominent

winged “bracteoles” under the spikelets, while the upper lemma of the latter is dis-

tinctly hardened with firm more or less involute margins. Spinifer hirsutus

Labill, remains the correct name for the coastal species, though Black (1933,

p. 143), following Domin (1915, p. 333), has used the combination S. inerme

Banks & Sol. ex Hook. f. for this plant. The latter combination is based on

Jxalum inerme Forst., but both Mr. C. E. IIubbard and Dr, H. H. Allan have

informed me that the latter is a nomen mudi.

Tragus australianus S. T. Blake (1941 b, p. 12) replaces 1. racemosus All.

The latter is a native of Europe introduced into many countries though not yet

into Australia; it differs in that the spikelets are borne in little clusters of three

or more along the main axis, not in pairs as in our plant.

The species of Aristida were fairly recently discussed by Black (1933,

pp. 144-147) on the basis of Henrard’s monumental work. Further study of the

Australian forms with the aid of a greater range of material has compelled vet

another arrangement of the South Australian forms.

Though he does not definitely say so, Black tnplies that he would prefer to

regard A. Muelleri Henr. as synonymous with A, Browniana Henr., and I have

been forced to the same conclusion. As in most species of the genus, the dimen-

sions of the spikelet-parts vary considerably, and in the A. Browniana—aA.

Muelleri complex there is undoubtedly a complete intergrade between the dimen-

sions as given by Henrard for the two species. The variation in one character is

{frequently independent of the variation in another or of differences in habit or

facies. Henrard’s suggestion that A. Browniana may be the result of hybridism

between A. Muelleri and A. arenaria Gaud. cannot be accepted on field evidence.

A. Browniana is not uncommon along the cast coast of Queensland and on the

adjacent islands, a very long way from the known eastern limit of A. arenaria or

of any forms referred by Henrard to 4. Muelleri. It may be noted that the type

locality of A. Browmniana is decidedly coastal, in the North. A. Muellert appears

to be an extreme form of 4. Browniana, and there are comparable forms of

A. arenaria with spikelet-parts larger than usual, It is not suggested that hybridism

does not occur between A. Browniana (as understood here) and A. arcnaria,

A, latifolia Domin. var. minor J. M. Black has been suuk under the type,

since its dimensions come well within the usual variation of the species.

Aristida echinata Henr, and A. muricata Henr, are confined to a relatively

small area in South Queensland and Western New South Wales, about midway

between the South Australian border and the east coast. The South Australian

specimens referred to these belong to a group of closely allied forms, hitherto

quite inadequately understood, one of which, strangely cnough, was placed by Ilen-

rard under 4. calycina R. Br. as vat. strigosa Henr., in spite of the fact that it has a

tubular lemma, mot furrowed as in 4. calycina. This form is described below as

a new specics, as is also the South Australian material referred to A. echinata and

A, echinata var. nitidula, The Mount Goolwa specimen referred by Black to the

last is a duplicate type of 4. capillifolia Ilenr.

Aristida strigosa (Henr.) S. T. Blake, species nova. A. calycina R, Br, var.

strigosa Henr. in Meded. Herb, Leid., No. 58 A, 297 (1932) (descr. ang.) ;

No. 54€, 708 (1933) (deser. lat.).—Affinis A. echinatae Henr., sed culmis

plurinodibus, foliis longis persistentibus, lermmatibus parce strigosis vel. glabrescen-

tibus haud spinosis differt. Descriptio hic emendata et ampliata.

Grameen perenne, caespitosum, subglaucum, ca, 60-100 em. altum. = Culm

subrobusti, ereeti vel inferne geniculatim adscendentes, 5-8-nodes, simplices vel

raro e nodis superioribus parce ramos, teretes, leviter striatuli, ctiam vel prunetu-

lati vel scaberuli vel laeves, ommino glabri. Pola pro genere bene evoluta, per-

sistentia; vaginae internodiis breviores vel infimae longiores, teretes, arctae vel

infimae plus minusve hiantes, crebre striatae, minute asperulo-punctatae vel plus

minusve scaberulac, glabrae; ligulae brevissimae dense cillatac; auriculae prominu-

Jac, incrassatae, plus minusve barbatae; collum linea angusta plus minusve

incrassata notatum, pubescens; laminae diu persistentes, strictae vel curvulae,

longae, usque ad 20 cm. longae et usque ad 3-5 mim, Jatae, plus minusve involutae

vel prope basem saepe subplanae, apice setaceo-attenuatae. nervis pluribus crebre

pereursae quorum 5-7 primariis aliis admodim validioribus, supra scabrae, subtus

et marginibus (prope apicem exceptis) laeves, vel subtus scaberulae, Panicula

exserta, plerumaue 15-25 cm. longa et (aristis inclusis) 2-3 em. lata, densiuscula

sed juterrupta; rhachis plerumque vistbilis, glabra, striatula, inferne subteres plus

minusve laevis, sursum plus minusve angulata scabra vel scaberula; rami singuli

vel subbini, rhacheos internodtis plerumgue breviores, a hast divisi, cum ramulis

ereeti, appressi, fere filiformes, scaberuli; ramult breves, a basi spieutligeri, sagpe

unispeculati; pedicello anguste clavati, trigoni, scaberuli, laterales 0-9-2 mm. longi,

terminales usque ad 6 nm, longi. Spreulue pallidae vel atroviolaceu-suffusac.

Glyimae lanceolatac, subacutae, frme membranaceac, subhyalinae, l-nerves, rectae,

cuspidatae, glabrae. 6-8°5 mm. longae, subacquales sed superior O°7-1+S mm,

fongior; inferior acuminata, carina oninina parece scabra, lateribtts laevis ; superior

aaucd acuminata, altius biloba, inter lobos lanceolatos acutos uristulata, carina

rope apicent et atistula scaberula, ecterum laevis, Leming fusco-macuiatum,

glumis subbrevius, lanceolato-lineare, tubulosum, superne leviter carinatum,

ateribus leviter compresstm, iminttissime punetulatum, carina plus minusye

scabrum et lateribus superioribus pilis albidis tenuibus appressis e tuberculis

minutis ortis parce strigostmn, cum callo angusto obtusiusculo 1-1°25 mm, longo

reviuscule barbato 7-11 mim. longum. 0°5-0-6 mm. Tatum. Colnmna nulla.

ristae stibsimiles, oblique patulac, scabrae, tenucs, basem verstis conspicue

yplanatae, 12°5-15 min. longae,

QueENsLANp—Gregory North District: Tulmur, 22° 30’ S.. 142° 25’ E., on

stony creek bank amidst Triodia sp., ca. 080 feet, Ll May 1936, Blake 77431 (pri).

Gregory South District: Mount Margarct Station, near Eromanga, on stony ercek

finals and bed, ca. 780 feet, 3 July 1936, Blake 11906 (prt).

CENTRAL AusrRALIA — Hermannsburg. 16 August 1929. Cleland K. 21

(CL. ri); Horseshoe Bend, Finke River, 23 August 1931, /stig 2355 (31); Mary-

vale, 8 January 1927, Cleland H. S02 (Cl mri}; Pinta Spring, 7 August 1932,

Cleland L.73 (Cl, pri).

Sourt AustraALia—lfar North: Swallow's Creek," 3 May 1942, Tate

(Ap) ; Arkaringa Creek, 15 May 1892, Helms (Ap, MEL, pri, BL; Type; duplicate

types of 4. calyeina var. striyosa) ; Aldinga, in sandy soil, 15 May 1937, Clarke

(Bl); Cordillo Downs in watercourse, May: 1924, Cleland (Cl, Bl).

Aristida nitidula (Heur.) S. T. Blake, species nova, A, echinata [lenr. var.

nitidula Henr. in Meded. llerb. eid. No. 58 A, 285 (1932) (deser. angl.);

No, 54C, 714 (1933) (deser. lat.).— Affinis A. platyehaetae S. ‘T, Blake, sed

culmis plurinodibus, internodiis a vaginis obtectis, foliis plus numerosis longiori-

bus rigidioribus aioe ore densius barbatis, Jemmatum callo aristisque

hrevioribus differt; ab 4. echinatac Jlenr, culmis minus ramosis, foliorum laminis

longioribus persistentibus eorum vaginis arctis internodiis longioribus, spiculis

brevioribus, glunis laevibus nitidulisq ue, aristis brevioribus latioribus differt.

©) So reads the label; neecrdiiue to J. M. Black (1933, 146) the locality is probabiy

Swallow's Waterhole, 10 miles north of Oodnadatta.

Gramen perenne, caespitosum, foliosum, stibelaucum, 20-40 cm. altum.

Culm erecti, stricti, graciles, glabri laevesque, simplices vel ramosi, 3-6-nodes,

internodiis brevibus summo longo excepto. J/’olio plura, longa, stbsetacea, sub-

glaucescentia; vaginae arctae vel basales tandem patentes, internodiis (summo

excepto) longiores, obscure pauci-stria‘ae, asperulae, ore barbatae ceterum glabrae;

auriculae obscurae, glabrae; collum glabrum; laminae flexuosae, sctaceo-involutac

vel -convolutae raro bast planac, 9-13 em, longae (summa vix ebbreviata) et

0-6-0°8 mm. latae (explanatae usque ad 2 mm. latae), supra hirtellae subtus

scabridae vel sublaeves. Panicula tandem longe exserta, linearis, 13-25 cm, longa,

circiter 1*5 cm. lata (aristis inclusis), sparsiflora; rhachis inferne angulata laevis,

sursum plus minusve applanata et scaberula. ommino glabra striatula visibilis; rami

bini erecti, rhacheos internodiis breviores et ad ea appressi, sparse divisi vel

simplices, angulato-hliformes, scaberul:, a basi fere spiculigeri; pedicelli filiformes,

scaberuli, apice vix incrassati, terminales usque ad 9 nin. longi, laterales brevissimi

vel subnulli, Sprewae erecti, pallidac vel plus minusve atroviolaceae. Glumae

tenuiter membranaceae, l-nerves, nitidae, subaequales, normales vel interdum

inversac ; inferior lanceolato-linearis, acuta, cuspidata, carina nonnunquam scabra

ceterum laevis, 7*1-10°3 mm. longa; stperior linearis, anguste obtusa, saepe emar-

ginata, mucronulata, laeves, 7*9-10°1 mm. longa, inferiore tsque ad 0-8 mm. longa

vel ad 0:2 mm. brevior. Leia anguste lineare sursum vix vel haud angustatum,

tubulosum marginibus convolutum. dorso prominule carinatum, atro-maculatum,

basem versus punctulatum, ceterum pilis crassis conicis hyalinis albidis saepe

ereberrimis antrorsim spinulosum, basi in callo abruptius angustato, cum callo

6°5-9'4 mmm, longum, glumis brevius; callos angustus haud pungens (basi Jate

rotundus) O-9-1-i mm. longus, pilis brevibus usque ad 1-1 mm. longis barbatus.

Colamua nulla. Aristue siniles, subaequales obliquae, rigidae, rectae sed saepe

leviter tortae, tenues sed Jatae, planae vel leviter concavae, scabrae et scaberulae,

supra basem versus fere hirtulae, 11-18 mm. longac, medialis fateralibus usque ad

1 mm. longior.

Western AusTrRALIA—Eastern Division: Victoria Desert, on sandstone,

4 September 1891, Helms (Ap, Br1, MEL, NSW). Central Division or Eucla

Division: Fraser’s Range, on gneissic formation, 23 October 1891, Helis

{AD, MEL),

CENTRAL AusTRALIA~—Lander’s Creek near Mount Thomas, 10 August 1931,

Cleland H. 342 (Cl, Bl); Alice Springs, 7 August 1929, Cleland K.22 (C1), July

1922, Allen 566 (NSw, BRI), Heavitree Gap, 29 May 1935, Cleland (Cl); Her-

mannsburg, 11 August 1929, Cleland £7. 103 (C1); Haast’s Bluff, 20 August 1932,

Cleland L.72 (Cl, pris rype); John’s Creek (ap).

SourTn Ausrraria—Far North-west: Ernabella, Musgrave Range, 16 August

1933, Cleland (Cl, Bl, ari}; roek-hole 10 miles north of Ernabella, 16 August

1933, Cleland (31); near Mount Goolwa, south of Musgrave Ranges, on diorite

rock, 18 June 1891, Helins (Ap). Far North: Tinniss Springs, 21 December

1926, Warren (21); 7 miles south-west of Maree, 26 August 1934, Cleland (BI,

BRL); Mount Parry Gap, April 1883, Tate (Ap) ; Aroona Range, stony hill slopes

(Ab); Moolooloo, October 1915, S$. 4. White (Bl); Mount Chambers Gorge,

30 May 1937, Cleland (C1); north of Haretta, 3 December 1930, Cleland H.& (Cl,

BRI),

QuEENSLAND—Burke District: Selwyn, on stony ground, ca. 1,250 fect.

25 June 1934, Blake 64035 (arr). Gregory North District: Elderslie, west of

Winton, on upper part of Mount Booka Booka, among quartzitic rocks, ca.

750 feet, 29 October 1935, Blake 10050 (per).

While | have not seen a representative of the type collection of Henrard’s

variety, there are several specimens in the Cleland Herbarium determined by Hub-

bard and apparently compared with the duplicate-type; one of these, from near

the original locality, has been chosen for the type of the species. The spikelets

are very similar to those of 4. echinata Henr., except that the glumes are shining,

smooth or nearly so, and the lemmas are shorter with shorter and broader awns.

In vegetative characters, however, the species is very distinct in being less

brafthed, more leafy, and with the leaf-sheaths longer t than the internodes,

The three species, A. a Tg Heur., 4. nitidida (Henr.) S. T. Blake,

and A. stvigosa (Henr.) 5S. T. Blake, are closely allied and sometimes resemble one

another to some extent. 4. capillifolia is distinguished particularly by the

extremely slender culms, leaves, lemmas, and awns; the culms are usually

fastigiately branched from the lower nodes; the lemma is scabrous on the keel

and sometimes also on the sides with small slender hairs; the callus, only 4 mm.

long, is the shortest of all South Australian species and is also only shortly

bearded, A. strigosa is the tallest and stoutest species; in spikelet- characters it

resembles the former, but the lemma is steuter, bearing appressed anita based

hairs which are sometimes reduced to the tubercles, and the considerab ly longer

callus (1-14 mm. long). A. nitidula is especially distinguished by the Gaually

simple or nearly simple culms densely covered with leaf-sheaths, the sheaths and

blades more or less scabrous and sometimes strongly so, in the stout, very spiny

lemmas not perceptibly narrowed in the upper part, and by the extraordinarily

broad and flat awns; elongated specimens sometimes appr oach A. capillifolia in

appearance.

Most of the Australian species of Sporobolus have been discussed elsewhere

(Blake 1941 b, p. 3-12 and p. 22). S. Mitchellii (Trin.) C. EK, Hubbard (1941,

p. 26) replaces 5. zirginicus var. pallidus Benth., being a species quite distinct

from S. virginicus (1..) Ikunth in habit, foliage, and detailed structure of in-

florescence and spite S. capensis Kunth replaces S. fidicus CL.) R. Br., which

name is properly applied to a species not known to occur in Austraha, S. Caroli

Mez has to replace S. Lindleyi (Steud.) Benth.; the latter is based on Pilfa

Lindleyi Steud., a name-chauge for Sporobolus pallidus Lindl, which was

described from a specimen of Eragrostis japonica (Thunb) Trin.

The Australian species previously referred to aap oeunn t are now placed

under Enneapogon (sce Black, 1938, p. 352) and have recently been revised in

an excellent paper by Burbidge (1941). I aim indebted to Miss Burbidge for a

type-written copy of her key. and notes and other assistance while engaged in

working up the South Australian forms before her paper was publist red. Nine-

teen species are now recognised as occurring in Australia, of which seven occur

in this State, though none are restricted thereto.

Plectrachne Helmsii C. E. liubbard (1941, p. 29) replaces Triraphis

bromoides F. Muell., which is Plectrachue bromotdes (F. Muell,) C. E. Hubbard.

Plectrachne differs from Vriraphis in the Triodfa-like habit and firmer, several-

nerved, 3-awned lenimas; it is close to Triedia, but the lobes of the lemma are

elongated and awn-like, while the upper lemmas are sterile and reduced to a bunch

of awns as in Triraplits.

The genus “riachne includes a large number of species, chiefly restricted to

Australia; it was being studied by Mr. W. IJartly, of the C.S.1-R., Canberra, who

has kindly given permission to use his manuscript name 4, Benthami for the form

previously placed as a variety of , avald Nees.

F. seleranthoides F. Muell. has been omitted from the Second Edition, as an

examination of the wpe in herbarium Melbourne has convineed me that this

species has not been collected since its original discovery at Mount Olga, Central

Australia, by Giles in 1875. The specimens generally referred to E. scleranthoides

represent reduced or sttnted states of . mucronata R, Br. with short, closely-

branched culms densely covered by leat-sheaths and with inflorescences of tew

spikelets. This state is very different from typical £. mucronata which has longer

less-branched culms with exserted nodes, but the two are connected by a complete

series of intermediate forms. A. scleranthoides var. clongata Benth. of which ]

have seen duplicate-types, is also a form of &. imucronata, The true FE. seleran-

thoides is a very distinet species of different habit with villous intricately-branched

culms, tiny leaves more or less flat in their lower part, and smaller spikelets with

the lemmas actite, not acuminate in profile. E, Helimsti Domin is a species allied

to EZ. mucronata, but differs therefrom in that the base of the plant is pro-

minently woolly as are usually also the lower internodes, the leaves are flatter, the

spikelets are larger on shorter pedicels, and the lemmas are longer than (not sub-

equal to) the glumes, acute and not gamapny acumunate in profile. The type was

collected by Helms on sandstone in the Victoria Desert, camp 40, Western Aus-

tralia, on 4 September 1891, and is represented in the Tate Herbarium. The

same form was also described by Domin (1915, p. 359) as EL. mucronata var.

qilliculmis Domin, and on p. 361 as £. mucronata var, Helinsti Domin. E. ovata

var. pedicellata J. M. Black (1922, p. 565) is also based on a specimen of

iE. Helms; the other South Anstralian specimens were included under

EE. mucronata in the First Edition.

The shape of the lemma in profile and its length relative to the egltmes are

very useful characters for distinguishing species in the genus.

Eragrostis Clelandii 5. 7. Blake; species nova, afinis E. lanipedi C » Ee

Hubbard, sed culms 4-8-nodibus, vaginis imternodiis plerumque Ce bal

laininis angustioribus, lemmatibus brevioribus ditfert.

Greainen perenne, caespitosum, viride, erectum, 20-30 cm. altum, basi bulbosa-

inerassatum lanatum, Culm teretes, siruplices, graciles, stricti vel inferne leviter

geniculati, plerumque 4-8-nodes, temuiter striati, glabri, laeves vel admodum

asperuli, basi squamtis pallicdis multis dense breviterque lanatis obtecti, /folioruin

magitee arctae, striatac, scaberulae vel fere laeves, ore pubescentes nonnunquain

etiam sparse barbatac, marginibus plerumque ciliolatae, ceterum glabra, internodis

longiores vel interdum eis breviores, inferiores in squanus basalibus mutatis;

jayititete oblique patentes, curvulae, breves sed interdum usque ad 10 cm. longae,

inferiores brevissimaé, plerumque arete setaceo-involutac, explanatae 1-1-5 im.

latac, supra hirtellae, subtus scaberulae. Panicula tertiam partem plantae

occupatis, oblonga vel anguste pyramidalis, laxa; rhachis inferne teres sursum

complanata vel angulata, glabra, majore parte laevis; rami solitari distantes,

patentes vel deflexi, rigidi, admodum flexuosi, surstm scaberuli, inferiores usque

ad 3 em. longi, a basi divisi; ramuli pauci, brevissimi, S'picilae sessiles, patulae,

purpurea, singuli vel 2-4-ni glomerati, late oblongae, obiusae, conrypressae, vix

sulcatae, 3-5 mm, longae, 2-3 mm. latae, 7-12-florac; rbachilla fere recta, robusta,

haud articulata, internodiis ca. 0-5 niu. longis. Gluntae subaequales, ca, 1°25 mm.

longae, obtusissimae, I-nerves, ciliotatac, sttperior mucronata. Lenimata arete

imbricatas admodum patulae, 1:75-2 mm, longac, a latere visae fere semi-

orbiculares, explanatae siborbiculares obtusissimae, mucronatae, lateribus laeves,

marginibus inferioribus longiuscule ciliatae, uervis subtenmbus sed prominulis,

carina sursum scaberula, nervis lateralibus inter carina marginibusque aequi-

distantibus admodum curvulis, Palea obovata fere truncata, 3 lemmatis aeqtti-

longa, carinis ct margine superiore pilis tenuibus mollibus longittsculis densiusculis

ciliata. Stamrna 3; antherac 1 mim, longae. Carvopsis ignota.

Soutn AtsrrALiA—lar North-west: Ooldea Soak, 17 August 1939, /. B.

Cleland, (ari, Cl).

This species, dedicated to its discoverer, is easily distinguished by the short

broad spikelets scattered or in distant small clusters, and the very broad mucronate

lemmas bearded along the margins in the lower part. here is, unfortunately, no

ripe grain in the fine series of specimens collected by Prof. Cleland. Amongst

South Australian species, it seems closest to E. eriopoda Benth. and L. léniflora

benth.. differing from both in the shape of spikelet aud Icnma and the less densely

woolly base of the plant, and from the former also in the densely bearded lemmas.

‘Twenty-one species of Eragrostis are now known to occur in South Australia,

some of which have been discussed by Black in various papers (1924, p. 253; 1931,

p. 136-7; 1933, p. 147-148; 1935, p. 252). The species are very difficult to dis-

criminate and circumscribe, and the usual arrangement based on the shape of the

spikelets proved impracticable. The degree to which the lenmas spread varies

considerably in some species, sometimes even on the same spectinen, and this

results in a corresponding variation in the tereteness or flattening and often in the

presence or absence of furrowing of the spikelet. ‘he lemma itself provided very

useful characters, and the shape of this organ, either flattened or in profile, taken

in conjunction with the nervature, served to distinguish two difficult groups. As

a general rule lemmas which were broadest at or about the nuddle were very obtuse

aud had the lateral nerves midway between the midnerve and the margins, whereas

those broadest distinctly below the nuddle are much narrowed towards the more or

less acute tip and have the lateral nerves close to the margins. Doubtful cases were

eliminated earlier in the key. The shape of the grain is, on the whole, very

constant. but as it is rarely seen in FE, setifelia and allied species and is unknown

in E. Clelandii and FE. infecunda, it cannot be used as a leading character, The

length of the anthers is usually a very constant character for each species, though

for obvious reasons it has not been used in the key. But for reference purposes

it might be interesting to mention that small anthers, 0°25 mm. long or less, are

characteristic of FE. japonica (Thunb.) Trin., £. coufertiflora J. M. Black,

EL. Kennedyae Turner, £. leptocarpa Benth., &. parviflora (R. Br.) Trin.,

E. Basedowii Jedwabnik, F. elongata (Wild.) Jacq., &. facunaria F. Muell. ex

Benth., and £. Barrelieri Daveau; medium-sized anthers, 0-4-0-6 mm. long, are

confined to E, falcata Gaud., E. Dielsii Pilger, and £. cilianensis (Al.) Link ex

l.utati; large anthers, mostly 0°75 mm. long or more and up to 1°5 num. long are

found only in FE. Clelandii S. T. Blake, FE. laniflora Benth. E. eriopoda Benth.,

Lf, setifolia Nees, E. xerophila Domin, FE. infecunda J. M. Black and LE. austrati-

ensis (Steud.) C. E. Hubbard. E. speciosa (R. & S.) Steud, has anthers 0°25-

0-4 nm, long, intermediate between the first and scond groups.

In the Second Edition, LE. parviflora (R. Br.) Vrin. replaces F. pilosa (1..) Beauv.

with which it was united in the Flora Australiensis, but £. pilosa differs in having

hairs in the axils of the lower panicle branches, longer pedicels, more prominently

nerved and more acute lemmas and more compressed grain. It is a native of the

Mediterranean region, whence it has been introduced to many countries but not

yet to South Australia. ££. elongata (Willd.) Jacq, and E. Brown CXunth )

Nees are often difficult to distinguish. Unfortunately Domin (1915, p. 399) mis-

identified E. elongata with E. Brownti and accordingly sunk the latter under the

former, at the same time keeping as distinct £. diandra (RK. Br.) Steud. This

treatment was followed by Black (1933, p. 147). Mr. C. E. Hubbard has recently

studied the types of these species, and he has informed me that £. diandra is

conspecific with £. elongala and must therefore be regarded as a synonym of the

latter, while E. Brownii is a distinct species. The latter, as at present understood,

is quite a variable species, but the deseription in the Second [dition is based on

South Australian specimens.

The group of species including #. trichoplilia Benth., E. faleata Gaud.,

he. lucunaria F. Muell. ex Benth.. i. Rankingii F, M. Bail. and E. Dielsit Pilger

scems frequently to have caused considerable difficulty. In the Flora Australiensis,

E. faleata embraced the form described many years later by Pilger (1904) as

FE. Dielsii. Domin (1915, p. 392) placed FE. lacunaria and LE. Rankingti as

eae

synonyms of [:. falcata. Miss Vickery had become convinced that FE. faleatu and

E. lacunaria were distinct species with distinct areas ef distribution, and kindly

placed at my disposal her notes and the specmens in the Sydney Herbarium.

There seems ~ sleagot that Miss Vickery is correct, and that these species are

quite distinct. falcata is especially characterised by the ob diquely spreading

spikelets with es lemmas broadest about the middle with the nerves

equally distributed. anthers 0°3-0°65 mm. long, and dorso-ventrally compressed

grain; it is confined to Western, Central, and South Australia. FE. lacunarie, on

the other hand. has the spikelets nearly divaricately spreading with the lemmas

broadest distinetly below the middle and distinctly narrowed upwards with the

lateral nerves approaching the margin, anthers about 0°25 mim. long, and pro-

minently laterally compressed grat; it occurs along the River Murray, but is

otherwise restricted to the Eastern States. Both species may be glabrous or with

hairy culms and leaves. /. trichophyita was described from specimens collected

north of ltowler’s Bay by Giles in 1873, and to judge from a picee of the type in

herbarium Sydney and a duplicate type in fects tat Melbourne. it is a hairy

form of L. falcata, and is ‘ine formally reduced to a synonyi of the latter species

Ei. Rankingii, described from Queensland specimens. is conspecilic with

is. facunaria, £2, Dielsii is closely allied to FE. Sate Bie but has more nearly sessile

and often coarser spikelets, rather larger, much thinner concavo-convex grain, a

different appearance, and is usually an annual. The lemmas are commonly t tightly

imbricate aud the spikelet is then terete, but frequently they become looser “with

the spikelet then somewhat compressed or even furrowed. Small specimens with

such spikelets constitute E. Dielsii var, Pritselii Pilger, Lc.. to judge from dupli-

cate types in herbarium Sydney, but individual specimens may show such a range

of variation in this respect that it seems impracticable to uphold the variety.

The name /°. major Host has been shown by Sprague and C. 1. Hubbard

(1933) to be illegitimate. There are two other rival names for the species,

He, megastachya Luink, Hort. Berol. 1. 187 (1827), and F, cilianensis (AML) Link

Cx wipes in Malpishia, 18, 386 (1904). based on Pea cilianensis All, T'1. Pedem.

2, 246, t. 81, f. 2 (1785). According to authors who have seen Alioni’s work,

this abr was published with a poor description and a worse figure. Henrard

(1940, p. 420- 429) argues, but not very convincingly, that they refer to a tric

Poa, and suggests that the ‘type specimen has heen lost and that the name should

be rejected as a nomen ambiguuim. But according to lf. T. Hubbard (1913)

Tutati saw the specimen in the Herbarium of Balbis who acquired AlHoni’s her-

bariuni after the latter’s death. Under these circumstances, and following the

advice of ©. Fe, Hubbard. the name C. cifianensig (AIL) Link ex |.utati has been

taken up for the Tlora,

Glyecerta ranugera VY. Muell. ex Benth. has been transferred te Eragrostis as

fi. australasica Steud. Syn. Glum. 1, 286 (1854). Poa ramigera ¥. Muell. in

Trans, Viet. Inst.. 43 (1855) is another synenyin. lts shrubby habit gives this

grass a peculiar appearance, but it agrees with Eragrostis in the 3-nerved lemmas,

in the structure of the grain, and in the anatomy of the leaf. Mr. Hubbard tells

me that in habit it resembles some African species.

Glyceria Lordeana Vv. Muell. has been referred to Poa as 2. fordeana

I. Mucll. because the free lodicules, the grain adnate to the palea. and the indu-

mentum of the lenmna appear to accord better with this genus. The Australian

species of Poa are badly in need of a revision, but the lack of time and inaceesst-

bility of many types has prevented this being accomplished for the Flora. There

seem to be sever ‘i species in South Australia. True P. caespitoca Forst. is pro-

bahly confined to New Zealand.

No revisional work on Stipa or Lanthonia was done by me. Deyeuria anc

-lyrostis have been recently revised by Vickery (1940, 1941).

Cy PERACEAE

So many changes in this family were found to be necessary, that the whole

account has been re-written. ‘The order of the genera in the First Edition has

been retained, though it differs from that usually accepted at the present day,

The genus Cyperus has recently heen monographed by Witkenthal (1935),

and in this work the genus Ayllinga has been united with Cyperus. This seems a

lugical act, for although characteristic species of Ayllinga, such as those found

in Australia, are very well marked off from those of characteristic Cyperas, there

is a large proportion of intermediate species. The single South Australian species

affected is C. brevifolius (Rottb.) Suringar, based on A. brevifotia Rottb.

A, intermedia R. Br. is sometimes regarded as distinct and has been kept up as

a variety by Wikenthal as C. brevifolius var slellilatus Suringar, but the alleged

cifferences between the two are so inconstant and occur in so many combinations,

that it seems quite impracticable to distinguish the two forms.

C, exaltatus Retz. var. minor J. M. Black was based on a starved specimen

and has been sunk under the typical form of the species.

©. rotundus L. and its allics have been the subject of a recent paper (Blake,

1942). in which it has heen shown that this name has been used for many different

species in Australia. C. rotundus is purely a weed of agricultural areas, but two

distinet inland species occur in this State, namely, C. eictortensis C. B. Clarke

and ©. bulbosus Retz. The last is uoteworthy on account of the irregularly

corymbose inflorescence; the record of C. subulatus R. Br. in the First Edition,

taken from the Flora Australiensis, refers to this species.

C. vayinatus R. Bro and C. gymmocaulos Steud. have jrequently been con-

sidered to be conspecific (as in the lirst Edition) er else the latter has been

considered to be a subspecies (C. caginatus R. Br. subsp. gymnocaulos (Steud,

Ktikenth.) ) or variety (C. vaginatus var. deusiflorus Benth.) of the former. In

general, the two species are readily distinguishable as the following table indicates:

C. vaginatus C. gyntnocailas

Stems ess | Cylindrical, only faintly strio- More or less trigonous, at least

late. / at top, rather distinctly striate.

i . ‘ |

Gracts ce 2 Numerous, mostly 3-8, firm 3-4, usually less than 5 em.

but not particularly rigid, not ' long, very rigid and pungent

pungent, flat, 2-6 mm. wide, up © with incurved margins.

to 15 cm. long, always more

than 5 cm. long.

Inflerescence - ~ Umbel-like with elongated rays Capitate or umbel-like with

bearing digitate clusters of | I-4 short rays bearing globose

| spikelets. » heads of spikelets.

| |

Spikelets -~ + | Linear or oblong-linear, 8- | Ovate to lanceolate - ovate.

Glumes o- = - About 2 um. long, rigid. 2-23 mm. long, thinner and less

_ rigid.

Nut = - - = f nun. long. 1-L} am. Tong.

However, particularly from South Australia, several specimens seen are

intermediate in appearance; the species may hybridise to some extent, but definite

field evidence is Jacking and the specimens seen are mostly too immature or other-

wise imperfect for critical study. Ktikenthal (1935, p. 190) has described a

C. vaginatus var. pseudotextilis Kiikenth, but the specimens I have seen from the

collections cited agree exactly with R. Brown’s description.

C, flabelliformis Rottb., a native of Africa but cultivated in ee parts af

the world, has been found naturalised at Waterfall Gully by J. B. Cleland on

9 April 1942,

C. congesius Vali, a native of South Africa but introduced to Western Aus-

tralia and New South Wales, has been found in South Australia as a garden weed

at Burnside by J.T}. Cleland, February 1940. It has sometimes been mistaken for

C. rotundus, but no tubers are produc ‘ed and the stems are usually tufted,

C. clarus 5. T. Blake (1940a, p. 44) has been added on the evidence of an

mupe rleet specimen in a very young flower collected by Miss Staer at Oodnadatta

m June 1914. The specimen is too poar for certain determination aad comes

from a locality far distant from any cther known. for the species, but looks more

like this than any other,

C. rutdans C. B. Clarke replaces the record of C. alferniflorus BR. Br. Vhe

latter species is known only from a very few specimens from widely separated

localities in Western Australia, Western New South Wales, and Queensland, and

is a much coarser, densely tufted plant with differently shaped spikelets, glumes,

and nuts.

C. rigidelius (Benth.) J. M. Black has been discussed elsewhere (Blake,

1940a, p. 43}; it ad des the specimens referred in the First Edition to C, enermis

R.Br. and C. enerets var. lavus R. Br. What may be a dtuplicate-type is in the

Tate Herbarnin,

The name C. laewigatus L. has now been used to cover ail Australian forms

which have been referred to this specics and to C. distachyus All, After studying

authentic specimens of these species from the Mediterranean region, 1 can find

little difference between them and the Australian specimens seem to be inter-

mediate.

The Australian plant frequently known as C. Eragrostis Vahl (1806) not of

Lam, (1791) has uow to be called C. sauguinolentus Vahl. Lake so many annual

species of Cyperus this species varies greatly in stoutness and degree of devel elop-

ment according to the amount of available water. In wet places the plants are

often above 30 cm. high with rather stout stems and well developed umbel; in

laces which dry out rapidly the plants are often quite tiny with very slender

stems and inflorescences reduced 19 a single cluster of very few spikelets. It was

on such plants as these that C. Lragrestis var. pauperata J. M. Black was based ;

he variety is not upheld in the Second Edition.

The genus Scheenrs has also recently been revised by Kuikenthal (1938),

Mit several species were a ae known to lim. Some species have still more

recently been discussed by Black (1939, 1940) and Blake (1940a).

Specimens of two species ee to unrecorded for South Australia were found

in the Tate Herbarium. One of these, S. feaiilis Benth., is without label, but is

srestunably from South Australia; otherwise the species is restricted to Western

Australia. The second species is S. manus (Nees) Benth. collected at Goiden

Grove in June 1878, presumably by Tate; this species ranges from Western Aus-

traha to Victoria.

S. Car as Cheesem. was originally described from New Zealand specimens in

Man. N. Zeal. FL 781 (1906), and its discovery in South Australia is only one

of the many FRY fe finds of lege J. B. ee land, Cleland’s specimens

were first described by Black (1928, p. 225) as S. menocarpus |. M. Black; he

now

later (1929, p. 261) transferred the species to Ciadium, and as such it appeared

in the First Edition, p. 678, and still later (1934, p. 168) transferred it to Tefraria.

The rhachilla of the spiketet is elongated and curved over the fertile flower but

not conspicuously so, and the other characters are also thase of Schocnus, Kiken-

thal, Le. p. 69, treated the South Australian form as S. Carsei var. mtonocarpus

(J. M. Black) Kuikenth.. but 1 can find no difference between the specimens trom

South Australia and those from New Zealand.

Without having seen the specmmens Kikenthal (1938, p. 88) suggested that

the Sonth Australian record of S. sculptus Boeck. might really refer to the closely

allied S. datelaminatus IWukenth. from Victoria and New South Wales, but my

examination of the specimens has convinced me that Black is correet im referring

them to the western S. seulprus,

S. Teppers ¥. Muell. is regarded |

senth. [ have seen no specnnen of the

is distinet.

yw Kukenth. as a var. of S. brevicnuiiniis

latter, but the description suggests that it

The curious and distinctive Fits J. gr Vate had not heen collected

since the original discovery on ues Peninsula, Kangaroo Island. in November

1883, until Prof. Cleland found it at "Moin Compass on 26 October 1940.

On the grounds of priority, & subaphavtius Kikenth, (1938, p. 179) replaces

S&S. apliyllits Boeck. (1874) non Vahl (1806),

Tetrarta capillaris ie Muctl.) J. M, Black (1934, p. 169) replaces Clad tun

a at ( Benth.) C. B. Clarke. The glumes distichous or nearly so, the lower

flower alone barren w hen ‘the spikelets are more than 1-Howered, and the occasional

presence of minute hypogynous bristles are characters at variance with Cladteui.

and together with the prominent style-base persistent on the ripe nut agree better

with Yetreria than with any ether genus, though the habit does not. The s Specics

extends at least [rom Tasmania to the high mountains of North Oueeuatind: it

occurs apparently also in Western Australia and New Zea‘and, but the specimens

so far seen from these places are often stouter than the others,

In the genus Scirpus six additional species now appear. while one, S. supinus

J... has heen omitted since there is still no record of this species or its poorly

understuod immediate allies from the State. The genus has been the subject of

recent work by A. A. Beetle (1941, 1942) and myself (1937, 1940 b). Beetle’s

work has been of the greatest importance in fixing the identity of the larger Aus-

tralian species and their relationships with the American forms, Jt is now evident

that the Australian plant commonly known as S. lacustris |. or S. lacister Li. is

really S. velidus Vahl. Vhe former species is restricted to ives with a variety

extending into Asia, while the latter is restricted to the countries bordering on the

Pacific Ocean. S. calidus differs from typical S. lacustris in the smooth, not

scabrous outer involucral bracts, non-reddish glumes, and coustantly 2-lid styles;

and from S. lacustris var. dabernecinoiani (Gmel.j Doll. (== S. tabernaemontani

Gmel. to which Kikenthal refers the Australian plant in Engl. Bot. Jahrb. os St.

1924) in the stouter stems, usually more numerous spikelets with less viscid glumes

and distinctly scabrous rays. Further, the plants referred to S\ meritinits ‘|.. are

recognised as belonging to two ian species, namely, S. marifttiines [2 and

S. fluviatilis (Torr.) A. Gray. The description of S. maritimus in the First

Ledition refers to the latter species. True S. marftinus is a smaller ane more

slender plant with narrower leaves, fewer spikelets, 2-branched style and larger

strongly compressed nut with only two hypegynous bristles, Tt is more character-

istic of saline ground than in S, fludiatilis.

My papers cited above deal with the section Jsolepis as understood hy

Bentham (1878, p. 323). which 1s nepresentsa in Australia and New Zealand hy

a bewildering series of closcly allied species, most of which are very small and

some Gf which are not yet satisfactoriy understood, The eleven South Australian

species are (relatively) fairly easily distinguishable, provided ripe fruit and a good

lens are both available. but the determination of flowering specimens requires

particularly careful observation and some const iderable experience in the group.

S. nodosus Rotth. stands out from the others by reason of its stout rigid habit.

5, productus C. B. Clarke has been adniitted as distinct from S$. fluiians L., and

with ripe {ruit the species are readily distinguishable, the fornier having a distinetly

thickened edge to the nut while that of S. flutians thins from the middle to the

edge. \Well-prepared specimens of S. productus are strongly coloured with

purl, particularly on the leaf sheaths and glumes, while in S. Auilans these parts

ave green or pallid. but if scems that the differences in colour are not quite con-

stant. ‘Terrestrial forms of S. fluéians occur (== S. fluitans var. terrestris E. Mey)

which differ greatly from the floating farms in being tufted with short stems and

frequently the lower-most elume hract-like and foviaed than the spikelet. S. fenti-

eularis (R. Rr.) Poir. is probably this form. Some of Prof. Cleland’s sp yectmens

show the variation from the terrestrial to the aquatic forms, No special terrestrial

form of S. productus nas been observed.

JS, Pauline ORS S. TT. Blake is the Australian representative of ihe luropean

SY. selaccus 1. S. platyear pits S. T. Blake is very similar in appearance and has

often ‘see found mixed in collections with S. calocarpus, but the markings on the

nuts are quite different. S. congruns (Nees) S. T. Blake and 5S. australicnsis

(Maid. & Betche) 5, T. Blake Rate very delicate aes and characteristically

shaped nuts but have been confused with Sv cerimus Vabl.

Qne yerv interesting introduced species is S. Iaimulosus (M. Bieb.) Steven,

here recorded from Australia for the lirst time, The specimens seen are Trom ihe

Far North (Ross’s Waterhole. J. B, Cleland, 2 January 1927) and Central .\us-

tralia (Horn Expedition). | is indigenous to Southern Russia and Southern

Siberia, to Turkestan and Afghanistau, and has probabiv been mtroduced with

camels. Wiikenthal (1985, p. °502} places it under Cyperus (C. hannilosius M.

Bieb.) next to C. aristatus Rotth., to which it bears a close superficial resemblance

and of which it has the characteristic curry-like scent. Tint the glumes are cer-

tainly spirally arranged and the stem frequently bears a leat above the hase,

characters quite at variance with those of Cyperiss.

Very few of the numerous Australian species of Prubristvlis appear to occur

in South Australia, aud of those previousty recorded, /, Nedsomi F. Muell. has

been omitted from the Second Edition. No specimens have been seen from this

State, nor indeed from anywhere near tts boundaries. No specimen of Lf, ferrit-

ae has yet been collected in South Australia, but as the species is known from

the Finke River just within Central \uscralia, it has been retained im the Second

Edition. 2. diphylla (Retz.) Van, as usually understood, is a very pot ym rphic

species, and in this sense it should be known as ae dicholoma (1...) Vahl. But in a

preliminary paper on the genus (Blake, 1940¢) 1 have siteested that several

distinet entities are involvec d. and uncil ore ure Lddpu alte worked ouf it seems

best to use the commonly accepted name f°, diphiylla as the collective name for the

Australian forms. The South Australian speciinens so far collected have all heen

too immature to permit of a satisfactory compar ison with other Australian forms.

The generic name Bilbastylis ee has new been conserved against Steno-

phallus ‘Rat (see Kew Bull, 1940, OL} According! Fidbestylis berbala

(Rotth.) C. B. Clarke replaces Fibre tylis barDute (Rottb.) Benth. and Steno-

phvilus barbatus (Rotth.) Cooke of the First Edition (p. 92 and 677), BR. turbinata

S.P. Blake (1941 a, p. 56) replaces S. capillaris (1..) ritton; the South Aus-

tralian specimens differ from the typical Queensland and Central Australian speci-

mens in having slightly larger nuts and ghimes, but the sp ecimens are too old for

critical exantination. 2. capillariy (f..) CB. Clarke differs in having prominently

bearded leaf-sheaths, glabrous stems, muticous glumes and an asymmetric brown

nut, and has a wide range within the tropics.

The original spelling Eleocharis has to be used instead of Heleocharis (see

Kew Bull., 1940, p. 81). The Australian species were recently revised (Blake,

1939). FL nigrescens (Nees) Steud. is included in the Second Edition on the

authority of a single collection in the Melbourne flerbarium labelled as being

collected by I. von Mueller at cataracts cn Mount Lofty, December 1850. The

species undoubtedly occurs in North Australia and North Queensland, but other-

wise is known chiefly trem Tropical America and Tropical Africa. FE. pusilla

R. Br. replaces E. acicularis (1) RL & S. (cited as Fl. acicularis (1...) R.Br. on

p- 92). &. pusilla is restricted to [xtra-tropical Australia and New Zealand.

while /. gercwlaris has a wide rauge in [urope, Asia, and America, differing from

the Australian plant in a number of minor poimts, stich as the more slender

rhizome, unthickened base of the stem, ‘ess obtuse glumes, and narrower, less

pronunently ribbed nut. The Australian and New Zealand f°. graciis R. Br. is

also considered to ditfer from the European I. nudticaults Sm. in che well-

developed creeping rhizonic, the more slender harder stems, the more rigid orifice

to the Jeaf-sheath, and in details of the nut and bristles. //eleocharis halmaturina

J. M. Black is not a species of Hleacharis; the type-specimens are very youtg, but

possibly are small specimens of Telraria cabillaris with the inflorescence reduced

to a single spikelet.

The species of Lepidosperma are very difficult to define, and the genus is

badly in need of a thorough revision, Up to the present it has been pessible only

ro study the South Australian species and those most closely allied thereto. {n

many species a good series of fruiting specimens has not beci available.

LL, concacvunt R. Br. has been omitted from the Second Edition, as no speci-

men of this species has been seen from anywhere near South Australia. Specimens

of several species have been referred to this species, which is characterised chiefly

by the flat or slightly concave very thin stcis and dense, more or less pyramidal,

panicle, The South Australian specmicus referred to here were found to belong

ta either C. congestim R. Br. or L. laterale R, Br.

L. eveltotuin RK. Br. (1810) has been united under L. loagitudinale | anil.

(1804), as it was found impossible to distinguish two species from among the

laree ntmuber of specimens examined. which ranged from Western Australia to

Queensland, including Tasmania.

LL. laterale R. Br. as at present understood, varies widely in the Eastern

states, but the South Austrahan specimens so far seen have not been sufficient to

allow of a critical comparison,

L visciduim RK. Br. appears also to vary greatly; var. angusticaiude |. M. Black

is af uncertain status, for though it differs widely from some specimens left under

the species, it appears to be connected with these by various intermediates. As in

uearly all species, series of good complete fruiting specimens are required before

anything approaching a final decision can be reached.

£“, tortuosum F, Muell. is admitted to the Flora on the evidence of a few

immature specimens cellected by J. fi. Cleland at Breakneck River, Kangaroo

Island. on 26 January 1940, These appeared to be conspecific with specimens

from New South Wales which were later matched with the type. 7. Mieare var.

? depauperatum Benth. (1878, p. 395) is a synonym.

L. seniueres F, Muell. ex Boeck... L. canescens Boeck. and L. filiforine abil.

constitute a series of closely alhed species. As the lectotype of L. senitteres | have

chosen specimens in the Melbourne Herbarium collected by F. Mueller ‘in arenosis

sterilissinus versus Lacum Alexandrinac’ on 28 April 1848, because the label

bears the name “Lepidosperma senuteres Ferd. Mucll.” in Mueller’s writing. and

agrees best with the description published by Boeckeler, particularly in that the

leaves are short; in most specimens the leaves are rather jong, though shorter than

the stems. The species is best distinguished by the slender leaves and stems, with

the latter not much compressed and the former nearly flat, L. canescens was

described hy Boeckeler from specimens communicated by Ff. Mueller; a duplicate

type is in the Melbourne Herbarium. The specimens were collected at Sond-

bug (?), apparently by Behr, and were originally labelled by Mueller as Schoenus

macrophllus Verd. Muell., a manuscript name cited by Boeckeler but never other-

wise pubhshed. 1. filiforiic appears to be restricted to Tasmania and the eastern

half of Victoria: it differs from /., caitesecits in the more slender stems with very

slender leaves and bracts hooked at the tip and the constantly reduced unbranched

inflorseenee.

L. carphoides F. Muell, ex Benth, is very distinctive on account of the short

dense blackish inflorescence. Of the three collections in the Melbourne Her-

barium so labelled by Mueller, a sheet of two specimens collected by Mueller at

Lake Alexandrina has been chosen as the fect iie, aa the speciuens agree best

with the published deseriptions.

Cladium precerum S$. 7. bluke; species nova, afiinis C. Marisco (1...) R.Br.

sed culmis robustioribus ramos gerentibus, spiculis minoribus. nuce apice obtusa

haud rostrata differt

Herba dura maxinia, cacspites densissinmos magnos virides efformans, 2-3-5 m.

alia; rhizama squamosuin, senrer at yidetur breve. Culini robusti usque ad

1 em. erassi, duri, fistulosi, inferne subteretes, sursum chtuse trigoni, striolati.

lacves, glabri, multinodes, e nodis superioribus vel gennnas vel ramos foliosos

breves gerentes. folia mutta, longa, glabra, viridia; laminae planac, lineares, 1n

aupicem selaccum triquetrum longe attenuatac, tenuiter multierves, subtus anguste

carinatac, carina marginibusque sursum dense serrulato- scabrae, usyue ad 2-5 m.

longae, longiores 5-15 aim, latae, Bracteae folis breviores angustoresque.

inferiores paniculis partialibus longiores. Puanieule linearis vel oblonga, 13-55 cm.

longa, 3°5-9 em. lata, ¢ corymbis paucis vel pluribus consiructa; rami primar.

(corymborum pedunculi) solitarii, compressi; corymbi compositi vel decompositt,

densi vel densiusculi, plertrmaque 3-7 em. lara; ramuli ultimi filiformes trigoni, alte

striali, laeves, usqte ad circiter 6 nim, longi, Spicudae rubro-brunneae vel fulvo-

brunneac, sessiles, 3-1Oni (plerumgque 3-8ni) im capitulis conglomeratac, supra

glumis 2 vacuis parvis (vel prophyllis) deciduae, ovordeae, sub anthesi acutae sub

fructu plus minusve hiantes 3°5-4°25 nin. lougae, 2-florae ; flores bisexuales, superior

plerumque sterilis. Gluntde ovatae vel suborbiculares, obtussissimae, concavac,

l-uerves, membranaceae, 5-6 persisteutes, summa vacua majuscula, penultima

maxina, inferiores 2-3 gradatin breviores vacuac. Stamina plertunque 2 2 (raro 3),

Salus brevis; stigmaia 3 longa. Nivv subdrupacea, ovoidea, basi rotundata, apice

obtusa vel fere obtusa plus ta nusve rotunda nec rostrata nec acuminata, 2-2°5 mn,

longa, 1°5-2 mm. lata, tandem fuscobrumnea, mitens, laevis; sty o-basis cum

exocarpio spongioso fusa; endocarpium durum,

WesterN Austratra——North-West Division: Nickol Bay district, Welue

{( MEL. ). i

QurenstAnpn—Mitchell District: Bowen Downs. in 1874, Bireh (Met.).

Port Curtis RSAC E pai car Mount Wheeler, on banks of crecks amongst /an-

danus, Thoget 815 (wun.). Wide Bay District: Fraser [sland, dominant in middle

of swamp, 15 etober. 1930, ubbard 4495 (art.). Moreton District: Buderim,

in 1907, Wedd (Bri.); Peel Island, December 1904, Soutter (prt.): Moreton

Island, in 1924, P’hite (yet.): Stradbroke Island, in open fresh-water swanips,

12 December 1934, Blake 7737 (pet.); Stradbroke Island, near Myora in fresh-

water swamps, ca. 0 ft. 5 December 1940, Blake 14306 (TYPE in BRI.). Darling

Downs District: Wyberba, at edge of creck, 23 January 1933, Blake 4634 (rni.)

NEw Soutm WaAvLEsS—North Coast: Richmond River, in 1874, Hodgkinson

(MeL.); Raymond Terrace, Ramey 1883, Betche 26 (aer.). Central Districts:

Duck Creek, Clyde, March 1909, 4. 4A. Hamilton (prt.); Parramatta, [oolls

(Mer. ).

Vicroria—Gippsland: Orbost, January 1904, Grove in herb. Pescott (sve.

Central District: Bank of River eae near mouth, rare, January 1853, Muctier

(MEL.). Western District: Near Cape Otway, March 1877, [alter (art. )3

Tower Hill near Warrnambool, January 1873, Sullivan (uev.), and April 1875

‘Mueller (mMetw.); Lower Glenelg River, in 1891, Eekert (ater.).

Sovurnu AusTRALIA—Southern Districts: Mount Lofty Range, on streamlets,

December 1847, Mueller (aer.) ; Clarendon, December 1881 (ap.}; Bridgewater.

January 1904, Black (BL); Bladkewoex 1, in bed of creck, 1G April 1910, Black

(BL); Encounter Bay, in 1895, Hussey 354 (mev.). South-East: Mosquito

eae 25 November 1882, Tate ? (Ap.}

New CALeponiA—Rio des Pirogues, in swamps, 31 October 1923. H’hite

2279 (sri.); Prony, on banks of streams, in 1913, Zirane (pri. ).

This is the plant commonly referred to C. Mariseus (1...) R. Br. a species

which has been generally considered to be almost cosmopolitan in distribution,

recent study by V. M. Conway, iu Journ. Ecol, 30, No, 1, 211-216 (1942)

suggests that true C. Mariscus is more or less confined to Europe, East Asia. and

parts of Africa, with a possible extension to South Africa, while the other forms

included in it are distinct. Consequently, a more detailed study of all material

available was undertaken, with the result that the Australian and New Caledonian

plant is described above as a new species. It seems distinguishable from all mem-

bers of the group by the branched stem and obtuse (neither beaked nor acuminate)

nut. The culm, at least in its upper part, produces at the nodes vegetative buds

which break through the base of the surrounding leat-sheath and ultimately grow

out into short leafy branches. So far as observed it has only a very short rhizome,

very distinct from the lone creeping one deseribed for C. Afariscus (seen in a

lew specimens!) and other species.

Specimens from Jlawaii have not been seen. To judge from the description

in Hillebrand FL Hawaii 478 (1888). the Llawatian plant, C. leptostachyiin Nees

and Meven, differs from all other species in the group in th hat the stigmatic

branches are 4-6 in number, due to division.

The following key will serve to show the eae of the Australian plant :

Stigmatic branches 4-6; sp’kelets rather pale-coloured. . leplastachyuin Nees & Meyen

Stigmatic branches 2- ee spike’ets brown to rusty- or dark boned

Nut smooth, shining; partial panicles dense.

Nut acuminate or beaked: culms not branched: rhizome long-creeping.

C. Marisens (1) R.Br.

Nut obtusely rounded at tip: culms with leafy branches in upper part: rhizome

short (always? ). CL. precerum S. T. Blake

Nat rather prominently tessellately rugose; partial panicles often loose.

Nut acuminate; common rhachis of panicle deeply canaliculate with scabrous

margius; a rather slender plant from China and Japan. C. chorense Nees

“Nut acute but scarcely acuminate; common axis net channelled. smooth: a stout

American plant, C. fainadiccnse Crantz

Possibly other species occur in America allied to Co jamaicense, but the

specimens seen have been iusufficient to determine this.

Cladium gloimeratum WW. Tyr. (1810, p .237) is the correct name for the species

so called in the First edition, p. 95. On p, 678, following Domin (1915, p, 476),

the combination C. rubiginosum (Forst.) Domin is used, which is based on

Schoenus rubiginosus Soland. ex Forst. Prodr. 89 (1786). Dr. El. EH. Allan, of

Wellington, New Zealand. who greatly assisted ime in the study of species alleged

to be common to Australia and New Zealand, has kindly sent me a copy of the

relevant passage in Vorster’s Prodromus, a work unavailable to me. I agree with

him that Schoenus ribiginesus is a nomen nudum, and therefore the combination

C. rubigivoswit is invalid. Domin cites in synonymy Futrena rubiginosa Spreng.

Fl, Hal. Mant., 1, 29 (1807), of which I have been unable to obtain a copy, and

so cannot determine whether this has any bearing on the question. H. Pfeiffer

(1927, p. 349) has further complicated the position by making a new combination

C. glomeratum (Gaud.) H. Pfeiff. based on Bauniea glomerata Gaud. in Freyein,

Voy. 46, t. 29 (1826), a plant of the Moluccas, but this is illegitimate because of

Brown’s earlier name for the distinct plant, ny the Moluccan plant is properly

known as C. globiceps C .B. Clarke in Kew Bull, Add. Ser., 8, 46 (1908).

Pfeiffer has also (1927, p. 350; 1929, p. 261) rinaile the combination

C. punctatum for the plant known as C. Gunnii Hook. f. In 1927 the combina-

tion was based on Schocnus punctatus R, Br.. but, as he recognised in 1929, this

is a true Schoenus with nothing in common with C. Gunnit. In correcting his

former treatment in 1929, Pfeiffer based the combination on “Schoenus piuclatus

Kth. Enum. 2, 336 (1837), nec. R. Br. (Descriptio iuxta Sieber Agrosth. 19:).”

Now this is wrong for three reasons: firstly, Kunth evidently misidentified

sieber’s plant with Brown’s species, and although his description is drawn trom

Sieber’s teh this does. not give his description the status of that of a new species

(cf. International Rules, Att, 54); secondly, even if it could be accepted that

Kunth’s description is that of a new species, the name is illegitimate on account of

the earlier homonym of Brown, and must not be taken into account in matters of

priority when a legitimate name is available (International Rules, Art. 67); and

thirdly, the combination C. punctatum (Kunth) It. Pfeitf. (1929) (if legitimate)

woud be antedated by the earlier homonym C. punctatwnte CR. Br.) IL. Pfertt.

(1927).

Other synonymy cited by Pfeiffer is as follows:

Lampocarva tenax Wook. f., Fl. N. ZeL, 1, 277 (1855); Schoenus nudus

Steud. Syn. Glum., 2, 165 (1855); Cladinin Guunti and C. laxiflorum Hook f.,

Fl. Pasm., 2, 95 (1856); ¢. abies Boeck, in ie innaea, 38, 236 (1874); Gahnia

sudcata F. Muell. First Gen. Rep., 20, (1879); CL lenar Druce in Rep, Bot. Exch.

C1. Brit, Isles, 1916, p. 615 (197)

Lampocarya tenayr tlook. tf. was founded on New Zealand material; the

specimens which [ have seen from New Zealand do not match the Australian

inaterial, so this and the combination C. fener (Hook. f.) Druce based on it can

be eliminated from the discussion. Gahnia sulcata F. Muell, appears in a list only

is a nomen nudum, and can also be climinated. Cladtuim nudum, to judge from

a duplicate type i the Melbourne Herbarium and from Boeckeler’s description,

with which it agrees, is a distinct though closely allied species from the extreme

south-east part of Queensland and ‘North-east New South Wales, C. Gumi

Hook. f. and C. laviflarian Hook. f. certainly appear to be conspecific, and were

published simultaneously. Since these two species were first united by Bentham

1878, p. 408), his choice of name, C, Gunanii is the correet name for the southern

Australian species generally known by tis name,

Pfeiffer has also (1929, p. 259) treated as a new cumbination C. fetragoniai

If. Pleiff, based on Lepidesperma tetragona Tabill.. but this combination was made

seven ios earlier by Black; the correct citation for the species is C. tefragoniui

(Labill.) J. M. Black, FL S. Aust., 1, 95 (1922).

C, Huttonti T. Kirk is an addition to the Flora. The species was originally

described from New Zealand, and it was Dr. Kukenthal who first drew my atten-

tion to the identity of some Queensland specimens with this species. The South

Australian specimens match those I have seen from New Zealand very closely,

but the Queensland ones differ in a few very minor points. The species probably

occurs in Victoria and New South Wales, but [ have not yet seen specimens from

these States.

C. gracile J. M. Black appears to be conspecitic with C. lavni (Nees) Benth.

and must be reduced to synonymy under the latter. It was described (Black, 1929,

p. 261) from small, poorly developed specimens collected at Breakneck River,

Kangaroo Island, by J. B. Cleland, 5 March 1929, but larger well-developed speci-

mens collected more recently are indistinguishable from specimens of the type-

collection of C. larum in the Melbourne Herbarium, originally described as

Chapellicra laxa Nees in Pl. Preiss., 2, 76 (1846-1847). The spikelets in speci-

mens from both Western Australia and South Australia appear to be either 1- or

2-flowered, whereas those of C. flavum was originally described as being 2-3-

flowcred, and those of C. gracile as 1-flowered.

Gahnia hystrix J. M. Black is a very curious little species from Kangaroo

Island and has the shortest stems and smallest inflorescence of the genus. The

spikelets are sometimes 2-flowered, though given as only 1-flowered in the original

description. The large flowering glume 1s peculiar for Gahnia, but the other

spikelet-characters are those of this genus.

In Carex I have had very great assistance from Mr. I. Nelmes, of the Royal

Botanic Gardens, Kew, who has been making a special study of the Australian

species of this large and difficult genus. C. chlorantha R. Br. has been omitted

from the Second Edition, and C. fasctcularis Boott is admitted as distinct [rom

C. pseudocyperus |. of the Northern Llemisphere. CL Bichenoviana Boott is

treated as being distinct from C. pranila Thunb., differing chiefly in the usually

taller stems, the more numerous male spikes, the shorter, difterently-shaped

utricles, and the usually differently-coloured glumes; no specimen with mature

nuts has yet been seen, Vhe South Australian specimens of C. pula differ from

the prevailing form of this species in the clongated stems, and approach

C. Bichenoviana in appearance. The group of forms allied to CL tuversa R. Br.

is still nor satisfactorily understood, but C. meersa and var. major Boott are

reeorded for the Siate. \ form allied to C. miversa but with nearly nerveless

utricles has been collected by Cleland in the National Park, 30 December 1939, and

perhaps represents another species, but the specimens are incomplete, and until

the group is better understood the collection has been included with C. inverse.

In accordance with modern practice, the term “spike” is used instead of

“spikelet”’; the partial inflorescence in this genus is now considered to consist of

spikes of 1-flowered spikelets.

BIBLioGRAPILY

Berrie, A. A, 1941 Am. J. Bot.. 28, 691-700

Breree, A. A. 1942 Tbid., 29, 82-88

Bentuam, G, 1878 Flora Australiensis, 7,

Brack, J. M. 1922 Flora of South Australia (1)

Brack, J. M. 1922a Trans. Roy. Soc. 5. Aust., 46, 565

Brack, J. M. 1924 Jbid.. 48,.253

Brack, J. M. 1928 [bid.. 52, 225

3xAck, |. M. 1929 Flora of S. Aust., (4) (with additions and corrections)

Brack, J. M. 1929a ‘Trans. Roy. Soc. 5. Aust., 53, 261-262

Brack, J. M. 1931 Tbid., 55, 136-137

suAcK, J. M. 1933 fbid., 57, 143-149

Buack, |. M. 1934 fbrd., 58, 168-169

Brack, J. M. 1935 /bid., 59, 252-254

Buack, J. M. 1936 /bid., 60, 162-165

él

M. 1938 Ibid., 62, 352-353

M. 1939 [bid., 63, 240-243

M. 1940 Jbid., 64, 371

BLAcK,. ].

Brack, J.

Buack, J.

Brake, $. T. 1937 Proc, Roy. Soc. Qld., 48, 90-91

Brake, S. TF. 1939 Ibid., 50, 88-132

Brake, &. T. 1940a Jbid., 51, 32-50

Beaker. S. TT. 1940b fbid., 51, 177-182

Brake, S. T. 1940¢ Unity, Old.. Pap. Dept. Biol., 1, No. 13

BiakE, S. T. 1941a Proc. Roy. Soc. Old., 52, 51

Biake, S. T. 1941b Univ. Qld. Pap. Dept. Biol., 1, No. 18

Brake, S. T. 1941c Jbid., 1, No. 19

BiaKke. 5. T. 1942 Tbid., 2, No. 2

Brake, S. T. 1943 J/bid., 2, No. 3

Brown, R. 1810) Prodromus Florae Novae ]Tollandiae

Burerivce, N. T. 1941 Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., 1940-1941, 52-91

Domin, Kk. 1915 Bibhoth. Bot., 20, heft 85

GarpNer, C. A., and Huprnarn, C, E. 1938 Icones Plantarum, t. 3363

Jlenrarp, J. TH. 1940 Blumea, 3, 411-480

Iuprarp, C. E, 1941 Kew Bull., 25-32

ilupparp, F. T. 1913 Philip. J. Sci.. C., Botany, 8, 159

Huenes, D. K. 1923) Kew Bull, 305-332

KUKENTHAL, G. 1935 Das Pflanzenreich, heft 101

Ktwentitar, G. 1938 Fedde’s Rport, 44, 1-32, 65-101, 161-195

Pretrrer, H. 1927 Jbid., 23, 349-350

Prerrrer, H. 1929 Jbid., 26, 261

Piucer, R. 1904 In Diels & Pritzel, in Engl. Bot. Jahrb., 35, 76

Spracue, fb. A. and Hupparn, C. E. 1933 Kew Bull, 15-18

Vickery, J. W. 1940 Contrib. N.SAV Nat. Ilerb., 1, No. 2

Viewxery, J. W. 1941 [bid., 1, No. 3

THE HYDROLOGY OF THE HUNDRED OF BELALIE, COUNTY

VICTORIA, SOUTH AUSTRALIA, AND ITS SIGNIFICANCE IN SOIL

CONSERVATION AND FLOOD CONTROL

By C. G. STEPHENS, M.Sc., A.A.C.I.

Summary

During 1941 a survey of the soils, erosion position and land-use in the eastern half of County

Victoria was carried out by members of the Soils Division of the Council for Scientific and

Industrial Research. Aerial photographs with a scale of 1" == 20 chains were used as working plans

in the field and on these were marked the data collected, including the stream pattern and the

positions of the watersheds. On the accompanying map (fig. 1) is shown the stream pattern and the

watersheds of the Hundred of Belalie.

THE HYDROLOGY OF THE HUNDRED OF BELALIE, COUNTY VICTORIA,

SOUTH AUSTRALIA, AND ITS SIGNIFICANCE IN SOIL CONSERVATION

AND FLOOD CONTROL

By C, G. Srepuens, M.de., ACL,

| Read 10 June 1943 |

During 1941 a survey of the soils, erosion position and land-use in the eastern

half of County Victoria was carried out by members of the Soils Division of the

Council for Scientific and Industrial Research. Aerial photographs with a scale

of 17% = 20 chains were used as working plans in the field and on these were

marked the data collected, including the stream pattern and the positions of the

principal watersheds. On the accompanying map (fig. 1} is shown the stream

pattern and the watersheds of the Hundred of Belalie.

From the location of the watersheds as shown on the map and from the con-

tour map (fig.2), it is apparent that physiographically the Hundred of Belalie 1s

composed of alternate ridges and valleys which are orientated approximately in a

north-south direction, ‘he ridges of which the Bundaleer Hills and the Brown

Hill Range are the highest are up to 1,000 feet above the valley floors, with an

average difference in elevation of about 400 feet. Jamestown and Belalie North

are respectively 1,495 and 2,024 feet above sea level. ‘Vhe floors of the valleys are

covered by alluvial and collivial material derived from the adjacent ridges. This

deposited material has been transported by a serics of cast to west and west to

east consequent streams of intermittent flow and high gradient. These streams

either join the north to south subsequent streams of lower gradient or are absorbed

in the alluvium of the valley floors in systems of distributaries. The east and west

orientation of the consequent streams, of which Dillowie Creck is one of the

largest, and the north to south flow of the subsequent streams, namely Freshwater

Creek, Belalie Creck, Baderloo Creek and other un-named streams, is very evident

on the map. The subsequent streams are either absorbed in distributaries or are

tributaries of the Broughton River or its tributaries,

Howcehin (1) considercd that the present topography of the area is due, at

least in part, to older and larger north to south rivers which were at some eleva-

tion above the present valley bottoms. These ancient streams predate the Peter-

borough-Olary upwarp and the Lake Frome downthrow, Ile traced their courses

by means of the location of beds of conglomerate and silicihed stream gravels.

Quite a number of these beds are to be found in the Hundred of Belalie and the

adjoining Hundreds. However, Fenner (2) considers Howchin’s conclusions to

be erroneous, and more receut work by Langtord-Snuth (3) mdicates that syn-

clinal folding and erosion of amticlines have been involved in the production of the

alternate ridge and valley structure. Another feature related to the topography

is the unusual direction from south to north of the headwaters of Baderloo Creek

and some of its tributaries, and another un-named stream Iving to the west across

the valley in the Bundatecr Hills. These streams, alter running north for some

distance, turn around the end of minor watersheds (at Y and Z on the map) and

then take up a north to south direction, the same as the other subsequents.

Trans. Roy. Suc. S. Aust., 67, (1), 30 Jitly 1943

BELALIE

HYDROGRAPHIC MAP

HO oF

~ SCALE

Areas of Ocpasition in fluad af January (941..

“

rs.

Fig. 1

The catchment areas delineated by the watersheds have been labelled A (1, 2

and 3), B, C, D, E and F on the plan. The areas of these as estimated by plani-

meter are shown in Table 1.

TaAs.e [

Areas of Catchments in the Hundred of Belalie

CATCHMENT AREA IN SQ. MILES

A (Al 2:9)

(A2 3:5) 8:0

(A3 1-6)

B 13°2

C 10°5

D 28°5

E 37°4

i 48-7

Total 146°3

The position of the watershed between catchments D and F is not easy to

discern in the field. In fact, some of the water from the creck just to the south

of the watershed crosses it in times of flood by means of an overflow watercourse

(at X on the map), and a little further south the drainage pattern of the creeks

has been easily and extensively altered and interlaced by artificial ditching. This

has been made possible in this neighbourhood by the poised position of the creeks

on the very low divide between the catchments. It is quite apparent that catch-

iments D and F were formerly a single catchment area, but that Belalie Creek,

which drains catchment D, and formerly part of Freshwater Creek, has been cap-

tured by drainage to the west. Now, in times of flood, it overruns its distribu-

taries and discharges through Baderloo Creek in catchment E. Vurther south

in this valley, in the Hundred of Reynolds, Baderloo Creek in turn is captured by

Bundaleer Creek. Again in the neighbourhood of the junction of catchments

C.D and A2, part of the headwaters of Belalie Creek has been captured by the

drainage of catchment C,

‘This junction lies on the watershed that traverses the northern portion of the

Hundred from Belalie North to the vicinity of Mount Lock. This watershed is

important geographically as it is part of the crest of the Peterborough-Olary up-

warp, and hence the interfluve between the endoreic drainage towards |.ake Frome

and the exoreic drainage via the Broughton River to Spencer’s Guli. The altera-

tion of the direction of the headwaters of Baderloo Creek and the other adjacent

streams mentioned above may indicate a former more southerly position of the

interfluve now passing through Belalie North.

As mentioned above, some of both the consequents and subsequents end in

distributary systenis, the surface drainage of the area being only partly integrated.

Thus the drainage pattern is partly areic in character, and as such is typical of

country Lying in the transition belt between arid and humid climates. The annual

average rainfall at Jamestown is 17°63 inches, and at Bundaleer Forest, some six

miles to the south, it is 21°92 inches. On the highest part of the ranges precipita-

tion probably reaches 25 inches. Ag is indicated in Table il and in fig. 3. showing

monthly averages of the rainfall at Jamestown, the chmate is divided fairly sharply

into two seasons, namely, winter rain and summer drought, What rains fall in

the summer are frequently of high intensity. The difference in intensity between

summer and winter rain is shown to some extent in Table IT by the average num-

ber of points of rain per wet day for each month. However, the difference is

greater than can be demonstrated by data based on daily observations. Much ot

the summer rain falls during thunderstorms of brief duration, whereas a high

proportion of the winter rain is due to showery days frequently recording only a

few points.

Avy, rainfall

Ay. number of wet days ... 3.4 3.1 3.4 6.3

Tape II

Climatic Data for Jamestown, South Australia

Jan. Feb. Mar. Apl May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. Year

(inches) dons 0.79 0.70 0.82 7.25 1.71 2.22 2.03 2.27 2.03 1.60 1.14 1.07 17.63

9.0 12.0 12.4 11.8 96 7.8 3.1 4.3 88.2

Number of points of rain

per wet day ried whee BSS, 23 24 20 19 18 16 19 21 21 22 25 20

On 24 and 25 January 1941, Jamestown recorded 338 points of rain, and in

the neighbourhood there were recordings up’to 600 points. The town was flooded

“N

ats

ee ee

f {

i ie é See a ! {

\ Mo wt ~s = ad |

{ "\ | / x ’ | t

ty t Po ae z ‘ ‘ '

! ‘ae Hoy = ' !

} to} 4

! ' a

: &

-—/500-7 7 Tt

ait 400_2”

lig. 2

Contour Map of the Hundred af Belalie

(After T. Langford-Srnith) Intervals of 100 feet

toa depth of two or three fect and much silt was deposited in the town. The water

rose and subsided very rapidly, the duration of the flood being hetween one and

two hours.

On fig. 1 is shown in the town and other localities where significant

deposition of silt and other water-borne material occurred, These areas of deposi-

tion are located principally in catchment F where there is a fairly abrupt breals of

slope between the hills of the watershed and the valley floor, and at Jamestown

and south of the town where the floodwaters of Belalie Creek join the headwaters

of Baderloo Creek. As is evident from the drainage pattern on the map, James-

town lies in a locality which, in times of normal rains and run-off, has some of

the characteristics of a place of internal drainage. Salt accumulations in the soil

occur to the south and west of the town and, although there are no actual playa

lakes the area is very like that near Whytc-Yarcowie some 20 miles to the east

and where the average rainfall is 13-44 inches per annum. In the Jamestown

“

2TH]

J FM AM J Sf AS OWN OD

Fig. 3

Distribution of the monthly average rainfall at Jamestown, South Australia

locality and further south along Baderloo Creek the flooding was widespread and

somewhat extensive areas of lucerne in the valley opposite the Bundaleer Hills

may have aided in causing deposition in that area.

Jamestown directly receives the run-off drainage from catchments C and D

(39 square miles), the town being situated on the distributary and absorption

system of Belalie Creek and the creek which collects the run-off from catchment

C. urthermore, run-off from catchment B (13-2 square miles), in times of

flood, joins the waters from C and D just south of the town. Thus Baderloo

Creck, under flood conditions, has to handle water due to the running of the creeks

draining catchments B, C and 1), as well as the run-off water from its own catch-~

ment area E (37-4 square miles), Apart from that due to overflow at X, water

from catchment F does not affect the position at Jamestown, as its floodwaters

are delivered directly into the Broughton River by way of Freshwater Creek. The

deposition of silt south of Jamestown will further aggravate the flooding by

restriction of the surface drainage to that part of Baderloo Creck which runs

south from where it receives the floodwaters from Delalie Creek.

lt is obvious that floods will recur in Jainestown every time rain comparable

with that of January 1941 falls in the summer inonths. Unless surface conditions,

particularly in catchments C and D, are considerably improved so as to restrict

the present rapid run-off, floods will in all probability be more frequent. In the

Tundred of Belalie some 35% of the land is used for permanent grazing, prin-

cipally on the hills where the watersheds lic, and the other 65% is almost entirely

wheat-growing land. very largely worked on the two-year wheat-fallow rotation

sysiem. With over-graziug of the hill pastures generally, and nearly all cultivated

land lying bare or in “stubble over the summer months, conditions favour rapid run-

olf. In short, the agriculture of the Hundred is such that it has radically upset the

delicately balanced drainage system. In this connection, it is probably typical of

large areas of wheat-growing country throughout southern Australia. An instance

of the upset to individual streams is shown by the consequent stream in the middle

ot catchment D. This creek has an abnormally enlarged distributary system which

now involves several hundred acres, which it has scarred by gully and sheet

erosion, In general, most af the deeper gully erosion of the arca is associated with

the areic streams which, under the more rapid run-off now prevailing, are cutting

channels across formerly smooth land in an attempt to deliver their water directly

into the subsequent streams of the valley bottoms, thus tending to make ihe

drainage of the area south of the main divide completeh - exoreic in character,

Restriction of flooding and the minimising of soil erosion can be attained in

the Hundred of Belalie and adjacent areas hy. conirolied grazing of the water-

sheds, widening the wheat-growing rotation to include a period under pasture, by

growllg more lucerne in siiitable localities, and by the installation of erosion

control structures such as contour furrows and tert races on grazing and agricul-

tural land respectively.

The author is indebted to his colleagues in the Soils Division, Council for

Scientific and Industrial Research, and to Mr. R. 1. Herriot, Soil Conservator of

the Department of Agriculture of South Australia, who worked with the author

in the field in the compilation of the data on which this paper is based; also to

Professor J. A. Prescott and Mr. J. K. Taylor, Chief and Principal Research

Officer respectively of the Soils Division, and to Dr. C. Fenner, for assistance in

the preparation of the paper.

REFERENCES

(1) Howcuix, W. 1931) Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 55, 113-135; 1933, 57, 1-41

(2) Penner, C. 1939 “Prans. Roy. Soe. S. Aust., 63, 79-87

(3) Lancrorp-SMitn, 1, 1942 Thesis: University of Adelaide,

THE TROMBICULINAE (ACARINA) OR ITCH-MITES OF THE

AUSTRO-MALAYAN AND ORIENTAL REGIONS

By H. WOMERSLEY A.L.S., F.R.E.S., South Australian Museum,

and W. G. HEASLIP, M.B., B.S.*

Summary

The economic importance of this group of mites lies in the fact that, as larvae, they are external

parasites of vertebrates, including man, and that in the above regions certain species have been

incriminated as the vectors of the form of typhus, commonly known as “tsutsugamushi” fever, from

the primary hosts, rodents and small marsupials, to man. This disease occurs throughout the area

covered in this study.

THE TROMBICULINAE (ACARINA) OR ITCH-MITES OF THE

AUSTRO-MALAYAN AND ORIENTAL REGIONS

By H. Womersrey, ALS. PLRIES., South Australian Museum,

and W. G, Heasiip, M.B., B.S.*

Pirates II-X11I, Text Fra. 1-18

[Read 10 June 1943 |

INTRODUCTION

The economic importance of this group of mites lies in the fact that, as

larvae, they are external parasites of vertebrates, including man, and that in the

above regions certain species have been incriminated as the vectors of the form

of typhus, commonly known as “tsutsugamushi” fever, from the primary hosts,

rodents and small marsupials, to man. This disease occurs throughout the area

covered in this study.

The adults, of which few species are known, are small, cight-legged, white to

ereain or reddish creatures, usually elongate, with a medial constriction giving them

the shape of a figure 8. They are clothed with a dense mat of ciliated hairs, from

which the popular name of “velvet mites” is derived,

Little is known of the feeding habits of the nymphs or adults, but they are

probably vegetarian, They may be found under stones, in the soil, or under logs

amongst the herbage in damp gullies, ete.

The eggs of the genus Jrombicula s.str.. as far as is kuown, are

laid in clusters in the soil or other habitat favoured by the adult, The

genus Guntierana is remarkable in that the eggs are found attached to the hairs of

the host, a fact which suggests that the adult, for a time at least, lives in the fur

of the hosts, ‘he larvae are small microscopic six-legged creatures which, in the

case of some genera at least, lurk or move amongst the herbage until they

are able to attach themselves to a passing host. On the hosts they are frequently

to be found in colonies in the ears, in the axillae or on the genitalia,

These mites have for long been known in many parts of the world as the

cause of intense irritation to workers in the fields at harvest time, and to workers

in the scrub of tropical and subtropical parts. In Furope, America and Australia

they are popularly known as “harvest inites,” and in America as “chiggers’; in

Surinam as ‘“‘batatas” or “héte rouge’; in Mexico as “tlasahuate’; in Japan and

Formosa as “akamushi” or “kedani’: as “itch mites” or “li-tree itch’? in Australia

and as “scrub itch” in Malaya and New Guinea.

The first mention in scientific literature of these mites was in 1/58 when

Linnaeus described the “béte rouge” of Surinam under the name of “Acarus

batatus.” Sambon, L. W., 1928, Annals. of Trop. Medicine and Parasitology, 22,

67, states that the association between mites and the disease has been known for

over 1,000 years. Palm, Th. A.. 1878, described the disease in the Edinburgh

Med. Journal, 24, 128. In 1879 Baetz, E., and Kawakami, Archiv. fur Path.

Anat. und Physiologie. und fiir Klin. Med. (Virchow’s Archiv., 78, 373) recog-

nised the suspected vector as a larval nute resembling Leplus autiumnalis but dis-

counted its importance. Tanaka, 1899, attributed the “tsutsugamushibo” or “river

fever” of Japan to a nunute red mite locally called “Kedani” (hairy mite), and in

this connection figured three larval mites, but none of the figures correspond with

Brumpt’s 7. akamushi (1910). a species which occurred on field mice in Japan

and attacked man as well as domestic animals. The matter was followed up by

other Japanese workers and it is now definitely accepted, both in Japan and

* Working in Queensland with the aid of a grant from the National Health and Medical

Research Council.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S$. Aust,, 67, (1), 30 July 1943

Formosa, that this mite is the vector in the transmission of the disease. In 1924

Walch and Keukenschrijver showed that another species, 7. delicnsis, was

probably the vector of a poi iae Wale das fever in Sumatra, the primary hosts

being varicus species of Rattus. Later, 1928, TFletcher, Lesslar and Lewthwaite

suggested a simular larval Trombid nite as the vector of tsutsugamushi as well as

of * “tropical typhus” in the Federated Malay States, and, in 1932, Gater made a

survey of the Trombidiid larvae of the Mederated Malay States and of their

primary hosts. Fletcher, 1928, showed that 7. delicnsts Walch, and its Sumatran

hosts were py eae in the Federated Malay States. Gater also added 7. akamushi

(Brumpt), 7. firsti Sambon and T. acuscutellaris Walch as being found on

man. In ie present paper the first of these ig shown not to be the Japanese

form but a new species (7. fietchert). In New Guinea C. Gunther,

1938-1940, has investigated the “endemic typhus” of that region and

incriminated a species of mite. which he called 7. hirsti v. buloloensis,

as the probable vectur. Tie also found T. deliensis (= wvanderghinstei Gunther }

on rats, but not so peey . Mehta (1937) records T. deltensis as associated

with serub typhus in the Simla Tfls, India,

In 1927 Sambon deseribed from Innisfail, Queensland, a “serub itch mite”

under the name of T. hirsit from human beings; a species which Walch thought

synonymous with 7. pseudoakamushi Hatori 1919, This has now been shown to

be the same as 7. minor Berl. Heaslip, 1939-41, in investigating the typhus-like

fevers of Queensland, has found 7. deliensis to be the probable vector of

IX-typhus. He also found that 7. firsti was not present amongst some 2,500

larval mutes collected from the natural animal reservoirs. The rats from which

the North Queensland material was collected were identified and comprised seven

species, wte., fattus conafus Thomas 1923, R. raltuy (linn, 1758), R. asstinilis

(Gould. 1858), R . noreegicus (Erxleben 1777). Melomys littoralis Lonnberg 1916,

Ilydromys chr ae reginae Thomas and Dollman 1908 and Uromys catdi-

maculatus Krefft 1867, As each species of rat harboured many species of mite,

and no species of mite showed any definite preference for any one species of host.

the specific species of rat from which the individual species of mite were collected

have not been detailed.

\Whule species of manenaciie Schangastia, Neoschéugastia and Lecuwen-

hockia are also known to bite humans, it is only with species of Trombicula s. str.

that we can as yet connect the occur-ence of disease. Nevertheless, to completely

understand and appreciate the importance of these mites to mankind it is highly

desirable to know all we can of their ‘ife-history, and also to be able to identify the

known larval forms and link them up with their respective adults when discovered.

This work should be carried out by well designed and checked breeding experi-

ments. Most stich experiments so far have endeavoured to rear the nymphs and

adults from Jarvae. Apart from the difficulty of satisfactorily identifying the

larvae in life (the specific identification requires high-power microscopy), most

workers have used a number of specimens in a tube, ignoring the tact that rarely

does a colony on a host consist of a single species.

The only satisfactory procedure is to start with the gravid female and hatch

out the larvae; in this way the female is also available after oviposition for micro-

scopic examination,

Of the 19 genera of Trombiculinae recognised as valid in the present paper

only Blankaartia Oudins. and Troimbicula Berl. are definitely known from the

adults or nymphs as well as larvae, all the others heing larval genera only.

In addition to the new species described, Neoschéngastia novac-hollandiac

(Iirst) and Neoschingastia perameles \Vom. are now recorded for the first time

from North Queensland.

‘The most important specific characters are to be found, firstly, in the shape

and dimensions of the dorsal scutum and its attendant setae, both normal and

sensillary, and secondly in the number and arrangement of the dorsal setae. Other

workers have tried to find specific differences in the number and nature of the setae

on the tarsus of the palp, and in the bi- or trifurcation of the palpal claw. These

latter characters, however, are sometimes difficult to see clearly, while it is doubt-

ful whether the arrangement of the setae is of more than generic value. On the

other hand, im well tiotnted specimens, the characters of the dorsal scutum and

the dorsal setae are comparatively easy to determine. The actual size of the whole

creature is of very ttle importance and largely depends upon whether it has fed

or not, Generally it is casicr to make out the arrangement of dorsal sctae from a

fully gorged specimen. On the ventral surface the setal pattern of the coxac is ot

some value but the arrangement of setae behind the third pair of coxac is usually

more irregular and less important than on the dorsum.

The chactotaxy of the legs is generally fairly uniform and offers Iitle varia-

tion of specific value within a genus.

Vor critical identification high power magnification is essential, as stated

above, and to ensure this proper c clearing and mounting of the specimens is neces-

sary. In the first place, only a single specimen should he mounted on a slide, eveu

from what appears to be a colony of the same kind, for only rarely can a sing’e

species be found on one host. Vor examination and drawing, a specimen is tem-

porarily mounted straight from alcchol into a drop of glacial lactic acid on a slide

and covered with a caver glass, The mount is then gently heated over a spirit

lamp until it just bubbles. This ensures perfect clearing and details of both dorsal

and ventral surfaces can usually be readily seen and drawn or measured. Fora

permanent mount, the cover glass is carefully lifted off and the specimen trans-

ferred to a drop of gum-chors al on Spatee slide, covered and heated as for the

temporary mount,

The careful measuring of a standard series of data from the scutum™? of

the different species and a comparison of the arrangements of the dorsal setae

have shown that these can be used to distinguish specifically the many species of

larvae, “The various dimensions used are indicated by abbreviations, and quoted

in microns in a definite order as follows:

AW = > width between the bases of the antero-lateral scutal sctae.

PW == width between the bases of the postcro-lateral scutal setae.“

SB = distance between ceutres of sensillae bases.

ASB = distance from anterior margin to sensillae bases.

PSB distance from posterior margin to sensillae bases.

A-P distance between antero-lateral and postero-lateral setae.

AM™ length of antero-median setae.

AL® = fength of antero-lateral setae.

PLL© length of postero-lateral setae.

Sens. length of sensillary setae.

DS length of dorsal setae.

So Ss depth of scutum = ASB + PSB.

() w itt the older formulae for gum- sbhiceat experience shows that in course of time

considerable crystallisation takes place and renders the mounts opaque. This is apparently due

to the loss of acetic acid, and in the medium now recommended this is replaced by the less

volatile and more viscous glacial lactic acid.

@) The figures of the scuta given in this paper are all drawn to scale from standard.

data and to magnification of 500 diam.

@) Tt is to be noted that PW as used here is aways slightly less than the greatest width

as used by earher workers.

() In the genus Leeuwenhockia there are two AM of equal length; m lH alchia and

Gahrlicpia AM is entirely wanting. In Trombiculotdes Al. setae are triplicated and the most

posterior pair is regarded as the PL, but in Gahrliepia the first pair behind the sensillae bases

is the PL, any posterior of these being members of the DS embraced by the backwardly

extended scutum,

The arrangement of dorsal sctae is usually constant and easily discernible,

at least in the anterior rows. ‘he setae in each row are quoted in order of rows

from front to back, making duc allowance for curvature of the rows,

While within the larval species, as here recognised, the measurements of the

standard data appear to give sound differentiation of the species, there does, in

sonic, at least where a good number of speciuens have been measured, appear to

be a rather wide though limited range of variation of any one character, It would

therefore be worth while, when sufficient material is available, to treat the measure-

ments statistically with a view to verifying the validity of each species.

The DS are normally in rows, generally transverse, and often anteriorly

curved, Usually the first or anterior row consists of two setae, one on each side

of the seutum; it may occasionally consist of none or four setae.

The total number of species reccgnised in this paper is 92, together with

4 varieties, as follows:

Trombicula - - 30 and 1 varicty Paraschingastia - 5 and J variety

Myotrombicula - 1 Cuntherana - - 1

Trombiculoides - 1 Walchia - - 6

Schongastia - Zand 1 variety Gahrliepia - - 6

Neoschéugastia - 34 and 1 variety Leeuwenhoekia - 1

Lastly. this paper has largely been rendered possible and its value increased

hy the generous help of colleagues from elsewhere than Australia, To the follow~

ing we are particularly indebted and desire to express our sincere thanks. Prom

Prof. Dr. M. Takenouchi of the Institute of Bacteriology, inperial University of

‘Yokyo, we have received authentic material of Japanese species. Prom Prof.

J. E. Dinger, Director, Koningin Wilhelmina Institute, Batavia, Java, we have

received specimens of certain of Walch’s species. Valuable preparations of some

of Gater’s species have also been forwarded by Mr. llodgkin from the Se

for Medical Research, Kuala Lumpur, through the kindness of Lieut.-Col. B.

R. Gater and Dr. R. Lewthwaite. In addition Mrs. Dr. W alch, of aie.

graciously forwarded reprints of some of her late husband’s papers.

Vor Australian material we have had access to large numbers of specimens

from Queensland collected by Mr. D. J. W. Smith, Dr. E. Li, Derrick and one

of us ‘a (> H.), as well as all the material in the S.A. Museum, reported upon in

carlier papers.

To Prof, Harvey Sutton, School of Tropical Medicine and Public Health,

University of Sy dney, we are indebted for the loan of the type slides of Gunther’s

species and to Dr. Gunther for paratype material now in the South Australian

Museum collections,

SYSTEMATICS

Kry To THE GENERA Of LARVAL TROMBICULINAE

1 With two median dorsal scuta. Eves two on each side, anterior larger than posterior.

Numerous small platelets behind second dorsal scutum, Tarsi 1 and Lf with two, IT

with three claws. Gen. Blankaarltta Oudms, 191]

With only one median dorsal scutum. All tarsi with three claws.

2 Anterior margin of dorsal scutum with cue median or two medial setae. 5

Anterior margin of dorsal scutum without median or medial setae. 3

3 Tarsi with two unequal claws. Sensillae simple. Setae on Icg's and dorsum

simple. Gen. TTemitrombicula Ewing 1938

” Parsi with three claws. Sensillae clavate or capitate. 4

4 Dorsal seutum with only four setae, autero- and postcro-lateral, A-P = or > 4 SD.

Sensillac clavate. Gen. Walchia Ewing 1931

Dorsal scutum with four or more setae, due to posterior prolongation of scutum to

take in two or more of the median setae of one or more of the dorsal rows; A-P

always <4 SD, Sensillae globose or clavate. Gen. Gahrlicpia Oudms. 1912

incl. Schdngastiella Hirst 1915

incl. Gateria Ewing 1938

With two medial setac on anterior margin of dorsal scutum.

With one median seta on anterior margin of dorsal scutum.

Seutum longer than wide, lateral margin produced well in front of AL, apex truncate.

Traces of crista present. Sensillac filamentous. Coxae I with two, II and LI! with

one scta; none between coxac I Gen. [leterothrombidinie Verd. 1909

Lateral margins of scutum not produced in front of AL. Scutum wider than long.

Antericr margin of scutum with a median forwardly directed process. Coxae I with

two, Il and III with one seta; no sctac between coxae I. Chelicerae serrate. Sensillae

filamentous. Gen, Leenzveenhoekia Oudms. 1911

Anterior margin of scutum without above process; otherwise similar,

Gen. Hannemannia OQudms. 1911

Mandibles and palpi modified for grasping hair. Sensillae lost, probably filamentous.

On bats. Gen, Myotrombicula nov.

Mand-bies and palpi normal.

Sensitlae filamentous, with more or less distinet ciliations,

Sensillae globose, clavate or lanceolate, nude or cihated.

With nine scutal setae in addition to sensillac. Scutum broader than long, without

posterior angles, evenly rounded [rom anterior angles, Chelicerae with a very large

inner subapical tooth. Gen. Trombiculoides nov.

With five scutal setac in addition to sensillac.

Al or AL and AM scutal sctac stout and spite-like. Gen. Fonsecia, Radford 1942

The above setae normal.

Chelicerae not serrate dorsally, with a single apical tooth; ventral tooth always

present.

Cheliccrac with three equal or subequal, dorsal teeth. Dorsal scutum well developed

or vestigial. AM seta simple or pectinate. Gen. Odontacarus Ewing 1929

= L[indotrambicula Ewing 1931

Palpal claw trifurcate. Dorsal setae > 30. Gen. Trombicula Beriese 1905

inc. Pentayonella Sig. Thor. 1936

Palpal claw bifurcate. Dorsal setae < 30, Gen, Lutrombicula Ewing 1938

All coxae multisetose. Scutum roughly triangular with apex directed forwards.

Gen, Doloisia Oudms. 1910

Coxae 1 and II always unisetose, Jif sometimes mtultisctose, Scutum trapezoidal,

pentagonal or hexagonal,

Middle claw thickest and distally lanecalate. Eyes absent? All coxae unisetose.

Sensillae globose. Gen, Retdlinca Oudms, 1916

Middle claw not lanceolate.

Body definitely constricted medially. Dorsally with a rounded caudal plate, generally

longitudinally divided and bearing three pairs of fine setae. Gen. Guntherana non.

for Gantheria Wom. 1936 preocc.

Body not so. No caudal plate.

Chelicerac serrate. Sensillac globose or clavate. Gen. Schéngastia Oudms. 1910

Chelicerae not serrate, with only a single small subapical tooth.

Scutum with a raised transverse crest forming a wall in which the sensillae arise.

Coxae III with one, two or three setae. Sensiflae globose.

Gen. Paraschingastia Wom. 1939

Scutum without above crest. Coxae rarely with two to four setac. Sensillae globose,

clavate or lanceolate. Gen. Neoschongastia Ewing 1929

“I

“TY

Genus Trompicura Berlese 1905

Acari Nuovi, Manipl. IV, p. 155, in Redia II, fase. 2, 1905. Genotype T. anor

Berl. 1905, loc, cit.

Although this name was first used in 1905 for Trombicula ininor from Java,

Berlese does not appear to have given a generic description until the publication

in 1912 of his monograph on the Trombidiidae in Redia VIII, fase. 1, p. 83.

The two specimens described by Berlese arc now generally considered to be

nymphs aid to be the same as 7. mediocris Rerlese 1912, also described trom Java

as the adult.

The larval form of this genus was unknown until 1916, when Japanese

workers, Miyajima and Okumara, and Nagayo and his co-workers established by

breeding that the larval species 7Trombidiuit akaimushi Brumpt developed into a

Trombicula-like nymph aud adult, very closely resembling 7. minor Berl, Tn this

paper 30 larval species of Trombicula s. str. are recognised from the Austro-

Malayan and Oriental Regions, together with a variety of one of them.

The genus can be characterised as follows:

Adult and nymph: shaped like a figure 8, white to reddish in colour, with

clothing of close ciliated setae. Crista present with posterior sensory area and a

pair of long filamentous sensory setae. Eyes 1+ 1, closely adjacent to sensillary

area, or none. Larvae: with a single anterior dorsal scutum with five normal

setae and two sensory setae which are long and filamentous and ciated or not;

chelicerae not serrate dorsally, with a single apical tooth and a ventral tooth.

Palpal claw trifureate.

Kry to rue Species or LARVAL LPROMBICULA OF TITE, AUSTRO-MALAVAN

AND OrtentAL Recionxs.“?

1 Seutum almost rectangular, with well-defined posterior angles. PL about midway

between anterior and posterior angles. 2

Not entirely as above. 3

2 Anterior and posterior margins of scutum rectilinear. Scutal setae tapering to a

point, AM 48, AL 44, PL 50, AW 64, PW 50, A-P 20, SD 38, DS 2.12.4.10.4.8.8.4.

(After Walch.) T. keukenschrigveri Walch 1923

Anterior margin of seutum sinuous; posterior margin making a very slight obtuse

medial angle. Scutal setae stout, bushy and apically blunt. AM 44, AT. 40. PL 50,

AW 60, PW 66, A-P 18, SD 38, DS 2.12.14.12.10.8.6.4.2.

T. pallida Nagayo et al. 1919

3. AW greater than 45. 5

AW less than 40. 4

4 Sensillae with only ‘two or three cilia on each side in apical half. AW 33, PW 47,

A-P 17, DS 2.6.6.4.4.2. T. munda Gater 1932

Sensillae with numerous c:lia on apical half. AW 38 PW 51, A-P 20, DS

2644 A4A2. T. spicea Gater 1932

5 Scutum roughly pentagonal Tarsus IIL with long sensory seta. 6

Seutum uot pentagonal. 7

6 AW and PW about equal. PL much longer than AM or AL. AW 75, PW 80,

A-P 27, Sens. 78, DS 2.6.6.6(4).4(2).2 (0). T. acuscuteHaris Walch 1923

AW less than PW. PL not much longer than AM or AL. AW 80, PW 97, A-P 33,

Sens. 92, DS 2.8.6(8).6(8) 4.4.6 (probably 2.8.6.6.4.4.2). T. japonica (Tanaka 1916)

7 AW much less than PW, so that anterior angics of scutum are widely cbtuse. AW 60,

PW 87, A-P 19, SD 39, Sens. in line of PL, DS 2.8.6.6.4.2. T. quadriense n. sp.

AW uot much less than PW. Anterior angles of scutum not or only slightly obtuse. 8

Seutum practically rectangular and posterior margin almost rectilinear between PL.

Sens. near to posterior margin of scutum. AW 72, PW 78, A-P 38, DS,

2.8.9.12.11.6,44.2. (Aiter Walch.) T. densipthata Walch

Scutum not rectangular. Posterior margin more or less curved.

Scutum relatively small, less than 3,000 ,*; posterior margin extending not more than

12, behind line of PL.

Seutum relatively larger, more than 4,000 ,°; posterior margin extending more than

1S » behind line of PL.

Posterior margin of scutum an even shallow curve.

Posterior margin of scutum not an even curve.

Scutum rugose. AW 47, PW 69, SB 14-5, SD 34, A-P 21, AM 27, AL 27, PL 43,

Sens. 31, DS 2.8.6.6.4.2, T. chiroptera 1. sp.

Scutum smooth.

AW 60, PW 65, A-P 26, SD 40, DS 2.8.8.8.64.2. CAtter Hirst).

T. glirieolens (Hirst 1915)

AW 57, PW 67, A-P 28, SD 39, DS 2.8.6.6.4.2. T. walchi sp. no.

AW 49, PW 59, A-P 22, SD 42, DS 2.6.6.6.4.2. (After Sugimoto.)

7. issikts Sugimoto 1938

Posterior margin of settum shallow, extending only slightly behind Hne of PL, almost

straight.

Posterior margin of scutum deeper, extending more than 10,4, behind PL.

AM longer than AL or PL. AW 58, PW 69, A-P 30, DS 2.8.6.8¢10).84.2.

T. akamusht Brumpt 1910

AM shorter than PL.

Seusillae anterior of Line of PL.

Sensillae in line of PL. DS 2128842. AW 73, PW 82, SB 27, SD 38, A-P 28,

AM 25, AL 28, PE. 47, Sens. 41. (After Gunther 1941.) T. robusia Gunther 1941

DS 2.8.6.6.6.4. AW 56, PW 64, A-P 27. T. bodensis Gunther 1940

DS 2.10.8.604.2. AW 62, PW 75, A-P 20. T. fletcheri nu. sp-

DS 28.6.64.2. AW 63, PW 77, A-P 28, AL 4, PL 63. T. deliensis Walch 1924

= vanderghinstet Gunther 1940

DS 2.10.+.

A-P greater than half SD.

A-P less thaa half SD.

Sens. 38, ciliated anly on basal half. PW 85, SD 37, Sens. 8 in advance of line of PL

DS 2.10.10.16.12.10.8 and 45, long, Eyes b+ 1. On birds.

T. corvt Kaw. and Yam. 1921

Sens. 70, ciliated to tip, bases in line with or slightly behind line of Pl. AW 57,

PW 69, A-P 26, AM 51, AL 43, PL 53, SD 43, DS 2.10.10012).10(8).6.4.

T. scutellaris Nagayo et al. 1920

Sensillae bases well behind line of PL. DS 2.10104. AW 60. PW 66, A-P 17,

SD 37, AM 45, AL 37, PL 48, Sens. 50. T. palpalis Nagayo 1919

Sensillue bases only slightly behind PL. DS 2.10.8.8.6.4.2. AW 53, PW 60, A-P 18,

SD 36, AM 53, AL 41, PL 57, Sens. 65 (Alter Nagayo) T. internicdia Nagayo 1920

Sensillac well in advance of mdline of scutum, much nearer line of AL than PL..

Scutum almost as deep as wide, 75 y by 1004. AM 40, AT. 33, PI. 40, SD 74, AW 85,

PW 100, A-P 40, DS 2.4.4.4.2. Gn text) 2.6.244.2. (Cn figure). (After Waleh.)

T. vara Walch

Sensitlae much nearer to line PL than AL.

Posterior margin of scutum sinuous or flattened medially.

Posterior margin of seutumy an even curve.

AW/AP greater than 3. Scutal setae parallel-sided almost to tip, serrated rather than

ciliated. DS 2.1416.12.+. AW 100, PW 110, A-P 31, SD 63. T. vioi Gunther

AW/AP less than 3. Scutal setae tapering and ciliated. DS 2.6.4.

Sens. in midline of scutum, ie., ASB = PSB.

Sens. anterior to midline of scutum, ie, ASB << PSB.

AW 79, PW 92-5, A-P 31-5, AM 43, AL 46:5, PL 58, Sens. 63, DS 2.6.6.4.2.2.

Posterior margin of scutum medially flattened or slightly sinuate.

T. wichmanni Oudms. 1905

AW 72, PW 85, A-P 27, AM 36, AL 36, PL 50, Sens. 55, DS 2.6.6.4.2. Posterior

T. hatorii n. sp.

= psendoakanusht Kaw. and Yam.

20 AW 75, PW 86, SB 41, ASB 24, PSB 325, A-P 35, AM 42, AL 46, PL 52.

T. minor Berlese 1904

= hirstt Sambon 1927

AW 84-5, PW 99-5, SB 44-5, ASB 26-5, PSB 38-5, A-P 34-5, AM 48, AL 53, PL 48-5.

T. minor vy. deltensis Walch 1923

= hirsti vy. buloloensis Gunther 1939

27 Sensillac slightly behind PL, about 95 Iong. AW 71, PW 96-5, A-P 35, SD 62, DS

2.6.6,6.6.4.2. T. novwde-hollandiae Hirst

Sensillac in front of PL, 65-70 long. 28

28 Sens. with only three branches. DS 2.6.6.0.4.2, AW 78:5, PW 87, A-P 30, SD 60.

T. sainbom Wom. 1936

Sens. with many branches. DS 2.8.6, p'us a cluster of about 30. AW 76, PW 82,

A-P 30, SD 56. T. macropus Wom. 1936

‘TROMBICULA KEUKENSCHRIJVERLE Walch 1923

‘Trans. Vth. Bien. Congr, Far East. Assoc. Trop. Med., p. 583, Singapore, 1923

(publ. 1924).

CPL. ci, fig. 1)

In the almost rectangular dorsal scutum with well-defined postero-lateral

angles and the PL setae placed inidway between the antero- and postero-latera!

angles, this and the following species 7. pallida Nagayo form a well-defined group.

From 7, pallida it is to be distinguished as given in the key to species of

the genus.

We have not been able to obtain any authentic material of this species. The

hgure of the dorsal scutum given in pl. ii, fig. 1, is drawn to seale from our

standard data as derived from Walch’s figures and details. The standard data are:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PIL Sens. DS

64 70 32 24 14 z0 48 44 50 — 45

The species was described from a solitary specimen found on man at Deli,

Sumatra. It is to be noted that in his table Walch gives the arrangement of

DS as 13.4.6.8.11.8.4, whereas [rom his figure the arrangement is 2.12,.4.10.4.10.8.4,

In the type specimen the sensillae were missing but the species is probably

correctly placed in Trombicula s. str.

TROMBICULA PALLIDA Nagayo et al 1919

Verhdi, d. jap. pathol. Geselisch., Tokyo, 9, 107, 1919; Amer. J. Hygiene, 1,

(5-6), 569, 1921. i

(Pl. it, fig. 2)

Allied to the preceding in the forin of the dorsal scutum, but distinguished

therefrom as in the key to species, '

Only the sccond of Nagayo’s papers has been available to us, but through the

great help of Prof. Dr. Takenouchi of the University of Tokyo we have been able

to examine two microscopic preparations of this species from the Yamagala Pre-

tecture, Japan.

The figure of the dorsal scutum which we give (pl. ii, fig. 2) is to scale from

Nagayo’s figures and details, aided by the two specimens studied. Our standard

data for these specimens are as follows:

Loc. and Date AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PIL Sens. DS

Yamagata, 28/6/19 - 65 70 32 23 18 18 53 36 48 60 32-45

45 18/8/19 - 63 73 32 22 17 18 50 37 47 — 32.45

The arrangement of DS was, in the first, 2.13.12.14.4+-, and in the second

2.11.12.-+-.

Nagayo gives little data beyond that the sensillae measured 64°8 long and

that the first row of dorsal setae was 10-11 (13).

In his breeding experiments Nagayo, 1921, claims to have reared the larvae

to adults, and to have obtained larvae from captured adults. We was unable,

however, to detect any definite differences between the adults and nymphs of this

species and those of akamushi, palpalis, intermedia and scutellarts.

We have also received from Prof. Dr. Takenouchi a preparation of an adult

caught in the field in Yamagata Prefecture, Japan, in July 1920, which he states

in his letter is “probably Vrembicula pallida.” Whether it is this species or one

of the other Japanese forms it is briefly described here as follows:

Length 775 p, width of propodosoma 395 p, of opisthesoma 400 p. Eyes, if

present, invisible in the preparation. Crista 130, sensillary area transverse, dumib-

bell-shaped as figured for T. deliensis by Walch 1923; SB 48 apart, sensillary setac

hard to see and apparently broken, only 40 long. Tarsus I ovate, 202 by 91, meta-

tarsus 130 long. Body thickly covered with long, slender, non-tapering setae, 55 to

80 in length, with short outstanding ciliations along whole length.

If this specimen is correctly placed, then it will not fit into the akantusshi-

palpalis group as given later in the key to the nymphs and adults of Trombiciule.

{twill instead come between deliensis Walch and tindalei Wom. in the form of the

sensillary area and the SB, and be nearer the latter in that the DS are not knobbed,

although not pointed as in tindalei. It also differs from this last species in the

longer DS and the different proportions of the front tarsi.

TRoMBICULA MUNDA Gater 1932

Parasitology, 24, 143-174, 1932.

(PL. ii, fig. 3)

‘This and the following species, 7. spicca Gater, in the small size of the dorsal

scutum (AW < 40) constitute a second fairly distinctive group of species.

From spicea it differs in the proportions of the scutum, the fewer ciliations

on the sensillae and in the arrangement of the DS, as well as in other characters

given, in the key to species.

in addition to Gater’s original description and figures we have been able to

examine specimens from the original type locality and host. The specimens were

labelled as from Rattus ratlus diardi or jalorense, Kuala Lumpur, Selangor 1929.

Cater also recorded it from R, mutlleri validus (Miller) and from R. malatsia Kloss.

fron Sungei Buloh, Selangor.

‘he standard data for the two specimens measured are:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

32:5 46-5 11-5 16 16-5 16:5 20 20 30 30 20-25

33 48 14 17-5 17-518 2g 20 30 30 20-25

The DS are arranged 2.6.6.4.4.2.

Gater gives the seuial width as 48. and the length as 35, SB as 13, and the

arrangement of DS as 266.2442. Tt should be noted that his drawing of the

seutum is not entirely in agreement with ours from the above specimens ; he shows

SB as very much nearer to the anterior margin, whereas they are about ecqu-

distant between antcrior and posterior margins. The AW is also shown as rather

too wide. and the lengths of the scutal setae are not to scale,

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1943

Vol. 67, Plate II

Oi 7 me

Al A ia sme “ey 7

" f aa 4 pe We

\ ‘ 3 fe ; iH \ \

Ye dl ‘} ys

a oe 3 \

if . i: 4 es

uf Ny % i J \ ‘

“ 4 i 5 i a

rr y ee) rin ; ‘ AQ j _ i \

j i aan & ; an 7

s { - if nN i NS. :; \

ry Eat a ‘s i SN ‘ Nee q 4

ae were ii _ aan 4

t aM! 4 wi Lape *, 4

i ee x wo

t 4 To eee

: 4

i |

& ey

8 ‘4 ;

{

1. Trombicnla kenkenschriivcri Walea; 2, T. pallida Nagavo et aly 3. T. munda

Gater; 4, T. spieca; 5, T. aruscutellaris Walch; 6, T. japonica (Tanaka) ;

7, T. autunnalis (Shaw); 8, T. quadriense nu. sp.

TromuBicuna SPICEA Gater 1932

Parasitology 24, 143-174, 1932.

(Pl. ii, fig. 4)

This species was described from R. malaisia Kloss from Sungei Buloh,

Selangor, Federated Malay States, and Gater also recorded it from K. antilleri

validus (Miller) from the same locality.

We have been able to examine an authentic specimen from the latter host

kindly forwarded from the Institute of Medical Research, Federated Malay

States.

It differs from the previous species as discussed thereunder and as given in

the key to species.

The figure of the dorsal scutum given here (pl. ii, fig. 4) is from the specimen

examined, and drawn to scale. The standard data are:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

38 $1+5 13 18 21-5 20 23 25 30 38 25-35

Arrangement of DS 2.64.44.4.2,

Gater gives the width of dorsal scutum as 55, and its length 41, and SB 15.

As with his figure for the preceding species, this is not exactly to scale, but there

scems no reason to doubt that the specimen before us is correctly determined,

TROMBICULA (PENTAGONELLA) ACUSCUTELLARIS Walch 1923

Kitasato Archives, 5, (3), 78, 1923; Gater, B. A. R., Parasitology, 24, 143-174,

1932; Sig Vhor, Zool. Anz., 114, 30, 1936.

(PI. ii, fig. 5)

In his original paper Walch only bricfly described this species but gives a

table of dimensions and detailed figures. He had originally but a single specimei

from a rat from Deli, Sumatra. Gater 1932, however, records having compared

Malavan material with specimens forwarded to him by Walch. Gater also

recorded the species from FR. rattus diardi from Sungei Buloh, Federated Malay

States, from August 1929 to January 1930; once only on the same host from

Kuala Lumpur. August 1929, and from Raub, Pahang, in March 1930. The onty

record from a human being (a woman school teacher) is by Gater from Setapak,

Selangor.

To Prof. Dr. J. E. Dinger, of the Koningin Wilhelmina Institute, Batavia,

we are indebted for an authentic specimen of this species, and we have also been

able to examine another specimen from the Institute for Medical Research,

Federated Malay States. We can therefore affirm Gater’s identification of the

Malayan and Sumatran specimens.

The standard data for the material before us are as follows:

Locality AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

F.M.S. - 75 78 30 31 42 27 52 36 74 — 60-70

Batavia - 76 82 32 29 40 27:5 54 40 76 78 60-75

Dorsal setac arranged 2.6.6.6.4.2.

Walch gives the following data: scutal width 77, length 68, AL 42, sen-

sillae 77.

The figure of the dorsal scutum given in this paper is from the above two

specimens, drawn to scale.

Sig Thor, 1936 erceted the genus Pentagonella for this and other

species on the pentagonal form of the dorsal scutum. As a similar form of seutim

occurs ita number of otherwise well-defined genera it does not secm to be a valid

character, and we do not accept Pentagonella as more than a subgenus at most.

TRoMBICULA JApPoNica (Tanaka 1916)

Leptus autumnalis japonica Tanaka 1916, Igakkai Zasshi (in Jap.), 30, (22);

1918, Ikai Jiho (in Jap.), No. 1,228.

Trombicula autumnalis japonica (Tanaka et al.), Zentrbl. Bakt., Abt. 1, Orig,

116, 361.

(Pl. u, fig. 6)

We have been able to study only Tanaka’s description and figures in the last

reference, the others not being available to us.

Because of its close similarity :n the form of the dorsal scutum, Tanaka

placed the Japanese form as a subspecies of the European Trombicula autummnalis

(Shaw). To try to elucidate the status of Tanaka’s species, we give comparative

drawings to scale of the seutum of each form, that of the Japanese from the

author’s data and figures, and that of the European (pl. ii, fig. 7) [rom that of

Hirst (Arachnida and Myriopoda injurious to Man, Brit. Mus. (N.H.), Econ.

ser. 6, pl. ii, 1917), but as no dimensions are given by Hirst for the dorsal scutum

or are elsewhere available it is assumed for comparison that its AW = 80, as in the

Japanese species.

Fron. these drawings the comparative standard data are:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

japonica - 80 97 27 34 28 33 57 56 62 92 —

autumnalis - 80 94 40 34 29 36 50 50 55 80 —

The arrangements of the dorsal sctae respectively are 2.8.6.6.6.4.2 and

2.6.0.6.4.4.2.

The more important differences are therefore that in japonica—sensillae

bases nearer together and slightly posterior of line of PL; sensillae longer and

with fewer longer ciliations; the sides of scutum more divergent posteriorly; the

different arrangement of dorsal setae.

Although the above differences are small they are yet significant, and it 13

obvious that Tanaka’s form is not the same as autumnalis and must be raised to

specific rank. Both species are closely allied to acusciutellaris in the pentagonal

scutum and would come within the genus Pentagonella of Sig Thor. All three

species have a similar long plain sensory seta on the tarsus of the third leg.

Trombicula quadriense n. sp.

(PL. ii, fig. 8: text fig. 1, A-E)

Description—Shape subrotund to subquadrate. Length to 340 y4, width to

300 ». Dorsal scutum much wider than long (pl. ii, fig. 8), posterior margin

strongly crescentic, anterior angles widely obtuse. Sensillae slightly in advance

of line of PL, bases rather wide apart, sctae filamentous, ciliated in distal half.

Normal scutal setae as in standard data. Fyes 2-2, Chelicerae and palpi as in

text fig. 1,D,C. Dorsal setae fairly long to about 40, pointed and shortly ciliated,

arranged 2.8.6.6.4.2. All coxae with a single seta, a pair of setae between coxae I

and between coxae III, ventral setac arranged thereafter 2.6.2.4.2, to 27 long.

Legs comparatively short, I 204, TI 170, ILI 220, tarsi with two claws and a longer

median claw-hke pulvillus.

The standard data for three specimens are as follows:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PIL Sens. DS

62 92 24 19 23 19-5 32 26 43 — 27-38

62 87 23 19 20 19-5 29 27 40 _— 29-38

56 gl 22 16 20 18 ae 25 44 — 27-38

Mean - 60 87 23 18 21 19 30°5 26 42 _ 27-38

‘The sensillae in pl. ii, fig. 8, and text fig. 1, A, were drawn from the specimens

before permanently mounting. They afterwards became lost.

Loc. and Hosts—-On rat, Cairns, Queensland, 1939 (W. G. I1.); on Rattus

assimilis, Intake, Queensland, 1940 (WW. G, IL); on Hydromys chrysogaster,

Intake, Queensland, 1940 (\W. G. H.).

A\ very characteristic species in the shape of the dorsal scutuin,

Remarks.

and the arrangement of the Ds,

Text fig. 1

Trombicula quadriense n.sp.: A, dorsal view; B, ventral view; C. palp;

D, chelicera; E, tarsus I.

‘TROMBICULA DENSIPILIATA Walch 1923

WNitasato Archives, 5, (3), 79, 1923.

(Pl. iii, fig. 1)

This species was described by Walch from a single specimen from a rat at

Deli. Sumatra. We have not seen any material of this species and for our draw-

ing of the dorsal scutum (pl. iti, hg. 1) and the standard data we have had to go

entirely by Walch’s figure and details. The species does, however, appear to be

well differentiated as given in the key. The data given by Walch is: scutal widih

81, length 51, Al. 51, Sens. 45, DS arranged 2.8.9.12.11.644.2. From these we

compute the standard data as follows:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AT. PL Sens, DS

ees 80 22 40 il 39 37 al of) 45 50

Arrangement of DS 2.8.8.12.1264.4.2.

Trombicula chiroptera n. sp.

(PL. iii, fig. 2: text fe. 2, A-C)

Description—Shape an clongate oval, with a suture behind the seutum.

iengih 350 #, width 2104. Eves 2 + 2, large and subequal and placed on lateral

margins. Jorsal seutuni as in pl. ai, hg. 2, wider than long, with shallowly convex

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1943 Vol. 67, Plate III

1, Trombicula densipiliata Walch; 2, T. chiroptera n. sp; 3, TP. gliricolens

(Hirst); 4. T. walehi n.sp.; 5. 7. akanneshi (Brumpt) ; 6. 7. rebusia Gunther ;

7, 7. bodensis Gunther; 8, T. fletcheri n. sp.

posterior margin and strongly rugose surface. Sensillae filamentous, ciliated on

distal half. Ordinary scutal setae pointed and shortly ciliated. AM and AL

about equal and much shorter than Pl. D5 fairly long and tapering and shortly

ciliated, arranged 2.8.6.6.4.2, Chelicerae as in text fig. 2,C. Palpi normal, tibial

claw apparently bifurcate. All coxae with 1 seta, a pair of setae between coxae I

and between coxae III, thereafter ventral setae arranged 4.4.4.4.2, Legs normal,

{ 160, II 160, 111 180, tarsi with two claws and a longer claw-like pulvillus, I and

11 with the usual dorsal rod-like seta.

Text fig. 2

Trombicula chiroptera n.sp.: A, ventral view; B, dorsal view; C. chelicera.

The standard data for two specimens are:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

Type) - 48 76 14:5 24 17-5 32 25 19+ 22+ — 20

Parat. - 48 69 1455 16 17°5 31 27 27 43 5119

Loc. and Hosts—Type from residue in jar containing bats (unnamed and un-

localised but probably South Australian), in the South Australian Museum Collec-

tions. Paratype similarly with Chalinolobus gouldi, probably South Australian.

Remarks—Can be separated from other species as in the key and by the

strongly rugose scutum.

TROMBICULA GLIRTCOLENS (Hirst 1915)

Microtrombidiuan gliricolens Hirst 1915, Bull. Entom. Res., 6.

(PL iii, fig. 3)

llirst described this species from a single specimen taken from the ear of

Mus rattus (sic.) from Calcutta, India, March 1915,

His description is, however, rather vague and lacking in detail. The figure

of the dorsal scutum given in this paper (pl. i, fig. 3) is re-drawn to scale from

Hirst’s figure and details. The AW and PW are nearly equal and the sides con-

(©) Crushed and scutum, damaged with broken setae.

sequently almost parallel. The arrangement of DS is 2.8.8.8.6.4.2., and the

standard data calculated from: Hirst’s figure and the few details he gives are:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

60 65 28 28 il 25 30 30 40 55 —

Trombicula walchi n. sp.

(PL ii, fig. 4; text fig. 3, A-C)

Description—Shape an elongate oval. length 3204, width 210. Eyes

2+ 2, equal and about two diameters from side of scutum. Dorsal scutum wider

than long with slightly concave anterior margin and more convex posterior margin,

AM and PL longer than AL, all tapering and shortly ciliated. Sensillae fila-

mentous, ciliated on apical half, bases wide apart. Chelicerae as in text fig. 3, C.

Palpi normal. Dorsal setae 45-50, long, pointed and ciliated and arranged

2.8.6.64.2. Coxae with a single long ciliated seta, a pair between coxae I and

between coxae ITI, thereafter the ventral setae are arranged 6.4.4.4.2., the last two

rows as long as the dorsal setae. Legs normal I 210, If 190, [IT 240, tarsi with

paired claws and longer claw-like pulvillus, | and IT with the usual dorsal rocl-

like seta,

Text fig. 3

Trombicula walchi n.sp.: A, dorsal view; B, ventral view; C, chelicera,

The standard data are as follows:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

Type © > oF oF 2 22 47 28 52 37 54 — 45-50

Parat. - - 57 67 27-5 22 16:5 27 51 38 53 65 45-50

Loc, and Hosts — Type. on a slide (TA,1C,1I) from Prof. Dinger, of the

lnstitute for Bacteriology, Batavia. In his Jetter Prof. Dinger refers to this slide

as 7, deliensis, but on the slide it is marked “as very close to akamushi”’ A study

of the figures given and the key to species will show the relationships of this

species, The paratype is on a slide from the Institute for Medical Research,

Federated Malay States, labelled T. deliensis and stated in writing to be from

RK. rattus diard: ( Jk.) from Sardang, Selangor, 21 April 1932.

TROMBICULA ISSIKII Sugimoto 1938

J. Jap. Soc. Vet. Sci., 1938, 17, (1), 57-62, fig. 1-3.

(Text fig. 18 B)

This species was described in Japanese from Capella hardwickii (Gray), trom

Formosa. From Sugimoto’s figures and the few dimensions he gives, the follow-

ing standard data are interpolated:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

49 59 20 22 20 22 44 38 60 56 45-48

Dorsal setae arranged 2.6.6.64.2.

TROMBICULA AKAMUSH? (Brumpt 1910)

2 Trombicwa coarctatimn (Berl. 1888), in Kitashima and Miyajima 1918, citec

Walch Tr. Vth. Bien. Congr. Far East. Assoc. Trop. Med., 19235 (1924).

Kedani tanakai Kishida 1909,* cited Tanaka et al., 1930, Zentralbit. Bakt., Abt. 1.

116, Orig., 353.

Trombidiion akamushi Brumpt 1910, Précis de Parasit., 2nd ed., 306,

Microtrombidium akamushi, Hirst 1915, ]. Econ. Biol., 10, 79.

Leptothrombium akamushi, Nagayo et al. 1917, J, Exper. Med.. 25, 255.

Trombicula akamushi, Hirst 1917, Arachnida injurious to Man (3. Mus. N. iL.)

Econ. Ser, No. 6; Nagayo et al, 1921, Amer. J. Hygiene, 1, (5-6), 369;

Walch, 1923 (1924), Tr. Vth. Ten. Congr, Far East. Assoc. Trop. Med.;

Gater, 1932, Parasitology, 24; Brumpt 1936, Précis de Parasitologic.

Microtrombidiiun bruimpti Hirst, 1915, J. icon. Biol. 10; svn. Rwing, 1925, Ann.

Ent. Soc. Amer., 13, 381.

(PL iit, fig. 5)

This species, which is one of those indicated as vectors of the Japanese river

fever or tsutsugamushi disease, was originally recorded from Japan. There, at

certain seasons of the year, it occurs very plentifully upon voles.

Under the generic name of Microtrombidium, it was fully re-described and

figured, although few dimensions were given, by Hirst 1915 (J. Econ. Biol., p. 78),

also from Japanese material.

In 1916 (Ikai Jiho, No. 1,164, 1,701) (cited by Nagayo et al. 1921) Tanaka

considered that two species of mites occurred upon voles in Japan. One, which

was known to attack man, he regarded as the Nedani or Akamushi tsutsugamusin ;

the other be called the Yasodani or vole mite, or Pscudoakanisht.

In 1919 Nagayo et al. (Jap. J. Uxper. Med., 3, 263) claimed to distinguish

three species, and in 1921 (Amer. J. Hygiene. 1, (3-6), 509) brought the number

of known Japanese species up to live, viz., ekamushi (Brumpt 1910), pallida

Nagayo et al. 1919, palpalis Nagayo et al. 1919, intermedia n. sp. and seutellaris

n. sp. In this last paper the authors considered that akamushi (Brumpt 1910) was

the same as lanaka’s “Kedani,? the same as Miyajima and Okamura’s “‘thin-

haired type” and the same as Kawamura’s “type A”; that pallida Nagayo was the

same as Tanalka’s ‘“Pseudoakamushi,” the same as Miyajima and Okamura’s “type

I)? : that palpalis Nagayo 1919 was the same as Kawamiura’s “type C,” and that

scutellaris Nagavo 1921 was the same as Kawamtra’s “type B.”

In 1930 (Zentralblt. Bakt. Abt. I. 116, Orig., 353) Tanaka et al. reviewed

the Japanese species. The Kedani mite he again referred to akamushi Brumpt but

cited this as synonymous with Kedania tanakai Kishida 1909.* His pseudo-

* This reference secins iniportant hut is not available to us.

ckamushi of 1916 he separated into A and B; the first he synonymised with

pallida Nagayo 1919, and the second with palpalis Nagayo 1919.

As the naine pseudoakamusiti is therefore a complex of at least two species for

which valid names, pallida and palpalis, are available, it should be dropped from

literature.

In addition, Tanaka in 1930 described another species under the name of

Trombicula autumnalis japomca, which has already been discussed.

In 1928 Fletcher, Lesslar and [ewthwaite recorded specimens from the

Federated Malay States which “resemble 7. akamushi even more closely than

tT. deliensis,’ and in 1932 Gater recorded T. akamushi trom Selangor on fe. rattus

diardi, R. r. jalorensis and Trichys fasciculata fasciculata Shaw. The Satter

author also stated that it was common on man. Some of his material was exanuned

by H. EE. Ewing in America, who was also of the opinion that the specimens

belonged to the Japanese akamushi. Through the kindness, however, of Dr.

Takenouchi of the University of Tckyo, and of the Director of the Lustitute of

Medical Research, Federated Malay States, we have been able to compare two

slides of supposed akamushi from the Federated Malay States with authentic

Japanese material. From this study we are able to satisfy ourselves that the

specimens from the Vederated Malay States do not agree with the Japanese

material, uor with the figures and descriptions given by Nagayo and by Tirst.

They are a new species, described in this paper as T. fletcher? no sp. Whether

Gater’s and Fletches’s original material, however, was true 7. akamushi still

remains somewhat uncertain, but in all probability the Japanese specics docs not

oceur other than in Japan and Formosa.

The siandard data, as used in this paper for the Japanese material before is

are as follows:

Locality AW PW SE ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

Yamagata, 20/8/19 638 75 28 22 13 30 58 38 S32 64 42-65

« 62 FO 2a 22 11 28 58 37 $4. 60 45-65

Yamagata, 27/7/19 - 66 74 30 22 IL 28 -—- -— — 58 45-65

7 i ee ee ee ee ae ee ee es

Meat @e & & Se 92 oe oe ig ae GRO a oe es

The dorsal setae are arranged 2.8.6.8.6.--+-. In Llirst’s figure they are shown

as 2.8.6.10.8.4.2, but it would appear that some of the latero-ventral setae may

have been included in the drawing as the result of too much depression oi the

specimen in mounting.

Nagayo (1921) claims to have reared this species through from ihe larvae to

the nymph and adult, and also to aave obtained larvae from captured adults.

Beyond a slightly redder colour in the nymph and adults of akamushi than in

pallida, he was unable to point to any very definite specific differences hetween

either of these species or between these and palpatis, interinedia and scutellarts,

TROMBICULA ROBUSTA Crinther 1941

(Pl. it, fig. 6)

This was described from birds, Piulta mackloli Verminck and Microeca sp.

from Bulolo, T. N.G. The species, which is very close to the two following, can

be separated as given in the key. The drawing of the dorsal scutum (pl. iii,

fig. 6) and the following standard data are derived from Gunther’s original draw-

ings and descriptions. We have not seen any specimens,

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PT. Sens. DS

73°5 82:5 27 29 8°5 28 25 28 47 4] was

Arrangement of dorsal setae, 2.12.8.8.4.2.

Trombicula fletcheri n. sp.

(PL. ii, fig. 8; text fig. 4, A-F)

Description—Shape almost circular. Length 283%, width 235. Dorsal

scutum (pl. iii, fig. 8) pitted, wider than long, posterior margin shallowly convex

and medially extending 8» behind line of PL, scutal setae moderately long, and

fairly bushy; sensillae rather thick, ciliated as in text fig. 4,D. Eyes 2+ 2, not

far removed from sides of scutum. Dorsal setae fairly stout and coarsely ciliated,

arranged 2,10.8.6.4.2.2 and 32-50 long. Venter: all coxae with 1 long (40) seta,

a similar pair between coxae I and between coxae III, thercatter anterior of

anus 8.8.8, posterior of anus 6.4.4.2; those behind the anus are 40 and of similar

structure to the dorsal setae, the others are more slender and finer. Legs, palpi

and chelicerae normal. Cuticle finely, transversely, striated.

Text fig. 4

Trombicula fletcheri n.sp.: A, dorsal view; B, ventral view; C, chelicera;

D, sensilla of scutum; E, tarsus I; F, dorsal seta.

The standard data for the type and paratype are:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

Type - - 62 74 32 20 15 27 52 35 48 65 32-50

Parat. - 62 75 30 20 14 25 50 35 48 62 32-31)

Loc. and Host—Two specimens permanently mounted sent from the Institute

of Medical Research, Federated Malay States, and labelled as Trombicula

akamushi (Brumpt), from Raltus ratlus (diardi or jalorensis), Sungei Buloh,

Selangor, 14 October 1930.

Remarks—From the key to species, the figures, and descriptions it will be

seen that the above specimens do not agree with akamushi or any other known

species. We have pleasure in naming it after Dr. W. Fletcher.

TROMBICULA BODENSIS Gunther 1940

Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 65, (5-6), 479, 1940.

(Pl. iii, fig. 7)

Of this species which was described from specimens taken on the mouse deer,

Tragulus borneanus Miller, from the Bode River near Sandakan, British North

Borneo, we have been able to examine the type slide from the School of Public

Health, University of Sydney, as wel. as three paratypes.

The standard data for these specimens are as follows:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PI. Sens. DS

Type - - 55 63 2f 20) ll 25 45 40 48 60 40-50

Parat. - 55 62 27 21:5 10 ao 45 38 50 — 40-50

Py - 60 65 27 22 10 27 44 39 49 — 40-50

43 - 36 65 27 23 10 28 40 40 50 65 40-50

Mean - - 56:5 64 27 22 10 26 44-5 39 49-5 62-5 40-50

The posterior margin of the dorsal scutum reaches 3 » behind the line of PL,

and the arrangement of the DS is 2.8.6.6.6.4.

There are some slight differences between certain of the above measurements

and those given by Gunther, ¢.g., the scutum is given by him as 75 wide and 37°5

long, whereas allowing for the fact that PW is somewhat less than the real

maximum width, the latter value is only about 66-67. Similarly our values for the

length of the scutum (ASB + PSB) are nowhere greater than 33 as against 37-5

given by Gunther.

TROMBICULA bDELIENSIS Walch 1923

Kitasato Arch. Exper. Med., 5, (3), 63, 1923; Tr. Vth. Bien. Congr. Far East.

Assoc. Trop. Med., Singapore, 1923 (publ. 1924).

= vanderghinstei Gunther 1940. Proe. Linn, Soc. N.S.W., 65, (3-4), 252.

(PI. iv, fig. 1)

This species was originally recorded from Deli, on the east coast of Sumatra,

where Walch found it on man and rodents and considered it to be the vector of

the pseudotyphus of that region. It was apparently confined to the lower altitudes,

up to 300 metres.

In 1940 Gunther described T. vanderghinstei from rats at Bulolo and con-

sidered that it might possibly be only a local variant of deliensis. From the com-

parison of our figures of the dorsal scutum of these two species and the data given

for both it will be seen that Gunther’s vanderghinstei is only a synonym of the

Sumatran species.

Heaslip (Med. J. of Aust. 1941, 380) in his investigations into the “tsutsu-

gamushi” fever of North Queensland (Cairns district) has shown that

T. deliensis is the commonest species of larval Prombicula of that area, but he did

not find it around Brisbane. It occurred plentifully on rats and the bandicoot,

Tsoodon torosus, and out of 2,500 specimens froin these hosts 90% were

T, deliensis. \t is apparently the vector of “tsutsugamushi” fever in North

Queensland.

Of the material that we have examined in detail we give the following data:

Queensland:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

Cairns - 63 81 32 21-5 13-5 27 55 46 60 62 50-55

5 - 62 76 30 23 13+5 29 56 46 65 62 50-55

4 - 62 76 30 23 13-5 27 54 43 60 60 50-55

is - 65 76 30 23 13-5 28 54 43 65 65 45-55

- 60 73 27 22 13-5 27 54 43 62 — 45-55

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-~-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

Cairns - 60 73 28 22 13-5 30 60 43 60 65 50-60

- 62 75 30 22 13-5 30 55 43 60 62 50-60

- 65 75 30 24 16 30 54 41 60 65 55-55

. - 65 77 30 24 13-5 27 56 43 63 63 50-60

3 - 62 70 26 21 13-5 27 52 4l 57 60 45-55

+, - 60 73 30 22 13-5 30 56 40 62 60 45.-00

ry -~ 60 75 30 24 13-5 28 56 43 62 40 45-60

3 - 65 81 32 23 15 30 60 46 65 — 50-60

- 07 82 32 23 15 28 56 43 65 — 48-55

- 65 78 32 24 15 28 57 46 62 65 50-55

- 65 82 30 25 16 27 56 46 65 62 50-60

- 65 78 30 23 16 28 54 48 62 65 48-55

- 65 81 30 22 13-5 30 60 46 67 65 50-60

- 65 76 29 25 16 30 57 43 65 62 45-55

- 60 $1 3] Za 13-5 27 — 40 65 aod 45-060

Men -- 68 #7 30 8 dt 2 36 44 948 wr 45260

New Guinca—Type and three paratypes of 7. vanderghinste/:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

Type - - 65:5 75 30 22 13-5 26:5 50 43 60 65 45-60

Parat. - - 635 76 31 25 1355 30 53 42-5 61 65 45-60

i Ss OS 2 27 60) «6 42)—COGA S48 GO

~ tet fh Fe Or 2) th 2h Sa 4g - 6 “65 bess

Mean - - 65 74 29-5 24 13:5 27 54 42:5 61 65 45-60

In all the above the arrangement of dorsal setae is 2.8.6.0.4.2. as given py

Walch and by Gunther. The other data given by Walch are: scutal width 74,

length 37; Al, 39, Sens. 61, and by Gunther: scutal width 84-4, length 50;

AM 50, AL 46. PL 56. SB 28; these latter, however, are not quite iu

agreement with our measurements of his material.

TROMBICULA corvi Kawamura and Yamaguchi 1921

INitasato Archiy. Exper, Med., 1921, 4, 169,

(Text fig. 7 A)

Hatori (1919), Ann, Trop. Parasitol., 13, 233, referred to a species of

Trombiciula on fowls in formosa, but while regarding it as new did not describe

or figure it,

Later, in 1921, Kawamura and Yamaguchi, having received a slide of this

species from Hatori himself, published a nuniber of details and referred to it as

Trombicula corvi Llatori. As we can find no reference to this specific name having

been published by Hatori. it would seem that the species should be known as

T. cori Kawamura and Yamaguchi 1921. These authors give only a few details

as in the key, and from these the figure of the dorsal scutum has been constructed.

Tt must be remembered, however, that except for the values given by Kawamura

and Yamaguchi it is hypothetical.

TROMRBICULA SCUTELLARIS Nagayo 1920

Verhandl. d. jap. pathol. Gesellsch., Tokvo, 10, 471, 1920; Amer. J. Hygiene, 1,

(5, 6), 569, 1921.

(Pl. iv, fig. 2)

Of this species we have not seen any authentic material. It is very close to

palpalis Nagayo and may possibly be synonymous with it. The first reference

has not been available to us, but the standard data and figure of the dorsal scutum

Vol. 67, Plate 1V

Aust., 1943

Sac. 8.

Roy.

Trans.

gad

= Ge,

bee |

nee [

3, 1. palpalis Nagavo;

scutellaris Nagayo:

£. 7. rara Walch; 6, riot Gunther.

DAP

1, Trombicula dellensis Walch:

4, T. intermedia Nagayo;

given here is from Nagayo’s 1921 figure and data. he figure is to scale and the

data as follows:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PE Sens. DS

57 695 26°5 28°5 15 26:5 51 43 53 70 _—

The arrangement of dorsal setae is 2.10.10(12).10(8).6.4. © According to

Nagayo’s figure the scutal setae are thick and strongly ciliated and the sensillae

with very short ciliations on the basal third and thereafter with long ones. !t

also differs from the closely allied species palpélis and intermedia in that A-P is

very much greater than SD.

‘TROMBICULA PALPALIS Nagayo et al, 1919

Verhandl. d. jap. pathol. Gesellsch., Tokyo, 9, 107; Amer. |. Hvgiene. 1, (5, 6),

569, 1921,

(Pl. v, fig. 3)

We have only been able to refer to Nagayo’s second paper, but have examined

two authentic specimens from Yamagata, Japan (coll. July 1920).

Nagayo (1921) gives the following details: scutal length 37-7, width 71-7,

Sens, 61°4. Our standard data for the two specimens examined are:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM ATL PL Sens. DS

62 67 28 26 13 17 47 36 48 56 35-50

58 66 25 22 13 17 45 38 48 — —

Dorsal setae arranged 2.10.10.+-.

Nagayo (1921) claims to have reared this species through from larvae tu

adult, and to have obtained larvae from the adult. He was unable, however, to

point to any very definite specific differences between the nymphs and adults of

this species and those of akamushi, pallida, intermedia and scutellaris,

TROMBICULA INTERMEDIA Nagayo 1920

Verhandi. d. jap. pathol. Gesellsch., Tokyo, 10, 471, 1920; Amer. J. Hygiene, 1,

(5, 6), 569, 1921,

(PI. iv, fie. 4)

Of this species, which is very close to the preceding two species, we have

only been able to refer to Nagayo’s second paper. Our figure is from his figure

and data and drawn to scale. Our standard data, also from his details, are as

follows:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AT. PL Sens. DS

53 60 22°5 23-5 23 18 53 41 37 65 —

Arrangement of dorsal setae, 2.10.8.8.6.4.2.

Nagayo states that he has reared the larvae of this species as tar as the nymph,

but fails to find any definite morphological distinctions between the nymph of this

aud the other Japanese forms, akanneshi, pallida, palpalis and scutelaris.

TROMBICULA RARA Walch 1924

Tr. Vth. Bien. Congr. Far East. Assoc. Trop. Med. Singapore, 1923 (publ. 1924).

(PL. iv, fig. 3)

This species was recorded from man from Sumatra, We have not been abie

to obtain any authentic material but Walch gives the following data: width ot

scutum 104, length 74, AL 33, Sens. 57, DS in text 6.4.4.2, in hg. 2.6.24.4.2, and

344 long. Irom his figure and the above data we give the following standard

data on the basis of ASB ++ PSB, ic., depth or length of scutum (SD) = 74.

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM Al PL Sens. DS

85 104 54 25 49 40 40 33 40 57 34

From Trof. Dr. J. E. Dinger of the Koningen Wilhelmina Institute v. Bac-

teriologic, Batavia, we have a slide, LA. lc. 11, unnamed, which on examination

proves to be this species. The standard data are:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

92 110 47 27 47 40 40 47 55 60 40

Arrangement of DS, 2.6.6.4.2.

TROMBICULA Rio: Gunther 1939

Prec. Liun. Soc, N.S.W., 64, (1-2), 80, 1939.

(PL. jv, fig. 6)

Gunther described this species from Megapodius duperreyi, the bush fowl of

New Guinea.

In his deseription he gives the following data: scutal width 120, length 69,

AM 66, AL 68, PL 75, SD 50, Sens. 75, DS 2.14.12.4.6.8.10.8.4.

We have been able to examine the type and three paratypes, which gave the

following data:

AW - PW SB ASB PSR A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

Type - 99 {11 56 28 33 31-5 60 70 75 70 35-70

Parat. - 99 110 55 28 33 33 61 70 73 — =

7 - 102 110 50 30 3o 32 60 67 70 70 35-05

$5 - 100 110 54 30 35 30 60 72 72 68 35-70

Mean - 100 110 54:5 29 34 S1-5 00 70 72-5 69 35-70

Dorsal setae arranged, 2.14.16.12.-.

TROMBICULA WICIMANNI (Oudms. 1905)

Lrombidium wichmannt Oudms. 1905, Ent. Ber., 1, (22), 217; 1906, Nova

Guinea, 5, 106, 132, pl. iv, fig. 67-68; 1908, Tijds. Entom., 51, 25; 1909, bid.,

52, 38.

Allolrombidium wichmanni Oudms. 1906, Ent. Ber., 2, (28), 58-59.

Trombidium (Heterotrombidium) wichmanni, Verdun 1909, Cr. Soc. Biol., Paris,

67, 246.

Microtrombidium cwichmannt Oudms. 1909, Ent. Ber., 3, (50). 20; 1912, Zool.

Jahrb. Suppl., 14, 9.

Trombicula wichmanni, Gunther 1940, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 65, (5, 6), 480,

4-6.

(PL. v, fig. 1)

‘This species was originally described from: New Guinea from Goure coronata,

and also from man from the North Celebes. Gunther records it from the mouse

deer (Tragulus borneanus Miller 1902) from Bode River, British North Borneo,

1939,

We have been able to examine Gunther’s type as well as three other specimens,

all from the same series from British North Borneo, From these our standard

data are as follows:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens.

Type - - 79:5 93 40 25 27 31-5 43 48 58 63 45-05

Parat. - - 76:5 91-5 38 25 26 31-5 43 46 58 63 —

- - 79-5 93 38 23 25 31-50 -- 46 58 68 _

- - 8&0 93 40 24 27 31-5 43 46 59 — —

Mean - - 79 92-5 39 24 26 031-5 4346-5 58) 6345-05.

Arrangement of dorsal setae, 2.6.6.4.2.2.

Trombicula hatorii sp. nov.

Trombicula pseudoakamushi Ilatori (nec. Tanaka) in Kawamura and Yamaguchi,

Kitasato Archives Exper. Med., 4, 169, 1921.

(PL v, fig. 3)

Hatori (Ann. Trop. Med. Parasitol., 13, 233, 1919) described a species of larval

Trombicula from Formosa under the above name, and claimed to have reared from

these larvae the nymphs and adults which were identified with T. amediocris Berl.

( = minor Berl.). Kawamura and Yamaguchi 1921 also worked on the Formosan

species and described and figured what they considered Hatori’s form in much

detail. They agreed with the correlation of the larvae and adult with mediocris.

The drawing of the dorsal seutum given hercin is based to scale 6n Kawamura

and Yamaguchi’s figure and data, from. which the following standard data are

deduced :

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

72 85 37 27 27 27 37 37 50 55 45

Dorsal setae arranged, 2.6.6.4.2.

This species is closely related to T. wichimanni Oudm., as will be seen by a

comparison with the standard data. It differs in that the SB are only slightly ia

advance of the line of PL, that the posterior margin of the scutum is not flattened

medially, and in the different lengths of the normal scutal setae.

TROMBICULA MiNoR Berlese 1904

Trombicula minor Berl. 1904, Acari nuovi Manip. IV, 135, pl. xv, fig. 4;

Womersley 1939 (July), Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust., 63, (2), 152; Gunther

1939 (December), Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 64, (5, 6), 466.

Trombicula mediocris Berl. 1912, Redia 8, fase. 1, 94; Gunther 1940, Proc. Linn.

Soc. N.S.W., 65, (5-6), 477.

Trombicula hirsti Sambon. 1927, Ann. Mag. Nat. Ilist., (9), 20, 157; nec Hirst

1929, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (10), 3, 564; nec Womersley 1934, Rec. S. Aust.

Mus., 5, (2), 212.

(PL v, Sg. 2)

Although Berlese in his description and figure of T. minor from Java makes

no reference to the presence or absence of eyes, yet his species (apecinicn

imperfect) is probably, as suggested by Kitashima and Miyajima 1920, the nymph

of T. imediocris Bert, 1912, also. from Java, which has a very well developed

eve closely adjacent to and on cach side of the sensillary area of ‘the crista,

Gunther’s nymphs in size, dimensions of front tarsi and metatarsi, and

in the dorsal setae agree with anor, but also possess a single eye on cach side of

the crista as in medtocris, An adult female irom Innisfail, Oucensland (1939,

\W. G. 11.5, agrees in size and all other characters with mediocris and, except in

size and presence of eyes, also with minor,

This species as the larvae is the common “itch mite” of the Queensland scrub,

at high altitudes. Heaslip (Med. J. Aust., 1941, p. 380), in his studies of “tsutsu-

gamushi” fever in North Queensland, records it from man at lake Marrine at

1,500 feet, and although he collected adults from near sea level, the larval form

was not found amongst 2.500 specimens from rats and bandicoots. ‘The usual

hosts of the larvae appear to be birds (zide Gunther 1939, C).

T. miner Berl. (larvae) occurs on rats and on the bandiccot, fsoodon torosus.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust.,

1943

Vol. 67, Plate V

1, Trombicula wichmanni Oudms.; 2; T, minor Berl. f.p.: 3. 7. aiaor v. delensis

Waleh (from Gunther’s material from N.G.

5, T. hatorii n.sp.;

Oy Ts

novee-hollandiae Tlirst;

8, T. wacropus Wom.

’

sanibont

- 4. same from Walch’s material;

Wom. ;

We give the following data from two specimens from Innisfail, and one from

Lake Barrine.

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

Innisfail - 73 #85 40 23 35 35 43 46 53 -— 50455

x - 73 $5 40 24 385 35 — 45 52 — 50-55

Lake Barrine 79 89 43 25 35 36 41-5 46-5 52 -— 50-55

Mean - - 75 8 41 24 35 355 42 46 52 — 50-55

Arrangement of dorsal setae, 2.6.6.4.2,

TROMBICULA MINOR V. DELIENSIS Walch 1923

Trombicula pscudoakamushi v. deliensis Walch 1923.

Trombicula hirstt Gater 1932,

Lrombicula hirsti v. morobensis (nom. nud.) Gunther 1938.

Trombicula hirsti v. buloloensis Gunther 1939,

(PL v, fig. 3, 4)

This form appears to be but a variety of the larvae of Trombicula ainor

Berl. The differences, as will be seen from the key to species and from the figures,

lie only in the size of the scutum and the longer scutal setae. Walch described it

as a variety of Hatori’s Formosan species T. pseudoakamushi (non Tanaka),

from Deh, Sumatra. Gunther records it as common in the somewhat higher

altitudes of New Guinea from many hosts, bandicoots, bush fowl, bush pig, bush

turkey, cassowary, pigeon, and as a casual on rail, swamp hen and man. It was

from this variety that he bred his nymphal T. minor Berl. It also occurs at

Selangor, Federated Malay States. We have examined the following 21 specimens

from New Guinea, and also a single specimen from Selangor, Federated Malay

States, 1929, labelled as 7. hirsti, with the following results:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL DS

FMS. - 85 106 41°5 23 35 33 43 50 56°53 41-58

Dorsal setae, 2.6.6.4.2.

AW PW SB ASB PSE A-P AM AL LPL Sens. DS

Type slide, NG. - 83 99:5 44 30 40 38 48 53 S65 60 —

lm lw 8300S 44 HS 40 8B 5B OSS ROH

- 8 8 44 28 38 33 — 50 55 oO —

7 , = BR OR 44 2G BSB. BR OOS

, oy Uy 80 (8G 45 23+ 3655 B10 4B S55 5B

yoo lw BB 99S 4B BB 36-5 BS 4B 5B BO

‘ » ~~ 83 (99-5 44 2H 365 3B 4B OS

yw Uy 84 OE 465 25365 3B 50 5 Hi

oak , -« 8 95 43 26:5 38 35 50 54 60 6 —

oy el » = 845103 440 2555 38855055

sate. oe oo BS OG «4S SG BR SSR. tes

Slide 2,.N.G. - - 81-5 96 41°95 25 40 35 45 49 55 58 —

i » -~ > 8 8% 43 25 42-5 35 45 49 55 33 =

7 » ~~ OL 103 46 26-5 41-5 33 45 58 64 56 —

“ me & BS OG 44 OB GY ae as Ok OG

Slide 3, N.G. - - 8 99 46 25 40 35 50 53 50 60 —

i os = BE 96, 45 Bes as “3x St SE RT 8&2.

‘ » - + 83 104 46-5 25+ 40 38 580 58 62 S51 —

Slide 4, N.G. -- - 86 103 47 28 40 38 SO 58 54 —

ve oe EOE 1 OE GR es Gee SR eh LS

P ~ + BA 208" as Se BSS aaa SR

Mean - - - - 84:5 09-5 44-5 26-53 38-5 34-5 48 53 88-5 58-5 50-00

Arrangement of dorsal setae, 2.6.6.4.2.

That Walch’s description and figures agree with the above is apparent, when

the standard data deduced from them are compared. These data are as follows:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

82-5 93°55 36 28 33 33 46 48 56 58 44

He gives AL = 46 and shows the other setae as almost equal.

TROMBICULA NOVAE-HOLLANDIAE Hirst 1929

Proc. Zool. Soc, London, 1929, 172; Womersley 1934, Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 5, (2),

213.

(PI. v, fig. 6)

Of this species we have measured 14 specimens from Kangaroo Island, South

Australia (including 9 co-tvpes), 9 specimens from Tasmania and 4 specimens

irom Cairns, Queensland.

The maximum, minimum and mean data of this material are as follows:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

Maxima - 78 102 32 38 29 38 62 54 78 ~=-100 fant

Minima - 62 90 27 32 24 32 49 46 37 90 —

Mean - - 71 96-5 31 35 27 35 53°53 51 68 95 50-80

The arrangement of dorsal setae is, 2.6.6.6.4.2.

TROMBICULA SAMBONI Wom. 1936

(PL. v, fig. 7; text fig. 5)

Womersley 1939, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 63, (2), 153.

= ee hirsti Hirst 1929, nec Sambon 1927; Womersley 1934 nec Sambon

1927,

This is the “ti-tree itch” mite of South Australia. We have measured 10

specimens from Robe, the type locality, and 8 specimens from Port McDonnell.

The following are the standard data from all this material:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

Highest - 81 91 38 26 39 32 4l 44 52 &2 —

Lowest - 75 84 34 23 31 27 37 38 43 65 —_—

Mean - 78:5 87 30 24 36 30 38 42 48 68-5 30-358

Dorsal setae, 2.6.6.6.4.2.

While this paper was in preparation two visits were made by one of us

(H. W.) to the Robe district of South Australia to ascertain the prevalence of the

larvae of this species at that time of the year (April) for certain experimental

reasons,

Inquiries showed that the larvae, locally known as “red spider” or “ti-tree

itch,” were well known to residents throughout the coastal area from Policeman’s

Point on the Coorong to Port McDonnell. The mites occur mainly on opea

grassy patches amongst the ti-tree scrub, frequented by campers and duck shooters.

Walking amongst the scrub or lying ou the grass invariably lcads to infestation ot

the person, and any objects on the ground, such as one’s boots, a gun or handker-

chief, soon become covered with numerous specimens of these tiny yellowish

active mites. They are more prevalent on warmer days, particularly from Sep-

tember to January but occur throughout the year, and even on the occasion of

our visits they were abundant althouga the weather was cold and wet.

In the Robe district at the present time they occur on the introduced rabbit,

which abounds, as small yellowish clusters in the ears and around the eyes.

Almost any rabbit seemed to carry some. Old residents stated that they could

remember the “itch” from their earliest days, 70 to 80 years ago, although rabbits

did not appear in the district until about 50 years ago. Before rabbits became

common, native animals such as wallabies and bandicoots were abundant, but are

now extinct. It appears reasonable, therefore, to assume that the mites were

carried by such native animals, and that as these were replaced by rabbits the

mites transferred themselves to the latter.

The mites commonly attack cattle. horses and sheep, causing severe irritation

and even bleeding, with subsequent loss of condition; in fact, one person informed

us that he had lost cattle as a result.

On cattle and man the mites attach themselves singly and not in clusters as

on the rabbits or on the hocks of sheep. On man they do not, as believed by local

residenis, burrow under the skin, but atiach in the normal way by the mouth paris

only, and are probably soon detached by scratching or rubbing of the clothing.

The bites are very irritating and some people seem to suffer a slight feverish

reaction, although as far as known this particular species is not a vector of disease,

Text fig. 5

Trombicula sambont Wom. Adult: A, dorsal outline; B, lateral outline; C, crista

and eyes; D, palp; E, chelicera; I, dorsal seta; G, tarsus and metatarsus I.

as are some allied species from Japan, New Gtinca and Queensland. The site of

attack on man is chiefly on the legs, around the waistline where clothing fits tightly

and frequently on the scrotum. During the first visit nymphs or adults were not

found, but intensive search on the second visit discovered numerous specimens

of both stages in the black soil, chicfly in the top inch, and espccially near

spots where rabbits had been scratching and stamping. While finding of adults

in the field is not absolute proof of their association with the larvae, the fact that

in this area only the one larval species is known, strongly supports the view that

the larvae and adults are of the same species. Nevertheless, breeding experiments

are being made to check this conclusion.

Adult of Trombicula samboni Wom. — Colour in life red except the pro-

podosoma which is colourless except for deeply pigmented eyes. Shape a figure

of 8, with the posterior portion broader than the anterior portion. Length (exclud-

ing gnathosoma) 1,200; width, anterior portion 690, posterior portion 860.

Crista distinct, 170, sensillary area roughly triangular with paired sensillae, 118

long, and shortly finely ciliated on distal half, SB 47. Eyes 1+ 1, large and

closely adjacent to sensillary area, deeply red pigmented in life, but difficult to

observe after death except in freshly mounted specimens. Legs short, except 1;

I 775 long, 11 520, HIT 600, IV 680, tarsus I conspicuous, 206 long by 86 wide,

metatarsus 137 long. Clothing of thickly placed, ciliated, pointed setae, 40 long,

with the ciliations long and outstanding, all setae uniform. Genital opening with

three pairs of discs.

Nymph -Similar to adult in all details except size and having only two pairs

of genital discs. Length 1,000, width, anterior portion, 600, posterior portion 720.

TROMBICULA MAcRoPUS Wom. 1936

Womersley 1936, J. Linn. Soc., London, (Zool), 40, (269), 112.

(PL v, fig. 8)

The mean, maximum and minimum data for seven specimens of this species

are as follows:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

Maxima - 80 85 35 24 35 30 33 38 52 65 _

Minima - 72 78 30 22 30. 27 30 30 46 65 —

Mean - 76 82 33 24 32 30 32 35 50 65 30-50

Dorsal setae arranged 2.8.6.-.

TROMBICULA CERVULICOLA Ewing 1931

Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 1931, No. 2,908, 80, Art. 8, 13, pl. i, fig. 3.

(Text fig. 18, A)

This species was described from specimens from the Barking Deer (Cervulus

aureus) from Muktesar, Kumaun, India.

Ewing’s descriptions give no dimensions beyond the length and width of a

“slightly engorged larva.”

Ile regards the species as near to acuscutellaris Walch, differing in the

scuttim not being so angulate posteriorly and in the fewer setules on the sensillary

setae. The dorsal setae are given as 26 in number.

From the details available it is not possible to place this species in the key.

But from Ewing’s figure of the dorsal scutum and assuming AW at 56, we get

the following standard data:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

56 64 26 20) 22 24 34 32 52 44 :

On tre CORRELATION OF THE LARVAE WITH THE NYMPHS AND

ADULTS or TROMBICULA

Although a large number of larval species of Trombiculinac are known, only

a very few of these are also known from either the nymph or adult or both stages.

Because of the importance of the larvae of these mites as vectors of disease to

man from animals, it is of the utmost importance that an intensive study of their

life histories should be made with a view to clearing up the whole question.

In America, according to Ewing, nymphs and adults of the itch mite or

“chigger” have been reared and it has been shown that the adult, T. cinna-

baris Ew., is synonymous with the larva known as Trombicula irritans (Riley),

which name has priority. In England the common “harvest mite,” Trombicula

autumnalis, has also been reared by Hirst to the nymphal stage.

Within the area covered by this paper, out of 30 recognised larval species of

Trombicula s. str., at the most only four can be definitely correlated with nymphs

or adults; these are akamusht Brumpt, deliensis Walch, minor Berlese, and

sambont Wom. In addition two other species, signata Wom, and tindalei Wom.,

arc known as nymphs from captured material but are unknown as larvae or at least

uncorrelated with any known larvae. The life-cycle of 7. akamushi seems to have

been fairly definitely established by a number of Japanese workers since 1916, the

principal of whom were Nagayo et al.. Kawamura and Yamaguchi, and Miyajima

and Okumura, None of these workers, however, appear to have identified the

nymphal and adult stages with any known species.

In 1917 Ifatori studied the tsutsugamushi disease of Formosa, and besides

claiming to have reared the nymphs and adults from the larvae of akamushi,

recorded another larval species under the name of pseudoakamushi (non Tanaka)

(= hatorii n. sp. The adults of this second form he found living free in the soil,

and considered it might be synonymous with Berlese’s mediocris (<= minor Berl.)

from Java.

In 1921 Kawamura and Yamaguchi also studied the Formosan species and

confirmed Hatori’s rearing of both species, also referring pseudoakamushi to

niediocris Berl.

In 1939 Gunther, in New Guinea, reared nymphs from the larvae, then known

as T. hersti v. buloloensis Gunther, which one of us (H. W.) was able to identfiy

with 7, minor, and in Queensland W. G. Heaslip collected an adult of this species.

The third species to be reared through is 7. deliensis Walch, of which Walch him-

self reared and described the nymph and adult, This species cannot yet be referred

to any known adult species. In the present paper the nymph and adult of the “ti-

tree itch” of South Australia are also described.

In 1921 Nagayo et al. also claimed to have reared nymphs and adults from

four other species from Japan, namely palpalis, pallida, intermedia and scutellaris.

They were unable, however, to point to any specific differences between any of

these nymphs or adults and those of akamushi, hence the validity of these species

is uncertain at present, although the larvae seem to be well differentiated as in

the key.

The nymphal and adult stages of those species kuown as such from the area

under review can be separated as follows:

1 Vyes 1+ 1, closely adjacent to the sensillary area, 2

Ives apparently absent. 5

2 Colour in life creamy white. 3

Colour in life red. Size 1-2 mm, long, width of opisthosoma 860 pw DS poimted,

40 tong, uniform, with long ciliations, Sens. 118 loug, with short inconspicuous cilia-

tions on distal half. SB 47, Tarsus I 206 4 by 864. (Adult.) LT. sambeni Wom.

3 DS long, thick, pointed, with only a few adpressed ciliations or serrations, Length

1-2 mni, Sens. 170, SB 37, Tarsus I 237 », by 97 pe (Nymph.) T. signata Wom.

DS finer, with fine outstanding cifiations, 4

4 Length 1,100 2, width 8604. DS 30-50 long. Sens, 160, SB 57. Tarsus I 260, by

105». = (Adult.) T. ainor Berl.

Length 1,670, width. DS toe 70 long. Sens. 160, SB 42. Tarsus T 275 y, by 67 »

( Adult.) T. elegans Wom.

5 Sens. area transvetse and wider than long. 6

Sens. area more or less triangular, about as long as wide. T. akamushi (Brumpt.)

T. palpalis Nagayo

T. pallida Nagayo*

T. intermedia Nagayo

T. scutellaris Nagayo

6 Sens. 111, with short cilia along whole length, those on basal third very small,

SB 25. Tarsus I in ratio of width to length= 171-7, DS 21-56, apically knobbed.

(Nymph.) : T. delients Walch.

Sens. 160, with few long branches on distal half. SB 71. Yarsus I 1324 by 53 y.

DS 26-40 pointed with Jong outstanding ciliations. (Nymph.) T. tindaler Wom,

Gen. Myotrombicula nov.

Mandibles and palpi modified for grasping hair. One dorsal scutum as in

Trombicula, with five normal scutal setae and a pair of sensillae. Claws three on

all legs, the inner claw longer and finer than the laterals. Genotype M. vesper-

tilionis n. sp.

Myotrombicula vespertilionis n. sp.

(Text fig. 6, A-E; text fg. 8, B)

Description—Shape almost rounded. Length 275 p, width 220». Legs long

and slender, 1170, I1 145, ITI 145. Dorsal scutum transversely rectangular (cf. text

fig. 8.B), AW 62:5, PW 65:5, SD 24, ASB 16, PSB 11, A-P 16, AM 23, AL 19,

PL 27, Sens. —, DS 23. Dorsal setae arranged 2.6(8).2(6).8.48.6.4.2, pointed,

with short ciliations. Eyes absent. Mandibles (text fig. 6,D) with stout short

stipes, and short broad chelicerae with two large blunt tecth, adapted more for

Text fig. 6

Myotrombicula vespertilionis n.g. et n.sp.: A, dorsal view; B, ventral view;

C, palp; D, mandible; E, tarsus I.

* See under larval form of this species.

100

grasping hair. Palpi as in text fig. 6, C, strongly bent over as if to help in grasping

hair, details as in figure. Venter with setae as shown, one on each coxae, a pair

between coxae I and between coxae III, thereafter 2.4.4.6.6.4.2, ‘Varsus I (text

fig. 6, KE) with a long stout dorsal seta.

Loc. and Hosts.—This very interesting species was found among the debris

of a jar of spirit containing bats, No. M 4443-53, 3576, 501, and 500 in the collec-

tions of the South Australian Museum, probably from South Australia.

Text fig. 7

Trombiculoides gateri n.g. et n.sp.: A, dorsal view; B, ventral view; C, palp;

D, chelicera; F, tarsus I.

101

Remarks—The modifications of the palpi and chelicerae suggest the adapta-

tion for grasping hair, although the modifications are not as pronounced as in

some genera of Listrophoridae.

Genus Trombiculoides nov.

With a single dorsal scutum carrying nine normal sctac and a pair of long

filamentous sensillae, Eyes 2+ 2. Chelicerae large and strong with a strong

apical and strong inner subapical tooth. Genotype T. gater: n. sp.

Trombiculoides gateri n. sp.

(Text fig. 7, A-E; 8 C)

Description—Shape subrotund. Length 690, width 395. Legs I 310,

II 275, If 340. Eyes, two on each side. Dorsal scutum with a slightly incurved

front margin, and then uniformly curved so that there is no demarcation between

the lateral and posterior margins; with strongly ciliated setae, one anterior

A, dorsal scutum of Trombicula corvi K. & Y., x 500; B, dorsal scutum of Myotrom-

bicula vespertilionis n.sp., x 500; C, dorsal scutum of Trombiculoides gateri,

n.sp., x 500

median, one at cach antero-lateral corner and one where each postero-lateral corner

should be, and then two on each side between the AL and PI. setae; two long

sensillary setae, ciliated on apical half, their bases slightly in advance of the middle

of scutum. Mandibles large and strong, with large prominent apical and inner

subapical teeth. Dorsal setae long, 80, pointed and strongly ciliated in rows of

2.12.8.4.2.8.10.10.10.6.4, rows four and five from front with the setae sublateral.

Palpi normal as figured, tibial claw bifurcate. Venter; all coxae with a single

ciliated seta, a pair of sctae between coxac I] and between coxae III, thereafter

11.6.11.8.6.4.2.2, gradually lengthening posteriorly. Tarsi with three claws, the

middle one about twice as long as laterals, tarsus I as in text fig. 7, E, tarsus IIT

with a long outer simple seta. Standard data as follows:

AW AW* AW? PW Max.W SB ASB PSB A-P AN AL AL? AL? PL Sens,

76 91 85 78 95 27-27 33 42 65 28 38 70 60 75

102

(N.B.— AL, and AL, are the second and third lateral scutal setae, and

AW? and AW? the width of the scutum between these; Max. W is the greatest

width of the scutum.)

Loc. and Hosts—The type and two paratypes from R. rattus argentiventer

Chase from Selinsing-Gunong, Semanggel. Perak, 15/3/32, were sent to us for

study by the Institute for Medical Research, Federated Malay States.

Remarks—This genus, in the peculiar and strong chelicerae and the extra

scutal setae, is obviously distinct from its allies. In the latter character it might

show some relationship to Gahrliepia and its associates, but from a study of the

figures it is clear that the extra scutal setae are not homologous with the extra

scutal ones in Gahrliepia; they do not belong to the dorsal rows and are not taken

into the scutum by any posterior prolongation.

Genus ScHONGASTIA Oudemans 1910

Entom. Ber., 3, (54), 86. Genotype Trombidium vandersandet Oudms. 1905;

ibid. 1, (22), 216.

Trombiculinae with the sensillary setae of the single anterior dorsal scutum

clavate or capitate. Dorsal scutum more or less rectangular and with five setae

besides the sensillary sctae, 1 AM, 2 Al. and 2PL. Chelicerae dorsally serrated.

Only the larval stages of this genus are as yet known.

Key To THE MALAYAN, New GUINEA AND FORMOSAN SPECIES

OF SCHONGASTIA

1 Dorsal scutum roughly rectangular, posterior margin sinuous. PI. much the shortest

17, AM the longest, DS 2.6.6.6.6.2. S. oudemansi Walch 1923

Dorsal scutum roughly pentagonal or hexagonal 2

2 Dorsal scutum roughly pentagonal PL the longest, AM the shortest, DS 2.10.6.6.4.2.

S. victa Gater 1932

Dorsal scutum roughly hexagonal. 3

3. AL shorter than AM or PL, DS 2.12.84.6.4.2.2, Sens. nude. S. jamesi Gunther 1939

AL longer than AM, or PL, or both.

4 Sens, in Une of PL. 5

Sens. well behind line of PL. 6

5 AW 58, PW 72, DS 2.8.10.10.8.8.4 (after Kawamura). S. katonis n.sp.

AW 66, PW 91, SB 26, DS 2.10.8.10.8(10) 8.8. S. blestowei Gunther 1940

AW 59, PW 80, SB 33, DS 2.10.2.10.2.10.8.6.4.2.

S. blestowet v. megapodius nov.

6 DS 2.10.2.10.2.14.2.10.12.8.4., Sens. 35, nude. S. faylori Gunther 1940

DS 2.10.10.10.10.8.2. Sens. 25 S. vandersandet Oudms. 1905

SCHGNGASTIA OUDEMANST (Walch 1923)

Trombicula oudemanst Walch, Kitasato Archiv. Exper. Med.. 5, (3), 1923;

Fletcher, Lesslar and Lewthwaite, Trans. Roy. Soc., Trop. Med. and Hyg., 22,

161, 1928.

Schéngastia oudemansi (Walch), Gater 1932, Parasitol., 24.

(PI. vi, fig. 1)

This species is apparently not known to attack man. It was described from

Deli, Sumatra, by Walch from rats, and in 1928 Fletcher et. al, record it as the

commonest mite on rats in the Federated Malay States.

103

We have not seen any specimens of this species but from the data and figures

given by Walch and by Fletcher we have drawn the scutum to scale, and deduced

the following standard data. Otherwise, the key will separate this species

from others of the genus.

Walch’s data are: scutal length 50, width 72. AI. 27, PL 16°6 and 12 behind

sensillae. Sensillae 30x9. DS 22 Jong and arranged in his figure 2.6.6.64.4.2.

Fletcher furnishes a figure agreeing with that of Walch.

From the above the standard data are:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens,

50 68 34 26 24 40 40 27 17 39 x9

ScHONGASTIA VieTA Gater 1932

Parasitology 1902, 24, 143-174, fig. 5.

(Pt. vi, fig. 2)

Gater described this species from the ears of R. ratius diardi (Jentinck )

from Kuala Lumpur, Selangor, Federated Malay States, and also recorded it from

R. r. jalorensis from the same locality and from K. mulleri validus from Rawb,

Pahang.

We have been able to examine one of the series from Raub, and the drawing

to scale of the scutum and the following standard data are from that specimen:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

55 78 20 21-5 30 30 25 50 58 35x13 45

Dorsal setae 2,10.6.6.4.4.2. Gater gives the scutal length as 56 and the

width 76.

ScuOnGastia sAMESE Gunther 1939

Schéngastia rotunda Gunther 1938, Med. J. Austr., 2, (6), 202 (nom. nud.) 5

jamesi Gunther 1939, Proc. linn. Soc. N.S.W., 64, (1-2), 91.

(PL. vi, fig. 3)

Through the kindness of Prof. Harvey Sutton of the School of Public

Health and Tropical Medicine, University of Sydney, we have been able to

examine Gunther’s type slide which is labelled “Type specimens XI S. rotunda

(jamesi) Bulolo, T. N. G.” There are two specimens on this slide, but only one

of these, and that one much damaged by pressure, is S. jamesi Gunther ; the other

specimen is T’. hirsti v. deliensis Walch (= buloloensis Gunther), From the type

specimen we have only been able to determine SB 35, ASB 26:5, A-P 30, AM

43 -, AL 40, PL 63.

Gunther gives scutal length 50, width 85. AM broken, AT. 37°5, PL 47,

SB 37, Sens. 37°5x 12-5, apparently naked. DS 2128.464.2.2. The figure of

the scutum given here is drawn to scale from the above data.

SCHONGASTIA BLESTOWFI Gunther 1939

Schéngastia yeomansi Gunther 1938, Med. J. Austr., 2, (6), 202 (om. nud.) ;

biestowei Gunther 1939, Proc. Linn. Soc, N.S.W., 64, (1-2), 92.

(PL. vi, fig. 4, 5)

Gunther described this species from a number of specimens from two men

near the Sucin River, Sepik District of New Guinea. He also recorded it at the

same time from the ears of bush fowl (Megapodius duperreyi) from the Bulolo

River basin, Morobe District, and from a man at Bulolo.

We have been privileged to examine the type slide from the School of

Medicine, Sydney University. This slide contained 10 specimens of the collection

104

from Suein River, two of which were indicated as types. Seven of these speci-

mens have been carefully measured for our standard data as follows:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

Tyd = GF 91 26 34 31 29 37 68 $2 85x15 3524p

3 - 6 00 2% 315 27 31 35 65 50 35x15 33-40

Parat. - 65 91 26 31 2 30 35 65 50 35x15 35-40

i" - 6 91 2% 31 20 30 40 65 SO 35x15 35-40

. - 6 88 2 31 29 20 — 65 52 35x15 35-40

r - 6 87 24 31 429 30 35 65 52 35x15 35-40

" ~ 65 87 2 31 2 31 35 65 50 35e15 35-40

Mean - 65 89 26 31:5 29 30 36 65 51 35x15 35-40 :

Dorsal setae arranged 2.10.2.8.10.10.8.8.

Gunther gives the following: scutal length 62°5, width 94, AM 37-5, AL. 75,

PI. 50, SB 25, Sens. 37 x 15, and DS 2.10.8.108(10).10(8).8.8. <A slide of three

paratypes from Megapodius duperreyi from Bulolo, T. N. G., is in the South

Australian Museum Collection. The standard data of these specimens are as

follows:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

58 78 32 28 24 20 37 63 58 £0x 15 50

60 82 35 28 24 20 — 62 30 x 16 50

59 80 32 26 26 20 ~

Mean - 49 80 33 27 25 20 37 63 60 30x15 50

Arrangement of dorsal setae, 2.10.2.10.2.10.8.6.4.2,

It will be scen that there are marked differences in the data of the two lots of

specimens, those from Megapodius having a smaller scutum with the SB wider

apart and placed weil behind the line of PL. A-P is also shorter than in the

specimens from man, while the DS are also longer. These differences, however,

may not be more than varietal and for the present we can only regard them as

such and name the form as S, blestowei v. megapodius noy. The drawings to

scale of the dorsal scuta are from the above series of data.

In addition, the scuta in the typical blestewei from man is strongly pitted

and there is a well-developed crest from the wall of which arises the sensillae.

In the specimens from Megapodius we cannot see a crest nor any pitting. In the

presence of a crest and pitted scutum the typical form might fit into Paraschién-

gastia, but the serrate chelicerae and the absence of circular striations on the

posterior portion of the scutum exclude it.

Schongastia katonis n. sp.

(PI. vi, fig. 5)

In 1921 Kawamura, R., and Yagamuchi, M, (Kitasato Archives Exper. Med.,

IV), described a specimen received from Y. Kato in 1917, from Parao Island,

in the Carolines. Although well described and figured, they did not give a name

to the species, so that katonis is here proposed.

Kawamura and Yamaguchi give the following details, from: which our

standard data and drawing of the scutum are compiled.

Front edge of scutum. 58, width 72-6, length 43-6. Sens. clavate, club 20-3

long, 17-4 broad. DS 30-40, arranged 2.8.10.10.8.8.4, Chelicerae serrate.

Standard data:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PT. Sens. DS

55 68 28 22 21°5 21 23 37 40 31x 17 30-40

105

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1943 Vol, 67, Plate VI

1, Schéngastia oudemanst (Walch); 2, S. vieta Gater; 3, S. jamesi Gunther ;

4, S. blestowei Gunther; 5, S. blestowei v. megapodius nov.; 6, S. katonis n. sp.

7, S. taylort Gunther ; 8, S. vandersandet Oudms.

106

SCHONGASTIA TAYLORI Gunther 1940

Proc. Linn Soc, N.S.W., 1940, 65, (3-4), 257, fig. 12-14,

(Pl. vi, fig. 6, 7)

Described from colonics on the scrotum and hind legs of a scrub wallaby

(Macropus (Thylogale) coxeni Gray) at Bulolo, T, N. G.

Of this species we have examined the type slide containing two paratypes in

addition to the type, and another slide of two paratypes. From these our standard

data are as follows:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens, Ds

Type - 61:5 79 21 35 235 235 40 73 55 35x15 40-50

Parse. « 63 670: 21" “S5° “agg pave” ~ FR eet ae 40-50

. + 6S 790 At 8523-5 23S 43 7B OSS — 40-50

"2 630 -79):—«a22s 385i“ iC CSB = 40-50

"2 63 79 «2b 35.) 23-5 23-5 41 78D = 40-50

Mean - 62:5 79 21 35 23-5 235 41 78 57 35x15 40-50

Arrangement of dorsal setae, 2.10.2.12.2.14.2.10.12.8.4,

Gunther gives the following details: scutal width 87, length 57, AM 42,

AL 56, PL 63, Sens. 37:5-15, probably naked. N.B.—It seems possible that his

measurements of Al. and PL have been reversed, for they do not agree with our

measurements of the type.)

SCHONGASTIA VANDERSANDEI (Oudms. 1905)

Thrombidinm van der Sandeit Oudms., 1905, Ent. Berichten, 1, (22), 216; 1906,

Nova Guinea, V, Zool., 131.

Microthrombidium vandersandei Oudms. 1909, Ent. Bericht., 3, (50), 21.

Schéngastia vandersandei Oudins. 1912, Zool. Jahrbr., Suppl. 14, 45.

(PI. vi, fig. 8)

This species, which is the type of Oudemans genus Schdngastia, was described

from New Guinea as attacking man. Oudemans 1906 (loc, cit.) gives many

records from travellers in this region of being attacked by these small mites. As

so many other species of Trombictlinae are now known to occur in New Guinea,

it is extremely doubtful whether all these records should be listed under this one

species as Oudemans has done; they probably include many species.

From the figure and brief details given by Oudemans we have constructed

the scale drawing of the scutum and the following approximate data:

AW PW SB ASB PSB) A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

60 85 25 35 27°5 275 45 60 50, -25x9 40

Dorsal setae, 2.10,10.10.10.8.2.

Genus NeoscHOncastia Ewing 1929

Manual of External Parasites 1929, 187. Genotype Schéngastia americana Hirst

1921, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (9), 7, 37.

This genus was erected for those species of Schéngastia in which the cheli-

cerae are without dorsal serrations. As yet it is only known from the larvae, with

the doubtful exception of Neoschongastia schiiffnert Walch, which Walch claims

to have reared through to the nymph, of which he figures the crista. From

his figure, however, it can hardly be differentiated from Trombicula spp., and has

the same kind of long, fine, filamentous sensillae, with minute ciliations. Walch

also figured the dorsal setae and the palp of the nymph, but here again no differ-

ences from Trombicula are evident.

In this paper 34 species and 1 variety are recognised, of which 9 species and

I variety are new.

107

Key To tHe MALAYAN, AUSTRALIAN AND JAPANESE SPECIES

OF NEOSCHONGASTIA

Sensillae capitate or globose.

Sensillae clavate, often broadly so.

Sensillae nude.

Sensillae with obvious, though sometimes minute scttles,

AL Jonger than PL, PL shorter than PW, DS 2, 6.6.6.6.4.2. N. innisfailensis n. sp.

PL much longer than AL and PW.

PL about twice the length of PW, DS 2.6.6.6.2(4).4(2).2 N. womersleyi Gunther 1940

PL only slightly longer than PW, DS 2.6.6.6.6.2(4).2. N. melomys n. sp

Coxae III multisetase.

Coxae LIL unisetose.

Coxae ILL with two setae. DS 2 plus ca. 10 rows of 10 cach. Scutal setae with long

ciliations. N. petrogale Wom. 1934

Coxae IIT with 3-5 sctae. Scutal setae with short ciliations. DS 2.8.6.6.8.2.4.2.2,

N. mulabilis Gater 1932

PL and most of DS foliate or lanceolate and shortly ciliated.

Scutal and DS normal,

PL and first four rows of DS foliate. PL much longer than PW. DS 2.6.6.6.6.4.2.

N. foliata Gunther 1940

AM, PL and all DS except posterior two lanceolate. Sensillae? Scutum rectangular,

PL much shorter than PW, DS 2.8.6.6.4.2, N, hastata (Gater 1932)

First row of DS with four setae, ac, DS 4.6.6.6.6.4.2, Sensillae in front of PL.

AL longer than PL. N. queenslandica’ Wom, 1939

First row of DS with two setae only.

Seutum roughly hexagonal, DS 2.14.14.10.12.8.4. N. edwardsi Gunther 1939

Seutum not so.

Scutum almost rectangular; posterior margin only slightly sinuous and extending very

little behind PL. DS 2.6.8.8.8.8.6.4.2. (After Hirst) or 2.4.8.10.10.8. plus about 14.

N. antipedianum Hirst 1929

Scutum not rectangular; posterior margin extending well behind PL.

Posterier margin of scutum shallowly sinuous medially. Sensillae anterior of PL.

DS 2.6.6.0.6.4.2. N. coorongensis Hirst 1929

Posterior margin of scutum an ¢cven curve Sensillae behind PL. DS 2.8.6.0.6.6.4.2.

(After Walch.) N. globilare Walch, 1927

Sensillac long and narrow, almost lanceolate rather than clavate.

Sensillae definitely clavate with more or less of a basal stem,

PL longer than AL or AM. PL off scutum. Scutum small, 34 long, 50 wide.

DS 08.664.2. (After Gater.) N. malayensis Gater 1932

PL shorter than AL or AM, definitely on the scutum. Scutum larger, 55 long, 78 wide.

DS 2.6.8.8.6.6.4.2. (After Gater). N. lacunosa Gater 1932

AJ. much longer: than PL.

AL shorter than PL.

PL the shortest, 13-14. DS 2.6.6.4(6).6(4) 4.2. N. impar Gunther 1939

== bodensis Gunther 1940

PL more than 40 and longer than AM.

Posterior margin of scutum medially concave Sensillae in line of PL and in midline

of scutum DS 2.8.10.8.8.6. (After Walch.) N. schiiffnert Walch 1923

Posterior margin of scutum a shallow even curve. Sensillae well in advance of PL.

PI. well behind midline of scutum. DS 2.8.6.6.4.2. N. pseudoschiiffnert Walch 1927

width 225». Legs: I 210. II 170, LTL 225.

Palpi normal, with trifurcate tibial claw.

108

AW less than 40.

AW greater than 50.

First row of DS with four setae, nc, DS 4.6.6.64.2. AW 35, N. indica Hirst 1915

z= muris Walch 1923

First row of DS with only two setae

Scutum atmost rectangular, and posterior margin rectilinear. Sensillae? DS

212.4.8.7.10.2.5.4 (aiter Gater), N. debilis Gater 1932

Not so. 21

PL about in midline of scutum. AM and PL nearly equal. Sensillae slightly in front

of midline of scutum. DS 2.6(2,4).4.2.4.2.16.12, N. lorins Gunther 1939

PL well behind midline of scutum, longer than AM. DS 2.6.6.4.2, N. rattus n. sp.

DS on small platelets, 2.6.2.6.8.6.4.8.6.4.2. N. heaslipi n. sp.

DS not on platelets.

Sensillac. posterior to, or in line of, PL. AW/A-P greater than 2-7,

Sensillae anterior to line of PL. AW/A-P less than 2-7.

PL midway between anterior and posterior corners of scutum, which is roughly

trapezoidal with broadly rounded posterior corners. DS 2.12.12.12.12. ptus about 30.

N. peraneles Wom. 1939

Not so. PL at the posterior angles of scutum. Posterior margin evenly curved or

siuous.

A-P half SD. DS 2.8.6.6.6.4.2

A-P distinetly less than half SD.

AW 84, PW 101, SD 52. N, westraliensis Wom, 1934

AW 63, PW 84, SD 58. N. trichasuri Wom, 1939

PI. sherter than PW.

PL equal to or longer than PW.

Posterior margin of scutum an even curve. DS 2.8.6.6.6.2.2. AM 39, AT. 22, PL 46,

PW 65. N. dasyecrci Hirst 1929

Posterior margin sinuous.

AL longer than AM. AM 37-5, AL 45, PL 56, DS 2,8.6.6.6.4.2.

N. shieldst Gunther 1941

AL shorter than AM AM 47, AT. 27-5, PL 72, DS 2.8.6.6.6.4.2. N. hirsti n. sp.

DS 2.4.44.2. N. similis n. sp.

DS 2.6.6.6,4.2. N. derricki Wom, 1939

DS 2.6.6. plus.

DS not so.

DS 2.12.12.12.12.10.8.4.2. N. guntheri n. sp.

DS 2.8.8.8.8.6.4.2. N. smitthi Wom, 1939

AW about 11 less than PW. DS 2.6.6.6.6.6.4.2. N. phascogale n. sp.

AW at least 20 less than PW. DS 2.6.6.6.6.4.2.

AW 54, PW 75. N. cairnsensig n. sp.

AW 70, PW 97, N. catrisensis v. gateri nov.

Neoschongastia innisfailensis n. sp.

(PI. vii, fig. 1; text fig. 9, A-B)

Description — Shape elliptical, with rather flattened sides. Length 365 p,

Mandibles with non-serrate chelae.

Dorsal scutwm as in pl. vii, ig. 1, with

the following standard data: AW 42:5, PW 65, SB 18, ASB 23, PSB 16, A-P 26,

109

AM 32, AL 51, PL 44°53, Sens. 31, with globose head 16 wide and with only very

indistinct ciliations under high magnification, almost nude. Eyes two on each side,

closely adjacent to scutum. Dorsal setae 25 to 45 long, arranged 2.6.6.6.6.4.2,

finely ciliated and tapering. Vecntrally with shorter setac, arranged as in text fig.

9B. Legs with normal chaetotaxy; tarsi with two strong claws and a longer

median pulvillus somewhat claw-like.

Text fig. 9

Neoschongastia innisfailensis n.sp.: A, dorsal; B, ventral.

Loc. and Hoasts—Fifteen specimens from Melomys lilteralis Lonnberg from

Innisfail, Quecnsland, 12 October 1938 CW. G. Heaslip).

Remarks—Oft ten of the specimens measured the average standard data are as

given above, and the highest and lowest values as follows:

AW PW SB ASB FPSB A-P AM AL PL

Highest - 48 78 22 25 21 27 40 56 51

Lowest - 40 60 13 21 13 24 24 45 43

There are much greater variations in the standard data of individuals within

this species than is usual.

NEOSCHONGCASTIA WOMERSLEYI Gunther 1940

Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 65, (3-4), 254, 1940.

(Pl. vii, fig. 2)

This species was described by Gunther from colonies in the ears of

Macropus (Thylogale) coxeni Gray 1866 from Bulolo, T. N. G., November 1939.

We have becn able to examine the type slide containing, besides the type, seven

paratypes, of which the type and three others have been measured. In addition,

we have also examined a slide containing two paratypes of which one was mea-

110

sured, and a slide of nine paratypes of which three have been measured. Our

standard data for those measured are as follows:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens, DS

Slide 1, Type & 7 Parat. - 41:5 63 15 23 165 27 — — WS — 40-50

mi a S - 43 63 15 22 18 25 35 69 130 — 40-50

4 i 3 - 43 63 15 22 1695 28 35 69 130 — 40-50

4. " Ha - 48 65 18 25 16 28 — 66 130 — 40-50

Slide 2, 2 Parat. - - - 414563 TW -— -— — 36 66:5 130 — 40-50

Slide 3, 9 Parat. - - = 45 68 16°55 23 15 30 36 75 — — 40-50

a - - - 43 61:5 15 23 18 30 36-5 76-5 140 30x16 40-50

ty is ~ - = 44:5 64-515 23 18 28 35 76:5 130 -- 40-50

Mean - - - - - + - 43 63516 23 17 28 36 71 130 30x16 40-50

Dorsal setae arranged 2.6.6.6.2(4).4(2).2.

Gunther’s data are as follows: AW 50, PW 75, SB 19, ASB 25, PSB 14,

A-P 32, AM 36, AL 60-70, PL 120-140, Sens. 30x 14, DS 34.

Text fig. 10

Neoschongastia melomys n.sp.: A, dorsal, B, ventral.

Neoschongastia melomys n. sp.

(PI. vii, fig. 3; text fig. 10, A-B)

Description—Shape elliptical with the sides rather flattened. Length 465 p,

width 260. Iegs: I 220, If 190, Ill 220. Mandibles with non-serrate chelae.

111

Palpi normal, with trifurcate tibial claw. Dorsal scutum as in pl. vii, fig, 3, with

the following standard data: AW 51, PW 67, SB 17, ASB 21-5, PSB 16, A-P?

26°5, AM 31-5 Al. 63, PL 72, Sens, 30, with globose head 16 wide, and apparently

nude. Eyes 2+ 2, rather small. Dorsal setae 30-55 long, pointed and shortly

ciliated, arranged 2.6.6.6.6.2(4).2. Ventrally with shorter setac, one on cach

coxa, a pair between coxaec I and between coxac III, thereafter arranged

4.6.6.6.4.4, their length gradually increasing posteriorly. J.egs with normal

chaetotaxy, tarsi furnished with two claws and a median longer claw-like pulvillus,

tarsi | and IL with a median dorsal rather short stout sensory rod, as normally.

Loc. and Hosts—The type from the ears of Afelomys Tittoralis Jonnbg.,

Iunisfail, Queensland, October 1938 (W. G. H.), and 15 other specimens from

rats at Cairns, Queensland, in 1939 and 1940 CW. G. H.).

Remarks—Of these 16 specimens the mean standard data are as given

above, and the highest and lowest as follows:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL

Highest - 54 70 20 22 19 27 32 67 76

Lowest - 46 62 16 19 13 24 27 37 70

NEOSCIIONGASTIA PETROGALE Wom, 1934

Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 5, (2), 215, 1934.

(PL. vi, fig. 4)

This species was deseribed from specimens taken from the scrotum of a

wallaby in the Musgrave Ranges, South Australia.

The standard data for eleven specimens are as follows:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens, DS

65 85 31 24 24 32 39 48 52 31x17 30-48

64 86 27 24 24 32 39 8646 46 = 30-48

63 84 30 24 24 2 38 48 48 30x16 30-48

ol 81 23 23 23 30 39 44 48 = 30-45

ol 80 23 — 25 30 — — 50 =i 30-46

65 82 28 25 24 30 40 46 50 ate 30-50

63 85 24 26 23 31 39 49 46 27x17 30-46

66 84 27 26 24 30 — —- 47 30x17 30-46

63 88 30 27 23 32 39 47 48 32x17 30-47

65 88 28 27 22 31 38 47 50 31x17 30-50

66 85 31 29 23 30 40 48 50 30x17 30-47

Mean Gh 84.75 28 ASCOT BU IT (30-47

NEOSCHONGASTIA MUTABILIS Gater 1932

Parasitology, 24, 143-174, 1932.

; (PL vii, fig. 5)

This species was described by Gater, but without any figure, from a cluster

of mites in the ear of Ratius sabanus vociferans (Miller), from Sungei Buloh,

Selangor, Federated Malay States.

We have been able to examine a mount of a somewhat imperfect specimen,

labelled by Gater as this species, from Tupata glis ferruginea Rathes from the

same locality as the type material.

Standard data for this specimen, and from which the figure of the scutum

given here is constructed, are as follows:

y PW SB ASR PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

wy 60 8:5 23 12:5 28 — 28 53 28x15 35-42

DS arranged 2.8.6.6.8.2.4.2.2.

112

Gater gives the following: scutal width 72, length 45, SB 12, AL usually the

longest, DS 42, These data differ considerably from those of the specimen

examined,

NEOSCHONGASTIA FOLTATA Gunther 1940

Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 65, (3-4), 255, 1940.

(Pl. vii, fig. 6)

‘This species was described from colonies in the ears of Macropus (Thylo-

gale) coxen Gray, for Bulolo, T. N. G,

We have been able to measure the standard data for five paratypes of

Gunther’s material with the following results:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

50 71 16-5 20 18 25 20 — 91 28 x 17 50-60

33 68 16:5 20 16:5 25 18 58 83 — 50-60

50 68)~=— «163 18-5 1655 25 21 55 90 — 50-60

355 71 18 18 17 25 20 63 86 28 x 17 —

58 70 18 20 18 25 ; 24 ae 83 ; =F 90-60 :

Mean 53. 70 17-3 195 17-5 25 205 57-86. 28x17 50-60

Dorsal setae arranged 2.6.6.6.6.4.2.

Guuther’s data are: scutal length 47, width 84, Sens. bases 19 apart, AM

19-25, AL 530-56, PI, 80-100, Sens. 28 long, with club 15x16, DS 50-625.

From his figure we derived the following standard data: AW 66, PW 78, SB 19,

ASB 24:5, PSB 27, AM 19'5, AL 57, PL. 93. These agree fairly well with our

measurements, except that the AW and PW are somewhat higher in proportion.

As Gunther states, the PL and first four rows of dorsal setae are foliate, but in

our view not so much so as drawn by him.

NEOSCITGNGASTIA QUEENSLANDICA Wom, 1939

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 63, (2), 162, 1939.

(PL. vii, fig. 7)

This species was originally described from Rattus assimilis from lmbil,

Queensland, from Rk, youngi from Cowan Cowan, Qucensland, and from

MWelomys cervenipes and R. lutreolus from Imbil,

The following are the standard data from 12 of the above specimens :

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

51 75 21 27 14 32 — — 55 27 x 16 32-45

St 74 24 2F 14 31 35 SO 54 se 32-40

51 73 21 27 14 32 35 48 56 30x 16 36-40

3l 73 21 27 14 35 32 48 56 26x 16 30-40

AY OGS 26. OF OS SR. SE = 35-45

51 73 21 27 14 38 32 —_— -- 28 x 16 30-45

54 80 25 27 14 35 35 50 56 ime 30—45

54 76 24 24 13 32 35 54 52 32x 16 27-40

40 70 24 BF 13 30 32 54 52 ES 29-40

51 79 24 27 13 32 32 50 54 = 27-43

49 70 22 24 — 30 30 54 52 32x 16 27-40

49 73 24 24 16 40 30 56 54 30 x 16 27-36

Mean 51 74 24 26 14 32-5 32:5 56 53 31x16. 27-45

Arrangement of dorsal setac, 4.6.6.6.6.4.2.

NEOSCHONGASTIA EDWARDSL Gunther 1939

Neoschongastia riot Gunther 1938 (nom. nitd.), Med. J. Aust., 2, (6), 202.

Neoschéngastia edwardsi Gunther 1939, Proc. Jinn. Soc. N.S.W., 64, (1-2), 86.

(PI. vii, fig. 8)

This species was described from a number of specimens from the N

; ew Guinea

bush fowl, Megapodius duperreyi,

113

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1943 Vol. 67, Plate VII

1, Neoschongastia innisfailensis n. sp.; 2, V. womersleyi Gunther; 3, N, melomys

nsp.; 4, N. petrogale Wom.; 5, N. mutabilis Gater; 6, N. foliata Gunther ;

7, N. queenslandica Wom.; 8, N. edwardsi Gunther.

114

We have been able to examine the type of this species, and have measured

the data as follows:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

60 81 33 28 23 28 — 58 — 35-15 40-50

The dorsal setae are arranged, 2.14.14.10.12.8.4.

Gunther gives the scutal length 56, width 87-5, and sensillae bases 36 apart,

AM 37-5, AL 75, PL 60, Sens. 29x 15.

The figure on pl. vii, fig. 8, of the scutum is to scale from the above data.

NEOSCHONGASTIA ANTIPODIANUM (Hirst 1929)

Schéugastia antipodianuin Hirst, Proce. Zool. Soc. London, 1921, (1), 175.

(PL. vin, fig. 1)

This species was described by Ilirst from the ears of Raltus greyi from

D’ Estree Bay. Kangaroo Island, South Australia.

From the syntype material in the South Australian Museum we have made

the following measurements of standard data:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-IP AM AL PL Sens. DS

60) 70 24 29 22 42 36 65 62 29 x 19 40-55

62 07 25 32 20 42 38 o9 65 —_ 40-60

58 66 24 29 20 42 37 69 02 25x17 40-60

60 67 24 27 17 40 35 70 65 28x 17 40-58

57 67 24 29 20 40 35 70 62 28 x 18 40-58

Arrangement of dorsal setae, 2.6.8.8.8.8.6.4.2,

NEOSCHGONGASTIA COORONGENSIS (Hirst 1929)

Schangastia coorengense Hirst, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. 1929, (10), 3, 564,

(Pl. viii, fig. 2)

This species was deseribed from the ears of a rat at Robe, South Australia.

Fifteen syntypes from the Hirst material in the South Australian Museum .

give the following data:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PT, Sens, DS

65 86 28 26 20 30 48 44 65 — 32-56

60 84 28 — 19 28 45 40 62 = 32-55

65 84 32 — — — 43 43 ~ 32-45

65 86 — — — 34 43 40 62 38 x 19 35-55

71 95 32 25 19 32 43 38 57 30 x 18 35-55

70 93 32 24 19 32 46 42 64 32x19 35-55

75 92 35 32 20 33 40 36 55 35x 19 38-50

65 86 30 25 19 30 43 33 56 30 x 18 35-55

68 91 30 29 22 30 46 43 58 — 35-50

73 91 30 29 19 30 — 40 55 — 32-55

65 85 28 24 21 30 47 40 59 30x 17 32-55

63 83 30 29 20 32 45 40 62 ca 35-55

70 = 105 38 32 23 34 48 41 65 2s 35-57

66 88 32 28 20 30 48 40 57 — 32-52

70 93 32 28 20 29 42 4] 58 — 35-50

Mean 68 90 31 27 20 31 45 40 60 32x18 32-55

Arrangement of dorsal setae, 2.6.6.6.6.4.2.

NEOSCHONGASTIA GLOBULARE (Walch 1927)

Tronbidiwmn (Trombicula ?) globulare Walch 1927, Genessk. Tijd. v. Ned. Indic,

67, (6), 929. 2s

. (PI. viii, fig. 3)

We have not been able to see any authentic specimens of this species, and our

drawing to scale of the dorsal scutum and the standard data are deduced from

Walch’s figure and description.

115

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1943 Vol. 67, Plate VIII

1, Neoschdngastia antipodianum (Hirst); 2, coorongensis (Hirst); 3,

N. globulare (Walch) ; 4, NM. hastata Gater; 5, N.malayensis Gater; 6, N. lacunosa

Gater; 7, N. ampar Gunther; 8, N. schiiffnert Walch.

116

‘The data are:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

43 60 8 25 9 20 34 43 ol 26 33

Arrangement of dorsal setae, 2.8.6.6.6.6.4.2.

It will be seen from the above and from the key to species that N. globulare

is well characterised from the rest.

NEOSCHONGASTIA HASTATA (Gater 1932)

Trombicula hastata Gater 1932, Parasitology, 24.

(PL. viii, fie. 4)

In the absence of sensillary setae Gater placed this species doubtfully as a

Trombicula, but in view of the discovery by Gunther of the allied Neoschongastia

foliata in New Guinea, it seems more than likely that the sensillae of Aastata will

be clavate or globose as in Neoschéngastia,

For convenience of separation, therefore, we so place and key the species.

From Gater’s description and figure, the standard data are as follows:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

69 71 37 29 15 15 30 32 42 — 45-50

Arrangement of dorsal setae, 2.8.6.6.4.2.

NEOSCHONGASTIA MALAYENSIS Gater 1932

DA pened +

Parasitology, 24, 1932. (Pl, viii, fig. 5)

This species was described from the ears of Ratlus ialaisia Kloss, from

Sungci Buloh, Selangor, Federated Malay States. It is rather remarkable that the

PL are definitely outside of the scutum; in this respect, as Gater points out, being

related to Hirst’s Schongastia aethiopica from the Gold Coast, Africa.

Gater gives the following details: scutal length 35, width 50, SBR 22. From

these and Gater’s figure, we give the accompanying figure of the scutuim to scale

from which the standard data are:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

40 54 22 20 14 28 28 20 34 34 40

Dorsal setae, 0.8.8(6).4(6).4.2.

NEOSCHONGASTIA LACUNOSA Gater 1932.

Parasitology, 24, 1932

(PI. vil, fig. 6)

Described from the ears of Rattus sabanus vociferans (Miller) from Sungei

Buloh, Sclangor, federated Malay States.

We have been able to examine two specimens from the type host and locality,

dated 23 July 1930. From these the standard data are as follows:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

66-5 74 30 31-5 23 43 46-5 35 25 53x 6-5 42

66:5 78 38 31-5 —_ 43 45 35 260 53x65 42

Arrangement ot dorsal setae, 2.6.8.8.6.6.4.2.

Gater gives the width of scutum as 78, length 55, and SB 37,

NeEoscHONGASTIA IMPAR Gunther 1939

Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 64, (1-2), 85.

= N. bedensis Gunther 1940, Proc. Linn, Soc. N.S.W., 65, (5-6), 482.

(PI. viii, fig 7)

There appears to be no doubt that Gunther’s NV. bedensis 1940 described from

the mouse deer, Bode River, British North Borneo, is the same as his N. wnapar

117

1939 from bandicoots and rats from New Guinea. That this is so will be scen

fromi a comparison of the standard data derived by the examination of the type and

three paratypes of bodensts and the type and five paratypes of impar,

N. impar—

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

Type - 55 — =~ 2 23 33 — 21-5 13 — —

4 - BO 6H 2 Sto 2h 33 + Bee 1B a 28

Parat. - 53 65 27 20 21 28 35 19 14 43x10 30

, £52 6h 28 20 25 33 = BL 13 = 29

‘ ee ee ee ee = 30

: t SF 9 G8 2 ea a Br ee ig = 31

Mean - 53° 65 28 21 23 32 35 21 13 43x10 30

Arrangement of dorsal setae, 2.6.6.4(6).6(4) 4.2.

Gunther gives scutal width 66, length 48, SR 27, AM 37°5, AL 19. PL 12-5.

N. bedensis—

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AT. PL Sens. DS

Type - 48 60 28 20 20 33 35 21-5 14 45x10 20-40

% - 50 60 30 20 Z1 33 33 23 13° 40x 10 a

4 - 51 58 28 20 20 33 35 23 15 — 20-40

Parat. - 50 61 32 20 20 35 35 25 15 = —

Mean - 50 60 30 20 20 34 35 23 44 42x10 20-40

Gunther gives scutal width 70, length 47, SB 34, AM 37:5, AL 25, PI. 20,

Sens. 33x11, DS 2.6.6.6.4.4.2,

NEOSCHONGASTIA SCHUFFNERT Walch 1923

Trombicula schiiffuert Walch, Kitasato Arch., 5, (3), 1923; Tr. Vth. Bien. Congr.

Irar East. Assoc. Trop. Med., Singapore, 1923 (publ. 1924).

(PL viii, fie. 8)

This species was described from man at Deli in Sumatra.

We have not been able to see any authentic material and our figures of the

dorsal scutum to scale and the following standard data are from Walch’s descrip-

tion and figures:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AT. PI. Sens. DS

57 75 22 20 26 23 42 61 44 36x15 30

DS arranged 2.8.10.8.8.6 or 2.8.2.8.8.8.6.

Watch, 1 his second paper, claims to have reared the larvae through to the

nymph, which as far as can be seen is a typical Trombicula, without eyes and with

slender, shortly ciliated sensillae.

long,

NEOSCHGNGASTLA PSEUDOSCHUFFNERI Walch 1927

Trombicula pseudoschiiffneri Walch 1927, Genessk. Tijds. v. Ned. Indie, 67, (6),

922.

(Pl. ix, fig. 1)

Described from rats from the Lampong District of Macassar.

Again we can only reconstruct ithe dorsal scutum to scale from Walch’s

details and figures, and give the following standard data derived from the same

sources :

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

53 72 19 21 27 37 22 67 44 36 AO

DS 2.8.6.6.4.2.

froni its near allies this species can be separated by the key.

118

NEoscHONGASTIA INDICA (Hirst 1915)

Schéngastia indica Hirst 1915, Bull. Itnt. Res., 6, 183; Walch 1927, Genessi:.

Tijds. v. Ned. Indie, 67, (6), 924.

Troimbicula muris Walch 1922, Kitasato Arch. Exper. Med., 5, (3).

(PL ix, fig. 2)

Originally described by Ilirst from Calcutia, India, on Nesokia (Gunomys)

bengalensis, it has also been described by Walch from Deli, Sumatra, from rats,

and from the Lampong district of Macassar, also from rats, and specimens are

now recorded [rom rats at Cairns, Queensland (1940, W. G. Ileaslip).

Besides the two specimens from Cairns we have been able to cxamine a

specimen from Federated Malay States, and also a specimen, LALC.IIL, from

Batavia, unnamed, but definitely of this species. The standard data for these

specimens are:

Loc. AW PW SB ASB VSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

Cairns - 35 54 19 li+ 16 27 23 16 21+ = 20-30

ra - 35 54 19 19 16 27 23 16 31 te 20-35

Batavia - 39 55 23 18 20 27 23 17 29 26 x 10 32

EM.S. - 37 52 21 18 16 27 23 16 31 26 x 10 20-35

Mean - 36:5 54 20-5 18:5 17 27 23 16 30 26 x 10 20-35

Walch, in his 1927 publication, recognised the synonymy of his aris with

that of indica Hirst. It is evidently a wide ranging species, extending from India

to Queensland,

NEOSCHONGASTTIA DEBILIS Gater 1932

Parasitology 3

irasitology, 24, 1932. (Pl. ix, fig. 3)

Of this species which was described from Rattus cremoriventer cremori-

venter (Miller) from Sungei Buloh, Selangor, Federated Malay States, we have

not been able to examine any material.

Our scale drawing of the scutum is from Gater’s data and figure, as are the

following standard data:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

40 48 17 13 il 21 30 20 36 _ —_—

NEOSCHONGASTIA Lorius Gunther 1939

Neoschéngastia jimungi Gunther 1938, Med. J. Austr., 2, (6), 202 (nom. nud.) ;

lorius Gunther 1939, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 64, (1-2), 86.

(Pl. ix, fig. 4)

This species was described from specimens from a parrot (Lorius roratus)

from New Guinea. We have been privileged to examine the type slide, which

besides the type contains three paratypes. Two of the latter and the type have

heen carefully measured for standard data as follows:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

Type - 40 58 20 16 23 215 30 17 31:5 35x10 25

Parat - 40 56°5 20 16 21-5 21-5 30 — 31:59 35x10 25

- 40 55 20 16 22 21-5 =_- — 33 36 x 10 25

DS 2.6(2.4).4.2.4.2.16.12,

Gunther gives: scutal length 47, width 62°5, SB 20, AM 36, AL 25, PL 37:5,

Sens. 30, DS 30.

Neoschongastia rattus n. sp.

(PI. tx, fig. 5; text fig. 11, A-B)

Description—Well-fed specimens 550 long, 390 wide, shape oval with

sides flattish medially, Qegs relatively small and short, I 160, IT 145, IIT 160.

119

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1943 Vol. 67, Plate LX

1, Neoschéngastia pseudoschiif{neri (Walch) ; 2, N. idica (Hirst); 3, N. debilis

Gater; 4, N. lorius Gunther; 5, N. rattus n.sp.; 6, N. heaslipi u. sp. ; 7, N. pera-

meles Wom.: 8, N. westraliensis Wom.; 9, N. trichosiri Wom.; 10, N. dasycerci

(Hirst); 11, N. shieldsi Gunther.

120

Mandibles with non-serrate chelicerae. Palpi normal, tibial claw bifurcate.

Dorsal scuttm as in plate ix, fig. 5, with the following standard data, AW 36,

PW 58, SB 20, ASB 19, SB 20, A-P 28, AM 24, AL. 14, PL 38, Sens. 35x 9,

DS 20-40. Arrangement of DS 2.6.6.4.2.2.

Text fig. 11

Neoschongastia rattus n.sp.: A, dorsal; B, ventral.

The scutal and dorsal sctac are shortly and finely ciliated. Sensillae clubbed

with short stem and ciliated club. Eyes 2+ 2, small and away from scutum.

Ventrally each coxa with a single seta which has 4-5 long branches; gnathal

part with a pair of similar setae, and a pair between coxae I and between coxae ITI,

and thereafter 4.8.8.8.6.6.2. Tegs with normal chaetotaxy and tarsi with paired

claws, and a longer median pulvillus.

Lec. and Hosts—On rats, Rattus asstimilis, at Imbil, 16 February 1939

(Smith), and Brisbane, Queensland, 5 July 1938 (W. G. H.).

Remarks—Ot 10 specimens cxamined, the highest and lowest valucs for

standard data are as. follows:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens, Ds

Highest - 40 60 22. 19 20 32 25 16 40 36x9 ca

Lowest - 32 56 19 19 18 24 22 11 34 32x 8 —_

Neoschongastia heaslipi n. sp.

(PI. ix, fig. 6; text fig. 12)

Description—Length 375 4, width 270», shape somewhat rounded. Legs:

J 240, IT 225, III 240. Mandibles non-serrate with a single ventral tooth. Palpi

as in text fig. 12, tibial claw trifureate. Dorsal scutum as in pl. ix. fig. 6, with the

following standard data: AW 62, PW 78, SB 29, ASB 27, PSB 24, A-P 35,

121

AM 46, AL 33, PL 49, Sens. 39x 13 with strong ciliations, Dorsal setae 27-52

long, ciliated and arising from platelets, arranged 2.6.8.8.8.4.6.6.4.2, platelets 15

wide. Eyes 2+ 2, closely adjacent to scutum, anterior eye the larger. Venter;

coxae each with a single long (45-50), pointed and ciliated scta; a similar pair

between coxac I and between coxae III, thereafter shorter, 20-30, and arranged

12.12.12.10.8.6.4, approximately.

Text fig, 12

Neoschongastia heaslipi n.sp.: A, dorsal; B, ventral; C, mouth parts and palp

from below; D, chelicera; E, tarsus I.

Loc. and Hosts—From rats at Intake, Cairns, Queensland, 1940 (AV. G. H.}.

Remarks—Remarkable for the small dorsal platelets.

the three specimens cxamined are:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AT. PL Sens. DS

59 75 29 28 24 38 46 32 49 40x 13 27-52

02 80 29 28 23 36 46 33 49 39 x 13 30-52

05 79 29 24 24 34 46 34 49 39 x 13 30-52

Mean - 62 78 29 27 24 36 46 33 49

The standard data for

39x 13 29-52

Trans. Roy. Soc. S

122

ae ai 6 perameles Wom. 1939

. Aust.,

(2), 160, 1939.

ix, fig. 7)

(

Pi.

In addition to the original records of this species, it was collected from a

bandicoot (/seeden torosus) at Cairns, Queensland, in 1939, by Dr.

Heaslip.

W. G.

Altegether 30 specimens have been measured for standard data of which the

mean, maximum and minimum are as follows:

Highest

Lowest

Mean

tralia,

Arrangements of DS, 2.8.6.6.6(4) 4(6).2.

AW PW

65 81

54 70

60 73

NEOSCHONGASTIA WESTRALIENSIS (Wom,

Schongastia westralicnse, Rec. S. Aust. Mus.

102

104

100

ASB PSB

32 29

23 24

27 27

ASB PSB

24 24

26 26

28 24

26 24

30 26

A-P

(PL. ix, fig. 8)

This species was described from the ears of a cat at Greenbushes, West Aus-

3 5, (2).

PL Sens. DS

73 43x13 —

62 38 x 13 _—

68 39 x 13 30-30

1934)

The standard data for six specimens on the type slide arc:

A-P

Sens.

40 x 13

40x 13

NEOSCHONGASTIA TRICHOSURE Wom. 1939

N sae he westraliense v, trichosuri Wom, 1939, ‘rans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust.,

» (2), 160.

(PL.

ix, fig, 9)

45-70

45-75

45-72

43-75

This form, which was originally regarded as only a variety of the Western

Austrahan westraliensis Wom.,

must be raised to specific rank.

The standard

data for the only specimen from Trichosurus vulpecula, Nambour, Queensland,

are:

Arrangement of

traha.

follows:

Mean - 55

Arrangement of DS, 2.8.6.6.6.2.2.

ASB

PSB

A-P

DS, 2.8.6.6.6.4.2.

Sens.

40x 13

NEOSCIIONGASTIA DASYCERCI (Hirst 1929)

Schéngaslia dasycerci Hirst Proc. Zool. Soc.,

(Pl. ix, fig. 105

Described from the ears of Dasycercus cristicauda from Ooldea, South Aus-

London, 1929, (2),

The standard data for seven specimens of the original material are

30-54

PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

65 26 24 23 14 38 21 46 — 30-40

65 26 24 23 15 40 23 46 43x8 30~40

65 24 24 20 15 38 23 43 ~ 30-40

62 24 23 ral 15 40 23 48 43 x8 30-40

67 27 25 22: 15 38 21 48 — 30-45

- 41 23 — 43x8 30-48

67 27 29 22 14 — 22 46 = 30-45

65 26 24 22 15 39 22 46 43x 8 0-48

123

NEOSCIIONGASTIA SILIELDSI Gunther 1941

Proc, Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 66, (3-4), 157, 1941,

(PI. ix, fig. 11)

escribed from Afelomys rubex Thomas, from Bulolo, T. N. G.

The figure of the dorsal scutum is drawn to scale from the followi ing standard

data divlsiead from Gunther’s details and figures:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

61°5 70 24 24 16 16 37-5 45 56 _ _

Neoschengastia hirsti n. sp.

(PI. x, fig. 1; text fig. 13, A-B)

Description—Length to 690, width 500 p, oval, with sides medially rather

straight. Legs: I 255, I] 225, III 290. Mandibles with non-serrate chelicerae.

Palpi normal, with biturcate tibial claw, Dorsal scutum as in pl. x, fig. 1, with the

following standard data: AW 67, PW 81, SB 32, ASB 26, PSB 22, A-P 16,

AM 47, Al. 27:5, PL 72. Sens. lacking in all specimens. DS 30-70 long, and

arranged 2.8.6.6.6.4.2. Eyes 2 + 2. Vent rally all coxae with a single long ciliated

seta; a pair of similar setac between coxae | and between coxae III, thereafter

about eight rows of 8-10 short ciliated setae, arranged as in text fig. 13, B.

‘he standard data for the six specimens are:

AW PW SB ASR PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

Cairns - 63 81 32 29 2 17 48 27 #70 — 30-67

. ee es ee | eri

Imbil. - 67 81 32 27 20 15 46 27 70 — 30-67

A 493. 80 32 26-2 GS. aS ee 72 So oa SG

. - 67 81 32 2 23 15 46 30 Se FOG

‘ + 7) “98 932-24 9g ae ae. FR a

Mean - 67 81 32 26 22 1 47 27-5 72 — 30-70

Text fig. 13

Neoschongastia hitsti n.sp.: A, dorsal; B, ventral.

124

Loc. and Hosts —‘Two specimens from rats, Cairns, Queensland, 1938

(WW. G. FL.), and four specimens from Meloiiys cervenipes, lmbil, Queensland,

August 1938 (Smith).

Remarks—The relationship of this species to the others can be seen front the

key.

: Neoschongastia similis n. sp.

(PL x, fig. 2; text fig. 14, A-B)

Description—Rounded species, length to 430 », width to 340 p. Legs: I 260,

IL 227. 111 290. Mandibles with non-serrate chelicerae. Palpi normal, with

bifurcate tibial claw. Dorsal scutum as in pl. x, fig. 2, with the following mean

standard data: AW 64°5, PW 84-5, SB 33, ASB 23, PSB 32, A-P 12, AM 53,

AL 23. PL 95, Sens. 50x 11, DS 40-90, arranged 2.4.4.4.2., occasionally 2.4.2.44.2.

Eyes 2+ 2. Venter: all coxace with a single ciliated seta; a pair olf similar setae

between coxae I and between coxae IT, thereafter about 36 short setae roughly in

rows of eight. Tarsi normal with paired claws and single claw-like empodium.

Ke 7

Many aye Text fe. 14

Neoschongastia similis n.sp.: A, dorsal; B, ventral.

Loc. and Host—On rats from Cairns, Queensland, 1939 (W. G. H.).

Remarks—Can be distinguished as in the key to species. Fight specimens

have been measured as follows:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-I AM AL. PL Sens. DS

62 81 32 24 32 12 — 1o+ 8i- — 45-90

67 89 35 22 35 12 as 13+ 86-+- — 45-80

65 86 32 24 36 13 — 16+ 97 — 40-95

65 86 32 25 29 13 — — o4 _— 40-97

65 84 32 22 29 11 —_ 19+ 90 — 45-95

65 86 35 24 31 1 53 23-+ 89 — 45-95

60 81 32 23 32 13 — 11+ 97 —_— 45-95

65 84 32 23 32 12 —_ 19+ 94 a 40-90

NEOSCHONGASTIA DERRICKI Wom, 1939

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 63, (2), 162.

(PI. x, fig. 3)

The type specimen of this species was from Rattus lutreolus and two paratypes

from R. assimilis, all from Tmbil, Queensland, August 1938 (Smith). We have

also six other specimens from rats at Cairns, Queensland, 1939 (W. G. IT.).

125

Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust., 1943 Vol. 67, Plate X

1, Neoschongastia hirsti n.sp.; 2, N. similis n.sp.; 3, N. derricki Wom.; 4

WN. guntheri n.sp.; 5, N. siithi Wom.; 6, N. phascogale n.sp.; 7. N. cairnsensis

n.sp. 8, N. cairusensis vy. gateri nov.

126

The standard data for all these are as follows:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

Type, Imbile= 07. OO 35 25 23 12 aa 18+ Ble 50-90

Parat. , - 67 84 32 24 26 12 45+ — 86 = 50-86

. 2 4 OF 8 BS 2G) 2412S 1G BF BBB 50-90

Caieme 7S =. BS BE BE Ge. 27> SS Be Os Pes 50-90

’ _- 6 84 35 24 2 WW 54 244+ 89 _ 50-90

- - 62 84 35 24 2% 115 — 24+ 90 = 50-90

- - 62 84 35 26 24 11 58 24+ 92 38x11 50-92

- - 65 84 33 25 24 11 54 21+ &6 38 x 11 50-90

, - - 67 86 35 25 24 11 60 24+ 90 —_— 50-90

Mea <<. 655 85 24 298 25 it-S 57 27 80° 38x11 30-90

Arrangement of DS, 2.6.6.6.4.2.

Neoschongastia guntheri n. sp.

(Pl. x, fig. 4; text fig. 15, A-B)

Description — Length 450», width 310 4, shape oval. Legs: I 330, IT 300,

III 350. Mandibles with non-serrate chclicerae. Palpi normal, tibial claw tri-

furcate, Dorsal scutum an in pl. x, fig. 4, with the followig standard data:

AW 78, PW 97, SB 31, ASB 31, PSB 27, A-P 32, AM 57, Al. 40, PL 67. Sens.

clubbed, 52 long by 11 wide. Dorsal setae 35-75 long, arranged 2.12.12.12.12.10.8.4.2.

Eyes 2+2. Venter; all coxae with a single long ciliated seta, a pair between

coxae I and another between coxae IIT, behind coxae IIL with numerous short

ciliated setae as in text fig. 15, B.

Text fig. 15

Neoschongastia guntheri n.sp.: A, dorsal; B. ventral.

Lec. and Hosts—Numerous specimens from rats at Cairns, Queensland, 1939

(W. G. H.).

127

Remarks—Relationship to other species as in key. Seventeen specimens have

been measured as follows:

AW PW SB ASE PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

78 95 30 28 26 32 60 40 65 54x11 40-75

76 95 30 28 26 35 60 40 67 54x11 40-75

81 97 30 28 26 32 57 41 67 52x11 40-75

76 94 32 28 26 32 60 41 65 52x11 40-75

78 97 32 30 27 a Fes 36 38 67 52x11 40-72

78 97 30 27 27 32 60 40 68 52x11 40-75

78 97 32 30 30 32 — 38 67 =, 40-75

75 94 32 27 27 32 60 40 68 52x 11 40-70

78 97 32 32 27 32 54 41 65 52x11 35-70

78 97 31 30 27 32 57 40 70 52x 11 40-70

75 97 30 31 27 32 56 40 67 52x11 40-70

78 97 32 30 27 27 36 40 67 $2x 11 40-70

81 102 32 32 25 32 — 41 70 49x11 40-73

81 100 32 32 30 35 56 41 70 51x11 40-71

78 103 32 35 27 26 60 38 67 Slxll 40-70

75 97 32 32 24 30) 49 38 67 31x11 40-70

75 97 32 32 32 32 34 37 65 51x11 40-70

Mean-78 97 31 31 27 32 «57 «40 #67 «+<S2x1l 35-75

NEOSCILONGASTIA SMITE Wom, 1939

Trans. Roy Soc. S. Aust., 63, (2), 164,

(PL x, fig. 5)

_ This species was described from specimens from /vattus assimilis from Imbil,

Queensland, The type and two paratypes are on the same slide and give the fol-

lowing standard data:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

70 81 27 30 24 32 55 38 64 43 32-67

70 81 27 30 24 27 53 32 63 — 35-70

70 81 27 30 24 30 51 34 62 — 35-74

The arrangement of DS is 2.8.8.8.8.6.4.2.

Neoschongastia phascogale n. sp.

(PI. x, fig. 6; text fie. 16, A-B)

Text fig. 16

Neoschongastia phascogale n.sp.: A, dorsal; B, ventral.

128

Description — Shape an elongate oval, length (fed) to 500 p», width 350 a.

Legs: | 260, IL 220, HI 290. “Mandibles with non-sert rate chelicerae, Palpt

normal, tibial claw bifurcate. Dorsal scutum as in pl. x, fig. 6, with the follow-

ing standard data: AW 72, PW 83, SB 30, ASB 30, PSB 24, A-P 31, AM 54,

AL 38, PL 64, Sens. 43x13, DS 32-70. Arrangement of DS, 2.6.6.6.6.6.4.2.

Eyes 2+ 2. Venter: all coxae with a single ciliated seta; a pair of similar setae

between coxae I and between coxae III, thereafter numerous shorter setae as in

text fig. 16, B.

Loc, and Hosts-—Type material from Phascogale sp. from Brisbane,

19 January 1938 (D. J. W. Smith); from Jsoodon torasus, W. Cairns 1940

(W. G. H.); Perameles nasuta Palm Woods, December 1938 (D. J. W. Smith).

Remarks—Standard data for 19 specimens:

Host AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PH. Sens. DS

Phascoaale sp. 70 81 32 27 22 35 54 37 o4 43 35-70

2 - 73 83 30 32 24 32 54 40) 05 43 35-70

5 - 70 81 30 30 24 32 54 37 02 — 335-70

4 - 70 83 32 29 24 30 34 38 67 43 35-70

Isoodon —- - 71 84 30 29 24 AS) Oe 38 58 41x13 65

43 ~ + 71 84 30 30 24 30 $1 36 56 30x 10 65

F - - 71 84 30 29 23 29 50 — 62 39 x 13 62

o na 84 29 30 23 27 — = 62 39 x 12 63

; - - 72 83 28 30 23 31 55 38 63 43x13 65

m - - #1 82 30 _ 24 29 55 39 65 45x13 69

, - - 68 79 28 _ 24 30 53 38 59 — 67

h - - 73 84 29 31 25 32 55 39 65 - 69

ip - - 75 86 30 30 23 32 55 39 62 45x13 65

Perameles - 73 83 30 30 24 31 34 38 64 43 35-75

oo - - 7 86 31 30 24 32 54 40 67 43 35-70

‘4 ~ - 2 86 30 30 24 30 54 40 67 43 32-05

ny - - 70 83 30 30 Ze 30 — 38 62 43 32-67

4 - - 23 83 30 32 24 32 54 38 62 45 35-70

: PES 86 30 30 24 30 54 40 67 48 35-07

Mean - - - 72 83 30 30 24 31 54 38 64 43x 15 32-75

Neoschongastia cairnsensis n. sp.

(PL. x, fig. 7; text fig. 17, A-B)

Xi \ ee

cauy,

Text fig. 17

Neoschongastia cairnsensis n.sp.: A, dorsal; B, ventral.

129

Description—Oval in shape. Length to 690m, width to 430p. Legs: I 260,

II 210, If 260. Mandibles with non-serrate chelicerae. Palpi normal, tibial claw

trifurcate, Dorsal scutum as in pl. x. fig. 7, with the following standard data

(mean of 55 specimens): AW 54, PW 75, SB 27, ASB 23, PSB 20, A-P 32,

AM 38, AL 29, PL 50, Sens. 35x 14, DS 35-50 long and arranged 2.6.6.6.6.4.2.

Eyes 2-+2. Venter as in text fig. 17,13; a single seta on cach coxa, a pair

between coxae I and between coxae IIT, then many irregular rows of shorter sctac.

Loc. and Hosts—-Rats, Cairns, (W. G. H.); R. lutreolus and R. assimilis,

Jmbil, 1928 (Smith); &. voungi, Cowan Cowan, 1938 (Smith); Jsoedon torosus,

Cowan Cowan and Brisbane, 1939 (W. G. H.).

Remarks—Apparently a very common species in Queensland.

Fifty-five specimens have been measured for standard data, of which the

extremes are:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AT. Pl Sens. JS

Max. - 56 85 32 27 22 35 42 36 54 40 =

Min. - $51 08 23 19 16 26°5 30 24 43 30 —

v. gateri nov.

(PL x, fig. &)

Description—Only differs from the above in the proportionately larger

scultin. ‘Che standard data for the six specimens are:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AI PIL Sens. DS

65 100 32 30 20 38 48 35 60 38 x 14 32-58

75-100 35 30 24 38 45 32 60 40x 14 32-60

65 94 33 28 21 35 32 32 57 = 30-50

73 94 32 30 21 35 46 32 60 40x 14 35-50

67 90 32 27 21 33 43 32 54 — 30~50

73 105 38 30 24 39 46 30 57 — 30-50

Mean - 70 97 34 34 23 37 46 32 58 40x 14 30-60

Loc, and Hosts—From rats, Cairns, 1938 and 1939 (\W. G. H.).

Genus PARASCHONGASTIA Wom. 1939

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 63, (2), 165.

Scutum with a well-defined crest, often in long curves, with the pseudo-

stigmata in the vertical posterior walls of the crest. Anterior part of scutum pitted

only, posterior with more or less circular striations surrounding pits. Body

striated anteriorly, pitted posteriorly. Coxae with one, two or three setae, Geno-

type Neoschéngastia yeomeanst Gunther 1929,

In this genus we now place Trombicula gallmarum Kaw. and Yani. from

Formosa, such decision being placed on the details and figures given by Kawamura

and Yamaguchi 1921. Only five species are known.

Key TO THE Svecies OF PARASCHONGASTIA

1 Coxae Ill with three sctac. No pitted caudal area or plate. Scutal crest indefinite

medially, DS 2.14.10.12.6.14.14.12.8.4, P, dubia (Gunther 1939)

Coxae JIT with one or two sctac. 2

2 Coxae UI with one seta. 3

Coxae III with two setac.

3 AM much shorter than AL or PL. AW 58, DS 2.14.14.10.8.8.6.6.2.2, Caudal area

with pitting and weak striations. P. backhousei (Gunther 1939)

AM about equal to AL. AW 53, DS 2.12.1084.2. Caudal area?

P. gallinarum CKaw. and Yam., 1921)

130

4 Pitting over posterior fourth of dorsum. DS 100 in number, arranged 2.16.8(10).12(10).

10(8).10(8).12.6.6.6.4, last five rows aris‘ng from tubercles.

P. yeomanst. (Gunther 1939)

Posterior pitted area relatively small and bounded anteriorly by a circle of tubercles

with long straight setae. DS 2.8(10).12(10).6.8(1).8.8(6), then circle of tubercles,

then 12 arising from irregular oval tubercles or platelets.

P. relrocincia (Gunther 1939)

PARASCHONGASTIA DUBIA (Gunther 1939)

Neoschingastia incerta Gunther 1938, noin nud., Med. J. Aust., 2, (6), 202.

Neoschéngastia dubia Gunther 1939, Proc. Linn, Soc. N.S.W., 64, (1-2), 89.

Paraschéngastia dubia Womersley 1939, Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 63, (2), 1605;

(Pl, xi, fig. 2)

We have been able to cxamine the type specimen (unique) from the New

Guinca bush fowl (Megapodius duperreyi) which, as stated by Gunther, ts

imperfect in lacking sensillae and chelicerae, ‘The standard data are as follows:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

75 98 60 25 25 38 45 80 71 — -—

Arrangement of dorsal setae, 2.14.10.12.6.14.14.12.84.

The dimensions given by Gunther are: seutal length 62°5, width 100, AM 47,

AL 84-5, PL 75, SB 56. Coxae ITT with three setae.

PARASCIIGONGASTIA BACKHOUSEL (Gunther 1939)

Neoschéngastia fournieri Gunther 1938, nom. nud., Med. J. Aust., 2, (6), 207.

Neoschéngaslia backhousei Gunther 1939, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 64, (1-2), 89.

Paraschéngastia. backhousei Womersicy 1939, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 63, (2),

163; Gunther 1940, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 65, (3-4), 232.

(PI. xi, fig. 3)

We have examined the type material of this species and give the following

standard data:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens,

58 72 48 23+5 25 42 37-5 47 42 30x 15

DS 30-40 long and arranged as given by Gunther, 2.14.14.10.8.8.6.6.2.2,

Gunther gives the scutal length as 47 and the width 75. Coxae HI with only

one scta. By an error in the key to Womersley’s 1939 paper the name of thts

species was given as megapodius,

PARASCTIONGASTTA GALLINARUM (Kaw. and Yam.) 1921

Trombicula gallinarum Kawamura and Yamaguchi 1921, Kitas. Arch. Exp, Med.,

4, 169.

(PI. xi, fig. 4)

Kawamura and Yamaguchi attribute this name to Hatori for a “red mite” of

fowls from Formosa, but as far as we have been able to ascertain Hatori did not

use a specific name, and even if he did, 1t would be a nomen nidiuim, for he gave no

description. kawamura and Yamaguchi, however, give a very full description.

so that the species is really gallinarum Kaw. aud Yam. These authors (lec. cil.}

claim to have reared this species through to the nymph, and state that it also has

clavate sensillac but not so broadly so as in the larva,

Kawamura and Yamaguchi give the following details: length of scutum 42,

width 65:1, Sens. 22°5 long, head 14°35. x 14-5 strongly ciliated. DS 33 long and

arranged 2.12.10.8.4.2. Coxae all with one scta.

131

From the above and Kawamura and Yamaguchi’s figure we compute the

standard data:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens.

52 60 35 16°5 26:5 3k 32 35 50 22°5x 14:5

Fletcher et al. (1938) refer to a “red mite” of fowls from the Federated Malay

States as this species, but give no description, only figures of the dorsum and

dorsal scutum. The arrangement of DS appears to be only slightly different,

2.12.8.6.10.4.2, from that shown by Kawamura and Yamaguchi. The dorsal

scutum also only differs slightly in general form, but no dimensions are given. On

the assumption that the AW is the same in both the Formosan and Federated

Malay States specimens, the standard data for the latter from Fletcher’s figure

will be:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL. Sens,

52 60 42 19 26 30 34 35 33 26

The obvious differences in these figures are that the sensillae bases (SB) are

much wider apart, that the normal scutal setae are very slender and shortly ciliated

and that the sensillae are only sparsely and shortly sctulate. However, without

fresh material the precise status of the Federated Malay States species is some-

what doubtful.

PARASCILONGASTIA YEOMANSr (Gunther 1939)

Neoschingastia jamesi Gunther 1938 (nom, nud.), Med. J. Aust., 2, (6), 202.

Neoschéngastia yeomansi Gunther 1939, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 64, (1 and 2),

81.

Paraschéngastia yeomansi Wom. 1939, Trans. Roy. Soc. 5. Aust., 63, (2), 165;

Gunther 1940, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 65, (3-4), 252.

(Pl. xi, fig. 5)

This species was described from 50 specimens from Megapodius duperreyi

from New Guinca. We have been able to examine the type slide containing three

specimens, and also nine paratypes. From these the standard data are:

AW PW SEB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PI. Sens. DS

7&8 103 61-5 23 25 35 — 75 50 38 x 20 40-6

71-5 91-5 58 23 25 33 35 75 53 35 x 20 40-60

76 96 62 21 25 33 33°74 58 35 x 20 35-65

73 95 62 27 23 32 40 79 56 39 x 19 35-65

76 91 64 25 — 33 41 83 — 39x 19 oa

75 94 60 26 28 34 35 75 53 39x 19 35-60

72 94 65 29 25 33 40 80 55 40x19 40-67

72 101 65 27 28 33 40 84 55 39x 19 =

73 94 62 28 23 32 39 75 52 39x19 35-6

73 97 64 26 25 32 36 75 55 39x 19 40-60

75 104 68 29 24 32 39 78 55 _— —_

72 96 61 25 25 38 38 75 55 = at

Mean - 74 98 63 20 25:5 33 38 77 54 39x 19 35-6

Arrangement of DS, 2.16.8(10).12(10).10(8).10.8(10) .12.6.6.6.4,

Gunther gives the following: scutal length 56, width 100, AM 37-5, AT. 80,

PL 60, SB 62:5.

PARASCTIONGASTIA RETROCINGTA (Gunther 1939)

Neoschéngastia retrocoronata Gunther 1938, nom, nud., Med. J. Aust., 2, (6), 202.

Neoschéngastia retrocincta Gunther 1939, Proc. Linn, Soc. N.S.W., 64, (1-2), 87.

Paraschingastia retrocincta Wom. 1939, Trans. Rov. Soc. S. Aust., 63, (2), 165;

Gunther 1940, Proc, Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 65, (3-4), 247.

(Pl. xi, fig, 6)

132

We have examined the type and three paratypes of this species with the fol-

lowing results:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

Type - 70 91 55 20) 23 35 36 70 50 35 x 20 35

Parat. - 70 88 55 20 25 35 — — ah = =

=~ $0 8 wr 2 “38 46 76) we aeede 40

~ os 70 80 56 22 24 35 ~36 30 So toRoh 4s

Mean - 70 85 55:5 21 24 35 36 #70 48 36x20 40

aa DS are arranged, 2.8(10).12(10).6.8(10).8(6), 17 tubercles plus 11

ceeiters details are: scutal length 52, width 87, AM 37:5, AL 56, PL 47,

SB 53.

Genus Guntherana nom. nov.

for Guntheria Wom, 1939, Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust., 63, (2), 157.

We are indebted to Mr. G. Whitley, of the Australian Museum, for pointing

out to us that Guntheria \Wom, is preoccupied by Guatheria Bleeker 1862 for a

fish. We therefore propose the name of Guntherana in its stead.

GUNTHERANA BIPYGALTS (Gunther 1939)

Neoschongastia callipygea Gunther 1938, nom. nud., Med. J. Aust., 2, (6), 202.

Neoschéngastia kallipygos Gunther 1939, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.AW., 64, (1-2),83.

Neoschongastia bipygalis Gunther, ibid., 1939, 64, (5-6), 471.

Guntheria kallipygos Wom. 1939, Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust., 63, (2), 157.

(PI. xi, fig. 1)

‘This interesting species was originally described by Gunther from New

Guinea and recorded by Womersicy from both rats and bandicoots from South

Queensland, and subsequently (1939-1940, W. G. H.) specimens were collected

from North Queensland from rats and Jsoedon torosus. Standard data for 19

speciuens, including two of type material, are as tollows:

Toc. and TTost AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL sens. DS

Bulolo, N.G., Type - 58 68 21 21 13 26 — 65:3 80 30x15 —_—

% as Parat. - 58 92 23°+5

AM. cerventpes, Imbil.,

8/1938 (Smith) - - 63 84 21 23°5 13 29 31-5 — 91-5 34x16 —

R. youngt, Cowan.

Cowan, 9/36 (Smith) 63 74 18-5 23-5 13 29 31-5. 73-6 91-5) 30x15 —_

6 i 58 74 18-5 23-5 11 260°5 30 75 80 — rs

60 74 18 23-5 13 26-5 30 73-5 —- — <A

52-5 71 17 23-5 12 26:5 30 73-5 96 — 4

58 74 18-5 23-5 13 26°5 = - set 96 — =

58 74 18-5 23-5 13 29 34 73°5 96 — —

”

‘Ed

LT, torosus, Cowan

Cowan, 9/38 (Smith) 58 71 18-5 23-5 13 29 30. 78 99 — =

43 a 58 68-5 18-5 23-5 13 27 1 73-5 94 — —_

= ‘, 58 74 18-5 23-5 13 27 34 78 = 105 so Ss

, PP 65 87 23-5 26 13 29 31 71 100 — —

Rat, Brishane, 1939

(Smith) - - += - 58 78 21 23-5 «11 27 34 78 ~=-100 — ale

T, torosus, Cairns,

1939, W.G.H. - - 47 73°5 21 235 13 29 — 73-100 = =>

fT. forosus, Little Mul-

grave, 1939, W.G. H. 5:

” ”

pane

ba taf

—

iS)

{

Rats, ones 1939,

W.G.H, - - - - 60 81-5 21 23-5 13 31-50 — 73 313 — =

Mean - - - - - = 57-5 77-5 20 23-5 13 29 32 72-5 9 30x15 —

133

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1943 Vol. 67, Plate XI

1, Guntherana bipygalis (Gunther) n.comb.; 2, Paraschingastia dubia

(Gunther) ; 3, P. backhouset (Guither); 4, P. gallinarum (Kaw. and Yam.) ;

5, P. yeomansi (Gunther) ; 6, P. retroctncta (Gunther).

134

The DS range from 75 to 105 long, as follows: row 1 (scapula) 105, row 5

100, rest 75-80; arrangement, 2.6.4.6.2.

N.B.—tThe fig. 1, pl. xi, is drawn to scale from the data of the Bulolo speci-

mens and not from the mean of all specimens measured.

Gunther gives the following: scutal width 81, length 33, SB 21, AM 28,

AL 63, PL 83, and the DS are 2.6(2 or 4).4.2.4.2.6.2. We read his rows 4 and

5 as one row only and ignore the six simall setae on the posterior dorsal plate, as

well as his last row of two which are strictly ventral in position. In some speci-

mens, notably those from Little Mulgrave, and some from Cairns, the posterior

plate is entire and not longitudinally divided; there appear to be no other differ-

ences and the separation into two may only be a matter of development.

Genus Warcuta Ewing 1931

Proc., U.S. Nat. Mus., 80, (8), 10. Genotype Trombicula glabriim Walch.

Palpi rounded laterally ; palpal claw trifurcate; chelicerae each with a short

chela. Dorsal plate present, as long as broad; bearing only four setae, exclusive

of the pseudostigmatic organs, these setae being a pair of antero-laterals and a

pair of postero-laterals. Pseudostigmatic organs clavate and setulate; eyes either

lacking or represented by vestiges of a single pair. Dorsal abdominal setae

moderate in size and number, less than 50 present. Legs moderate; second pair

shortest ; last pair longest.

Ewing laid stress generically on there being only four scutal setae besidcs

the sensillary setae, the AM seta being wanting. Similarly in the genus Gahrliepia

discussed by Gater (1932) and Gunther (1940) the dorsal scutum lacks the AM

seta, but has a variable number of normal setae from four upwards. The minimum

number of four is present in the species G. rioi Gunther from North Borneo, but

here the sctitum in posteriorly produced as a broad tongue-like process, so that the

scutum is much longer than broad. In all the other specics of Gahrliepia with

produced scuta we find extra setae which are taken in from the dorsal rows by

the posterior prolongation of the scutum.

Key To THE MALAVYAN AND NEW GUINEA SPECIES orf WALCIITA

1 Coxae III unisetose. 2

Coxae III multisetose. 4

2 Dorsal scutum indistinct. AW, PW and SB equal, 25-26. W. morobensis Gunther 1939

Dorsal scutum distinct. AW, PW and SB not all equal. 3

3 AW not much fess than PW. ASB/SD about one-third, A-P/SD greater than half.

DS 2.6.8.8.6.2.4.4.2. W rustica (Gater 1932)

AW distinctly less thah PW. ASB/SD about one-quarter A-P/SD = _ half

DS 2.6.6.6.6.6.6.4.2. W. turmalis (Gater 1932)

4 Coxac TIT with six setae. AW 17. Depth of posterior angle of scutum about half AW.

Sensillaec globose capitate. Dorsal setae 2.6.6.6.6.2.2. W’, lewthwaite: Gater 1932

Coxae Ill with less than six setae. AW ereater than 25. 5

Coxae LII with four setae. AW ca. 28. Depth of posterior angle of scutum about

equal to AW. Sensillae globose capitate. DS 2.8.6,6.6.44.2. W. enodis Gater 1932

Coxae IIL with only three setae. AW 31. Depth of posterior angle of scutum about

two-thirds AW. Sensillae broadly clavate with prominent sctules. DS 2.6.6.6.6.4.2.

W. glabriin Walch 1927

= pingue Gater 1932

Watcira cLAnrum (Walch 1927)

Trombicula glabruim Walch 1927, Genesk. Tijdsch. v. Ned. Indie, 67, (6), 926.

Walchia glabrum Ewing 1931, Proc. N.S. Nat. Mus., 80, (8), 10; pingiuwe Gater

1932. Parasitology, 24.

(PL. xii, fig. 1)

135

Of this species, described by Walch from rats from the Lampon District of

Macassar, we have been able to identify three specimens from the Federated

Malay States taken on R. rattus argentiventer Chasen, at Selinsing-Gunong,

Semanggel, Perak; September 1932, and forwarded to us from the Institute of

Medical Research, Federated Malay States. In addition, we have also examined

a specimen (1.A.LC.1V) from Batavia. All these specimens, as will be seen

from the following standard data, agree well with Walch’s description and figure.

Gater’s species was, unfortunately, described without figure but its synonymy with

glabrum seems probable, the only differences are that Gater gives the sensillary

setae as 21 long with the head “almost globular.”

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AL PL Sens. DS

Perak, - 31:5 48 26 21-5 33 35 25 30 28x 11°5 25-32

e - 31-5 48 28 21-5 35 38 23 29 28x 11-5 25-32

8 - 30 48 23 20 35 35 25 31 28x 11-5 25-32

Batavia - 30 Sl 25 20 38 35 25 29 28x 11-5 25-32

Mean - 31 49 25-5 21 35 36 25 30 28x 11-3 25-32

DS 2.6.6.6.6.4.2, Coxae II] with three setac. One lateral claw obsolete.

Walch gives the following details: scutal width 49, SD 50, Sens. 29,

DS 2.6.6.6.6.4.2, 34 long; and Gater’s details ure: scutal width 47, length 57,

Sens. 21 capitate, almost globose, DS 8.6.2.6.4.4.2. (== 2.6.6.6.6.4.2). Coxae with

three setae.

WALCHIA MOROBENSIS Crunther 1939

Walchia buloloensis Gunther 1938, nom. nud., Med. J. Aust., 2, (6), 202.

Walchia morobensis Gunther 1939, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 64, (1-2), 94.

(Pl. xii, fig. 2)

We have been able to examine the type and three paratypes of this species

and give the following standard, data tor two specimens:

AW PW SB. ASB PSB A-P AL PL Sens. DS

Type - - 25 25 25 16-5 16°5 33 20) 3] 25 at

Parat. - - 25 26 27 17 — 34 18 30 25 —

Gunther gave: SB 25, AL 18, PI. 30, Sens. 25.

WALCHIA LEWTIIWAITEL Gater 1932

Parasitology 1932 24,

(PI. xii, fig. 3)

We have been able to examine a specimen from the lnstitute of Medical

Research, Kuala ]umpur, labelled as this species. It was from R, rattus (sub.

sp.?) from Sungei Buloh, Sclangor, 15 October 1940.

The standard data are:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AL PL Sens. DS

7 31-5 17 17 21-5 28 11-5 Be) 4 —

DS 2.6.6.6.6.2.2. Gater’s details are: scutal length 37, SB 18. Coxae IH

with six setae.

Watrctia EXopis Gater 1932

Parasitology 1932, 24.

(Pl. xii, fig. 4)

From the Institute of Medical Research, Kuala Lumpur we have received a

specimen of this species collected from 2. arulleri validus (Miller) from Sungei

Buloh, Selangor, 8 August 1930.

136

The data for this specimen are:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AL PL Sens. DS

28 50 23 21-5 38 35 20 26°5 io =

DS 2.8.6.6.6.4.4.2.

Gater gives length of scutum 63, width 53, SB 24, setae on coxae IIT 3-

No dimensions of sensillae are given, but they are said to be capitate with setules.

WALCITA TURMALIS (Gater 1932)

Gahrlicpia turmalis Gater 1932, Parasitology, 24.

(PL. xii, fig. 5)

This species should be placed in this genus rather than in Gahrlicpia.

We have been able to examine two paratypes from the original hosts and

locality.

Standard data:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AL PL Sens. DS

40 56 35 18 58 40 5 30 — —

40 50 34 18 52 38 25 30 —_ —

DS 2.6.6.6.6.6.6.4.2.

Details given by Gater are: seutal length 77, width 56, SB 34. DS 40 ia

number, but no arrangement or figure given.

WaALcina RuUsTICA (Gater 1932)

Gahrliepia rustica Gater 1932, Parasitology, 24.

(PI. xti, fig. 6)

As with the preeeding species, this also should be placed in /Valehia,

We have examined a paratype spectinen with the following data:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AL PL Sens. DS

40 46-5 30 17 39 33 28 25 — —

Gater’s data: scutal length 69, width 51, SB 30. Sen. figured but no dimen-

sions given. DS 2688.64.42,

Genus GAHRIIEPIA Oudemans 1912

Typhlothrombinm Oudemans 1910, Ent. Ber. Ned. Ent. Ver., 3, 102.

Gahrticpia Oudemans 1912, Ent. Ber. Ned. Ent. Ver., 5, 237.

Schongasticlla Hirst 1915, Bull. Eni. Aes., 6, 183.

Gateria Towing 1938, J. Wash. Acad. Sci., 28, (6), 295.

The genus Typhlothroimbiuin was fotitinbed on the single species 7. anus

Ouds. 1910, but as this generic name had been used by Berlese for an adult genus,

Oudemans proposed Gahrliepia in its stead (1912). In nants, in addition to the

seusillae, the scutum carries four pairs of ordinary setae. In 1915 S. Hirst erected

the genus Schdngasticlla for S. bengalensis, a species very close to manus but with

only three pairs of scutal setae besides the sensillac. Gater 1932 described six

species from the Federated Malay States as belonging to Gahrliepia, two, turialis

and rustica having only four normal scutal setae, the others, ruta, cetrata, ciliata

and fletcheri, having 10, 8. 14 and 20 normal scttal setae respectively. It has

been shown earlier in this paper that in the formation of the dorsal scutum the

species furnealis and rustica are more correctly placed in the genus Walchia, In

1940 Gunther described Gahrlicpia rioi from British North Borneo, also with only

two pairs of normal scutal setae. In this respect it agrees with Wailchia but must

137

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1943 Vol. 67, Plate XII

carte

1, Watchia glabrin (Walch); 2, W. morobensis (Gunther): 3, W. lewthwaitei

Gater; 4, W. enodis Gater; 5, WW. turmalis (Gater); 6, MW. rustica (Gater) ;

7, Gahrlicpia riot Guuther ; 8, G. rutila Gater +9, Leeuzwenhockia australiensis Hirst.

138

be differentiated therefrom on the posterior tongue-like production of the scutum

characteristic of Gahrlepia.

It follows, therefore, that in Gahrliepia we have species in which the normal

scutal setae range from two pairs (which can be regarded as the normal or primi-

tive number) through 3.4.5.7 to 10 pairs. In 1938 Ewing erected the genus

Gateria (with Gahrliepia fletcheri Gater, as type) for those species in which some

of the scutal setae were not marginal. In this genus would also be included ruta

and ciliata,

Ilowever, if one carefully compares the scuta of the species of Gahrliepia

it is seen that the posterior production of the scutum tends to take in a number of

the median setae of one or more of the normal dorsal rows. At the beginning of

this development we have G. rioi with the characteristic tongue-like extension but

not yet embracing any extra setac; then through bengalensis with two extra, nana

with four extra, and so on to fletcheri which takes in four extra median setae from

the second dorsal row, eight from the third row, two from the fourth and two

from the fifth row. In view of the transition the genus Gateria becomes un-

necessary.

The setae of the dorsal rows taken in by the extension of the scutum are

indicated by square brackets.

Key To THE [NprAN, MALAYAN AND NEw GuINEA SPECIES OF GATIRLIEPIA

1 With only four setae on dorsal scutum. Scutum small. SD 76. Sens. ?

G. rioi Gunther 1940

With more than four scutal setae. z

2 With six scutal setae. SD 80. Sens. clavate. DS 2,4[2],8.8.6.4.2.2, te, only the two

medial setac of second dorsal row on scutum. G. bengalensis (Yirst)

With eight scutal setae. SD 190. Sens. clavate. DS 2.6[2].6[2].6.6.4.4.2, te., two

medial setae of second and third dorsal rows are on the scutum. G. cetrata Gater 1932

More setae on scutum,

3 Scutum with twelve selae. SD 117. Sens.? DS 2.6[2],4[2].[2].6.4.44.2., re.

scutum embracing two medial setae of rows 2, 3 and 4 G. rutila Gater 1932

Scutum with 14 setae. SD 189. Sens. ? DS 2[4].4[2].4]2[412[.64.2.4.2, 2c, scutum

embracing all of second row, and medial two setae of third, fourth and fifth rows,

G. ciliata Gater 1932

Scutum with 20 sctae SD 188. Sens. clavate, DS 2[4].10[8].4[2].6[2].6.8.4.2,,

ie., scutum embracing all second row, eight setae of third row, and two of fourth and

fiith rows. G. fletcheri Gater 1932

GAIIRLIEPIA RIOL Gunther 1940

Proc, Linn, Soc. N.S.W., 65, (5-6), 1940, 481.

(PI. xii, fig. 7)

_ We have not seen any specimens of this species and have constructed the

figure of the dorsal scutum and compiled the standard data from Gunther's details.

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AT. PL Sens. DS

30 50 25 18 58 24 28 40 = =

Arrangement of DS, 2.6.6.6.4.2,

(GAURLIEPIA RUTILA Gater 1932

Parasitology 1932, 24,

8) / (Bt xii, fe. 8)

We have examined a paratype, with the following data:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AL PL Sens. DS

43 73 41-5 17 99-5 35 18 18 = —

Maximum width of scutum, 83.

Arrangement of DS, 2.6[4|.4[2].[2]6.4.4.4.2.

139

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1943 Vol. 67, Plate XIII

1, Gahrlicpia cetrata Gater; 2, G. ciliata Gater; 3, G, fletcheri Gater.

140

GAURLIEPIA CETRATA Gater 1932

Parasitology 1932, 24. (PL. xiii, fig. 1)

As we have not seen any specimens of this species our standard data and

figure of the dorsal scutum to scale are from Gater’s details.

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AL PL Sens. DS

42 90 49 35 155 65 40 55 37 os

Arrangement of DS, 2.6[2].6[2].6.6.4.4.2.

GAHRLIEPIA CILIATA Gater 1932

Parasitology 1932, 24. (PL. xiii, fig. 2)

From Gater’s figure and data we get the standard. data:

AW PW Max.W. SB ASB PSB A-P AL PL Sens. DS

40 70 109 42 30 159 53 45 38 — —

DS 2.[4].4[2].4[2],4[2].64.24.2.

GAJIRLIEPIA FLETCHERT Gater 1938

Parasitology 1932, 24.

= Gateria fletcheri, Fwing 1938. (py, xiii, fig. 3)

We have been able to examine a paratype of this species, of which the standard

data are? AW pW Max.W. SB ASB PSB A-P AL PL Sens.

52 79 100 30 18 170 39 50 37 =

From Gater’s figure and data we have;

AW PW Max.W. SB ASB PSB A-P AL PL Sens.

54 73 99 50 15 173 31 50 35 30

Arrangement of DS, 0.6[4}].10[8].4[2].6[2[.6.8.4.2.

GAHRLIEPIA BENGALENSIS (Ilirst 1915)

Schongasticlla bengalensis Hirst 1915, Bull. Entom. Res., 6, 1915.

Gaterta bengalensis, Ewing, 1938, J. Wash. Acad. Sei., 28, (6), 295.

(Text fig. 18, C)

This species was originally described from the ears of Mus rattus from Cal-

cutta, India.

Text fig. 18

Dorsal scuta. A, Trombicula cervulicola Ewing, x 500; B, Trombicula isshikit

Sugimoto, x 500; C, Gahrliepia bengalensis (Hirst), x 500.

141

Unfortunately, the only dimensions given were the scutal length 80, widtir

56. Hrom these and the figures given by Hirst, the following standard data have

been compiled:

AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. DS

40 80 25 22 58 36 — 30 30 30 30

DS arranged, 2.4[2].8.8.6.4.2.2., 1e., the median two setae of second row of

dorsal setae taken in by the posterior extension of the scutum.

Genus LEEUWENTIOEKIA Oudms,. 1911

Entom. Ber., 3, (5-8), 137. Genotype Heterothrombium verduni Oudms. 1910.

Characterised as in the key io genera.

LEEUWENTIOEKIA AUSTRALIENSIS Hirst 1925

Trans, Roy. Trop. Med., 19, 1925, 150-152.

(Pi. xu, fig. 9)

This species was originally recorded from human beings in New South

Wales. I have also recorded it from Glen Osmond. South Australia, and Gunther

records it from New Guinea, and W. G. Heaslip has taken it plentifully at Cairns

and Brisbane, Queensland.

We give the following standard cata for a number of specimens from various

localities :

Leo. AW PW SB ASB PSB A-P AM AL PL Sens. TDS

Cairns, Q.- - - - 68 80 2675 29 25 26°5 36°5 41-5 55 50 45

+4 - - = = 69 81-5 28 29 25 29 36-5 41-5 50 50 45

. - = - = ¥1 91 25 29 26:5 29 41-5 46-5 55 — 50

a - - =---+ 76 91 26:5 33 29 33 45 46:5 55 — 46

ns - - - - 70 92 29 29 25 33 36°35 41-5 51 50 45

im - - - ~ 79 91 29 33 29 31 43 49 66 53 42

= - - - + 64 ~ 41-50 — — — 48

44 tog 5 = 64 88 33 30) 26-5 29 41-5 41-5 50 — 45

Glen Osmond, S.A.- 76 91 30 34 26:5 33 41-5 41-5 58 $5 45

‘ 54 a - 75 9 28 33 29 33 38 — 55 50 45

Cairns, Q. - - - - 73 91 29 35 29 29 46 46 §3 66 48

m - - + - Zl 85 26:5 29 25 28 41-5 50 61-5 — 45

Brisbane, Q. - - 74 94-5 33 33 25 33 41-5 41-5 58 52 45

‘Bulola, N.G. - - - 75 91-5 29 33 29 29 50 52 64 58 55

Mean ae - 72 89 29 31 27 30 42 44 36 $4 45-55

DS 2.6.6.8.10.8.6.4.2.

ACKNOWLEDGMENT

We are indebted to Dr. J. H. L. Cumpston, Chairman of the National Tlealth

and Medical Research Council, for permission to incorporate and publish in this

paper the data collected by one of us (\W. G. I.) while working in Queensland

under a Research Grant of the Council,

REPERENCES

Brervese, A. 1888 Bull. Ent. Soe. Ital. 20, 171

Bertese, A. 1891 Acari, Myriopoda et Scorpiones hucesque Italia reperta—

fase. 58, No. 8

Breriesr, A. 1904 Acari nuovi. Manip. IV, Redia, 2, fase. 2, 155

Bernese, A. 1912 Redia, 8, fase. 1, 93

Brumrr, FE. 1910 Précis de parasitologie, 2nd ed., 506,

Brumrt, E. 1936 Jbid., 5th ed., 1,127

Ewine, H. E. 1920 Ann. Ent. Soc. Amer., 13, 381

Ewine, Il. E. 1925 Amer. J. Trop. Med., 5, 251

142

Ewixc, H. E. 1929 A Manual of External Parasites, London

Ewinc, H. E. 1931 Proc. U.S. Nat. Museum, No. 2,908, 8, 10

FLerciuer, W., Less-ar, J. E., and Lewrnwarre, R. 1928 Trans. Roy. Soc.

Trop. Med. Hyg., 22, 161

Gatrr, B. A. R. 1932 Parasitology, 24

(cuntuer, C, 1938 Med. J. Aust., 2, (6), 202

Guntuer, C. 1939a Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 64, (1-2), 73

CruNTHER, C. 1939b Jbid., 64, (1-2), 78

Guyxtuer, C. 1939¢ Ibid., 64, (2-6), 466

Guyruer, C, 1939d Ibid., 64, (5-6), 471

Gunruer, C. 1940a /bid., 65, (3-5), 250

Guwsruer, C. 1940b /bid., (5-6), 477

Gunxtuer, C. 1940c Ibid., 65, (5-6), 479

Gunter, C. 1940d Med. i. "Aust, 564

Guytuer, C. 1941 Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 66, (3-4), 157

Haroxs, J. 1919 Ann. Trop. Med. Par asit., 13, 233

Heastip,.W. G. 1940 Med. J. Aust., 2, (22), 555

ileasnip, W. G. 1941 Jbid., 3, 380

Hirsr, S. 1915a J. Econ. Biol., 10, 79

Hirst, S. 1915b Bull. Ent. Res., 6, 183

Hrest, S. 1925 Trans. Roy. Soc. Trop. Med. Hyg., 19, 150

Hirst, S. 1926a Ann. App. Biol., 13, 140

Hirst, S. 1926b Proce, Zool. Soc. London, 828

Hirst, S. 1929 Ann. Mag. Nat. Ilist., (10), 3, 564

KAwAMuRA, R., and YAmAcucnr, M. 1921 Nitasato Archiv. Exper, Med., 4

169

MetruLacL, A. 1927 Denks. Akad. Wissen., Wien, 101, 213

Mrura, D. H. 1937 indian J. Med. Res., 25, 353

NaGavo, M., Mryacawa, Y., Miramura, T., Tanya, T., and Tenyin, 5. 1921

Amer. J. Hvg., 1, 569

OubEMANS, A. 1905 Entom. Bericht., No. 22, 216

QupEMANS, A. 1906 Nova Guinea, 5, (1), 101

QupEMANS, AA. 1909 Entom. Bericht., 3, 17

QUDEMANS, A. 1910a Ibid., 3, 86

QOubpEMANS, A. 1910b Ibid., 3, 105

OupEMANS, A. 1912a Jbid., 3, 237

QQUDEMANS, A. 1912b Zool. Jahrb. Suppl, 14, Heft I

QuUpEMANS, A, 1929 Entom. Bericht., 7, (165), 388

Sampon, LL. W. 1927 Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (9), 20, 137

Ranrorp, C. D., 1942 Parasitology, 24,

Scurmoto, M. 19360 J. Ja ty Soc. Vet. Sci., 15, (3), 201-213 (in Japanese)

Sucimotre, M. 1938 Lbid., (1), 58-62 (in Japanese)

Tanaka, etal. 1930 Liane f. Bakt. u. Parasit., Orig., 116, 353

Wabcu, FE. W. 1923 Kitasato Archiv. Iexper. Med., 5, (3), 63

Ware, E,W. 1924a Genessk. Tijdschit. Ned. Indie, 64, (3)

Waren, E. W. 1924b Trans. Vth. Bien. Congr. Far East. Assoc. Trop. Med.,

PEI OIG CIE

Warcu, EF. W. 1925 Kitasato Archiv. Exper. Med., 6, (3), 235

Warci,.F-. W. 1927 Genessk. Tijdschft. Ned. Indie 67, (6), 92

Warzurton, C. 1928 Parasitology, 20, 228

Wowerstey, H. 1934 Ree. S. Aust. Mus.. 5, (2), 179

Wowerstey, IT. 1936 J. Linn. Soc. Londen (Zool.). 40, 107

Woxrerstey, H. 1937 Ree. S. Aust. Mus., 6, (1), 75

Womerstey, H. 1939 ‘Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 63, (2), 149

WomersLey, II. 1942 Ree. S. Aust. Mus., 7, (2), 169

MORE AUSTRALIAN FRESHWATER SHELLS

By BERNARD C. COTTON

Summary

A paper by the present author, entitled "Australian Gastropods of the families Hydrobiidac,

Assimineidea and Acmeidae,” was read on 13 August 1942 before this Society, and the reprint bears

the date 18 December 1942. However, Volume 66, (2), of these Transactions, in which the paper is

published, was not issued until 24 March 1943. Two new species there introduced were later

renamed by Iredale in the Australian Zoologist, 10, (2), 30 April 1943. One new genus,

Austropyrgus Cotton, was omitted by him.

143

MORE AUSTRALIAN FRESHWATER SHELLS

By Bernarn C. Corron

Pirates XIV-XIX

[Read 10 June 1943]

A paper by the present author, entitled “Australian Gastropoda of the

families Hydroabiidac, Asstmincidae and Acincidae,’ was read on 13 August 1942

before this Society, and the reprint bears the date 18 December 1942. However,

Volume 66, (2), of these ‘l’ransactions, in which the paper is published, was not

issued until 24 March 1943. Two new species there introduced were later re-

named by lredale in the Australian Zoologist, 10, (2), 30 April 1943. One new

genus, Austropyrgus Cotton, was omitted by him,

Professor T. TI]. Johnston has published in these Transactions numerous

papers on Trematode worm parasites, of which certain Australian freshwater

shells are named as hosts, and the scientific names of the snails quoted are those

which were to the best of our knowledge, at the time, applicable. The nomen-

clature of these freshwater snails is very difficult and involved, and it is only

recently that attempts have been made to attain to some finality in the matter. A

few of the species named as hosts are here discussed. The present author is in

complete agreement with Iredale and other writers on this subject in that he

believes that the classification and identification of Australian freshwater Gastro-

poda, especially of the families Builinidae, Lymmnaeidae and Planorbidae, are

extremely difficult owing to the great variation in the species. In order to help in

identification, accurate figures of certain species from known localities are here

reproduced,

Burton Bradley, in the Medical Journal of Australia, 1926, p. 147-159,

describes the animal and shell of four freshwater gastropods, and the names used

must now be adjusted.

Family VIVIPARIDAE

Three gencra are recognisable in this family, Notopala Cotton, Centrapala

Cotton and Lularina Iredale, the Jatter being introduced. because the genus name

Larina Adams is preoccupied by Larinus Germar 1824. Notopalena Iredale was

suggested as a subgenus of Notopala, with the banded northern species essing-

tonensis [rauenteld as genotype. I am inclined to think that barretii Cotton

should go into Netopala with the southern non-banded types and not with Neoto-

palena as suggested by Iredale. Figured here with their opercula are the species

N. hanleyi Frauenfeld from Tailem Bend, South Australia, N. barrefti Cotton

from Innamincka, Coopers Creck, Central Australia, N. (Notopalena) essing-

tonensis from Port Essington, North Australia, and Centrapala rata Vate from

Innamincka, Coopers Creck, Central :Australia.

Family PALUDESTRINIDAE

Thirtcen genera, as follows, are placed under this family by Iredale.

It would be almost impossible for anyone without the most intimate know-

ledge of Australian Fluviatile Mollusca to separate the genera listed in this genus.

For that reason a brief key is here offered, in the hope that it may help students

to identify these difficult genera.

a. Operculum not clawed.

b. Aperture not free from the body whorl.

c. Shell clongate.

d. Operculum nucleus near the edge.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 67, (1), 30 July 1943

]

144

e. Aperture at the top away from body whorl an wa. Austropyrgus

ee. Aperture at top close to body whorl i a4 .. Revisessor

dd. Operculum nucleus distant from the edge.

f. Sutures not margined ve a am ha . Pupiphryx

ff. Sutures margined .... at tgs 19 aa w. Phranntela

cc. Shell about as high as wide.

g Body whorl dilated towards the aperture.

h. Heavy and imperforate ae bgt _ .. Petterdiana

hh. Lighter and perforate.

i. Spire normal,

j. Perforation very wide ves st _ .. Beddomena

jj. Perforation moderately wide wt ss w. Tasmaniella

ii, Spire very short : a. Valvatasma

gg. Body whorl not dilated tow ar ds the aperture. a. Jardinclla

bb. Aperture free from body whorl.

k. Whorls strongly keeled... ve Aas a. Posticobia

kk. Whorls rounded .... whe ast ae . Elucidona

aa. Operculum clawed:

{. Operculum with subcentral nucleus and simple claw ..... -fugrabia

I. Operculum with submarginal nucleus and six digitate claw Tatca

The four species placed by Iredale under Potaiopyrgus, nigra Quoy and

Gaimard, petterdianus Brazier, legrandi Tenison Woods and buccinoides Quoy

and Gaimard, belong to the genus Austropyrgus Cotton 1943, of which migra ts

the genotype. Figured here are the species Austropyrgus nigra Quoy and Gai-

mard from ’Entrecasteaux Channel, Tasmania, and Revisessor tasmanicus

Martens from Lake Dulverton, Tasmania. The genus /vewisessor Iredale seems

to be closely allied to Austropyrgus.

Bradley’s Potamopyrgus sp. is undoubtedly Pupiphrya cooma Iredale,

from Cooma, southern New South Wales. Bradley well describes and figures both

animal and shell of this peculiar species, the only one of the genus found in New

South Wales.

Family BITHYNIIDAE

Gabbia Tryon and Hydrocaccus Thiele are the two Australian genera. The

Central Australian species, Gabbia centralia Iredale, was previously named Gabbia

iredalet Cotton and Gabbia affinis Mousson nom, nud, was renamed and figured

as Gabbia relata Cotton. IHydrococcus graniformis Thiele is a new name for

granunt Menke preoccupied.

Family THIARIDAE

Here again there is little possibility of workers in the field recognising the

various genera in the family, distinct as they are, without the assistance of a key.

To aid in this direction a key to the genera is here offered:

a. Shoulder of whorls with spines ..., 20% ot vad 4 we Chiara

aa. Shoulder of whorls without spines.

b. Whorls sculptured.

c. Spiral and axial sculpture, whorls rounded, not angled.

d. Spiral and axial ribs well developed _.... i etch w. Plotiopsis

dd. Spiral lirae on base, axial ribs above. : Bs we Sermylasma

ce. Axial plications above the angle on the whorls | AA uw. Pseudopotamis

bb. Whorls smooth,

e. Spire clongate, acute, aperture small and oval, whorls

with a tendency to angulation at the top .... Stenomelania

ee. Spire truncate, aperture long and oval, whorls flattened:

no angulation —.... ae 2233 Se ann eats w. Ripalania

Plotiopsis tatei Brazier 1881 is a new name for Melania tetrica Conrad 1859,

preoccupied by Melania tetrica Gould 1847. Melania subsimilis Smith is a

synonym, A distinct species, Plotiopsis centralia sp. nov., is here described.

145

Plotiopsis centralia sp. nov.

Holotype—Length 18 mm., breadth 7 mm. Innamincka, Coopers Creek,

Central Australia. D 14133. S.A. Museum.

Shell clongate, shouldered near the tops of the whorls and having the typical

shape and features of the genus; sculpture of about three prominent spiral ribs

on the upper whorls, the first being situated at the angle and all crossed by spaced

axial ribs becoming obsolete about the middle of the whorl, though the spiral ribs

continue farther down the body whorl towards the base; apex acute. Differs

from P. tatei in the more prominent spaced sculpture, the angled whorls and

wider shell.

Also figured here are the species Suara amaruloidea Iredale from Cardwell,

Queensland; Plotiopsis tatei Brazier from ‘lailem Bend, River Murray, South

Australia; Plotiepsis australis Lea from Victoria River, North Australia;

Sermylasma carbonata Reeve from Cardwell, Queensland; Stenomelania denison-

ensis Brot from the Burdekin River; Ripalania queenslandica Smith from Card-

well, Queensland; and Pseudopotamis supralirata Smith from Torres Straits.

Family COXTELELIDAE

The South Australian species Coxiella confusa Smith 1898, with its rounded

whorls, free mouth and umbilical chink, is apparently separable from the Vic-

torian C, striata Reeve = filosa Mitchell. Coxiella confusa from the Coorong,

South Australia, and Cowriella striatula Menke from Western Australia are here

figured.

Family LYMNAEIDAE

The four genera placed in this family are Peplinnaeca Iredale, Austropeplea

Cotton, Simltinnea Iredale and Glacilinmea Iredale. All except the first genus

are easily separable and apparently distinct from truc Lymnaea, Peplimnea

is more difficult to define, although in manuscripts [ had already separated

the Australian series subgenerically on shell characteristics. Many subgenera are

placed under Lymnaea, of which the genotype is Lymnaca stagnalis Linne of

Europe, North Africa and Northern Asia. The species has been introduced into

Australia as an aquarium snail and thrives under such artificial conditions. There

is no record of it yet having been introduced into Australian ponds, rivers and

reservoirs, but it would no doubt thrive in them if given the opportunity. Both

the shell with its exceptionally long spire and the radula, which shows minor

differences from our common Lymnaea lessoni, are the chief points. support-

ing separation. So far, no differences of any consequence have been discovered

in any other anatomical details, rather has the similarity been noted. Lymnaea

lessoni has been placed in Aimphipeplea Nilsson 1823 = Myxas Leach 1822 (geno-

type of both is Lymnaea glitinosa Muller of Europe), but there is considerable

anatomical difference in the Australian species. Lynuiaea lessont may be briefly

described as follows :—F oot large, elongated; no expansion of the mantic over the

outside of the shell and the limits of the parietal lamina can be distinctly traced,

resembling Lymnaea rather than Amphipeplea; tentacles broad, acutely triangular

and flat; the whole surface of the animal, including tentacles, base of the foot and

even portion of the body within the shell is light grey and numerously spotted

with minute white dots; egg-mass reniform, 18 mm. in length, containing 30

embryos. Shell large, globose, thin, pellucid, spire short, whorls few (about

four), sculptured with numerous regular accremental striae, crossed by even finer

regular microscopic spirals, sttture slightly impressed, aperture wide, outer lip

thin and simple; columella with one simple fold; inner margin of aperture widely

spread with a dull nacreous deposit. The type locality of the species is River

Macquarie at Bathurst, New South Wales, and the specimens described and

figured are from Tailem Bend, River Murray, South Australia, where the species

146

is common, especially where and when conditions favour it. The following key

will help in the generic location of the species:

a. Shell large, up to 25 mm. and globose .... 75 ae — . Lymnaca

(= Peplimnea Iredale)

aa. Shell small.

b. Shell axially pecuhlarly wrinkled bes a ven tes . <Austropeplea

bb. Shell smooth and shining.

c. Spire short, apex acute hes sey — Lege a5 we Stmlimnea

cc. Spire very short, apex planate .... , — <3 w. Glacilininea

Austropeplea aruntalis Cotton and Godfrey from Peniata, South Australia,

is figured here. The five species placed under Simlimnea Iredale and their dis-

tribution are:

Simlimnea brazieri Smith—Coastal rivers of New South Wales

Sindimnea victoriae Smith—Coastal rivers of Victoria.

Simlimnea subaquatilis Tate—South Australia.

Simlimnea neglecta Petterd—Rivers of North Tasmania.

Simlannea gunni Petterd—North and Middle ‘Tasmania.

The genus Simlimnea may be described as follows:

Shell small, spire short, acute, body whorl moderate in development but not

swollen; sculpture of microscopic incremental striac, but no spirals; suture dis-

tinctly impressed; aperture two-thirds or less of length of the shell; columella

obliquely arcuate and spirally contorted with an excavate margin, reflexed in the

umbilical region and connected with the lip above by a thin whitish callosity.

Bradley’s Limnaea brasieri Smith 1882, type locality, Glebe Point, Sydney,

New South Wales, is now known as Simlinnea brasieri Smith, the animal,

shell and habitat of the species being very different from the large European

Lyninaca stagnalis, the genotype of Lymnaca,

Simlunnea subaquatilis Tate from the River Torrens, Reed Beds, Adelaide,

South Australia, is figured. Shnlinnea guani Petterd differs from the typical

species of the genus in having a comparatively shorter spire and microscopic

spirals, although in every other. aspect it agrees. Simlimnea gunni Petterd trom

Launceston, Tasmania, is here figured.

sradley’s Bullinus bragiert Smith 1882, type locality, Ashfield, near Sydney =

brasieri var. pallida Smith 1882, type locality, Chatsworth, New South Wales =

contortiula Clessin 1886, type locality, Australia, is now named Jsidorella brazieri

Smith. Differences noted in the animal from PBulliauts and Lenameria are the long

tentacles, situation of eye spots at the junction of the tentacles, triangular area of

the proboscis on the dorsal aspect of the connecting ridge, and long foot pointed

posteriorly. The differences in the shell are keyed in this paper.

Ilis Bidlinus tenutstrialus Sowerby 1873, type locality, River Torrens, South

Australia, applics to a species found in South Australia and Victoria

in the River Murray. he species figured and described by Bradley, under the

above name, is probably Lenanteria gibbosa Gould 1852, type locality, Parramatta,

New South Wales. A rather variable species and the genotype of Lenaimeria.

Tammaca tasmanica Tenison Wood 1875 and littosa Petterd 1888 are regarded

as varicties of the Iuropean peregra Muller, said to have been accidentally intro-

duced into Tasmania. The cotype of littesa before me certainly resembles what

may be regarded as a normal peregra. The facts about this amazing species are:

J At least twenty varieties of peregra have been described.

2 The shape is extremely variable.

3. Itis normally dextral, but a regular percentage of sinistral forms have been

noted in certain localities.

147

4 In specimens from two different though clase localities, and apparently of

the same variety, those from one locality may revert to type under aquarium

breeding conditions, while those from the other locality may not.

5 The species is very susceptible to environmental conditions and is also

subject to periodical cycles of variation,

6 It may be smooth or sculptured with strong spiral ridges.

7 The colour varies from typical horn-yellow to banded with brown and white

in the variety “picta.”

8 It inhabits brackish water, maritime marshes, lakes, ponds, peat bogs,

crawls on to dry land, or in the event of water drying up buries in mud,

under stones, weeds or debris.

9 It ranges over Europe, North Africa, Asia, Cape Verde Islands, and

Iceland has been scen living in a spring at 40° C

Family BULLINIDAE

The variability of the species in this family is extraordinary, though no doubt

there is some geographical arrangement, Only names of specimens from known

localities are here accepted, described or figured. I anticipated that the genus

Amerianna Strand might be cut up into further genera with the words, “No doubt

this will be split up by future workers,” and, ‘‘The typically carinate shell appears

so different from the ordinary tenuistrata type with its taller spire and rounded

whorls.” This has been done by Iredale. The following genera are located in the

family: Lenameria Iredale, Glyptamoda Ircdale, Tasinadora lredale, Amerianua

Strand, Oppletora Iredale and Whitley, /sidorella Tate. The following key will

help workers to identify the genera:

a. Spire Jong, but usually shorter than the aperture.

b. No prominent sculpture ee r e bs _ wa. Lenameria

bb. Prominent spiral sculpture... ay. ant ben wile .. Glyptamoda

aa. Spire short.

c. Spire not truncate, body whorl wide.

d. Columella not truncate.

e. Columella strongly folded .... ra 2 man .. Lasmadora

ec. Columella not folded .... aa He fit 3 .. dsidorella

dd. Columella truncate é ar er hes wo. Oppletora

cc. Spire truncate, body whorl ‘normal wee : . . merianna

The following species are figured here: een iftide Sowerby, Great

Lake, Tasmania; Lenameria vandiemcnensis Sowerby, North Tasmania; Lena-

meria georgiana Quoy and Gaimard, South-West Australia; Lenameria pyra-

nudata Sowerby, Lake Dulverton, Middle East Tasmania; Lenameria pyramidata

Sowerby, dark-coloured variant from Tasmania; Lenameria attenuata Sowerby,

Lake Dulverton, Tasmania: Lenaimeria mamilata Sowerby, Tasmania; Lenamerta

queenslandica Smith, Ipswich, Queensland; Lenameria beddome: Nelson and

Taylor, Rockhampton, Queensland; Glyptanoda aliciae Reeve, River Torrens at

Felixtowe, South Australia; Tasmedora aperta Sowerby, First Basin, Launceston,

Tasmania; Tasmadora sorellensis sp. nov., Lake Sorrell, Tasmania; Amerianua

carinata Adames Boyne River, Queensland ; Amerianna bonushenricus Adams and

Angas, Arnhem Land, North Australia; Oppletora jukesi Adams, Yam Creek;

Isidorella newcombi Adams and Angas, Mount Margaret. Central Australia;

Isidorella subinflata Sowerby, River Torrens, South Australia; Isidorella rubida

Cotton and Godfrey, Franklin Harbour, South Australia.

Amerianna bonushenricus shows a considerable difference from carinata.

The columella fold is almost obsolete and there is no carination of the body whorl.

In many respects it recalls sidorella except that the spire is peculiarly depressed.

It is here separated subgenerically under the name Ameriella sub. nov.

148

Tasmadora sorellensis sp. nov.

Holotype—Length 10 mm., breadth 6 mm, Lake Sorell, Middle Tasmania,

D. 14132 S.A. Museum. Shell ‘small, thin, greenish coloured, polished; columella

fold well developed; spire slightly more elongate than in the typical species of the

genus and the body whorl narrower, The shape and colouration readily separate

this species from the genotype Tasmadora aperta Sowerby, which is found in

Northern Tasmania.

Family PLANORBIDAE

Five genera are represented in this family: Segnitila Cotton and Godfrey,

Pygmanisus Iredale, Plananisus Iredale, Glyptanisus Iredale and Glacidorbis

Iredale. The following key will assist in their recognition :

a. Shell depressed, diameter three or more times the height, base

flattened.

b. Shell solid, compressed he sees site bopt ahs vw. Segnitila

bb. Shell thin, rounded.

c. Whorls rounded,

d. Small, rounded mouth —.... jee des ds fort a. Pygimanisus

dd. Large oblique mouth... es 44 at ise wv. Plananitsus

cc. Whorls keeled at the periphery .... vey . Glyptanisus

aa. Shell comparatively high, diameter twice the ‘height te! Glacidorbis

Figured here is Segnitila victoriae Smith, South Aubiratia, There are

apparently very weak internal lamellae in specimens of the species from Victoria,

but they can only be seen when the shell aperture is broken carefully away for

about one-third of the whorl. The weak development of these lamellae and the

smallness of the species, distinguish this Australian genus. The species alphena Ire-

dale has no internal lamellac and closely resembles victoriae in form. Plananisus

isingi Cotton and Godfrey, lake Alexandrina, is found at times in countless thou-

sands amongst the “Carpet Weed” so common in billabongs on the Lower Murray.

Although found alive at Tailem Bend Swamp some ten years ago, only dead shells

have been taken during the last few years, and these are in great number. It is

no doubt still plentiful in parts of the Murray. Pygmanisus parvus sp. nov.,

River Torrens; Glyptanisus meridionalis Brazier, South Tasmania; Glyptenisus

atkinsoni Johnston, South Esk, Tasmania; and Glyptanisus atkinsoni Johnstoa,

variant from Great Lake, Tasmania, are all figured here.

Pygmanisus parvus sp. nov.

Holotype—Diameter 5 mm. Height 1:25 mm. River Torrens, South Aus-

tralia, D. 14131 S.A. Museum. Shell small, whorls rounded, aperture rounded,

sculpture of growth lines only, otherwise typical of the genus and resembling the

genotype, Pygmanisus scottianus Johnston from Launceston, Northern Tasmania.

Family ANCYLIDAE

The species figured here are Pettancylus australicus Tate, River Torrens,

Adelaide, where the species is common on smooth stones and weedsi; Prablancylus

beddomei Petterd, Queensborough, Tasmania; Problancylus eremius Cotton and

Godfrey, Mount Lofty, South Australia, is apparently extremely rare and its

generic location a problem, but whether it represents a Pettancylus with a marked

growth stage or is generically distinct cannot as yet be determined, though it cer-

tainly has little to do with true Gundlachia. The specimens are probably aberrant,

as Iredale suggests,

Family ASSIMINEIDAE

The estuarine species listed by me as Assiminca tasmanica Tenison Woods is

here figured from a specimen taken at Ralph’s Bay, Tasmania. The generic loca-

tion of this species is doubtful, Previously placed in this family was Paludina

granum Menke (preoccupied) = graniformis Thiele, which is now the genotype of

Hydrococcus Thiele and allotted to the family Bithyntidae.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1943 Vol. 67, Plate XIV

G WALSH

Fig. 1-2, Notopala hanleyi Frauenfeld, ventral and dorsal x 1-5, fig. 3, ditto operculum ;

fig, 4-5, -lustropyrgus nigra Quoy & Gaimard, ventral and dorsal; fig. 6-7, Notopala

barretti Cotton, ventral and dorsal x 2, fig. 8, ditto operculum; fig. 9-10, Revisessor tas-

manicus Martens, ventral and dorsal x10; fig. 11, 12, Notopala (Notopalena) essing-

toncnsis Frauenfeld, ventral and dorsal x 1-5, fig. 13, ditto operculum; fig. 14-15, Thiara

amarwloidca Iredale, ventral and dorsal x 1, fig. 16, ditto operculum; fig. 17-18, Centrapala

lirata Tate, ventral and dorsal x Z, fig. 19, ditto operculum; fig. 20-21, Plotiopsis tatet

Brazier, ventral and dorsal x 1-5, fig. 22, ditto operculum,

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1943 Vol. 67, Plate XV

G.WALSN

Fig. 1-2, Plotiopsis australis Lea, ventral and dorsal! x2+5; fig. 3-4, Plotiopsis

centralia sp. nov., ventral and dorsal x 2-5; fig. 5-6, Stenomelania denisonensis Brot,

ventral and dorsal x1; fig. 7-8, Sermylasma carbonata Reeve, ventral and dorsal x1;

fig. 9-10, Ripalania queenslandica Smith, ventral and dorsal x 1-5, fig. 11 ditto operculum;

fig. 12-13, Pseudotamis supralirata Smith, ventral and dorsal x 2-5; fig. 14-15, Coxiella

confusa Smith, ventral and dorsal x 3-5; fig. 16-17, Coxiella striatula Menke, ventral

and dorsal x 2-5.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust., 1943 Vol. 67, Plate XVI

14 15 G WALSH 16

Fig. 1-2, Lymiaca lessoni Deshayes, ventral and dorsal x1+5; fig, 3-4, Lynnaca

vinosa Adams and Angas, ventral and dorsal x1-5; fig. 5-6, “lustropeplea aruntalis

Cotton and Godfrey, ventral and dorsal 2-5; fig. 7-8, dustropeplea subaquatilis Tate, ventral

and dorsal x 3+5; fig, 9-10, Sunlininea guninii Petterd, ventral and dorsal x7: fig. 11-12,

Lenameria nilida Sowerby, ventral and dorsal x4; fig. 13-14, Lenameria vandiemencisis

Sowerby, ventral and dorsal x 1-5; fig. 15-16, Lenameria georgiana Quoy and Gaimard,

ventral and dorsal x 2:5,

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1943 Vol. 67, Plate XVII

19 , oS 20

Fig. 1-2, Lenameria pyramidata Sowerby, ventral and dorsal x 2; fig. 3-4, Lenameria

pyramidata Sowerby, variant, ventral and dorsal x 3; fig. 5-6, Lenameria attenuata Sowerby,

ventral and dorsal x 1-5; fig. 7-8, Lenameria mamillata Sowerby, ventral and dorsal x 2;

fig. 9-10, Lenameria queenslandica Smith, ventral and dorsal x3; fig, 11-12, Lenameria

beddomei Nelson and Taylor, ventral and dorsal x 2; fig. 13-14, Gly ptamoda aliciae Reeve,

ventral and dorsal x 2°5; fig. 15-16 Tasmadora aperta Sowerby, ventral and dorsal x 3+5;

fig. 17-18, Tasmadora sorellensis sp. nov., ventral and dorsal x 3-5; fig, 19-20, Amerianna

carinata Adams, ventral and dorsal x 2-5,

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1943 Vol. 67, Plate XVIIL

GWALSH

Fig. 1-2, Amerianua (Ameriella) bonushenricus Adams and Angas, ventral and dorsal

x4°5; fig. 3-4, Oppletora jukesi Adams, ventral and dorsal x6; fig. 5-6, Isidorella new-

combi Adams and Angas, ventral and dorsal x 2-5; fig. 7-8, Isidorella subinflata Sowerby,

ventral and dorsal x 3-5; fig. 9-10, /sidorella rubida Cotton and Godfrey, ventral and

dorsal x 3-5; fig. 11-12, Pygmanisus parvus sp. nov., lateral and dorsal x 8-5: fig. 13-14,

Plananisus isingi Cotton and Godfrey, lateral and dorsal x85; fig. 15-16, Gly ptanisus

meridionalis Brazier, dorsal and lateral x8,

Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust., 1943 Vol. 67, Plate XIX

GNVALSH

Fig. 1-2, Glyptanisus atkinsoni Johnston, dorsal and lateral x10; fig. 3-4, ditto

Johnston, dorsal and lateral, variant, x6°5; fig. 5-6, Segnitila victoriae Smith, lateral and

dorsal x 6:5; fig. 7-8, Pettancylus australicus Tate, lateral and dorsal x7; fig. 9-10,

Problancylus beddomei Petterd, ventral and dorsal x9; fig. 11-12, Problancylus eremius

Cotton and Godfrey, lateral and ventral; fig. 13-14, Notopala (Notopalena) waterhousei

Adams and Angas, ventral and dorsal. x1, fig. 15, ditto operculum; fig. 16-17, Assiminca

tasmanica Tenison Woods, ventral and dorsal x9, fig. 18, ditto operculum,

NATIVE NAMES AND USES OF PLANTS

IN THE NORTH - EASTERN CORNER OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By T. HARVEY JOHNSTON and J. BURTON CLELAND, University of Adelaide

Summary

In 1934 an expedition under the direction of the Board for Anthropological Research, University of

Adelaide, visited the arid region lying to the north-east of Lake Eyre, our headquarters being

located at Pandi Pandi on the lower Diamantina (local native name, Karitjuri), adjacent to the

Queensland border near Birdsville. We also carried out investigations at Mirra Mitta, between the

lower Diamantina and the lower Cooper (native name, Kunara). One of us (J. B. C.) had previously

visited Cordillo Downs, Innamincka (on Cooper's Creek), and Strzelecki Creek and had published a

botanical survey (Cleland, Black and Reese, 1925).

149

NATIVE NAMES AND USES OF PLANTS

IN THE NORTH-EASTERN CORNER OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By T. Harvey Jounston and J. Burron CLeLanp, University of Adelaide

[Read 10 June 1943]

In 1934 an expedition under the direction of the Board for Anthropological

Research, University of Adelaide, visited the arid region lying to the north-east

of Lake Eyre, our headquarters being located at Pandi Pandi on the lower

Diamantina (local native name, Karitjuri), adjacent to the Queensland border

near Birdsville. We also carried out investigations at Mirra Mitta, between the

lower Diamantina and the lower Cooper (native name, Kunara). One of us

(J. B. C.) had previously visited Cordillo Downs, Innamincka (on Cooper’s

Creck), and Strzelecki Creek and had published a botanical survey (Cleland, Black

and Reese, 1925).

The region under review is that bounded on the west by Lake Eyre and the

Arunta (Simpson) Desert, on the south by the Flinders Ranges and Lake Calla-

bonna, on the east and north by the Queensland border. It is a particularly arid

zone in which the watercourses seldom flow, the rainfall is extremely scanty and

irregular, and the evaporation is high, 100 inches per year. Gregory (1906)

called it “The dead heart of Australia.’ The Cooper, though its bed is many

mules in width, had not run (we were informed) for sixteen years prior to our

visit. The Diamantina had received abundant water from Queensland some

months before our arrival and had overhowed its banks to fill much of its flood

plain, several miles wide, but at the time of our visit it had greatly shrunk and was

barely flowing, and we were able to walk dry-shod across one portion of it near

our camp. The result of the overflow was that there was abundant vegetation

along the banks. and in small depressions in the flood plain, as well as in the so-

called Goyder’s Lagoon (native name, Koondarichinna), in which the river loses

itself to become broken up into several small narrow watercourses [parri

(Ngameni), kurrikuru (Ngameni and Wonkanguru) |. The drainage from this

“lagoon,” after flood, forms the Warburton and Kallakoopa, which may reach

Lake Eyre (native name, Katitandra, according to Howitt). The region to the

cast of Lake Eyre was very poorly vegetated, plant lite (apart from coolebahs

marking the site of drainage channels) being restricted largely to the “gibber”

or stony country lying between the moving sandhills, and to the vicinity of the

artesian bores which have been sunk about thirty miles apart along the ‘Birdsville

track.” The presence of these bores permits the passage, at certain seasons, of

cattle from north-eastern South Australia and western Queensland to the railway

at Marree, whence they are entrained for the Adelaide market. Our observations

would probably have been more extensive had conditions at the time been more

favourable for plant lite.

The distribution of the local aboriginal tribes is indicated in a general way

in maps by Howitt (1904, 44). Horne and Aiston (1924) and Elkin (1937, 276),

and in more detail, with approximate boundaries, by Fenner (1936) and Tindale

(1940). ‘he establishment of cattle stations and also some Lutheran mission

stations on the lower Cooper in Dieri territory, following some good seasons,

probably disturbed the distribution, Aridity caused these latter stations, as well

as many others occupied by whites, to become abandoned so that they are now

represented only by a few ruins, while the native population which Gason in 1874

estimated to be approximately 1,030. about 230 of them belonging to the Dieri,

and about 800 included in the four tribes, Yandrawontha | Yandruwanta], Yarra-

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust.. 67, (1), 30 July 1943

150

waurka, [Yauraworka], Anminie [Ngameni], and Wonkaooroo [Wonka-nguru],

has now shrunk to a few dozen full-blood aborigines, The approximate tribal

boundaries at the time of our visit are indicated in I'enner’s map (1936, 47). We

examined for blood grouping (Cleland and Johnston, 1936) nearly all available

full-bloods (47) and Fenner (a member of our expedition) carried out anthro-

pometric work on 41. These numbers included nearly all the living aborigines of

that area, the total being estimated by Fenner to be about fifty (excluding cross-

breeds), but of the 41 measured, 20% of them were known to have died within

eighteen months (Fenner 1936, 49), and no doubt the number now living must

be very small since very few children were being born. It may be mentioned that

portraits of many of the natives were painted by the late ].. Wilkie who accom-

panied us, and are now in the South Australian Museum. Amongst those

examined at our camps and included in the totals given, were several natives from

other tribes bordering on our region, wes., Aranda (Arunta), Arabana (Urabunna

of authors), Andikeri-nga and Kuiyani, as well as one each from the Wadikah

to the east and the Mittaka from Queensland, There were no full-blood repre-

sentatives of the Yelyuyendi, Yauraworka and Wonkamala. Fenner mentioned

that several of the individuals examined were the last remaining members of their

respective tribes. Amongst tribes which appear to be now extinct are Tirari,

Pilatapa, Kara-nguru, Ngurawola and Wonkamala, and to these are probably to be

added Wadikali and Mittaka. Of the peoples of the region, the best known were

the Dieri, since information concerning them was published by Gason (18/4;

1879; 1886), Siebert, and Howitt (1904), as well as by Horne and Aiston (1924) ;

and in the works of these authors there are scattered references to the utilisation

of the vegetation by the natives. One member of our party, T. Vogelsang, was

born in the Dieri country, where his people belonged to the staff of the Lutheran

mission.

In addition to publishing our own observations, based mainly on our work

at Pandi, we have endeavoured to bring together whatever information is avail-

able in literature and we have added [in brackets] our own comments on such

information. In nearly all cases we have adopted J. M. Black’s nomenclature

(1922-1929).

We desire to acknowledge assistance from the Rockefeller Foundation

(through the Australian National Research Council) towards our expenses;

Messrs. L. Crabb of Pandi Pandi, and G. Aiston of Mulka; our colleagues of the

expedition ; and especially Mr. L. Reese of Minnie Downs.

Information relating to the uses by aborigines of the plant life of regions in

Western Queensland due north of the area we are now considering, is contained

in papers by Palmer (1884) and Roth (1897), and information of a more general

character appeared in a popular book, “Our Sandhill Country,’ by Mrs, A. M.

Dunean-Kemp (1933), whose experiences lay in the Queensland territory

(occupied by the Mittaka or Murunga tribe) adjacent to that visited by us. The

region to the south of the Eyre basin was dealt with by us (Cleland and Johnston

1939) in our paper on the names and, uses of plants by natives of the Northern

Flinders Ranges. The latter are inhabited by the Wailpi tribe who are also known

as the Mardala or Anyamutna.

Palmer (1884) gave an account of 106 species of plants used by the natives

of the Flinders and Mitchell Rivers, as food or medicine or as material for the

making of implements, and in nearly all cases gave the names by which they were

known to the natives on the Cloncurry River, which is the main tributary of the

Tlinders. He mentioned the names of two tribes, Myappe and Mycoolan. Roth’s

map (1897, pl. 1) indicates that these two which he called Miubbi and Mikoolun,

occupied the region around the lower Cloncurry, as well as the country between

the latter and the Leichardt River.

151

Roth’s work (1897) dealt chiefly with the Mitakoodi from the upper Clon-

curry and with the tribes (TPittapitta, Kalkadoon, Woonamurra, Goa, etc.) occupy-

ing the extensive region drained by the upper portions of the Georgina and

Diamantina and their tributaries. He published a great deal of information relat-

ing to the utilisation of plants as food and as raw material for implements.

Lying just to the south of the area studied by Roth is the great zone of sand-

hills which extends into the adjacent parts of the Northern Territory and South

Australia. Mrs, Duncan-Kemp (1933) dealt with the region between the

Diamantina and Georgina near the south-western corner of Queensland, between

the South Australian border and the area covered by Roth’s work. ‘The tribes

belonged to the group to which the terms “Pitta-pitta and messmates” have been

applied by Roth. Her references to ethnobotany will be brought together in a

later portion of our paper.

Amongst those who have given information relating to the area near the

northern border of our region are Wells (1894) and Cleland, Black and Reese

(1925).

Wells (1894) gave a short vocabulary and an account of the habits of the

Andrawilla tribe inhabiting the region between the Diamantina, Eleanor and

Herbert (z.e., Georgina) Rivers. Pastoral map, sheet No. 15, indicates that the

former police camp of Andrawilla was situated on the Eleanor near Clifton Hills

Station and was on our route to Pandi which was about thirty mules further

north. The tribe occupying the region when Wells was stationed there was pro-

bably the Ngameni, the Andrawilla people being one of its many small clans, the

names of others being mentioned by Wells. The utilisation of cane grass [either

the sandhills cane grass Spinifer paradoarus = Zygochloa paradoxa or Glyceria

ramigera — Eragrostis australasica| to line the bottom of a grave and also to cover

the corpse was referred to. The dome-shaped wurlies at a permanent camp were

made of logs, cane grass and mud, whereas at a temporary camp a breakwind of

boughs was sufficient. Fire was produced by twirling between the hands a piece of

hardwood in a hole in a piece of native flax | Crotalaria spp.| or rotten wood, some

sand being added to increase friction. Amongst the plant foods eaten were some

from the bean tree, Bauhinia |B. Carronit|; yowas, somewhat like a pea, these

bemg found in sandhills, and eaten green [? Cyperits bilbosus|; munyeroo

“similar to an Owalis,’ “probably Clayvlonia bulencnsis,’ eaten green [perhaps a

confusion of nardoo (Marsilia Drummondii) and Claytonia (= Calandrinia

balonnensis) | pigweed seeds [Portulaca oleracca] ground and made into a paste

(damper = wai-mal-ya) ; “seeds” of nardoo, Marsilia quadrifolia [= M. Drum-

mondt|, ground, mixed with fish-fat, and then baked in hot ashes, Vituri or

nalive tobacco came down from Sandringham, Queensland, the ash used in pre-

paring it for chewing being obtained from the gidyea [Acacia Cambagei]. Native

flax [Psoralea patens and Crotalaria spp.| was employed for making large nets

for capturing fish and ducks. Amongst the native names published by him are

the following relating to plants:—bark of a tree, yetanna; cane grass | /fragrostis

australasica or Zygochloa paradora|, bree-ta; Eucalyptus, bulka-kulla; grass, win-

thee; leaves, thalpoo; string, urip-a; spear, wadna-quin; stick, prit-ta [the same

word, bree-ta, given for cane grass}; shield, murra-mumma; wood. thal-poo;

yak-koota, bag; oo-too-manerie, hat.

Cleland, Black and Reese (1925) catalogued the flora of the north-cast corner

of South Australia and made some references to the use by aborigines of certain

plants at Minnie Downs (near Dandi) :—AMarsilia Drigninondti, nardoo, seeds

pounded into an edible meal; Panicum decomposituim, seed ground into flour;

Aristida arenaria, stalks used for “spearing’’ flies for amusement; Hakea

leucoptera, drinking water obtained from the roots; Samtaluin lanceolatunn,

fruit eaten; FEnchylaena tomentosa, “currant bush’ with edible berries;

152

Portulaca oleracea var. grandiflora, roots eaten aiter cooking; Acacia ligulata,

ash from Jeaves is mixed with pituri; A. fetragonophylla, wood used for

inaking boomerangs and womeras; A. stenophylla, bulgroo; Crotalaria Cun-

ninghamii and C. dissitiflora, kahlo, fibre used for making string; Eucalyp-

tus amicrotheca, coolebah, seed ground and eaten; Cynanchum flort-

bundum, weela [wirla of Stirling and Waite, 1919], edible, plant used for making

string; Solanum esuriale, berries eaten; Cucumis trigonus [= C. melo L. var.

agrestis Naud.], uleardo melons, eaten when quite ripe ; Eremophila Maecdonneilit,

wakimba.,

We obtained the following information from natives at Pandi Pandi (which

is a Yaurorka name), the tribe using the particular name being indicated thus:

1) for Dieri; N for Ngameni; W for Wonka-nguru; and Y for Yelyuyendi (Jel-

jujendi). The term mickeri or mickri people is commonly applied to those com-

ing from the sandhill (dako D, wadlu A, mudloo W, daku N ) region west of the

Diamantina and Warburton and including the Simpson Desert. The term is given

because the tribesmen (now chiefly Ngameni and Wonkamala) obtain their water

supplies from soaks (mickri W, ngapa-tjilli N), commonly deep in the sand

(fig. 38 in Horne and Aiston’s book). The sounds represented by p and b are

interchangeable, as also are d and t.

MARSILIACEAE

Marsilia Drummondii A. Br., ngardoo, N. W. D. Though nardoo is the

popular name, ngardu is more correct. Gason (1874) called it ardoo, as he usually

failed to detect the “‘ng” sound which is so common in aboriginal words. ‘The

sporocarps are pounded thoroughly between nardoo stones before the resulting

coarse meal, mixed with water to make a dough, is cooked and eaten. This

material, whose nutritive value is stated to be low, formed ihe main part of the

vegetable diet on which King, the sole survivor of the ill-fated Burke, and Wills

expedition, subsisted until rescued. He was supplied by the Yantruwunta people

of the region, The method of preparation of natdoo was described by Bancroit

(1884, 104; 1893, 215-217). Llorne and Aiston (1924, 54, fig. 40) have pub-

lished a figure showing the method of crushing nardoo on a piddimie (lower mill-

stone) by using a smaller handstone (koolkie).

GRAMINACEAE

Grass. General name kalyeroo, kulgru N, wiringi W, [wirintji = fire

(Arabana tribe); dried grass is used in fire-making], kuttu. Eriochloa punctata

Benth.; Paspalidium jubiforum (Trin.) Hughes and Panicum decompositum

R. Br.. pawa, bowa (seed), pau-akuttu (seed stick). Seeds ground and made

into damper. Bancroft (1884, 105) gave an account of the mode of preparation

of the seed of the last-named grass,

Triodia, probably pungens R. Br., kurumala N; its gum is poo-yu N. The

method of extracting “spinifex” gum (Aranda name, nurbma) was described by

Schulze (1891, 228).

Cyperus bulbosus Vabl., yaua N, yelka W. mung-aroo Y. Bailey (1912, 591)

stated that mangaru of the Boulia natives of western Queensland was C. esculentus

|. In our earlier papers we have called the species C. rotundus. Blake (1942)

has identified it as C. bulbosus (syn. C. Andrewsti; C. subulatus var. coufertus;

C. esculentus Bailey non L.). Mr. Reese informed us it is termed kaninda at Inna-

inineka (Yantruwunta name = Yidni minka; minka = hole, waterhole).

LILIACEAE

Bulbine semibarbata (R. Br.) Haw., pund-oko, pont-uka N; mund-oka,

munt-uka W. The leaves are eaten after cooking, the flowering stalks and seeds

being thrown away,

153

PROTEACEA

Grevillea stenobotrya F. v. M., wi-alka W. Sometimes used for providing

ash to be mixed with chewed pituri.

Grevillea striata R. Br., palku. Its gum is kandri palku N, kanti palku W,

kandri N. Kanti W is a general name for gum. This gum is sometimes used for

attaching the flint (tula) to the end of the wooden chisel.

Hakea leucoptera R. Br., kuluwa, kulua. Surface roots used as a water

supply.

SANTALACEAE

Santalum lanceolatum R. Br., mundawarra, mandawarra N, munnawarra W.

Fruit eaten.

LorANTHACEAE

Loranthus Mitchellianus Blakeley, koontarda; flower = tiwi N, ngamaka W.

Ripe fruit eaten = kardi W, taldera N.

PoLYGONACEAE

Rumex crystallinus Lange, murkera N. No name, W. Seeds converted into

damper after grinding.

Polygonum glabrum Will, mankula, nunkula N, W. The stems of this tall

species are pulled off and broken into pieces, then lightly cooked in the fire and

the pith eaten.

Polygonum plebejum R.Br., paua-tinna N, seeds crushed on stones, then

cooked and eaten as damper. Not used by Wonkanguru.

Muehlenbeckia Cunningham (Meisn.) F. v. M., puka miriki N, yetjelka W.

CILENOPODIACEAE

Chenopodium auricomum Taindl., pata-kurru N, W.

Bassta bicornis (Lindl.) R. Br.. malto N, kaltru-kurru W.

Enchylaena tomentosa R. Br., koona-pirra N, koonapria W. Berries, eaten.

AMARANTACEAE

Trichinium obovatum Gaudich. The downy perianth is used for ceremonial

decoration and is called wuntata N, W, the same name as for feathers.

Amuranthus Mitchellii Benth., koona-ngarda, kunu-ngarda N; talcu, dalcu W.

Seed used for damper.

J\IZOACEAE

Tetragona expansa Murr. Native name not known by informant. It is now

eaten, its use being made known by the white man, according to our informant.

PoRTULACACEAE

Portulaca oleracea L.., biddi-curdi (Mickeri name, N). The seed, bowa, paua,

paua biddi-kurdi W, is eaten. The name munyeroo D is also applied to the plant

(Bancroft, 1884, 106). Horne and Aiston (1924) illustrated the method of grind-

ing the seed.

Portulaca intraterranea Black, kauira N, pidikurdi W. The seed = pau-a

(pawa) N. All of the plant above ground is eaten raw or cooked by both tribes

(N, W); the root only, when cooked.

Another pig-weed from the sandhills, probably P. oleracea var. grandiflora

Benth., darikya N, puralya W. Only the roots eaten after cooking.

154

NycTAGINACEAE

Boerhavia diffusa L., kurri (karri) wirri (Mickeri, N, W). The root, six

inches or more in length, is eaten after cooking.

CRUCIFERAE

Blennodia eremigera (F. v. M.) Benth., priddiwalkatji N, priddi- warrukatji

W. Stem and flowers cooked and eaten. This and the succeeding species are

eaten by emus (warrukatji).

Lepidium Muelleri-Ferdinandi Thell., priddiwalkatji N, priddi-warrukatji

W. Cooked and eaten.

LEGUMINOSAE

Acacia ligulata A. Cunn., muntera, muntara N, W. The ash derived from

burning twigs is used for mixing with pituri. The ash from this species (“pituri

willow”) is most favoured for the purpose.

Acacia salicina Lindl., tjirri. Ash from twigs of this “Broughton willow” is

used for mixing with pituri.

There has been much confusion regarding this species because the name has

commonly included 4. ligulata; also, on account of this confusion, it has been

stated that 4. salicina was the chief supplier of ash for mixing with chewed pituri,

and consequently the Dieri name, wirra or wirha, has become associated with it.

Howitt’s figure indicates that he was dealing with A. ligulata, not A. salicina,

A. ligulata (muntera, wirra) prefers a sandy habitat, whereas 4. salicina (tjirri)

prefers alluvial flats or situations near water.

Acacia tetragonophylla F. v. M. Stems used for making spears.

Acacia Murrayana V. v. M., ngarra-ulla. Ash used for mixing with piturt.

Seeds roasted and eaten.

Acacia frumentacea Tate, closely resembles A. murrayana, Stirling (Anthro-

pology; Horn Exped. Report, p. 51) stated that the large seeds were ground for

food—hence the specific name given by Tate. Black (1929, 688) examined

material from Toorawatchy, collected by H. Basedow in 1918, and stated that a

witchety grttb occurred in its roots.

Acacia aneura F. v. M., muika, malka D, N, W. Stems used for making

spears.

Acacia stenophylla A. Cunn., bulgeru, bulgroo, pulkeru N, W. Ash used

for mixing with pituri. Wood of a twig used for making spindles for the manu-

facture of string from hair (para), fur (pultje W, nalta N) or plant fibre.

Bauhinia Carronii ¥. v. M., talpu N, and W. The gum oidlye N, oidlu W,

is eaten; the term suggests oolyie, ngulyi, of other recorders.

Legume with two pinnae (four leaflets), not in flower or fruit, boonkoodoo,

punkudu. The specimen has been matched with the narrow-leaved variety of

Cassia eremophila by Miss C. Eardley of the Tate Herbarium. Stirling and Waite

mentioned punkudu as a fibre. A striped edible grub (padi, D, W), lives in the

roots.

Trigonella suavissima Lindl., native clover, kalumpa, kalumba N, W. All the

upper part is eaten raw.

Psoralea patens Lindl., ka-lo N, W. Same name applied to Crotalaria spp.,

from which native flax fibre is made. Used to make nets and bags. The largest

plants (stems and roots) are stripped, tied into a large bundle and left to dry in

the sun for three or four days; then made into a tight bundle by twisting the stems

round each other, and then left in water overnight, when the bark loosens. The

plants are then rubbed in the sand and the stems are pulled through the hand so

that the bark comes off in strips ard is used as fibre, the stems being rejected.

Crotalaria Cunninghamit R. Br., ka-lo, used for making string. ‘“Flax’’-

producing plants are discussed at the end of this paper.

EUPHORBIACEAE

Euphorbia Drummond Boiss, ngama-ngama (Mickeri). Local name

Currawitlya clover. Widda-pooloo N, munya-munya N. It is a reputed poison

plant. The leaves and branches (not the stems) are boiled in a billy for a day or

more, “he liquid (used also by Afghans) is drunk as a cure for gonorrhoea, As

the latter is an introduced disease and no virtue can be ascribed to this decoction,

its use must be attributed to the popular dictum “similia similibus curantur,” the

milky juice suggesting the gonorrhoeal discharge. Roth (1897, 163) mentioned

that in Western Queensland the natives commonly belteved that any sort of grass

or shrub growing near the water’s cdge would relieve difficult or painful micturi-

tion, and that various species of Euphorbia were very frequently used for that

purpose.

uphorbia eremophila A. Cunn. Same names as for E. Driumimondii were

given by N and W.

SAPINDACEAE

Atalaya hemiglauca F. v. M., kuringula, kuringala N, W.

MALVACEAE

Lavatera plebeja Sims., putta-ri1, The name appears to be puttera (patara),

which is sometimes used tor wood or timber and hence for the long woody stalks

of this marshmallow.

Mallow (probably Sida virgata Hook), wilti N, weelalya wi-alya W.

MYRTACEAE

Eucalyptus microtheca F. v. M., Coolebah; pattera, puttera N. W. The fol-

lowing information was obtained from a Mickeri native. The branches are broken

off and taken to a claypan, where the seed (paua wudlia, pau kurdi) becomes

liberated from the capsules in about five days’ time, The seed and debris are

collected and placed in a coolamon, winnowed in a strong wind, soaked all night in

water in the coolamon, and then rubbed with the hands to clean and dry the seed.

The latter is then treated im the same way as that obtained from grasses. About

two handsful are placed on a large lower millstone with a groove along one side,

and ground with a smaller stone till very fine. The moist mass 1s then collected

into a dish (pitchi) held below the edge of the lower stone. This paste (paua

bilu} may be eaten dry, but the main portion is usually cooked in hot ashes. Ash

from burnt twigs is sometimes used for mixing with pituri. Stems of the coolcbah

are laid lengthwise on graves. Some of the latter were seen near our camp.

Photographs have been published by Waite (1917, pl. xxii, fig. 1), Horne and

Aiston (1924, fig. 1), and Elkin (1937, pl. i, fig. B).

CONVOLVULACESE

Tpomoea heterophylla R. Br., dintani N, W. Seeds crushed and eaten when

fresh (net when ripe and dry) ; long narrow roots cooked and eaten.

Ipomoea sp., mootcherie. Growing tops are eaten like a spinach. Duncan-

Kemp (1933, 259) gave mootchery as the name for yams resembling swect pota-

toes, growing in sandhills and sandy banks of watercourses in the adjacent region

in Queensland,

Evolvulus alsonoides var. seviceus, Sometimes used as a substitute for pituri

(L. Reese).

156

SoLANACEAE

No native tobacco plant is used in the Mickeri or the Pandi country, though

our informant knew the ingulba of the Aranda people of the Macdonnell Ranges.

Nicotiana sp. (probably, or closely related to, velutina and Goodspecdit)

occurs near the watercourses, and thas been. listed as N. suaveolens,

Pituri, pitjuri (Duboisia Hopwoodii) is brought from the Upper Mulligan

in Queensland. We have already referred to this narcotic in an eather paper

(Johnston and Cleland 1933; 1934). Twigs and leaves of Acacia salicina,

A, ligulata and other plants are burnt to obtain ash (kirri), which is mixed with

pituri during preparation of the latter.

Datura Leichhardtii F. v. M., tjultrani N.

MyororacEar

Fremophila bignoniflora (Benth.) F. v. M., thea-munni, tia-munni.

Eremophila maculata (Ker.) F. v. M., taiamunni N, W. The term is

perhaps a general one for species of Eremoplula,

Eremophila Sturtii R. Br. Mr, Reese informed us that the ash of “turpen-

tine bush” was sometimes used for mixing with pituri. Black (1929) mentions

E, Sturtii as the only South Australian plant bearing that popular name.

GOODENIACEAE

Goodenia subintegra F. v. M. and G. glauca F. vy. M. No name obtainabie

N, W. Eaten by emus.

Goodenia cycloptera R. Br., kalla-toora-milkie N, W (= turkey-eye; kalatoora

— wild turkey or bustard, Eupodotis australis; milki eye), plant sometimes

used as a substitute for pituri.

Leschenaultia divaricata F. v. M., mindri. The gum (mindri) is used

especially for attaching stone axes to their wooden hafts, and the flint (tula) to

the end of the wooden chisel. The material is obtained from the roots by heating.

The plant will burn readily while green and produces a dense black smoke.

COMPOSITAE

Calolis sp. (C. porphyroglossa ¥. v. M.; C. ancvrocarpa J. M. Black; and

C. multicaulis were all collected at Pandi). Te-te purra N, murumba W. Not

eaten, The awns on the fruits are troublesome to the natives.

Pterigeron adscendens Benth., ngurra ngurrawa N, ngarra ngarrawa N.

Senecio Gregorii F. v. M., walko walko N, W. Eaten by lizards (kadni).

Gnaphalium luteo-album L. or G. indicum L. (both of which occur at Pandi).

Uti uti N, koonakurtuku W. Down used for decorating natives for ceremonial

purposes.

Centipeda Cunninghamti (DC) A. Br. et Aschers, koona puturku N, W.

Similar name for Gnaphalinm. Used for bad colds by putting plants around the

head. Plants so used because of their aromatic odour, Kudna = filth or excre-

ment. Centipeda has an objectionable odour.

Calocephalus multiflorus (Vurcz.) Benth., purdi-purdi N. No name W.

Other terms are :—yakuta, bag; kattu N, yenku W, breakwind; toru, turu N,

maka W, fire; puttera, timber. Huts were made of boughs covered with smaller

vegetation (branches and grass) in much the same way as is illustrated by Horne

and Aiston (1924, fig. 12-17) for the wilpie and poonga of the Dieri tribe, and by

Elkin (1938, fig. 16).

157

Tor information regarding the use of plants and their products by natives

of the Dieri region we are indebted chiefly to the work of Gason (1874), Howitt

(1904) and Horne and Aistan (1924). There are also many references by Stirling

and Waite (1919) in their paper on “toas” of the Dieri people.

Gason gave an account of the Dieri in 1874, bis work being republished in

1879 by W oods (1879, 257-307), and in 1886 by Curr, The following references

are taken. from the 1879 edition, His vocabulary (pp. 296-307) contains the fol-

lowing names given to plants and their products :—backa, husk or outer shell;

bovka, vegetable food (antie = animal food) | Howitt gave the term anti er uganti

for Hesh} ; bookaundrinie [buka-ngandri of Howitt 1904, 792], scrub, shrubbery,

bushes (rather than trees) ; boompoo, bud; boonga, hut or wurley; dilka [djilka],

thorn, burr or prickle; kaulkoo [kalku], rushes [Cyperus laevigatus|; kautoo,

breakwind; kirra, boomerang; koonyillie, debris of leaves used by swans (kooti)

in building their nests; koctcha, leaf; kuntha, grass; kunthakoola, green; kulthie,

spear; kundrie, resin; kundrie mookwo, a native weapon [mookoo = bone or hard

structure]; kuntha, grass; mintie, net; moonarie, bark; murrawirrie, two-handed

sword [a long heavy fighting stick] ; oolyie, gum [ngulyi, kino of Eucalyptus sp.];

vorthie, branches; pathara, boxtree [Eucalyptus imicrotheca]; patharacoorie,

young tree or sapling ; pilla, charcoal; pillic, bag; pitta, stick or piece of wood;

pittacopara, roots of trees [copara 1s the same word as koppara = root, seen in

Kopparamana or Kopparamara, formerly the chief native trading centre of the

region|; pooldroopooldroounkuna, meal obtained by grinding seeds, the upper

millstone being murdacooparoo |[murda, mada = stone], and the lower, murdawola

[the term “pool” refers to blowing or breathing, and thus in this case to winnow-

ing of the material after srinding: tinkana = making or doing]; powa, fine seed;

thanyoo |tanyu of Howitt = Luchyluena fomentosal, dried Fruit thiewie |tiwi],

flowers; thooroo [turu], fire or fir ewood ; thooroomunya, firestick ; wurta, butt or

trunk of a tree; yegga, native orange [Capparis Mitchelli; higga of the Wialpi] ;

yuntha, a piece of wood used in the willyaroo ceremony which is deseribed

(pp. 270-271), this thin “yuntha” being attached to a long piece of string and

twirled ceremonially like the “bullroarer” of Central Australian tribes; wona, a

short thick stick used by women; watthicmookoo, grave [timber used as covering;

wotti = wood, muku = bone or framework]. The plants and their products,

stated to be eaten by the natives (pp. 287-288) are yowa [Cyperus bulbosus}:

winkara, a very starchy root, about five inches long [probably Boerhavia diffusa] :

munyaroo [Portulaca oleracea], a plant much eaten, its seed (kunaurra) being

ground into meal [the latter term is similar to kuna-ngarda obtained by us for the

edible secd of Amaranthus Mitchell:, which is prepared in the same manner] ;

ardoo (often called nardoo by writers [ngardu, Marsilia Drummondit], which is

crushed or pounded and the husk winnowed, this material being the mainstay of

the natives during bad seasons but it has very little nourtshment and is difficult to

digest) ; cobboboo, a gall found on the boxtree [Eucalyptus microtheca| ; wodaroo,

a long thin root, sweet and mealy and one of the best vegetables available to the

natives | Vigna lanceolata|; coonchirrie [kuntjiri], the seed of an Acacia, ground

and made into small loaves [tjiri = 4. salicina] ; patharapowa, seed [pana] of the

boxtree [pattera = Eucalyplus microtheca|; caulyoo [kalyu], seed of the prickly

Acacia [.A, Victoriae| pounded and made into loaves; wodlaooroo, very fine seed

from the silver grass | Panicunt decompositum] which grows in creeks; wirra-

thandra, seed of an Acacia [A, ligulata]; mulkathandra, seed of the mulga

[Acacia brachystachya and A. aneure], thandrana = pouring; yoongundie, a fine

black seed from a plant resembling clover; mootcha, native cotton bush [Cynan-

chim floribundum], when the leaves sprout and become quite green they are

gathered and cooked, while at seed time, the pods are eaten; kuloomba, indigenous

clover [Trigonella suavissima], caten in large quantitics when cooked; willapie,

158

a small watery plant [probably Thysanotus if roots are being referred to];

yoolantie, native fig [no species of Ficus has been recorded from the region, but

Howitt gave the name for Mesembryanthemum, it may be M, aequilaterale, which

has an edible fig-like fruit] ; bookabooda, native gooseberry [Solanui ellipticum| ;

iundawora, native blackberry [Koch gave mandaworra as the name for Santalumn

lanceolatum, which has a brown or black plum-like edible fruit] ; thoopara, native

pear [Marsdenia australis]. The two plant products used in manufacture are

mindrie [not to be confused with mindarie = peace corroborce}] and mootcha, the

edible pods and leaves of the latter having been referred to above. From the

outer part of the root of mindrie [Leschenaultia divaricata|], by heating, 1s

obtained a kind of resin |kundrie| which becomes very hard and is used for

fastening a flint to a short stick (kundriemookoo} to convert the latter into an

axe or tool for making weapons. The stems of mootcha, native cotton bush

[Cynanchum floribundum], when dry, arc pounded into a fine fibre, then teased

and spun aud made into bags and nets,

Amongst personal ornaments are (p. 289) :—kultrakultra, a necklet made

from reeds strung on woven hairs; mundamunda, a string (which may be 200-300

yards long) made from the native cotton bush, this string being worn around the

Waist; charpoo [also chanpoo, probably misprint], a white-painted band worn

round the forehead of men and made from [string from] stems of the cotton

bush; conamunda (oona == arm), string about ten feet long, made irom native

cotton bush and worn round the arm; oorapathera, a bunch of leaves tied to the

feet and worn when dancing [oora = legs, pathera or pathara = Eucalyptus

microtheca; Horne and Aiston’s fig. 35 indicates a performer wearing a bunch | ;

pillic, netted bag made from the stems of cotton bush and rushes, with meshes

similar to our fishing nets; pirra, a trough-like water-vessel; mintie, fishing net

made from rushes and usually 60 fect long by 3 feet wide; wondaroo, a closely-

netted bag made from the fibre of the cotton bush.

From the tree, cooyamurra (Acacia sp.) [according to Howitt (1904) and

Koch (1898), Kuyamara is Eremophila longifolia], a picce of wood, six inches

long, was pointed at one end and used to pierce the nasal septum of children, the

ceremony being called moodlawillpa (moodla = nose, willpa = hole); from the

same kind of tree two pieces of wood, each about a foot in length, were sharpened

at one end to a wedge-like shape and forced between the upper incisors which were

to be evulsed from children during the chirrinchirrie ceremony (pp. 266-267).

The penis of the young man about to be subincised with a sharp flint (koolpie

ceremony) was laid on a picce of bark just before the ope ration began, and after

completion of the latter, a piece of bark was placed over the wound and tied so

as to prevent it from closing (p. 273). In cases ot stings, leaves of bushes,

heated at a fire, were applied to the affected part. Two light rods (coonya), each

about three fect long, were beaten together by old men when questioning a corpse

to ascertain the name of the individual responsible for his death [sce also Berndt

and Vogelsang, 1941, 374|. Native cotton bush was used in the making of the

sugarloaf-shaped bags (ootamanurie) made hy men of the camp (pp. 280-282) and

placed by them on the heads of the returning members of the bookatoo, i.c., the

expedition to Burratchunna [Brachina] Creek, west of Blinman, to obtain

supplies of red ochre.

Helms (1896, 316) gave pattara and kuntha as the “Diyeri” terms for box-

trce [Eucalyptus microtheca| and grass respectively. He also stated (p. 280)

that the gum (Iundi) used for attaching the cutting stone (thula) to a piece of

hardwood to form a chisel, was obtained from the grasstree (Xanthorrhoea) trom

Cooper’s Creek, whence it was traded to the Wungarabunna (Urabunna, Arabana)

tribe. Ile stated that the best gum was found in the base of old trees and in the

roots; and that it was extracted by heating these portions over a slow fire, the

159

gum oozing out and then being mixed with sand. A substitute for this gum was

obtained by the Wungarabunna [Arabana] from the gidyea, Acacia homalophylla

[4. Cambager], It seems to us probable that the gum referred to was mindti

from Leschenaultia divaricala, since Nanthorrhoea has not been recorded from the

Eyrean region. X. quadrangilata occurs in the northern Flinders Ranges,

In the succeeding portion of this paper, the following abbreviations are used

to indicate the various tribes concerned:—A, Arabana or Urabunna; D, Dieri;

K, Kuiyani; Ka, Kara-nguru; N, Ngameni; Nj, Nguradjuri; P, Pilatapa;

T, Tirari; W, Wonka-nguru; Wo, Wonkamala; Wp, Wailpi; Y, Yelyuyendi;

Ya, Yaurorka; and Yu, Yantruwunta.

Howitt (1878) published a few remarks relating to the natives of lower

Cooper’s Creek, Their summer huts were merely breakwinds, made of branches of

shrubs) or stalks of marshmallow [Lazatera plebci«| ; and winter huts were made

of a frame of sticks covered with grass or weeds above which earth ot sand was

added to make the structures waterproof. Amongst edible seeds (bowar) [bowa,

paua| which were ground into meal were those of pappar grass [Panicum decom-

postu, oth (1897, 91) stated that pap-pa was a general term for seed food in

the Boulia district of Queensland, and under it were included yaraka (Llensine

aegyptiaca, t.c,, Dactyloctentum radians), katoora (Sporobolus actinocladus),

and Sporobolus Lindleyt, all of which grasses occur in the arca under our con-

sideration and are probably utilised by the natives]. The seeds of Portulac,

tuanyura, munycroo | Portulaca oleracea} were termed manyoura bowar aud were

treated similarly to those of the grasses. Nardoo served as a standby in times

of scarcity; those who subsisted largely on it were termed ngardu-etya. Green

Portulac [P. oleracea], native spinach hke the New Zealand spinach [ Tetragonta

expansa|, native melons [Cucumis imelo var. agrestis], and native oranges

[Capparis Mitchelli| were eaten raw, Amongst edible roots were those of

Portulac, others like radishes [Boerhavia diffusa], and small bulbs (yowar)

[yaua, Cyperus bulbosus| which were roasted in ashes. Pitchery was also men-

tioned, ‘small axes (tomahawks, bomako) were secured to their hafts by cords

made from the bark of a shrub, these cords being then covered by a hard black

gum (pinta) from a medium-sized tree with oval dark-green leaves and rough

bark [? Afyoporum platycarpum or Grevillea striata]. Large and small fishing

nets were made from fibres obtained from rushes [Cyperus ? vaginatus]. Logs

and bushes were placed over graves, as described by Captain Sturt.

KKoch (1898) published a list of plants collected on Mount Lyndhurst pastoral

area, especially in the vicinity of Mount Freeling and Yeralina, which Tindale’s

map (1940) indicates as lying in the territory of the Kuiyani tribe and the

northern-most part of the Waipi region. Koch mentioned a large number of

native names of plants and made some references to utilisation, The names are

set out as given by him:—Stenopetalum lmeare, warcoontoo, edible; Lepidiuns

papillosum, nalaka, seeds eaten; Pittosporum phillyracoides, madroo, seeds eaten;

Tribulus hystrix, koola; Zygophyllum fruticulosum, medcewurta, eaten; Z.

glaucesceus, nilday, eaten; Erodiun cygnorum, yarpee, windoo, wuntooka, caten;

Oxadlis corniculata, eaten; Heterodendron oleaefoliunt, mindra, seeds eaten; Sida

virgala, wattecworroo |watti, wood; waru, grey, dirtv], burdaddee; Abulilon

Mitchelli [from South Australia = A. leucopetaluam |, yarreedee ; Lavatera plebeia,

wirpa, kornma, wurnma, roots (apara) [kappera] of young plants eaten;

Portulaca oleracea, monyeroo, leaves and seeds eaten; Clavtonia balonnensis

[Calandrinia bal.) parakilya; Muehlenbeckia Cunninghamii, burdinga: Abriplex

mummularium, milpena; A. vesicarinm, billacurroo, dandayree; A. holocarpum

[4. spongiosum| maltoo; A. halimoides and other annual saltbushes, maltoo:

Khagodia spinescens, yillaroo; Enchylaena tomentosa, burlahmee; Kochia pyra-

midata, ooncroo, koonambirra; Kochia aphylla, bulka, poondoopoondoo; K, ciltata,

160

moodlee; Bassia quinquecuspis, yate; B, divaricatu, yalkirray ; Salicornia arbus-

cula | Arthrocnemitm halocnemoides|, tarapoolia; S. kel, yilka [= pricklyj;

Ptilotus nobilis, anemaheeturta; Boerhavia diffusa, two forms—(a) with hairy

leaves and stems, tawo, (b) with glabrous leaves and stems, padloo; Casuarina

glauca [from South Australia = C. lepidophloia|, alkoo; Templetonia egena,

atara, binyee; Clianthus dampieri, ngarabana, minyee-nunyeel parry ; Trigonella

suavissima, walpurla, kanba, kadumma, columba (last name at Innaminck:)

{kalumba]; Cassia phyllodinca, bundey [bundi], wammalleroo; Petalostylis

labichevides warreedee; Bauhinia Carronii, moodloo; Acacia tetragonophylla,

bararrecka; A. papyrocarpa, myall; A. sentis [A. Victoriae|, kalyoo; A. retinodes,

weerilda; 4. salicina (native willow), balkoora [? confusion with 4. stenophylla| ;

Acacia sp., ash of leaves used in preparation of pitchoree [probably A. ligulata|,

aroo, kakooroo, wurra [wirra|; A. Oswaldii, whyacka [wi-aka|; A. aneura,

mulga, seeds eaten, timber used for clubs when suitable mallee roots were not

available: Pimelea simplex, namala; P, microcephala, willparce, berries (narree-

mahee) [ngarrimai| edible, shrub and fruits used medicinally, bark of roots boiled

and liquor drunk for throat and chest complaints, extremely tough fibrous bark of

roots twisted into thin cords and tied around abdomen, or aching head, or other

parts to remove pain; Hakea Ediieana, yantana ; H. leucoptera, kooloova [kulua]

water from roots = nappa-koparee [ngapa = water, kapara = root| ; Tetragonia

expansa, paldroo, eaten as a spinach; J'rianthema erystallina, maparee; Melaleuca

glomerata, wooda, kooda; Melaleuca sp. (black teatree), woota, koota [M.

pubescens |; Eucalyptus oleosa, mallee, roots used as clubs ; EF. rostrata, kalpooroo,

seeds (power) [paua] eaten; Santalum lanceolatum, mandaworra, fruits eaten ;

S. acuminatum [Fusanus acuminatus| nakala, fruits eaten; Melothria maderas-

patana, willa-lillalee, fruits eaten; Loranthus linophyllus [L. Preissii] partapee,

fruits eaten; L. pendulus [L. Miquelti| weedla; L. quandong, yappee mulgatee,

berries eaten; Pterocaulon sphacclatus, yunga-yunga, “horehound” ; Scacvola

spinescens, poorntoo, berries caten; /pomaca heterophylla, woonooroo, roots

eaten; Convolzulus erubescens, noongay; Sarcostemma australe, meeninya, parde-

hardettee; Marsdenia Leichhardtiana [M. australis], toopara, roots, leaves, flowers

and seeds eaten; Solanum esuriale, puddadce, ripe berries eaten; S. ellipticum,

yoomeroo, berries eaten; Lycium australe, beeree, wadneree, [ruit eaten; Eremo-

phila longifolia, kooyamurra, branches used for covering corpse; £, Freelingii,

kaltya, halya: FE. oppositifolia, weeooka [wi-uka|]; E. Dutton, kaltya, halya;

LE. alternifolia, kaltya. halya; E. maculata, nanyoo; Calostemma lutenm, waddy-

wurra: Bulbine bulbosa? boontooka; Thysanotus tuberosus, tubers eaten; Cyperus

subulatus? |from Eytean region = bulbosus|, kudnamurra, ala, yower [yaual,

tharaka, corms eaten; grass (general term), kanta; Panicum coenicolum [Digitaria

cocnicola], talghee, allee, seed (power-tandra) eaten; P. gracile [Paspalidium

gracile |, talghee, seeds eaten; Erianthus cruciata [ =Daclyloctenium radulans

R. Br.. of which D. aegyptium of Australian authors is a synonym], wallamurroo ;

Poa ranugera | Bragrostis australasica], dickeree ; Marsilia quadrifolia [M. Drum-

mondit|, nardoo, sporocarps ground and eaten.

Howitt and Siebert (1903), in their account of two legends of the Lake Eyre

tribes, mentioned some plant names :—paua, seed of plants used for food, ¢.g.,

Claytonia Ya; wona-waru (= white mound; waru = white, wona or wompa

— hill or mound), fungus [Gasteromycetes, Podaxron spp.| found growing near

Eucalyptus trees; kalyu, an Acacia [A. Victoriae]; kaliwaru, Eucalyptus rostrata

(at Innamincka); pattara, Eucalyptus microcarpa [error for EF, muicrotheca];

wonno, woman’s digging stick; malka Ya, Acacia aneura; kangua Ya, D, flax.

TIowitt (1891) mentioned some Dieri totems (murdus) with which plant

names were associated :—manyura, Portulaca oleracea, whose seed was kanaura;

and pitcheri, Duboisia Paterson: [D. Hopwoodti|. Leaves and twigs of wira

161]

bush were added to the latter by Dieri and Yantruwunta. The use of kunya rods

at inquests and of cooya mura sticks for tooth evulsion, as reported by Gason,

was mentioned (p 80, 88). Wurdigi (= mulga tree) was stated to be a totem in

the Yandairunga tribe occupying the west shore of Lake Eyre [= Antakirinya

tribe |.

Hiowitt’s very important work on the native tribes of South-eastern Australia

(1904) contains many references to plants in relation to the social organisation

and ceremonial life of the Eyrean tribes. Mention was made of the great trade

route from the Northern Flinders Ranges, whence red ochre (karku D, arkaba A,

harkaba W, Wo, kambara Ya, was collected, through the Cooper via Kopperamana

and some other centres, to the lower Diamantina and Mulligan into Queensland,

where pituri bush ()uboisia Hopwoodii) was obtained, ochre, pituri, grinding

stones and implements being the chief objects of barter (pp. 713-716). The red-

ochre expedition was called bukatu N or pocato Yu, and the ochre mine was stated

to be near Beltana.

‘The names given in various parts of the book to plants and their products are

as follows :—bili or pili, bag; bili-milki, bag on which the figure of an eye (mulki)

is woven; duntyi, Crofalaria sp. (fig. 58) [C. dissitiflora]; kanta D, grass, woven

by the Arabana to form a kind of apron; kadla W, rush [Cyperus vaginatus or

C. laevigatus|; kagnara N [?ka-ngara] seed of Claytonia [Calandrinia sp.| ;

kanangara D, seed of manyura |munyeroo, Portulaca oleracea|; kalti K, spear ;

kandri D [== koondi], round boomerang-shaped weapon with pointed ends

(hg. 12 (7) ); kandri D, A, K, name also given to the gum obtained from the

roots of mindri [Leschenaultia divaricata], the term kandri-moku D being also

used (moku== bone or other hard substance), this gum being employed for

cementing chips of stone [tula] to the wooden handles [of chiscls|, and the axe to

its haft; kakura A [kakuru = Acacia ligulata], bush with edible fruit; katu K,

breakwind; kirha D, boomerang; kangu D, Ya, flax; kalyu, Acacia sp. (near

Innamincka) [4. Victoriae]; kulua A, Hakea leucoptera, used for constructing

huts; kuntyiri D, kutyiri N, Acacia sp. [tjiri = Acacia selicina| kunya D, pointed

piece of wood or bone used in magic; kuyamara A, kuya-marra D, Eremophila

longifolia, twigs used in funeral ceremonies to make a bed in the grave for the

corpse, and also worn as a sign (1)) to indicate those members of the party who

had eaten ceremonially some of the fat of the deceased (p. 448-449)—two chisel-

shaped pieces of kuyamara wood were used in tooth evulsion D (p. 655-656);

mnakatira A, firestick (maka = fire A, W); malka D, Wo, Acacia aneura [mulga of

whites is a corruption of the native name|, mulga “apples” [galls| are eaten, root

used as material for making digging tools; manyura N, Ka, Claytonia balonnensis

| Calandrinia bal., manyura is commonly called munyeroo by white people], edible

seeds; mapara Ya, edible seed of Claytonia sp. [Calandrinia]; maru-wiri, two-

handed boomerang; moku D, probably Cucumis trigonus [== C. melo L. var.

agrestis Naud.|; muluru D, witchetty grub; munukudu D, Wo, plant with grass-

hke foliage and bearing tubers under each other and not in clusters, and found

growing under bushes in sandhills [? TAysanolus eviliflorus Black non F. v. M. =

I. exfimbriatus| ; narrangama, narra Ya, shield; ngampa A, stone used for pound-

ing ngardu (nardoo) ; ngarumba Ya, D, boxtree, Eucalyptus microtheca; ngulyi

A, K, kino of a Eucalypt used for attaching the axe to its haft; ngardu, Marsilia

sp. [M. Drummondiu]; pirha D, A, K, wooden bowl, term also used for a tree or

for a block of wood suitable for making such a bowl; pirha mara D, shield, (pirha

= dish or bowl, mara = hand) ; piltai A, Acacia salicina, ash used in the prepara-

tion of pituri; pitcheri, D and other tribes, Duboisia Hopwoodii; pundu, “nose

peg” ornament made of the wood of the kuyamara (Eremophila longifolia) ;

padi D, edible witchetty grub [found in roots of various shrubs and trees]; paia-

moku A, Didiscus glaucifolius (paia = bird, moku = bone); pita-moku A, tree

162

trunk (pita = wood, moku = bone or other hard material) ; wirha D, Yu, Acacia

salicina |Howitt’s figure is that of A. ligwlata], ash used in the preparation of

pituri; pili or bili, bag; paua Ya, edible seed ground between millstones, the larger

lower, softer slab being ngurtu 1) or tayi Ya, and the smaller, harder upper one

marda-kupara D (marda, mada D, madra Y, = stone; kuparu = young or small) ;

punga-moku D, timber forming the framework (/.e., bones, moku) of a hut

(punga); tanyu D, [Enchylacna tomentosa|; timpiwora, unknown plant; turu-

manya 1), firestick (turu = fire); turu-kuntyi, stick made from mulga root and

used for digging out small mammals from their burrows |the term turu suggests

that the end of the digging stick is hardened by fire, as is done by various tribes

elsewhere |; wona, woman’s implement used in sport and in fighting; wapiya Wo,

boomerang; wona-waru [Podaxon spp.|, white mould which grows near Eicalyp-

tus trees; vaua W, Cyperus rotundus [= C, bulbosus|, buths eaten; yelka A,

grass-like plant with edible bulbs [Cyperus bulbosus|; yudlanti, Aesembryanthe-

mum [? M4. aecquilaterale|. Yutchin is a name applied to a person who acts for

another during the prolonged absence of the latter from Ins camp (Dieri); the

intending traveller places around the neck of his representative (yutchin) a string

fyootchoo, Gason, 1879, 302| made from native flax or human hair, Shields are

made of soft wood | Bauhinia Carronti| obtained by barter from the north and

north-east, i.c., mainly from western Queensland, via Cooper’s Creek, the Yantru-

wunta people supplying weapons and grinding stones in exchange, The Dicri

made fire by drilling the edge of a shield with a sharp-pointed stick. Bukatyiri D

was applied to areas where trees and shrubs were more abundant than in some

other regions, such as the lower Coopcr.

The Dieri and Virari believed that the Kadimarkara were creatures which in

Murra-murra [ancestral] times climbed down from the sky to earth by means of

the huge Eucalyptus trees on which it rested and which grew on the western side

of Lake Eyre; this was the explanation given for the presence of certain fossil

remains found near Lake Eyre (p. 433). The sticks [called coonya by Gason]

used at an inquest were termed kuya by the Dieri (p. 448).

Fylmann (1908) referred to Dicri murdus, mentioning the following relating

io plants: — pitscheri, Duboisia Patersoni [D, Lopwoodti]; malka |Acacia

aneura]; manyura, Portulaca oleracea, its seed = kanaura; kananngara, munyeru ;

julanti, edible seed [Mesembryanthemum aequilaterale|; and spores of nardu,

Marsilia quadrifolia. Native flax, Psoralea patens, was used for making fibre head

bands, bags and fish-nets, and illustrations of these were published,

Stirling and Waite (1919) published a paper on “toas” or aboriginal direc-

tion signs used by the LXyrean tribes, the information having been taken from the

manuscript (now in the South Australian Museum) of the late J. G. Reuther,

who was for eighteen years in charge of the Lutheran Mission Station at Kalla-

paninna, These toas were generally closely associated with the legendary wander-

ings of the muramuras (ancestral spirits). Many contain plant names; an example

is No. 87 mentioned on p. 126, ngapamanaworani (the suffix ni = to, or in the

direction ef), which in Dicri means “to the place where the manawora plant stands

in water (ngapa), This is a cucumber-like creeper, a piece of which is affixed to

the head [of the toa]. The latter represents a water-covered flat in which the

Muramura, Patjalina, found these plants growing [indicated by] (red spots).”

Mr. I. M. Hale, Director of the South Australian Museum, where these

toas are now located, has kindly permitted us to examine those at present avail-

able in an endeavour to identify the plant material which is attached to the upper

end of many of them. We are unable to identify or to suggest probable identifica-

tions of several of the plants whose native name (without actual plant material)

is associated with the toa. The numbers quoted are those of the associated toas

163

as given in Stirling and Waite’s paper, and, in the case of nearly all of them, they

are similarly indicated in the coloured illustrations which accompany the paper.

2, 46, pingalpiri D, T, grass, also a large waterhole on Cooper’s Creek, 4,

katjara W, edible creeping plant like cucumber [.Marsdenia australis]; 19,

magamaga ‘") tree W; 13, 16, winpara bush D [canegrass, Eragrostis australasica] ;

26, 308, bunuru W, cotton bush [Kochia ? pyramidata]; 44, 195, kudnampira

bush D, Ya [Kochia pyramidala|; 45, palkura [Acacia sp.]; 45, tjiri | Acacia

salicina] ; 58, palkalara grass D [Atriplex ? numimulariuim| ; 59, 140, 254, kalku D,

rush [Cyperus gyimnocaulus| ; 60, dikeri grass | Hragrostis australasica| ; 61, wirla

bush D (same as dantju), has edible red berries [tanyu of Howitt, 1904, 781;

Enchatlaena tomentosa] ; 72, dikulu N, canegrass | Spinifex (= ZNygochloa) para-

doxa]; 84, turuku D, fire-stick; 87, manawora D, cucumber-like creeper [looks

more like a mistletoe, Loranthus sp. than a Cucumis] ; 88, 147, 210, karla D, rush

[probably intended for kardla, kadla = rush W (Howitt, 1904, 783) ; specimens

are Cyperus gymnocaulus, ka-lo is given by other writers as the name of the

flax-producing plants [Crotalaria spp. and Psoralea]; 90, 318, wari-wari plants

| Sida sp.|; 108, 202, malka T, D, mulga [Acacia aneura|, wood used for making

Doomerangs (kirra); 111, kakura° bush D [kakuru = stcacia ligulata|; 113

palkara, T (a saltbush) [Atripler sp.|; 114, pulpuru bush; 70, 115, wulpu T, W,

plant yielding flax-like fibre [we suggest that the plant may be Cynanchune flort-

bundum); 117, mindri D [Leschenaultia divaricata]; 118, 149, kuluwa bush D

| Hakea leucoptera] ; 130, yadi D. spindle with two crossbars on which string is

wound; 146, 192, 221, punkutu D, W, flax prepared from punk (flax plant)

[we suggest the species is Crotalaria dissitiflera|; 148, kalyu bush Ya | Acacia

Victoriae |; 150, palpa bush T [Dodonaeuw altennata|; 151, worala W, has edible

roots [probably Leschenaultia divaricata| +: 165, wonawa 1D, mushroom [Pedaxon

sp-|; 166, kunya D, pointed stick used as a needle or awl: 180, palpara bush D

[| same as 114, pulpuru: Horne and Aiston gave palpara as the name of a smail

hawk, W, which is probably the same as Stirling and Waite’s balpara bird, toa

No, 36]; 188, kuntjikuntji bush D [Acacia sp., very narraw leaves. Howitt gave

turu-kuntyi as the name of a digging stick made from mulga root, kanta — grass];

182, 190. yanda D, also called yuntha in Cooper’s Creek district, wooden slab or

“hull-roarer” used im ecremonials ; 194, kandri D, curved weapon with pointed ends

Ja kind of boomerang, Howitt, fig. 12, (7) |; 213, vana D [Cyperus bilbosus| 3

225, billi D, net-bag; 239, kuyamara bush 1D [ELremophila longifolia|; 240, didla

bush |Airipler sp.|; 241, taltranta grass [Fululia fuleo |: 244, billimmmu D, net-

bag used by women for carrying various kinds of grass contaming edible seeds;

245, tjurlu bush P; 247, diladila grass N, fret sandhills; 250, kuramorla, poretu-

pine grass [Trivdia pungeis, kuramala of our list|; 253, waru (—= while) bush

or grass 1) [not a grass; twigs of ? Atriplex]; 262, 299, witra bush D | Acacia

ligilata| ; 268, wonatiri D, sharpened stakes |wona] used for supporting fishing

nets; 277, wodika bush W [Acacia ligulata| ; 179, palyangani 1, edible sweet gum

trom a tree [Al voporuin platycarpum or Bauhinia Carranti| ; 298, malka kanta D,

mulga grass | Aristida arenaria]; 301, mudlamana bush [deacia species! ;

302, duntji bush | Crotalaria sp., according to Howitt, 1904, fig. 58 = C. dissiti-

Hora|; 303, karauara bush [specimen consists of grass stems]; 310, wona 1, dig-

ging stick; 313 pa-u grass 1D [general term for grasses with edible seeds]; 319,

makamuru bush D [Sida so.]; 322, kudukudna grass T [grass stems, species not

recognisable]; 197, attached to kawolkalani tou Ya [kawolka = crow | is a plant

which may be Amaranthus sp. or more probably Trianthcma sp.; 112, 214, pankara

W.rush [Cyperus gyvmnocanlos|; 121 (without name or details) [plant material

is a grass, Aristida; 276, palkurunu bush D | Heterodendron oleifoliuam| + 311,

©) Mr. Vogelsang informs us that this name is a fapsus calumt for Reuther’s name,

majamaja (maya-maya). We have not been able to identify the plant, as none is indicated

on the toa.

164

wirta bush D [the account indicates “roly-poly,” Salsola kali and has no relation

to wirha, Acacia ligulata]. Jelka was mentioned as an edible bulk [Cyperus

bulbosus|, and Jelkabalubaluna was the demigod (muramura) controlling its

growth (p. 108), Toas 28, 54, 61, 118, 129, 152, 161; 203, 220, 227, 256, 260 and

317 are concerned with that muramura; and 17, 93, 101, 103 and 211 with another

one, Ngardutjelpani, whose name suggests that he was responsible for ngardu.

The origin of various plants, due to the action of muramuras was referred to

(p. 110).

The observations of Horne and Aiston (1924) were centred mainly on Mun-

geranie which lics in the Wonkanguru territory, the latter author being the police

officer there for many years, before he came to reside at Mulka which is only about

23 miles to the south, In this book there are abundant scattered references to the

utilisation of plants by the natives, but only occasionally is the species indicated.

We have brought together the information and have, in places, added our own

comments,

From the root of the coolebah, Eucalyptus inicrotheca, water was somelimes

obtained, and a long pole-like spear, called piranburra, Y, D, W. was made, the

latter serving also as a digging stick to be used by men when hunting dingoes, In

a woman’s cotroboree in which men tepresented spirits (moora), these men had

bunches of box-tree leaves tied to each ankle. The seeds, after being ground, were

eaten, Irom a bend of a branch, a wooden dish (pirrha) was fashioned. The

throwing-stick (munkerara) was usually made from this tree.

Acacias were utilised, From the bark of one kind (ycarda) an astringent

fluid was obtained and used for tanning skins to convert the latter into skin water-

bags (pp. 50-51, fig. 39) [the specics may have been A, salicina, since Cleland,

Black and Reese (1925) stated that its bark possessed some tanning material],

“Dead finish’ [Acacia tetragonophylla| was used in making the koondi, a

boomerang, nearly round in section; and a sharpened stick to which emu feathers

were bound in order to make a head decoration (fig. 35) for one of the corro-

borees. The root of whitewood (Acacia sp.) was used for making the short

handle, into the cleft end of which the axe head was inserted and then secured by

binding it with hair or fur string together with mindri gum (p. 104-105, fig. 73)

[the term whitewood, as far as we know, is restricted to /alaya hemighauca,

which belongs to the Sapindaceae]. The wood of the mulga (4. anewra) was also

employed for the laiter purpose. Mulga seeds were ground and eaten; and a long

spear or digging stick (piranburra) was made [rom its root. The flattened,

sharpened point attached to light spears (kutchie) was usually of mulga, The

hardwood of this species was used for making such implements as the kirra

(boomerang), murrawirrie (two-handed fighting boomerang), wadna (woran’s

digging stick), and wirrie (throwing stick), The wirra, Acacia salicine

[apparently should be A. ligulafa|, was used for obtaining the ash for mixing with

pituri, and certain stones (murrallacardia W, kuncherawarroo D, were scattered

to increase the supply of this acacia (p. 133-134), The method of obtaining the

ash is shown on fig. 49.

The method of preparing nardoo is mentioned and an illustration (fig. 40)

is given of the crushing of the sporocarps on a piddinie (lower stone) by using a

hammer stone (koolkie). Yaua [Cyperus bulbosus| was an important food

supply and certain stones (yelka) were used in the corroboree to bring about the

increase of the plant (p. 134). Munyeroo [Portulaca oleracea] was caten raw or

cooked on hot ashes; while its seeds were collected, ground on a mudda (lower

millstone) with a muddathirrie held in the hand (fig. 42, 43), the resulting meal

(bowa) being cooked as a damper.

Aniongst other plants supplying food were wadroo [wodaroo of Gason], a

legume with edible roots [Vigna lanceolata] ; bladder saltbush | Atriplex cesicarui |

165

with edible seeds; native cucumber [Cucumis melo var. agrestis|; wild spinach

| Letragonia expanse]; wild cabbage: willa, a creeper whose leaves and flowers

are eaten | Marsdenia australis; wecla is the name given by Cleland, Black and

Reese for a related plant, Cynanchum floribundum]; and mindrie [Leschenaultia

divaricata|, the outer part of whose thick root is cooked and eaten [it is possible

that there has been a confusion with Polygonum glabrum, part of whose roots is

edible; Leschenaultia, in its habit and appearance, closely resembles “Jignam,” ic.,

Muehlenbeckia Cunninghamii, one of the Polygonaccae|. As a potential water

supply mention is made of the roots of the needlewood (trigunta, tigunta = Hakea

leucoptera), red mallee (Eucalyptus oleosa) and box (Eucalyptus microtheca).

libre was obtained from rushes | Cvperis Poagmatus, C. distachyus|, and

from wadnearie (a verbena) [error for Psoralea patens whose flowers and habit,

at first sight, suggest a verbena]. T’rom rushes a kind of fishing net called

pinegara was made, the method of preparation being described (p, 62-63); this

net was not durable and was usually left in the water. The much longer fbre-

string net (woorcomarroo, marroo = white) was made from wadnoaric and was

handled more carefully and was put away when not in use. The preparation of

the fibre and its conversion into string were described (p. 67, fig, 53-55). This

fibre-string was used for making one kind of head net (munta), and formed the

basis of the closely-woven forehead band, termed charpoo, which was. plastered

with gypsum (kop1) and was worn during ceremonials, and the somewhat similar

nulta which was decorated with red ochre. Vibre was also used in making the

fong belt (dampera, and its attached hanging strings or wilpoo) which is wound

round the waist of men. It also entered often into the formation of the longer

waist-girdle (yinka) worn by men. Fibre is used for making various kinds of

uet-bags. One kind of bag was stuffed with grass, fur or hair and converted into

a string ball, used in play. Vibre from a plant [Cynanchum floribundiin| grow-

ing in the sandhills was mixed with human hair and animal fur and conyerted

into a string from which a bag (p. 109) was made for holding delicate stone

implemenis called pirries (fig. 67). For fire-making a hardwood stick of mulga

was twirled in a split stick of Crolalaria Cunninghaimii (p. 66, fig. 52, 52), shredded

bark or pith being added to the spark obtained, Another method was to rub with

a koondi (boomerang) the back of a saftwood shield (mutrawaroo) on which

some triturated dung had been placed, the resulting spark being fed with Icaves

and grass (p. 94). Irom lignum | Muehlenbeckia Cunninghami| and marsh-

mallow [Lavatera plebeja] light spears (kutchic) were made, but some kind of

hardwood, usually mulga, had to be used for the point. The narcotic pitchest,

inade from Duboisia Hopwoodti which was traded from western Queensland, was

used extensively.

There were at Icast three kinds of gum used in connection with the making

of weapous. Kunti was obtained from the beefwood [Grevillea striata, the name

kunti or kanti to be distinguished from koondi = boomerang]. Pooya W was

got from Triodia and was bartered from the north and was used for attaching

axc-heads to their handles (complete axe = kalara-piddina), Mindri guin was

the most valuable and was obtained {rom the root of a plant (p. 102, fig. 76)

[Leschenaullia divaricata| growing in swampy areas. Jt was mixed with kan-

garoo dung and was used for attaching the stone tool (uhla) to the rest af the

implement (koondi) and for forming the handle for ordinary stone knives

(yutchawunta) and fighting knives (illyawunta, fig. 72). It was also used for

covering the free extremity of the pointing bone (witra-garoo W, inokoo-ellie

duckana 1, which was made of bone or of wood such as necdlewood [Hakva

leucoptera], the gum being used for the purpose of retaining the magic “poison”

which was supposed to have entered the implement at the proper time (fig. 86-87).

Mindrie gum was also used for attaching ornaments to the charpoo (forehead

band worn by men).

166

Amongst the various implements made of wood by the Wonkonguru and not

particularly mentioned in the foregoing information from Horne and Aiston’s

work, are the following :—dunpara, food platform made of four stakes; wadna,

woman’s digging stick; pirrha, dish (Jig. 20, 22, 24, 25); kulchera, playing stick

(lig. 27) [similar to wona of the Dieri and weet-weet of Victorian natives, Howitt

1904, fig. 12 (1) |; bull-roarer, inchitcha ; and message slicks (fig. 18), The

various kinds of boomerangs (kirra) and throwing sticks (wirrie, koondi) were

illustrated (fig. 57-65), Shields (murrawarroo) were made of soft wood,

Erythrina vespertilio [error for Bauhinia Carronii], and were obtained by barter

fram Queensland. A grave with logs lying on. its surface is shown (lig. 88).

The utilisation of plant material in constructing the various types of huts (poonga

and wilpie) is indicated in fig. 12-17,

Basedow (1925) made some reference relating to our subject. Very brief

mention was made of the use of timber and brushwood as a cover for graves

(p. 206-207) by the Dieri and Yantowannta, photographs of the two kinds being

published (p. 25, fig. 1-2). The framework of heavy curved logs utilised in the

construction of a hut near Cooper’s Creck is figured in pl. xv, fig. 1. Fire-making

by the twirling method was adopted by the Dieri tribe (p. 111), necdlebush [Hakea

leucoptera| being selected for the harder twirling stick and Hack’s pea, Crotalaria

[C. Cunninghaimii| for the softer basal piece. Amongst the inyplements made

from eucalypts by the Dicri, Yantowaunta, Ngameni and other Central Austra-

lian tribes were food and water carriers (coolemans), both shield-shaped and

canoe-shaped (p. 92). From mulga were made st raight smoothed spears (p. 190,

fig. 5b); the long slender “playing stick,” kukerra (p. 82-83) [kulchera of Horne

and Aiston|; a form of club (p. 169); and a kind of boomerang, marriwitri

(p. 170). The use of the sporocarps of nardoa, called kalumba by the Dieri, as

food and the method of grinding them is described (p. 150) [confused with the

edible clover, Trigonellu suavissima, to which the name kalumba belongs}. An

account was given of the preparation and use of pitjuri (from Diuboisia Hop-

qoodii), the necessary ash being obtained by burning iwigs of Acacia salicina

and cucalypts (p. 155-157).

In 1937 Elkin (p. 285) referred to the use by the Dieri of the kuyamara

plant (Eremophila longifolia) and published photographs of a Yauraworka grave

and one at Innainincka [Yantruwunta|. In the same year Aiston published a

paper relating to pituri, stating that its preparation (1937, 372) was a close

monopoly and that any child born to the horde or tribe who belonged to the

“pitcheri moora” [one of the subdivisions of several of the Eyrean tribes] auto-

matically succeeded to all rights and privileges in the distribution. ‘Tle trade

route from the pituri country in [far-western Queensland to Koparra-nurra

( Kopperamanna of whites) in Dieri territory, and thence to other regions, was

referred to. Other references to utilisation of plants in the Eastern Eyrean region

are:—wirra, Acacia salicina [ 21. ligulata], as the plant from whose tops ash for

pituri was obtained; mindry bush | Leschenaultia divaricata] or other herbage was

added to wooden bowls in which water was being carried, to prevent slopping;

herbage was used for trapping shrimps and fish (p. 375); fibre string made from

a verbena [Psoralea patens, |-cguninosae| from the swamps aud from the broom

bush |? Cynanchian floribindwn| trom the sandhills, was utilised for making

the bags used for holding pituri (375-376).

Berndt and Vogelsang (1939, 170) referred to the use of grass or bushes to

line Dicri graves, on top of which wood, bushes or twigs were placed. In a later

paper (1941) they stated that kujamara was used as a native tobacco, and as a

poison for adding to waterholes to catch emus, and also in mortuary ceremonials ;

while the pointing bone (dukana) was wrapped in emu feathers and kujamara

plant and then left in the earth for several months, There were a few additional

167

references :—buka-buka, trees or shrubs; patara, tree [Eucalyptus microtheca} ;

para-warana, a native tobacco; pilti [pilli], dilly bag; and turt-upita, firesticl

[turu-pita; turt = fire, pita = stick]. These two authors also published a com-

parative vocabulary of the Dieri and Ngadjuri tribes (1941 a), including some

Wailpi words (from the northern Flinders Ranges), The Ngadjuri occupied the

southern portion of the Flinders Ranges. We will use D, Nj and Wp to indicate

the tribe using each term of interest to us:—bullroarer, wetana, nura-ngali Nj,

junta, D; bush with green berry [? Solanum sp.], ungina Nj); billy button

1? Calocephalus iultiflorus|, wilu Nj; green bush [Cassia spp.], bundi Nj, pita-

kulja-kulja 10; small grey bush haying medicinal qualities, judali Nj [yudh

(Wailpi tribe), Cleland and Johnston 1939, 178 = Scaevola spinescens|; wild

carrot [? Boerhavia diffusa], kuku Nj; clover |Trigonella suavissuna|, walbuja

Nj, kalumba D; club, wirl Nj, Wp; creeper (Clematis), winda-murlku Nj

[probably Tecoma doraloxylon from which spears (winda) are made, murlku =

flower]; fire-stick, gadla-widni Nj, manja D (gndla Nj, manja ), = fire); fire

drill—upright twirling stick, aru-watung Nj; basal stick. watate-widni Nj; flower,

murlku Nj, tiwi D; grubs from sandalwood, bulkara-bati Nj, padi D |bati, padi =

grub|; mallee, gula Nj; watcr-bearing mallee root, gu-nga Nj, ngapa D [ngapa =

water]; mulga [Acacia ancura|, mulka Nj, malka D; native tobacco, pitjuri Nj,

pitjiri D [Dubotsia Hopwoodii| ; fishing net, minda, mindi Nj, jama D; nutgrass

[Cyperus bulbosus| jalka Nj, jaua D; wild pear [Cynanchum floribunduin or

Marsdenia australis|, ngawala Nj, its roots, ngandi Nj; knobbed playstick, jakura

Nj; playstick [kulchera of Horne and Aiston] kukuru Nj, aya Wp, kuku-ru-

pirkina 1); plain playstick, waba Nj; porcupine grass (Triodia), nala Nj; wild

potatoes |?Lpomaca|, balku Nj; wild peach [Aucarva acuminata], wuti Nj,

wulti Wp; quandong [Santali lanccolaium|, guti Nj; reeds [Cyperus vagina-

fus| from waterholes, jaki-walala Nj, wirka D, wilti D; [so-called | sandalwood

tree | Myoporum platycarpum |, bulkara Nj, baru Nj, kalju-mara D, emburt

Wp; Acacia seeds, minga Nj, kuntjiri-pana D (pau = seed) [tjiri = 4. salicinal ;

ground seeds, bulpa Nj, punpu D; she-oak [Caswarina lepidophloia], gud Nj;

silver wattle [Acacia rivalis|, vaka Nj, its seeds = vaka mai Nj; spear, winda Nj,

kalti D, wadlala Wp: spear-thrower, midia Nj; stick, widni Nj, pita D; stone for

grinding seeds, murku (= stone), gunja-buri Nj, marda-kuparu D, mara wadia

\Wp: stone axe, kalara 1); string or fibre, ita Nj, nguri Nj, jinka 1); tree, kakatt Nj,

patara D [term used further north mainly for Eucalyptus microtheca| ; ti-trec

| = tea tree, Melaleuca pubescens, ooda, wuta Wp], guda Nj; water from mallee

root, gu-ugu-galwi Nj; yacca [Nanthorrhoea quadranyulata], wuara Nj; yam,

ngumpa Nj: vam stick, kata Nj, mungu-wirt Wp.

Additional information concerning the names of plants amongst the Wailpt

tribe is contained iu papers by Hale and ‘Tindale (1925) and by Cleland and John-

ston (1939).

Curr (1886) circulated amongst people who were in contact with aborigines

a request for the native names of a number of objects, amongst them being:

(1) grass, (2) war spear, (3) reed spear, (4) womerah, (5) shield, (6) toma-

@) Tt will be noted that Berndt and Voeclsane mentioned bulkara and emburu for the

sandalwood tree. ‘(he latter is not the true sandalwood (Eucarva spicala) but is Myeporun

platycarpunt, for which we (1939) received the name imburu from the Wailpi. We listed

bulara and bulgar for the true sandalwood from Ooldea, and Helms (1896) published the

latter name for AL. platycarpune in the south-western part of the Great Victoria Desert,

Berndt and Vogelsang (1941.4) also gave kalyumara as a name for their sandalwood. Howitt

(1904, 805) stated that kalyumara was applied to a wide expanse of country where kalyu, an

eleacia [-l, Victoriae|, occurred, and also to a large sheet of water in Cooper’s Creek near

the Queensland border. Kalyumara may be a misprint for Kuyamara which was mentioned

by Berndt and Vogelsang in ancther paper (1941), but we have already noted that Koch (1898)

and Howitt (1904) identified the plant as Eremophila longifolta, which, like Myoporiem

platycarpum, belongs to the Myoperaccac.

168

hawk (presumably axe), (7) boomerang, (8) wood, (9) bark. Amongst the

replies received were some from the area now under our consideration, To avoid

repetition of the English names, they will be indicated ‘by the appropriate numbers.

Jacobs (in Curr 1886, 14-15) gave the following terms as used by tribes on

the north shore of Lake Eyre: (1) kuttu, (2) kuju, (5) stharranamma

[?ngarrananima!, (8) pinta. Paull (pp. 18-21) gave a short vocabulary of the

Ominie [Ngameni| tribe trom the Warburton River region and included:

(1) kanta, (2) kaltee, (5) pirramurra, (7) keera, (8) moolya, (9) pitchee; also

chisel, tula; throwing stick, preeta; and mentioned the use of nardoo, pitcheree,

and mindree gum, as well as the utilisation of rushes for making mats. Cornish

(pp. 22-23) gave a different set of terms, also from the Warburton River, but

presumably from the territory occupied by another tribe: (1) chilpa; (2) wonna,

(3) kutchie, (4) munkoorara, (5) mooloowarroo, (8) mucka, (9) pitchamooroo.

Salmon (pp. 24-27) fron. Koongi Lake, Cooper’s Creek [Yauraworka tribe}:

(1) poka, (2) windra, (4) yarra, (5) narratitta, (6) mudramoodipa, (7) yarra-

koodakoodari, (8) wottee, (9) dallamurroo; canoe, ukobichi; pitcheree, ash

{toorpa) obtained from leaves of gum tree; gum tree, yallawarroo |? Eucalyptis

rostrata|; boxtree, kulparoo [#. atcrotheca]; fishing net, peerly [pi-li, bi-lij.

Cornish (pp. 28-29) gave the following names from the Yowerawoolka tribe

[| Yauraworka|: (1) kuntha, (2) winara, (4) munkoorara, (5) narateta, (8)

mukka, (9) delamooroo. Howitt (pp. 30-31) mentioned: (6) bomaiko | konmi-

yakoo in Wells, 1894], and (8) pattara from near Iunamincka. Jacobs (pp. 108-

109) reported from Kopperamana [Dieri and Wonkanguru]: (1) kanta,

(2) kalti, (4) kuckuru, (6) karlara, (8) pita, (9) pitji. Warren (p. 112) men-

tioned peuda as the fruit of the pigface [Mesembryanthemum aequilaterale| at

Strangway Springs [Arabana tribe]. Kingsmill (120-121) gave: (1) thuthara,

(2) wardlata, (3) kidehic, (5) muala, waroo, (6) bome, yackoo [obviously mis-

print for bomee yackoo, Howitt’s bomiako, Wells’ kommiyakoo|, (8), curdla,

(9) coorkieleinga, from the Kooyianme | Kuiyani|] tribe at Beltana. Phillipson

(112-113) mentioned that at Umbertana [Umbcratana; probably Wailpi tribe]

the natives ground into flour the seeds of silver wattle [.dcacia rivalis| and of

bower grass [paua, bow-a, applicd to any grass with edible seeds|; (1) yuta,

(2) winda, (3) teepara, (7) waldua, (8) nutchoo, (9) beetetee; throwing stick,

weeanderloo, For the Unyamootha tribe [Anyaniutna = Wailpi] Gason (122-

123) gave: (1) yoothera, (2) winda, (5) thippira, (6) adgna |= stone],

(7) wanna, (8) urla, (9) pithadie. Wills (116-117) reported for the Tura or

iura tribe, Mount Serle [probably a clan of the Wailpi, which tribe Gason (in

Curr, p. 119) called Wipie]: (1) uta, (2) wurlata, (4) woonrara, (8) wittie.

(9) bidthati.

In a short paper Browne (1897), in writing of the natives of “the lower

north” of South Australia gaye an account of their method of cooking cress.

Lepidium rudcrale, by means of steaming; and of the treatment of rushes,

Juncus sp., to obtain from them fibre to be rolled into string; and also of the

utilisation of leaves and stems of Xerotes cffusa [Lomandra effusa| for suffocat-

ing kangaroo rats (bokra) in their burrows in such a way that these marsupials

could be easily reached by the natives. It scems probable that the region referred

to was near, or south of, the southern Vlinders Range, and that the tribe was

the Ngadjuri. ‘The species of rush may have been either Cyperus vaginatus or

Juncus sp.

Mrs. Duncan-Kemp’s observations (1933) were centred on Moorabetrie,

between Farrar Creek and the Diamantina, about 120 miles north-east of Birds-

ville. Her book contains, scattered through it, many references to the use made

by local natives of the vegetation of the area. Since they are likely to escape

scientific notice and since they relate to the region adjacent to that which we

169

investigated, such references are now incorporated in our paper, The local tribes

were messmates of the Pitta Pitta and included among'st others, the Murranudda,

Karanya, Kooridala, Ooloopsoloo and Mittaka. ‘The last-named bordered on the

Yelyuyendi (Yalliandra in Duncan-Kemp, p. 190), whose territory included Pandi.

Some of the information is similar ta that given by Roth (1897).

The method of preparation of nardoo was mentioned (p. 261), Nardoo

flour was stored in small dilly bags until needed and was stated to be an article

bartered along the trade routes (p. 208).

References to Gramineae are as follows: munta, edible seeds obtained from

ants’ nests [probably seeds of the grasses Ductyloctenium radulans and Panicwn

decompositian | (p. 117); pindi, Mitchell grass [Astrebla pectinata| (p. 61);

wiunjee, apparently a se term for grass (p. 147); patti, hard-baked slab or

cake made from grass seeds aud stored under stones for future emergency (p. 56);

method of winnowing, cleaning and grinding seed food (p. 84) [method sin ar

to that described by Roth (1897, 91) for “star grass,” Dactyloctention aegyptivn

= 1). radilans, native name vataka|; spinifex[Triodia, probably pungens| pil-

verised on a flat hearth-stone to extract gum: (kunta) (p. 79); katoora, seed ot

barley grass traded from the north and north-east [Bailey, 1912, 624, and Roth,

1897, O1, stated that katoora was Sporobolus actinocladus|. Iatoora was used

for ceremonial purposes, being ground along with a crude flour made from pul-

verised dried fish obtained from permanent waterholes (p. 147); necklets made

from grass (p, 146) and worn by women at corroborees; heeb, rope made from

grass (p. 130); mungkora, dilly bag used for storing meal and made of woven

grass or reeds (p. 238, 261) : dried grass or leaves ised for making signal fires.

the kind of smoke ditfering according to the plants used (p. 198) ; fibre made

from a “brown river grass” [? Themeda triandra] in the same way as from native

flax [Crotalaria spp. Palmer (1884, 109) mentioned that the grasses, Panicua

leueophewmn and P. trachyrachis produced fibre which was used by the natives of

the Cloncurry and Mitchell Rivers, Queensland} ; a native when spying could

travel or remain for hours under water by using as an air-pipe a hollow reed

inserted into the mouth, the nostrils having been plugged (p. 206). Nutgrass

[Cyperus bulbosus; Bailey (1912, 591) gave C. esculentits, now eatin a

synonym of C. bulbosus, as the mungaru of Western Queensland | edibie, was

called mungaroo (p. 29); talculli, sweet onion bulbs [Budbine sp.| from sandhills,

edible (p. 69).

Among the Proteaceae, mention was made of the water-storing capacity of

the roots of needle bush, pinta-murri (p. 73) [Fakea leucoptera|; shields and

coolamons were obtained from corkwood |Hakea Ivorvi| (p. 218. 291). Many

uses were found for the coolebah [Eucalyptus microtheca]. native name karabadi

(p. 261) ; timber was used for firewood and firesticks (p. 229), for making mes-

sage sticks (p. 196) and large coolamons (koordoo); the seed, termed karapari

(p. 261), was crushed and converted into damper (patti); and the Pitter ‘aise was

also utilised, Eucalyptus leaves were used medicinally (p. 224): hate

about six feet deep was excavated and lined with these leaves; layers of very hot

stones were placed in the hole, and when the desired temperature was reached

these stones were removed; the patient. wrapped in an emu-skin blanket (mul-

tara), was taken to the hale, stripped naked. placed in the bed and cavered io the

neck with warm sand and eucalyptus leaves, remaining there for 10-15 minutes;

he was then covered in the emu-skin and taken back to camp, the whole procedure

being carried out under instructions front a “medicine man” (nulunjera).

Acacias were utilised extensively, One kind (poo-ka-ti-ka) supplied the ash

used in preparing piturt (p. 221). [Roth (1897, 100) gave the same term, but

later (1901, 31) called it pukartika, identifying it as Acacia hakeoides.| Vhe wood

of mulga, gidgee and minnareechie was used for making clubs and nulla-nttllas

170

(p. 213). The Jast-named tree is the red-barked or ringed gidgee (p. 131, 262)

| A. evperophylla|, whose timber was used tor making long churingas, boomerangs

and spears. Gidgee [4. Cambayer| supplied a bitter gum (p. 75); its wood was

used jor message sticks, short hunting spears, boomerangs and nulla-nullas (p. 197,

211, 212), for forming the framework of huts (p. 244), and for firewood and

firesticks. LEdible grubs were obtained from the roots of species of Acacia and

senna [Cassia spp.| (p. 256), as well as from the wild broom [Cassia spp.|,

grubs from the last-named being termed parootra boontt [hoondi is applied else-

where to Cassia spp.]. From Baultinia |B. Carronii| were made large shields

(worra) ; from the stems, scored by women as the rainy season approached, a

sweet cdible sap (minni) or gum was collected after rain (p. 75); and its blos-

soms were pounded in a coolamon and the liquid drained into another receptacle,

mixed with “honey” from the “sugarbag” or honey ant (cerumba teeta; teeta =

ant), the mixture being allowed to ferment for 8-10 days when a sem1-intoxicating

liquor was obtained (p. 76). Whitewood gum |Afalaya henuglauca| was cou-

sidered to be a poor substitute for that from Bauhinia. The succulent parakeelya

{Calandrinia| was chewed by natives when short of water (p. 74). Seeds of pig-

weed |Portulaca oleracea|, kooni, and of an allied species, curda, were eaten

(p. 69). Amongst edible fruits were the quandong [Santalum lanceolatum |,

which was pounded and made into a damper and baked but which was sometimes

eaten raw (p. 156); jilleroo, a red fruit from the sandhills [? Enchylaena tomen-

tosa; this name is applied at Mount Lyndhurst to Rhagodia spinescens, a related

saltbush] ; and “wild orange,” wombunye [Roth (1897, 93) identified the plant as

cltalantia glaucd—ie., the native cumquat of Bailey 1912]. [Edible roots were

yams, mootchery (p. 259) from the sandhills [/pomoea heterophylla| ; witooka

| Boerhavia diffusa, Roth, 1897, 92]; and yalka, a thick parsmp-like root [possibly

igna lanceolata] which was roasted in the ashes (p. 69). Plants eaten raw

included parakeelya; wild spinach [Tefragonia expansa|, bogil-a-ri (p. 29);

wooliteha (p, 69), mustard plant |? Stenopelalum or Lepidiuim| caten with meat ;

stalks of wild geranium or crowsfoot (p. 69) |Eredinm cygnuorum| ; and truffle.

wiididna (p. 260) [NMymenogastraceac, Lydnanginn glabrellan (4. & D),

apparently the same kind as that referred to by Roth, 1897, 93], Piturt is fre-

quently meutioned. Several plants were used for their reputed medicinal

qualities ©) :—the leaves and pods of the “shooting grass” or “scurvy grass”

[Commelint ensifolia, according to Bailey, 1912, 561] are boiled and caten ke

cabbages (p. 14); pennyroyal [Mentha australis|, pookankudye (p. 129) [drunk

as a decoction for coughs and colds, according to Roth who also stated that

strongly scented plants were used for “sniffing at” in cases of headaches (1897,

163) |; eucalyptus leaves for making a “sweating bath” (p. 224), referred to

previously; warmed mashed leaves of ecucalypts and kudges [? gidgee, sicucia

Caimbagei| placed on a pad of soft bark and then applied over a wound and tied

in place with strips of soft bark (p. 248); astringent herbs and mud applied to

stop bleeding wounds, or the latter were painted with the ‘‘white mill of the caustic

bush” [Sarcostemma australe|: pitttri was chewed by young male untiates i

order to deaden pain inflicted during certain ceremonies (p. 240); a plaster of

mud and leaves was tused to support a fractured arm (p. 270); the syrup from

‘wild strawberry vine” |? Melothria madcraspatana| was drunk in case of

dysentery; the red sap of the wild pear tree was used for gastric disorders; and a

warned poultice of mashed vine leaves was applied to swollen parts (p. 270)

| Roth (1879, 162) mentioned having seen pounded boxtree bark (Luculyplus

() Palmer (1884, 105-108) mentioned many species of plants used for medicinal pur-

poses by Queenslaud aborigines. Schulze (1891, 229) stated that Aranda natives drank con-

coetions of leaves or bark or whole plants as medicine, those utilised ineluding Callitris werru-

ae eleacta sentis [4l. Victoriue|, 1, strophiolata, Stemodia, Cynanchinn floribundum, and

others.

171

mucrotheca) soaked in hot water and then held against the affected part for a bad

headache|; wounds were packed with leaves and thick black mud, poolka

(p. 199, 222).

From the fruit of the “emu apple” [Owenia acidula], as well as from the

roots and berries of various plants, colours used for corroborees were obtained

(p. 75). Wild hop [Dodonaca attenuata] was used for decoration and for making

a frothy drink (p. 76). A musical instrument, dejeridu, was made from wood

(p. 149). Game was sometimes wrapped in leaves before cooking (p. 252), A

kind of grid or wooden cradle, poo- tee-poo-tee-ya, was used for ‘drying meat M1

the su (p. 280). Vhe “old man” saltbush [Atriplex numimularium | was avoided

at seed-time by women, for fear of impregnation (p. 77). Flax (kalo) was used

for making dilly bags, fish nets and emu nets (p. 112) [the description indicates

Psoralea patens|. The leaves of an evil-smelling creeping plant |? Chenopodium

sp. or ore of the Compositae, e.g., Centipeda Cunninghamu| from the sandhills

were placed around camping places to repel ants (p. 202). There are many

references to the making of wurlies or breakwinds of boughs, and of rain huts

(koo-rou-i), winter huts (unna-kud-ye), and humpics, by using timber, grass,

bark, grass twine, leaves and sand (p. 79, 131, 228, 244). Vepetation was used

in making game traps, e.g., bough alleyways (yelka-yelka) for emus and kan-

garoos, and mokwarl or pigeon traps [both kinds described by Roth, 1897,

p. 97-98|. The dead were cither placed on a platform of sticks or were w caput

im sheets of bark, placed on the ground, and then coveted with boughs and logs,

the grave covering being termed mocroo kumbo, 7.c., death sticks (p. 233). The

mourning caps (tnungawarra or pata-smarro) made of gypsum [burnt and thea

ground into a powder termed kopi, if for general use, or pata when used for

mourning; warru = white, mung = forehead| and worn by women were some-

times adorned with leaves of gidgce or Bauhinia (p. 232). Boughs and stakes

were utilised to make palisades (erulli) and lighter screens (kelpi) which were.

used during various stages in initiation ceremonics (p. 239).

Our present paper contains several native names given for “flax” and the

plants frem which it is obtained. Apart from grasses, the list includes

Cyperaceae (and perhaps Juncaceac), Legummosae and Asclepiadaceae. The

Malvaceae may also be concerned since Lavetera plebeja, common along the banks

of the Diamantina and other watercourses, was reported by us (1939) to be used

as a source of fibre in the Northern Flinders Ranges; and Sida virgata belongs to

a genus containing fibre plants. The Cyperaceae are represented by C. vaginatis

and perhaps C. distachyus (= C. laevigatus).

We received the name ka-lo (t¢., flax) for Psoralea patens as well as for

Crolalaria spp. Stirling and Waite referred to karla as a rush, but we have

suggested that the word should be karla or kadla, which means a rush. From

rushes (Cyperus spp.} a coarse fibre was obtained but a more valuable material

(ka-lo) was made from Crotalaria and Psoralea patens, Since we obtained the

naine boonkoodoo for Cassia eremophila, Stirling and Waite’s punku and

punkudu may have referred to it, unless the Cassia had been mistaken [or Creta-

laria dissitifiora. Roth (1897, 94) mentioned that large and small fishing nets

were made from some sort of native flax (ka-lo of the Pitta Pitta tribes) which

he thought might be Lina marginale A. Cunn. He also stated (p. 103) that ka-lo

was used for making dilly bags and was obtained from a “beautiful, though

common, blue-flowered native fax,’ and that another kind of fibre was obtained

from a plant called munji growing to a height of about two fect, with yellow

flowers, and found in the sandhills west of Boulia. He gave an account of the

method of making kalo flax. Roth (1901, 31) subsequently mentioned that native

flax was a Psoralea, Palmer (1884, 110) had already recorded that P. Archerii,

172

termed wonmo, was a fibre-producer in the Cloncurry River region. Roth’s munji

was almost certainly a Crotalaria, Bailey (1912, 132) stated that all kinds of

Crotalaria yielded good fibre, and amongst many species occurring in Queensland

he mentioned C. Cunninghantii and C, dissitiflora, to both of which we know the

term ka-lo is applied in the Diamantina area. Bailey (p. 136) did not refer to any

Oucensland species of Psoralea as being used as a fibre plant, though P. patens

occurs there.

Gason gave mootcha as the name of the native cotton bush from whose dry

stems fibre was obtained. Jlowitt (1904) mentioned kangua as flax, and gave

duntyi as the name of Crotalaria [C, dissitiflora]. Stirling and Waite (1919)

referred to wulpu as flax and as the plant, and to punkutu as flax from the punku

plant; duntji was mentioned without comment. Horne and Aiston (1924), and

Aiston (1937) referred to fibre from wadnoarie, a verbena, but we have already

indicated that they were dealing with Psoralea patens whose minute coloured

flowers are, at first sight, apt to suggest a verbena. These authors (1924, 6/,

fig. 53-55) gave an account of the method of preparation of the fibre from the dry

stalks, They also stated that fibre was obtained from a plant in the sandhills.

Cleland, Black, and Reese (1925) referred to Crotalaria Cunningham and

C. dissitiflora (kalo), as well as Cynanchin floribundum (weela) as plants from

which natives manufactured string, Gason’s mootcha is Cynanchum floribundum.

We suggest that Stirling and Waite’s wulpu may refer to the same species, and

that their punku and punkudu may belong to Crotalaria dissitiflora,

LITERATURE

Aiston, G. 1937 Oceania, 7, (3), 372-377

Saitey, F. M, 1912 Comprehensive Catalogue of the Flora of Queensland,

Brisbane (no date)

3ancrort, T. L. 1884 Proc. Roy. Soc. Qld., 1, (3), 104-107

Baxcrort, T. L. 1893 Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 18, (1894), 215-217

BasEepow, H, 1925 The Australian Aboriginal, Adelaide

Bernpt, R. M., and Vocrtsane, T. 1939 ‘Trans. Roy Soc. S. Aust., 63, 167-

171

Brrnept, R. M., and VocersaAnc, T. 1941 Rec. 5. Aust. Mus., 6, (4), 369-380

3erNpt, R. M., and Vocersanc, T, 1941a Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 65, 3-10

3LAcK, J. M. 1922-1929 Flora of South Australia, (1-4), Adelaide

BLakkr, S. T. 1942 Dept. Biology, Univ, of Qld., 2, (2), 14 pp.

Browne, J. H, 1897 Trans. Roy. Soc., 21, 72-73

CLELAND, J. B., Brack, J. M., and Ruesz, L. 1925 Trans. Roy. Soc. 5S. Aust.,

49, 103-120

CieLanp, J. B., and Jounsron, T. H. 1936 Jour, Trop. Med. Hyg., 39, (9),

104-105

Cievanp, J. B., and Jounston, T. II. 1939 Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 63,

172-179

Curr, E. M. 1886 The Australian Race, 2, Melbourne

Duncan-Kemp, A. M. 1933 Our Sandhill Country, Sydney

Terkmn, A. P, 1937 Oceania, 7, 275-299

Exixiy, A. P. 1938 The Australian Aborigines, Sydney

EEvtMANN, E. 1908 Die Eingeborenen der Kolonie Siidaustralien, Berlin

Fenver, F. J. 1936 Trans. Roy. Soc. $. Aust., 60, 46-54

Gason, 8. 1874 The Dieyerie Tribe of Australian Aborigines, Adelaide

Gason, S. 1879 The Manners and Customs of the Dieyerie Tribe of Austra-

lian Aborigines. In Woops, J. D., 1879 253-307 Same as Gason, 1874

Gason, S 1886 From Mount Freeling to Perigundi Lake. In Curr, E. M.

1886 44-105 Same as Gason, 1874

173

Grecory, J. W. 1906 The Dead Heart of Australia, London

Hace, 1]. M., and Tinpave, N. B. 1925 Ree. S, Aust. Mus., 3, (1), 45-60

Hetms, R. 1896 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 16, (3), 237-386

Horyg, G., and Alston, G. 1924 Savage Life in Central Australia, London

llowitr, A. W. 1878 Notes on the Aborigines of Cooper’s Creek. In R.

Brovett Smytu, Aborigines of Victoria, 2, 300-309

Howitt, A. W. 1891) Jour. Anthrop. Inst., 20, 30-104

Howirt, A. W. 1904 The Native Tribes of South-East Australia, London

Howitt, A. W. and Sreperr, O. 1903 Rep. Aust. Assoc, Ady. Sei., 9, (1902),

525-532

Jounsron, T. IL, and Creranp, J. B. 1933 Oceania, 4, (2), 201-223

Jounston, T. H., and Cierann, J. B. 1934 Oceania, 4, (3), 268-289

Kocu, M. 1898 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 22, 101-118

Patmer, E, 1884 Jour. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 17, (1883), 93-113

Rory, W. E. 1897 Ethnological Studies among the North-west-central Queens-

land Aborigines, Brishane

Rotrn, W. E. 1901 Food, its Search, Capture and Preparation, Nth. Qld. Ethno-

graphy, Bull. 3, Govt. Printer, Brisbane

Scnmunzr, L. 1891 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 14, 210-246

STIRLING, E., and Warrre, E.R. 1919 Rec. S. Aust. Mus.. 1, (2), 105-155

Tinpare, N. B. 1940 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 64, 140-231

Warre, E.R. 1917 Trans. Roy, Soc. S, Aust., 41, 429-430

Wetts, F. H. 1894 Rep. Aust. Assoc. Adv. Sci., 5, (1893), 515-522

Woops, J. D. 1879 The Native Tribes of South Australia (Edited by J. D.

Woods). Adelaide

Wholly set up and printed in Australia by Gillingham & Co. Limited, 106 Currie\ Street, Adelaide

VOL. 67 PART 2 30 NOVEMBER 1943

BERNARD C. COTTON,

166 WELLINGTON ROD., ADELAIDE,

SOUTH AUSTRALIA.

TRANSACTIONS OF

THE ROYAL SOCIETY

OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

INCORPORATED

ADELAIDE

PUBLISHED AND SOLD AT THE SOCIETY’S. ROOMS

-KINTORE AVENUE, ADELAIDE

Price - ‘- Twelve Shillings and Sixpence

Registered at the General Post Office, Adelaide,

for transmission by post as a periodical

AUSTRALIAN SHELLS OF THE FAMILY HALIOTIDAE

By BERNARD C. COTTON, South Australian Museum

Summary

Australia and New Zealand have the bulk of the world’s species of the interesting family Haliotidae,

commonly known in various parts of the world as Mutton Fish, Sea Ears, Ormers, Abalones,

Awabi, Pauas, and Venus Ears. Before attempting to classify the family generically it is necessary

to determine the genotype of the type genus Haliotis, which is a problem presenting considerable

difficulties. The original description of Haliotis Linne 1758 is followed by the specific description

of the species H. midae Linne 1758, without locality, though it is the well-known and peculiar shell

found commonly in South Africa. This is the species accepted by Thiele, Handbuck der

Systematischen Weichtierkunde, p. 29, 1929, as genotype. The next species listed by Linne is the

well known European H. tuberculata Linne 1758, which has also been regarded by certain writers

as the genotype. Montfort, Conchyliologie Systematique, 2, 119, 1810, gives H. asinina Linne 1758

as the typical species, a course which is followed by Winckworth, Journal Conchology, 19, (7), 218.

It seems that H. midac has first claim to be quoted as genotype of the genus Haliotis.

175

AUSTRALIAN SHELLS OF THE FAMILY HALIOTIDAE

By Bernarp C. Corron, South Australian Museum

[Read 12 August 1943]

PLATES XX To XXV

Australia and New Zealand have the bulk of the world’s species of the

interesting family Haliotidae, commonly known in various parts of the world as

Mutton Fish, Sea Ears, Ormers, Abalones, Awalbi, Pauas, and Venus Ears.

Before attempting to classify the family generically it is necessary to determine

the genotype of the type genus Haltotis, which is a problem presenting consider-

able difficulties, The original description of Haliotis L.inne 1758 is followed by

the specific description of the species H. midae Linne 1758, without locality,

though it is the well-known and peculiar shell found commonly in South Africa.

This is the species accepted by Thiele, Handbuch der Systematischen Weichtier-

kunde, p. 29, 1929, as genotype. The next species listed by Linne is the well-

known European A. tuberculuta inne 1758, which has also been regarded by cer-

tain writers as the genotype. Montfort, Conchyliologie Systematique, 2, 119, 1810,

gives H. asinina |.inne 1758 as the typical species, a course which is followed by

Winckworth, Journal Conchology, 19, (7), 218. It seems that A. aiidae has first

claim to be quoted as genotype of the genus Haliotis.

Haliotis australis Gmelin 1791 was recorded by Menke from Western Aus-

tralia in error, as. it is the well-known species widely distributed in New Zealand

and bears no resemblance to any Australian species. Haliotis pulcherrinua Martyn

1784 was reported from King George Sound also in error. Two young shells

mounted on a tablet from the May Collection bear the locality “Australia.” They are

typical, but in all probability there has been, a mistake in the locality, as the species

is only known from the Polynesian Region,

Key To AUSTRALIAN GENERA

a. Shell rounded.

b. Orifices small and not conical.

ec. Shell smooth and large and medium height om ery Schismiotis

ec. Shell spirally lirate, small, high and circular “t enn Exohaliatis

bb. Orifices large and conical,

d. Dorsal surface with corded spirals.

e. Raised and prominent dorsal rib ; dee oi AMarinauris

ee. No raised and prominent dorsal rib... _ Ah Natohatliotis

dd. Dorsal surface tuberculate ren ; o, Jounoatis

aa. Shell very elongate ear-shaped | . . ” Veinotis

ScHIsmoTIS Gray 1856

(Pl. xx)

Genotype, Haliolis excisa Gray 1856. A species based on a specimen which is a

monstrosity with the perforations counceted by a slit. Locality, ?.

This species was previously named albicans Quoy and Gaimard 1834, King

George Sound, Western Australia. Haliotis laevigata Donovan 1808 is a still

carlier name which may apply to this species but it is based on a figure without

description or locality. ‘The figure appeared in Rees’ Encyclopaedia, November 1

1808, pl. vi of the Conchological series, and this was referred to by Ircdale in

Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1924, p. 222, The Encyclopaedia is not obtainable in

south Australia but the Public Library of Melbourne has it and a photostat of

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 67, (2), 30 November 1943

176

the plate is here reproduced to provide students with the record of this species.

In South Australia the species grows bigger and heavier than any other and indeed

is the largest species in Australia, if not in the world. A specimen from Anxious

Bay, South Australia, measures 200 mm, x 155 mm. x 60 mm, Another from

Robe measures 150 mm, x 150 mm, x 75 mm., and is a particularly high specimen.

‘The species is found mm deeper water and on open ocean beaches in the South-

[ast and Southern Yorke Peninsula where, at the latter place, one farmer uses it

as a scoop for removing the sandy soil from post-holes. It is also a common

object on the native camp sites which abound in that district. It is rarer in the Gulf

St. Vincent, where it is usually of a smaller size and uniformly white, even in the

juvenile, From Yorke Peninsula westwards the young, and sometimes specimens

approaching adult size, are decorated, with irregular, alternate red and white radial

flames, and the common ‘Bonnet Limpet,” Sabia conica Schumacher 1817, is

frequently attached to the dorsal surface of the body whorl. The orifices are very

small and are connected by a weak groove and in beach rolled specimens or even

well worn living specimens this may be eroded through to form a slit, a condition

seen in the monstrosity S. ercisa Gray. It is recorded from throughout the Flin-

dersian Region,

Tetnotis Adams 1854

Genotype, Haliotis asinina Linne 1758, “Indian Ocean.”

The genus was introduced for the species IJaliotis asinina Linne, which has

an clongate shell with large aperture and the animal has a large foot. It is widely

distributed in the Pacific and on the Northern Australian coasts. We have it from

North West Islet (Kimber) and Murray Island, North Australia (A. M. Lea).

As explained previously, Montfort 1810 cited this species as type of Haliofis, but

Adams pointed out in introducing his genus that asimina is the genotype of the

Haliotis of Montfort 1810 and not of the true Haliofis Linne 1758.

Exouarrotis Cotton and Godfrey 1933

(Pi. xxiv, fig. 3)

Genotype, Haliotis cyclobates Peron 1816, Kangaroo Island—excavata Lamarck

1822, “Australia” (= South Australia).

This peculiar round, elevated species is confined to the eastern end of the Flin-

dersian Region and no specimen, or fragment can be found in the Verco Western

Australian material. It is quite common in South Australia and is found from

streaky Bay to the South-East. A large specimen from Venus Bay (Weeding)

measures 90 mm. x 75 mm, x 50 mm. The colour may be quite bright of a pale

greenish background crossed by radial red and white stripes, or the shell may be

unicoloured creanush-white. One specimen has the former colouration at first and

then, after a repaired break in the body whorl, the pattern becomes abruptly

unicoloured. The radula from a South Australian specimen shows some differ-

ences from that of Marinauris roei, the most notable being the narrower central

tooth. A specimen from Corny Point, South Australia, is figured here.

Notromaxiors Cotton and Godfrey 1938

Genotype, Haliotis ruber Leach 1814, New South Wales.

Shells of this genus are usually large and have not the raised spiral rib of

Marinauris. The species here placed under this genus are somewhat varied and

may be arranged in two groups. There is the genotype with its associates

waprobula and coccoradiatum which tend to be elongate and raised dorsally.

Then there is the conicupora-vixlirata type which is rounder, has a depressed

dorsum and somewhat cxert spire.

177

NoTOHALIOTIS CoccoRADIATUM Reeve 1846

Type locality, “St. Vincent and Spencer Gulfs” = Port Jackson, New South Wales.

This is the well-known species which is found at Port Jackson, New South

Wales, and has been also recorded from Tellaburga Island, Victoria, It is not

found in South Australia or the Flindersian Region and is certainly confined to

the Peronian. It is a much smaller species than ruber.

NoroHaLiotis contcopora Peron 1816

(Pl. xxi)

Type locality, Pelican ].agoon, Kangaroo Island, South Australia.

Shell large, round, dorsal surface of body whorl depressed, spire prominent ;

spirally scabrously corded and irregularly axially undulate ; orifices prominent and

conical.

There is little doubt but that grawtz Pritchard and CGatliff, gigantea Menke

and cunninghami Gray are synonyms, the species being well figured by Reeve under

the last name from what appears to be almost certainly a South Australian speci-

men. A specimen from Guichen Bay, South-East South Australia, is here figured,

and the size and locality records of some other Southern Australian specimens

given, in millimetres.

Max. Diam. Min. Diam. Height

Beachport are a 175 135 43 Adult

Kangaroo Island ey 156 125 35 Adult

Middleton tel re! 105 90 25

Guichen Bay... 7 100 75 23

Guichen Bay .... ear: 140 110 37 Specimen Figured

Kangaroo Island oe 95 75 23

St. Francis Island... 72 55 17

Victoria a A 140 110 35

Victoria te mis 140 115 39

From N. improbula and ruber the present species is distinguished by the

depressed dorsal surface, prominent spire and rounder shell.

Notohaliotis vixlirata sp. nov.

(PI. xxii)

Ellenbrook, Western Australia. Holotype, D. 7962.

Shell large, dorsal surface depressed, spire elevated, orifices prominent and

conical ; spiral lirae very fine in the early stages of growth and obsolete in the later

and adult stages when the accremental striae become more and more valid with

age until they are strongly marked; no irregular axial ribs as in conicopora,

though in general shape and size recalling that species. Major diameter 178 mm.,

minor 140 mm., height 51 mm. ‘his species is readily separated from conicopora

by the lack of both the strong scabrous spiral cords in the adult and the axial

irregular undulations. The holotype specimen bearing the above name has been

on exhibition in the South Australian Museum shell gallery since 1930. We have

specimens in various stages of growth, from Albany and Esperance.

NOTOIMALIOTIS IMPROBULA Iredale 1924

(Pl, xxiii)

‘Type locality, Port Fairy, western Victoria.

This species is undoubtedly closely allied to N. ruber. It differs in being more

elongate, less tightly coiled showing the whorling inside, and having coarser sculp-

ture as pointed out in the original description. In addition the Flindersian specimens

attain to a larger size, a fully grown specimen from Beachport, South Australia,

figured here, having the following measurements; maximum diameter 180 mm.,

178

minimum diameter 140 mm., height 50 mm. The species is widely distributed and

common in the Flindersian Region, living specimens being always obtainable at

such places as Marino Rocks, South Australia, between tide marks, The animal

varies somewhat in the colouration of the foot, which on the under-surface may

be sometimes predominately cream-coloured in the median area, and at other times

predominately dark greyish-brown. It is active and will move about comparatively

quickly on the immer glass surface of a marine aquarium jar.

NOTOHALIOTIS RUBER Leach 1814

Type locality, New Ilolland (= Port Jackson, New South Wales).

Haliotis naevosa Martyn 1784 is a synonym, but invalid as Martyn’s work

was not binenual. A Tasmanian shell from the May Collection bears the label:

“Haliotis naevosa Martyn = tubifera Lamarck” and is undoubtedly N. ruber.

This specimen agrees in size with tubifera Lamarck, but the meagre description

of the species could apply equally well to conicopora as that species is recognised

in this paper, but not as Iredale interprets it as of the group now called Marinaurts.

In any case tubifera will not be used in Australian lists, as it is apparently a

synonym of ruber or conicopora, Vurthermore, there is no suggestion in the

original description that the species has anything to do with the genus Marinauris,

It can only apply to a species of Notohaliotis. The type locality given by Lamarck

for tubifera is “New Holland,” but Iredale thinks Southern Tasmania may be the

locality.

DSANHALIOTIS Iredale 1929

Genotype, Haltotis varia Linne 1758. Locality, ? (= Philippine Islands).

Species are Sansialiotis aliena Iredale 1929, Queensland, which we have from

Groote Eylandt, Gulf of Carpentaria (Tindale) and North-West Islet, Capricorn

Group (Kimber) ; howensts Iredale 1929, Lord ]lowe Island; hanleyi Ancey 1881,

New Caledonia; crebresculpta Sowerby 1914, New Caledonia; dissona Iredale

1929, Michaelmas Quay, Queensland. In addition the following four species may

also belong to this genus.

SANIIALIOTIS SQUAMATA Reeve 1846

Type locality, North-west Coast of Australia.

This Dampicrian species is closely allied. to the next, fiemebris Reeve, though

the author states that: “This is a larger and flatter specics than the H. squaniata

and the ridges (spiral) are more widely separated and less squamate.” We have

a specimen from Shark Bay, Western Australia, which is probably its southern

limit.

SANIIALIOTIS FUNEBRIS Reeve 1846

Type locality, New Holland.

This species may be found only in South Western Australia, and is de-

finttely recorded from Swan River, Western Australia, which according to Hedley

is the locality placed on the specimen in the South Kensington Museum. There

is little doubt but that diversicolor Reeve 1846, New Holland, and tayloriana

Reeve 1846 Hab.? are synonyins over which fusebris has page priority. Inci-

dentally, if squamata should prove synonymous it has priority over funebris.

SANHALIOTIS ASTRICTA Reeve 1846

Type locality, “Hab. ?”

This species appears in Hedley’s “Tist of Marine Mollusea of Queensland,”

and the specimens in the South Australian Museum are from Port Darwin. It is

probably a Dampierian species extending into the Banksian, but we have neither

Queensland nor Western Australian specimens.

179

SANHALIOTIS ELEGANS Philippi 1899

Type locality, Western Australia.

Reeve quotes Port Adelaide, New Holland, but it has never been taken in

South Australia. Our Western Australian specimens are typical and come from

Rottnest Island. Verco, in his notes, states “Shark Bay (Henn.)” but I have not

seen specimens from there. This is probably a Dampierian species ranging up to

Northern Australia, Jt is placed in this genus although the elongate shape and

terminal spire suggest that it should be separated under a distinct genus.

Marinauris Iredale 1927

(Pl. xxiv, fig. 1-2; pl. xxv, fig. 1-3)

Genotype Marinauris melculus Iredale 1927, Caloundra, Queensland = Neo-

haliotis Cotton and Godfrey 1938, genotype Hoalietis scalaris Leach 1814,

South Western Australia.

The genus may be described as follows:—Shell of medium size, flattened,

circular, spire subcentral, slightly elevated; sculpture of more or less developed

spiral cords and sometimes axial folds and a tendency to the development of a

spiral median dorsal rib; orifice close and somewhat tubular; columellar plate

wide and flat; internal colouration silvery, all whorls exposed. Distribution: all

around the Australian and Tasmanian coastline, The radula of Marinauris roei

Gray is here figured and shows the remarkably wide central tooth which may be

typical of this genus. A specimen of the shell from Arno Bay, South Australia,

where it is common, is also figured.

The genus Padollus Montfort 1810 has for its genotype Haliotis rubicundus

Bolten 1798, which is probably the same species as parva Linne 1758 from South

Africa, Sulculus Adams 1854 has Haliotis incisa Reeve, “Habitat?” for geno-

type, since this is the first species listed after the description of the genus. Also

in the list is parva. The generic description furthermore leaves little doubt but

that this genus is a direct synonym of Padollus, Padollis is therefore available

for the African species which are small, depressed, and have a prominent spiral

rounded rib on the dorsum, a fact which was mentioned by Iredale when he imtro-

duced Marinauris. Species belonging to this genus are: Marinauris melculus

Iredale 1927, Caloundra, Queensland ; ethologus Iredale 1927, Caloundra, Queens-

land; hargravesi Cox 1869, New South Wales, rare; bragieri Angas 1869, New

South Wales; roei Gray 1826, South Western Australia = scabricostata Menke

1843, Mistaken Island, a species we have from Shark Bay (Ashby); scalaris

Leach 1814, South Western Australia = rubicundus Gray 1826 (preoce. rubi-

cundus Bolten 1798) == tricostalis Menke 1843, South Western Australia, figured

here is a young example from Leven’s Reach, South Australia, and an adult from

Corny Point; cmmac Reeve 1846, “New Holland” (= South Australia), a closely

allied species confined to the eastern end of the Flindersian Region, figured Here

from the Gulf St. Vincent.

Ovinotis gen. nov.

Genotype Haliotis ovina Gmelin 1791, habitat?

Reeve records this species from New Holland and the Philippine Islands.

We have specimens from Torres Strait, North Australia, Murray Island and Lady

Elliot Island (Lea).

Shell orbicularly oval, spire depressed, whorls plicately rayed with swollen

wrinkles or knobs, orifices conical. Reeve remarks of this species: “‘An extremely

characteristic species . . . . neither Lamarck or Deshayes seem to have been

acquainted with it.” H. concinna Reeve 1846, from the Philippine Islands, also

belongs here.

180

OVINOTIS DRINGI (Reeve 1846)

Type locality, North Coast of Australia.

This species does not appear to be represented in the South Australian

Museum collection. According ta Reeve’s description it has the tuberculate sculp-

ture of ovima and may be that species, though Reeve’s figure probably depicts a

juvenile which therefore looks different from ovina, the radial plications being

undeveloped. H. gemma Reeve 1846, Habitat ? and H. papulata Reeve 1846,

North Coast of Australia, are apparently synonyms.

Summing up, one may list the distribution of the Australian Haliotidae

according to the various States as follows:

QUEENSLAND — Marinauris melculus Iredale, ethologus Ircdale; Teinotis

asinina Linne; Sanhaliotis aliena Iredale, dissona Iredale, squamata Reeve,

astricta Reeve? Ovinotis ovina Gmelin.

New Sout WaALEs—Marinauris hargravesi Cox, rare, brazieri Angas, more

conunon than the previous species; Netohaliotis ruber Leach, coccoradiatu:m

Reeve.

VicroriA—Marinauris emmae Reeve; Noteohaliotis improbula Iredale, coc-

coradialuin Reeve; conicopora Peron; Schismotis laevigata Donovan; Exohaliotis

cyclobates Peron.

TASMANIA — Notohaliotis ruber Leach = tubifera Lamarck; Marinauris

emmae Reeve; Schismotis laevigata Donovan.

SoutH AusTRALIA—Marinauris emmae Reeve, general, scalaris Leach, and

roet Gray, both taken from Yorke Peninsula. westwards; Netohaliotis inprobula

Iredale; conicopora Peron; Schismotis laevigata Donovan; Exohalictis cyclobates

Peron.

SoutH WeEsTerN AvstTRALiA—Marinauris scalaris Leach, roei Gray, semipli-

cata Menke; Schismatis laevigata Donovan; Notohaliotis improbula Iredale; San-

haliotis squamata Reeve, elegans Philippi, funebris Reeve.

NortH WESTERN AND NortTH AustraLiA-——Sanhaliotis aliena Iredale,

squamata Reeve, astricta Reeve, elegans Philippi; Marinaurts roet Gray.

The Paper Nautilus Argonauta nodosa (Solander 1786) taken on the

eastern Gulf St. Vincent Beaches.

The first record of a specimen of Argonauta nodosa from the Adelaide side

of Gulf St. Vincent was that of a specimen taken by the late Duncan Donaldson

in 1935 at Henley Beach, and now in the South Australian Museum Collection.

After the heavy gales of middle July of this year a number of specimens were

found on this side of the Gulf, and two were presented to the Museum, The

data arc:

(1) Brighton, an empty shell, taken by A. R. Tilbrook.

(2) Brighton, taken by a Mr. O’Neill; the dead animal was used as bait.

(3) Port Noarlunga, taken by Mrs. Angas Johnson, with eggs, resembling

tapioca in appearance and size, were estimated at about 20,000, but a por-

tion may have been lost. Presented to the Museum.

(4) Christie’s Beach, taken by S. V. Gray. The alive animal was removed and

thrown back into the sea, as it was incorrectly taken to be a common squid

occupying the shell,

(5) West Beach, taken by D. Horsburg. The shell had been damaged and

repaired in life.

Other specimens were found at Grange, Semaphore and Glenelg.

B. C. Corron

9 Sept. 1943

Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust., 1943 Vol. 67, Plate XX

CON CMOLOGY

GENUS Hacioris

PLATE UE

soil

H. tubereul ata.

H spasticra

H Asinan

Ablished ug theme detects Nowl: Gokby Lungman Hurst ReeS Orme Peten ester Rous Pelton te

Photostat showing “//. laevigata’ trom Rees’ Encyclopaedia, 1808, pl. vi,

Conchological Series, by Donovan, Reduced to x 0:6.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1943 Vol. 67, Plate XXI

3 NAZALS HH

Notohaliolis contecopora Peron, x 0-9, from Guichen 3ay, South Australia.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1943 Vol. 67, Plate XXII

Notohaliotis virlirala sp. nov., xO:7, trom FEllenbrook, Western Australia.

Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust., 1943 Vol. 67, Plate XXIIL

—

Notohaliatis improbula Iredale, x 0-7

Photo by Walsh

Trans. Roy. Soe. S. Aust., 1943

Vol. 67, Plate XXIV

Marinauris scalaris Leach 1814, natural size, from Corny Point, S.A.

Marinauris scalaris Leach 1814, natural size, from Levens, S.A.

Exohaliotis cyclobates Peron 1816, slightly enlarged.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1943 Vol, 67, Plate XXV

Fig. 1 Marinauris roei Gray 1826, natural size, from Arno Bay, S.A.

2 Marinauris roei Gray, radula, x 15

Fig. 3 Marinauris emmae Reeve 1846, natural size, from Gulf St. Vincent.

A MODIFICATION OF BERLESE'S MEDIUM FOR THE MICROSCOPIC

MOUNTING OF ACARINA AND OTHER SMALL ARTHROPODS

By H. WOMERSLEY, A.L.S., F.R.E.S., South Australian Museum

Summary

The use of media based upon a mixture of gum arabic and chloral hydrate for the mounting of

acarina and other small atrthropods has been in almost universal practice among entomologists and

acarologists for a long time.

181

A MODIFICATION OF BERLESE’S MEDIUM FOR THE MICROSCOPIC

MOUNTING OF ACARINA AND OTHER SMALL ARTHROPODS

By II. Womerstry, A.L.S., F.R.ES.,

South Australian Museum

[Read 12 August 1943]

The use of media based upon a mixture of gum arabic and chloral hydrate

for the mounting of acarina and other small arthropods has been in almost

universal practice among entomologists and acarologists for a long time.

Of these Berlese’s medium apparently based on the original Dc Faure is

perhaps the most widely used in the study of mites. Although in use by Berlese

and his colleagues for many years, the formula was apparently not published until

1921 when it appeared in Bolles Lee on information supplied by A. D. lmms.

The formula as there given was:

Distilled Water - - - 20 mils,

Chloral Hydrate - - - 160 grms.

Gum Arabic - - - 15 grms.

Glucose Syrup - # - 10 grms.

Glacial Acetic Acid - - 5 mils.

It has, however, been the experience of most workers with this medium, that

preparations soon show signs of crystallization, and that ultimately the slides

become entirely opaque and useless.

D. C. Swan 1936, Bull. Ent. Res., 27, (3), 389, in an endeavour to obviate

this disability, published a formula in which the chloral hydrate was reduced to

60 grms., and stated that he had found this satisfactory over a number of years.

On information supplied by myself, he also suggested that the crystallization was

possibly due to loss of acetic acid, as the preparation could be cleared by running

a drop of glacial acetic acid around the edge of the cover slip and gently warming.

In my experience I find that even 60 grms. is too high, as there is still a ten-

dency to sporadic crystallization. To overcome these troubles I have now for

several years been using a formula based on a smaller proportion of chloral-hydrate

and the replacement of the volatile acetic acid by the more viscous lactic acid.

Further, as a mixture of equal parts of lactic acid and phenol has Jong been used

for temporary mounting, J have incorporated some phenol. The use of phenol

may also have the tendency of preventing the crystallization of the chloral

hydrate, as a mixture of equal parts of these two crystalline substances pounded

together forms a hquid.

The formula as now used is as follows:

Distilled Water - - - 100 ces.

Gum Arabic (pulv.) - - 40 grms.

Chloral Hydrate - - - 50 grms.

Phenol - - ~ - 50 grms.

Glucose Syrup - - - 10 grms.

Glacial Lactic Acid - - 20 ces.

Over several years this medium has not shown any sign of crystallization.

Owing to the presence of the phenol, hcewever, the stock solution tends to become

darker on exposure to light, but this does not affect the small quantity used in

a mount,

Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust., 67, (2), 30 November 1943

182

PREPARATION OF THE MEDIUM

The best quality of powdered gum arabic is used, and mixed to a paste with

30 ces. 96% alcohol. The 100 ces of distilled water are then added in the cold

when the gum readily dissolves ; if a little remains insoluble, it may be heated on a

water bath. Without the use of the alcohol it is a long and difficult business get-

ting the gum into solution.

The solution is then heated on a water bath and filtered while hot through

three or four layers of the finest bolting silk. It ts then returned to the

bath and evaporated down to 100 ccs. or until the alcohol is driven off,

The phenol and chloral hydrate are rubbed down in a mortar until liquefied

and then added to the solution, followed by the lactic acid and glucose. The

solution is again heated on a water bath and filtered hot through a Buchner or

cintered funnel,

The resultant solution has a clear amber colour and a refractive index

of 1-448,

Mernop or MountinGc ACARINA

For temporary mounts for identification, or drawing and measuring, specimens

stored in 96% alcohol are pipetted on to a slide and covered with a drop of 50%

or glacial lactic acid, and gently heated over a spirit lamp. This results in perfect

clearing and extension of the specimen, so that the finest details of both dorsal and

ventral surfaces can be seen. With the more delicately chitinised forms it is an

advantage to stain by using 50% lactic acid that has been let down with saturated

aqueous picric acid.

For permanent mounts the specimens are transferred to a drop of the above

medium on another slide, covered and heated gently until ebullition occurs. The

slide can then be put aside to set. The preparation hardens in a few hours, after

which it can be handled safely and labelled. If the specimens have been stained

with picric, it is advisable to add a little of this also to the medium to retard Joss

of colour over a period of time.

Specimens can also be mounted straight from life, but even if it is not neces-

sary to make a temporary mount, specimens that have been preserved in alcohol

must first be passed through water or any strength of lactic acid to remove the

alcohol. The advantages of this class of media are the low refractive index, the

quickness of clearing and mounting, and the fact that, if necessary, the specimens

can be soaked off in water and remounted in the medium at any time.

©) This figure has been kindly determined for me by Prof. Kerr Grant.

REMARKS ON SOME NEMATODES FROM AUSTRALIAN REPTILES

By T. HARVEY JOHNSTON and PATRICIA M. MAWSON, University of Adelaide

Summary

For assistance in connection with the material studied in the preparation of this short paper we are

indebted to the late Dr. T. L. Bancroft of Eidsvold, Queensland, and his daughter, Dr. J. M.

Mackerras; as well as to Professor J. B. Cleland. The work has been carried out in connection with

the Commonwealth research grant to the University of Adelaide.

183

REMARKS ON SOME NEMATODES FROM AUSTRALIAN REPTILES

By T. Harvey Jounsron and Parricia M. Mawson University of Adelaide

[Read 12 August 1943]

For assistance in connection with the material studied in the preparation

of this short paper we are indebted to the late Dr. T. 1. Bancroft of Eidsvold,

Queensland, and his daughter. Dr. J. M. Mackerras; as well as to Professor J. B.

Cleland. The work has been carried out in connection with the Commonwealth

research grant to the University of Adelaide.

llosr List

AMPHIROLURUS BARBATUS Cuvier. Strongyluris paronai (Stoss.), Eidsvold, Bris-

bane; New England, New South Wales. Oswaldofilaria chlamydosauri

(Breinl), Eidsvold.

AmMPuIBoLurus MuRIcATUS Shaw. Oswaldofilaria chlamydosauri (Breinl), Bur-

nett River, Queensland. Strongyluris paronai (Stoss.) and Physaloptera

gallardi. Johnston and Mawson, Sydney. Physuluptera antarctica Linst.,

Sydney.

CHLAMYbOSAURUS KING Gray. Oswaldofilaria chlamydosauri (Breinl), Lidsvold.

Strongyluris paronai (Stoss.), Burnett River.

PHYsIGNATHUS LesUEURI Gray. Thamugadia physignathi (Johnston 1912), Eids-

vold,

Grtyra varIEGATA D, and B. Pharyngodon kartana Johnston and Mawson 1941,

Eidsvold. Pharyngodon sp. (perhaps P. tiliguae Baylis), Kidsvold.

PHYLLODACTYLUS GUNTIIERT, Pharyngodon kartana Johnston and Mawson, Lord

Howe Island.

Intermediate host, Cutex FATIGANS. Ovvzealdofilaria chlamydosauri (Breinl),

Burnett River.

OSWALDOFILARIA CHLAMYDOSsAURI (Breinl)

(fig. 1-2)

Syn. Filaria chlamydosauri Breinl 1913; Foleyella chlamydosauri (Brein!)

Yorke and Maplestone 1926,

From Amphibolurns barbatus, A. muricatus and Chlamydosaurus kingit, all

from the Burnett River, Queensland. The males are about 2-3 cm. long, the

females 6-7 cm.

Distinct papillae were not observed on the head. The simple mouth opens

directly into the oesophagus which is divided into a narrow anterior and a slightly

wider posterior part, these being respectively °35 mm. and 1-3 mm. Jong in the

male, and 16 mm. and 1°9 mm, in the female. The nerve ring surrounds the base

of the anterior portion,

The male tail is 2°5 mm, long and on its extremity bears a small rugosity, more

pronounced in some specimens than in others (fig. 4), The caudal papillae are

arranged exactly as described by Breinl. The spicules are -11 mm, and °21 mm.

long, that is, slightly smaller than for the type specimen; both are greatly enlarged

proximally, the longer ending in a spoon-shaped portion, the shorter in a round

knob. In the female, not previously described, the reproductive tubes extend

nearly to both extremities; the vagina is long and opens to the vulva just in front

of the midbody. The uteri and vagina contain larvae.

filaria chlamydosauri Breinl was transferred to Foleyella by Yorke and

Maplestone 1926. Since that genus is characterised by the possession of wide

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 67, (2), 30 November 1943

184

caudal alae in the male, and by the oesophageal position of the vulva, the species

cannot renin there. The genera of Filarioidea so far recorded from reptiles

are Loleyella, Saurositus, Ilastospiculum, Oswaldofilaria, Conispiculion, Mac-

donaldius, Thamugadia, and Setarospiculum, We have been unable to procure a

description of the last-named, but a key to the others has been compiled and may

be found useful by other workers. Filaria chlamydosauri agrees generally with

the genus Oswaldofilaria, species of which are recorded from the caiman and an

iguana from South America, Breinl’s species differs from Oswaldofilaria in the

absence of a vestibule; but since a description of Setarospiculuim is not available,

we consider it inadvisable to erect a new genus,

Key TO THE GENERA OF FILARIDAE FROM REPTILES

(excluding Setarospiculum)

1 Oesophagus divided into two parts. 2

Oesophagus not divided into two parts. 5

Z Spicules subequal. was pes si ets Tne ve ae Saurositus

Spicules unequal. 3

3 Cuticle on each side of mouth thickened set ves st a. Hastosprenlim

Cuticle an each side of mouth not thickened. 4

4 Vulva at about mid-body; no caudal alae in male... ma uw Oswaldofilaria

Vulva just post-oesophageal: wide caudal alae in male... fa Foleyella

5 Vulva at inid-body; no caudal alae in male ..., dts im ans Conispiculum

Vulva just post-oesophageal; no caudal alae in male. 6

6 Chitinous ring around small vestibule; spicules unequal .... of Macdonaldius

Mouth leading direct to oesophagus; spicules equal ik te Thamugadia

Lire Hristory—Microfilaria chlamydosauri was described by Breinl (1913,

42) from the host from North Queensland. The presence of microfilariae in a

specimen of Amphibolurus barbatus in the London Zoological Gardens, but

originally from Australia, was recorded by Plimmer (1912, 139). Johnston and

Bancroft (1920, 16) mentioned their presence in the latter host species in the

Upper Burnett region, Queensland, and stated that the intermediate host was Culex

fatigans. The parasite was the species now under review, though it was not then

identified. Mackerras (1938, 108) stated that 4. barbatus was almost invariably

infected with a species of Filaria in Queensland, but that the parasite had not been

observed in that lizard in Canberra.

In 1919 experimental infection of Culex fatigans with microfilariae from

A. barbatus was carried out in Queensland by Dr. J. M. Bancroft, working in

collaboration with the senior author., Larvae were collected from the mosquitoes

at varying periods after infection, but further studies were not tndertaken at the

time, ‘The material has now been investigated as far as its condition has permitted.

Light days after infection the larvae were short (90) and relatively thick

(10 4), and the intestine was not formed. lifteen days after infection the length

varied between 305 and 530p, and the width 20-304. The oesophagus and

intestine were distinct, the former being 90-120 » long and surrounded at 22-50 ye

from the head end by the nerve ring. ‘Ihe intestine ended in a large clear chamber,

the rectum, but the anal aperture was not recogniscd. At about the position of

the future anus was a large, apparently uupaired, papilla visible in all specimens.

No other caudal papillae were present, though a suggestive thickening of the hypo-

dermis was seen near the end of the tail in some specimens. Distant from the tail,

about one-quarter of the body length was a more deeply staining mass of cells

along the body cavity.

Seven days later (after 22 days) a considerable elongation had taken place,

the length being °55--82 mm. At 28 days greater differentiation was observable

and the mouth and anal apertures were present; anal papillae were now absent;

185

and hypodermal cells had increased so greatly in number that the body cavity was

almost obliterated. At 30 days larvae were found in the proboscis and some were

escaping from between the labella and their length had reached -9 mm. Larvae

had not increased in size even after 49 days from infection,

These facts indicate that infected mosquitoes in the Upper Burnett district

become infective in about thirty days and may remain so for about twenty (or

more) days.

5 0-2 mm

Fig. 1 and 2, Oswaldofilaria chlamydosauri: 1, posterior end of male; 2, 15-day

larva from Culex fatigans, Fig. 3 and 4, Thamugadia physignathi: 3, en face

view of head; 4, male tail. Fig. 5, Strongyluris paronai, male tail, p., anal papilla,

Fig. 2 and 3 to same scale.

THAMUGADIA PHYSIGNATHI (Johnston 1912)

(Fig. 3-4)

From veins of liver and mesentery of the type host, Physignathus lesueuri,

from Eidsvold, Queensland.

186

The specimens agree closely with the original description, except in regard

to the male tail. The anal papillae, of which one preanal and two postanal pairs

were mentioned, are extremely inconspicuous, the preanal pair not being seen in

any specimen. The alae are so slight that they may be regarded for purposes of

classification as absent. The spicules are subequal, about 11 mm. long, as shown

in fig. 4.

The original description mentioned the presence of “three small papillae” on

head; this should read “three pairs of small papillae.” The absence oi a vestibule,

the mono-partite oesophagus, the equal spicules and the absence of alae in the

male, and the position of the vulva in the female, indicate that this species belongs

to Thamugadia, The microfilariae were first described by Johnston and Cleland

(1911, 489), and were also mentioned by Johnston (1911, 240) and by Cleland

(1916, 256).

PHARYNGODON KARTANA Johnston and Mawson 1941

P. kartana was originally recorded from a gecko from Kangaroo Island, and is

now identified from another gecko, Phyllodactylus guntheri, from Lord Howe

Island. The males in this collection show minor variations from the type. They

differ in the greater length of the cloacal prolongation, the lesser degree of

bifurcation of the second caudal papilla, and the lesser chitinisation of the spicules.

PHARYNGODON sp.

Some males falling into the genus Pharyngodon were taken from a gecko,

Gehyra variegata, from Eidsvold. They agree very closely with P. tiliquae Baylis

1930, but in the absence of females their definite identification as stich is uncertain.

STRONGYLURIS PARONAL (Stossich )

(Fig. 5)

From Amphibolurus barbatus from Eidsvold (Queensland), and New [ng-

land; A. muricatus, Sydney; and Chlaniydosaurus kingii, Burnett River, ‘This

species was re-described by us (1942) and stated to have seven pairs of caudal

papillae in the male; in some particularly clear specimens amongst the present

material three more pairs were observed (fig. 5).

PHYSALOPTERA GALLARDI Johnston and Mawson 1942

This species, originally described irom Amphibolurus barbatus from Narara,

New South Wales, is now recorded from A. inuricatus from Sydney.

LITERATURE

Bremne, A. 1913 Rep. Austr. Inst. Trop. Med., (1911), 39-46

CLELAND, J]. B. 1916 Rep. Dir.-Gen, Publ. Health, N.S.W. (1915), 253-258

Jonnston, T. H. 1911 Proc. Roy. Soc. Qid., 23, 233-249

Jomnsron, T. H. 1912 Proc. Roy. Soc. Qld., 24, 63-91

Jounston, T. H., and Bancrort, M. J. 1920 Proc. Roy. Soc. Qld., 32, 31-57

Jounston, T. H., and Cieranp, J. B. 1911 Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 36,

479-491

Tonxston, T. H.,and Mawson, P.M. 1941 Ree. S. Aust. Mus., 7, (1), 145-148

Jomnsron, ‘Tl. H., and Mawson, P. M. 1942 Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 21, (2), 110-115

Macxerras, I. M. 1938 In Handbook for Canberra Mecting (of Australian and

N.Z. Assoc. Adv. Sci. for 1939), 107-110.

Primmer, H. 1912 Jour. Roy. Micr. Soc., 133-150

Yorke, W., and Mariesronr, P. A. 1926 Vhe Nematode Parasites of Verte-

brates

SOME NEMATODES FROM AUSTRALIAN ELASMOBRANCHS

By T. HARVEY JOHNSTON and PATRICIA M. MAWSON, University of Adelaide

Summary

The material on which the following report is based was, except in one instance, taken from

elasmobranchs dissected by Zoology classes at the University. The work has been undertaken in

connection with the Commonwealth Research Grant to the University. Types of new species have

been deposited in the South Australian Museum. Professor Tiegs, University, Melbourne, kindly

forwarded material from Mustelus.

187

SOME NEMATODES FROM AUSTRALIAN ELASMOBRANCHS

By T. Harvey JouHnston and Parricta M. Mawson

University of Adelaide

[Read 12 August 1943]

The material on which the following report 1s based was, except in one

instance, taken from elasmobranchs dissected by Zoology classes at the University.

The work has been undertaken in connection with the Commonwealth Research

Grant to the University. Types of new species have been deposited in the South

Australian Museum. Professor Tiegs, University, Melbourne, kindly forwarded

material from Afustelus.

The following is a list of the parasites examined, arranged under their hosts.

HetTeropontus pHitiprr (Bloch and Schneider), Port Willunga: Echinocephalus

Spinosissimus (Linst.), Paraleptus australis n.sp., Cucullanus heterodonti

n.sp., Phlyctainephora sp.

MusTELUs ANTARCTICUS Gnthr.. Victoria: Paraleptus australis n. sp.

Urotopuus Testaceus (Mull. and Henle), Sydney: Paranisakis australis n. sp.,

Echinocephalus spinosisstmus (‘inst.).

TRYGONORRHINA FASCIATA (Mull. and Henle), Port Willunga: Proleptus

trygonorrhinae n. sp.

Cucullanus heterodonti n. sp.,

(Fig. 1-2)

The males are 18 mm. long, the females 20-30 mm. The mouth opening is

dorso-ventrally elongate, its edge slightly serrated. There are three pairs of

cephalic papillae. The buccal mass is +3 mm, long by *33 mm, wide in the male,

4mm. by -4 mm. in the female, with walls about 80 thick at the widest part.

The oesophagus is 1-6-1°76 mm. long, widening towards its base. he nerve ring

is about -52 mm. from the head; the excretory pore shortly behind this.

In the male the preanal sucker is 1°6 mm. in front of the anus, and the tail

‘4 mm. long terminating in a small spike. There are nine pairs of papillae, and

one median preanal papilla, arranged as in fig. 2. The spicules are massive and

equal, 3-2 mm. long; the gubernaculum is about -12 mm. long.

The female tail is -44 mm, in length. The vulva is situated 8 mm. from the

posterior end in specimen 23 nin. Jong; the eggs are 54» by 80 up.

Proleptus trygonorrhinae n, sp

(Fig. 3-4)

From the fiddler, Trvgonorrhina fasciata, from Port Willunga. The males

are up to 32 mm., the females to 35 mm., in length. The lips are small and sur-

rounded by an inflated collar. Each bears externally two small papillae, and

internally one median tooth, The oesophagus is divided into an anterior muscular

and a wider posterior glandular part. °56 mm. and -4 mm. long, respectively, in

the male. The nerve ring lies at the base of the anterior part, the small spine-like

cervical papillae at the level of the anterior border of the nerve ring, and the

excretory pore at the posterior border,

The male tail is *8 mm. long and is frequently rolled in a spiral. The caudal

alae are unequal, but the four pairs of preanal and six pairs of postanal papillae

are more or less symmetrically arranged. The longer spicule is needle-like,

1:2 mm. long; the shorter spatulate -24 num. long.

In the female the rounded tail is -6 mm. long. The vulva is +1 mim, in front

of the anus, the uteri uniting a short distance in front of this point. The eggs are

45 & by 32 B.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 67, (2), 30 November 1943

188

The species differs from Prolepins robustus Baylis 1933, and P. obtusus

Linst., in the relative positions of the nerve ring, cervical papillae, excretory pore,

and termination of the muscular part of oesophagus, as well as in the asymmetri-

cal nature of the caudal alae.

Paraleptus australis n. sp.,

(Fig. 6-8)

From Heterodontus philippi {trom Port Willunga, South Australia, and

Mustellus antarcticus from Victoria.

The males are 25-30 mm. long, the females up to 45 mm. long, cach carrying

two large papillae externally, and internally one stout median tooth anteriorly and

six pointed tecth, three on each side of the median tooth; dorsally and ventrally at

the junction of the interlabia is another tooth.

The postlabial cuticle is voluminous, in most cases campanulate, in some

collar-like.

The oesophagus is 4 mm. long in a young female, its anterior *8 mm. slightly

narrower than the succeeding part. The nerve ring is °5 mm.,; the excretory pore

-7 mm. from the head.

The spicules are very unequal, the longer 4°2 mm. in length, needle-like, the

shorter *4 mim., and spatulate. The caudal alae are but slightly developed, and all

the caudal papillae are sessile; of these there are four pairs of preanal, three pairs

immediately postanal, one pair half-way down the tail, and one pair, with double

nerve endings, near the tip.

The posterior end of the female narrows suddenly after the anus, ending in

a rounded tip. The vulva is 19 mm. from the posterior end in a 43 mm. long

specimen, in the same specimen the vagina is 6 mm, long; there are two ovaries.

The eggs are 50 p by 32 p.

The species differs from the only other of the genus, P. scyllit Wu, in the

absence of caudal alae, in the number of teeth on the lips, and in the inequality

of the spicules.

There seems to be some doubt as to the position of the genus Paraleptus Wu

1927, since it has been placed by Chitwood and Wehr (1933) as a synonym of

Abbreviata Travassos 1920. We certainly consider that our species is distinct

from Abbreviata on account of the position of the vulva.

EcHINOCEPHALUS sPINosissimus (Linst.)

(Fig. 9)

A number of specimens of this species were collected from Heterodontus

philippi at Port Willunga, and a few from Urolophus testaceus from New South

Wales.

The species was present in every host specimen examined, and reached a

much larger size than any previously recorded, namely, the males up to 66 mm.,

the females to 70 mm. The external surface of each lip bears two large papillae

and a small median one, the internal surface is trilobed, the middle lobe slightly

smaller, and cach lobe carries two longitudinal ridges of thickened cuticle. No

tecth are present. The head bulb carries about forty rows of small spines. The

nerve ring is just posterior to the head bulb; the cervical papillae +2 mm., and the

excretory pore -23 mm. behind the anterior end of the body (in a young female).

The oesophagus is 44 mm. long in a young male, 7 mm. in a large female, and the

cervical sacs are about half this length.

The spicules are equal, 1-2 mm. long in a 34 mm. long male, 2 mm. in a 66 mm.

male. The tail, -7 mm. long in a young male, tapers to a rounded tip, bearing

slight caudal alae about *25 mm. long on each side at the level of the anus. There

189

Vig. 1-2, Cucullanus heterodonti: 1, head; 2, male tail. Fig. 3-5, Praleptus

trygonorrhinag: 3, head; 4, male tail; 5, female tail, Fig. 6-8, Paraleptus

australis; 6, head, lateral view; 7, head, dorsal view; 8, male tail. Fig. 9,

Echinocephalus spinosissimus: inside of lip. Fig. 10, 11, Parantsakis australis:

10, head; 11, male tail. Fig. 1, 2, 7 and 8 to same scale; fig. 3 and 5 to same scale.

190

are oue pair of pre-alar papillae, four pairs in the alae, and two pairs posterior to

the alae. In the gravid female the body scarcely tapers until reaching the level of

the vulva, when it tapers suddenly to the anus (which is situated almost imme-

diately behind the vulva), and ends in a rounded-tipped cylindrical tail -8 mm.

long. The eggs are thin-shelled, 45 » by 27 pu.

In the presence of interlocking ridges on the median lobe of the lip, the

greater size, the equal spicules and smaller number of caudal papillae in the male,

our specimens differ from those described by Baylis and Lane 1920 (and re-

described by Baylis 1939). The general characters of the head and oesophagus,

however, indicate their identity with Linstow’s species.

PHLYCTAINOPEHORA sp.

From Heteredontus philippi, Port Willunga. In the course of dissection

three cysts were taken from different specimens of Heterodantus; in each case

they occurred in tissue in the pharyngeal region, either posteriorly near the

Cuvierian duct or anteriorly near the hyoid arch. They were about 1:5 cm. long,

and about 1 cm. or less in diameter. On careful opening no form could be fol-

lowed; they appeared to be merely irregular thick-walled cysts containing a fluid,

full of larval nematodes. The latter were on the average *35 mm. long, 15 in

diameter, the posterior end tapering to a fine point and the anterior truncated and

apparently bearing a small tooth-like structure. No internal structures were

observed. Apart from the fact that no structure suggestive of a female worm

was observable in the cyst, the occurrence and the appearance of the larvae closely

resemble those described as P. /amnae froma shark, Lanna cornubica, by Steiner

(1921), and are placed in the same genus. We consider it likely that the latter

should be assigned to the Philometridae.

Paranisakis australis n. sp

(Fig. 10, 11)

From the stingray, Urolophus testaccus, from Sydney. The intestines of

about twenty-five specimens dissected were singularly free from parasites, in

marked contrast with the condition in (/etcrodontus. Only about ten nematodes

were obtained, and of these four were specimens of an apparently new species of

Paranisakis, of which the description is as follows.

Male 4°5-5 cm., female 5-6 em. long. Head wider than long. Lips each

bearing a row of fine denticics on inside of anterior border and along lateral

flanges. Labial papillae very small, Interlabia about hali length of lips. In

female length of oesophagus 3 mm.; excluding the spherical ventriculus, -3 mm.

in diameter. Nerve ring in female -8 mm. trom head; excretory pore -88 mm.

Posterior end of male twisted in spiral; tail pointed; spicules 3-5 mm. and

2-9 mm.; gtbernaculum -25 mm. long. About six pairs of large preanal papillae

and six pairs postanal, as in fig. LL.

In female 5-5 mm. long, vulva with prominent lips, 2-2 mm. from head, Egys

36 by 72 py. Tail pointed.

The species agrees very closely with /?. pastinacae (Rud. 1819) as described

by Baylis 1936, but differs from it in the greater length of the spicules.

LITERATURE

Bavuis, 1. A. 1936 Fauna of British India. Nematoda, 1

3ayLis, H. A. 1939 Fauna of British India. Nematoda, 2

Bayuts, H. A.. and Lane, C, 1920 Proc. Zool. Soc., Tondon, 345-???

Steiner, G. 1921 Centralbl. f. Bakt. Orig., 86, 591

We, H.W. 1927 Contr. Biol. Lab. Sei. Soe., China; Nanking, 3, (2), 1-3

THE PEDOLOGY OF A SOUTH AUSTRALIAN FEN

By C. G. STEPHENS, M.Sc., A.A.C.I.

Summary

In January and February 1942 a soil survey was made for the Land Board of South Australia of an

area known as Eight Mile Creek Swamp, which lies adjacent to the coastline in the lower South-

East of South Australia. It comprises Sections 468, 469, 470, 471 and 472 in the Hundred of

MacDonnell, and Sections 589, 590 and 591 in the Hundred of Caroline. The swamp is

approximately 3,500 acres in area and is the largest of a series of swamps extending to beyond Cape

Northumberland about eight miles to the west, and to the Nelson River a similar distance to the east.

In the vicinity of Port MacDonnell some of the smaller swamps have been reclaimed, and the soil

survey of Eight Mile Creek Swamp was undertaken during the initial stages of the clearing and

draining of that formation. The purpose of the present paper is to discuss the pedology of the swamp

soils and to point out that the physical and chemical characteristics of the peats are very similar to

those of the English fens.

191

THE PEDOLOGY OF A SOUTH AUSTRALIAN FEN

By C. G. SrepHens, M.Se., AA.C.I.®

[Read 9 September 1943]

Prare XXVI

In January and February 1942 a soil survey was made for the Land Board

of South Australia of an area known as Eight Mile Creek Swamp, which lies

adjacent to the coastline in the lower South-East of South Australia. It comprises

Sections 468, 469, 470, 471 and 472 in the Hundred of MacDonnell, and Sections

589, 590 and 591 in the Ilundred of Caroline, The swamp is approximately

3,500 acres in area and is the largest of a scries of swamps extending to beyond

Cape Northumberland about eight miles to the west, and to the Nelson River a

similar distance to the east. In the vicinity of Port MacDonnell some of the

smaller swamps have been reclaimed, and the soil survey of Eight Mile Creek

Swamp was undertaken during the initial stages of the clearing and draining of

that formation. The purpose of the present paper is to discuss the pedology of

the swamp soils and to point out that the physical and chemical characteristics of

the peats are very similar to those of the English fens.

The swamp, like the greater part of the lower South-East of South Australia,

overlics Miocene polyzoal limestone, which in the locality of the swamps appears

to have been extensively faulted; for Eight Mile Creek Swamp and the other

coastal swamps are characterised by lines of spring ponds which discharge several

hundred million gallons of water per day. The alignment of the spring ponds

along a scries of eight almost parallel north-west to south-east lines suggests the

presence of a serics of stepped fault lines which have been planed off by erosion

to their present almost common level.

In Eight Mile Creek Swamp the water from the ponds is carried by several

permanent streams, of which Eight Mile Creek and Deep Creek actually discharge

water naturally into the sea. The water in these streams comes from Ewen’s

Ponds and Deep Creek Pond respectively. Apart from two small ponds emptying

by way of a small creck into Ewen’s Ponds, the water from the other spring ponds

is cither directly absorbed by the swanip or flows a short distance as in the case

of Bone and Badenoch Creeks before being absorbed. Water is also discharged

into the sea by scepage and “bubblers’” on the beaches.

The very wet conditions necessary for swamp formation have been caused by

the partial restriction of the movement to the sea of the waters of these springs

by a coastal barrier of flints and highly calcareous sand. This barrier is composed

of wave terraces of flints shed from the Miocene limestone and aeolian sand par-

tially covering these terraces and generally assuming a low ridge and swale dune

topography. Dune formation is accentuated at the eastern end of the barrier.

According to the level plan of the area prepared by H, I., Fisk of the Lands

Departinent of South Australia, the swamp lies at an elevation of between four

and ten feet above extreme high water mark. In general, the western two-thirds

of the coastal barrier is up to ten {cet above that datum, with a few higher ridges,

and the eastern third of the barrier rises to heights of at least thirty feet above

sea-level.

@ An officer of the Division of Soils of the Council for Scientific and Industrial

Research stationed at the Waite Agricultural Research Institute.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 67, (2), 30 November 1943

192

The dry land on the north side of the swamp rises gently from its edge and

is underlain by the Miocenc limestone. In much of this area the flints shed from

the limestone have accumulated in large amounts in the soil profile, and also

characterise the soils of the many islands of dry land in the swamp.

Prior to the drainage of the swamp, the water table is reported to have been

generally at or near the surface with much of the area under extensive sheets of

water. The nature of the swamp water is revealed by analyses of samples from

the erceks, drains and ponds, An analysis of water from near the outlet of the

Eight Mile Creek is reported in Bulletin No. 19 of the Department of Mines of

South Australia (7) and shows a total soluble salt content of 28°72 grains per

gallon, 7°26 grains representing Cl and 10°15 CO,. No reaction value is given

but this is probably the best water available on the swamp. Water taken from a

subsidiary eastern drain contained 83 grains of soluble salts per gallon and had a

reaction of pIl 7-63. Water from Deep Creek contained 74 grains per gallon and

had a reaction of pH 8-09; water from the surface of a pond east of Bone Creek

contained 60 grains per gallon and had a reaction of pH 7:23, and water from one

of the western drains coutained 82 grains per gallon and had a reaction of pIL 7-74.

In cach case approximately half the soluble salt content was in the form of chloride.

Although much the greater part of the water of the swamp is telluric in origin

and comes from the spring ponds in the swamp itself, there is, during the winter

months, an influx of water from the north and north-west, where some surface

drainage water enters and where there is also ani inflow of water due to the rising

of springs just off the edge of the swamp.

Apart from some transitional soils around the edge of the swamp and an area

of highly saline brown fine fibrous peat at the eastern end of the swamp, four soil

types have been named and mapped. They are as follows:

(1) Badenoch friable peat.

(2) Orwell coarse and fine fibrous peat.

(3) Milstead coarse fibrous peat.

(4) Hitcheex limey peat,

The aggregate area occupied by the swamp soils proper and the transitional

soils is 3,514 acres. The areas of the individual types are shown in Table |,

TABLE I

AREAS or Soin ‘Type; py PLANIMETER

Soil Area in acres

Badenoch friable peat ~ - - - - - - = 1,798

Orwell coarse and fine fibrous peat - - - - o44

Milstead coarse fibrous peat - - - - - - 683

Hitchcox limey peat - - - - - - - 86

Brown fine fibrous peat - - - 2 - - - 12

Transitional peats and peaty loams - - - - - 291

Total - 3,514

The distribution of these soil types and some details of the transitional and

dry land soils and of the coastal barrier arc shown on the accompanying map

(fig. 1), The soil types are typified by distinct vegetation associations which, along

with the general ecology of the swamp, are described in detail by Miss C. M.

Eardley (1) in a contemporaneous paper in this journal,

The Badenoch friable peat is the most extensive soil of the swamp. It is a

black humified peat. The profile of this soil type, as illustrated in fig. 2, consists

of a surface soil of jet black friable and granular peat, usually with very little

Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust., 1943

Ji—_— =

— ra ———

SS — -Snerracepemab

4 aA ))

A °

a nib

Hl g

yi:

ESS Se

Hp =

al i

“Y

a =\

SOIl MAP

EIGHT MILE CREEK SWAMP

S.A.

y) i

ras — KEY TO SOIL TYPES ——

| ie)

9 MADENOCH FRIAGLE PEAT. 7 2. 2-0 - =

0 ORWELL COARSE & FINE FIBROUS pear... LW

MILSTEAD COARSE FIBROUS PEAT. aA

WITCHCOX LIMEY PEAT ~ _ - - - -4!

ONAL SOILS. | DRY LAND SOILS.

SCALE

70 so 40

193

unhumified material and about 15 inches deep; beneath the surface horizon lies

black fine peat to an average depth of 42 inches. These first two horizons are

discernible in plate xxvi A. Deeper lies a more variable black and brown mixed

coarse and fine peat to an average depth of about 66 inches. This overlies lime-

stone or grey calcarcous sand. Sometimes between this last horizon and the lime-

Fig. 2 Fig. 3

The Badenoch peat The Orwell peat

Black coarse and fine

tripbie: aad and 12" | fibrous peat

granular peat Brown

fine peat

Black fine peat

coarse and

fine peat 5a"

[See

Brown

sometimes peaty clay 3

or diatomaceous earth and fine or coarse

calcareous sand Black 66" and fine peat

or limestone eee oy

Grey calcareous sand

or limestone

Fig. 4 Fig. 5

The Milstead peat Tie Hitchcox peat

ou fol

White | 2" |fine Lime

Dark coarse fibrous

brown peat Black coarse and fine

20" fibrous peat

14"

‘Nearly coarse and fine

black fibrous peat Black fine peat

40"

got

White Lime and

Black fine peat and calcareous sand

Grey

66"

Grey calcareous sand

or limestone

stone there may be clayey horizons, and occasionally there is present a yellow

pulpy material which bleaches on drying. This, on microscopic examination,

proved to be diatomaceous earth. Genera recognised by the Zoology Department

of the University of Adelaide in this material included Navicila, Cymbella and

Synedra,

194

The soil type, which has been named the Orwell coarse and fine fibrous peat,

consists of a surface soil of partly humified material about twelve inches deep.

The colour is mixed black and dark brown and has a generally fibrous appearance.

This overlics a black, fine peat with some roots to about 54 inches, and this in turn

overlies black and brown, fine or coarse and fine peat. Beneath, at an average

depth of 66 inches, lies either grey calcareous sand or limestone, The profile of

this type is illustrated in fg. 3, and the two upper horizons are visible in pl. xxvi B,

The remaining extensive soil type consists of an unhumified peat. It has been

named the Milstead coarse fibrous peat. The surface material, which is up to

20 inches in depth, consists of a coarse fibrous peat, dark brown in colour, This

overlies about the same depth of nearly black, coarse and fine fibrous peat some-

what similar to the surface horizon of the Orwell peat. Beneath, and to an average

depth of 66 inches, lies black, fine peat, and beneath this lies either grey calcareous

sand or limestone. As with the Badenoch and Orwell peats, there are some sub-

soil variants which have peaty clay horizons on top of the limestone and occasion-

ally flint is present, more particularly in the subsoils of the shallow phases along

the northern side of the swamp. The Milstead peat is illustrated diagrammatically

in fig. 4, and the upper horizons are visible in pl. xxvi CG.

In the castern portion of the swamp there occur limited areas of an unusual

peat. his has been named the Hitchcox limey peat, and it is illustrated in fig. 5.

The surface consists of up to six inches (average two inches) of white, fine lime,

which is pulpy when wet, It appears to be largely derived from the calcareous

skeletal remains of Chara. Under the lime lies about a foot of black coarse and

fine fibrous peat, which in turn overlics black, fine peat to a depth of 60 inches.

Below this again lies an horizon of fine lime and calcareous sand, and lower still

grey calcareous sand. A deep example of the lime surface horizon is clearly

shown in pl. xxvi D,

At the eastern end of the swamp there is an area of brown, fine fibrous peat

which is both highly calcareous and saline. The surface is covered with a film of

calcareous material derived from Chara, and the subsoil is composed of black,

fine peats and peaty clays with flint gravel and resting on limestone.

All around the landward edge of the swamp there are many arcas of transi-

tional soils which are variously related to each of the Badenoch, Orwell and Mil-

stead peats. These transitional soils are generally shallower and less organic and

sometimes more calcareous than the principal soils of the swamp.

In general, interspersed in the peat soils are shells about threc-quarters of an

inch long of the snail, Lenameria pectorosa (Conrad 1850), and these undoubtedly

contribute to the alkaline reaction of the peat and have possibly contributed some-

thing to the lime surface of the Hitchcox’ peat, for occasional shells may be found

in the surface lime horizon of that soil type. However, the original organic acidity

of the peat has undoubtedly been largely neutralised by the alkaline reaction of the

waters issuing from the various spring ponds, Frequently, in the subsoils of the

peats, there are found shells about one-tenth of an inch long of Austropyrgus

éuccinoides (Quoy and Gaimard 1834).

In Table 2 is shown the calculated composition of typical profiles of the peats,

the components being expressed as organic matter, calcium carbonate, mineral

matter (other than calcium carbonate and soluble salts), soluble salts and water

(105° C.) in the air-dry material. In addition the composition is shown in terms

of organic matter, calcium carbonate, and mineral matter as above, re-calculated to

a 100% basis. These latter data have heen plotted on a triangular diagram (fig. 6)

which shows the composition of complete profiles from cach of the principal soil

types, the Badenoch, Orwell, Milstead, and Hitchcox peats. The highly organic

character of these is apparent, and the minor differences such as lime and mineral

195

matter content are also readily seen or estimated. Mineral matter increases steadily

with depth in all four peats. Table 1V records all the physical and chemical data

for the peat and other soil samples taken from the swamp and its vicinity.

Excluding calcium carbonate, the ratio of orgamic maiter to mineral matter

in the peats varies up to above 10 and thus closely rescmbles the peats of the Eng-

lish fens as described by Pearsall (3) and Tansley (5), who record values up to 4

for surface soils and 11-5 for subsoils. The apparent density ranges from 0-3

upwards, and generally increases with depth. The Badenoch peat is significantly

denser than the Orwell, Milstead and Hitchcox peats, as is to be expected from

its generally humified character. Water-holding capacity is over 600% in the

Milstead peat and approximately 400% in the others. Although no determinations

of swelling and shrinkage were made, it was apparent from the Keen-Raczkowski

boxes used in the above determinations that these properties were of the order of

100%.

Lane I

Composition of PEATS FROM Eraut Mire CREEK Swamp, Sourm AUSTRALIA

Badeuoch friable | Orwell coarse and fine | Hilstead coarse fib- Hitchoox limey past

peat fibrous peat rous peat

—

z 5

737) 7318 | 7379 | 7380| 7381 | 7382 | 7393 | 7373 | 7374 | 7375 | 7376 | 7350) 7352) 7252 | 7393

Soil type

[

Soil number

Depth in inches O-12| 12-59 50-6 66-84 0-14 14-24 26-67 63-84] 0-6 6-15) 15-69 60-8c

Loo

pay

is}

| 6 |e 21% |@ | 4% | o | # | a@ |e $ | | # |] #

Organic matter 21.4! 69.9 | 67.0 | 75.4] 63.7] 60.2 | 0.6 | 79.7) 73.4 56.7} 0.6 6.9] 62.1) 51.1) 3.7

Calcium carbonate 0.0 0.0 Q.0 0.0 0.0 0.0] 79.0 0.0 5.2 1.4 | 82.2 86.9 8.6 1.01 89.4

Mineral metter 19.0) 11.4] 16.0 9.3/ 15,1] 23.5 19.6 be] 6.0] 25.9 | 16.8 4,1] 13.7] 33.8 6.90

Soluble salts 145 OF aT 0.3 0.3 o.6 O.1 O.3 0.5 0.3 0.0 0.3 0.5 0.5 GL

Water (105° c.) 17.1] 18.3 16.3 15.0| 20.9 | 15.7 O.7 | 14.3] 14.9 | 15.7 O.4 1.8 Bal 13.6 0.8

Total 100.0

100.0 {100.0 LopeD POR e LOO. 0 [L000 [100.0 fL00.0 [00.0 j100.0 1100.0/100.0 [Loo.0

& | & 4 | & | & | &

36 |8r | 89 | 81 | 72 1 [93 [87 |o7 | 2 7/94 | 59 ifaw

cal ia) Q ca) Q 19 (a)

12 14 19 1 19 26 20 q

4 +——_}-—-

A :

100 100 iL00 100 100 Loa 190 op piece) 100 60 100 peo 100 100

Organio matter

Caleium carbonate

Mineral matter

Total

The peats are generally neutral to alkaline in reaction with some horizons,

particularly in the Badenoch peat, faintly acid in character. In this property the peats

of Eight Mile Creek Swamp and the alkaline waters of the ponds and creeks clasely

resemble the peats and natural waters of the English fens and broads as described

by Tansley (5) for the East Anglian fens, and by Godwin and Turner (2) for

the waters of Calthorpe Broad. That such an unhumified, coarse, fibrous material

as the Milstead peat should not be acid in reaction can only be due to its periodical

inundation by the alkaline water from the spring ponds. As stated by Tansley (5)

for the peats of the English fens, “The organic soil is formed by the decay of plant

debris under relatively anacrobic conditions and is therefore peat. It 1s irrigated

by water relatively rich in basic ions and often alkaline in reaction.” In addition,

the alkaline nature of the waters of Eight Mile Creek Swamp is undoubtedly

primarily responsible for the abundance of the fresh-water shells and the Chara

inentioned previously. Fresh-water shell marl occurs under much of the Cam-

bridgeshire fen land as beds 5-10 cm. thick and lying 30-40 cm, below the surface.

Wilson and Staker (8) have described peat soils of New Yorle which contain

horizons of material derived from Chara calcareous remains, but none of these are

on the surface. ‘leakle (6) has described soils from Herdsman’s Lake in Western

Australia which contain horizons of calcareous material derived from land shell

and other sources. :

The total nitrogen content of the peats is very high. Phosphoric acid and

potash were estimated by extraction with hot hydrochloric acid. The former is

FEET

196

100% ORGANIC

ATTER

OVERLIE™.

HIGHLY \

CALCAREOUS \

MATERIAL nie

100% MINERA

MATTER 00% LIME

Fig. 6

Triangular diagram showing the composition of the various horizons

of the Badenoch (BiBeBs), Orwell (010203), Milstead (MiM2M;) and

Ifitchcox (H:H:H:) peats.

7 GREY FINE SANDY

LOAM Wirt

MUCH Luingt

12 MILSTEARD PEAT

" Mi sTEAd ORWELL BADENCCH FRIABLE

COARSE leoaRse |

fo | Hil ce

j : EINE

HITCHCOX | “Fla Rous

+ PEAT |

9 LiMEY | jo"

8 PEAT

MIOCENE

s GREY CALCAREOUS SAND POLYZOAL LIMESTONE

4l/

“EXTREME we ee ee oP CHAINS

HIGH WATER

MARK

Fig. 7

Section across the castern end of Eight Mile Creek Swamp about 20 chains east of

Bone Creek. (Partly based on levels by H. L. Fisk.)

197

present in moderately large amounts, and the latter in what would appear to be

small quantitics. In this connection they resemble the highly productive peat

soils of Egg Lagoon on King Island, Tasmania, as described by Stephens and

Hosking (4), which soils are also high in nitrogen and phosphate.

Organic carbon, which was determined by dry combustion, accounts for over

40% of some of the peats. It seems on the average to be a little lower in the

Badenoch peat than in the other named types. Carbon: nitrogen ratios are set

out in Table II1, and from them it is seen that the more humified character of the

Badenoch peat is reflected in lower values than in the Milstead and Orwell peats.

TaAsie II]

CARBON! NITROGEN RATIOS

Soil Values for surface soils

Badenoch peat - - 17-5 17-5 15:0

Orwell peat = - - 26°2 22-7

Milstead peat - - 28:2 26-2

Hitchcox peat - - 13-3 Gime horizon) 18-7 (upper peat horizon)

Included in Table IV are estimations of total soluble salts and chloride radicle-

At first sight some of these figures may appear somewhat high, but these estima-

tions are on air dry soils with moisture contents up to about 20%. In the field

these values will be diluted many times by the high proportion of water held in the

peat. However, the salt content of the Orwell and Milstead peats may be marginal

for some agricultural plants until decreased by the drainage system, The brown,

fine fibrous peat is definitely highly saline.

Pot experiments on the Badenoch, Orwell and Milstead peats indicate that

they may be deficient in copper, manganese, zine and boron for optimum plant

growth. Responses to phosphate and potash were also obtained.

The peat soils described above are all due to the accumulation of organic

maiter under the past and prevailing ecological conditions on the swamp, ‘That

there has been some variation in these conditions is indicated by the occasional

presence of the horizon bearing diatomaceous material, Recent variation 1s

reflected in the vegetation, and thus particularly in the nature of the surface

horizon in the different soil types. The simplest illustration of the structure of

the swamp, and of the relationship of the different peats to topographical detail,

is given by a north-south section (fig. 7) through the eastern end of the swamp,

some 20 chains east of Bone Creek. From this diagram can be seen the reason

for the variation in the nature of the basal material on which the peats lie—either

highly calcareous sand or polyzoal Iimestone. Also, it is apparent that the

Badenoch peat has developed on the best-drained sites, with the Orwell peat inter-

mediate between it and the lower situated Milstead peat. The Hitcheox peat, with

its Chara lime surface is confined to definite depressions in the floor of the swamp.

Other sections reveal that the Badenoch peat is not necessarily confined to the

highest sites but also occurs on slopes. As would be expected from its humihed

character, favourable drainage rather than elevation is the determining factor,

According to Tansley (5): “. ... the term marsh is applied to the ‘soil-

vegetation’ type in which the soil is water-logged, the summer water-level being

close to or conforming with the surface but not nornially much above the ground

level, and in which the soil has an inorganic (mineral) basis: fen to a correspond-

ing type (whose vegetation is closely similar) in which the soil is organic (peat )

but is somewhat or decidedly alkaline, nearly neutral or somewhat but not

extremely acid. Bog... . forms peat which is extremely acid. Swamp is used

for the type in which the normal summer level is above the soil surface.” Also,

198

Taste LV

ANALYTICAL DATA ON THE PEATS AND Soits or Exaut Mine Creek SwAMP

1 ——— —S

Soil trpe Badencch friable peat | Badenoch friable | Badenoch friable} Badenoch friable peat | Orwell coarse and fins

ae anes weet peat fibrous peat

Soil number - 7367 | 7368 | 7369 | 7370 / 7377 | 7378 | 7379 |7384 [ee 7386 | 7387 | 7388 | 7389 7390 [7363 | 7364 | 7365] 7306 |

Depth in inches O16 6-40 40-54 [54-62 | 0-14 [14-58 58-80 [0-15 15-52 |52-63 }O-12 12.38 ‘38-63 63-84 }o-10 0-20 20-60 0-32

PLE nla Baca - -

Organic carbon - He a - |40.3/ 42.11 40.4 134.1 - - [32-9 © Al.9 j 42.1; 16.4 [39.6 ire - -

Calcium carbonate - - - - 9.0] 0.0} 0.0 | 0.0 - a ©.0; 0.01 Oc] 0.0 | 2.9 = - -

Moieture - - - - (27.1) 18.3) 16.3 [24.3 - ~ 123.3: 28.6:16.11 9.3 ]15.0 - - -

Logs on ignition - - - - |73.5] 69.9 | 67.0 /60.7 - - 98.0) 70.3 70.4 | 28.8 /73.3

Water holding capacity Be + a - {417 | 267 | a6 on - -_ |332, | 265 | 221 | 522 cs

Yoluse weight 0.6] 0.7; 0.7} 1.2] 0.5] 0.6] 0.6 10.6) 0.7] 0.7 | 0.6) 0.7) 0.6] 0.2 | 0.3

Nitrogen % 1.35, + - - 2.30 2.3 1.59 | 1.95) - - 2.19 2,18 1.72 9.89] 1.51)

% KO) EG] extract - - ~ oo an Ges - - - - O17 - | Q.l2) *- -

% P2Cs) - - - - - - - ~ ~ - C.e2) ~- | 0,09) - ca

5 _| 4}

Total soluble salts 0.53] 0.19 oad 0.65! 0.67] 0.99

Chloride Clt C.09} 0.04 9.17) 6.22] 0.11) 0.35

ra aL t oer =i 4

Reection pt b.4 | 1.81 6.6 | o.3] 6.7 | 7.6

I» 1 = ag eee

= = PM eee ae

| : | Orwell coarse and fine Milstead coarse fitrous :

Soil type Pibrous peat Milsteead comrse fibrous peat peat Fitekeox limey peat’ |

Soil suxber 7300 7203 | 1353 (7399 '7360 (7361 7362 7 7 7 7350 } 7351 3

| }

Depth in inches O+k2 | 166-84 | 9-10 bine Cia: 42-58 | 58-8 ,

| Crganie carbon AC. -~ 37.8) 4 - ~ bo-

Caleium carbonate Frage: 77.0 27) = ye - [=

| wotature 15.6: On? [ia.3: + - an es

Loss on ignition 15.45 0.6 [77.2 5 - | = a Pg

| Water holding capacity 456 54 4 boa bg M .

Volume weight O38 ll 2.3) 0.4 | o7 a8. O.8

L. , 7

Nitrogen ~ 1.86 ms 1.41 2 if cao _

% Ka0) HCL extract C420 = - - - - -

% Po0s) 1 Oya - - * - jj - ms

1 errgeraba i EES ad

| Total soluble salts | B27 0.10 70.67 [0,61 (0,26 [0.11 |0,06

| chlerige clr 0.05 0,02 | 6.22 ;e.21 3.07 {0.93 |G.15

- Hy oe 7 = cries t

Reaction pH 6.9 a5 7.6 8.0 | 8.2 8.6 17

Soil type Shellew ¢ulcearecus | Pransitionel Brown, fine, Grey calcareous flinty Fixed calcareous sand

phase Milstoad peut peaty soi fibrous peat loam

ate a { a peal is

Soil number F394 |7395 | 7396 | TB9IL 17292 47393 | 7347 | 7383 | sag 7397 |7398 17399 |7400 F554 17355 | 7356 14357

Depth in inches O-5 [o-27] 27-aG | Gnd fo-ld 114-301 0-7 /7-30 130-42 O-7 | 7-16 |16-24/24-33 | 0-8 18-30 | 30-52 152-84

ay a“ aii ae 1 : f “- T T

Organic. carbon 22.6 5 = - 1l.6 - - [197.0 [12-4 | 7.6 vo - - 4.0 | = - -

Calcium carbonate Bl.g ¢ = - 29.5 [51.2 [31.1 | 45.5 [33.2 [29.3 49.2 131.4 125.0 |o6.1 74.4 [85.7 184,38 [86.5

Moisture Br ete - 8.6 | 4.9 | 4.1 3.0 | 7.5 | 5.4 4.3 | 2.3 oil & 1.8 | 0.4 1 6.2 | 0.3

Loss on ignition 39-4 | = - 23.5 |12.G | 6.5 | 33,2 |24,4 {14,2 21.8 ) 2.6 | 3.3 3 2.0 8.2 | 1.2 | 1.8 | 1.0

i : r te ; a i

Water holding capacity - te - - - - - - - - | - - - 90 58 34 39

Volume weight 0.5 (0.4 1.3 9.87 0.3 f Lb 0.4 | 6.7 | 0.9 0.8 | Lo | 1.3 | 1.2 1.0 | 11] 1.4 7) 1.3

t as ao : + ' m4 bE o arden

; Nitrogen % LATE - 4 O74 - - 3 : ve 3 x

% K20) HOL extract - 2. = ot + s

# P3205) - - [= - - op aL

spy aif sy canal —}

Total soluble salts 1.26 [0.53 : 0.20 C.33) C.43) C.15 ¢

Chloride Cl! 0.44/0.17 | C.04 Q.11/ 0-16] 9.04

Reaction pi 7.7 fr 1449 8.5 1 8.3 |] 8.4

t a 7 sh

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1943 Vol. 67, Plate XXVI

€

The upper horizons of the Badenoch The upper horizons of the Orwell

friable peat. coarse and fine fibrous peat.

The upper horizons of the Milstead The upper horizons of the Hitchcox

coarse fibrous peat. limey peat.

199

“In marsh, fen and swamp the waiter is telluric in origin, in bog it may or may

not be.”

ln view of the above definitions and the similarity between the waters and

soils of Eight Mile Creek Swamp and the English fens, there is no doubt that it

is a characteristic fen formation.

The author is indebted to Mr, H. Black, Resident Engineer of the South-

Eastern Drainage Board, for maps and other facilities; to Mr. B. C. Cotton, of the

south Australian Museum, for the identification of the fresh-water shells; and to

the Zoology Department of the University of Adelaide, for the examination of a

sample of the diatomaceous material. ;

REFERENCES

Earptey, C. M. 1943 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 67, (2), 200

Gopwin, H., and Turner, J. S., 1933 J. Ecol., 21, 235-262

PEArsaLL, WIL, 1918 J. Ecol., 6, 53-74

STEPHENS, C. G., and Hoskrna, J. S. 1932 C.S.LR. Bull. No. 70, 42-43

Tansey, A. G. 1939 The British Islands and their Vegetation. Cambridge

University Press

Teaxcr, L, J. H. 1937 J. Dept. Agric., W. Aust., 14, 404-424

Warp, L. KertH 1941 Bulletin No. 19, Dept. of Mines, S. Aust.

Wirson, B. D., and Sraker, EL. N. 1933 Cornell Univ. Expt. Stat. Mem. 149

AN ECOLOGICAL STUDY OF

THE VEGETATION OF EIGHT MILE CREEK SWAMP

A NATURAL SOUTH AUSTRALIAN COASTAL FEN FORMATION

By CONSTANCE M. EARDLEY, B.Sc.,

Systematic Botanist, Waite Agricultural Research Institute

Summary

The vegetational study of this swamp was undertaken in February, 1942,in conjunction with a soil

survey of the same area by Stephens (1943). The swamp is now being drained and cleared for

settlement, and reports on the soil and vegetation were drawn up for the South Australian Lands

Board. Stephens’ paper (1943) on the soils appears in the current volume of this journal and is

indispensably linked with the present one. The writer is indebted to Stephens for the data quoted on

the physical properties of the soils and waters, also for the preliminary field work and mapping and

the free use of these maps and soil profiles. Readers are referred to his paper for further necessary

information on the soils and peats and for a map of the area.

200

AN ECOLOGICAL STUDY OF

THE VEGETATION OF EIGHT MILE CREEK SWAMP

A NATURAL SOUTH AUSTRALIAN COASTAL FEN FORMATION

By Constance M. Earbiey, B.Sce.,

Systematic Botanist, Waite Agricultural Research Institute

[Read 9 September 1943]

PLates XXVIII to XXIX

CONTENTS Page

| JxrRopucrion ee a he he 1 ii a: hes le rd 200

Il THe Swamp AND Its ENVIRONMENT .. rae my wy ran get ga BOL

TI] Generar OUTLINE OF THE VEGETATION man a ia + Ms .. 204

IV Tue Imeortant Swamp ComMeunizirs DEscrIBED .. wf ft om mm 200

(a) The Aquatic Zone .. a 4 oa - 3 is H .. 206

Gi) Nasturtium—Potamogeton Association .. of 4 , .. 206

(ii) Phragmites—Typha Association .. os Le b as .. 207

(b) The Sedge Meadow and its Variations .... a ae a a 210

(d) The Shrub-and-Sedge Community .. ° .. ay f os . 2l4

V Apjacent AREAS... eh ns & .e - 7 ia 1 gee

(ec) Eucalypt Woodland sa 4 ed es, be 2 of a0 G2:

(f) Grassland... a. ss Hf vs re we 1 ba .. 216

(g) Littoral as T 38 a fe 4a a rs dt = 2

VI Ture Water TABLE AND THE PLAnr ASSOCIATIONS .. 9 7 7 af 218

VIL Prosau.et History or THE SwAMe ak: wt “4 i a ' 219

VIII Summary * oe es vis Be he "2 ee e a i 221

TIX ACKNOWLEDGMENTS a i. 3 be i mm i: 2 .. 222

222

BIBLIOGRAPHY

I INTRODUCTION

‘The vegetational study of this swamp was undertaken in February, 1942, in

conjunction with a soil survey of the same area by Stephens (1943). ‘The swamp

is now being drained and cleared for settlement, and reports on the soil and vege-

tation were drawn up for the South Australian Lands Board. Stephens’ paper

(1943) on the soils appears in the current volume of this journal and is indispens-

ably linked with the present one. The writer is indebted to Stephens for the data

quoted on the physical properties of the soils and waters, also for the preliminary

field work and mapping and the free use of these maps and soil profiles. Readers

are referred to his paper for further necessary information on the soils and peats

and for a map of the area.

Plant determinations were made by the writer, using the resources of the

Adelaide University Herbarium: and Mr. J. M. Black’s private herbarium; the

nomenclature of the South Australian plants is that of Black’s “Flora of South

Australia,” pt. i (2nd Ed., 1943), pts. ii-iv (1924-1929) and annual “Additions.”

The synonymy of the English and American plants given is less well-known

to the writer, and many standard works of reference have had to be employed,

with sometimes conflicting results; the significance of this will appear in the section

on “The Aquatic Zone.”

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 67, (2), 30 Navember 1943

201

The specimens collected at Eight Mile Creek are deposited in the Herbarium

of the Waite Agricultural Research Institute. No systematic determinations of

algae were made, and the mosses present were not of much ecological importance.

Ii THE SWAMP AND ITS ENVIRONMENT

ight Mile Creck Swamp is situated in the south-eastern corner of the State,

within a few miles of the Victorian border, immediately behind the littoral dunes

and sands. This part of South Australia is, for the most part, fairly flat country,

and contains many swampy areas over a widespread region; it is the largest well-

watered area in the State, and this is only partly due to precipitation,

The rainfall is a winter one and ranges from 25-33” in the area bounded by

Millicent, Mount Gambier, Cape Northumberland and Eight Mile Creek. Figures

are available for Cape Northumberland, only ten miles away, which give a suffi-

ciently accurate picture of the climate of Eight Mile Creek. They are as set out

below in Table A, and were supplied by Stephens,

Taste A Meteorological data, Cape Northumberland

Evaporation (E)

calculated from

Month Rainfall (1?) relative humidity P/E

in inches and mean

temperatures

January 0-87 4-4 0-20

February 0-99 4-8 0-21

March 1°12 3-9 0-29

April 2-05 3-0 0-68

May 3-16 2-1 1-50

June 3-93 1-6 2:46

July 3°90 1-4 2:79

August 3-50 1-8 1-94

September 2-41 2:3 1-09

October 1-92 3° 2. 0-60

November 1°40 3-7 0-38

December 1°28 4-4 0:29

Aver. Annual Totals 26°63 36°6 0°73

Great quantities of drainage water also reach this corner of the South-East,

underground, from Victorian sources, Such water is sure to have an enhanced

mineral content; indeed, it largely passes through limestone country and hence is

alkaline and. highly calcareous. Under these conditions it is not to be expected

that the oligotrophic vegetation characteristic of an ombrogenous bog of low

mineral content would develop.

The raised bogs or “Hochmoor” common in Europe are examples of ombro-

genous bogs. They consist usually of a dense mass of Sphagnum and have a

convex surface; they can be formed only in areas with a high P/E ratio,

being watered by rainwater alone, which is low in soluble salts, The acid

peat, normally formed from decaying plants under damp conditions, is not

neutralised or made alkaline by ground-water draining into the bog. Drainage

water is the cause of the alkaline reaction of peats of the topogenous or

fen type.

Different plants characterise these alkaline or nearly alkaline fen peats. They

are eutrophic species with high mineral requirements, and Sphagnuin is notably

absent. As soon as the peat is built up above the level of the alkaline ground water,

202

unmodified acid peats are produced, and colonisation by oligotrophic plants, like

Sphagnum, may take place, as Godwin and Turner (1933) have shown at Cal-

thorpe Broad in Norfolk.

None of the peats of Eight Mile Creek Swamp is more than slightly acid—

mest are neutral to alkaline (pH 5-8-8°8)—and they bear a fen vegetation, includ-

ing many well-known cosmopolitan, eutrophic, swamp species. No Sphagnum

was found; it is also absent from the acid bogs of the Mount Lofty Ranges. ‘The

only record of its occurrence in South Aust ralia is in the lower South-East area

now under consideration, in a locality within 40 miles of Eight Mile Creek Swamp

(Crocker and Eardley, 1939). It is interesting to note that though this Sphagnum

eecurred mainly on open swampy depressions with some rushes and scdges, on

soil haying a pli value of 4-3 in the surface horizon, these flats were surrounded by

a dense thicket of one or both of the identical tea-tree species forming the climax

association on Eight Mile Creck Swamp, and the Sphagnum was found even

among the dense stems of this thicket. Godwin and Turner (1933) also record

Sphagnuin in a fen scrub or “carr” formation in Nortolk.

Many of the swamps in the South-East have been greatly altered by dramage,

clearing and cultivation. The swamp described here, and also one or two smaller

ones of the same type (but not yet examined) further along the coast to the cast,

are among the last to remain in a virgin state.

Kight Mile Swamp extends about five miles along the coast and no more than

two miles inland, Its waters come from precipitation, surface drainage and a

series of spring ponds scattered about the swamp, which run over into creeks, of

which Eight Mile in the centre is the largest emptying naturally into the sea.

Another creck, Deep Creek, reached the sea at the same place w/a a long micander

in the coastal barrier, but has now a shorter, artificial exit. None of the other

creeks reaches the sea directly, and many, like Bone Creek at the east and Badenoch

Creck at the west end. simply flooded out over the swainp, probably giving an

abnormally high water level in their immediate neighbourhood.

Since 1937, many drains have been made leading these blind creeks to the sea

or into the two largest, and ponds have had their overflows drained in the same

way. The swamp is now becoming drier, as may be seen by comparing present

conditions with those recorded by H. 1. Fisk’s traverses of 1938-40 (South Aus-

tralian [ands Department), The period between his first survey and the present

one—three and a half years—is too short to show successional changes in the

vegetation, except by deliberate experiments, of which there were nonce, and few

indications of such changes were obtained, According to Fisk, the elevation of

the swamp is from four to ten fect above extreme high water mark and the coastal

harrier up to ten feet above it, except in the eastern third where there are sand

ridges at least thirty feet above sea level,

The peat has an average depth of five or six Teet (1°5-1°8 m.), and it 1s

formed in a trough running parallel to the coastline (see Stephens, 1943, fig. 7).

The landward wall and floor of the trough consist of Miocene polyzoal limestone,

and the seaward wall consists of fixed calcareous dunce sand, changing to grey

caleareous sand under the peat, where it overlies the limestone layer,

As yet, we have little clue to the possible age of this peat deposit. and there

is no detailed knowledge of post-Pleistocene climatic changes here as there is for

western Europe, but see Crocker (1941). Sometimes clayey peats or diatomaceous

earths oceur between the lowest peat and the Miocene limestone, which

suggest a period of uneven, shallow inundation. The species found in

the diatomaceous carth were identified by the Zoology Department of the

University of Adelaide as belonging to the genera Navicula, Cyinbella and

Syuedra (v. Mahony, 1912).

203

Nothing was seen in the peat profiles to suggest that its formation has been

discontinuous, and the depth of between five and six feet (1-5-1-8 m.) is quite

comparable with peat depths in the English fens and around the Norfolk Broads.

Godwin’s numerous “Studies of the post-glacial history of British wegetation”

show that the depth of the fen peats is commonly of the order of two or three

metres; Wicken Fen is one of the deeper peats and has 385 cm. (124 ft.) of nearly

pure peat (Godwin and Clifford, pt. iii, 1940). There are rare cases of much

deeper peats in the fens, but they are due to special conditions (e.g., “Old Decoy,”

a former river bed, has peat 625 cms, deep, Godwin and Clifford, Le.). There is

an intrusive layer of clay here in the scaward part of the fens, dividing the peat

into upper and lower layers (Godwin and Clifford, pt. ii, 1939). Godwin here

describes a cross-country section, 17 miles long, showing that the upper peat and

the fen clay beneath are continuous for that distance; the depth of the upper peat

was from two to five fcet. Wicken Fen is outside the range of the fen clay and

has a single layer of peat approximately twice as deep (Godwin and Clifford,

pt. m1, 1940),

Godwin, who has correlated climatic history, forest zoncs and archaeological

periods from work on [english peats, considers that peat formation became general

in the fens in the Atlantic climatic period, during Neolithic times—say 3,500 years

B.C. (Godwin and Clifford, pt. i and ii, 1939). And though it would be rash to

postulate similar rates of formation for the closely similar peats of Eight Mile

Creelc Swamp, it is reasonable to suppose that these latter peats were formed under

climatic conditions at least as warm as those of the fens, and that therefore the

growth rate of the constituent plants would not have been any slower on account

of the temperature factor. Water is unlikely to be a factor limiting plant growth

an a swamp—it controls the type of community, but all are dense. The conclusion

is that our peats have probably formed at least as quickly as the English ones, and

that, therefore, the Eight Mile Creek peat is probably younger than the slightly

deeper ones of the fens, %¢., does not date back as far as 3,500 B.C.

The reed-swamp vegetation of Eight Mile Creck is so like that of the Norfolk

Broads, even to the extent of sharing important dominant species, as. will presently

be shown, that one does not hesitate to compare formation rates of this type of

peat in the two places, with due regard only to the varying masses of material

likely to have been formed under the two kinds of climate. Both places also have

similar types of fen scrub (“carr” in England, “tea-tree thicket” in South Aus-

tralia), but here one must also consider the possibility of differential rates of peat

formation, on the one hand by Aheamnus spp. or an alder-willow-birch carr, and

on the other hand by the evergreen Myrtaceous genera, Melaleuca and Lepto-

spermum, of the South Australian tea-tree thicket. This is an important point,

because tea-tree peat is the most plentiful type at Eight Mile Creek, and its rate

of formation would be the critical one in assessing the age of the swamp. No

literature has been seen dealing with relative formation rates of peats from

different vegetation types, but the necessary information for such an analysis is

accumulating.

Raised Sphagnum bogs of the ombrogenous type have usually a much deeper

layer of peat than topogenous fens. They are not so well known in England, but

Godwin et al. have studied a few profiles, eis.: (1) on the Somerset Levels by the

Severn Estuary (Godwin and Clifford, pt. vi, 1941), and (2) at Tregaron in

Wales (Godwin and Mitchell, 1938), which show about two metres of fen peat

at the base, with three to six metres of Sphagnum peat above, giving a total depth

of as much as 8-5 metres (about 28 ft.) at Tregaron. Godwin considers

the latter peat older than that of the fens, but the decp Somerset peat roughly

the same age.

204

Tansley (1939) reproduces two records of borings made by Osvald in raised

bogs of the central limestone plain, at Athlone and Edenderry, in Ireland, In

both, the upper layer of acid moss peat (Sphagiiwmn) is about 4°5 metres thick, and

below is a further 3-25-4:25 metres of alkaline fen and reed-swamp peat, ie.,

8-75 metres (about 29 ft.) in all, even deeper than the Tregaron peat. Probably

the depth of a fen peat is linnted by the necessary condition of being within reach

of ground water. With raised bogs there is not this limitation, and they grow

higher and higher, Depths for peats of both types in Tasmania and the adjacent

King Island were supplied by Stephens. They were just over 40 inches, except

for a reed-swamp peat intermixed with clay, up to 65 inches deep. In South Aus-

tralia, the Mount Compass acid peats probably attain a depth of eight feet in parts.

Hight Mile Creek Swamp was probably far too wet and impenetrable in the

past for much human interference, Now that clearing has started, the almost

solid tea-tree thicket is being rolled (pl. xxix, fig. 9), and the fallen débris is to be

burnt in. siti.

The vegetation was found to be an excellent guide in mapping the boundaries

of the four important swamp-soil types. This is only logical, for they are all peats,

and peats are essentially plant remains, depending for much of their individual

character on the species of plant from which they are derived.

The swamp is probably a mature one, in equilibrium with the environmental

conditions recently destroyed, and occurs in a region whose climatic climax is a

sclerophyll forest dominated by Eucalyptus spp., though the surrounding country

is now cleared and settled. On the seaward side, the swamp abuts normal coastal

plant formations, and some mutual modifications may be detected.

lll GENERAL OUTLINE OF THE VEGETATION

The vegetation of the swamp consists maiuly of various tea-trees of the family

Myrtaceae, with occasional Eucalypts, and a large selection of reeds, rushes and

sedges. On the landward margin there are transition Eucalypt woodlands on

transitional svils, also a certain amount of grassland probably subject to occasional

inundation. The littoral vegetation on the seaward side has already been meti-

uoned.,

It will be shown that the Eight Mile Creek Swamp formation bears many

resemblances to the alkaline fens of East Anglia in England. The most important

environmental factors in swamp formations are: (1) the height of the water-table

and its variations, (2) the mineral content and pl of the eround water, (3)

climate, including rainfall.

The general trend of succession in fens is well established. Virst, the waters

are gradually blocked up by the accumulation of aquatic plants which detain silt,

making a sintable medium for the growth of reeds; these, in turn, build up the soil

a little higher and are replaced by other plants, until finally a dry-land woodland

ss established. This process of “Verlandung” is usually arrested at some equili-

brium point, but examples have been studied by Godwin and Turner (1933) at

Calthorpe Lroad; also by Pearsall (quoted by Tansley, 1939) at Esthwaite Water

in the Mnglish Lake District, where progress along such lines was demonstrated

by observations made at an interval of 15 years.

No such comparisons are available for Eight Mile Creck; it is expected that

the gradual drainage of the area would speed up the process. The drying of the

peat will naturally cause shrinkage or wastage and a sinking surface level, The

drains which are always wet do not sink in this way, and, in the English fens,

pumps often have to be installed to continue drainage. The course of natural

succession in a fen may be seen either in time or space. It may also be seen by

identifying the plant remains in the successive layers of peat.

205

If the terms “marsh,” “fen,” “bog,” and “swamp” are accurately used

(according to Tansley’s definitions, 1939), Eight Mile Creck must be described as

swamp and fen country. The points of importance for these designations are:

(1) water régime, (2) amount of organic matter present, and (3) pH value of

the soils.

There is strong correlation between the behaviour of the watertable at Eight

Mile Creek Swamp and the different vegetation types. Godwin and Bharucha,

pl. ii (1932), have demonstrated such a relationship very precisely in Wicken Fen,

and conclude that the maximum winter water level is the controlling factor in the

formation of fen scrub or “carr,” which is only found on soil above winter water

level. There is less information available about the water level changes in Eight

Mile Creek Swamp, and they would be complicated by the recent drainage policy

(but see Ward, 1941, for the seasonal Huctuation of the ground-water table in the

South-East).

The swamp soils will be discussed in detail in connection with the associated

vegetation, of which there are the following lour main types:

(1) Dense Tea-tree thicket, about 14 feet high, the dominant and most wide-

spread community on the swamp.

(2) A more open and lower shrub community with low sedges between the

bushes.

(3) A sedge meadow (\Veaver and Clements, 1929) of these same low

sedges alone.

(4) Aquatic communitics of water plants, together with reed-scamps mar-

ginal to the streams and ponds.

Besides these, the communities of the adjacent areas must not be neglected,

they are:

(5) Eucalypt woodland.

(6) Grassland,

(7) Littoral plants of the more or less stabilised sands,

The first four communities form a series, and, in a normal hydrarch succes-

sion, would replace each other on decreasingly wet soils in the following order :—

aquatic communities (4), sedge meadow (3), shrub-and-sedge (2), culminating in

the tea-tree thicket (1) of the soils mainly above flood level. Here and there a

stage is skipped, and, e.g., reed-swamp (4) and tea-tree thicket (1) grow in juxta-

position beside a pond. The shrub-and-sedge zone (2) is definitely intermediate

in character and position between the sedge meadow (3) and the tea-tree thicket

(1), growing on an intermediate type of peat and usually fringing the tea-tree

thicket.

These four swamp communities and the three adjacent formations will now

be described in detail, Ina later section, on the probable history of the swamp,

evidence is brought forward to show that succession has proceeded in the reverse

direction, in comparison with the classic type of hydrosere in which “Verlandung”

is taking place,

ITuman interference with the swamp has been small until recently. The

official drainage scheme began only in 1937; rolling and burning in 1941 and 1942

respectively—the burning not until after this vegetation survey. There was cer-

tainly some burning of the margins and probably clearing of the two main creek

channels before this. One such recently burnt patch had been monopolised by

three very similar native bushes of the family Compositae (Senecio lautus,

S. orarins and Erechthites prenanthoides) ; Cirsium lanceolatum (Scotch Thistle)

was an alien weed also invading here and elsewhere.

206

IV. THE IMPORTANT SWAMP COMMUNITIES DESCRIBED

(PL xxvii; fig. 1, 2, 3, and 4)

(a) Tue AQUATIC ZONE.)

(i) Nasturtium 0 fficinale—Potamogeton pectinatus Association.

‘The hydrophytes (submerged and partly submerged aquatics) of the flow-

ing streams and still ponds are mainly freshwater plants, though some have

quite a tolerance for brackish water (c.g., Ruppia, Phragmites communis,

Triglochin procera, Potamogeton pectinatus). Ruppia, indeed, has been

found in an evaporating salt-lake (Wood and Baas Becking, 1937).

The waters are generally calcareous and rarely saline. Representative

samples of free water from various ponds, drains and creeks on the swamp

eave pH values of 7°23, 7°63, 7°74 and 8-09, and the soluble salts ranged

irom 28:72 grains per gallon in Eight Mile Creek itself (a good domestic-

purposes water) to values of 60, 74, 82 and 83 (still potable waters) in ponds

and smaller creeks and drains; about half these salts were in the form of

chloride (Stephens, 1943). No saline water was actually obtained [or

analysis, but an almost dry swamp at the east end had a decidedly saline soil;

its vegetation will be considered in the next section on the sedge meadow.

The soils of the reed-swamp themselves were so close to open water that their

profiles were not examined, no doubt they consisted mainly of reed-peat

(including Triglochin peat).

The dominant species was Water Cress (Nasturtium officinale), which

occurred in great masses, as large as a rowing boat, from deep down in the

water to the surface, olten filling the stream. Local dominance was assumed

by Potamogeton pectinatus, called “Water Mat.” This is one of a group of

closely related species of water plants which share a grass-like habit; they are

practically indistinguishable when not in flower. Ruppia maritima and

‘Althenia Preissii should undoubtedly be added to the group of “Water Mats,”

though rarely seen in flower in February, 1942. :

The submerged aquatics were:

Nasturtium officinale.) Water Cress—introduced, D.©

Potamogeton pectinatus.) A Water Mat—very common. Local D.

Ruppia maritima,

Althenia Preissii (now Lepilaena Preissit). Slender Water Mat.

Myriophyllum elatinoides, “Sheoak Weed,” Water Milfoil.

Hydrocotyle vulgaris.) Marsh Pennywort (and half submerged).

Lilacopsis? Not seen flowering. Large specimens in deep water—probably

needs shallow water for flowering.

Characeac. “Set-net,” stonewort (Chara or Nitella).

Eleocharis acuta (and half submerged).

Ranunculus rivularis? Not seen flowering,

Lemna minor.) Duckweed, A small surface plant in still waters.

Epilobium sp. Occasionally found quite submerged, but not flowering.

Various freshwater Algae.

O) J. M. Black, 1943, makes the following relevant names changes :—Phragmites com-

munis Trin. becomes Ph. vulgaris (Lamk.) Crép.; Alihenia Preissti (Lehm.) Graebn. becomes

Lepilaena Preissti (Lehm.) F. v. M.; Scirpus lacustris 1. becomes S. validus Vahl.; the form

Eleocharis is adopted in place of Heleocharts; Cladium rubiginosum (Soland.) Domin, of the

“Additions” reverts to C. glomeratum R. Br. of the First Edition; Carer pseudo-cyperus

R. Br, not of L., becomes C. fascicularis Soland. ex Hook. f.

@) = spp. found in England.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1943

TasLe B* Comparative Lists or Aguatic SPECIES IN SouTH AUSTRALIA, IN East ANGLIA, AND IN NorTH AMERICA

EIGHT MILE CREEK SWAMP,

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

REEDSWAMP

Phragmites comntunis, Common Reed D

Typhe angustifolia, Cumbungi, Bulrush D

Triglochin procera, local D

Olearia (ramulosa ?), local D

Cladium Mariscus, large sedge, but not tussock

EAST ANGLIAN FENS AND BROADS

(ENGLAND) (v. Tansley, 1939)

REEDSWAMP

Phragmites communis D

DISTRIBUTION

Cosmopolitan ; persists in soil above water level

Typha angustifolia, Lesser Reedmace

Typha latifolia, Greater Reedmace D

Cosmopolitan (v. discussion)

An Australian endemic sp. Small, unimportant spp.

Australia

Cosmopolitan (v. disctission) Cladium Mariscus, Saw Sedge D

habit, local D

Scirpus lacustris (S. lacuster in Black's Flora

—now S. validus)

S. americanus Pers. (= S. pungens Wahl. ?)

Sium latifolium var. univittatum, Water Parsnip

Cosmopolitan (vy. discussion) Scirpus lacustris forms., Bulrush D

America, Australia, Europe S. pungens in Jersey

An Australian var. of a European type Sium latifolium and S. erect

Gahnia psittacorum

Eleocharis acuta. Also sedge meadow

Cladium articulatum

Carex pseudocyperus (now C. fascicwlaris)

Juncus caespiticius :

J. pallidus; also drier habitats

Urtica incisa, also in thickets, Stinging Nettle

Polygonum serrulatwn

Cf., similar habit of great tussock-forming

sedges, Carex paniculata and C. acutiformis

Eleocharis palustris R. Br. Similar habit and

range

Australia

Southern hemisphere

Australia

Cosmopolitan (v. discussion)

Carex pseudocyperus and many other C. spp.

Australia [

Australia §

Australian form of cosmopolitan U, dioica

Many other Juncus spp.

Urtica dioica, also in fen carr;

almost same sp. as Australian plant

P. lapathifolinm, Cornwall; also Australia

Australia and Old World

Epilobium glabellum and pallidiflorum, some

quite submerged

SUBMERGED AQUATICS

Nasturtium officinale, naturalized D

Potamogeton pectinatus, sub- D | Same

Ruppia maritima grass-like

Althenia Preissii J habit

Myriophyllum elatinoides

Hydrocotyle vulgaris

Lemna iminor, Duckweed

Ranunculus rivularis ?

Lilacopsis (Crantsia) ? ©

Characeae. Not studied

Algae. Not studied

) Not in flower.

Epilobiwm, other spp., some submerged forms.

Willow-herbs

Australia and New Zealand

SUBMERGED AQUATICS

Northern Europe and Asia. Widely natural- N. officinale, Common Water-cress

ized. Native Nasturtium spp. occur in

Australia and America also

Potamogeton pectinatus forma D

Ruppia maritima

Cosmopolitan

Cosmopolitan. Various forms exist

Australian sp. Others in W. Mediterranean

Australia, New Zealand, South America

Australia, Europe, Africa

Water Milfoil

Some-

Myriophyllum, other spp.

Great habitat range in fen.

H. vulgaris.

times D

Leina otinor and other cosmopolitan Lemnaccae

A cosmopolitan family

Australia, New Zealand Ranunculus fluitans and R. circinatus

Australia, New Zealand, South America

Chara and Nitella are cosmopolitan Chara

Many types are cosmopolitan Algae

NORTH AMERICAN SWAMPS

(v. Weaver and Clements, 1929)

Phragmites communis, Reed Bulrush D

Typha angustifolia, Cat-tail

Typha latifolia, Cat-tail D

T. striata R. & P. A small, unimportant sp.;

also at Eight Mile Creek

Cladium jamaicense Crantz, closely related

Scirpus validus Vahl. Great Bulrush D

Scirpus americanus Pers.

Stam spp.

E. palustris, Spike Rush D U Sedge

Cf. Cladium juncemn, in Aust. & N.Z. D J meadow

Carex, many spp. In sedge meadow

Juncus spp.

Urtica dioica, Stinging Nettle

Polygonum, sp., floating, Smartweed

Epilobium spp.

N. officinale, naturalized

Potamogeton pectinatus

Ruppia maritima

Myriophyllum, other spp.

Hydrocotyle, other spp.

Lemna minor

Ranunculus spp., (c.g. R. aquatilis), v. closely

related to English and other S. Aust. forms

Chara

Algae

* Tdentical or closely related spp., in the two or three countries are indicated by underlining.

207

(ii) Phragmites communis—Typha angustifolia Association.

Surrounding the open water of ponds or banking that of the creeks and

rapidly invading the clear channels, is the well-known reed-swamp formation ;

some of its members can grow submerged, but normally they stand well above

the water surface. The dominants of the reed-swamp are the cosmopolitan

Phragmites communis and Typha angustifoha, Important plants of the

formation are:

Phragmites communis® (now Ph. vulgaris). Common Reed, Bamboo Reed. D.

Typha angustifolia.®) Bulrush or Cumbungi (Australia), Reedmace (Eng-

jand), Cat’s-tail (America). D.

Triglochin procera, Local D.

Olearia ramulosa, Water Cypress. Local D.

Suan latifolium var. untvittatum.“ Water Parsnip. Common here, but rare

in South Australia.

Gahnia psittacorum. May be dominant around ponds. Parrot Sedge, Giant

Sword Rush.

Fleocharis acuta,

Cladium Mariscus.@) May be dominant around ponds. Pom-Pom Rush (Saw

Sedge in England).

C. articulatum.,

Scirpus americanus, Bayonet Rush.

S. lacustris’ (S. lacuster in Black—-now S. validus). Tooley Rush.

Carex pseudocyperus ® (now C. fascicularis).

Juncus caespiticius,

J. pallidus. Pale Rush.

Urtica incisa, Stinging Nettle.

Polygonum serrulatum.,

Epilobium glabellum ita

E, pallidiflorum MitHow Tesh

Cassytha glabella (occasional).

Mentha gracilis and Mimulus sp. or Magus sp. Small ground plants,

occasional on the bank.

Many of these plants are quite at home in a drier environment than a reed-

swamp, often with an altered habit of growth. The list probably does not

account for all the Cyperaceae and Juncaceae to be found in this habitat,

which would repay more intensive study. The striking thing about reed-

swamps is the cosmopolitan nature, not only of their general appearance, but

of the constituent species, many of which are identical in widely separated

parts of the globe, and others merely closely-related variants. This applies

also to other types of aquatic communities (Wood and Baas Becking, 1937).

Eight Mile Creek consists of swamp and fen country, obviously compar-

able to the English fens of East Anglia, and it will be of interest to set out the

parallelism in the vegetation. Such close correspondence does not exist

between land-plant formations, or even acid bogs of Australia and Europe

(v. Wood and Baas Becking, 1937). Now refer to Table B, where some

information on North American swamps is also included.

There are good examples of rapid spread of water plants, when introduced

to new countries, which may help to explain the almost universal occurrence

of the dominants in a given climatic zone, vizg.: Nasturliuim officinale (Water

Cress), a European and Western Asiatic plant naturalised in America and the

British Colonies; the North American Hlodea canadensis, which spread with

such spectacular rapidity in Britain in the second half of last century and is

now found in most countries, often as a pest, though not yet recorded as

spontaneous in South Australia; and Lichhornia speciosa (Water Hyacinth),

208

a native of Florida and South America, now a nuisance in Australia,

India, ete. We believe Phragmites and Typha, etc., to be genuine natives, but

something sintlar may have happened in the distant past; the possibility of

seed transport by water-fowl may have some connection with this extensive

distribution.

With species so widespread as this, one cannot avoid having doubts about

their taxonomic identity, and a world-wide field and cabinet study of the

species 1s needed, though the cosmopolitan nature of water plants is familiar

from text books { Warming, 1909).

Some studies of this kind have been made on Cladiuin Mariscus, in Britain

by Conway (1936-42), where it is common in certain localities only, e.g., East

Anglia, especially Wicken len; also by Blake (1943), with particular refer-

ence to forms from the Pacific region. Cladium Mariscus sens. lat. has a

global distribution, many of the forms are now ordinarily known by other

specific names and fairly well defined geographically. Blake, an Australian

specialist on the Cyperaceae, 1s of the opinion that the Australian plant should

also be considered a distinct species, as it is a further geographical form, and

has published it as C. procerum S. T. Blake (1943). There is no doubt that

these forms should be distinguished in some suitable way, but the method of

giving them distinct specific names causes the ordinary worker to lose sight

of the fact that this group of species exists and is much more closely inter-

related than most others of the genus, In this particular case, a system of

sub-specific geographical names would probably be workable. Hitherto the

Australian form has been accepted as identical with the European one.

Scirpus lacustris L. is another example; the Western American form has

been known as S. validus Vahl. for some time. Blake quotes the work of

Beetle (1941 and 1942), who finds that the Australian form agrees with

S. validus which has a circum-DPucifie distribution, S, lacustris being restricted

to Europe with a variety in Asia (Blake, 1943). Bentham and Hooker (1908)

mention varieties of this species, but accept it as cosmopolitan,

Carex pseudocyperus 1s not now considered to include the Southern

Hemisphere forms, and the Australian plant is to be known as C. fascicularis

Boott.

Black (1943) accepts the last two changes, but not that of Cladium

Mariscus. These problems of identity should be kept in mind when studying

the comparative table of species (Table B). In the past, many of these

names have heen quoted as synonyms, which is not quite accurate.

Typha is also a taxonomically difficult genus, and Melvaine (1940) has pub-

lished a revision of the New South Wales material, and comes to the con-

clusion that the Australian specimens are “not definitely identical” with the

European, stressing the necessity for a good field knowledge of the habit.

The present writer was not equipped with “a good field knowledge” of Typha,

so followed Black (1st and 2nd Ed.) in naming the specimens. Black con-

siders our Sivim a variety of S. latfolium ; and no critical work on Phragmites

has been seen. Potamogeton pectinatus and Ruppia maritima are both known

to have variants; these have not been studied in South Australia where water

plants are relatively unimportant. There also appears to be close relationship

between some of the aquatic species of Ranunculus,

In the other cases, the corresponding species are not quite so closely

related, and for Gahnia psittacorui it is legitimate to make a comparison with

the great tussock-forming sedges, Carex paniculata and C. acutiformis, com-

posing the reed-swamp in some of the Norfolk Broads. Many of the

209

Cyperaceae run very much to type in different geographical areas. A further

examination of the réed-swamp at Eight Mile Creek would probably group

G. trifda, and perhaps Cladtuim filuan (which are also large tussock sedges

practically indistinguishable even when in flower) with G, psittacorum, both

in this habitat and in drier ones.

The presence of Olcaria (vamulosa?) in the reed-swamp is interesting; it

is a bushy plant which often completely lines the sides of creeks and grows

out into the centre, soon blocking the channel with a mass of roots in the

water and leafy branches above it. This Olearia sp. is a small-leaved Com-

posite and most unlike all the other members of the reed-swamp,. Two

Olearia spp. were found at Eight Mile Creek. Most species of this genus

are very difficult to determine or distinguish, even when in flower.

Triglochin procera is endemic in Australia and occurs widespread in fresh

and brackish waters of all the States. Small specimens have also been seen

in an acid Sphagnum bog in South Australia. It has not a widely accepted

common name, but belongs to the “Arrowgrass” genus, and is probably the

largest and tallest of the genus, as the specific name indicates, The

specimens found growing in the deep waters of Eight Mile Creek and its

ponds are giants, with leaves long, narrow and ribbon-lke, in a group grow-

ing straight up from the mud, in this case often 150-180 cm. below the surface

of the water. There is a cylindrical flower-stalk in the centre hearing a dense

spike of small flowers above water-level; the leaves stand out of the water

and usually have their distal portions drooping over and floating on the sur-

face. The average width of the leaves, as described in various floras, is about

1:2 cm., with a maximum of 3:2 cm. The specimens found had leaves fleshy

below and up to 7'7 cm. broad, and flowering spikes 4 cm. in diameter. Inter-

mediate sizes of T. procera were found, between the giants and the barely

recognisable, moribund plants on the areas with a limey surface soil and saline

peat. These apparently started to grow in a shallow, drying swamp and

literally became stranded.

Triglochin has large, tough, fibrous rhizomes which present a great

obstacle to cutting the waterways clear of vegetation. They may also form a

very thick layer of plant remains, decaying, at first, as hollow tubes 2-3 cm.

in diameter. Sods of such material had been cut out of Hitchcox Drain when

enlarging it, and were locally called “hassocks.” These rhizomes contain

much starchy tissue and bear a great mass of fleshy roots: below, some with

tubers attached, and a coating of fibres from old leaf-bascs on the upper side.

The genus is cosmopolitan and not very large. Of the two British species,

T. maritima grows in salt-marshes and has a rhizome and root system very

like those of T. procera (Tansley, 1939). Triglochin spp. do not seem to be

important in Britain or the United States, except for TI. marituma, which has

becn recorded as an HCN-containing poison plant of damp meadows in the

United States (Marsh et al., 1929). JT. maritima is apparently a strictly

coastal salt-marsh plant in Britain, and Godwin and Clifford, pl. iv (1940),

found some “Triglochin clay” deposits among the peats of the East Anglian

Fens, containing recognisable Triglachin remains, This was taken as evidence

of the marine or tidal deposition of the clay. The Australian 7. procera is

certainly not an indicator of saline conditions.

The English “reed-grass” swamps, in which aquatic grasses like Glyceria,

Phalaris arundinacea and Moltnia are dominant, in place of the sedges and

rushes, might be mentioned. Associations of this type are of doubtful

occurrence in South Australia. Apart from the important dominants dis-

cussed earlier, the reed-swamps have a certain degree of geographical imdi-

viduality in species and genera.

(b)

210

_ Pidgeon (1940) describes communities fairly similar to those at Eight

Mile Creek Swamp for the early stages of brackish-water and freshwater-

river successions in the coastal area of New South Wales.

THe SEDGE MEADOW AND ITS VARIATIONS.

(PI. xxviii; fig. 5, 6, 7 and 8)

Cladium junceum—C. glomeratum Association.

This area is generally evenly covered with a dense growth of one par-

ticular sedge, Cladium junceum (Blue Wire-rush), about 30-70 em. high;

sometimes with a small admixture of the almost indistinguishable C. glomera-

tum (C. rubiginosum) and, in places, the latter is the dominant constituent,

but the meadow can properly be called a Cladietum. Weaver and Clements

(1929) quote such a sedge meadow for North American swamps, dominated

by an Eleocharts-Carex-Juncus complex; the Spike-rush here (Eleocharis

palustris R. Br.) is similar in habit to our Cladium junceum. Pidgeon (1940)

cites C. junceum as a dominant in one stage of brackish-water succession in

the central coastal area of New South Wales, though she does not describe a

pure meadow society of it; and Wood and Baas Becking (1937) record it as

a peat-former in an acid bog (pH 4:0-4°5) at Mount Compass in South Aus-

tralia, Tansley treats these marsh meadows under grassland, and also under

reed-swamp, giving Juncus effusus L. as the dominant plant, with other

Juncus spp. and sometimes Eleocharis palustris R. Br., as in North America.

The sedge meadow is the characteristic vegetation of Stephens’ Milstead

coarse fibrous peat soil type, the surface horizon obviously consisting mainly

of the dark-brown, undecomposed mass of sedge rhizomes and roots, giving a

springy surface. Lower down, the material is more decomposed, and the peat

reaches a depth of 66 inches. The significance of the vertical sequence of the

peat types will be discussed for all of them in the section on “The Probable

History of the Swamp.” The present vegetation differences are associated with

the distinctive surface horizons, which alone will be given for each vegetation

type (see fig. 2).

For the most part there are no other plants of importance in this very

uniform sedge meadow (pl. xxviii; fig. 5 and 8), but there are three modifica-

tions of the main soil type to be described in duc course.

The unmodified sedge meadow probably has the soil water-logged for a

large portion of the year. The varying requirements of the alternative

dominants have not been studied, though the indications are that C. glomera-

tum favours the low-lying areas with the lime surface, but it was also found

in the Gahnia-tussock sedge meadow. One or other of them is so overwhelm-

ingly important that further plants present are only incidental, The list

(including modified areas) is as follows:

Cladimm junceum ‘ .

j vs, either one of these is D.

C. glomeratum (formerly C, rubiginosuim)

Agrostis Billardieri, a Blown Grass.

Agrostis sp.

Chara (or Nitella). Local D,

Chenopodium ambiguum.

Epilobium sp.

Funaria, moss.

Gahnia trifida, Cutting “Grass”; with similar large tussock sedges not in

flower. Local D.

Fleocharis acuta,

Juncus maritunus var. australiensis,

2i1

Lobelia anceps.

Lugzula campestris.

Muehlenbeckia adpressa, a coastal species.

Olearia ramulosa,

Samolus repens,

Scirpus nodosus.

Selliera radicans, a very widespread ground plant in swamp communities.

Senecio sp. or Lrechthites, closely resembling each other.

S), lautus,

Spiranthes australis Lindl. Swamp Orchid. (S. sinensis (Pers.) Ames in

Black, 2nd Ed.).

Triglochin procera. Local D.

T. striata, a small plant.

Urtica incisa, Stinging Nettle.

At the east end of the swamp, where the sedge meadow meets the sand-

hills, is a small Cladium Mariscus socicty, whose habitat requirements are not

understood, forming a thicket about 130 cm. high, with Urtica incisa all

through it. Some Agrostis spp. and Poa spp. permeated most of the com-

munities like a light web.

The first of the modifications is associated with the Hitchcox limey peat

soil type (fig. 2), which is characterised by a surface layer of lime from two

to six inches thick, overlying a coarse and fine fibrous peat. It seems very

likely that some of this surface layer has been formed from the green algal

freshwater plant, Chara, whose structure could still be detected in the snow-

white incrustation covering some bare patches in the sedge meadow (pl. xxviii,

fig. 6), or even on the ground between the sedges (pl. xxvili, fig. 5). Chara

must grow submerged in water, and it is common in the South-East, to see it

dried white and brittle in belts, like a layer of salt, around a receding pond

or shallow swamp where the growth has been dense.

Green water-plants of many kinds can cause calcium or other cations to

be deposited, usually on their surfaces, from a solution rich in bicarbonate,

as they extract CO, from the water during photosynthesis, causmg precipita-

tion of the carbonate. Still waters are more suitable for this deposition

than those of turbid streams. There are also bacteria which behave in the

same way. Chara limestones are well known (for a South Australian occur-

rence v. Howchin, 1909), but their rate of formation must be slow; it has

been calculated as one foot in about 2,500 years in Green Lake, Wisconsin

(quoted by Twenhofel, 1932). Chara, as a rule, is found only in hard waters.

Some of these calcareous surfaces of the Hitchcox limey peat contained the

shells of small water-animals, which must also play a part in their formation.

It would only be necessary to have frequent or constant flooding, in this

region of alkaline waters, to get the right conditions for the deposit of cal-

careous imatter stich as this in an open area; consequently it is concluded that

this soil type was formed under wetter conditions than those of the normal

sedge meadow. These patches were dry in February 1942—a new state of

affairs, probably due to the draining.

The second modification also oceurs in this zone of wet soils with a limey

surface; it is characterised by a spongy, brown, fine fibrous peat of a saline

type. The limey surface was in the form of still-recognisable Chara remains,

and there were a great many dwarfed dead plants of Yriglochin procera here;

the fibre-coated rhizomes of Triglochin have already been mentioned, and it

is believed that this area has been under deep water, with what Fisk, in his

survey of August, 1939, described as “a kind of water-lily or hyacinth” grow-

ing in “soupy” mud. This plant was 7. procera, and it is suggested that the

(c)

212

decay of the thick growth of rhizomes and fibrous leaf-bases has produced

this fine fibrous peat. In February, 1942, at the time of the vegetation survey,

it had become just dry enough to walk on. The death of the Triglochin plants

may simply have been due to drying or also to the effect of the accompanying

rise in salt concentration. It is essentially a water plant.

The third modification is the type of sedge meadoz dotted with numerous

big tussock sedges of a Cutting Grass (Gahnia trifida) 1°3-1°5 m. high

(pl. xxviii, fig. 7), and it is found on the shallower peats of the Milstead

coarse fibrous variety and other types. In appearance it resembles the shrub-

and-sedge community to be described later, Some of the non-flowering

tussocks were suspected of being the closely similar Cladium filum, but its

prescnee at Eight Mile Creek was never confirmed by fruiting specimens.

The Chara phase and the Triglochin phase occur (usually in the

Cladietum glomerati) at the castern end of the swamp, which received the

floodwaters from Bone Creek before it was connected by a drain to the sea.

The Gahnia-tussock sedge meadow is on obviously drier areas, mainly on

the landward side of the swamp, and at times the low sedge gives way to prass

sward between the Gahnia trifida clumps. This community is probably not

one of the stages in the normal swamp succession. Moreover, it is within

reach of the fires known to have been put in from the edge, for many years

past, by leaseholders desiring to penetrate the swamp property and make use

of what pasture was available. Sometimes small, open. dricd-up winter

swamps were seen here with the remains of either Chara or Ruppia maritima.

Tuk TEA-TREE THICKET AND INCLUDED “ISLANDS.”

(Pl. xxix, fig. 9)

Leptospermum pubescens—Melaleuca squarrosa Association.

The Tea-tree thicket is the climax vegetation (under the swamp condi-

tions) and covers a greater area than the other types (vy. Stephens, fig. 1).

It consists almost solely of two shrubs of practically identical habit and very

even in height (about 4-5 m. or 15 ft.). They form a closed community so

dense that one can hardly force a way between the thin, unbranched, vertical,

woody stems; and there is little room or sufficient light for the growth of

smaller plants in the thicket, or even for leaves on the two dominants, except

at the top of the plants which have a continuous, nearly level canopy ot

foliage, broken occasionally by twigs of the largerleaved Swamp Gum

(Eucalyptus ovata).

The raw material of the Tea-tree thicket peat is the woody stems and

small leaves of the two dominants. Apparently they are not very fibrous and

decompose fairly quickly into a good, humified, fine black friable peat—the

Badenoch friable peat—with which the Tea-tree thickel is constantly asso-

ciated. This soil type is the best on the swamp and gives quite definite acid

reactions in some of the horizons, the range being pH 5-8-7°8; the pH value

falls regularly with increasing depth of peat. There is the suggestion of suclt

a tendency in the related Orwell coarse and fine fibrous peat, but in the other

types (uncomplicated by the presence of lime) there is only one pH value on

the acid side of neutrality, and that occurs in the surface horizon of the Mil-

stead coarse fibrous peat (sedge meadow). Any of these peats which have an

acid reaction are probably not much exposed to the caleareous ground-water

and, for other reasons also, it is assumed that the Tea-tree thicket grows on

thoroughly well-drained soils only (v. fig. 1). ‘he cause of the increase in

acidity with depth of the peat may be connected with increasing humification

(“.e., an acid-producing process).

213

It is uncertain whether the stemmy habit of the Tca-tree thicket is duc

to the presence of a very thick crop of plants or whether each plant stools

freely from the base. The latter is the case in the similar Rhamnetum at

Wicken Fen near Cambridge (Godwin and Bharucha, pt. iii, 1936). In Eng-

land a fen scrub of this type is called ‘carr’; at Wicken this carr is almost a

pure community of two species of Rhamnus, the more important one being

the Alder Buckthorn, Rhamnus Frangula L. (= Frangula alnus Miller). A

more usual type of carr is that dominated by deciduous trees of the Alnus

(Alder), Salix (Willow) and Betula (Birch) type, eventually changing over

to woodland with Quercus (Oak), etc. (as at Calthorpe Broad, Godwin and

Turner, 1933).

An analogous formation is described for hydroseres in North America by

Weaver and Clements (1929) dominated by Abius, Salix and Populits

(Poplar), In our opinion, the Tea-tree thicket at Eight Mile Creck corre-

sponds more closely with the Rhamnetum at Wicken than with the Alnus-

Salix-Betula type of fen carr. The earlier comparison between the reed-

swamp formations in South Australia and in the Fens and Broads of East

Anglia revealed that the facies and the dominant species were practically the

same. In this case there is no identity of dominant species, but still a

similarity of facies; the two dominant species at Might Mile Creek are ever-

greens of the family Myrtaceae, with particularly Australian affinities,

The oceasional presence of Eucalyptus ovata, one of the dominants of the

surrounding sclerophyll woodland, is clearly parallel to the occurrence ol

ordinary English woodland trees in carr, and illustrates the divergence of

species between the two geographical regions the further one goes from the

aquatic vegetation.

In the Tea-tree zone there are occasional small rises, the larger ones bear

definite Eucalypt woodland (e.g., “Timber Island”), and the smaller ones

have /. ovata (White Swamp Gum) as the dominant, The two Tea-tree

thicket species are relatively unimportant, the vegetation is more open, and

the list of acconipanying species obviously belongs to the Eucalypt woodland

formation, These small patches, moreover, are associated with the fine, grey,

sandy loam and flinty loam soil types common on the margins of the swamp,

which will be dealt with later, and are no doubt relict areas as yet uninfluenced

by the normally increasing swampiness of Eight Mile Creck. The present

drainage policy (apart from clearing) would have ensured the survival of

these islands. lt would also, an theoretical grounds, have favoured the

invasion by Tea-tree thicket of the shrub-and-sedge community, and finally

the sedge meadow.

At present the swamp is being cleared for cultivation ; the ordinary tractor-

drawn serub-roller is being used to smash down the Tea-tree thicket and

leaves behind it an almost solid layer of prostrate, woody stems about two feet

(60 em.) deep. It is fairly easy to walk on this, and where re-growth has

started, the normally repressed associated plants become frequent; the

dominant Tea-trees sprout again also, This formidable layer of débris is

eventually burnt. The list of associated plants is given below, together with

that for the “islands”? of Eucalypt woodland. The big sedges, Gahnia (two

species) and Cladium Mariscus, are fairly common in the thicket, but cannot

often attain their tussock or clump habit in such crowded conditions.

Tea-tree thicket :

Leptosperimum pubescens, Silky Tea-tree (known earlier ag L. lanigeruim), D.

Melaleuca squarrosa, Bottle-brush Tea-tree. D.

Acacia myrtifolia,

214

Bulardiera cymosa.

Cassytha. pubescens,

Cladium Mariscus (base of stems long and scaly with leaf remains).

Correa sp.

Cyperaceae—various :

Eucalyptus ovata. Not dominant here,

Gahnia psittacorum, Not in the usual tussock form, constantly associated.

G, trifida. Not as a tussock.

Imperata cylindrica, Blady Grass (J. cylindrica var. major in Black, 1943.)

Leucopogon australis,

Muehlenbeckia adpressa,

Olearia glandulosa and O. ramulosa,

Phragmites communis, Ubiquitous in the swamp.

Pimelea macrostegia or P. ligustrina (not in flower).

Poa caespitosa, Hair-like grass permeating ground layer of 30 cm,

Pultenaea stricta,

Rubus parvtfolius,

Senecio (lautus ?).

Sprengelia incarnata.

Swainsona lesseritifolia, scrambling on other plants.

Typha angustifolia. Marginal, next to Cladietum.

Eucalypt “Island (c.f. Eucalypt Woodland list) :

Eucalyptus ovata, White Swamp Gum. D.

Leptospermum scoparium. A Tea-tree; sub-D.

L. pubescens

Melaleuca squarrosa

Exocarpus cupressifornis,

Imperata cylindrica, Blady Grass (= I. cylindrica var. major, in Black, 1943).

Helichrysum ferrugineum,

Pimelea glauca,

Olearia glandulosa,

Pteridinm aquilinum, Bracken.

Correa sp., not in flower,

} Not dominant here,

THE SHRUB-AND-SEDGE CoMMUNITY.

(PI. xxviii, fig. 8)

Leptospermum pubescens—Cladium junceum Lcotone.

This is a reasonably open shrub community 90-120 em. (3-4 ft.) high, with

the low sedge dominants of the sedge meadow in the spaces. Its intermediate

nature between sedge meadow and Tea-tree thicket has been mentioned before,

and the soil is the partly humified, intermediate type, Orwell coarse and fine

fibrous peat, which has less of the coarse material produced by the sedges

on the surface of the sedge meadow and a proportion of the fine black Tea-

tree peat,

The dominant shrubs are dwarf Leptospermum pubescens, Silky Tea-tree

(formerly known as L. lanigerum in South Australia) and “Melaleuca

squarrosa, Bottle-brush Tea-tree, the same two which form the Tea-tree

thicket. These two do not crowd out other shrubs here, as in the Tea-tree

thicket, and those most commonly present are further types of Tea-trees and

large tussock sedges, together with quite a variety of plants not suited to very

swampy conditions, Among these may be seen young White Swamp Gum

trees (Eucalyptus ovata), which is probably unable to establish itself on the

wetter phases. Some patches of unusually tall and dense shrub-and-sedge

215

vegetation were seen, which gave the impression of Tea-tree thicket in the

course of development. The list of other plants present is given below.

Shrubs:

Leptospermum pubescens. D,

Melaleuca squarrosa, VD.

M. gibbosa,

Leucopogon australis (probably not the almost indistinguishable coastal sp.,

L. parviflorus).

Gahnia trifida

G. Hee sis i Large tussock sedges.

Leptospermum scoparium, <A tea-tree.

Olearia ramulosa.

Undergrowth:

Cladium junceum

Poa caespitosa

Leptocarpus Brownii

Juncus maritimus var. australiensis

Agrostis Billardieri. Common.

Samolus repens,

Villarsia sp.

; Continuous ground cover.

i In the Cladiuim stratum.

Other Plants which may be present are:

(e)

Acacia myrtifolia, A shrub.

Cassytha pubescens,

C. glabella,

Eucalyptus ovata, Young plants, White Swamp Gum.

Hakea nodosa, A shrub.

Logania ovata. A shrub.

Muehlenbeckia adpressa.

Phragmites communis, Found in many communities,

Sprengelia incarnata, A swamp plant, rare at Eight Mile Creek.

Typha angustifolia,

The actual swamp communities have all now been described, and a plant

notably absent is the broom-like shrub, Viminaria denudata, so constant a

member of the swamps of the large Fleurieu Peninsula region, south of

Adelaide, and other parts of the State, including the South-East. There is

clearly something unsuitable to Viminaria in this environment, perhaps the

high soil pH value.

Vo ADJACENT AREAS

Evcaryrr WoopLanp

(PI. xxix, fig. 10 and 11)

Liucalyptus vitrea—E, ovata Association.

This woodland or scrub is found around the landward borders of the

swamp on grey loam or grey fine sandy loam soils containing more or less

flint, and also on transitional shallow peats, peaty loams and the few brown

loam soils. In the case of the peaty soils, the Eucalypt woodland is liable to

include clumps of typical Tea-tree thicket on peat.

The islands of grey, sandy loam, bearing Eucalyptus ovata and scrub, which

occur in the Tea-tree thicket, have already been described, and are, like the

clumps of Tea-tree in the woodland just mentioned, a good demonstration of

the relationship of Eucalypt woodland and Tea-tree thicket. Eucalypt wood-

land occurs on-drier soil with much less organic matter than that of the Tea-

tree thicket, which, of course, is a swamp peat.

(f)

216

There are only two important Eucalypts, £. ovata, the Swamp Gum, a pale-

barked, smooth-branched tree, and E. witrea, with a dark-brown, fibrous bark

on trunk and limbs. £. ovata is also found on the swamp, but not E. wvifrea,

which is uncommon in South Australia and restricted to the South-East.

The trees are 6-12 m. (20-40 ft.) high, with shrubs and smaller plants

forming an undergrowth of varying density. The plants in the Eucalypt

woodland are given below—some clearly belong to the swamp communities.

Eucalyptus vitrea, D,

A, ovata. D,

Acacia melanoxylon. Blackwood, tree as tall as the Eucalypts. T.

A. pyenantha (a society probably due to burning). 5.

Acaena Sanguisorbac. Bidgee-widgee.

Agrostis Billardicri,

Astroloma humifusunt and other Epacrids.

Banksia ornata, 5S.

Bursaria spmosa. 5.

Cassytha pubescens or C. glabclla on tea-tree,

Casuarina stricta. 9m, (30 it.) high. Drooping Sheoak. T.

Cladium or Gahnia. Not in flower. 5.

Dipodium punctatum, Llyacinth Orchid.

Epilobium pallidiflorum.

Exocarpus cupressiformis, Native Cherry. 5 or T.

Gahnia trifida. A Cutting Grass. 5S,

Hakea nodosa, 5.

Helichrysum ferrugineum. S.

Hydrocotyle sp.

Iinperata cylindrica, Blady Grass.

Leptospermum scoparium. Tea-tree. 3.

L. pubescens. Silky Tea-tree. 5.

Leucopogon australis, and perhaps L. parviflorus, the coastal species. 5.

Loranthus pendulus. Mistletoe on Eucalypts and Acacia.

Muchlenbeckia adpressa,

Pelargonium australe,

Poa cacspitosa. A hair-like, all-pervading grass.

Pteridium aquilinum, Bracken, common.

Scirpus nodosus.

Sellicra radicans,

S = shrub, except small prostrate ones. i= tree,

(GRASSLAND (PL xxix; fig. 10, 11)

The grasslands occur on grey sandy loams with flint similar to those carry-

ing Eucalypt woodland; the small amount of black clay soil in the swamp

also carries grass. There is undoubtedly some natural grassland—for example,

an area of grass beset with Gahnia trifida tussocks, 1-1-5 m. (up to 5 ft.) high;

also the open, half-bare, grassy flats in the Eucalypt woodland; but some of

the grassland is probably due to the clearing of the scrub. The grassland is

marginal, occuring alternatively to the woodland; the reason for the presence

of grassland rather than woodland is often clearly due to the shallowness of

the soil or to occasional inundation.

The turf was composed mainly of Themeda sp. (Kangaroo Grass),

Danthonia sp. (Wallaby Grass), Agrostis sp. and Selliera radicans (not a

grass, but a common, small, creeping swamp plant), with perhaps very low

sedges of the sedge meadow, some Acaena Sanguisorbae (Bidgee-widgee

Burr) and the invading weed, Cirsium lanceolatum (Scotch Thistle), which

217

establishes itself wherever possible in the swamp. There would be more

annual species of grasses in spring and early summer.

g¢) LITTORAL (PL xxix, fig. 12)

Leucopogon parviflorus Association.

‘The coastal sands are calcareous, aud, in places, flinty. At the cast end

of the swamp there are high dunes of unstabilised sand, but elsewhere the

sands are fairly level, fixed, and slightly elevated above the beach. The

vegetation is of the type common to such coastal situations in South Aus-

tralia (Wood, 1937).

The most important plant is the shrub Leucopogon parviflorus (a plant with

small, white, edible berries), found on both fixed sands and dunes. We believe

it is generally replaced on the swamp by L. australis, but the two species are

far too alike to be very sure.

The dunes have a less varied selection of the plants found on the fixed

sands, together with a few characteristic ones, like the grey cushion-bush

(Calocephalus Brownii) and the pioneer sand-binding grass Spinifex hirsutus.

On the fixed sands, the sedge, Scirpus nodosus, is an important sand-binder,

like the Sword Rush (Lepidosperma gladialum), The associated sward-form-

ing grasses, Distichlis spicata and Sporobolus virginicus, are also important

surface stabilisers, and there are other small shrubs and tussock grasses.

Prior to 1937, Deep Creek had a meandering exit. passing through these

coastal sands for some distance. A short, new channel to the sea has now

been cut, but the old course remains, and in it grows much vegetation related

to creeks rather than sands, Similarly there is an area with swampy swales

of tall Tea-tree alternating with sandy rises. Probably the sands tend to

invade the swamp in such places.

The lists of plants are as follows:

Dunes:

Leucopogon parviflorus. D.

Calocephalus Brownu, D,

Carpobrolus aequilaterus (Haw.) N.E. Br. (== Meseimbrianthemum aequi-

laterale Haw.), Pigface.

Lotus australis,

Olearia sp. (not in flower — O. axillaris 22).

Pelargonium australe,

Pimelea serpyllifolia.

Poa caespilosa var. Billardieri. A maritime tussock grass with almost pungent

leaves.

Poalypaogon monspeliensis,

Rhagedia baccata. Coastal saltbush.

Scirpus nodosus. An important dune sedge.

Sonchus megalocarpus, Native coastal Sow-thistle.

Spinifex hirsutus. .Important sand stabiliser.

Swaisona lessertufolia, Scrambling plant.

Tetragonia implexicoma, Coastal climbing spinach.

Fixed Sands:

Leucopogon parviflorus. D.,

Scirpus nodosus. Sub-D.

Acacna Sanguisorbae,

Agrostis sp.

Anagallis arvensis.

218

Apium australe. Sea Celery.

Cakile maritima var. edentula, A strand plant.

Carpobrotus aequilaterus (= Mesembrianthemum).

Cladium junceuim (sedge meadow plant).

Dichondra repens,

Distichlis spicata

Sporobolus virginicus \

Hydrocotyle hirta. Probably a swamp plant.

Lagurus ovatus. Common coastal grass.

Lepidosperma gladiatum. Sword Rush, common,

Muehlenbeckia adpressa.

Pelargonium australe,

Pimelea serpyllifolia, A coastal shrub.

P. sp., annual.

Poa caespitosa var. Billardiert.

Polypogon maritimus,

Salicornia (not in flower).

Samolus repens,

Scaevola microcarpa or pallida (not in flower).

Senecio lautus, Sometimes also a strand plant.

Solanum aviculare (rare).

Sonchus megalocarpus.

Sporobolus virginicus.

Stipa teretifolia. A coastal grass.

Swainsona lessertiifolia,

Sward-forming grass (not in flower).

Associated sward-forming grasses.

VI THE WATER TABLE AND THE PLANT ASSOCIATIONS

The Lands Department surveys in connection with drainage plans of this area

were made by Fisk in 1938-1940; there had been an earlier, not very detailed sur-

vey. Most of Fisk’s water-levels were recorded in the months of June, July and

October, and the ground-water levels in the South-East are known to be generally

highest in August-September and lowest in April (Ward, 1941), so that Fisk’s

levels must be near the maximum lor the season. The fall in water-level due to

drainage could hardly have been very great at the time of his surveys.

Ikight S.-N. contour sections were drawn across the swamp at intervals, from

end to end, using Fisk’s levels and water-level data, and indicating the vegetation

types (two are reproduced in fig. 1). In none of these sections is the water level

anywhere more than 22 cm. (84 in) above natural surface level in the Tea-tree

thicket (October 1938), and, for the most part, so far below this that the Tea-

tree thicket soils can seldom have free water above them. All the other swamp

communities show water at inundation levels in these sections, though the shrub-

and-sedge community on the Orwell coarse and fine fibrous peat is seen to occur

both in submerged and in fairly dry places. ‘The water-level in the swamp has

been a rising one, historically speaking, and these small parts of the Tea-tree

thicket now subject to inundation may have grown up under drier conditions and

might eventually succumb to this encroaching winter flood if at all prolonged.

The Cladietum on the [itchcox limey peat, with its Chara and Triglochin

patches, is submerged longer than any of the other vegetation types, except the

reed-swamp-—probably all the year round in most seasons. That it was seen dry

in February, 1942, can only be due to the successful drainage. The Hitchcox

limey peat and the brown, fine fibrous peat are soil types certainly formed under

these conditions of flooding, and can be expected to change to some degree if the

flooding stops.

219

Two S.-N. Secrions or THE SWAMP SHOWING TOPOGRAPHY, VEGETATION

AND WaTER LEVELS.

JOA &

ONL

—)

YIS JAR

Yee ® 3s Ie

1444 al wos 975

1335 F

is)

{ MILSTEAD |

* COARSE :

‘FIBROUS $

: PEAT:

4X,

WEIGHTS OF VEGETATION SYMBOLS NOT TO SCALO

ses NATURAL SURFACE LEVEL

sens WATER LEVEL

TEA-TREE THICKET

@.2.% SHRUB-ANO-SEDGE

HUW SEDGE MEADOW (CLADIETUM

XX XAWETTEST SEDGE MEADOW (CHARA)

EACH SOILTYPE RECURS UNDER THE SAME VEGETATION TYPE

a 40 80 CHAINS RO 160

Fig. 1

No. I is 110 chains east of the mouth of Eight Mile Creek (v. map in Stephens’,

fig. 1) and almost parallel to the new drain from Bone Creek, which is 10-15 chains to the

west. At the north end, the section passes through ponds at the source of Bone Creek ;

and at the south, through a little of the mest swampy part of the whole area, showing the

Hitchcox limey peat soil type carrying Chara.

The water levels were recorded by Fisk in June, 1939, and were the same in February,

1940. The arrow indicates the southern edge of a burnt patch, evidently limited by

surface water. Only the swamp vegetation types are given in detail; the reed-swamp is

always a narrow fringe and does not show on a plan of this scale.

No. II lies 30 chains east of the mouth of Eight Mile Creek and passes practically

through Danger Point. In general level it is lower than No. I (exaggerated by two feet

on the plan), but the trough shown behind the coastal sands is far less swampy than

similar ones further east, and carries the normal Cladietum without Chara. Note the

general occurrence of the Cladietum in submerged depressions and of the Tea-tree thicket

on the slopes and higher ground. Water levels recorded July, 1940.

(Based on levels by H. L. Fisk, and soil map by C. G. Stephens.)

VIL PROBABLE ITISTORY OF THE SWAMP

An upper age limit of something less than 5,500 years has already becn sug-

gested for the swamp, after a considcration of the known age of the English Fen

peats. Future local studies of peat pollens and climatic history will modify this

figure. In the meantime, a tentative history of the area will be given.

During Pleistocene or Recent geological times, the sea has gradually retreated

from the south-eastern portion of the State, leaving a succession of consolidated

220

calcareous or unconsolidated sandy ridges at various distances inland, parallel to

the present coastline. These ridges represent old coastal dunes (Crocker, 1941).

At some time before or after emergence of the land, the Eight Mile Creck springs

were formed by faulting, and, as their waters accumulated on account of incom-

plete drainage, the area became first slightly swampy and then increasingly so.

From our present experience, it seems likely that the first swamp vegetation to

colonise the region and leave peat remains would have been the driest of the swamp

communities, viz., the Tea-tree, which may have replaced Eucalypt woodland or

some other type of vegetation as the soil became wetter,

On this hypothesis, the whole of the swamp has been through an initial Tea-

tree thicket stage, and one would expect to find Tea-tree peat at the bottom of all

the peat profiles. On studying the section across the swamp in Stephens’ fig. 7

(1943), one obtains a picture of the underlying beds of calcareous sand or Miocene

limestone and an idea of the relationship between his four peat types and surface

level. It is clear that the Hitchcox limey peat and the Milstead coarse fibrous peat

occupy the lower levels of that section, and it is known that these areas were

regularly under water in winter.

PROFILES OF THE Four Swamp Pear Tyres (after Stephens),

showing the probable sequence of vegetation.

Tea-tree thicket shrub-end~sedge

Black Friable & granular peat sh Coarse & fine fibrous paat

Fine peat Fine peat

Black {Tea-tree thicket?) Black (Tea-tree thicket? )

Coarse & fine peat

Bleck &: (Tea-tree & dry-land

erouR yadetetion? ) Brown & Fine or coarse & fine paat.

Sometimes peaty clay or dia- black (Tea-tree thicket or Tea-tree

tomaceous earth (flooding?) oi & dry-land vegetation? )

Grey Calcareous sand or Limestone Grey |(168an¥ Calcareous sand or limestone

BADENOCH FRIABLE PEAT,

CARRYING TEA-TREE THICKET.

Dark Sedga meadow

brown

Coarse fibrous peat

Nearly Coarse & fine fibrous peat

black (Shrub-and-sedge? )

Fine peat

Black (Tea-tree thicket?)

Grey Calceareous sand or limestone

MILSTEAD COARSE FIBROUS PEAT,

CARRYING SEDGS MEADOW.

ORWELL COARSE AND FINE FIBROUS PEAT,

CARRYING SHRUB-AND-SEDGE,

Chara or modified sedge meadow.

White Fine lime

Black Coarse & fine fibrous peat

Shrub-and-sedge? )

Fine peat

Black

{Tea-tree thicket? )

White & Lime & calcareous sand

grey

HITCHCOX LIMEY PRAT.

CARRYING CHARA OR MODIFIED SEDGE MEADOW.

Fig. 2

The vegetation is not to scale; that probably responsible for forming the peat layers

is given with a query; symbols as in Fig. 1.

221

Now, on examining Stephens’ four soil profiles (fig, 2 herewith), which were

named according to the nature of the surface horizon in each case, it is seen that

at the bottom of the Milstead and Hitchcox peats there is black, fine peat. Our

peats and vegetation typcs have not yet been correlated by the careful microscopic

examination of detritus of the various peats, which is really necessary to identify

them accurately; but this black, fine peat is almost certainly humified Tea-tree

thicket remains. In the less swampy Badenoch and Orwell soils there is a more

mixed peat at the bottom, and it is probably to be interpreted as the remains of a

former vegetation changing over to Tea-tree thicket rather more slowly than in

the case of the Milstead and Hitchcox peats, because the area was not so wet. A

microscopic analysis of this mixed peat might give a clue to the nature of the

former vegetation.

Returning to the Milstead and Hitchcox peats, above the basal black fine peat

is coarse and fine fibrous peat, This is most likely the remains of a shrub-and-

sedge community, representing the opening out of the Tea-tree thicket and more

vigorous growth of sedges with increased flooding. Above this, the coarse fibrous

peat of the Milstead soil type represents the establishment of the pure Cladietum

on account of more frequent inundation; and the layer of lime typical of the

Hitcheox limey peat must be due to almost permanent flooding, as already dis-

cussed, and is probably connected with the first arrival of the flood-waters of a

blind creek at a low-lying spot, e.g., the waters of Bone Creek.

In the same way, shrub-and-sedge has succeeded the Tea-tree thicket on the

Orwell peat, while the Badenoch peat is still dry enough to carry the Tea-tree

thicket and has a less humified surface horizon.

lf this theory of the sequence of events is correct, one could probably destroy

the intractable Tea-tree thicket by impeding the natural drainage and letting the

spring waters accumulate—but it might take a long time, and, sooner or later,

would establish a new Tea-tree area on the diry land of the adjacent parts, which

have been described. Succession can take place in both directions in the plant

sequence, and here we have an example of the reverse of the more usual type of

succession in the hydrosere, If the above experiment of impeding the drainage

were performed, there would be two opposing tendencies at work—one, the

gradual rise of the water table, and the other, the natural rise of the soil level due

to peat accumulation. As we have seen, the water has had some victories in the

past, when the Hitchcox limey peat was formed; though, in general, the rise of

soil level has prevailed.

VUI SUMMARY

A vegetation survey of a coastal swamp in the south-east corner of the State

was made, in connection with the soil survey of the same area, prior to draining,

clearing and settling it. Previous human interference has been slight, on account

of the wetness of the soil and density of the vegetation.

The environment of Eight Mile Creek Swamp is described, and compared

with that of acid, ombrogenous Sphagnum bogs and topogenous fens, with their

distinct vegetation types, in other parts of the world, Some of the largest fen-

lands are found in East Anglia in England, and it is believed that Eight Mile Creel

Swamp bears a very close relationship to these, on account of the similar alkaline

ground water, peat types (Stephens, 1943), and especially the eutrophic vegeta-

tion types, which, in the wetter communities, involves identity of dominant species.

On this basis, some comparison is attempted between the fen peats of a given

depth and known age and the Eight Mile peats nearly as deep, 150-168 cm.

(5-54 it.), and of unknown age. It is tentatively suggested that the South Aus-

tralian peats are less than 5,500 years old.

There is very close correspondence between the four main peat soil types and

their associated vegetation, which was safely used to map the soil boundaries.

222

The main factor limiting the extent of each type of swamp vegetation is the level

of the water table; and the climax vegetation of the swamp is a closed Tea-trec

thicket growing on the Badenoch friable peat, the best-drained of the peat soils,

most of it being higher than winter water-level. It is also the commonest type,

covering over half the total area, The vegetation and soils of three adjacent com-

munities are also discussed. These are quite Australian in their floristic affinities

and not cosmopolitan like the aquatic plants of the swamp.

The above seven vegetational units are described ecologically and floristically,

and a detailed comparison is appended between the aquatic species at Eight Mile

Creek and in East Anglia, together with some indication of further parallels in

North America, The taxonomic implications of this are also touched upon.

As the swamp is poorly drained and supplied with water from several springs

as well as the drainage from the surrounding country, it is believed that the history

of the area is one of increasing swampiness, and the course of plant succession is

discussed from this point of view, with additional evidence supplied from the

sequence of distinctive peat types in the soil profiles, These peat types have been

correlated with certain vegetation types on the experience gained with the surface

horizons only ; no attempt has yet been made to identify plant detritus in the peat.

It would seem that succession has proceeded in the reverse direction to the well-

known “Verlandung” cycle, beginning with climax Tea-tree thicket and ending

with flooded sedge meadow and aquatic communities,

Profile sections of the swamp are discussed in relation to vegetation type and

winter water-level.

IX ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

This account of the vegetation is due to Mr. Stephens’ suggestion and is based

on his cognate study of the soils (q-v. 1943). Assistance on many desired

points of information has been received from: the University Zoology

Department concerning diatoms, and the Geology Department in connection with

Chara limestone; Mr. I. L. Fisk of the Lands Department, Mr, Rowland Hill of

the Lands Board, and Mr, H, Willkie of the South-Eastern Drainage Board, the

last three of whom have great personal knowledge of Eight Mile Creek Swamp.

Professor J, G. Wood, of the Adelaide University Botany Department, has read

the paper during preparation and suggested many important improvements.

Finally, the work was carried out under the aegis of the Waite Agricultural

Research Institute.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

BentuaM, G., and Hooxer, J.D. 1908 Ed. “Handbook of the British Flora,”

BentHam, G. 1863-1878 “Flora Australiensis.” London

Brack, J. M. 1922-1922 “Flora of South Australia.” Adelaide; also sub-

sequent annual “Additions”, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust.

Brack, J. M. 1943 “Flora of South Australia,” pt i 2nd Ed,

Brake, 5. T. 1943 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 67, (1), 42-61

Conway, V. M. 1936-1938 New Phyt., 35, 36, and 37

Conway, V. M. 1942 J. Ecol., 30, 211-216

Crocker, R. L, 1941 Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust., 65, (1), 103-107

Crocker, R. L., and Earpiey, C. M. 1939 Tr. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 63, (2), 210-214

Gopwin, IL., and Buarucna, F, R. 1931-1941 Studies in the Ecology of

Wicken Fen,” pt. i-iv., J. Ecol., 19, 20, 24, and 29

Gopwin, H., and Turner, J. S. 1933 J. Ecol., 21, 235-262

Gonwin, H., and Mircneni, G. F, 1938 New Phyt., 37, 425-454

Gopwin, IT., and Currrorn, M. H, 1939-1941 “Studies of the Post-glacial

History of British Vegetation,” pt. i and ii, Roy. Soc, Lond. Phil. Trans.,

Ser. B, 229, 323-406; pt. iii and iv., l.c., 230, 239-303; pt. vi, New Phyt.,

40, 108-132

Trans. Roy. Soc. 5. Aust., 1943 Vol, 67, Plate XXVII

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1943

Vol. 67, Plate XXVIII

Fig.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1943 Vol. 67, Plate XXIX

ig.

Fig.

223

Gopwin, H. 1941 Proc. Geologists’ Assoc., 52, 328-361

Hooker, J. D., and Jackson, B. D. 1895- “Index Kewensis.” Oxford

Towcix, W. 1909 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 33, 253-261

Mautony, D, J. 1912 Geol. Survey of Vict., Bull. 26, Dept. of Mines

Maksit, C. D., Clawson, A. B., and Roz, GC. 1929 U.s. Dpt. Agr. Tech. Bull 113

Meivaine, A, T., 1940 Contrib. N.S.W. Nat. Herb., 1, (2), 83-93

Pmcron, I. M. 1940 Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 65, 221-249

Sma, J. K. 1933 “Mannal of the South-Eastern Flora.” New York

Srepoens, C. G. 1943 Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust., 67, (2), 191

Tanstey, A. G. 1939 “The British Islands and their Vegetation.” Cambridge

Twenuoret, W. H. 1932 “Treatise on Sedimentation.” 2nd Ed. London

Warp, L. K. 1941 “The Underground Water of the South-Eastern part of

South Australia,” Bull. No. 19, Dept. of Mines, S. Aust.

Warmine, E. 1909 “Oecology of Plants,” Hnglish Ed. Oxtord

Weaver, ]. E.. and Cremests, F. E, 1929 “Plant Ecology.” New York

Woop, J. G. 1937 “The Vegetation of South Australia.” Adelaide

Woop, J. G., and Baas Becninc, L. G. M. 1937 Blumea, 2, (4), 329-338

EXPLANATION OF PLATES

Piate XXVIT

Fig. 1 Reedswamp bordering Fight Mile Creek, The boat-oar points to a large plant of

Triglochiw procera; Typha angustifola (Cumbungt or Bulrush) grows densely behind it.

Fig. 2 Reedswamp standing in water bordering Eight Mile Creek Channel; mostly Stn

latifolium var. (Water Parsnip) flowering and growmg 3 ft. above the water-surface, with

some Olcaria ramulosa (Watcr Cypress) and the taller Typha angustifolia,

Fig. 3) Reedswamp fringing Deep Creck Pond, with some Tea-tree.

Fig. 4 Reedswamp around small spring at head of Eight Mile Creek, The white plumes are

inflorescences of Phragmites communis (= P. vulgaris; Common Reed), and the clumped heads

those of Cladium Mariscus (Pom-pom Rush) ; Gahnia psittacorum is also flowering. Tea-tree

thicket surrounds the stream-side community.

Pirate XXVIII

Fig. 5 Sedge meadow (Cladictum juncei) on Iitchcox limey peat soil type, also charac-

teristic of the closely related Mulstcad coarse fibrous peat soil type. The more shrubby

communities are visible in the background.

Fig. 6 A recently flooded flat covered with dry, brittle, snow-white Chara. The sur-

rounding sedge mcadow looks identical with fig. 5, but is actually a Cladicium glomerati; at

east end of swamp on brown, fine, fibrous peat soil type. Just visible in the background is a

tussock-sedge society of Gahknia trifida in grassland; the soil is a shallow phase of the Orwell!

coarse and fine fibrous peat ivpe.

Fig. 7 Gahnia trifida (Cutting Grass) in the sedge meadow (Cladietum glomerati) on

shallow Milstead coarse fibrous peat soil type. The Gahnia tussock shrubland is common on

the shallower neat soils of various types at Eight Mile Creck,

Fig. 8 Shrub-and-sedge on Orwell coarse and fine fibrous soil type, with sedge

meadow (Cladictum glomerati) in foreground on shallow sJfilstead coarse fibrous peat soil.

Piare XXIX

Fig. 9 Tea-tree thicket (Melaleuca squarrosa and Leptospermum pubescens). In the

foreground is a layer of fallen débris 2 ft. thick, due to rolling. This is the dominant and

widespread vegetation tvpe on the swamp and the associated soil is the Badenoch friable peat.

Fig. 10 Eucalypt woodland with the rough-barked Eucalyptus vitrea Cleft) and the

stnooth, pale-barked branches of £. ovata (right). There is a winter swamp of sedge or grass

turf in the foreground. At landward margin of swamp on grey, fine, sandy loam soil with flint.

Fig, 11 Eucalypt woodland, Eucalyptus vitrea only, on grey, flinty loam soil, at Jand-

ward margin of swamp. The sward-covered winter swamp in the foreground is on {ransi-

tional swamp soil,

Fig. 12 Calcareaus coastal sands, the dominant shrub Leucopogon parviflorus forming

a dense line near the sea.

AN EXCEPTIONAL AUSTRALIAN AXE HEAD

By H. M. COOPER, Assistant in Ethnology, South Australian Museum

Summary

It has been frequently obvious that due appreciation of the natural ability of the Australian

aboriginal has either been entirely unrecognised or grudgingly conceded. Intensive study of his

material culture, however, reveals many instances of a considerable degree of skill and originality.

Trans.

224

AN EXCEPTIONAL AUSTRALIAN AXE HEAD

By H. M. Couper, Assistant in Ethnology, South Australian Museum

| Read 9 September ios}

Phare XXX

fi has been pected ebvious that due appreciation of the natural ability of

the Australian aborigmal has either been entirely unrecognised or grudgingly con-

ceded, Intensive study of his material culture, however, reveals many instances

of a considerable degree of skill and originality.

An example of a highly devcloped handicraft in stone-worki: lg is shown in

the implement deseribed in ‘the following notes, and illustrates not only a profi-

ciency in various techniques of stone-shaping but also a high appreciation of

symmetry and balance.

The writer feels that the result achieved justifies its description and

iflustration.

The specimen is one of the collection of axe heads in the South Australian

Museum; it is believed, according to available records, to have been collected dur-

ing one of MeKinlay’s expeditions (1861-1865), but, unfortunately, there are no

data recor ding the locality from which it was der ived.

The axe h vad belongs to the grooved type and is made from a hard piece of

stone, greyish in colour, possibly a sedimentary rock, although this cannot be

verified in the absence of a slide derived from the axe head itself,

The main body of the piece has been shaped and dressed by “pecking,” a

process probably carried out with a hard-pointed chisel-like stone tool, worked by

hard blows or with the aid of another hanimer stone, This pecking technique is

clearly shown in the groove formation; but elsewhere the peck-marks have,

partly, been obliterated ‘by subsequent smoothing of the surfaces by a rubbing or

polishing process.

The tine strongly-backed edge formed by the mecting of the two faces has

heen attained by grinding, a process which has also been applied to other parts of

the axe head. with the exception of the flat butt and two small patches, one on

cach side of the basal corners. Ilere the natural surface of the stone has been leit

untouched, obviously for economy of work. It has often been noted that the

aboriginal, being a practical worker, wasted neither time nor labour in needless

effort. The flattened base shows some evidence of its use as a hammer or anvil.

For efficiency in. use, it was customary for an axe head to be mounted in a

strip of green wood made long enough to form a convenient handle, the ends being

hound together and the axe head Jurther held in place by means of gum. The

practice of sometimes grooving the stone obviously assisted in its fixation.

The dimensions of the specimen are as follows:

—

Greatest length 2 x - “Sem

Greatest breadth = - - - - 11:75cem

Greatest thickness - - - 3°73 em.

Depth of groove - - - - “35cm

Centre line of groeve from hase - - 4°75 em.

Weight - - - - - 2:07 ke.

‘the exceptional symmetry given to ihe picee, with its carcfully formed edges

and proportions, is well brought out in the drawings and photegraph.

An examination of this specimen and others of the series of grooved axe heads

in the South Australian Museum, has suggested to Mr. H. V .V. Noone and the

writer that they really serve the dual purpose of axe and hammer.

Rov. Soc. S. Aust., 67, (2), 30 November 1943

‘Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1943 Vol. 67, Plate XXX

Aboriginal axe head

Photo G. Walsh

235

WATE AMA “2 “1? P

Spa FUIYIOM SULMOLS ‘MIA apIS

MOIA 298]

aseq SUIMOYS ‘MATA APIS

AUSTRALIAN ACANTHOCEPHALA NO.4

By T. HARVEY JOHSTON and E. W. BEST, University, Adelaide

Summary

PROSTHORHYNCHUS MENURAE (Johnston 1912)

The material available consisted of one female and two complete and one fragmentary male, from

the lyre bird, Menura novaehollandiae, syn. M. superba, Gosford district, New South Wales

(Gallard collection, Australian Museum). We also re-examined the type specimen, a female, from

the Queensland Museum.

226

AUSTRALIAN ACANTHOCEPHALA

No. 4

By T. Harvey Jousron and E. W. Besr, University, Adelaide

| Presented 9 September 1943]

PRosTHORHYNCIIUS MENURAE (Johnston 1912)

(fig. 1-8)

The material available consisted of one female and two complete and one

fragmentary male, from the lyre bird, Menura novachollandiac, syn. M. superba,

Gosford district, New South Wales (Gallard collection, Australian Museum).

We also re-examined the type specimen, a female, from the Queensland Muscum.

The type specimen measures 19 mm. in length and 1-1 mm. in breadth, and

the other female 11 mm. x 1-3 mm. Both contain mature eggs (fig. 4, 5) which

measure up to 0°12 mm. in length and 0-033 mm. in breadth. In smaller eggs

polar prolongations are very obvious, but in the largest eggs these are less distinct

and the inner shell has a pair of lateral bulges not quite in the mid-line; such an

egg is shown in fig. 5.

In the type specimen only a few of the basal hooks of the proboscis are

everted but two male specimens had the proboscis everted for about two-thirds of

its length, this portion measuring 1-4 mm. The fully everted proboscis would

therefore be about 2 mm. long, bearing 26 longitudinal rows cach of 35-40 hooks.

The form of the latter varies gradually from the thin, almost rootless, basal hooks

to the heavier, strongly rooted hooks of the mid-region. As far as can be judged

from the inverted portion of the proboscis the anterior hooks are longer and more

slender than the median ones. Hooks from the basal rows and the mid-region are

figured (fig. 2, 3).

The double-walled proboscis sheath is inserted at the base of the proboscis.

and measures 2°0-2:5 mm. in length and 0°3-0°37 in breadth. The ganglion lies

at its posterior end (fig. 6). The very long, slender lemnisci are coiled in the

anterior half of the worm. The lacunar system of the sub-cuticula is reticular at

the anterior end (fig. 7) and changes gradually to the condition shown in fig. 8,

where there is a pair of very distinct longitudinal vessels with regular lateral

branches. The small nuclei are arranged in circular lacunae (fig. 8). The circular

muscles of the body wall are very obvious and regularly arranged.

The male specimens were so much wrinkled as to be unsuitable for measure-

ment and it proved to be impossible to make out details of their anatomy, but the

testes appeared to be relatively large and situated at about mid-length.

The species was assigned by Meyer (1933) to Prosthorhynchus, and the re-

examination of the material confirms that assignment,

Gordiorhynchus bancrofti n. sp.

(Fig, 9-16)

Host—-NINOX STRENUA, Eidsvold, Burnett River, Queensland.

The description is based on four female specimens, The general body form

is long and cylindrical, the length reaching to 65 mm. and the width about 11 mm.

The proboscis is borne at an “anigle to the rest of the body and would be about

1-3 mm. long when completely everted. The proboscis sheath is inserted about

0-8 mm. behind the tip of the proboscis and measures 1°7 mm. by 0-3 mm.; the

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 67, (2), 30 November 1943

227

inner wall is inserted 0-2 mm. in advance of the outer. The anterior part of the

proboscis (the proboscis proper in the view of some authors, e.g., Yamaguti 1935)

is O°3 mm. in width and the posterior part (neck) is slightly wider. The proboscis

hooks are deeply embedded in a transparent cuticle and are arranged in 28 longi-

SS SE OE

o1mm

AREAS

ET ey A ne,

Scenes:

al “a:

Fig. 1-8 Prosthorhyiuchus mienurae: 1, proboscis; 2, hooks from mid-region; 3, basal

hooks; 4-5 eggs; 6, anterior end of female; 7, lacunar system of anterior end; 8, lacunar

system of mid-region of body. T*ig. 2-5, to same scale; 7 and 8, to same scale.

b, bursa; br, ganglion; cr, cement reservoir; gc, gland cell; gn, giant nucleus; ips, level

of inner proboscis sheath; ivs, inner vaginal sphincter; mb, markbeutel; mc, muscle

cell; ops, level of outer proboscis sheath; ovs, outer vaginal sphincter; rt, retinaculum;

vs, vesicula semunalis.

tudinal rows each of 27-30 hooks, of which the last 11 or 12 are posterior to the

insertion of the proboscis sheath. ‘The anterior hooks are strongly recurved and

have massive, backwardly-directed roots with a marked depression at the extremity.

Just anterior to the insertion of the proboscis sheath these hooks give place to

slighter forms whose roots are anterior. A marked depression is present in these

roots also. The remaining hooks or spines have very small roots. The dimen-

sions of representative hooks are shown in fig. 10, 11.

228

eat

OTT

Wine

229

The paired leninisci are solid, finger-like structures of about the same Jength

as the proboscis sheath. They arise behind the insertion of the proboscis sheath

at the base of the whole faipieres and extend 0-8 mm. behind it. The ganglion

is situated at the base of the proboscis sheath. Two giant muscle cells are present

in the body wall just in advance of the ganglion, T he genital ligament is unusually

heavy and muscular.

Except for a small portion at bath ends, the body cavity is divided inte a very

large number of segments by partitions which extend from the body wall to the

genital ligament. A cavity in the genital ligament is continuous throughout the

length of the body. The ovarian. balls devel op in variable number within the seg-

meuts of the body cavity. The lacunar system of the sub-cuticula consists of twa:

main longitudinal vessels, between which lateral vessels form a network. “The

origin of these lateral vessels does not appear to be related to the underlying

“pseudosegmentation” of the body cavity.

in none of the specimens were fully mattre cegs found in the cavity of the

uterus, the uterine bell, or the body cavity. [ges are oval and have uo polar

prolongations. The uterine complex oceupics a clear space where some of the

muscles associated with the genital ligament pass to the body wall and the Jongi-

tudinal cavity of the ligament becomes much widened (fig. 14). The uterine bel!

measures 0-45 by 0-2 mm... and its two posterior cells surrounding the posterior

apertures are conspicuously granular. The uterus is short, 1°5 nn. in length, ane

the first pair of vaginal gland cells extends about O°5 mm. into its base. The

vaginal sphineter is double aud the gland-cell surrounding the aperture is ¢con-

spicuous, giving the appearance of a third sphincter muscle. “he female apening

lics to one side of a small terminal projection about O-3 min. in length.

The species described is obviously very closely related to the type species of

the genus, G. clitoridens Meyer 1931, even to the presence of the terminal papille

incntioned above, but it differs from chat species in the shape and armature of the

proboscis, the Australian species having more numerous anterior hooks and a less

abrupt change in form between the anterior and subsequent hooks, and also in the

presence of the very thick cuticular layer on the proboscis. The species is

dedicated to the late Dr. T. Ll. Bancroft, who collected it.

Gordiorhynchus falconis un. sp.

(Vig. 17-20)

A single male specimen of a species which obviously resembled the preceding

in gencric hdeadine was obtained by one of us CT. He 4.) from Falco herigora

from Lermannsburg. Central Australia. The pscudosegmentation winch charac-

terises the females of the genus was present in this case in the male.

The body form is cylindrical, length 18 mm.. width 0-6 mm. The proboscis

is 0-9 nn, long and 0-23 mm. wide tor the greater part of its length, Jt uarraws

shightly at the level of the insertion of the proboscis sheath and the posterior

portion reaches Q°3 iim. in diameter, There are 38 rows, each of 28-29 hooks.

which are all of a more slender form than, though of the same general shape as.

those of G. baneroftr, The inner wall of the ae sheath is inserted at the

level of the seventeenth hook, 0- 6 man. behind the tip ot the proboseis, and ihe

ie: 9-16—Cordtorhynchits benerahite 0, proboscis; 10, anterior frucitian 11, hooks at Teva

of insertion of proboscis sheath: 12, anterior end; 13, mid-region, to show pscudo-

scgmentation: 14, posterior end; 15, lacunar system, indicating independence of under-

lying pscudosegmentation; 16, region between bursa and markbeutel showing pecultar

muscle cells.

Fie, 17-20-——Gordiorhynchus falconis: 17, male; 18, proboscis; 19, anterior hooks, 20,

hooks at level of insertion of proboscis sheath. Fig. 9, 16 and 18, to same scale:

12-14 and 17, to same scale.

230

outer wall less than Q-1 mm. behind it. The hooks are embedded in a transparent

cuticle which appears as a marked, clear area at the tip of the fully everted pro-

boscis. The form of the proboscis and its hooks is shown in fig, 18-20, which are

drawn to the same scale as the corresponding figures for G. bancrofti for purposes

of comparison.

The lemmnisci are rather slender, finger-like structures extending back-

wards to the level of the anterior testis, The proboscis sheath is 1:4 mm.

in length and O-2 mm. in width, and the anterior testis lies O°7 mm.

behind it. The ganglion lies at the posterior end of the proboscis sheath. The

testes measure 1-4 by 0-3 mm. and 1:0 by 0-3 mm. respectively. The two long

tubular cement glands pass back from the level of the posterior testis, The mark-

beutel is unusually long and slender, measuring 3-0 mm. by 0-3 mm., and there

are a correspondingly long, narrow vesicula seminalis and cement reservoir (3:0 by

0-15 mm.). The ejaculatory duct is surrounded by six peculiar cells shown in

fig. 16, 17. The bursa is partly everted in the type specimen but the pronounced

appendages and bursal rays, about 14 in number, are still within the body wall.

The ditterences between G. falconis and the Luropean species are even more

marked than those between G. bancrofti and the type species, G. clitorideus, In

particular the very slender form of the hooks in this species results in a very

gradual change in form from the anterior hooks to those at the base which are little

more than spines.

Host List

MENURA NOVAEHOLLANDIAE Lath., Prosthorhynchus anenurae (Johnston)

Meyer.

NINOX STRENUA Gould, Gordiorhynchus bancrofti n. sp.

Farco nertcora Vig. and Horsf., Gordiorhynchus falconis n. sp.

We acknowledge indebtedness to H. A. Longman, Director of the Queens-

land Museum, Brisbane, for permitting re-examination of the type of P. menurae ;

to Dr. A. B. Walkom, Director of the Australian Museum, Sydney; and the late

Dr. T. L. Bancroft, Eidsvold, Queensland, for forwarding material. The work

was carried out in connection with the Commonwealth Research grant to the Uni-

versity of Adelaide. Types have been deposited in the South Australian Museum.

CONODONTS FROM WATERHOUSE RANGE, CENTRAL AUSTRALIA

By IRENE CRESPIN, Commonwealth Palacontologist

Summary

Conodonts are teeth-like structures, almost microscopic in size. The origin of these forms is still in

doubt. There are two schools of thought, one which assumes that conodonts are related to primitive

fishes, and the other that they are related to the Annelida. Extensive investigations into assemblages

of conodonts in various palaeozoic deposits in America tend to support the view that the zoological

relationship is with the Annelida. The teeth are transparent, very polished and amber-coloured. It

seems that they have been attached to some kind of skeletal material, as some such substance is

occasionally adhering to the specimens.

231

CONODONTS FROM WATERHOUSE RANGE, CENTRAL AUSTRALIA

By Irene Cresprn, Commonwealth Palaeontologist

[ Presented 9 September 1943]

Prater XXXI

Conodonts are teeth-like structures, almost microscopic in size. The origin

of these forms is still in doubt. There are two schools of thought, one which

assumes that conodonts are related to primitive fishes, and the other that they are

related to the Annelida. Extensive investigations into assemblages of conodonts

in various palaeozoic deposits in America tend to support the view that the zoologi-

cal relationship is with the Annelida. The teeth are transparent, very polished

and amber-coloured. It seems that they have been attached to some kind of

skeletal material, as some such substance is occasionally adhering to the specimens.

In America, conodonts are apparently restricted to certain horizons, and

Stauffer (1935) states that “Conodonts in palaeozoic sediments assume much of

the importance of the foraminifera in later sediments. They may be used to

identify horizons where megascopic fossils are poor or wanting.”

The small scries of conodonts herein described was found in the crushings

of a hard brownish to yellowish calcareous shale from the South Gorge, Water-

house Range, Central Australia, 40 miles south-west of Alice Springs. ‘The collec-

tion of foessiliferous rocks was made by Dr. C. T. Madigan on behalf of the Com-

monwealth Oil Refineries Ltd., and many of the specimens were sent to the writer

for micro-palaeontological examination. ‘The rocks are Ordovician in age and

belong to the Larapintine Scries, which is represented by fossiliferous shales and

limestones containing abundant macro-fossils, including brachiopoda, pelecypoda,

cephalopoda and trilobita.

Conodonts do not seem to have been previously recorded from the Ordovician

rocks in Australia, but Harris and Thomas (1937) noted “what may be an

annelid jaw” in the Silurian beds at Heathcote, Victoria.

‘Twenty-three incomplete specimens were secured from the Waterhouse Range

material. Two genera are present, Olstodus and Pallodus, both described by

Pander in 1856. Both genera are conimon in conodont assemblages in Ordovician

rocks in America. Two new species are herein described—Osstodus lara-

pintinensis and Paltodus madigani. The plate has been prepared by Mr. F.

Canavan, of the Mineral Resources Survey, Department of Supply and Shipping.

Canberra,

All specimens are in the Commonwealth Palaeontological Collection at

Canherra.

DESCRIPTION OF SPECIES

Genus Orstropus Pander 1856

Oistodus larapintinensis sp. nov.

(Pl. xxx, fig. 1-13)

Holotype (Con. Pal, Coll, No, 234) —Single cusp or blade, transparent,

polished, horny and amber-coloured. Cusp-—long, straight, tapering to a fine

point, rather sharp-edged, laterally flattened, with a sharply convex keel running

along the centre. Cusp curves broadly to base, which is triangular, broad, flat and

flaring laterally. Upper surface slightly convex, under surface somewhat flattened.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust., 67, (2), 30 November 1943

232

Paratypes (Conma, Pal, Coll. Nos, 235-246)—The twelve figured specimens

are smaller than the type but are similar in essential characters. he curve where

the cusp joins the hase is narrower and inclined to be angulate. A cavity can be

seen extending along the length of the cusp in fig. 3,

Observations—The specinens described as Otstodus larapintinensis vary in

shape and size, but there is little doubt that they belong to the same species. This

Australian species strongly resembles QO. curvatis Branson and Mehl, common. in

the Decorah shales (Ordovician) of America, but the straightness of the cusp and

the presence of the sharply-convex keel distinguish it from that form.

Occurrence—South Gorge, Waterhouse Range, Central Australia.

aige—Ordovician (Larapintine Series).

Genus Parropus Pander 18356

Paltodus madigani sp. nov.

(Pl xxai, fig, 14, 15, 16)

Holotype (Comm. Pal. Coll, No. 247)—Single cusp or blade. transparent,

horny. polished, amber-coloured. Cusp sharply curved throughout length. Base

broad, expanded. Upper side of cusp evenly convex with central keel. Under

surface keeled with a longitudinal grogve along anterior margin near keel,

Paratype (Comm. Pal. Coll, No. 248)—Whitish to amber-coloured, horny

cusp, which curves sharply just above base and tapers tu a fine point. Base broad,

keel present but other features poorly preserved,

Observations—Only two specimens in the collection ave referable to the genus

Paltodus, This genus is also well represented in the Ordovician rocks of

America, and is usually found associated with Otstodis. P. imadigani cau be

compared with P. cornutus Stauffer and 2. arevalus Stautler, but can he dis-

tinguished from them by the position of the keel and rather broader base.

Oecurrenco—South Gorge, Waterhouse Range, Central Australia.

etye-—Ordoviein (larapintine Series ).

REFERENCES

AMSDEN, PT. W. and Mitres., ALN. 1942 Journ. Pal.. 16, (3), pl xli, 301-306

Branson, Eh. Bo and Meu, if Gi. a Missouri Sladen Bit yd. a x. 19-119

Du Bors, I. P. 1943) Journ. Pal. 17, (2), pl. xxv, 155-159

Purnistr, W. OM. Barraay, [. E, ee MLLER. AL IS. 1936) Bull. Ani. vAssoc.

Pet. Geol, 20, (10), fig. 1, 1.829-1.341; 2 pl.

HlArris, W. J. and Tromas, D.. 1937 Min. and Geol. Journ. 1, pt. 1. pl a and

ii, 08-79

Tlass, W211. 1941) Journ. Pal, 15, 71-8]

Panprer, C. Hl, 1856 Monographie der Fossilin Fische des Silurischen Systems

der Russisch-Ballischen Gouvernments. St. Petersburg

Seorr, H.W. 1934 Journ. Pal. 8, pl. Iviti, lix, 448-455

STAUFFER, C. R. 1935) Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., 46, pl. ix-xil, 125-168

STAUFFER, C. R. 1935) Journ. Pal., 9, (7), pl. Ixxi-Ixxv, 396-620

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1943 Vol. 67, Plate XXXI

13 14 1S 16

Oistodus larapintinensis sp. nov.

Fig. 1 Holotype—South Gorge, Waterhouse Range, Central Australia. Comm.

Pal. Coll., No. 234.

Fig. 2-13. Paratypes—South Gorge, Waterhouse Range, Central Australia.

Comm. Pal. Coll., Nos. 235-246.

Paltodus madigani sp. nov.

Fig. 14. Holotype—South Gorge, Waterhouse Range, Central Australia. Lower

Surface. Comm. Pal. Coll., No. 247.

Fig. 15. Holotype—Upper Surface.

Fig. 16 Paratype—South Gorge, Waterhouse Range, Central Australia. Comin.

Pal. Coll., No. 248. All specimens x 30.

SOME GRANITIC ROCKS OF SOUTH - EASTERN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By D. MAWSON and L. W. PARKIN

Summary

Outcrops of granitic rocks are very numerous in the South-Eastern District of South Australia

within the region hounded by a line joining Murray bridge, Meningie, Kingston, Bordertown and

back to Murray Bridge. These granites appear to be all either older Paleozoic or pre-Cambrian in

age. Dr. Ward's map of South Australia, issued by the Mines Department in 1928, shows that region

to be peppered with a number of small outcrops of older rocks, though in the past, much of it has

been popularly regarded as semi-desert country occupied only by Tertiary to Recent limestones and

sand drifts.

SOME GRANITIC ROCKS OF SOUTH-EASTERN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By D. Mawsox and 1. W. PARKIN

| Presented 9 September 1943 |

PLAtE XXXII

QOuterops of granitic rocks are very numerous in the South-Eastern District

of South Australia within the region bounded by a line joining Murray Bridge,

Meningie, Kingstou, Bordertown and back to Murray Bridge. These granites

appear to be all cither older Paleozoic or pre-Cambrian in age. Dr. Ward’s map

of South Australia, issued by the Mines Department in 1928, shows that region to

be peppered with a number of small outcrops of older rocks, though in the past.

much of it has been popularly regarded as semi-desert country occupied only by

Tertiary to Recent limestones arte sand drifts.

This present contribution to the | knowledge of the older rocks of that areca

is the first of several investigations of the kind now being undertaken from the

Geological Department of the University of Adelaide.

llere we deal with outcrops of granitic rocks situated between Coonalpyn and

Meningie, and a notable occurrence at Taratap adjacent to the Coorong highway

to the north-west of Ringston.

REDDISH-COLOURED JLUOR-BEARING GRANITES

The plain, traversed by the railway Tine at Coonalpyn, elevated 72 fect above

se-level, is underlain by the same Tertiary formations which are so weil exposed

in the face of the decp trench excavated by the Murray River in its lower course.

At about six miles to the south-west of Coonalpyn, the main road to Meningie

rises over low hills where surface erosion has exposed Miocene marine limestone

capped by a thick cover of kunkar travertine.

GRrAntre Ourcrops ar Cotp anp Wer

Some six and a half miles from Coonalpyn, at Cold and Wet sheep station,

125 feet above sea-level, granite outerops from beneath the Miocene formation.

The contact of the marine limestone and the granite is well shown in a large

excavation made many years ago in an e/fort to provide a water supply for railway

requirements, but eubsceuensly: abandoned, The Hmestone 1s there seen to rest on

an eroded and greatly weathered sur’ ace al the granite. It is obvious that these

eramte outcrops were of the nature of islands “arid shoals in the Mioeene sea.

Phat the surface of the granite bed-rock at the time of deposition af the Miocene

limestone was very uneven is illustrated by the faet that the windunll bore at

Cold and Wet homestead, distant only one or two hundred vards from outcropping

eranite, met ihe granite underlying the limestone at 92 feet below the surface. In

that bore the under ground water, ‘which is of good potable nature, rises to 30 feet

above the vraiite bottom.

Granite outcrops, though not conspicuously so, for about half a mile to the

west and south-west from Cold and Wet homestead. To the north, the overlying

Miocene formation constitutes the surface rock. The granite [5802] adjacent to

the homesiead is a biotite-hornblende variety closely similar to that of Crotty’s

Knob to be described later. Interseeting it are verns [5800] of aplitic, micro-

granite porphyry.

Trans. Rov. Soc. S. Aust., 67, (2), 30 November 1943

234

Crorry’s Kxnon Locauiry

At somewhat over three

miles to the south-west

from Cold and Wet home-

stead is a bold outcrop of

granite forming a low line

; of hills about a mile in

length. Several outstand-

ing granite rocks have been

ps brought inta relief along

53 this outerop; the most strik-

ing of these is known as

Crotty’s Knob, the summit

of which is about 380 [cet

above sea-level.

oB +.

CROTTY'S KNOB

Following the margin of

the granite to the north and

west, at a distance of about

half-a-mile from Crotty’s

Knob, the upper limit of

“3 the Miocene in that locality

ro is observed to lap over the

: granite at an elevation of

about 325 feet above sea-

level. There the limestone

is a compact granular rock

containing abundant fora-

minifera. It is of the

nature of consolidated shal-

low water, marine, cal-

careous sand in which are

quartz grains derived from

the bed-rock granite. ‘This

and other examples of the

/ Miocene limestone from

/ this locality have heen de-

i scribed by Mr. Frederick

é Chapman in this volume

i (see p. 39).

KANGAROO FLAT

BOTTLE HOLE 4t*

BINNIE'S

ALOOKOUT

Granite

LOAD

MAIN

2 The rock of Crotty’s

# iKnob ts fairly typical of the

, large area of granite ot tlic

betes é Cold and Wet region. The

knob itself is the most

notable of several outstand-

ing protuberances of this

granite. It is a monolith

(pl. xxxil, fig. 2) developed

by erosion rising about

eew] = 35 feet above the otherwise

"t almost flat surface of the

granite rise which pro-

trudes. above the surround-

sof, ing Miocene terraine. At

Wt Granitic

XT Outerop

(Seeti39)

Graniic

Ouicrop

(Sect. 51)

Pecican Is.

(Granitic)

LAKE

ALBERT

235

about 200 yards to the cast of this maor feature are some large tors, one of which

is characteristically hollowed out below and left resting on four points standing

on the granite pavement. The petrological characters of this granite are as follows:

The Hornblende-Biotite Granite from Crotty’s Knob

This [3799] is a medium-grained rock in which the quartzes, being of a dark

colour, stand out strongly. The feldspars arc, as a whole, of a lighter colour than

in the case of the granite from Binnie’s Water, described later in this record.

The orthoclase is a brownish-flesh colour, and the plagioclase is a dirty white.

Both plagioclase and ferromagnesians are more abundant than in the Binnie’s

Water rock. Hornblende, as well as biotite, can be distinguished in the hand-

specimen.

The texture is hypidiomorphic granular, and the grain-size comparable with

the granite from Binnie’s Water. The quartz appears quite dark-coloured when

viewed in the hand-specimen, and is obviously a smoky variety.

The feldspar as scen in thin-section is principally dusty orthoclase and clear

plagioclase; there is also some mottled dusty microperthite.

The hornblende, which has an extinction angle Z A c= 12°, is clearly dis-

tinguished by its decided green tints, whereas the biotite 1s pleochroic in light

yellow to dark yellow-brown practically opaque owing to extreme absorption.

There is evidence that some of the hornblende has taken the place of original

biotite by secondary magmatic changes.

There is some titaniferous magnetite and occasional minute grains of sphene,

some lozenge-shaped. Associated with the biotite are tiny prisms of zircon.

Very minute rods of apatite are observable in some areas. Grains of fluorite,

occasionally showing a purple tint, have been observed embedded in the biotite;

fluorite is, however, less in evidence in this rock than the granite from Binnie’s

Water.

Another specimen [5097], similar in character to the above and of specific

gravity 2°784, has been chemically analysed by E. R. Segnit with the result

detailed. From this the norm has been calculated as stated herewith. Thus the

C.1.P.W. classification of this rock is 1. 4.2. 3. A Rosiwal modal determination

is also stated below.

CHEMICAL ANALYSIS Nor

(By E. R. Segnit) Quartz ~ - - - ~ 32°71

SiO, - _ 74-08 { Orthoclase - 24:96 ]

TiOs - - +24 Weldspar | Albite - 32:43 4 - 61-50

AlOy - - 13-50 Anorthite - 4-11 J

Fe.O3s - - 060 Corundum - - - - 1-08

TeO * - 1-64 Z:r¢on - 2 s e ~ O03

MnQ - - 0-03 Fygursthene 4 82 “Pty te 2 Saag

MgO - - 0-16 ; t hy - 1:97 §

CaQ i, ~ 1°09 Magnetite - 4 x - 0°93

NasQ - - 3°86 Iimenite — - - Ds J 0-51

K.O " ~ 4-19 Pyrite - 7 3 . - 0-07

HO - - 0-23 Apatite - & E : - Oil

H.OW— - - 006 Fluorite - - - . - 0-30

POs - - G04 Water - ‘ - 6-29

ee K N oe Total - 99-90

S = = - 0-04 Move

fe - - 0-16 Quartz ~ - - - - 37-0

Feld {| Microperthite . - 48-4

99-97 pelaspar ) Plagioclase - - 11-5

Less O for F - 0:06 Biotite - - - - 2-0

Hornblende - - - - 05

Total - 99:9] Accessories - - - - O-6

236

A granite-porphyry [3480] of the Crotty's Knob suite and a variant of the

granite just described was collected [rom a point less than a quarter of a mile west

of MeGaskel’s homestead, which is scarcely a half-mile north-east of Crotty's

Knob. There, a prospector’s shaft has been sunk to some depth through the

granitic rock, unweathered blocks of which are available in the dump heap. As

seen in the hand-specimen this is a laintly-pinkish, medium-erained., granitic rock

in which larger pinkish-Hesh-coloured orthoclase and greyvish-white plagioclase are

embedded in a finer-grained aggregate ot feldspar, quariz, and black ferromagne-

sian minerals.

[Examined in EHEC O RS side, itis found to be composed predominantly of

orthoclase and perthitic orthoclase amounting to about 50% by volume of the rock,

Greyish-white plagioclase of the composition of acid oliguclase is present to the

extent of 159. Some 32% of the rock is quartz, occurring as well distributed

macroscopic crystals. Hornblende, pleochrvic in green to brown colours, is the

next most abundant mineral, amounting to almost 2% by volume. Rarely. takes

of biotite and grains of magnetite appear.

A large platform of granite located about a half-mile or more north of

Crotty’s JAnob is a sphene-bearing, hornblende-biotite variety closely related to

[0480 |.

Aplitic veins, sometimes distinctly granophyric. traverse the granite of

Crotty’s Knob. They are mainly composed of quartz and orthoclase, the latter

often riddled with albite veming. Plagioclase is plentiful, but very little biotite is

present and there is no hornblende.

KanGaroo Flat Oureroes

To the north and north-east from the granite rise of the neighbourhood of

Crotty’s Knob, is lower country occupied mainly by outcrops of Tertiary limestone.

To the south-west and south the surface falls aw ay toward the Coorong, the inter-

vening region being occupied by Tertiary to Recent marine limestones and dune

rocks. To the south-east, the elevated region around Cold and Wet and Crotty’s

Knob extends towards Mount Boothby and is apparently tnderlain by granite at

no great distance below the surface, though the region is almost devoid. of granite

outcrops; the surface rock is mainly calcareous del siliceous blown-sand rock and

travertinized marine Tertiary limestone.

On the way from Cold and Wet to Meningie, at not more than two miles north

of Crotty’s Knob, is a low scrubby area, 150 feet above sea-level, with occasional!

outcrops of granite, known as Kangaroo Flat. In this locality, at about three-

quarters of a mile to the north-north-east from a house built onto an overhanging

wall of granite, is a small occurrence which has been mined, where pyroh unite

replaces the Miocene limestone. There the underlying granite outcrops in close

proximity to the manganese workings. The granite of i this outerop approximates

in character to that of the Cold and Wet locality.

Borrte [lore Ourerop

Another notable appearance of the granite is located about two and a half

nules north-uorlh-west of Crotty’s Knob. This is on a tree-covered rise elevated

(230 feet above sea-level) slightly above the neighbouring region of Vertiary Hine-

stones. There is there a considerable development of tors; also a gnama hole.

with a small opening, full of water; this has carned for the locality the name of

3ottle Hole.

The granite [3798 A] of this place is closely similar to that of Binnie’s Water,

described in detail below. The grain-size of the specimen collected is perhaps

237

slightly less coarse and the dark-coloured quartzes are perh aps more conspicuous,

Perthitic orthoclase is still the predominant felispar. The plagioclase is apparently

very slightly less caleie, Fluorite is still to be observed associated with the biotite,

which is singularly rare and usually chioritized. Tflornblende is absent.

GRANITES NEAR Binnie’s Lookout

Still further to the west the underiving granite makes a notahie appearance

at Binnie’s Water, which is 90 feet above sea-ievel, GA number of outcrops were

examined within a mile to the north wad north-north-cast of this spot. Jt appears

likely, also, that a fine of granite several miles in length underiies the high sandy

ridge rising to 325 feet £ above sea-level known as Binine’s Lookout ridge,

At the foot of this ridge on the west side. and about a quarter mie north of

the main road to Meningie. is a reddish, leucveratic, granophyre [5801], cbviously

closely related to the more wormal eranite of Binnie’s Water. The only ferro-

magnesian mincral is biotite, or w hich there is very little, The outcrop, which is

only a few yards across, is Inconspieucus, being exp sosed ina washout. {ts surface

is elevated only about 30 or 40 feet above sea-level.

A sample of the normal granite of the Binnic’s Water locality was collected

adjacent to the water hole adirth of and within 100 vards of the main road between

Coonalpyn and Meningie. This fluor-bearing granite is described herewith.

The Biotite Granite of Binnte’s Water

This is a pink granite of medium grain-size. The prevailing colour of the

rock is due to the presence of a large proportion of coarse pink to reddish ortho-

clase. There is also some nearly white feldspar which is a plagioclase, Vhe quartz,

which appears as compact grains, is of an unusually dark colour as seen in the

hand-specimen ; it is to some extent a smoky variety of quartz. Jiotite is the only

ferromagnesian mineral and is notably scarce, so that this ae may be referred

toasa leuco- variety, The accessory minerals are revealed only in the microscopic

slide. A determination of specific gravity carefully executed gave the figure as

2°63.

examined microscopically, [3796] is seen to be hypidiomorphic, holo-

crystalline and of true granitic texture. The grain-size is fairly uniform, the average

dimension of the individuals of quartz and feldspar as seen in the slide ranging

from 2 mm. to 3mm. Inthe hand specimen a not inconsiderable proportion of the

feldspar individuals are scen to reach about 1 em. in length,

The Ss aieed occurs in large anhedral erystals in clear relief against the feldspar.

Gias and liquid inclusions are plentiful. Tiny whisps of muscovite and grams of

zircon are also to be identified.

Veldspar is present in three varieties. Firstly, the orthoclase which is usually

extremely turbid, evidently owing to incipient kaolinization. Carlsbad twinning

is a feature. Secondly, there is a notable development of perthite. In this, linear

growths of albitic feldspar traverse the orthoclase. The plagioclase is distinguished

by its higher R.L a the occasional appearance of albite twin lamellae. On

account of advanced turbidity of the feldspar the perthitic character is cousider-

ably masked. “Vhirdly, plagioclase appears in well-defined ervstals often of con-

siderable size; it is relatively free [rom secondary alteration. The composition

as determined by extinction angles Z Ac on the zone normal to the ‘a’ axis and

on the zone normal to the 010 face, lies between Ab,-An,, and Ab,,An,,; that is

to say a calcic oligaclase.

The biotite is in small amount; occasionally it exhibits a chloritic alteration

of pneumatolitic origin, not due to weathering, The fresh biotite is strongly

pleochroic: X == light-brownish-yellow, Y — 2 = dark brown to almost opaque,

238

It appears to be of an iron-rich type. Pleochroic haloes and inclusions are

abundant.

Fluorite is present in notable amount, ustially as tiny grains associated with

aggregations of biotite occasionally interleaved with it, but sometimes appearing

freely in the feldspar-quartz aggregate. Individuals up to 2 mm. diameter have

been observed. It is usually colourless but occasionally it carries patches tinted

purple. The mineral is casily identified on account of its high negative relief, well-

developed cleavages and isotropic nature.

_ tron ore, as very infrequent grains of what appears to be titaniferous mag-

nelite, are present, usually associated with the biotite,

Sphene, in tiny grains, is occasionally seen in association with the magnetite

and with the biotite that has suffered alteration, Tiny rods of zircon and of

apatite are also present.

The chemical analysis, the norm and the mode are as stated below, In terms

of the C.1.P.W, classification the rock is I. 4. 2. 3. (Toscanose).

CirEMICAL ANALYSIS Norm

(By L. R. Parkin) Quartz - Ps be 32-28

SiO. - -~ 75-18 { Orthoclase - 30-02 )

TiO. - - O14 Feldspar 4 Albite - 30°39 } 64-30

AWO, - - 12-89 | Anorthite - 3:89 |

FeO: = 5 0-60 f wo - 5 O35 y

ety ou - 1-07 Diopside 7 en - - O10 + O71

MnO - - 0:02 \ hy - - 0-26 J

MgO - - O-(4 Hypersthene - - - 0-92

CaO r ~ 1°04 Magnetite - = + 0-93

NaeQ - - 3-59 Timenite - - - ss 0°30

K.0 7 - 5§:-06 Fluorite = - - - . 0-31

H.O+ - - 0°37 Water - - 0-3

H:0 aE ot me tr.

P2O3 ” - tr. Total 100:+12

# Oty Mopre

100-15 Quartz - . - 30-0

Less OforF - 0:07 Orthoclase 7 = 5 330

Plagioclase - - - 8-3

Total - 100-08 Perthite — - = & 3 - 23:0

Biotite - - - - - 5:0

Fluorite - - - - - O-4

Magnetite, apatite, zircon, sphene - 0:3

Total 100-0

A fine-grained aplite vein [3797 A] traversing the granite at Binnie’s Water

is composed almost entirely of quartz and orthoclase. Micro-graphic intergrowths

of these minerals are distributed through the slide. Fluorite appears to be absent.

ADAMELLITE AND GRANODIORITE

It will have been observed that the granites of the region embracing Binnie’s

Lookout to Cold and Wet are evidently closcly related. No further outcrop of the

reddish, fluoritc-bearing granite suite, beyond the one occurrence already noted

at its base on the west side, is met with west or south of Binnie’s Lookout ridge.

In that direction there is a low region elevated very little above sea-level extending

to the Coorong and Lake Albert. This area is occupied by marine, lacustrine and

aeolian formations of Pleistocene to Recent Age. The only outcrops of igncous

rocks in this broad belt are four extremely limited exposures of adamellite which

appear as inliers from beneath the recent deposits. All of them are in the neigh-

bourhood of Meningie and are related in character and unlike the granites already

described.

239

THe PELICAN ISLETS

The first two are very small whale-back islets, the Pelican Islets, rising several

feet above the waters of Lake Albert near its eastern shore, as indicated in the

map herewith. The more easterly islet (pl. xxxu, fig. 1) upon which a landing

was made, is composed of two parts; the more southerly being oval in shape and

rising 6 feet above the lake waters; the other section is only 18 yards long but

rises 9 feet above the lake water.

These outcrops offered no opportunity for securing really fresh material for

examination. Such as has been obtained is from platy exfoliations of about

12 inches in thickness. The feldspars are therefore duller and somewhat modified

in colour from what may be expected to prevail a few feet further below the

surface. In the hand-specimen large, porphyritic, white feldspars are embedded

itl a coarse granitic aggregate of colourless quartz, feldspar, and abundant bright

black biotite.

Microscopically examined the mineral suite and general nature of the rock

{3800 A] suggests affinity with the rock from Taratap to be described in detail

later. Orthoclase occurs in very large, slightly turbid, phenocrystic sections con-

taining microperthitic albite. There are occasional inclusions of twinned plagio-

clase. Plagioclase is present in amount in excess of the potash feldspar, but though

larger individuals do occur, it appears in the main in rather smaller crystals with

more even distribution. Its composition Ab, ,An,, agrees with normal andesine.

Quartz occurs in large optically continuous aggregations. ‘The biotite is quite like

that of the Taratap rock. Inclusions of zircon as tiny rods and apatite in more

symmetrical sections are a feature of the biotite. Occasionally grains of magnetite

are associated with the biotite. More rarely minute grains of sphene, zircon and

larger prisms of apatite are met with not in immediate association with the biotite.

Wa.Ltowa Swamp Outcrops

The third and fourth occurrences of granitic rock in the Meningie area are

tiny whale-backs rising not more than 6 feet above the ground, located respec-

tively on Section 139, Hundred of Malcolm, and Section 51, Hundred of Bonney

(see sketch map herewith). They are in an area of recent lacustrine sediments

of a former extension of Lake Albert and at lake level. In both cases the rock

in the hand-specimen bears a close resemblance to that of the Pelican Islets, but

the material for study is considerably weathered. In microscope slide the rock

[3801] from Section 51 is seen to contain a somewhat smaller percentage of

orthoclase and there is greater uniformity of size among the mineral constituents.

While it conforms in other features with the Pelican Islet rock, it is distinctly

richer in apatite which occurs in prisms up to 0°3 mm. across, Sphene, zircon and

titaniferous magnetite are also present.

Ourcrors NortH-EAst or Kineston

The only other area in south-eastern South Australia to the east of the

Murray River system where there are known to occur granitic rocks of the same

general appearance is in the vicinity of the Coorong road, between 10 and 25 miles

north-north-east of Kingston. There several small outcrops are located. Of

these the most important is a low rise about 150 yards in diameter situated within

a half-mile of the Coorong highway on its north side at a point 11 miles from

Kingston. At this spot the road engineers have recently opened up, for road

metal, a large excavation known as Taratap quarry. Consequently quite fresh

rock is now available for study. A feature of this outcrop is the abundance of

240

xenoliths embedded in it. Examination has shown it to be a biotite-granodiorite

as described below.

In the near neighbourhood of this quarry are two other small occurrences

within half-a-mile to the east and south-east and two others exposed on the sea

beach, nearly due west of it.

Biotite-Adamellite from Taratap Quarry

This is a coarse-grained, granitic rock, the greater part of which is equi-

granular but studded through it are large feldspar phenocrysts as much as 5 ems.

in diameter [4415]. In some of the quarry face the phenocrysts are less in

evidence than elsewhere. The chemical analysis quoted below was made on an

average sample [3802] and [3803] in which the phenocrysts are not extreme in

their development. The prevailing colour of the fresh rock is grey, owing to the

predominance of feldspar of a faintly bluish-grey colour. There is much colour-

less transparent quartz, and biotite is abundant in brilliant, shiny, black flakes and

aggregates. The specific gravity of a medium-porphyritic specimen of this rock

was found to be 2°78.

In the highly weathered rock the feldspar is stained a rusty-brown and the

porphyritic feldspars stand out in relief above the general surface.

Microscopically examined it is seen to have a holocrystalline, hypidiomorphic

granular texture with, in the case of the non-porphyritic base aggregate, an average

grain-size of 4 mm. ‘The essential minerals are quartz, very abundant feldspar

and plentiful biotite.

Quartz is present both as large clear individuals and as small interstitial

grains. Inclusions are not abundant.

Orthoclase is less abundant than the plagioclase. It is present mainly as

scattered phenocrysts. The larger crystals are slightly turbid and display irregular

boundaries against which the plagioclase is usually idiomorphic. The typical

grating structure of microcline is to be observed on a minute and irregular scale,

mainly along cracks and boundaries. This suggests that the effect in due to

strain, The R.I. is lower than Canada balsam and the optic sign is negative. ‘The

phenocrysts are studded with inclusions of quartz, plagioclase, biotite and pyrite.

The plagioclase is idiomorphic and generally clear. Twinning is characteristic

and zoning well marked. Some sections cut normal to 010 give extinction angles

corresponding to the composition Ab,,An,,, but the majority are more sodic than

this, while the zoned sections demonstrate the transition. The feldspar is optically

positive, and may be generally referred to as an acid andesine.

Biotite occurs in abundant aggregates and some large plates are bent, The

colour and pleochroism are striking: X= pale straw yellow, Y < Z = dark

mahogany. Large inclusions of zircon with well-marked pleochroic haloes are very

common, the haloes ranging up to O'l mm. in diameter. Prisms and sections of

apatite and grains of pyrite are also quite usual inclusions.

Although the biotite is absolutely fresh, there are isolated cases where

secondary deuteric changes have resulted in chloritization with the development

of some granular sphene.

Apatite is notably abundant and is often grouped with the biotite. The prisms

are as mutch as 0-5 mm. across, Sphene in small granules is met with, especially

in biotite which has suffered secondary changes. Zircon is present in tiny prisms,

often associated with the biotite. Magnetite, probably titaniferous, appears only

in very small amount. Dyrite, in isolated granules, is rather rare. What may be

tiny octahedrons of fluorite occur in one of the micro-slides,

241

From the chemical anaysis by ].. W. Parkin, with some determinations of

minor elements by E. R. Segnit, appearing below. The magmatic character accord-

ing to the C.I.P.W. classification is IT (1) 4 3. 3.

CHEMICAL ANALYSIS Norm

(Mainly by L. W. Parkin) Quartz - - = . - 25-04

SiO. - - 66°08 { Orthoclase - 24-63 |

TiO2 - - 414 Feldspar { Albite = - 20-80 } = - 58-50

AbOs - — 13-41 | Anorthite - 13-07 |

FeO, - - 0°73 i? { wo - - O56 |

FeO a - 5-08 Diopside { en - - O17 $ - 1610

MnO - - 0-03 { hy - - 0-37 |

MgO - - 1-22 Hypersthene 2 Ea - 2°88 bo ovis

CaO - ~~ 3-86 ; thy - 6:27 §

Na.O - ns 2. 46 Magnetite ¥ Fe - - 4-07

K.O \. ~ 416 Tlmenite — - - 4 - - 216

HO+ - - 038 Apatite - - - 3 se LS

H.O— - - 0-19 Pyrite 5 : - - 0-23

P.O; . - 056 Zircon - m '" ,, - O05

BaO . - O04 Fluorite — - - _ . - 019

CO. _ - 010 Calcite - “J A . ~ 020

Cr203 ~ 7 nil Water - = 0°57

gD oon Total - 99-57

Fo- - - 0-14 Mone

Quartz - - - A -~ 23

99-74 Orthoclase * ~ > - 20

Less O for S & F 0-16 Plagioclase - x 2 -~ 38

—— Biotite - “ - s - 16

Total - 99-64 Accessories - = 4 a 2 38

Total - 100:

NorTHERLY QuTcroP ON REEDY CREEK WATERCOURSE

About 14 miles north-north-east of the Taratap quarry and 3 miles east of

the Coorong Highway on the northern border of the Hundred of Duffield in the

area of the Reedy Creek watercourse, are some further small outcrops of a richly

biotitic, granitic rock, related to that of Taratap. The specimens obtained are too

far weathered to warrant detailed examination but they come within the range

of adamellite or granodiorite. There are about four outcrops in linear arrange-

ment striking in a direction N. 35° W. (true), extending for a length of over half

a mile. The highest pomt on these outcrops is about 20 feet above the swampy

flat, which is but little raised above sea-level.

RELATIONS AND AGES OF THESE GRANITES

lt has been observed that the granites dealt with, located to the east of the

Murray River, fall into two distinct types. The first of these, and apparently more

extensively devcloped, is that best illustrated by the outcrops at Crotty’s Knob in

the Cold and Wet area. Those of the Binnie’s Water area are very closely related

but more leucocratic in character, containing less ferromagnesian constituent and

more orthoclastic content. ‘These rocks, in general appearance, closely resemble

the granites of the neighbourhood of Murray Bridge, 53 miles to the north-west,

and of Palmer, 20 miles further to the north-north-west. Their chemical similarity

is illustrated in the table (p. 242), where the composition of both the Crotty’s

Knob rock and that of Swanport (Murray Bridge) are stated. A definite link is

that the granites from both these areas are notably fluorite bearing. Consequently,

as there is no known evidence to the contrary, it is safe to assume that the granites

outcropping to the south-east of Coonalpyn and those of the Murray Bridge area

are part of the same bathylithic intrusion.

242

TABLE OF ANALYSES

I It III IV

SiOz. - - -~ 74-08 74-20 66-08 69-31

TiO. - . - Or 24 0-29 1-14 0-74

AlOs - - - 13:50 14-53 13-41 14-13

FeOz - - 0-60 1-14 0-73 0-66

FeO - - - 1-64 0-90 5-08 3-49

MnO - - - 0-03 0-03 0-03 0-05

MgO - - - 0-16 0-20 1-22 1-61

CaO - - x 1-09 1-00 3-86 2-01

NazO - - 3-86 3-06 2-46 2-67

K:0 - “ - 4-19 3°55 4-16 4-43

H.O-+ - - 0-23 0-15 0-38 0.54

H.O— - - 0-06 0-15 0-19 0-10

P2Os 4 = 4 0-04 0-08 0:56 0 10

BaO - - - 0-03 nil 0-04 0-10

ZrOQe - = e 0-02 n.d. G-04 0-13

COz - - - n.d. 0-11 0-10 <=

F - - - 0-16 0-19 O14 _

Cl - - - n.d. 0-03 n.d. =

S - “ 0-04 0-10 0-12 0-14

99-97 99°71 99°74 100-21

Less O for F&S - 0-08 0-10 0-09 0-04

Total - 99:89 99-61 99°65 100-17

I. Hornblende-Biotite-Granite of Crotty’s Knob; analyst,

F. R. Segnit, Department of Geology, University,

Adelaide.

II. Biotite-Granite from Swanport (near Murray Bridge):

analyst, W. S. Chapman, with determination of fluorine,

by A. W. Kleeman (2).

III. Biotite-Granodiorite, Taratap; analyst, L. R. Parkin,

with determination of minor elements by E. R. Segnit.

IV. Adamellite Porphyry, Victor Harbour (mean of analyses

of two varieties); analyst, A. W. Kleeman, Department

of Geology, University, Adelaide (3).

The second group dealt with in this paper are grey porphyritic rocks. In

the hand-specimen they are in marked contrast with the reddish even-grained

character of the first group. They vary in nature from adamellite to granodiorite.

The outcrops of these lie to the south of the belt of red fluorite-bearing granites.

In general appearance they are very like the porphyritic adamellite of Granite

Island, Victor Harbour, which is located about 40 miles to the west of the nearest

(Pelican Islands) of these new records. The rock from Taratap, described earlier

in this paper, appears to be the most basic of all the outcrops examined and is dis-

tinctly more plagioclustic than that of Granite Island, a fact well illustrated by

comparison of the analyses set out in the table above. A microscopic study

of rocks from the various outcrops indicates that menrbers of this group occurring

in the Meningie area bear a much closer chemical correspondence with the Granite

Island porphyritic adamellite than docs the rock from Taratap. The mineralogical

and structural character of the rocks from both areas bear such similarity that it

may be assumed that the outcrops herein recorded are an eastward extension of

the Encounter Bay to Cape Willoughby (Isangaroo Island) intrusions.

As the rocks of both groups referred to in this discussion are unstressed, they

have been recognised as apparently of the youngest of our South Australian

granites.

However, until quite recently there has been such great uncertainty as to the

age of the metamorphosed rocks intruded by these granites where they impinge

on the eastern flank of the Mount Lofty Ranges that it has, in the past, seemed

unsafe to give final consideration, to the question of age of these imtrusions. Now,

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1943 Vol. 67, Plate XXXII

Fig. 1 The two portions of the more easterly of the Pelican Islets.

Fig. 2. Crotty’s Knob, viewed from its north-west end.

243

with the extension of the mapping of the Cambrian and Pre-Cambrian rocks of

the State, we are able to approach the problem with greater assurance.

In discussing the age of the Encounter Bay and Cape Willoughby intrusions,

Tilley and Browne long ago indicated their Palaeozoic age, assuming that the

rocks intruded were of Cambrian age. Recent mapping does tend to confirm the

view held at that time that the Encounter Bay granites do intrude members of the

Adelaide Series of sediments, but the age of the latter has been stepped back into

the pre-Cambrian. However, although evidence is wanting of the actual intrusion

of these granites into the undoubted (fossiliferous) Cambrian, yet there is every

indication that they were introduced into their present position amongst Protero-

zoic rocks not earlier than the orogenic period which ended the period of Cambrian

sedimentation in South Australia, Though not intruded by the granites, fossilifer-

ous formations of |ower-Cambrian age are definitely part of the folded system

forming the rocks of the Mount Lofty Ranges. Consequently, the contention of

Tilley and Browne is probably correct, namely, that the introduction of those

granites very likely took place concomitantly with the post-Cambrian disturbances

which converted the South Australian Canibrian geosyncline into a magnificent

anticlinorium.

As to the date of the period of orogeny which put an end to the long succes-

sion of sedinients that had accumulated in the South Australian geosyncline during

late Proterozoic and early Cambrian time, we have as evidence the following facts:

Virstly, whereas there is in South Australia a great development of Early to

Middle-Cambrian sediments, nowhere has there been met with any formation of

Upper-Cambrian age.

Secondly, in the western MacDonnell Ranges, Central Australia, where the

stratigraphy of the Late-Proterozoic and Cambrian sediments bears some relation-

ship to that of the corresponding period in South Australia, the Upper-Cambrian

is also missing and the Middle-Cambrian is overlain unconformably by an Ordo-

vician formation with evidence of an erosion interval between the two groups.

Thirdly, igneous activity on a considerable scale is recorded in the Upper-

Cambrian of Tasmania and Victoria.

The above facts indicate that the latter part of Cambrian time was an out-

standing period of orogeny in South Australia, and in part of Central Australia.

It has been indicated that it was in the process of this upheaval that the Encounter

Bay granites were intruded, and now it appears logical to couple with these the

adamellites of Meningie and granodiorite of Taratap.

Whether the red fluorite-bearing granites of the Murray Bridge and

Coonalpyn areas are of the same age as those just referred to is yet uncertain.

But as they are unstressed and apparently located in the heart of the anticlinorium

of late Cambrian age they would appear, in the present state of our knowledge, to

belong to the same period of orogeny as those more southerly and distinctly

different types encountered between Kangaroo Island and Kingston, Outcrops

of the latter group are usually remarkable for the abundance of xenoliths, indicat-

ing that they are to some extent, at least, contaminated rocks.

In conclusion, we wish to express our indebtedness to Mr. L. H. Mincham,

who brought under our notice most of the granite outcrops described and whose

generous assistance in the field greatly facilitated our investigation.

REFERENCES

1 Browne, W.R. 1920 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 44, 1-57

2 Kreeman, A. W. 1934 ‘Trans Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 58, 237-241

3 Kuirereman, A. W. 1937 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 61, 207-220

4 Tirttey, C.E. 1918 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 43, 316-341

ABORIGINAL NAMES AND UTILIZATION OF THE FAUNA

IN THE EYREAN REGION

By T. HARVEY JOHNSTON, University of Adelaide

Summary

Under the auspices of the Board for Anthropological Research, University of Adelaide, expeditions

visited Pandi on the lower Diamantina, adjacent to the Queensland border, in 1934, and the northern

Flinders Ranges in 1937. Investigations regarding blood-grouping of the full-blood aborigines were

published by Cleland and Johnston in 1936 and 1938 respectively. Opportunity was taken in each

case to ascertain the uses made of the local flora by the natives, the results being recorded by the

same authors in 1943 and 1939 respectively. In company with Professor J. B. Cleland, some native

names of species of animal life were obtained on each occasion. Further investigation has revealed

that much published information is available but is widely scattered in literature. The present paper

is an attempt to bring it together under a zoological classification.

244

ABORIGINAL NAMES AND UTILIZATION OF THE FAUNA

IN THE EYREAN REGION

By T. Harvey Jornston, University of Adelaide

[Presented 9 September 1943]

Under the auspices of the Board for Anthropological Research, University

of Adelaide, expeditions visited Pandi on the lower Diamantina, adjacent to the

Queensland border, in 1934, and the northern Flinders Ranges in 1937, Investiga-

tions regarding blood-grouping of the full-blood aborigines were published by

Cleland and Johnston in 1936 and 1938 respectively. Opportunity was taken in

cach case to ascertain the uses made of the local flora by the natives, the results

being recorded by the same authors in 1943 and 1939 respectively. In company

with Professor J. B. Cleland, some native names of species of animal life were

obtained on each occasion. Further investigation has revealed that much published

information is available but is widely scattered in literature. The present paper

is an attempt to bring it together under a zoological classification.

The Eyrean drainage system occupies a very much greater expanse of terri-

tory than that at present under consideration. Very little of the water reaches

lake Eyre now, because of the very high evaporation rate (about 100 inches per

year), the low annual rainfall (about five inches, received very irregularly), the

slight fall of the land, and the increasing aridity. The region bordering on Lake

Eyre (Katitandra of the natives) has been described by Gregory (1906) as “the

Dead Ileart of Australia.” The drainage system includes the huge area drained

by the Barcoo (Cooper’s Creek), Diamantina (Kuyuna of the Wonkanguru),

Georgina, Vinke, and Alberga, as well as those streams in Central Australia which

trend easterly and south-easterly to become lost in the deserts and sandhills before

they can reach their original outlet. This immense region has a length of about

630 miles (from the Barclay Tableland to the northern end of the Flinders

Ranges), and a breadth of about 1,000 miles (from the Musgrave and Macdonnell

Ranges to the Great Dividing Range in Queensland), It is proposed to restrict

the paper to a consideration “of the region lying between 137° and 143° E, and

hetween 24° and 33° S. This will exclude the region lying north of Bedourie on

the Georgina, but will include the Flinders Ranges and adjacent areas as far south

as the head of Spencer Gulf. It will include the far north-western portion of

New South Wales (west of the Darling) and the adjacent part of Queensland.

Just beyond the eastern limit of the restricted area is the castern limit of those

tribes which practise circumcision, while the eastern boundary of the tribes which

practise subincision almost bisects it in a north-south direction, such distribution

being indicated by Tindale (1940) in his map of Australian tribal boundaries. A

partial survey of the ecology of portion of the region has been published by

Andrewartha (Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 64, 1940),

The north-eastern corner of South Australia has been traversed by several

expeditions :—Captain Sturt, Sir Thomas Mitchell, Burke and Wills, the various

expeditions sent out to relieve the last-named two, as well as parties concerned

with’ surveying and with pastoral possibilities. The South Australian Museum, in

1916, sent out a small party under E, R, Waite to collect plant and animal material

in the Strzelecki region, the various reports by Waite, White, Rainbow, Zictz,

Black, MacCulloch and [ea being published in 1917. Gregory (1906) was more

particularly interested in the geography and geology of the vicinity of Lake Eyre.

A succession of good seasons following the flooding of lower Cooper’s Creek led’

Trans, Roy, Soc. &. Aust., 67, (2), 30 November 1943

245

to the establishment of Lutheran missions (abandoned some years later, and now

represented by ruins) in the Dieri country, and a few police stations were organised

there as well as to the north. It is to the missionaries and some of these police

officers that much of our knowledge of the natives of the region is due, and much

is still awaiting publication, being contained in the Reuther manuscripts which are

in the possession of the South Australian Museum, The police officers concerned

were Gason, Wells and Aiston. Strehlow, who published a monumental work on

the Aranda people, began his anthropological work at one of the Dieri mission

stations, and Siebert who collaborated with Howitt, was on its staff, as also was

Reuther. Part of the manuscript of the last-named (that relating to the toas or

direction-indicators associated with local myths concerning the wanderings of

ancestral or mura-mura beings) was worked up by Stirling and Waite and pub-

lished in 1919.

The most important anthropological work relating to the region near Lake

Eyre was that published by Gason (1874; republished in 1879 and 1886), and by

Howitt (1885; 1891; 1904). The latter was interested especially in the tribal

organisation, and some of his papers (1903) were written in collaboration with

Siebert. Morne and Aiston (1924) dealt in a more popular way with the Wonga-

nguru people whose territory adjoined that of the Dieri,. Elkin (1937; 1938)

published papers relating to these regions but did not concern himself with our

present subject, whereas there are many references to native names and utilization

of animals in their tribal economic and social organisation contained in the other

works mentioned. M. Howitt (1902) and Fry (1937) published several local

legends. Gatti’s Dieri-Italian vocabulary (1930) is based largely on Gason’s work

in regard to the names of animals. The manimals of the Lower Diamantina were

studied in the field by Finlayson, who published his results in a series of excellent

papers dealing with the morphology and habits of the various marsupials and

rodents. He also mentioned their native names.

Hale and Tindale spent some time in the northern Flinders Ranges (Wailpi

tribe) and published information relating to our subject (1925). Berndt and

Vogelsang (1941) gave a comparative vocabulary of many Dieri, Ngadjuri and

Wailpi terms. ;

The northern part of the Pangkala territory lies in the region we are consider-

ing, and Schiirmann (1844; 1846) published much information concerning that

tribe and relating to our subject.

Roth (1897; 1901) published a considerable amount of information regarding

the relation of the natives to the fauna of the area in western Queensland lying

to the north of the region which we are considering, Reference will be made to

his work only insofar as it relates to matters or to species of animals with which

we are dealing. Strehlow, as well as Spencer and Gillen (1896; 1899) studied the

Aranda (Arunta) people inhabiting the territory to the north-east of our Eyrean

region; while Taplin (1873; 1879), Wyatt (1879), Meyer (1840; 1846; 1879),

Teichelmann and Schtirmann (1840), and Moorhouse (1846) have dealt with that

lying to the south of our selected area. The Elder Expedition obtained informa-

lion concerning the region to the west (Helms 1896).

Mrs. Duncan-Kemp published a popular book, “Our Sandhill Country” (1933),

concerning an area west of Farrar Creek in the vicinity of Bedourie in far-western

Queensland, her home at one time being at Mooraberrie, which is in the territory

of the Karuwali tribe. Her remarks were not always localized tribally, but men-

tion was nade of the Pitta-pitta, Ooloopooloo, Karanya, Mittaka and others. Her

work contains many references of interest which,are now incorporated to bring

them under scientific notice. Her region lies between that visited by us and that

studied by Roth. ;

246

Tindale (1940) published a very important paper and a map indicating the

boundaries of Australian tribes. Pressure by other tribes, due to economic stress,

new railways or settlements, or diminution of population associated with drought

or disease, has Jed to movements towards Lake Eyre and towards the sea coast,

so that tribal boundaries may be differently indicated on maps according to their

respective dates. Howitt (1904, 45) referred to the process in connection with

the Wonkamala, Wonkanguru and Dieri peoples, Finlayson (1932, 150) men-

tioned the invasion of the Yelyendi territory by the Wonkanguru; and Horne and

Aiston (1924, 35) referred to the displacement of the latter tribe southwards by

the Ngameni, the Dieri becoming pushed further south by the invading Wonkan-

guru. The rapid diminution of the full-blood aboriginal population in the lower

Diamantina and Cooper regions has been referred to by Fenner (1936), Tindale

(1941, 73, 78), and Johnston and Cleland (1943, 150).

Curr (1886) distributed widely throughout those parts of Australia where

local information concerning aborigines could be obtained, a lst of terms and

objects for which native names were desired. The names of a number of different

animals (a few mammals, several birds, and a few others) were thus brought

together. The names of the contributors (in the order in which they appear in

the book), the particular localities concerned, and the local tribe, if mentioned,

will be indicated now to avoid repetition later. Where the native tribe is not stated

or where the name given is not regarded as being tribal but merely that of

a horde or of a district, the tribal designation is that quoted by Tindale in his list

of Australian tribes (1940), or is that which I believe to be correct, after con-

sulting Tindale’s tribal map (1940), my comments being enclosed in brackets :—

Le Souef and Holden, Port Lincoln and the western shore of Spencer’s Gulf.

Pangkala ; Jacobs, north-west of Lake Eyre [Arabana]; Jacobs, northern shore of

Lake Eyre [probably Wonkanguru]; Todd, Peake Telegraph Station [Arabana] ;

Warren and Hogarth, west of Lake Evre [Arabana]; Paull, Warburton River,

Ominee tribe [Ngameni], the territory of that tribe meeting those of the Won-

gonooroo [Weonka-nguru], Kuranyooroo [Kara-nguru] and Yarleeyandee [Yel-

yendi] at Cowarie on the Warburton; Cornish, Warburton River [probably

Ngameni]; Salmon, Cooper’s Creek at Koongi Lake [Yauraworka]; Cornish,

Cooper’s Creck to the eastward of its northern branch, Yowerawolka tribe

| Yauraworka] ; Howitt, Cooper’s Creek at Innamincka [Yantruwunta] ; Sullivan

and Eglinton, Cooper’s Creek, near the Bulloo River [three tribes are indicated in

Tindale’s map, but the lack of a more definite locality prevents a definite assign-

ment; the vocabulary is essentially the same as that given for the Tereila tribe by

the next author]; Foott, Nockatunga, Wilson River [the locality is stated by

Myles to belong to the Thiralla (4e., Tereila) tribe]; Miles, Thargominda, Bulloo

River, Wonkomarra tribe [Wonkumara of Tindale, p. 175]; Sullivan, Lower

Bulloo River [Myles called the tribe Bitharra; Bitjara in Tindale’s map]; Gason,

from Mount Freeling to Perigundi Lake, Dieyerie [Diert|; Jacobs, Kopperamana

[Dieri]; Warren, Strangway Springs [Arabana]; Phillipson, Umbertana

j Umberatana, Wailpi tribe]; Wills, Mount Serle, Tura or Eura tribe [Wailpi|;

Kingsmill, Beltana, Kooyiannie [Kujani] ; Gason, Unyamootha tribe [Unyamatna

= Wailpi]; Green, Wonoka, Arkaba-tura tribe [Jadliaura, Tindale, p. 185];

Green, eastern shore of Lake Torrens, Kortabina tribe [Pangkala, Tindale, p. 182] ;

Sawers, Gawler Range [Pangkala]; Beddome, Marachowie [Pangkala]; Valen-

tine, Mount Remarkable, Doora tribe [Nukunu, Tindale, p. 182]; Le Brun, forty

miles cast of Port Pirie | Ngadjuri, Tindale, p. 180]; Crozier, Evelyn Creek, Pono

tribe [Wanjiwalku, Tindale, p. 194]; Dewhurst, Evelyn Creck, Pono tribe

[Wajiwalku| ; Morton, near the north-west corner of New South Wales, Mulya-

napa tribe [Malja-ngapa, Tindale, p. 192]; Reid, Torrowotto, Milya-uppa tribe

[Maljangapa, Tindale, p. 192]; Anonymous, Lower Diamantina, 141° E, 25° 5,

247

Karawalla tribe [Karuwali, Tindale, p. 160; Mrs. Duncan-Kemp’s observations

were made mainly at Mooraberrie in the territory of this tribe]; Heagney,

Kungarditchi tribe [Kungadu-tji, Tindale, p. 164]; Fraser, Whitula Creek, Birria

tribe; Curr, Birria tribe [ Bidia, Biria, Tindale. p. 156]; HMeagney, Koongerri tribe

|Ku-ngkari, Tindale. p. 164]; Dix, Boolcoomatta [Wiljakali of Tindale, p. 195;

Wilya of Howitt 1904]; Machattie and Little, Moorloobulla tribe, at junction of

King’s Creek and the Georgina River | Karanya tribe, Tindale, p. 160]; Eglinton

Bitta Bitta tribe, Hamilton River, near Boulia [Pitta Pitta of Roth 1897; Pita-

pita of Tindale, p. 170].

Wells (1894) published a short vocabulary of the Andrawilla tribe [rom the

Lower Diamantina. He stated that fourteen smaller clans or tribes were included

in that tribe, one of these being the Koringurra, This latter is obviously Kuri-

ngura, ic., Kara-nguru. Andrawilla is the locality where Wells, as police officer,

was stationed, at the junction of the Eleanor and the Diamantina, about thirty

miles south of Pandi, where we were camped. The Kara-nguru tribe is now

extinct. Johnston and Cleland (1943, 141) considered that the Andrawilla

people probably belonged to the Ngameni, a neighbouring tribe.

Ilowitt (1891) published a rough map indicating the regions occupied by

various tribes in the vicinity of Lake Eyre, but the distribution, as shown, differs

markedly [rom that of later maps, particularly in regard to the Wongkurapuna

| Arabana], Kuyani and Murdula | Mardala = Wailpi] tribes, but his later map

(1904, 44) is much more in agreement with that published by Tindale (1940).

Howitt (1891) indicated a tribe termed Yandairunga occupying the western

shores of Lake Eyre, where the Arabana dwelt. In 1904 he termed it Yenda-

karangu. Tindale (1940, 178) reported that the former name applied to the

Antakirinya tribe [Andigerri of some authors] which lived west of the Arabana.

We are referring in the present paper to the faunal names attributed to this tribe

by Howitt, but are not including information relating to it derived from other

sources. This tribe migrated to the Arabana territory in recent times, no doubt

attracted by the construction of the northern railway to Oodnadatta. The tribe

termed Kurnandaburi by Howitt (1940), from the vicinity of Mount Howitt,

Cooper’s Creek, Queensland, is considered by Tindale (1940, 160) to be probably

the Karendala, but may be the Kungadutji whose territory was adjoining; we

have listed the references as belonging to the Karendala.

Acknowledgment is made of assistance received from the Rockfeller Tounda-

tion (through the Australian National Research Council) ; Mr, [.. Reese of Minnie

Downs; my colleague, Professor J. B. Cleland, who identified the various birds

seen during the expeditions; and Mr, T. Vogelsang who assisted me to identify

many of the Dieri names recorded by Gason,

The following abbreviations for tribal names have been used by us:—

A, Arabana (Urabunna); An, Antikirinya (Andigerri, Yendakarangu, Yandai-

runga); B, Bitjara; Ba, Barkindji; bi, Birria; D, Dieri; Ja. Jadliaura; K,

Kuyani; Ka, Kara-nguru; Kd, Karendala (Kurnandaburi); Kg, Kungadutji;

Ku, Ku-ngkari; Kw, Karuwali; Ky, Karanya; Ma, Malja-ngapa; Mi, Milpulke

(2? part of Naualko tribe, ‘Tindale, 1940, 1942); N, Ngameni; Nj. Neadjuri;

Nu, Nukunu; P, Pilatapa; Pa, Pangkala; Pp, Pittapitta; T. Tirari; Te, Tereila;

W, Wonkanguru; Wa, Wanjiwalku; Wi, Wilyakali (Wilya) ; Wk, Wonkumara;

Wo, Wonkamala; Wp, Wailpi; Y, Yelyendi; Ya, Yaurorka; Yu, Yantruwunta.

DK has been used to indicate information from Mrs. Duncan-Kemp’s work unless

definitely localised.

The tribes included in our restricted area have a two-class social system with

descent in the female line. These two moieties are exogamous and inter-

marrying. The distribution of such a system is indicated by Howitt (1904 ;

123

\ m4 wilson} /

+ oe

TRIBAL BOUNDARIES IN THE EYREAN REGION (after Tindale, 1940)

1, Pangkala; 2, Nukunu; 3, Ngadjuri; 4, Dangal; 5, Barkindji; 6, Wilyakali; 7,

Jadliaura; 8, Kokata; 9, Wailpi; 10, Kuyani; 11, Malyanapa; 12, Wanjiwalku; 13,

Karenggapa; 14, Wadikalh; 15, Pilatapa; 16, Arabana: 17, Tirart; 18, Dicri; 19, Yan-

truwunta; 20, Tereila; 21, Bitjara; 22, Wonkumara; 23, Negandangara; 24, Karendala;

25, Ngurawola; 26, Yauraworka; 27, Ngameni; 28, Wonkanguru; 29, Karanguru;

30, Yelyendi; 31, Karuwali; 32, Marulta; 33, Biria; 34, Kungadutji; 35, Majuli;

36, Karanya; 37, Kungkalenya; 38, Pitapita; 39, Andekerebina; 40, Wonkamala,

41, Mitaka; 42, Naualko. The dotted line almost bisecting the map indicates the eastern

limit of the tribes practising subincision; that on the right of the map marks the eastern

limit of tribes practising circumcision.

Queensland

249

map, p.90). The two classes correspond to those of Eaglehawk and Crow of

Victoria (Mathew 1899). Amongst the Dicri and some neighbouring tribes the

terms Kararu and Matteri are employed. Each class was composed of individuals

belonging to a number of groups or murdus (also called mada, muddu), and

Ilowitt (1904, 91-98) has given lists of those which he found represented in the

various tribes. These murdus, according to the Dicri legend, were originally

animals or plants ordered by the great spirit (Mura) to assume human form when

he instituted the class divisions (Howitt 1885,; 1904, 96). These murdus, after

having become human, scattered in various directions, retaining their original

names, and thus these totem (or murdu) names have become irregularly dis-

tributed in the different tribes occupying the Eyrean region (Howitt 1904, 782-

783). The present inhabitants regard themselves as descendants of the particular

murdu to which each belongs. The legendary actions and wanderings of the

ancestral muramuras play a very important part in the belicfs and ceremonial life

of the aborigines.

A perusal of the names given by Curr’s correspondents (1886), and incor-

porated in this paper, will indicate a wide variety of spellings (and, to some

degree, of pronunciations also) for the same native term. There are, of course,

some minor changes in the name of a particular animal as one passes from one

district to another, while in other cases the change is so marked that entirely

different terms are applied to such animals. An attempt has been made to group

similar terms.

PRIMATES

We have considered the aborigines as part of the fauna and have accordingly

collected the various terms applied: (a) to them as a group, (b) to the individual

male, i.e., an aboriginal man, and (c) a native womau, We have also included the

terms applied to the invading white man by the aborigines.

Human hair is converted into string and used for waist girdles and head

bands (Schiirmann 1879, 211, 233). The waist girdle of human hair or of

opossum fur was termed kakkallee Pa if made only from hair from the human

head, kakka = head, Schitrmann 1844, 9; kundindi Pa, purlupu Pa, Schurmann

1844, 20, GL; murdie W, dampera W, yinka W, Horne and Aiston 1924, 38, 45,

46, 68, 175; oolpooroo D, Sanger 1883; yinka D, Gason 1879 — D, Howitt 1904,

662. Head net or band, charpoo W, Horne and Aiston; chanpoo D (charpoo,

p. 297), Gason 1879, 289; tjarpu D, Fry 1937, 201; munga Nj, jarpu D (charpoo

of other authors), Berndt and Vogelsang 1941, 6. Hair, human or from other

sources, was utilized in making charms (llorne and Aiston 1924) to be worn as a

protection :-—tharta W. against snakes and enemies, referred to later in this report;

nalta W, now generally made from rabbit fur, to obtain through dreams informa-

tion or to awaken remembrance of things forgotten (p. 137); tutta, composed

chiefly of tails of marsupials tied together with sinews but containing some human

hair (p. 136).

Human hair string was attached to the pointing bone :—wirragaroo W, Horne

and Aiston 149, 152, 176, fig. 86-87; badnu Nj, naria-moku D, Berndt and Vogel-

sang 1941, 8; mookoo D, Gason 1879; muku, Ilawitt 1891, 90 (the small bone of

the human leg is used). The bone-pointing ceremony is termed mookooellie

duckana D, Gagon 1879, 273; mukueli dukana D, Howitt 1891, 90, muku = bone,

dukana = to strike; mukujali dukana D, Fry 1937, 201. The phallocrypt worn

by men was wilpoo W, Horne and Aiston, 38, 47, 176, made of fibre and of fur

of rabbit and “white rat” (i.e., Thalacomys) ; wunari Nj, ngampu D, Berndt and

Vogelsang 1941, 8; malberinye, ngulta, Pa, Schiirmann 1844, 25, 48 (tassels of

opossum fur); thippa, unpa D, Gason 1879 (from fur of rats or wallaby) ;

tippa D, Howitt 1904, 646, 805) (from fur of “native rabbit”) ; purapura, wirupa

D, Fry 1937, 190, 201. The string attached to the: bull-roarer (ytmtha D;

250

wetana Nj, junta D, Berndt and Vogelsang 1941) is made from human hair or

from native flax (Tlowitt 1904, 660).

Hair or fur:—putti, butti Pa, Schtirmann 1844, 23; multa (fur) moodoo

(hair) Ka, Wells 1894; multje W, natta N, at Pandi. The method of converting

hair, fur or fibre into string was described and illustrated by Spencer and Gillen

(1899, 613-614, fig. 123), and by [forne and Aiston (1924, 67-68, fig. 53-55).

The Blacks (general term for aborigines as given by Curr’s correspon-

dents) :—Tura Pa, Ja, Green; thura K, Kingsmill; tua A, Jacobs; ura Pa, Sawers;

eura Wp, Phillipson — Wp, Wills; doura Nu, Valentine; ura Wk, Myles; yoora,

toora Pa, Le Souef and Holden. Kurnawara D, Gason; kurna Yu, Howitt — Te,

Sullivan and Eglinton; kerna Kw, Anon — Ya, Cornish — Pp, Eglinton;

karna D, WP, Jacobs. Yarlee Wa, Crozier; yalli Wa, Dewhurst; yarlye

Ma, Morton [this term appears in the tribal name Yelyendi, Yellyandi of

the local whites]. Yooroonguna Wp, Gason. Yoo-oo-oodla N, Cornish. Warno

Wk, Myles. Weembabitcha Wi, Dix; wimbiga Ma, Reid. Capo Kg, Heagney.

Marroopoo N, Paull. Nooga Te, Foott; ngoorra B, Sullivan. Nulla A, Todd —

A, Warren and Hogarth. Kooroo Ya, Salmon. Kurrana murtoo Ky, Machattic ;

mirti Bi, Curr. Carcoora Kg, Heagney; karkoora Ku, Heagney.

Blackfellow — Nulla A, Todd — A, Warren and Hogarth — A, Warren.

Ura Wk, Myles — Pa, Sawers — Pa, Beddome; yoora Wp, Gason; you-oo N,

Cornish; eura Wp, Phillipson — Wp, Wills; orroroo Kw, Anon. Tura Pa, Ja,

Green; thura K, Kingsmill. Yarlyc-oora Ma, Morton. Kurna Wp, Phillipson —

D, Gason — Yu, Howitt — Te, Sullivan and Eglinton —- Wa, Crozier; kurrana

Ky, Machattie; koornoo Ya, Salmon — Ya, Cornish ;kerna Pp, Eglinton —

N, Ya, Cornish; koonga Wk, Myles; kanna N, Paull; karna 1D, Jacobs. Kar-

machunara W ?, Jacobs. Tuachuju A, Jacobs. Tharinga B, Sullivan. Nanga

Pa, Beddome. Mirti Bi, Curr. Wimbiga Ma, Reid, Karkoora Ku. Heagney.

Other references are—Meru, epa, juri feura] Nj, wulka Wp, Berndt and

Vogelsang 1941, 7; Kurna D, Gason 1879, 293; kalka-aroo Ka, Wells 1894, 521;

wulka Wp, Hale and Tindale 1925; yura Pa, Schiirmann 1844, 87; karana Ky,

Tindale 1940, 160—term occurs in the name of the Karanya tribe; meyu Nj,

Tindale 1940, 180 [same term, meyu, mayoo, applied in the Adelaide tribe, Wyatt,

Taplin] ; kana D, Howitt 1904, 299, 780; Gatti 1930, 121; Fry 1937, 197,

Blackwoman—Munkera A, Todd; moncurra N, Cornish; monkurra Ya,

Cornish. Boku A, Jacobs; bookoo A, Warren and Hogarth. Ikalla A. Warren,

Widla D, Gason -—- W ?, Jacobs; willa N, Paull; walka Te, Sullivan and Eglin-

ton; wullga Te, Foott. Artoo Wp, Phillipson — Ja, Green; artunia Wp, Wills;

yooratoo Wp, Gason. Yewa Ya, Salmon. Noa Yu, Howitt; this term is used

for wife amongst some Eyrean tribes. Wilthetha B, Sullivan; wethetha Wk,

Myles. Kumbuka Wa, Dewhurst; kambukka Ma, Morton; koombutcha Wi, Dix;

kumbuga Wa, Crozier. Wondthowery Kg, Heagney. Kurdrie K, Kingsmill.

Carroo Pa, Green. Nongo Ma, Reid, Punga Kw, Anon, Munchmali Bi, Curr.

Moitu Pp, Eglinton. Purraja Ky, Machattie. Balara Pa, Sawers; pallara Pa,

Le Souef and Holden.

Other references are—Atuni Nj, widla D, adni Wp. Berndt and Vogelsang

1941, 7; adni Wp, Hale and Tindale 1925; mankara DD, young woman, Gatti

1930, 122.

White man—Oodnya Wp, Phillipson; oogtna Wp, Wills; oonyoo Wp, Gason ;

coodnoo K, Kingsmill; goodenue Pa, Green; koonyoo Nj, Ie Brun; all of these

terms are obviously akin. Koopa Pa, Le Souef and Holden; coopa Pa, Beddome;

koopia woonka A, Todd. Pirri-wirri Yu, Howitt; birrie Te, Sullivan and Eglin-

ton; birri-birri B, Sullivan; birre-birre Wa, Crozier; peri-peri Kw, Anon; boree

Ma, Reid (same word for ghost). Bingera Nu, Valentine. Purloo Ya, Salmon.

251

Doona Wk, Myles (same word for ghost). Thundukoa Wi, Dix. Too-too Ma,

Morton (same term for dead). Tita Pp, Eglinton, Wite pella D, Gason — Ky,

Machattie (obvious corruption of “white fellow”).

Schiirmann (1844) recorded mundultu yura Pa (p. 33, 54) for a European

as distinct from mirrinye yura, a native (yura = man; mirrinye = like or similar

to; mundultu = European, as an adjective, p. 34) (the term is quoted in his MS

additions as mandullu = kunyu = dead); and palkarra yura Pa (p. 50), as a

white man (pankarra = white), Perkannia meyu (Teichelmann and Schurmann

1840; 1933, 136) and pinde meyu (Williams 1839; 1933, 69) were applied by the

Kaurna of the Adelaide plains to a white man, Wiltfella Yu, Howitt 1901, 292.

It will be noted that many of the terms relate to “ghost” or “dead.” Schiir-

mann (1844) recorded that muntyo or kunyo was the term for dead (p. 36), and

that nata, wilya or wilya kunyo, amongst the Pangkala, meant ghost or departed

soul (p. 38, 72). Wyatt (1879) stated that koonyoo, amongst the Kaurna, was

an imaginary being (p. 171), and an object of terror (p. 168) which was. said to

fly at night and make a noise in the trees, but was never seen ; it could alight on a

sleeping man and press on his liver, causing excessive pain and sometimes death,

Wyatt suggested that the real cause of the pain was the excessive gorging to which

natives were prone. Woods (1879, p. xxix) said that kuingo was a fabulous personi-

fication of death (Kaurna tribe). Sawers reported that goodnee Pa (? error for

goodnu, i.c., koonyu) was a ghost. Teichelmann and Schiirmann (1840; 1933,

107) reported that kuinyo was applied to a dead person and also to a monstrous

creature like that referred to by Wyatt. The Murray natives, according to Moor-

house (1846; 1935, 29), called it nokumno, ‘The Pangkala name of the fiend was

Marralye (Schiirmann 1844, 28; 1379, 235; Wilhelmi 1861, 190), who could

assume the fori of a bird which flew at night and pounced on his victims, injuring

or even killing them without leaving any marks, Marralye was distinct from the

nocturnal purkabidni who, though of gigantic human form, could be conquered

(Schirmann 1879, 236).

Pindi was stated by Teichelmann and Schirmann (1840; 1933, 123, 137)

to be a pit or grave or habitation of souls before or alter death; whites, when first

seen by the aborigines, were regarded as the souls of their own ancestors revisiting

their native country; these souls were considered to be retained in a large den

(pindi) until liberated. Hence the term pindi meyu for a white man, and pindi

mai for European food. Pindi came to be used by the Kaurna as meaning

Jeuropean,

Howitt (1904, 442-446) discussed the belief that white men were ghosts of

members of the tribe, retarned in the flesh from death, and gave an instance con-

cerning himself and the Dieri who called him pirri-wirri-kutchi (== wandering

ghost). Pirri-wirri is obviously the same term as birri-birri and peri-peri

recorded by some of Curv’s correspondents. Howitt also reported that kutchi

(= ghost. or spirit of the dead, p. 547) was applied by the Dieri to any of the

strange equipment of the whites, ¢.g., a dray and a team of bullocks. Wells

(1894, 519) reported that koochoo was a demon who endeavoured to steal young

women (Karanguru tribe); Gason (1879, 283) translated kootchie D, as devil.

The term munkera (young woman or girl), or a variant of it, was used by

natives of the Eyrean basin to indicate some constellations. Orion’s Be't was

munkawa (= the woman) according to Howitt (1891, 91). The Pleiades were

believed to be seven young women who in ancestral times escaped from a pursuing

muramura by leaping into the sky (pari wilpa D), taking their fires with them.

The constellation is pallari Pa (= women), Schiirmann 1844, 51; munkara walka-

wura (= the young women), Howitt 1891, 91; mankara wora of the Dieri, and

bulali of the Ngadjuri (Berndt and Vogelsang 1841, 8). The latter authors gave

mankarawara as the Dieri name for the Southern Triangle, as well as for the

252

Pleiades. Stirling and Waite (1919, 124), when referring to toa 77, stated that

the Mankara-worana were the girls whose souls were believed to be the Pleiades.

Horne and Aiston (1924, 141) mentioned the flight of seven girls into the sky

(pari-wilpanina = vast hole) each carrying a fire, to escape a moora woman, the

girls becoming stars, now known as Monkira. The latter is also the name of a

township on the lower Diamantina in Queensland, The legend concerning the

Pleiades is widespread and occurs in Victoria also (Howitt 1904, 439-440).

Teichelmann and Schttirmann (1840; 1933, 114-115) reported that the Kaurna

called the Pleiades mankamankarranna (mankarra = young girl), and Orion’s

Belt tinni-inyaranna, a group of youths who hunted kangaroos, emus and other

game on the great celestial plain (womma) while the mankamankarranna dug roots

which were around them.

Howitt (1904, 787) described an Arabana legend referring to the ancestral

wanderings of a number of girls, mankara-waka-ya-pirna (= girls-little-and-big),

who according to another legend were transferred to the sky as stars, the former

being the Pleiades and the latter the stars in the belt of Orion. One of the male

muramuras (Madaputa-tupuru or Marukadlana) became Antares, the principal

star in Scorpio. Schiirmann 1844, 33, reported that amongst the Pangkala,

Orion’s Belt was minye and mirrarri (== boys or men). Gason (1879, 300) stated

that moongaro (in Dieri) meant spirit or soul, while Mathew (1899, 213) called

it ghost. Worana D, was a fabled creature, half man, half beast, believed to live

on an island in Lake Eyre (Katitandra), according to Siebert (in M. Howitt

1902, 412).

CARNIVORA

Canis dingo, Dingo. The same term is sometimes used for “wild dog” as

well as for “tame dog” (i.¢., a camp dog or partly domesticated dingo); in other

cases the terms are quite distinct; and the same term may be given for a wild dog

in one of Curr’s lists and for a tame dog in another. In view of the foregoing, the

terms will be listed together.

We received the following names at Pandi, the latter being the Yaurorka name

for dingo; territa, N; mudla, W. Curr’s correspondents (1886) have supplied a

long list of names, as iollows:—murdla A, Todd; madla A, Jacobs; mudla A,

Warren; mudlu A, Warren and Hogarth; mulla N, Cornish; munga Pp, Eglinton;

mullok Ky, Machattie. Pande Kw, Anon; pandi Ya, Salmon, Cornish. Kintala

Wp, Phillipson; kintalla Yu, Howitt; kentella D, Jacobs; kintalo D, Gason; kin-

thalla N, Paull. Tirrita W ?, Jacobs; thirita Wa, Crozier. Wilka Ma, Morton;

wilka Wp, Gason — Ja, Pa, Green — Pa, Sawers — Wp, Phillipson, Wills;

wilki A, Warren and Hogarth; wilker K, Kingsmill; wilga Pa, Beddome, Le Souef

and Holden. Koonoo Ma, Morton; koonai Wa, Crozier; kunnuya Wa, Dewhurst;

coonatha Kg, Heagney. Kaltha Ma, Reid; kalley Wi, Dix; kalli in some Darling

tribes. Mari Wk, Myles; mirre B, Sullivan. Dethee Kg, Heagney; deethee Ku,

Heagney; thit-the Te, Sullivan and Eglinton; thithe Te, Foott. Coortnini Pa,

Sawers; kurdninni Pa, Le Souef and Holden. Quana Nu, Valentine. Coppa Pa,

Beddome. Beeurli Ky, Machattie. Poolkaga Ma, Reid. Puruina D, Jacobs.

Punamya Pp, Eglinton. Tuti Bi, Curr. Gardley Nu, Valentine [this term

resembles kadli, the name given to the dingo by the Adelaide tribe, Taplin 1879,

131. Kali, given above, is keli of the Narrinyerri, and kellu of the Moorundee

people of the lower Murray (Taplin 1879, 131) ].

Gason (1874; 1879, 298) mentioned kintalo as the Dieri name; Wells (1894,

520) gave teerita for the Andrawilla tribe (7.¢., Karanguru), and stated that the

pups were eaten (p. 517).

Howitt (1885, 6) mentioned kintala as a Dieri totem (murdu); and in 1891

gave several tribal names for the dingo murdu:—kintala D (p. 38), mudla An

(p. 39), titi Kd (p, 39). In 1904 he repeated (p, 91-98) kintala D; madla W;

253

tirta Yu, N; dirangatha Yu; madla An, A; pandi Ya; jittt Kd; and kurli Wi; and

mentioned Dulderana as the name of a mura-mura dog in an Arabana legend.

Other references were made by Eylmann (1908, 167), kintala D; Hale and Tin-

dale (1925, 57), wilka Wp; Finlayson (1939, 115), mudla W, kinturra D; Spencer

and Gillen (1899, 60), matla A.; Berndt and Vogelsang (1941, 5), wilka Nj,

wurdingi Nj, kintala-jampa D [jamrpa = wild], wilka Wp; Schiirmann (1844,

22), kurdninni Pa, wilga Pa (p. 72), the domesticated animal; kintala, pandi D,

Gatti 1930; kintala D, Fry 1937, 193; mudlayapa A, kintalla D, yappulu D, ilelms

1896, 316, Fry (1937) recorded Kantupanturana as a big dog-like legendary

animal (p. 195), and pandi-pandi (p. 273) as an auimal like a wolf. Siebert (in

M. Howitt 1902, 413) reported pandi as the name of a legendary beast of which

the natives were much afraid.

Schirmann (1846, 1879, 211, 218) mentioned that, amongst the Pangkala,

dingocs were eaten, that the tip of the tail was tied to the beard as an ornament,

and that the whole tail was sometimes tied round the head for a similar purpose

(and then termed wilgarti, 1844, MS). The same information was published by

Wilhelmi (1861; 1862). Horne and Aiston (1924) referred to the hunting of

these animals by the Wonkanguru (p. 57-58, 79), who ate the pups; and stated

that the tribe did not use dingo skins as water-bags (nilpa).

Stirling and Waite (1919, in their account of the toas or direction signs

indicating localities and events associated with ancestral spirits (mura-mura),

mentioned names of dogs who accompanied some of these mura-muras in their

wanderings. These animals and the toas associated with them were :—6/7, spotted

dog, Wartjiyampana ; 126, Ngurluwarila; 132, a bitch, Pantupayana; 170, Tjakula ;

274, Pirrila; all of these being Dieri terms. Toa 284 (Ngameni) refers to making

water-bags from dingo skins.

Horne and Aiston (1924, 128) gave an account of the Kuyant legend associat-

ing the wild dog with the famous red-ochre deposits near Parachilna in the

Northern Flinders Ranges. In ancestral (mura-mura) times, a big dog, Marindi,

fought a gecko, Adnoartina. The gecko tied hair-string round his tail to make

him fight better by preventing his courage from entering into his tail, and then

fought at night because his nocturnal vision was much better than that of the

dingo, He bit the dog’s throat, and the escaping blood dyed the rocks on the banks

of the creek. The most valuable kind of pigment was “dog’s blood ochre.” A

brief account of the Dieri legend relating to this deposit was given by Fry 1937,

196-198, 273-274. The constriction now seen around the base of the tail of

geckoes (now small individuals when compared with their ancestors) was due to

the string used by the ancestral adno-artina.

Canis familiaris domestica—White-man’s dog as distinct from the aboriginal’s

dingo and its various hybrids with the former. Dogga. Gason (1874) gave dog-

doga as its name amongst the Dieri. Puppa Pa, Schtrmann 1844, 53, puppy.

Papa is the Loritja name for dingo (Strehlow 1908, 62). Marra Pa, Schirmann

1844, 28, puppy or other young animal.

Vulpes vulpes Linn, Fox—Finlayson (1939, 115) noted that in the Pandi

area no native name was associated with the fox, feral cat, or rabbit. The intro-

duction of the fox has been referred to by Wood Jones (1925, 356). The Dieri,

when they first saw it, termed it kintala yampa, i.c., wild dog (T. Vogelsang).

felis domestica, Cat (feral)—The introduced cat became feral soon after

white settlement of the various colonies, The Elder Expedition found feral cats

in Central Australia, far remote from any settled area. Putji, putji-putji, putji-

kata, kata, are all applied in Central Australia, as well as in the Eyrean region.

Marraitye idnya, which was sometimes abbreviated to idnya (marraitye = similar

to; idnya, native cat [Dasyurus viverrinus]), Pa, Schurmann 1844, 5, 29. Wilga,

254

meaning strictly a tame dingo, was also applied to a domestic cat by the Pangkala,

Schiirmann, Le., p. 72. The term “wild cat” should not be confused with “native

cat” (Dasyurus spp.; polyprotodont marsupials), as has been done by Miss Young

(Helminth parasites of Australia. Imp. Bur. Agric. Parasitol, 1939, 57, 101),

who attributed to Dasyurus sp, the record by Cobbold (Parasites, a treatise, etc.,

1879, 308) of Bothriocephalus decipiens (= Diphyllobothrium decipiens) from an

Australian cat (ie., feral Felis domestica), its actual locality being south-eastern

(ueensland, though not indicated by Cobbold,

Arctocephalus cinereus and A, doriferus. Seals—Nangki Pa, Schtirmann

1844, 32.

Ci ROPTERA

Bat (general name)—Miltyinye Pa, Schtirmann 1844, 32; pinchiepinchie-

dara D, Dason 1879, 285, eaten; pinchipinchinarra W, Finlayson 1939, 115. The

latter author reported that bats were uncommon at Pandi, the only species taken

by him being Nyctophilus geoffroyi pallescens. An account of the latter was given

by Wood-Jones (1925, 435), who stated that this small long-eared bat appeared

to be the commonest and most widely distributed species in Australia, occurring

im scrub and mallee country as well as in the arid interior, the subspecies pallescens

being the dominant form in the northern part of South Australia, Waite (1917,

430) obtained few Chalinolobus gouldii Gray and abundant Scotophilus greyi

during the South Australian Museunr’s expedition to the lower Cooper.

Howitt (1904) mentioned as names of a bat (and its totem)—tapaiuru D

(p. 91); tapayuru D (800); tapairu W (92); N (94); tabaira, east and north-

east from Dieri territory, along the Cooper, Yu, (96); waparu (96); karabana

(782); but the last-named is also given (91, 783) for a small marsupial and its

associated totem (D), so that it is probable that term may have been used by

Hawitt for a bat in error for tapaiuru which is not given in his list on p. 782-783,

but is listed elsewhere as a totem animal amongst various Eyrean tribes (p. 91-96).

Eylmann 1908, 167, mentioned tabajura D, totem, as the flood-bird, Scythrops

novae-hollandiac. Berndt and Vogelsang (1941, 4) gave milka and pintji-pintjin-

dara as Ngadjuri and Dieri names respectively for bats. Spencer and Gillen

(1899, 447, 655) mentioned that the small bat Nyctophilus timoriensis, and the

large white bat, Wegaderma gigas, termed by the Aranda, unchipera (p. 447, 655)

and elkintera or erlkintera (p. 447, 648), respectively, were totem animals.

Strehlow (1908, 62) reported these two species to be ntjipera and irkentera,

respectively, while the common bat, not identihed, was ulbulbana (Aranda). Aus-

tralian bats, formerly identified as N. timoriensis, are now assigned to N. geoffroyi

Leach, var. pallescens being the Central Australian form, Mr. T. Vogelsang

informed me that pintji-pintji-dara was a common small bat which during the day

clung to trees; Nyctophilus yeoffroyi is probably the species.

UNGULATA

Aboriginals modify the European names of the introduced Ungulates, usually

(in the Eyrean region) by adding a terminal a; thus goat becomes go-ta or nannin-

gota; sheep, tjipi; camel, kamela; donkey, donki; ox, bullocka.

Horse—The horse is the only introduced animal which in the Eyrean region

is called by a native name. Nanto D, Howitt 1904, 199; A, Warren 1886, 112.

Mr. T. Vogelsang informed me that the term is still used by the natives of lower

Cooper’s Creek. Curr (1886, 150) mentioned nanto as a kangaroo, Adelaide tribe

(Kaurna), his information having been derived from Wyatt. The latter (1879,

173) reported that the term was applied to a kangaroo, horse, bullock or other large

animal, an old hoary male kangaroo being termed nanto boorka (booroko = white-

haired, hoary; boorka = frost). while wouwe was applied to the female kangaroo

and also to sheep (p. 178). Williams (1839; 1933, 63) recorded nanta as a horse

255

and nantuterka as a male kangaroo, Kaurna tribe (turka = kangaroo, p. 66).

Teichelmann and Schtrmann (1840; 1933, 123) mentioned nanto as a male. kan-

garoo and pindi nanto as a horse or pony (p. 137). The term pindi and its relation

to the white settlers has already been discussed in this paper (pindi meyu = white

man). Kithn (1886) mentioned nantoo as the name for horse (p. 145) and kan-

garoo (p. 146) on Yorke’s Peninsula (Narrang-ga tribe). Since explorers from

Adelaide and the settled districts of the State would take local natives along with

them when first visiting the Eyrean region, the term nanto (or pindi nanto) would

become introduced into the region as the name for the new animals (horses)

accompanying the expedition, the Eyrean aborigines having their own names for

the kangaroo (tjukuru) which belonged to a species (Afacropus rufus) different

from that of the grey animal of the Adelaide plains (AZ. mayor).

Pony became ponynge Pa, Schtrmann 1844, 88; and we received boonee (Ze.

pony) as the name for horse amongst the natives at Ooldea, Moorhouse (1846;

1935. 25) recorded meinchtn as the name for horse amongst the ower Murray

natives (Morgan to Mannum) ; Wyatt (1879, 172) stated that michan — to smell,

so that the native name may have some relation to the odours of horses, Howitt

(1901, 292) mentioned that, during his expedition in 1861, the term yarraman

was used by the Yantruwunta. for a horse and that the name must have been trans-

mitted from tribe ta tribe until it reached those wild blacks. Morris (Austral

English, 1898) referred to the earlier usage by natives of the term as yerraman,

aceording to Sir Thomas Mitchell (1848).

Donkey—Donki D, Gatti 1930, 99.

Ox, bullock--Bulakoo D, Gason 1879, 290; bullocky Pa, Schurmann 1844,

48; 1879, 250. The application of the same term (nanto) to kangaroo and bullock

(Wyatt 1879) by the Kaurna has been mentioned above. Is it a coincidence that

that term buloker was applied to the kangaroo by the Kemandok (Kureinja tribe,

Euston to Wentworth, Tindale 1940, 191) according to Macfarlan (in Curr 1886,

282), and by the Yit-tha tribe ( Jita- jita, Tindale 1940, 196) inhabiting an area

near the lower Lachlan in New South Wales according to Macdonald (in Curr

1886, a or is it a transference of terms?

Wel Aner? 520) reported wirri-pa Ka as a calf, and amma-milki Ka as a

cow. ae latter word meaus milk-giver, a combination of the Karanguru amma

== milk or breast [or udder], and milki, a corruption of the English word. Ngama

-= milk or breast, Nj, D, Berndt and Vogelsang 1941, 7; auma D, Gason 1879,

204, breast. Moorhouse (1846; 1935, 29) recorded noulla [onomatopeia | as the

term for a cow or bullock.

Taplin (in Woods 1879, 3) told of the reaction of the Narrinyerri natives

when some stray bullocks from New South Wales first entered the district. The

aborigines concluded they were demons (brupar) and decamped in terror, They

called them wunda-witjeri, which means creatures with spears (wunda) on their

heads, and Taplin reported that that name was still retained for horned cattle.

Pig—Yupara Pa, Schtirmann 1844, 87; piki D, Gatti 1950, 99. The Kaurna

used the term piko, Teichelmann and Schiirmann 1933, 173.

Camel (dromedary)—Kaineel, kamuli D, Gatti, 1930, 99. Howitt (1901,

293) reported that the Yantruwunta at first applied the term warugati (the name

jor the emu) to the camel probably because of its grey skin (waru = grey, gati

== skin). Kamela is applied in the Musgrave Ranges by the Pitjandjara and

Yankundjajara tribes.

Goat—Go-ta or nannygota D; same terms used in the Musgrave Ranges by

the two tribes just mentioned,

Sheep—Tjip1 D. ‘Tseepa or tjipa, Musgrave Ranges. Tyjipi kupari D, lamb,

Gatti 1930, 100 (kuparu = young, small). The Kaurna tribe applied wouwe to

256

sheep as well as to the female kangaroo (Wyatt 1879, 178), but Williams (1933,

70) stated that the term tipa was used for the former.

CETACEA

Porpoise—Kattappi Pa, Schtirmann 1844, 17. Delphinus delphis is the

commonest species in the South Australian gulfs.

Whale—Kangkarru, wata Pa, Schitrmann 1844, 70. Berndt and Vogelsang

(1941, 10) mentioned ngakula Nj as a whale, but this is probably an error for

shark, since Moorhouse (1846; 1935, 28) reported nakudlo as the term used for

shark by the adjacent tribe along the Murray. The Ngadjuri was an inland tribe,

but its neighbours, the Nukunu, Kaurna and the Murray tribes had sea frontages.

The large Balaena australis used to be common in the South Australian gulfs and

in sheltered coves until the arrival of whalers exterminated it. Various small

Ziphiid whales (e.g., Mesoplodon spp.) and large Delphinidae (Globiocephala)

are from time to time found stranded on these coasts and were, no doubt, used by

the natives as food, as was Balaena, Ribs of the last-named whale were used,

when available, instead of small tree trunks and branches, to form the framework

of wurleys or huts. Amongst the Kaurna and Ramindgeri the animal was called

kondole (Meyer 1879, 203; Taplin 1879, 59) ; kondolle (Wyatt 1879, 170 — whale,

also its blubber) ; kondolli (Teichelmann and Schiirmann 1840; 1933, 106); or

kondarli (Taplin 1874, 2) ; and gave its name to the horde, Kondolinyeri, living on

the peninsula on the north-west side of the sea-mouth of the Murray (Taplin

1879, 2). Meyer (1846; 1879, 203) gave an account of a Narrinyerri (Ramind-

jeri) legend associated with kondolli (repeated by Taplin 1879, 59-60). Though

it relates to a region outside the limits set for this paper, I have ventured to

include it.

In ancestral times a corroboree was being held, but as the performers had no

fire, it was carried out during daytime. A large, powerful man, Kondole, was

invited through two messengers, Kuratje and Kanmari, to attend the feast because

he possessed fire. Kondole hid his fire and then came, but the tribesmen deter-

mined to obtain his fire by force and eventually wounded him in the neck with a

spear. This action caused great excitement, most of the performers becoming

transformed into various animals. JKondale ran into the sea and became a whale,

and, ever after, blew water out of the wound which he had received in his neck.

Kuratje and Kanmari became small fish, and since the former had only a mat of

seaweed to cover him, he became a dry fish without fat, while Kanmari, who was

dressed in a good kangaroo skin, became a fish with a great deal of oil under the

skin. Some of the performers became opossums; the young men whose heads

were ornamented with tufts of feathers became cockatoos, hence the crests of the

laiter. Kondole’s fire was taken and placed in a grass tree (Nanthorrhoca or

yacca), where it still remains and may be brought out by rubbing, this plant being

used for producing fire by the rotary method. Kanmari is the lake mullet,

Agonostonus forstert, and is indicated as conmuri by Waite in his Handbook of

South Australian fishes (1923, 108). Wyatt (1879, 171) mentioned kooraiche as

the name of the mullet. There are four species of mullet to be found in the

vicinity of Encounter Bay and the mouth of the Murray; A. forsteri (= kon-

muri), Adugil argenteus (= wankari), MW. cephalus (sea mullet) and Myarus

elongatus, Kuraitji probably applies to one of the two last-named, Myaus (sand

mullet) being much smaller than the other and more likely to be the species

referred to,

RopeENTIA

Oryctolagus cuniculus Linn, Rabbit— Rabbita. Rabiti D, Fry 1937, 287.

Now widely distributed in the region and forming an important article of diet for

the aborigines. The effect of the introduction of the rabbit on the local fauna has

been referred to by Wood Jones (1925, 286).

257

Rabbit skins, because of the ease with which they can be obtained in the

Lower Cooper region, are tanned by using a particular acacia, yearda (considered

by Johnston and Cleland 1943 to be A, salicina), and then used for making water-

bags (nilpa), the method being described by Horne and Aiston (1924, 51, fig: 39).

Rats and mice—Gason (1879, 285) mentioned the following Dieri names :—

miaroo, rat; poontha, mouse; cowirrie, a species of rat (this name is also that of

an important Dieri trading centre, Cowarie, on the Warburton) ; pulyara, long-

snouted rat; koolchie, a species of rat; koonappoo, a species of mouse; kulunda,

black and white rat, similar to the house rat; all of these kinds were eaten. Wells

(1894, 517) stated that rats (miarroo) were eaten by the Kara-nguru.

Howitt (1891, 39) mentioned as Dieri murdus, punta (mouse), maiaru (rat),

karapana (a mouse), and kokula (a rat); but the last-named identification may

have been incorrect, since he stated later (p. 39) that kokola was a wallaby (An)

and a handicoot (Kd), In 1904 Howitt gave a list of Eyrean murdus, including

maiaru D, W, rat; punta D, Yu, shrew mouse; karabana D, small mouse; kuna-

mart Yu, rat (p. 91, 92); parina Kd, rat; korinya Kd, small burrowing rat

(p. 97). It may be mentioned regarding kunamari that Howitt and Siebert (1903,

528) stated that mari D was a kind of wallaby,

Stirling and Waite (1919, 149) mentioned a toa, No. 275, concerning a kokula,

a species of rat which carried its young on its back. As indicated above, kokula

is a small marsupial, Howitt (1903, 97) calling it a small bandicoot, Berndt and

Vogelsang (1941, 7-8) mentioned punta as the name of the mouse and rat

(Dieri) ; mungu as that of the former and wada that of the latter amongst the

Negadjuri tribe.

Gason (1874, 272) stated that, during the mindarie (or peace corroboree),

young men who were about to be initiated were decorated by each having, attached

to the head, a thippa made of tails of rats. He also stated (p. 289) that this bunch

of tassels was made from the tails of native rabbits (i.c., the rabbit bandicoot,

Thalacomys spp.).

It is to the excellent accounts of the native fauna by Finlayson, who under-

took field work in the far north-eastern region of South Australia, that we now

know the Wonka-nguru names of the local rodents. Some species have now

become either rare or extinct in that region. Two species at times are represented

by migratory hordes (Finlayson 1939, 348, 354).

Rattus villosisstmus Waite, Finlayson (1939, 88-94) stated that its name

was miaroo W, but that the term had an earlier usage and was applied (presum-

ably by whites) to many, if not all, kinds of rats. He, as well as Le Souef and

Burrell (1926, 107), reported that it was the migratory horde rat of Western

Quecnsland and the Northern Territory. It was first described by Gould in 1854

as Mus longipilis, nom. pracocc.

We received the name mai-aru N, W, for this edible rat which was dug out

from cracks in the mud of the flood plain of the Diamantina. This species, and

the succeeding one, were mentioned by Finlayson in his book, “The Red Centre”

(1936, 99).

Pseudomys nunnie Troughton—Finlayson gave an account of this “river rat,”

which is also a migratory species (1939, 94-101 ; 1939, 348-354). It is the pallyoora

of the Wonga-nguru and ranges from Longreach, Queensland, to Lake Eyre and

Ooldea, being abundant at Goyder’s Lagoon. We received the same name, W, N,

at Pandi. ‘The species has a conspicttous white tail. Gason’s pulyara is the Dieri

name. Howitt 1904 mentioned balyara (N) and baliyara (Ya) as a small pouched

mouse and as a totemic animal (p. 94, 95); and also referred to palyara (Ka, N)

as the long-snouted marsupial rat (p. 646). These references should probahly be

to the rodent now under consideration,

258

Notomys alstant Rrazenor—Finlayson (1939, 103) reported that this edible

jerboa mouse, called oorarrie by the Wonga-nguru, was easily captured in clay-

pans by children. he related NV. fuscus was reported to us at Oaldea to be known

as darraka warra (darraka = bone, warra = long, 7ec., long legs).

Notoums cervinus Waite (? Gould)—Finlayson (1939, 108) stated that this

specics may be the wilkintie of the Wonka-nguru, He mentioned that if the

animal scen by Capt. Sturt were an oorarrie, then NV. aistent would be a synonym

af N, cervimus Gould, and the species described by Waite would be without a valid

name, Wood Jones (1925, 343) referred to the species as Ascopharvne cervinus,

following Waite (1900).

Cowirrie—Gason (1879, 285) called it a rat (Dieri). Howitt (1904, 796)

reported that kauri was a small marsupial (Yu. Ya), a burrower, and at times

migratory. His remarks suggest that it was predatory, It was called a rat by

the local whites. Cowarie, a former trading centre on the Warburton, has the

same name, Mr. Vogelsang recognised cowarie of the Dieri as the pale sandy

jerboa mouse, identified by Wood Jones as A. cervinus Gould. Brazenor’s

N. aistoni is a synonym. Finlayson’s term oorarrie is probably an error for

cowarie. The latter author referred to N. aiston? (1939, 358; 1940, 135) from

Ooldea and from the Eyrean region, probably from Cowarie. Ile also reported

that dargawarra was the native name for N. aleris everardensis in the Everard

Ranges (1940, 125),

Leporillus conditer Gould, a house-building rat, now extinct, but known to

the Wonka-nguru as wopilkara (Finlayson 1939, 111-114). It has been te-

described also by Wood Jones (1923) and Troughton (1923). Perhaps Gason’s

kulunda, “a black and white rat, similar to a house rat” (Dieri tribe) may be this

species or, more probably, L. apicalis Gould.

Mus musculus Linn—Finlayson (1939, 115) stated that the common mouse

lived in the Eyrean region like indigenous murids, and that its Wonka-nguru name

was puntapunta, and that the species (because of its having a native name) was

probably present in the area tor a much longer period than other introduced

manuals such as the fox, cat and rabbit, which had no native names. It seems

to me more likely that the name belonged originally to small native mice resembling

Pseudontys forresti var., recorded trom Mulka by Finlayson (1939, 101), or

hermanusburgensis \Vaite (menkie of the Aranda tribe), The term punta

{poontha of Gason) is applied to mice by the Dieri, while the Ngadjuri called

then mung-u (Berndt and Vogelsang 1941). Kthu (1886, 145) recorded mantoo

as a mouse, Yorke’s Peninsula.

Hydronys chrysogaster Geoft—Finlayson (1939, 114) reported the presence

of this large water rat in the Cooper and Diamantina regions, its name in the latter

being una appa (Wonka-nguru), Tinna or tidna means track or foot, and appa

or ngapa is water. Howitt (1904, 95) stated that a water rat, tundubulyeru, was

a totem animal in the Yaurorka tribe; bulycru suggests palyura (= Psendomys

wunnie), but baliyara is mentioned as a different totem of the same tribe: it is

prebable that Ilowitt’s term applies to Hydronvys,

Unidentified ? rodents-—-Schtrmann (1844) mentioned a large number of

Pangkala names of kinds of mammals which he called rats, mice or burrowing

animals, Some of them may be small polyprotodonts, but he gave no indication

of their identity. They are accordingly grouped together under the present head-

ing —bunta, mouse sp. (p. 4); inyalla, burrower (7) ; italla, burrowing rat (8) ;

karnanyuru, “an animal building a nest of sticks to a great height” MS

[Leporillus, probably conditor]; karpili, burrower (16), rat (p. 86); kauanna,

burrowing rat (1/7) ; madla paru, yailba mirrinye, species of animal (24)—paru =

animal, game or meat, mirrinye = similar to, yailba is a burrowing species, hence

259

an animal resembling the yailba; mai erri, mouse sp. (24), mat = vegetable food,

e.g. roots; melokunyo, mouse sp. (30); paltvarra, rat sp. (52) [the name suggests

palyara, applied to Pseudemys further north]; pulku, mouse (59); wallumba,

common rat (67) [presumably the native Rattis greyi which Wood Jones (1923,

301) recorded from Lyre’s Peninsula]; walvari; rat or mouse sp. (67); yailba,

burrowing sp. (77); yartini (paltyarra mirinya, 7.c., similar to paltyarra, a species

of rat), spotted bandicoot (82) [this species is referred to later in this paper when

dealing with bandicoots].

MARSUPTALLA

Kach species prohably had its particular namie in each tribe. All kinds, from

kangaroos to marsupial mice, were eaten. Gason (1879, 278) stated that kan-

garoos did not occur in the Dieri country, but that they were known to that tribe

because they were secn in the country to the south [ Kuyant| when men were visit-

ing the red ochre deposits [of the northern Flinders Ranges|. Howitt (1891, 89)

mentioned that the Dieri obtaimed skins of wallahies [Petrogale vanthopus| and

kangaroos [probably Macropus robustus erubescens| from the Murdufla or hill

tribes [Wailpi| and used them as coverings for corpses; but such skins were not

seen amongst the Yantruwtnta and Yaurorka people.

The dress of the southern Pangkala consisted of one or two kangaroo skins,

or of these of several wallabies or opossuins sewn together with sinews from a

kangaroo or wallaby tail, an awl of kangaroo bone being used as a needle (Schiur-

mann 1846; 1879, 210; Wilhelm 1861, 166). The cloak was called palta, and if

many skins were used, it was then termed karpalla palta (karpalla = sewn or

stitched). The awl was im Pa (Schtirmann, 1844, 167) or wonabunyie D,

whether obtained from the leg of a kangarou or emu (Gason 1879, 303). The

kangaroo of the Pangkala must have been Macropus major, the opossmm clucfly

Trichosurus vilpecula, and the wallaby may have been Petrogate latcralis or, more

probably, Thvvfogale eugenti (new extinct on the mainland). These people skinned

kangaroos before cooking, whereas the more northerly tribes did not. Skins were

not tanned.

Gason (1886, 119) stated that wallaby skin rugs were used by the Wailpt.

Morton (1886, 158) reported that the Malvanapa used rugs made of a single

kangarco skin or of several oposstum skins sewn together. A skin rug was termed

dala kati by the Dieri (kati = skin), and if made from kangaroo it was called

dalara (I'ry 1937, 197, 271). A kangaroo skin was used for covering a corpse

(Schirmann 1879, 248).

The tip of a wallaby’s tail was tied to a native’s beard as an ornament

(Schtirmann 1846; 1879, 211; Wilhelmi 1861, 167; Pangkala tribe.)

Kangaroo sinews were also used for attaching the peg to the end of the spear-

thrower (midla), and the barb to the end of a hunting spear (Schtirmann 1879,

213; Wihelni 1861, 169-170). A kangaroo tooth was utilised as a boring tool to

make a depression in the end af the spear, to receive the peg of the inidla. Knap-

sacks or bags were made from kangaroo skins by the Pangkala. that carried by

men being termed nurtt, while the larger one used by women was nudla (Wilhelm

1861, 171). Bags made from skins of kangaroos and opossums, and used hy the

Arabana and Wonkanguru for carrying food, were referred to by M. Howitt 1902,

43. Skin bags filled with feathers were termed mana-junga 1) (= hand water-

bag}, and were beaten as percussion ‘nstruments during a dancing ceremony (Fry

1937, 270).

Certain marsupials were forbidden as food for Pangkala boys and girls; the

penalties for eating the wallaby, yurridni, or cither of the two kinds of bandicoots,

yartirt and kurkulla, were the development of a brown (instead of black) beard

and the premature arrival of the menses in the two sexcs respectively (Schiirmann

1879, 220; Wilhelmi 1861, 176).

260

Roth (1897, 102, fig. 237-238) described the method of making water-bags

(nilpa) from the skins of kangaroos, pademelons and opossums. Duncan-Kemp

(1933, 56), as well as Horne and Aiston (1924, 51, fig. 39), referred to them, the

same term (nilpa) being used by the Wonkanguru and the tribes northward as far

as the territory of the Pittapitta. Berndt and Vogelsang (1941, 7) reported

wudli-jakuda and tjukuru-jakuda as the Ngadjuri and Dieri names respectively

for these water-bags (wudli, tjukuru = kangaroo; jakuta, yakuta = bag).

Morton (1886, 158) stated that opossum skins were utilised as water-bags by the

Malyanapa tribe. The use of sinews and hair string in addition to resins (from

Triodia or trom Leschenaultia) for the fixing of an axe head (kalara) in its handle

was described by Horne and Aiston (1924, 104-105, fig. 75).

Cleland and Johnston (1939, 175) referred to the use amongst the Wailpi of

broombush, Templetonia egena, to cover traps or pits dug along wallaby pads ia

catch rock wallabies, Pelrogale xanthopus, and euros (Macropus robustus).

Serndt and Vogelsang (1941, 7) mentioned as general terms for kangaroo,

endla Nj, and tyukuru D, but both of these are applied to the red kangaroo.

Dunecan-Kemp 1933, 285, referred to the use of bolas, pit traps and game traps

made of rough palisades for capturing kangaroos.

The aborigines believed in the existence of huge animals and trees in ancestral

times (mura of the Dieri and allied tribes; jelkura of tribes further north; and

altjira of the Aranda tribes to the north-west). A muramura killed an enormous

kangaroo and pegged out its skin, the place where this happened becoming Lake

Eyre (Stirling and Waite 1919, 109), Taplin (1879, 55) reported that the natives

of the lower Murray believed that their chief ancestral beings hunted mighty

kangaroos and the places where the skins were pegged out became denuded of

grass and changed into salt lagoons.

The native names for kangaroo, given later, fall into a few groups, one of

which represented by thaldara or thaldra of the Cooper’s Creek tribes becomes

thuldra amongst the tribes of the Wilson River (a tributary of Cooper’s Creek in

south-western Queensland, near the New South Wales border), thurlda or tulta

anonest the Darling River tribes, and tulatyi amongst the Narrinyerri of the lower

Murray (Curr 1888, 168-169). The last name is of interest as it is the only native

name for a kangaroo or large wallaby (except Cook’s wallaby) which was taken

over and received wide usage amongst the whites. The original kanguru, i.c,, the

species seen by Captain Cook at Endeavour River in North Queensland, is now

known to be a wallaby, Macropus (Wallabia) canguru, ‘Vulatyi is obviously the

toolach (or more correctly toolachi or toolache) of the south-eastern part of South

Australia, a species (Wallabia greyi) whose last known surviving member died in

captivity a few years ago and is now preserved in the South Australian Museum. ,

Macropus rufus—lhe many names received from Curr’s correspondents

(1886) as applied to the kangaroo in our region must refer to this species, since

it ig the red kanguroo which occurs there:—koongoora A, Todd; kungara A,

Jacobs; koongaroo A, Warren and Hogarth, Warren. Chookaroo 1), Gason,

fJacobs; chookeroa N, Paull; chookooroo N, Cornish — Ya, Salmon, Cornish;

chukeroo Wa, Crozier; tchukuro Yu, Howitt; yschuckuru W ?, Jacobs. Kurdloo

Pa, Sawers; kudla Nu, Valentine; koodla Pa, Green; oodloo Wp, Wills; coordloa

Pa, Beddame; cordloo Wp, Phillipson; kurloo Wi, Dix; koola B, Sullivan; calvo

\Wp, Gason; koodla Ja. Pa, Green; kulla Wk, Myles; coola Kg, Heagney; koora

Kw, Anon. Vurlda Wa, Dewhurst; talda Ma, Morton; tharlta Ma, Reid; thuldra

Te, Foott; thaldara Te, Sullivan and Eglinton. Balcun Ku, Heagney; palgan Bi,

Curr. Koonabulla Ky, Machattie. Cutchira Kg, Heagney. Matumba Pp, Eglin-

ton. Yarnda K, Kingsmill.

Other references are as follows:—chookaroo D, Gason 1879, 285; tchukurti

D, Howitt 1885, 6; chookooroo Ka, Wells 1894, 521; kungarra A, Helms

261

1896, 316; koongarra W, Finlayson 1936, 157; tjukuru D ?, Stirling and Waite

1919, 135, toa 156; wudlu (male) Nj, Wp, waulwi (female) Nj, Berndt and

Vogelsang 1941, 7; wudlu Wp, Hale and Tindale 1925; 57; koordloo Pa, Sawers

1886, 132 (Gawler Ranges) ; koolabila Dk, Duncan-Kemp 1933, 242; kupirri Pa,

Schiirmann 1844, 21, white kangaroo, corrected in MS to red kangaroo. It is

known as okira amongst the Aranda; and mal-lu at Ooldea. Schitirmann (1844,

22) mentioned kurdlu as ‘‘an animal of the Marsupian species,” but the same term

was reported by Sawers (kurdloo) and Beddome (coordloo) for the kangaroo in

the northernmost part of the Pangkala territory, where the species would be

M. rufus.

Howitt (1891) mentioned chukuru D, totem (p. 38); taldra Kd, totem

(p. 39). In his later book (1904) he gave many references to the kangaroo as a

tolem animal amongst the tribes of our region :—chukuro N (p, 657), chukuru N

(p. 94), taldra Kd (p. 97), tirlta Wi (p. 98); turlta and thurlta of the Darling

and Paroo tribes (p. 98-99). Berndt and Vogelsang (1941, 7) mentioned as

general terms for kangaroo, gudla Nj, and tjukuru D, but both of these are applied

to the red kangaroo.

The red kangaroo does not occur in the southern part of the Pangkala region,

where the dominant vegetation is the mallee which constitutes the home of

M. major. The reason for its absence is supplied in a local legend published by

Schiirmann (1846; 1879, 239-240) and re-published by Wilhelmi (1861, 193;

1862). Cawthorne (1858) also wrote an account of it, and in his second edition

gave a metrical version, Schtirmann suggested that a specimen of AM. rufus niust

have found its way south. The animal in the legend was called Kupirri (Jtuperree

in Cawthorne, edit 2) and was stated to be of huge size and to have devoured all

who had attempted to spear it. The natives were stricken with terror when they

saw it and threw away the spear-thrower (midla) along with the spear, hence

their aiming was ineffective. Two hunters, Pilla and Indva (Iduya of Schtrmann

1844, 5: Wilhelmi 1861, 193; Inda in Cawthorne, edit. 2), tracked the animal to

the north, and finding it asleep at once attacked it, but their spears became blunt

before they could kill it. This disappointment led to their quarrelling, Pilla

stabbing Indya several times with a blunt spear, but while doing so he received a

severe blow on the nose with a spear-thrower, After reconciliation they again

attacked Kupirri, killing it, On opening it they found the bodies of their devoured

tribesmen, who became restored to life and assisted in cooking and eating the

monster. The two heroes were metamorphosed into anials, still known by their

naines; Pilla became the opossum and the scar on the injured nose is still indicated

by the longitudinal furrow which it bears, while Indya became the native cat whose

former spear wounds (caused by Pilla) are indicated by the white dots distributed

over the skin. The latter part of the leyend relates, of course, to Trichosurus

wulpecula and Dasyurus viverrinus,

Macropus major syn. M. giganteus—The grey kangaroo from the southern

portion of the Pangkala territory was this species. Warru, Taplin (1879, 131—

nante, Adelaide tribe), Schitrmann 1844; warroo Pa, Sawers (1886, 132), Gawler

Ranges; bulka, warru Pa, |.e Socuf and Holden 1886, 8.

Schiirmann (1844) mentioned the following Pangkala terms :—warru

(p. 53); warruparu, kangaroo meat (p. 54), paru = meat, game, animal; warru

puppa, joey—puppa (? European term, puppy) = young one, pup (p. 53);

ngudli, pouch of kangaroo or other marsupial (p. 47); pulka or bulka (= old),

“old man” kangaroo (p. 59); wakkari, female kangaroo (p. 65); warrukatta,

kangaroo hunt (p. 70); wantyukko, young kangaroo; kadlukko, fully-grown

kangaroo (p. 9); kulyara, young male (p. 20); munta, net-bag made of kangaroo

sinews (MS).

262

Macropus robustus (erubescens)—-Manja Wp, Hale and Tindale (1925, 57) ;

juru Nj, manja Wp, Berndt and Vogelsang (1941, 6). It will be noted that the

white man’s name (euro) for this sturdy mountain kangaroo in South and Central

Australia is that given (juru) by the Wailpi of the northern Flinders Ranges.

Wallaroo, also a native term, is its eastern Australian name and was mentioned

by Cunningham when writing in 1827 of New South Wales. Kunnulla is applied

to it at Ooldea.

Petrogale xanthopus, rock wallaby—Andu Wp, Hale and ‘Vindale 1925, 57;

gandu Nj, andu Wp. Berndt and Vogelsang 1941. 10, Finlayson (1936, 158)

gave karndoo as the Dieri name for a wallaby-like animal and suggested that it

might belong to Macropus robustus or Petrogale xanthopus; it is obviously the

same as gandu. It seems to me likely that gunda (Nj) of Berndt and Vogelsang

(1941, 10), a small wallaby, is the same; also karndo Pa, Green 1886, 126 (cast

of Lake Torreus); and karndoo Pa, Beddome 1886, 133 (between Quorn and

Lake Torrens). The species occurs in the Flinders Ranges.

Petrogale latcralis—Wood Jones (1924, 228) believed that the rock wallaby

from the hilly country west of Lake Torrens probably belonged to this species,

whose range extends to Central Australia. Kunoo Pa, Sawers 1886, 126. Gawler

Ranges. Kunna Pa, Schiirmann 1844, 21, kangaroo sp., is almost certainly the

same species.

Wallaby—Yurridni Pa, Schiirmann 1846, 87; 1879. 220: Wilhe!mi 1861, 176:

1862; yuridni Pa, Schirmann 1844, 87; yumballa Pa, Schiirmain 1844, 86.

Reference to the use of skins as clothing has already been made.

Schtirmann’s names and remarks suggest that there were at least two species

of wallabies in that part of Lyre’s Peninsula. Thwogale eugenti, now extinct on

the mainland, was probably one kind, while the other may have been Lagorchestes

or Onvechogale.

Howitt and Siebert (1903, 528) gave an account of a Dieri legend in which

reference was made of a kind of wallaby, mari, which was killed by a muraniura

who converted its skin into a large water-bag, This same legend was repeated by

Howitt (1904, 804-806). The latter (1891, 39) mentioned as names of wallabies

and totems, kokola (Yandairunga, i.e., Antikirinya) and korinva, a small species

(Kurnandaburi, 7.c., Karendala), but the former has been termed by him (1904)

a bandicoot (p. 97) and a pouched mouse (p. 95); while korinya (p. 91) was

referred to as a small burrowing rat. Roth 1897, 34, recorded kokola Pp. as a

bandicoot.

Tlowitt (1904, 98) recorded bauanyal Wi, and bauanya Mi. as names for the

pademelou [? Thylogale|; and wongaru Wi, and muringa Mi, as the respective

tribal names for the local small wallaby from the north-western corner of New

South Wales. Roth (1897) reported ka-la-wari as the Pittapitta term.

Wallaby—Gasou (1879, 285) gave kulkuna as the Dieri name for a “very

swift” wallaby. [ suspect that it was the hare wallaby, Lagorchestes sp.

(?leporeides Gould), concerning whose spced Gould stated that for a short

distance it was more flect than that of any others known to bim. Wood Jones

(1924) considered that it was now extinct in South Australia. [Le Soucf and

3urrell (1926, 214) mentioned as Lagorchestes a small, very fast, hare wallaby

from lake Frome; the species was not noted, but appears to have been L. hirsutus.

Finlayson (1936, 158) stated that L. conspicillatus occurred in the region further

north, 1s range extending fram the east coast almost to the Simpson Desert but

was absent from the Eyrean basin. He went on to state that Sturt may have seen

Lagostrophus fasciatus in the plains of the interior. In 1927 he gave an account

of the “native hare,” Lagorchestes leporoides (1927, 370). Mrs. Duncan-Kemp

(1933, 286) stated that the hare wallaby was called a “grass rat.”

‘

263

Sertth wallaby—Wadla Nj, Berndt and Vogelsang (1941, 6). This is the

same term (wudiu) as those authors mentioned for the male red kangaroo,

Macropus rufus, which is certainly not a scrub wallaby. Perhaps the term is to

be regarded as a general one in the region for kangaroos and wallabies. The

scrub kangaroos of South Australia are W. major and its subspecies, melanops.

Bush wallaby—Gason mentioned the presence of a bush wallaby known to

the Dieri as kaunoonka (1879, 285), Vinlayson (1936, 158, 160) referred to

kanunka as the Wonkanguru term for a marsupial (Potoroinac, resembling

Caloprymuus) from the very arid regions from which that tribe migrated to the

Diamantina, and suggested that it was perhaps Beffongia lesucurti, It is of interest

to note that Strehlow (1908, 62) reported that tnunke was the Aranda term for

the latter. Howitt (1891, 38) recorded kanunka as a bush wallaby and totem

(Dieri). In his book (1904) he mentioned kanunga as a kangaroo rat and as a

murtdu (totem) amongst Eyrean tribes, D (p. 91), Yu (92), Ya (95) ; but he must

have been in error when he reported (783) that it was a rabbit bandicoot, Parogale

lagotis (sic). Fry (1937, 287) recorded kanunka D, as a kangaroo rat.

Since Gason distinguished the local kangaroo rat as wurtarrie, it is possible

that kanunka may have been another oi the hare wallabies, Lagorchestes ov

Lagostrophus. Howitt called watari (1904, 783) and kanta-wateri N (p. 94) each

a kangaroo rat (totem). Kararjili D. Fry 1937, 190, rat wallaby,

Caloprymiuus campestris Gould, plain rat-kangaroo—This animal, described

in 1843, from the stony tablelands and open plains of northern Seuth Austraha,

was not heard of again until rediscovered by Finlayson (1931, 162; 1932, 150),

who gave an excellent account of its habits and capture in the Diamantina region

and published a series of photographs of this interesting little animal in his bock,

“The Red Centre” (1936, 96-104). He reported (1932) that it was known to the

Yelyendi and to the Wonkangurtu (who adopted the Yelyendi name) as oolacunta,

to the Yaurorka as coorgec. and to the Dieri as wirtiree. Tate’s record of it from

the Head of the Great Australian Bight, where the name weelba was applied, was

considered to be an error, based probably on another rat-kangaroo, Bettongia sp.

Brief mention was again made by him (1936, 159). Gason (1879, 285) referred

to wurtarrie as the Dieri term for a kangaroo rat, llowitt (1904, 94, 783) calling

it wateri and watari. Coorgee sugges:s kurka D, W, reported by M. Howitt (1902,

408) asa kind of kangaroo rat; and kulka Pa, Schitrmann.

Bettongia ogilbyi Gould, closely allied to the castern form, B. penicilata

Gould—This rat-kangaroo was formerly widely distributed and common in South

Australia, but Wood Jones (1924, 214) stated that it had become extrenicly rare

in this State in a very short time, {e Brun (1886, 142) gave bookurra as the

name of the kangaroo rat in Ngadjuri territory; and Browne (1897, 72-73)

indicated the native method of using the leaves and stems of Ncrotes

(= Lomandre) effusa to smoke out these animals (bokra ) in the “lower North.”

presumably by the Ngadjuri tribe. Green (1886, 126) gave the term oolka and

boorachie as Pangkala names, the former being obviously kuika Pa (Sehtrmann

1844, 19), while boorachie suggests poorakie, an Adelaide term (prestimably

aboriginal) for a rat-kangaroo. Poorakie may be the same term as purroilko, a

species of kangaroo, recorded by Moorhouse 1935, 37, for the adjacent Murray

River tribe.

Cawthorne, in his notes to his version (2nd edit.) of the Kupirri legend,

mentioned yerke as a rat-kangaroo, Vowitt reported pirrapirra (1904, 97) and

wirijura (1891, 39) as names of rat-kangaroos amongst the Kurnandabturi people

| Karendala tribe], and madura (1904, 789) amongst the Arabana. Schtirmann

(1844) recorded ngandalla (p. 44) and purrai (p, 61, a large species) as ral-

kangaroos, Pa.

264

Phascolomys sp., wombat—Yalpu Wp (also totem), Hale and Tindale 1925,

57. Berndt and Vogelsang (1941, 10) recorded yalpu Wp, and watu Nj. Warto

Pa, Schtrmann 1844, 70; wartundu yappa Pa, wombat hole, Schtirmann 1844, MS.

The kaurna also applied warto to the animal (Teichelmann and Schtirmann 1933,

152) , which is known as wardu to the Wirrung tribes along the Great Australian

Bight, It seems to me that all these references relate to a Lasiorhinus latifrons

Owen, judging from the known range of the two South Australian species as given

by Wood Jones (1924, 268).

Trichosurus vilpecula, common opossum—Pildra, rare in Dieri country

(Gason 1879, 285). Reference has already been made to a Pangkala legend

regarding the red kangaroo (Kupirri) and the opossum (pilla), as recorded by

Schttirmann and others.

The following names were supplied by Curr’s contributors (1886) :—pildra

D, Gason — D, Jacobs; pilta Wi, Dix — Ma, Morton — Wa, Dewhurst; pilla Pa,

Sawers —- Le Souef and Holden; pilda A, Jacobs; peelda Ja, Green; peedla Pa,

Green; pilka W?, Jacobs; pillpa Pa Sawers; bilda K, Kingsmill — Wp, Gason

—Nu, Valentine — Wp, Phillipson; bilta Wp, Wills. Wombla A, Warren and

Hogarth; womboola A, Todd; wampala N, Cornish. Marloo N, Paull; murloo

Ya, Salmon; mullo Ya, Cornish; murlu Wa, Crozier; burloo Kw, Anon — Ky,

Machaitie. Warnunga Kg. Heagney; warnonga Iu, Heagney; woornanga Bi,

Curr; yoranga Ma, Reid. Murrathurra Te, Sullivan and Eglinton — Te, Foott.

jSoorakunnia B, Sullivan. Cothera Kg, Heagney. ‘Vinaballi Pp, Eglinton.

Gurrigen Wk, Myles. Curr (1886, 168-169) pointed out thai billa was the

common term on the Darling River and pilta on Cooper’s Creek.

ITowitt (1904) recorded mirraltiera Kd (p. 97), yaranga Wi (98), and

verilpari Mi (98), and muruthera Kd (1891, 39) as a totem animal. Wumbula A,

Jfeims 1896, 316; pilla Pa, Schtirmaun 1844, 56. Finlayson (1936, 160) men-

tioned unta as its name along the Diamantina and Cooper, but the term does not

resemble any of those reported above, but it suggests antana, the Aranda name for

the species (Strehlow 1908. 62), and wainta which is applied by the Everard

tribes (Helms 1896, 317). Stirling and Waite (1919, 146), toa 248 W’, referred

to the mortal combat between the muramuras, Pildra and Yikaura; the latter is the

native cat, Dasyurits geoffroyi, Berndt and Vogelsang (1941, 7) recorded the

opossum as bilda Nj, and pildra D. It was known to the Adelaide tribes as pilta.

Opossums were eaten. Amongst some tribes their skins were sewn together

with kangaroo sinews to form rugs. The latter were called bilda-palda [palda =

cloak or rug] amongst the Ngadjuri, while a pad made from the skin was called

walka by the same people (Berndt and Vogelsang 1941, 7). Myles (1886, 36)

stated that opossum rugs were rare amongst the Wonkamarra; they were worn by

the Malvangapa (Reid 1886. 178). Schiirmann (1846; 1879, 210) mentioned

that opossum skins were rarely used as clothing by the Pangkala, and described

the mode of preparing them; he also stated that string made from the fur of this

animal was worn round the head and neck of men and was woven into nets for

the head and for pubie tassels (p. 211, 230, 233).

Schiirmann (1844) reported the following Pangkala terms relating to pilla

(p. 56), the opossuin :—pilla butti, pilla putti, opessuin hair (p. 4, 5, 6) butti or

putti = hair or fur; kundindi, be!t or girdle made from (spun) fur of this animal

(p. 20); malberinye, phallocrypt (ngulta, p. 48) consisting of tassels made from

opossum fur (p. 25) ; manga, thread or yarn spun from the fur and woven around

men’s heads (p. 26), this head band being termed ngarkiri (p. 46); womballa,

female opossum (p. 75); and yarndi kuibo, the peculiar odour of opossums (p. 81).

Pscudochirius laniyinosus, Ring-tail opossum. Pipara Pa, Schiirmann 1844, 57,

Thalaconwys lagotis (Peragale layotis; Macrotis lagotis). Bilby, pinto, pinkie,

native rabbit; the largest species of the genus which includes all the rabbit bandi-

265

coots. Capietha [Kapi-ta] D, Gason 1879, 285, native rabbit. Roth (1897, 33)

used the term bilbi, but expressed doubt whether it was the local Pittapitta name.

Howitt (1904) gave many references to rabbit bandicoots as totem animals in the

Eyrean region, and associated the name Peragale lagotis with them, though it is

quite possible that allied species (not then recognised scientifically) were included :

—pira-moku, kapita, D (p. 91), N (94); talka, W (92), A (94), nara-smoku, Yu

(92) [moku = bone or hard structure], Ya (95) ; kapita, D (646) ; he also referred

(p. 794-797) to kapita in his account of the Anti-etya and Ngardu-etya legends

(anti or nganti = flesh; ngardu = nardoo, sporocarps of Marsilea Drummondti ;

etya = eaters—thus flesh and nardoo eaters) (p. 794-797). Eylmann (1908, 167)

recorded piramukku (Perameles lagotis) as a Dieri murdu (maddu).

Hale and Tindale (1925, 46, 57) mentioned the pinto (presumably following

Waite 1917, 433, in using this term) or rabbit bandicoot (which they did not

identify) as a totem animal called wara by the Wailpi of the northern Flinders

Ranges. I am not able to state which variety of T. lagotis occurred in that region;

probably it was I. sagifta, It might be mentioned that the Kanrna tribe used

pingko for a small burrowing animal with a white tail (Teichelmann and Schir-

mann 1933, 137), obviously Thalacomys lagotis—hence the corrupted term pinto.

Wood Jones (1924) gave an account of the South Australian species and

slated that the typical 7°. lagotis was now probably extinct in this State, its last

known habitat being near Lake Alexandrina. ‘Troughton (1932) considered the

animal from the lower Murray as a distinct subspecies, T. lagotis var. grandis

Troughton, The Barcoo bilby was reported by Wood Jones as T. sagitta which

lived in the great drainage system of Lake Eyre and whose Dier1 name was kapita,

urgata being applied to it [by the Aranda] at Charlotte Waters. He published a

key (p. 154) to the various species. Krefft in 1866 stated ihat the name for the

rabbit bandicoot amongst the natives of the lower Murray was wurrapur. This

term closely resembles wirrappo, reported by Moorhouse (1846) as that applied

to a “small mammiferous animal” by the aborigines of the Murray, between

Mannum and Morgan.

Finlayson (1930, 178) stated that Thomas’ 7. sagitta from Killalpaminna

was near 1. lagotis, and in a later paper (1935, 233) recorded it as a variety of the

latter, mentioning that it was the kapita of the Dieri and thulka of the Won-

kanguru. Wood Jones (1924, 164) had reported that thulka was its name amongst

the Kukata people and was commonly changed into talkie by the local whites.

Two of the Dieri toas (75, 169) described by Stirling and Waite (1919) relate to

kapita (T. lagotis).

Thalacomys leucurus—lhe Eyrean form was described by Finlayson (1932,

168) as T. minor var. miselia and was stated (1935, 227) to be known to the Won-

kanguru as yallara, It was more common than the kapita. He believed that

T. leucurus ‘Vhomas was a synonym of T. minor Spencer. Troughton (1932, 231)

discussed T. minor and considered that the specimen from Mungeranie, identified

by Le Souct as T. leucurus ‘Thomas, belonged to Spencer’s species (minor), whose

native [Aranda] name at Charlotte Waters was urpila. Iredale and Troughton

(1943, 20) regarded T. minor (vars. minor and miselia) as distinct from

T. leucura, but in bis recent work, Troughton (1941, 74) considered minor as a

dark phase of T. leucurus, and miselia as representing the typical adult stage of

Thomas’ species.

The tails of the various species are striking because of their whiteness and of

the black tip varying in length according to the species or varicty. They are used

extensively for ornamental purposes by Central Australian natives, the term tippa

or thippa being used in the Eyrean region, but some authors have applied it also

to “rat tails.’ Apart from the water rat, Hydromys, Pseudomys minnie and

Leporillus apicalis (from the lower Darling and Murray), ] do not know of any

266

native rodent in that area possessing a white tip to the tail. These tails, singly ot

in bunches, are tied to the end of the beard or elsewhere, Gason (1879, 289)

stated that the Dieri gave the name thippa to a bunch of tassels made from tails of

native rabbits, about fifty being needed to make an ordinary tippa to be used as a

phallocrypt. When the latter was made from fur of rats or wallaby it was called

unpa. Presumably “rat” in this latter case referred to a true rodent such as

Kattus villosissinus or Pseudomys minnic, Paull (1886, 18) mentioning that the

Ngameni wore a pubic fringe spun from the fur of rats, while Sanger (1883)

stated that anpah [unpa of Gason 1879] was a phallocrypt of twine made from the

tur of animals, Howitt and Siebert (1903, 530) used the term tipa for the pen-

dant made from tails of the rabbit bandiceot. Gason stated (p. 27/2) that thippa

were fastened to the prepared hair of the head of initiates at the mindarie (or

peace) ceremony in such a way that the ends of the tails (of rats) hung down over

the shoulders. Howitt (1891, 84; 1904, 662) gave similar information (based on

Gason). Fry (1937, 201) reported the term as tipi D.

Howitt (1904, 646-650) referred to a Karauguru and Ngameni legend con-

cerning the muramura, Malku-malku-ulu, a Ngameni name whose Dieri equivalent

was ‘Tippa-tippa-ulu, meaning “the two with the tippa.” a pubic tassel made from

the tails of kapita, Peragele lagotis. This tippa was worn as a phallocrypt only

by circumcised men (p. 647), but men of a pinya (revenge expedition) wore it

fastened to the beard. There is also a reference (p, 805) to another muramura

wearing a tippa. The ornament is called alpita by the Aranda (Spencer aud

Gillen, 1899, 646). Stirling and Waite (1919, 114) referred to kararitji (toa 5)

as the string spun from the fur of the tails of the “white kapita, probably the

rabbit bandicoot, Thylacenys lagolis,” by a maramura (Tirari tribe),

Iforne and Aiston (1924) mentioned telea W, as a white rat and stated (p. 9)

that there was a uative legend that, before the arrival of the white man there had

been a very luxuriant season on the Diamantina and Warburton, but there followed

an immense fire which swept down almost to Lake Eyre, many of the blacks being

burnt to death. Willoo, the plover (stone plover or curlew), being a cunning bird,

turned himself into a stone and watched the blaze, but Telca (the ancestral telca)

saved himself by burrowing deep in the earth until the flames had gone by. Two

mooras who were stated to have been the cause of this conflagration, decreed that,

ever afterwards when fire was being made, special precautions must be taken.

Telca is the rabbit bandicoot, 7. lagotis sagitta.

Bandicoots—Wood Jones (1924, 140) stated that Jsoodoen obcsulus was

formerly common all over South Australia but was now on the verge of extine-

tion, [Finlayson (1931, 161) also referred to this fact. Waite (1917, 433)

reported finding remains of the species in the pellets of an owl near Lake

Perigundi,

Finlayson (1935, 235) obtained from old natives in the Wonkanguru area an

account of two species of Peramelids, one of which was possibly a small Perameles

and the other probably Chacrapus castanotis, The latter was recorded from

Cooper’s Creek by Wood Jones (1924, 171), who stated that its Kukata name was

wilyalya. Burkuna was the bandicoot totem amongst the Wilya tribe (Howitt

1904, 98). Le Brun (1886, 142) mentioned mully as the Ngadjuri name for a

bandicoot ; kurkulla Pa, Schtirmann 1844, 23; kurkulla Pa, Schtirmann 1879, 220;

fsoodon obesulus is a probable identification.

Schirmann (1844, 82) mentioned yartini Pa, as a spotied bandicoot, an

animal similar to paltyarra, a species of rat. It was recorded later by him (1879,

220; Wilhelmi 1861, 176) as yartiri Pa, bandicoot. Tf for spotted we read parti-

coloured it may refer to Peraieles ercmiana, described by Spencer fron: Central

Australia; but if we interpret spotted as indicating obvious variations in pelage

colour as well as the presence of marked dark or light barring, then P. myosura,

267

a species known from the region of the Gulfs and extending west to Western

Australia is a probable identification. What is the status of Gason’s kooraltha,

a ‘spotted ferret’? It is suggested later in this paper that it may be Dasyurus

wiverrinus, but it may perhaps be one of the bandicoots just mentioned. Accord-

ing to Troughton (1941, 67), P. myosura occurs from Ooldea to the Swan River,

but formerly ranged easterly to the head of St. Vincent Gulf and the Murray.

Dasyurus geoffroyi Gould, northern native cat, Dasyurinus geoffreyt, accord-

ing to Iredule and Troughton 1934. Tickawara | jikawa- ra} D, Gason (1879,

285), eaten; tikanara | error for tikauara] D, Howitt (1891, 38), murdu.

Several toas (No. 70 T, 90, 107 W, 248 W) mentioned by Stirling and Waite

(1919), have relation to the muramuttra, Yikaura. Berndt and Vogelsang (1941,

3) gave aku-indji and jikaura as the Negadjuri and Dieri names respectively. Roth

(1897, 33) recorded it as ik-oo-urra Pp.

Iiowitt (1904) mentioned the native cat as a totem animal in many tribes,

e.g., yikaura D (p. 91), N (94), Ya (95), yirauka (96, errer for yikaura) ; pira-

moku, tribes to the south-east of Lake Pando (782); yikaura, tribes to the south

of Lake Pando (783); but he also termed piramoku D, N, a rabbit bandicoot

(91, 94), It is a very important tote mic animal, achilpa. tjilpa, of the Aranda.

Sawers (1886, 132) recorded gedna Pa, from the Gawler Ranges. Pangkala. Iin-

layson (1933, 202) stated that the Dieri referred to the presence on ‘the Barcoo

of a spotted animal, yikaura, which had not been seen for many years, and that it

was probably Dasvuris sp. The disappearance of native cats from South Aus-

tralia and eastern Australian localities was referred to by Wood Jones (1923, 92,

94), who mentioned that the allied species, D. viterrinus, used to accur along the

Murray River in South Australia,

Horne and Aiston (1924, 57) mentioned a legend from Beltana (Kuyari)

relating to the native cat, which when first seen had a smooth black coat. The

natives speared the unknown aninial, piercing it in many places, the injuries being

now represented by the white spots. This legend differs considerably from that

previously mentioned when dealing with the red kangaroo, opossum and native cat.

Gason (1879, 285) mentioned kooraltha as ‘the Dieri name of the spotted

ferret. As far as | know, the only spoited marsupials in Australia (apart from

the cuscus, Spilocuseus nudicaudatus, from Cape York Peninsula) are species of

Dasyurus, Since Gason recorded tickawara as the Dicri name for the native cat,

it is probable that, unless these two terms referred to the same species (Gason

being unaware of it), two species of Dasyurus may have been known in the region.

Dasyurus viverrinus (= D. quoll Zim. according to Iredale and Troughton’s

check-list, 1934, 12). Native cat—Schtirmann 1844, reported the following

Pangkala terms: idnya (p. 5); idnya yappapaityapaitya (p. 79), yappa = hole,

hence perforated, spotted; paitya = angry, quarrelsome, thus the term means the

very quarrelsome spotted “cat.” The term was reported as indya in the Icupirri

legend as reported by Schtirmann (1879, 239) and referred to carlicr in the present

paper. The animal was called ngrui moch (== many spots) by the Murray natives.

according to Wood Jones (1923, 92). Moorhouse (1846; 1935, 24) reported that

it was termed mabong by the Moorundie natives who lived along the Murray River

between Morgan and Mannum (according to Tindale’s preface to Moorhouse’s

reprinted work, 1935), and belonged to the Ngaiawang tribe (Tindale 1940, 180).

Veichelmann and Schtirmann (1840; 1923,.111) stated that 1 was known as maho

amongst the Kaurna tribe of the Adelaide plains. It is quite possible that Berndt

and Vogelsang’s Neadjuri term, aku-indji (1941, 5), may refer to D. vtverrinus

(indya, idnya), rather than to J). geoffroyi, the terms being similar.

Sminthopsis crasstcaudata centralis Thomas—Finlayson (1933, 197) recorded

this variety of fat-tailed pouched mouse from the Wonkanguru region, where it

268

was called nilee. Thomas, in 1902, had already reported it from Killalpaninna in

the Dieri area of Cooper’s Creek, Its resemblance to the shrews of the Northern

Hemisphere was noted by Wood Jones (1923, 112). Waite (1917, 454) reported

finding it in the Cooper’s Creek region where it is preyed on by white owls, Tyto

alba delicatula.

Sminthopsis larapinta Spencer was reported by Finlayson (1933, 199) from

the Wonkanguru region, where its name was melatyhanie.

Dasycercus cristicauda Kreffit—Finlayson (1933, 200) gave an account of this

small Dasyurid as Chaetocercus cristicauda hillieri Thomas from the lower

Diamantina, where its Wonkanguru name is mudagoora. Wood Jones (1923,

103) wrote of it as Chaetocercus cristicauda whose name at Ooldea was mulgara,

and at Charlotte Waters was amperta (Aranda), but later (1924, 132) pointed

out that the correct generic name was Dasycercus which took priority over

Amperta Cabrera (based on its Aranda name), Chaetocercus being already pre-

occupied, Iredale and Troughton (1934, 8) placed Phascogale hillieri, described

by Thomas in 1905 from Eyrean material, in the synonymy of Krefft’s species, as

also did Troughton (1941, 34).

Howitt (1904, 791) stated that madagura was a small marsupial (Arabana),

and he referred (p. 789) in the same legend to “madura, the kangaroo rat, whose

burrow (like that of any’ animal which threw the earth out behind it) was called

pul-yundu.” Whether madura and madagura are the same animal I cannot say,

but it may be mentioned that Howitt often applied the same name to different

animals, as will be shown below. Finlayson’s observations identified madagura as

Dasycercus.

Notoryctes typhlops Stirling, marsupial mole—Duncan-Kemp (1933, 66)

mentioned that this animal, kakoma of the tribes living amongst the sandhills west

of the territory occupied by the Pittapitta and related tribes, was eaten by the

natives and the skins were used for ceremonial purposes and for making loin

cloths, Roth (1897, 33) stated that kokoma Pp, was a rat. Finlayson (1935, 235)

mentioned that there was no scientific confirmation of the presence of the mole in

Queensland and that it was not recorded in Longman’s list (1930) of the mammals

of that State. The region, however, lies in the great arid sandhill region whose

zoalogy has not yet been satisfactorily investigated, and the presence of the animal

there is likely. Spencer (1896), in the [lorn Expedition Reports, recorded its

occurrence as far south as Charlotte Waters, I have obtained it from Ooldea,

from which locality Wood Jones (1923, 128) has already reported it; its name

there is aru-dharra-da.

MAmMArIAN NAmes Nor [pentrrirp

Maiaru—Finlayson (1936, 99) stated that all mammals smaller than a kan-

guroo were called rats by the local whites in the lower Diamantina area, though

the native name applied to Rattus villosissimus by the Wonkanguru was miatoo.

Gason’s Dieri term miaroo probably belongs to the same spccics, since he men-

tioned other kinds of rats. Howitt (1904) used the term maiaru as the name of a

totem, animal (a rat), amongst the Dieri (p. 91) and Wonkanguru (92), but he

termed it a marsupial rat (782) in the northern part of the Eyrean basin— pro-

bably an error. In an earlier paper (1891) he used the term for a rat,

Punta—Gason said that poontha D was a mouse. Finlayson stated that

puntapunta W was Mus musculus, Mr. T. Vogelsang informed me that the dupli-

cation of a term in the name of a plant or animal might mean a young or small

form of the same kind, so that puntapunta might mean a sniall kind of mouse.

Howitt (1891, 38) called punta D a mouse; but later (1904) called it a shrew

mouse (p. 91), Dieri (91), Yantruwunta (92) and Yaurorka (95); but reported

it to be a small marsupial (783) amongst the south-eastern totems of the Eyrean

269

area; he also stated that it was a small marsupial which was called a rat by the

local whites, Schiirmann 1844, 61, reported that punta Pa was similar to marnta

and that the latter was a marsupial.

Palyura—Gason called pulyara D_a long-snouted rat. Finlayson recorded

pallyoora W as Pseudomys minnie. Howitt (1904) mentioned amongst totem

animals a small pouched mouse, balyara N (p. 94), baliyara Wo (95); palyara,

a long-snouted marsupial rat eaten by the Karanguru and Ngameni (646); and

palyara, a small marsupial (a totem animal in the northern part of the Eyrean

basin. Schiirmann 1844, 52, recorded paltyarra Pa as a rat. Pseudomys spp. can

scarcely be called long-snouted rats; hence the possibility of the term being applied

in the northern portions to a native mouse, Pseudomys spp. as indicated by Tinlay-

son, and elsewhere in the area to some marsupial mouse like a Sminthopsis,

Eylmann (1908, 167) reported paljara as a rat (Dieri totem). The name tundu-

bulyeru was reported to be used for the water rat; bulyeru seems to be the same

term as palyaru, p and b being interchangeable in most native words.

Kokula—Howitt (1891, 39) called kokola Kd, a bandicoot. [ater (1904)

he reported as a small marsupial kokula D (p. 91), W (92), A (94), N (94);

a pouched mouse, kokula Wo (95); a small bandicoot, kokula Kd (97) ; mar-

supial rat, kokula (totemic in the south-eastern part of the Eyrean basin). Stirling

and Waite (1919, 149), in referring to toa 275, mentioned kokula as a species of

rat which carried its young on its back. Roth (1897, 34) recorded kokola Pp as

a bandicoot, Troughton (1941, 35) mentioned that the young of Siminthopsis

and (p. 307) of some rats, including Conilurus albipes, could cling to the fur of

the mother and thus be carried by the latter. The available evidence suggests that

kokula is probably a small Phascogaline marsupial, ¢.g., Sminthopsis sp.

Other “rats” and “mice’—Koolchie D, a rat; koonappoo D, a species of

mouse; kulunda D, a black and white rat; all reported by Gason (1879, 285).

Karapana D, a mouse (Howitt 1891, 38); karabana D, a small mouse (Towitt

1904, 91, 783); korinya Kd, a small burrowing rat (Howitt 1904, 97), termed

a small wallaby in a previous paper (1891, 39); kunamari Yu, rat (Howitt, 1904,

92), mari was stated by Howitt and Siebert (1903, 528) to be a kind of wallaby ;

parina Kd, rat (IIowitt 1904, 97); myara A [maiaru], rat, Warren 1886, 112.

Duncan-Kemp (1933, 14) mentioned “blue poorakies” and paely ooras (desert

rats and mice) as being collected in the sandhill country near Farrar Creek

[Karuwali tribe].

Other marsupials, probably Dasyuridae-—Gason (1879, 285) mentioned three

Dieri names for “native ferrets” :—thillamillarie ; arutchie; and a “spotted ferret,”

kooraltha. It has already been suggested that the last may be a species of

Dasyurus other than D. geoffroyi (¢.g., D. viverrinus) ; the other two were perhaps

Phascogale and Dasyuroides, Padi-padi Yu, a pouched mouse (Howitt 1904, 92).

Nidla D, Ya, Yu (Jlowitt 1904, 796), a small marsupial called a rat by the whites ;

is this Finlayson’s nilec, Svinthopsis crassicaudata? Schiurmann (1844) referred

to two Pangkala marsupials :—marnta (p, 28) and punta (p. 61), an animal similar

to marnia: these two terms probably belong to members of the Phascogalinae.

Punta has been applied to mice.

MoNoTREMATA

Tachyglossus aculecatus Shaw-—-Echidna or native porcupine. Finlayson

(1936, 161) reported it as very rare ia the lower Diamantina region, where its

Wonkanguru names were inappa and innuwallinga, Gillen (1896, 180) gave its

Aranda name as inaarlinga, while the ancestral echidna (p. 184) was Inapwerla;

Spencer and Gillen (1896, 650) using the terms inarlinga and inapwertwa respec-

tively. Roth (1897, 36) stated that the Pittapitta applied the terms munguni-pari

and narapari to the animal.

270

Ornithorhynchus anatinus— Hale and Tindale (1925, 56) referred to

Basedow’s opinion (1925, 304, pl. 41) that a design scratched on a rock by natives

of the Flinders Ranges was strongly suggestive of a platypus, that author in 1914

considering that there was reason for supposing that the animal had heen observed

in Dalhousie Springs. ‘hough on very rare occasions the species has been seen in

the lower Murray, it has not been reported further north in this State and the

absence of suitable streams there would seem to render its occurrence quite

unlikely, The native rock engraving is suggestive of an echidna or possibly a

tortoise.

AVES

General terms—Bird: pai-a is the common term throughout the region; piya

D, Gason 1879, 302; pi-a Pp, Roth 1897, 31, 37, pi = that which travels or lives

in air; paia, Llowitt 1904, 788; paija D, Fry 1937, 203; irta Pa, Schiirmann 1844,

8; yuta Wp, Hale and Tindale 1925, 57; talli Pa, Schitrmann 1844, 62, young bird,

Feathers: yarri Pa, Schtirmann 1844, 81 (wing or feather) ; poornoo, kouaro Pp,

Roth 1897, 31, 35; kurl-ya Ka, Wells 1894, 520.

Egg, names supplied by Curr’s correspondents (1886): papoo A, ‘Todd;

pappu A, Jacobs; parpoo N, Cornish; bapoo A, Warren and Hogarth; pampu W ?,

Jacobs; pompo Kw, Anon; pumpo Ky, Machattie; pampo Ya, Salmon; pompoo

Ya, Cornish; bembo Pp, Eglinton. Pepe Wp, Wills; pepe K, Kingsmill; pie-pie

Wp, Gason; peepee Pa, Beddome — Ja, Green; peppi Pa, Sawers. Kaapee N,

Paull; capee Yu, Howitt; kuppy Te, Moott; kuppe Wk, Myles; kuppie D, Gason;

kuppee Wp, Philhpson; kupinya Te, Sullivan and Eglinton; kuppo B, Sullivan;

kabbi D, Jacobs; kupi Wa, Crozier; karpi Ma, Morton; kappi Wa, Dewhurst.

kKookurry Ku, Heagney; coocurry Kg, Heagney; kokarri Bi, Curr. Mooka Nu,

Valentine, Pirty Ma, Reid; herty Wi, Dix.

Other terms—Nest: wola (piyawola) D, Gason 1879, 301; pudni Pa, Schitr-

mann 1844, 59. Thaubulyoo D, Gason 1879, 303, rotten egg, Wardnu Pa, ege-

shell, Schurmann 1844, 69; murka Pa. yolk (p. 36); peli Pa, egg-white (p. 55).

Pata-moku D, Howitt 1904, 788, applied to the Utibelliferous plant, Didiscus

giaucifolius; payamoku TD, Stirling and Waite 1919, toa 68, bird bone used for

picreing nasal septum. Wima paija D, Fry 1937, 203, dream bird, ie., one asso-

ciated with sacred ceremonies (wima). Malhberinye Pa, Schiirmann 1844, 25,

phallocrypt made of feathers (or of tassels of opossum fur). Aumie D, Gason

1879, 296, flock of birds (or mob of catile). Kullari Pa, a fabulous bird said to

peck people’s heads (Schtirmann 1844, 20); it was apparently different from the

fiend, Marralye, which took the form of a bird and attacked, and at times killed,

natives (p. 28). Gason (1879, 278) referred to a Dieri ceremony to make wild

fowl lay eggs; such birds occur in great abundance after the floods come down

from Queensland highlands and fill the river-beds, lakes and watercourses. Reid

(1886, 179) reported that the Mulya-ngapa natives believed that alter death they

became birds. The use of feathers by the Dieri for stuffing skin bags to convert

them into percussion instruments for use during dancing (Fry 1937, 270) has

already been noted. Many of the native names for birds are onomatopocic.

CASUARITFOR MES

Dromacus novac-hollandiae Lath. Emu—Worovcathie D, Gason (1879, 286).

de . < 4

ae contributors (1886) reported the following terms: warreewatte A,

A\ arren ; warrewotti A, Warren and Hogarth ; warrawatly Yu, llowitt; warrachie

Pa, Ja, Green; warraitya Pa, le Souef and HTolden; warretchie Wp, Gason;

warrachie Wp, Wills; wortachic K, Kingsmill; warrache Wop, Phillipson; warradi

Pa, Sawers; warrawudgi Kw, Anon; warrawidgee Ya, Salmon. Warrukotti A,

Jacobs; woroocaihie D, Gason; worrukatti D, Jacobs: warroogatty N, Paull;

workatji W?, Jacobs; waraguila N, Cornish; waroogatee Wp, Phillipson; war-

gutchi Ky, Machattie. ‘oolpurri Te, Foott; koolberri Wk, Myles; koolbaree,

‘Le, Sullivan and Eglinton; koolbarree B, Sullivan [= kool-par-1 Roth 1897];

goolburra Pp, Eglinton; coolperry Keg, Heagney; koolperry Ku, Heagney, Kathie

Ma, Reid ; kaltee Wi, Dix: koleti Ma, Morton; karde Nj, Le Brun; karrie Nu,

Valentine: karlye Pa, Beddome : kurithe Wa, Crozier kurlitchi Wa, Dewhurst.

Quarra Ya, Cornish. Erlea A, Todd. Kubana Bi, Curr,

Names reported by Howitt as totemic were: warugati D (1891, 38);

waranati An (39), and kulbara Kd (39); warugatti (1901, 293). In his later

work (1904) he reported the following as tolemic: warogati D (p, 91), W (92),

A (94); warukati A (783); warkitji N (94); kewora Ya (95); pulkara Wo

(95); kulbara Kd (97), and kulthi Wi, Mi (98). Many of these terms will be

recognised as being essentially the same as others quoted above. Kewora is quorra;

kulthi is kaltce or kathie (.e., skin); kulbara is the same as koolpurri and its

variants, as well as koolpari of the Pi:tapitta referred to below. [erlea, mentioned

by Todd (1886) for the Arabana, is the same as erlia and ilia reported for the

Aranda by Spencer and Gillen (1899, 648) and Strehlow (1908, 64) respectively.

It is of interest to note that Howitt (1904 97) recorded that warogatchi was

applied to the crow by the Kurnandaburi (== Karendala) ; this is probably an error

for wakaratchi (wakaretji) the term applied to the crow by other tribes in that

locality. Narlye suggests kalaia, the Loritja term for the emu, the latter term

heing used also at Ooldea by the Andigerri; while [ielms recorded kaleya from

the verard Ranges (1896, 317).

Other records are warugati D, Howitt 1885, 6 — Gatti 1930, 107; warraitya

Pa, Schtrmann 1844, 69; worrugattt A, Helms 1896, 316; warugatt! Yu, Howitt

1901, 293; warra-katchie Ka, Wells 1894, 520; waridji Nj, warukati D, warichi

Wp, Berndt and Vogelsang 1941, 6; warichi Wp, totem, Hale and Tindale 1925,

46, 57; warukatti D, M. Howitt 1902, 407; warukati D, Eylmann 1908, 167 —

Fry 1937, 188, 197; warroo getti W, Llorne and Aiston 1924, 135; warraguti A,

Spencer and Gillen 1899, 60; waragutie A, Spencer and Gillen 1899, 114; wakaje,

Duncan-Kemp 1933, 235; warukatji, Stirling and Waite, 'toas 1, 3, 8, 82, 123, 143,

157, 236, 238, 242, 246, 296; warrukatji N, W, Johnston and Cleland 1943, 154,

Waru-kali = grey skin (Ilowitt 1904, 783)—and hence the emu is known as the

grey bird. Rovh (1897) reported several names uscd by the engulies wakaje,

kool-par-1 (= nodding head, 7.e., the bird with the nodding head), multara maro

(te, the possessor of the multara, an emu-feather ornament), and pooroo-ro

(== the feathered onc; its feathers, poorono, are used extensively for decoration).

Pappiti Pa, male emu; pitti Pa, emu eggs, Schtrmann 1844 MS.; kalbanna, emu

feathers (p. 10). The eating of emu eggs by young men was prohibited by the

Kungerri and Kungadutji trihes (THeagney 1886, 375) and by the Karanguru,

those. disobeying were liable to become grey-headed (Wells 1894, 517). Wona-

panyi D, is the polished sharpened “radius” of an emu and was used for piercing

the nasal septum (Sanger 1883) ; Gason 1879, 303, called it wonabunyie. Sharp-

ened emu bones were pushed through the skin of the arm, thigh, and scrotum

during ceremonies for increasing wild fowl (Gason 1879, 278); and for rain-

making (Horne and Aiston 1924, 44, 115, fig. 80). Tt was also forced down the

urethra of a youth immediately prior to being subincised with a small stone knife

(Horne and Aiston, p. 161). Emu sinews were used for attaching the barb to

the light spear, kutchie (Horne and Aiston, p. 79), and for tying feathers of

hawks, crows and eagles into bunches (kootcha) for decorative purposes (Gason

1879, 289). Emu feathers were used extensively in connection with ceremonial

decorations and dancing. Those bound into a bundle and stick into the headband

were called kukamandra D, Fry 1937, 201; multara W, Horne and Aiston 1924,

118; multarra Ka, Wells 1894, 520; maltara Stirling and Waite 1919, toa 8;

272

maltarra Pa, Schtirmann 1844, 26, attached to the waist belt, the ornament worn

in the hair being termed woppa (p. 75); multara Pp, Roth 1897, 36, a roll of such

feathers being worn over portion of the body wherever there is pain, also called

min-ta-ra and min-ma (p. 163); tilyari Pp, bunch worn over the buttocks, Roth

1897, 38; wurtawurta or wurdawurda D, worn in the headband or in the waist-

band (yinka or dampera), Gason 1879, 289 — Horne and Aiston 1924, 47; aroo 1D,

Gason 1879, 289, large feathers from the tail, used as a fan, Horne and Aiston

published illustrations showing feather ornaments (fig. 34, 35, 82). Ilowitt (1904,

330, 662, 663, fig. 15) recorded the following names for emu feather decorations:

kabuluru, kakabilla, maltara and ngaru. Gason (1879, 272) and Howitt (1891,

85) mentioned the use of cmu feathers in the Dicri mindari ceremony ; and the

latter author (p. 679) referred to the carrying of a very striking token (fig. 41)

of emu feathers by messengers calling people together for the wilyaru, as well as

the mindari, ceremonies, Emu feathers were sometimes woven into the hair-

string forming the waistbelt (Schirmann 1846; 1879, 211-212, 233; Wilhelmi

1861, 167-168). Emu feathers were stuffed into a net (munta W) worn on the

head; and they were also utilised to make kurdaitja shoes and the sheath in

which the stone knife (yutchawunta) was carried (Horne and Aiston 1924, 138).

Basedow (1925) mentioned that the emu (dangorra) figured amongst the

aboriginal constellations (p. 315, 332-333, 349), but did not indicate the name or

locality of the tribe concerned.

Australites were termed “emu eyes”: oooga, Duncan-Kemp 1933, 72, carried

as charms by old men of the Diamantina tribes, and credited with powers of night

vision; warukati milki-tandra D, emu eyeball, regarded as representing a mura

(mindiri), Fry 1937, 201; warroo getti milki W, Horne and Aiston 1924, 60, 135.

According to the last-named authors these small, characteristically shaped, glassy

meteorites were supposed to be eyes lost by emus while walking about looking for

food. These articles were stored in a netbag containing abundance of emu feathers

(fig. 44). When an emu hunt was about to be undertaken, these “eyes” were

taken out by the “Kurdaitcha” men, while the remaining hunters were armed with

boomerangs (kirra). The former threw “eyes” at the emus, and this was believed

to catse the birds to become blind and thus easily driven into water, when the

hunters would close in and kill them.

SPHENISCIFORMES

Eudyplula minor Forst. Penguin—To-lai Pa, Schtirmann 1844, 63.

GALLIFORMES

Leipoa ocellata G. Pheasant, malle fowl—Kalbanya Pa, Schtirmann 1844,

10, pheasant; budni Nj, Berndt and Vogelsang 1941, 7.

Quail—Mulliepirrpaconga 1D, Gason 1879, 286; purrullu Pa, Schiirmann

1844, 61. The species was probably Coturnix pectoralis G.

TURNICIFOR MES

Button Bird—Moko irta Pa. Schtirmann 1844, 33; moko = knot or button

or any rounded hard substance, irta = bird. A small species. Perhaps the button

quail or little quail, Turnix velox G, was referred to, but the bald coot, Porphyrio

melanotus, seems more likely.

COLU MBIFORMES

Geopelia placida G. Dove—Rurukuku Wp, Hale and Tindale 1925, 57. We

obtained the term kurukuku N, W, for this and the succeeding species at Pandi

—obviously an onomatopoeic name,

Geopelia cuncata Lath. Diamond Dove—White 1917 recorded G. cuncata to

be the widely distributed species in the Eyrcan region. Koorookookoo D, Gason

273

1879, 286; kurukuku D, Fry 1937, 189. Teulon 1886, 212, recorded it as kor-

woothoo of the Barkindji tribe. Wapara 1D, Gatti 1930, recorded as a dove, is

the flock pigeon.

Histriophaps histrionica G. Flock pigeon—Woparoo D, Gason 1879, 286;

wapparoo Ka (pigeon), Wells 1894, 521. Duncan-Kemp (1933, 154) referred to

mok-wa-ri, pigeon traps in the form of straight narrow drives, 20 to 30 feet long,

through vegetation along lagoons and waterways. Roth (1897, 98; 1901) gave

additional information regarding the mokwari, the pigeon concerned being

recorded as Histriophagus (error for Histriophaps) histrionica whose name

amongst the Pittapitta and Karanya tribes was pa-row-li (p. 50).

Ocyphaps lophotes Temm. ‘lop-knot, crested pigeon—Murambara Wp, Hale

and Tindale 1925, 57. Mulapara D, T. Vogelsang.

Phaps chalcoptera Lath. Bronzewing—Murnpie D, Gason 1879, 286 ; murnpe

D, Gatti 1930; marnpi Pa, pigeon, Schitrmann 1844, 28; murnbi Pa, pigcon,

Sawers 1886, 132. Wyatt (1879, 172) reported mernpe as a bronzewing pigeon,

Adelaide tribe.

Pigeon—Moodlubra D, Gason 1879, 286 [error for murlapara] ; murlapara A,

Stirling and Waite 1919, 147, toa 259; mulapara D, Fry 1937, 182. These terms

all apply to Ocvphaps lophotes.

Strehlow (1908, 64) mentioned kokoku and manpi as names of two species

of doves amongst the Loritja peoples; these terms are obviously similar to those

for the two species of dove and for the bronzewing respectively amongst the

Fyrean tribes. The name of the township Murnpeowie suggests murnpi-owie,

ie., bronzewing pigeon-water. The name of Stirling and Waite’s mampi bird

(1919, 127, toa 99, D) suggests mernpie or manpi, but the figure on the toa repre-

sents a crested bird such as a top-knot pigeon.

Howitt (1904, 483) published a photograph of Pigeon Rocks, which are sup-

posed by the Arabana tribe to be full of pigeon spirit individuals (mai-aurl1) left

behind by the ancestor of the pigeon totem group. The pigeon concerned 1s

probably the rock pigeon, Lophophaps plamifera G. (syn. leucogaster G.), whose

Aranda name is inturrita (Spencer and Gillen 1899, 650).

RALLIFORMES

Waterhen—Gason (1879, 287) published Dieri names for three species which

we have identified. Spencer and Gillen 1899, 60, 114, recorded kutnichilli as an

Arabana totem. Wunadjildi Nj, Berndt and Vogelsang 1941, 10, waterhen. Both

terms perhaps belong to Tribonyx ventrahs,

Gallinula lenebrosa G—Wattawirrie D, Gason 1879, 287, a species of

waterhen.

Tribonyx ventralis G.-—Kilkie D, Gason 1879, 287, waterhen.

Fulica atra L-—Muroamtroo 1), Gason 1879, 287, black waterhen (mura =

black). T. Vogelsang informed me that the species was commonly termed the

black diver because of its appearance and habit. Howitt (1904, 97) mentioned

muro-muro Kd as the large black cormorant |Phelacrocorax carbo]. Gason

(1879, 287) reported doolpadoolparoo D, as a black diver, but this term belongs

to a erebe.

Porphyrio melanotus Tenun.—Moko irta Pa, Sehtirmann 1844, 33, “button

bird,” may be the bald coot whose Sead is previded with a prominent-coloured

horny plate (moko = button or hard substance, irta == bird).

Porsana fluminca G. Spotted crake-—-Tampatampana D, T. Vogelsang

(tampana refers to the jerky progressive movement commonly adopted by rails).

Thanpathanpa D, Gason 1879- 287, slate-coloured snipe.

274

PobiciPiFORMES

In addition to references to divers, mentioned above, there are others which

may belong to grebes. Weoopa Pa, Green 1886, 126; nimmilye Pa, Schtirmann

1844, 39, waterbird (diver, MS). Woochoo-bukanai Ka, Wells 1894, 520, diver,

is a cormorant.

PadweDs poliocephalus Jard. Selby—Thookabie D, Gason 1879, 287, diver.

T. Vogelsang informed me that the correct name is fook#: tookabi,

Podiceps ruficollis novae-hollandiae Steph—Doolpadoolparvo D, Gason 1879,

287, black diver, Identified by T. Vogelsang.,

PROCELLARITFORMES

Mutton bird, presumably Puffs tenuirostris Temm.—Mannallara Pa,

Schiirmann 1844, 26,

PELECANIFORMES

Pelecanus conspicillatus Tenmm, Pelican—I'rom Curr’s work (1886) the

following names have been collected: ‘Vampanpara A, Jacobs; tumpunara N,

Cornish; toompingaroo N, Paull; thampara Kk, Kingsmill; tampangra Yu, llowitt;

thaumpara D, Gason; tampangara D, Jacobs; thampano Ma, Reid; kaubungarra

Wk, Myles. Worandoo A, Warren and llogarth; warrunto A, Todd; werrant-

juma W?, Jacobs. Turta Kw, Anon; thirta Kg, Ku, Ieagney; tarta Bi, Curr.

Widl Pa, Le Souef aud Hoiden; weedley Pa, Green. Mamunou Nu, Valentine.

Dukkamirri Ya, Cornish; dookamerri Ya. Salmon. Karbonera Ma, Morton,

Malimurro Pp, Eglinton; murlimarroo Ky, Machattie. Kowbernuggera 8,

Sullivan.

Other references are: widh Pa, Schitrmann 1844, 71; thaumpara 19, Gason

1879, 287; \um-pungarra Ka, Wells 1894, 521, its pouch = waroora; uranta A,

totem, Spencer and Gillen 1899, 60; urantha ‘A, Spencer and Gillen "1899, 114;

tampangara T, D, Stirling and Waite 1919, 120, 125, toas 49, 80; milli-murro DK,

Duncan-Kemp 1933, 233. A pelican bone was worn through the nasal septum as

an ornament, Horne and Aiston 1924, 41, fig. 32; Sanger 1883 (= padla-

mookoo, D),

Cormorants—White (1919) recorded seeing Phalacrocorax carbo (nowae-

hollandie) and P. melanoleucus on Cooper’s Creck. We observed the former at

Pandi, Boorkoopiya D, Gason 1879, 287, long-beaked cormorant (boorka =

wade, piya, e., pai-a — bird) ; cormorants and darters are not wading birds; the

species is probably the 2 blue heron, Netophoys novae-hollandiae, though the stilt,

Limantopus leucocephalus, is a remote possibility. Ita Pa, Schiirmann 1844, 8,

shag; since he recorded the black shag under a different term, it is possible that

ita belongs to the coastal pied cormorant P. fuscescens Cleucogaster),

Phalacrocorax carbo L.—Malura D (T. Vogelsang), Llowitt (1904) reported

two names for the cormorant totem: malura D (p. 91, 782, 788), Ya (95); and

tantani W (92, 788), A (93), An (93), N (94), and Wo (95). Other references

are: malura D, Eylmann 1908, 167; eee D, Gason 1879, 287. Yaldu Pa,

Schurmann 1844, 78, black shag, belongs to P. carbo, which is the common black

cormorant of the South Australian coasts. The same term, yal-tow, was reported

by Fraser (1839, 114; 1840, 62) as applied by the Adelaide tribe to P. carboides

(= P. carbo). Howitt (1904, 97) recorded taragoro and muromuro as terms for

the small and large species of black cormorants amongst the Kurnandaburi

[= Karendala] ; if correctly named, they must have been P. sulcirostris Grandt

and P. carbo, but it should be pointed out that the black diver, muru-muru, of the

Dieri is not a cormorant but a waterhen, Fulica alra. Horne and Aiston (1924,

123) mentioned tantani as a black cormorant. Howitt (1891) recorded malura D

(p. 38) and tantani An (39) as totems. Strehlow (1908, 64) reported tantana of

275

the Aranda to be a black heron—probably an error for cormorant, there being no

Australian black heron. Green (1886) recorded tanthunnie Pa, as a black duck,

no doubt the result of having confused the latter with the cormorant.

Phalacrocorax melanoleucus Vieill--Wutju bakanni D, T, Vogelsang; woo-

choo-bukanni Ka, Wells 1894, 517, 520, diver, is the same species.

LLARIFORMES

Larus novac-hollandiae Steph. Silver guil—RKalliworra Va, yao Pa, Schur-

mann, 1844, 11. 79; latter name (onoimatopoeic) also given by the Adelaide tribe.

Kirrpiyirrka D, Gasou 1879, 287. The latter name is almost the same as tirry-

girryka reported by Teulon 1886, 213, as the Larkindji name for a wagtail

like Rhipidura motacilla, The species would he ®. mofacilloides = BR. leucophrys.

Skua—Schiirmann (1.c.) mentioned two Pangkala names for the “bozen bird,”

kangai (p. 3) and parndabirru (p. 53). ‘The true boatswaiu Iirds (Phaeton) do not

occur in South Australia, but the term is sometimes applied to the skuas, of which

two species, Richardson’s or Arctic skua (Slercorariits parasiticus) and the

southern skua (Catharacta antarcties) occur in our waters, Probably Schtir-

mann’s names apply to these two species.

Geochelidon nilotica Gmel, Gull-billed tern—Muti-muti D, Fry 1937, 195

(tern). ‘This is the chief inland species of tern.

CITARADRITFORMES

Snipe—Gason (1879, 287) menuoned Dieri names fer four species, all listed

as waders: chaviechooie, “snipe’ [probably the ereenshank. Tringa nebularia|

dickadickulyerra and mootoomoatoo, “species of snipe’; and thanpathanpa, “slate-

coloured snipe.” The last-named is a Ralliform bird, Porsana fluimiieca,

Dotterel—Horne and Aiston (1924) have confused two Wonkanguru names,

one for a dotterel and one for a swallow. Wee-cr wee-erlerra is called swallow

(p. 119) and dotterel (p. 173) ; digidigeliera (which almost certainly belongs to ihe

swallow) is given as the name of the former on page 175, and of the latter on

page 119. The relation of these birds to the rain-anaking ceremony is desertbed.

‘The only dotterel observed during our visit to the Diamantina was Charadrius

molanops.

Peltohyas australis Gould. Dotterel—Palpara 1), ‘T. Vogelsang; balpara

Stirling and Waite 1919, toa 36, unidentified. Palpara \V, Tforne and Aiston

1924, 141, said to be a hawk, is the same name, but we received patara at Pandi

as the name of a kite. £2. anstralis is the dotterel of the gibber plains and is called

locally the gibber bird, acecrding to Morgan 1930, 267.

Burhinus maguirestris Lath. Curlew, stone plover—\Willaroo 1D, Gason 1879,

286; wee-lo and willaroo in Teach’s “An Australian Bird Book,’ 1911, 51; willoo

W, Llorne and Aiston 1924, 9,159; weceloo Va, Green 1886, 126; wiloo Pa, Sawers

1886, 132; welt Pa, Schtirmann 1844, 71; 1846; 1879, 241 — Wilhelmi 1862, 34;

wudlaru Nj, and willuru D, Berndt and Vogelsang, 1941, 5. Howitt (1904)

mentioned as names of the curlew totem: willangu Yu (p. 92), wilvuru N (p. 94),

wilangu Ya (p. 95), and wilyaru (p. 783). Stirling and Waite’s wuluru D, toa

202, sugeests willuru, but the figure on the toa is more like the head of

a bustard.

A legend with which was associated the willoo (Horne and Aiston 1924, 159)

has been referred to under Thalaconas (telea). Sehtirmann (1946; 1879, 241)

published a Pangkala legend: In ancestral times Welu was a fierce warrior and

an immoderate lover whose amours were foiled by the neighbouring Nauo tribe

whom he determined to exterminate. Tle speared all the nien except two, Kara-

tantya and Yangkunu, who fled for shelter into the top of a tree. Welu climbed

after them to kill them, but the young men broke the branch which was supporting

276

their enemy. Welu fell to the ground, where a native dog killed him. Welu

became a bird, the curlew, while the names of the two young men were perpetuated

in those of two species of hawks. This legend was re-published by Wilhelmi

(1861 184; 1862, 34), but he omitted mention of the hawks and stated that the two

young men became changed into two lizards, Ibirri and Waka, which are men-

tioned later in the present report.

Eupodotis australis Gray. Bustard. wild turkey—Curt’s correspondents

(1886) supplied many names: kallatoora N, Paull; kulatheora D, Gason; kurla-

tora Ma, Morton; kurlathura Wa. Crozier; kaldura Wa, Dewhurst; kurreturo Ky,

Machattie. Wala Wp, Gason; walla Pa, Beddome — Pa, Le Souef and Holden-

Nu, Valentine; wirdla Pa, Green. Worka Ku, lleagney; wurkum Kw, Anon.

Thurlchega Ma, Reid. Goonging Kg, Heagney.

Other references are: walla Pa, Schtirmann 1844, 67; kulathoora D, Gason

1879, 286; kalathurra A, totem, Spencer and Gillen 1899, 60; kalathura A, totem,

Spencer and Gillen 1899, 114; kalatoora, kallatuora W, N, Johnston and Cleland,

1943, 156; wal-la Wp. Hale and Vindale 1925, 57; wala Nj, kala-tura D, wal-la

Wop, Berndt and Vogelsang 1941, 5.

Johnston and Cleland (1943, 156) mentioned that in the lower Diamantina

region the plant, Goodenta cycloptcra, was termed kalla-toora-milkie (= turkey

eve) by the Ngameni and Weonkanguru tribes, because of the appearance of the

flower.

Lobibyx nuovae-hellandiae Steph., syn. Lobivanelus lobatus Lath., spurwing

plover—Darudaru D (T. Vogelsang) ; Fry 1937, 195, plover; Stirling and Waite

1919, toa 269, unidentified.

Plover—Pildari kintye Pa, pilderilderi Pa, Schtirmann 1844, 56. These terms

probably reter to two related species, one bemg Lobibyvx novac-hollandiae and the

other perhaps Zonifer tricolor. Wantya = porcupine grass (Triedia) or spear ; if

this term is the same as kintye, the latter may reter to the prominent spur present

on the wing of the spurwing and so permit identification of Schtirmann’s name.

Haematopus spp. Redbill—This term is often applied to the oyster catchers,

fT, unicolor Forst. and A. ostralegus I.., both of which occur on Eyre’s Peninsula.

3ithu Pa, [onomatopoeic for the oyster catchers], kudnannaga Pa, Schiirmann

1844, 3, 19, Bithu was said to accompany the souls of the departed Pangkala on

their flight to the island (p. 3), mungaltanna, in Spencer’s Gulf (p. 35), where

such souls (wilya) would become changed into white men (p. 73). Further

reference was also made by Schtirmann (1846; 1879, 235-236; Wilhelm: 1861,

189) to this bird, which was said to shrick at night.

Himantopus leucocephalus G—Muta-muta D, T. Vogelsang. Mootoonootoo

1D, Gason 1879, 287, a species of snipe, refers to the stilt,

MEGALORNITHIFORMES

Megalornis rubicundus Perry (syn. Antigone australasiana G.). Brolga,

native companion—Curr’s correspondents (1886) supplied the following names:

Puralka A, Jacobs; puralku D, W?, Jacobs; pooralkoo N, Cornish; pooralko Ma,

Morton ~—- Ya, Cornish; pooralco N, Paull; booralkoo D, Gason; puralko Wa,

Dewhurst; bouralko Yu, Howitt; brolgar Ky, Machattie. Wooroo A, Warren

and Ifogarth. Koodri Ya, Salmon. Mulumpari Wa, Crozier. Mulvam Bi,

Crozier. Koorltho Ma, Reid. Koonthurra B, Sullivan — Te, Sullivan and [glin-

ton; goonthurra Te, Foott; goontherra Ku, Heagney; goontheri Kg, Heagney;

golathurra Pp, Eglinton; kuntharata Kw, Anon. Wooroo is a heron and the term

was probably attributed wrongly by Warren and Hogarth to the brolga.

Other references: booralkoo ID, Gason 1879, 287; buralko D, Howitt 1891,

38; poo-ral-koo (crane) Ka, Wells 1894, 520; kuntara Kd, totem, Howitt 1891,

277

39. Amongst the tribes of the Georgina and Diamantina watersheds Curr’s lists

indicate as names: booralgoo, borolga, boralga, bralgo, baralgar, booralga and

brolgar—hence the term brolga given by the white population. Mulumpiri Ya,

Stirling and Waite 1919, toa 140; the term is the same as that recorded above by

Crozier as the name for the brolga.,

ARDELFORMES

Nycticorax caledonicus Gmel, Nankeen heron, night heron—-Ooroo D, Gason

1879, 287. Stirling and Waite’s (1919) wuru bird D, toa 179, belongs to this

species. Mr, T. Vogelsang informed me that wuru was a night bird, Ilelms 1896,

316, recorded wurru A, as the blite heron.

Egretta alba L. White heron--Moolpa D, Gason 1879, 287. Stirling and

Waite’s (1919) mulpu bird D, toa 160, belongs probably to the same species.

Notophoyx novac-hollandiae Lath. Blue heron—Kogunya Ka, Howitt 1891,

39, blue crane; wurru A, Helms 1896, 316. Wadna Pa, Schtirmann 1844, 64,

crane, may belong to this species; wadna means a throwing stick or boomerang,

and the native name is probably related to the dark form and to the attitude of the

bird whilst watching for its prey.

Notophoyx pacifica Lath. White-necked heron—Culiemulyandurie D, black

and white crane, Gason 1879, 287.

“Crane, black with white on wings.” IJlowitt mentioned as a totem bird

malparu Yu (p. 92), N (94), Ya (95); malburu K, (96); malbaru (783). The

information does not permit of definite identification but the bird is almost cer-

tainly Notophoys pacifica, though the jabiru or even the stilt, Himautopus leuco-

cephalus G., 15 a possibility.

“Crane’—Murra-mil-le Dk. Also a constellation which, together with

kibulyo (= duck) guards “the entrance to the ghostly wild-fowl swamps” where

the spirit-people dwell. Duncan-Kemp 1933, 123.

ANSERIFORMES

Duck—General term, Pi-ya Ka, Wells 1894, 520; tharalkoo D, Gason 1879,

303 (same name given for the teal); mari Nj, tau-urla D, Berndt and Vogelsang

1941, 5. Pai-a is the gencral term used for a bird in the region. Taurla is the

pink-eared spoonbill duck.

Anas superciliosa Gmel. Black duck—Curr’s correspondents (1886) reported

the following terms: pia N, Paull; peya Bi, Curr. Murrara Wp, Wills; murrarra

Pa, Le Souef and Holden; maru-maru D, Jacobs; marara Wp, Gason; maurra Pa,

Sawers; nurry Nj, Le Brun; nowirra Te, Foott. Willunga Te, Sullivan and

iglinton — B, Sullivan. Mungowrie Ma, Morton; mingenarra Kw, Anon; min-

galla K, Kingsmill. Yella-moora kg, Ku, Heagney. Durnmi A, W?, Jacobs.

Oodla-oodla A, Todd. Mulchawarroo A, Warren and Hogarth. Dickeri Ya,

Salmon. Tarralko Yu, Howitt. Chippala D, Gason. Urle Wk, Myles. Barndoo

Wp, Phillipson. Manou Nu, Valentine. Ngalta Ma, Reid. Kultappi Wa, Dew-

hurst. Tanthunnie Pa, Green. Pepulu Pp, Eglinton. Kurligoolpar Ky, Ma-

chattie. Ngoorrir Ja, Green. Pundrewunga Wa, Crozier. Tanthunnie of Green

is probably attributed to ithe black duck in error for the black cormorant, tantani.

Marrara Pa, wild duck, Schiirmann 1844, 29, is probably Anas superciliosa, the

commonest Australian species.

Chenonetta jubata Lath. Wood duck—Curr’s correspondents (1886) men-

tioned the following names: barndo Wp, Wills; burndoo Ja, Green. Goonary Kg,

Heagney; goonery Ku, Heagney; koonallee Wi, Dix; kunarli Ma, Morton; koor-

maly Ma, Reid; koonare 8, Sullivan; goornabrinna Ya, Salmon; koodnapina D,

Gason; kooraburra Te, Foott. Bitta-bitta Wk, Myles. Neowera Te, Sullivan and

278

Eglinton; neirey Nu, Valentine; kowwar Ky, Machattie; moondon-ngarie Pa,

Green, Chiberlii Kw, Anon, Yarkalto A, Todd. Yangacaroota-poone K, Nings-

mill. Bompeparoo Pp, Feglinton.

Some ot these terms (or obvious variants of them) are similar to those

recorded for the black duck—-tarralko (yarkalto), chippala, nurry, ngowera.

Kala Pa, Sehtirmann 1844 (MS). White (1917, 448) reported the occurrence of

C. gubata ou the Cooper.

Dendrocvgna evtoni Eyton. Whistling duck—Tjipala D. Chipala D, Gason

1879, 287; this author gave the same term "C1886, 106) as the Dieri name for the

black duck. The Pittapitta called it kibulyo (Roth 1897, 34). Iinean-Kenip

1933 123, mentioned kibulyo, duck, as a constellation, Morgan 1930, 268, identi-

fied the species on the lower Diamantina as JD). evton.

Casarce ladornotdes Jard. and Selb. Mountain duck—RKoekadooroo 1), Gasou

1897, 287.

OQuerqucdula gibberifrons Mall. Teal—Tharalkoo 1D, Gason 1879, 287:

taralku D, Fry 1937. 276, duck; marrar Pa, Green 1886, 126; willungari Wd,

Howitt 1904, 97. White (1917, 448) reported that the species bred along the

Cooper.

Malacorhvnechus Reena rs Lath. Pink-eared spoon-bill duck—Tau-trla

1D. Berndt and Vogelsang 1941, 5, belongs to this specics. Manataulawulun 1.

Stirling and Waite 1919, 151, tod 291 (ni = to or to the place of ; wulu = two;

mana = mouth; taula = taurla = pink-eared duck; hence the word means to ihe

place of (1.c., resembling) two duck hills). Thowia D, Gason 1879, 287.

Nyroce australis Eyton. Brown duck with red beak—oodnapina D, Gason

1879, 287 (koodna = excrement, pina = large, great). The same term was given

by Gason (1886, 106) for the wood duck (Diert).

Unidentified ducks—-Inyarrie A, totem, Spencer and Gillen 1899, 60, 114:

wungara A, totem, Spencer and Gillen 1899, 657 | wonkara ot the Aranda and

Loritja, Strehlow 1907, 64]; kul tapa Wi, totem, weburri Mi, totem Towitt 1904,

98. Ina neighbouring tribe (Barkinji Jon the Darling, the last-named two terms

appear to be replaced in the ist of totem animals by kultippa, the whistling duck

(Ilowitt 1904, 99), hence it is possible that the threc names all refer to the same

species ; but it should be noted that Dewhurst reported kultappi as the black duck

and Teulon 1886, 213, mentioned koollapa as the teal, Barkindji tribe,

Chenopis atrata Lath, Black swan—The following names are listed from

Curr’s correspondents (1886): kooti A, Warren and Hogarth — Pa, Sawers —

Pa, Te Souef and Holden; kute A, Todd; kootee N, Paull; koodie N, Cornish;

kootie JD, Gason; kurti D, A, Jacobs; hesstied Ya, Coruish; cootce Pa, Ja, Green;

cootie K, Kingsmill; oortee Wp, Phillipson; cotee Yu, Howitt; kurti Ky,

Machattie; kuteru Ma, Morton; kutteroo Wa, Dewhurst; kootero Ku, Heaguey ;

kootcoroo Te, Sullivan and Eglinton — B, Sullivan; kuteruk Wa. Crozier;

gootheroo Kg, Heagney. ‘VThurragoora Te, loott. Youngooli Ma, Reid. Kurra-

watt Ya, Salmon,

Other references are: kootie D, Gason 1879, 287; guti A. totem, Spencer

and Gillen 1899, 60, 114; korti Pa, Schtirmann 1844, 18; kuti A, Helms 1896. 316

— D, Fry 1937, 275. Down of the swan and wild ducks was used for ceremonial

decoration in the Diert mindarie corroboree (Gason 1879, 272; Tlowitt 1801, 85;

1904, 662).

Tuna Dieri legend associated with the Pleiades women, a mura woman named

Kuti who in her endeavours to obtain a fire-stick fought and killed a Nardu

woman, was then turned into a swan and flew away, carrying the fire-stick in her

279

mouth—hence the name Kuti for the swan, and hence also the red edging to the

inside of the beak indicating where the Mura burnt her mouth (Horne and Aiston

1924, 141-142). Another version of this legend was published by Fry 1937, 275.

Bisiura lobata Shaw. Musk duck—Ngannalli Pa, Schiitmann 1844, 45; a

similar term, ngannelli, was mentioned as the namie of a waterbird; ku-ra-ru An,

Howitt 1891, 39.

Cereopsis novde-hollandiae Lath, Cape Barren goose—Yarrendi Pa, Schir-

mann 1844, 81, goose.

ACCIPITRIFOR MES

Uroactus audaxr lath. Eagle—Curr’s contributors (1866) reported the tol-

lowing terms: Karrawurra 4, Paull; curawura D, Gason; kKurrawerra Ma,

Morton; kurrera Wa, Crozier; corrowira Kg, Heagney; corowera Iku. Heagney.

Wildoo Wp. Gascon — Pa, Green; wildou Nu, Valentine. Cooriadthilla Ke,

Heagney. Dillara Ma, Reid. Kunthullo Kw, Anon. Wolye Pa, Reddome. Purti

Wa, Dewhurst. Perrowalli Pp, Eglinton, Yarnu Pa, Le Souct and Holden.

Other references are: Yarnu Pa, Schitrmann 1844, 81; curawara D, Gason

1879, 286; wildu Wp, Hale and ‘Tindale 1825, 58 [wilda is applied in the Everard

Ranges, Helms 1896, 317]; wildu Nj, Wp, kara-wara D, Berndt and Vogelsang

1941, 5; karawara T), totem, Eylmann 1908, 167 — Gatti 1930, 101; karawora 1},

Stirling and Waite 1919, 145, toa 224; karawora, Horne and Aistou 1924, 123;

karaura D totem, Howitt 1885, 6; 1891, 38; kurara An, totem, Howitt 1891, 39;

kooridala DK, Duncan-Kemp 1933, 114; Vp. Roth 1897, 35, Howitt referred

(1904) to the following totemic names: karawora D (p. 91), W (92), A (94),

N (94); kariwora Ya (95); kuraru .An (93): bilyara Wi, Mi (98), and Paruinji

(99), becoming billiara amongst the Barkindji of the Darling River.

Young people were [orbidden to eat the flesh of the caple, Ke, Ku (Ileagney

1886, 375). Gillen (1896, 180) reported that if girls or young women before

their breasts had fully developed, ate flesh of the eagle (iritcha, irritcha, Aranda)

and certain other animals, it was believed that the result would be permanent

checking of mammary development as well as great leanness; but boys could cat

only the legs of the bird and so impart strength and improve the growth of the

limbs. (See also Spencer and Gillen 1899, 472).

The eagle figured in aboriginal steHar lore. Kurawurathidna (i.¢., eagle

rack or foot) was applied by the Dieri to a cluster of stars representing the claw

of the eagle and seen in the western hemisphere during the winter months (Cason

1879, 295). Basedow (1924, 349) reported that the Southern Cross was called

warridajinna (= eagle’s claws), but did not mention the name of the tribe.

Duncan-Semp (1933, 122) stated that Mars was Kooridala and that Sirius was a

hawk, while another star was Wakerdi, the crow, according to the tribes border-

ing on the Karanya. Green (1886, 126) reported that the morning star was wildoo

kyleela Wp., tc., the two eagles. Berndt and Vogelsang (1941, 9) stated that the

Southern Cross was wildu Nj, and paia-tidna (bird’s foot) D. Green (1886, 126)

reported that the Cross, according to the veighbouring Pangkala tribe, was Mam-

burdi, whercas Schirmann (1844, 10) recorded it as Kadnakadna purdii, Amongst

the Kaurna, wilto was a star as well as an eagle (Teichelmann and Sehurmann

1933, 155).

Eagle feathers are used extensively in the region by men for decorative and

ceremonial purposes. They are neatly ted into a bunch, originally with sinews of

emu or wallaby or hair string and worm im the front of the head band or at the

sides of the waist band. This ornament was termed kootcha by the Dieri (Gason

1879, 289), ilpilla by the Aranda (Spencer and Gillen 1899, 649), and pingkara

hy the Dittapitta (Roth 1897, 113; Duncan-Kemp 1933, 241). Salmon (1886,

280

24) used kootya Ya as meaning feathers. The uses of eagle feathers during the

rain-naking ceremony were mentioned by Horne and Aiston (1924, 111-113) for

the Wonkanguru, and by Roth (1897, 168) for Diamantina tribes in Quecusland.

Ikagle down (as well as that from other birds such as swan and duck) was

used for making the distinctive bands and patterns associated with particular

ceremomals (Horne and Aiston, p. 42, fig. 32, 33, 34). In connection with the

Dieri tooth evulsion ceremony (chirrinchirrie), the teeth after removal were

smeared with fat, then wrapped in a bunch of emu feathers and kept for a period

of one year before being thrown away, under the belief that, if thrown away

earlier, the eagle would cause to grow in their place larger teeth which would turn

up on the upper lip and cause death.

Spencer and Gillen (1899, 641) mentioned that in the Arabana wilyaru cere-

mony the novice was paiuted to represent an eagle-hawk and the leader carried a

long spear, the end of which was decorated with eagle feathers. The numerous

diagonal cuts made on the back during the ceremony were indicated by Howitt

(1904, 639, fig. 39). Gason (1879, 270) described the wilyaru ceremony, the pur-

pose of which was to increase the supply of snakes and lizards.

Hambly (1936, 16-17) gave an account of an Arabana legend associated with

the wilyaru cuts. long ago there were two hawks, Wantu and [rritja, each with

its brood occupying a tree. Since the former was the stronger he compelled the

latter to bring him food, which included blackfellows. Irritja was content to catch

and eat wallabies for himself. In sympathy with Irritja was a little hawk, Kutta,

who fought Wanta unsuccessfully and then fled to obtain the aid of the bell bird

who lta fire at the base of \Wantu's tree, killed Wantu and burned his brood. Out

of gratitude for this deliverance from Wantu, the Arabana gave themselves tribal

marks im inutation of the feathers on the back of the bell-bird. 1 cannot find any

other reference to this legend. Two of the names, Irritcha and Kutta-kutta (eritja

and kutakuta in Strehlow 1908, 62-63, respectively) are Aranda terms for the

eagle (WU. audax) and “little night hawk” respectively (Spencer and Gillen 1899,

65/7). strehlow called the latter a “night bird.” The night hawk or nightjar is

hurostapodus imystacalis Temm. (Caprimulgidae), but the former term is often

applied also to the owlet-nightjar, Acgolheles cristata (Podargidae). Streh'ow

(1908) recorded Aranda and Loritja names for Acgotheles and Podurgus, hence

Nuttakutta probably belongs to /, muystacalis, The only name found by us re-

sembling wantu is wontu, the Loritja name for the mallee fowl, Leipoa occllata

(Strehlow 1908, 64). The bell-bird of the region is Orevica gutturalis, whose

Aranda name is kunbalunbala (Strehlow. Le., 63).

Ikagles (unidentified )—Schiirmann 1844 mentioned three Pangkala names

(in addition to yarnu, caglehawk) as those of species of eagles: willu (p. 72),

wallulu (72, corrected to willulu in MS) and walburru (66) |= strong]. The

first is suggestive of wildu (eaglehawk), and the first and second may refer to

Hieraetus morphnoides and Haltastur Sphenurus, while the third may be a sea

eagle (Pandion leucocephalus) or Gvpoictinia melanosterna.

Hieraetus morphnoides G. Little eagle—-Kunienundruna D, Gason 1879,

286, largest hawk except eagle. Mura Nj, Berndt and Vogelsang 1941, 5, red

eaglchawk, is probably this species.

Haliastur sphenurus Vieill. Whistling eagle—Kookoonga D, Gason 1879,

286, kite; the latter name is due to an error in identification according to T. Vogel-

sang. Kukunga A, Helms 1896, 316, hawk. The term resembles closely kogunya

Kd, Howitt 1891, 39, stated to be the blue crane.

Falco cenchroides—Thirrie-thirrie D, Gason 1879, 286, small speckled hawk.

Astir novae-hollandiae (albus). White hawk—Thoaroopathandrunie D,

Gason 1879, 286.

281

Astur novae-hollandiae (cinereus). Grey hawk—Milkieworie D, Gason 1879,

286, large grey hawk. In his book (1904) Howitt mentioned miltipalu Ya, a large

erey hawk and a totem (p. 95), but referred later (96) to milkiwaru (omitting

miltipalu) amongst the totems represented east and north-east of J.ake Pando.

lle also mentioned milketyelparu D, totem (91), milketyelpara (96) and milkiyer-

para N, totem (94), but without any indication of identification ; but these belong

to the Kararu moiety, whereas milkiwaru (smiltipalu) belongs to the Matteri. Mr.

Vogelsang believes milkiwari to be the fish hawk, Pandion leucocephalus.

Falco berigora. Brown hawk—Pittiekilkadie D, Gason 1879, 286, speckled

hawk. Identified by T. Vogelsang.

Aslur fasciatus Vig. Horsf. Sparrow hawk—Kirrkie D, Gason 1879, 286.

whistling hawk, very swift. Ngalulka Nj; kirki D, Berndt and Vogelsang 1941, 6,

sparrow hawk. Howitt (1891, 39) reported kirki An, as a totem, calling the bird

a night hawk, but this identification must have been au error.

Milzus migrans Bodd, Black kite—Patara-patara N, W. This name was

obtained at Pandi, where it was termed the morning bird because it called at

daylight. Perhaps palpara, Horne and Aiston 1924, 141, refers to the same species.

Hawks—Schiirmann (1844) mentioned the Pangkala names of three species

of hawks: karkantya (p. 15), perudu (56), and purrelli (MS), the last term

being also used for a fish and hence may refer to the fish-hawk, Pandion leuco-

cephalus.

In the curlew (wil-lu) legend of the Pangkala, karatantya and yangkunu

were reported by Schitrmann (1846; 1879, 241) to be the names of two hawks.

In his vocabulary of that tribe (1844) he recorded karkantya as a species of hawk

(p. 15) and kattaintya as a goatsucker (p. 17), Le. a nightjar (? Eurostopodus

mystacalis); and yangkunnu as a white cockatoo (p. 79). Teichelmann and

Schiirmann (1933, 103) recorded karkanya (Kaurna tribe) as a species of hawk

whose name was derived from the ominous sound of its voice which, when heard

at night, indicated that the souls of one or more aborigines would be taken away,

after which those natives would become ill, Fraser (1839, 113; 1840, 61) reported

that carcownya was the name applied by the natives of the Adelaide district to

Falco berigora.

Horne and Aiston (1924, 141) referred to a kind of hawk,Palpara D, asso-

ciated with the stealing of fire in muramura times. Mrs. Duncan-Kemp (p. 59)

mentioned pijerdo as a small brown scavenging hawk; and Roth (1897, 49, 74)

referred to it as an ordinary small brown hawk (Pittapitta ; Karanya) ; the species

may have been Falco cenchroides.

STRIGIFOR MES

Tyto alba Scop—Wurchiewurchic D, Gason 1879, 286. White (1917)

reported it to be fairly commion in the region. Wyatt (1879; 1933, 43), as well

as Teichelmann and Schiirmann (1840; 1933, 156), recorded that the Adelaide

tribe called the white owl winta. Wiinta Pa, Schiirmann 1844, 73, may have been

applied to this and/or the next species.

Tyto novac-hollandiae Steph. Grey owl—Windtha D, Gason 1879, 286; winda

Nj, winta D, Berndt and Vogelsang 1941, 7, large owl; wooroona DK, Duncan-

Kemp 1933, 195, grey owl The species is T. novae-hollandiae according to

T. Vogelsang.

Ninox connivens Lath., and perhaps also N. strenua G. and N. boobook Lath.

—Killawoloowolloorka D, Gason 1879, 286, dark brown owl.

Ninox boobook Lath-—Kurko Pa, owl, Schiirmann 1844, 73; kurkurruku A,

owl, Helms 1896, 316. I believe these terms refer to the boobook whose Loritja

name is kurkurr (Strehlow 1908, 63).

282

Owls—Berndt and Vogelsang 1941, 8, reported ngangi Nj and munju D, as

names of a stall owl, but these terms belong to the owlet nightjar, Acgotheles

cristata. Howitt (1904, 96) mentioned manpi, an owl, as a totem in the Kyrean

region. Stirling and Waite (1919, 127, toa 99) referred to the mampi bird, but

the figure on the toa does not represent an owl; [ consider that the term is really

murnpi (manpi), a pigeon. Llowitt’s manpi is probably an error for munyi, the

owlet nightjar.

White (1917) recorded observing Ninox boabook, N. connivens and Tyte

alba iu the Dieri region. [Feathers of the white owl are use ia’ in head decorations in

various corroborees (Roth 1897, 118, fig. 283); and in the mindarie or peace

ceremony of the Diert (Gason 1879, 272; Howitt 1904, 662). Horne and Aiston

(1924, 45) stated that the head plume of the Wonkanguru mindarie corroboree,

when composed only of feathers of the white owl, was called wumpigena.,

PsrrTACiFORMES

White cockatco—Curr’s correspondents (1886) reported the following terms:

kadaroonga A, Warren and Hogarth; kudaroonka N, Cornish; kudrungoo D,

Gason; koodrunkoo Ya, Cornish; keirdrangu D, Jacobs; karrong N, Paull. Nerra-

pinta Ya, Salmon ; nardnanpn A, Jacobs. “Thirindhella Te, Sullivan and ielinton;

derringerri Wk, Myles; thirindthela Lb, Sullivan. Warrandoo Wp, Phillipson;

Reuuranila Wp, Wills; warranthoo K, Kingsmill; korkanda Ma, Reid. Younganna

Pa, Green; vomgona Da, Sawvers, Quodeckee Nu, Valentine. Woolaki Ja. Green.

Kuta Ma, Morton, Wilumburra Wa, Dewhurst. Kugalurinva Wa. Crozier

Murramute Kw, Anon; mooramerry Ke, Nu, Heagney; murmari Bi, Curr.

Cacatua sanguinea G—The term white cockatoo is commonly applied to

Cacatua galerita, the sulphur-crested cockatoo, but in the Fyrean region the

common white bird is the corella, C. sanguinea (syn. C. gyinnopis). Curr’s terms

probably inelude the aboriginal namics for both, though most of them no doubt

refer to the corella, ‘he Jatter oceturs in great flocks aleng the Diamantina and

the Seaea terms belong to it: warandu Wp, Hale and Tindale 1941, 57; we

received the same name in the Northern Flinders Ranges; kadrangu D, eudaki Ni,

3erndt and Vogelsang 1941, 5; sara E 1D, Gason 1879, 286; kundrtt-ungoo Ka,

Wells 1894, 52i, termed * ‘parrot. ” Roth (1897, 51) mentioned many names dis-

tributed amongst the many tribes further north along the Diamantina and its

tributaries; amongst the Pittapitta, Karanya and some “others it was kolloora or

kollora, but the Goa people called it koo-retla, whence the common [turopean name,

corella, was derived. Tts feathers were used largely for decoration either as a large

bunch fastened to the head or as single feathers worked into the headband (Howitt

1904, 330; Horne and Aiston, p. 45).

Black cockatoos—lIrallu and yaralta Pa, Schtirmann 1844, 780, without iudica-

tion as to which term belongs to the red-tailed species, Calyptorhanchius banksi

Lath., and which to the yellow-tailed C. frstercus Shaw. Vhese cockatoos do not

appear to be eaten by natives (Wells 1894, 517; Duncan-Kemp 1933, 46), but

their tail feathers are used for decorative purposes, especially in connection with

rain-making ceremonies (Horne and Aiston 1924, 45, 158).

Cacatua leadbeatert Vig—Schtirmann (1844, 79) gave yanekunuu as the

Pangkala name for the “white cockatoo with a red crest.” Tt has already been

mentioned in connection with the wi-lu legend, Sehtirmann (1840; 1879, 241)

reporting it as a hawk, Younganna Pa, Green 1886, and yomgona Pa, Sawers

(1886), are similar terms and, no doubt, are intended to apply to the same bird

as yangkunnu, WKugalurinya Wa, white cockatoo, Crozier (1886), is obviously

the same term as kahgoolarinya Ba, which Teulon (1886, 212) reported to be the

name of JLeadbeater’s cockatoo.

283

Cacatua galerita (ath. White cockatoo, sulphur-crested cockatoo—Some of

the terms mentioned under “white cockatoo” may refer to this species, as also may

kakki Pa, Schiirmann 1844, MS. Teulon 1886, 212, recorded it as kollyhooka Ba,

and ientioned that the name was also applied to the pointers to the Southern

Cross, the latter being called Mirrabooka.

Cacatua roseicapilla Vieill. Galah—Very common in the vicinity of water

supplics. Killunkilla D, Gason 1879, 286; killan-killi Ka, Wells 1894, 520. We

received the name gillan-gilla, killan-killa Wp, in the Northern Flinders Ranges,

It was known as killumba by the Barkindji (Teulon 1886, 212). Perhaps killum-

burra Wa, Dewhurst 1886 should refer to this species instead of the white

cockatoo.

Roth (1897, 50) mentioned many names for the galah amongst north-west-

central Queensland tribes, some of them being ga-la- ga-la (Walookera tribe),

ge-la-ro (Woonamurra), boombabare (Karanva), kelun-ji (Pittapitta). Our name

galah is obviously derived from ga-la just mentioned.

Leptolophus hollandieus Kerr (syn. Calopsittacus novae-hollandiae ). Cockatoo

parrot, cockaticl—Kooranyawillawilla D, Gason 1879, 286. ‘Kuranya is the term

for the rainbow amongst some tribes, and the bird’s name is probably related to

the colouration of its head. Wurebu Nj, grey parrot, Berndt and Vogelsang 1941,

8, probably belongs to this species.

Melopsiltacus wndidatus Shaw. Budgerigar-—Cathathara D, Gason 1879,

286; wuluri Nj, katatara D, Berndt and Vogelsang 1941, 8 — Fry 1937, 272. We

obtained the latter name, N. W, at Pandi. Howitt (1904) mentioned it as a

totemic bird; pinyangu Yu (p. 92); katatara N (p. 94), D (782), Yu (796);

since tillugaru, unidentified, Ya (p- 95) occupies the same posttion amongst the

Matteri murdus, it probably refers to this bird, Feathers of the shell parrot were

sometimes woven into the long girdle (dampera W) made of fur or hair-string and

wort by initiated men (Horne and Aiston (p. 47). Kulyeritye Pa, Schitrmann

1844, 20, “a small speckled species af parrokeet,” is probably this species.

Trichoglossus moluceanus Gmel. CT. novac-hollundiae). Vlue Mountain lori-

keet—Tyirrera Pa, Schtirmann 1844, 64; walaja Nj, Berndt and Vogelsang

1841, &.

Psephotus varius Claris (syn. 2. multicolor). Mulga parrot—\Wardlaru Wp,

name obtained by us in the Northern Flinders Ranges. Gupilja Nj, Berndt and

Vogelsang 1941, 8.

Psephotus haematonoius G.— Bard-laru Wp, Hale and Tindale 1925, 57;

Berndt and Vogelsang 1941, 8; same name as for the preceding species.

Barnardius sonarius Shaw. Port Lincoln parrot—Warta-li Wp, name

obtained by us in the Northern Flinders Ranges. Pudlaye Pa, Schurmann 1844,

59, parrot with black head.

Neophema elegans G., or N. chrysostoina Kuhl. Grass parrot, green parra-

keet—Koltye Pa, Schiirmann 1844, 18; mandelja Nj, Berndt and Vogelsang

1941, 8.

“Serub parrot,” a little larger than the grass parrot and of a paler green, but

in other respects similar to that bird.” Wayuridna Pa, Schiirmann 1844, MS.

(? Neophema chrysogaster Lath.)

Psephotus haematogaster G., syn xanthorrhous, Bluebonnet —Pulanku D,

Berndt and Vogelsang 1941, 8. This is the same name as Gason’s poolunka D,

(1879, 286). Wimpatimpalunga D, Fry 1937, 270, little bird, coloured red, green

and yellow.

Green tree parrot—Guli Nj, Berndt and Vogelsang 1941, 8. Probably juvenile

Platycercus adelaidae G.

284

Parrot—Dgeeda Pa, Beddome 1886, 133; the term suggests tjita, a general

term for small birds amongst more westerly tribes. Perhaps the same as tyirrera

Pa = Trichoglossus moluccanus.

CoRACIIFORMES

Podagus strigoies Lath—Munyi D. (T. Vogelsang), Moonyie D, Gason

1879, 286, mopawk; munka-noo Ka, Wells 1894, 521, mopoke.

Aegotheles cristata Shaw. Owlet nightjar, night hawk--Munyi, monyi D

(T. Vogcelsang) ; ngangi Nj, munju D, Berndt and Vogelsang 1941, 8, smali owl.

Same name applied to Pedargus. The possibility of kutta-kutta, associated with

an eagle legend, being the name for this species, has been referred to earlier in this

aper, Both Podargus and Acgotheles were recorded from the Lower Cooper by

White (1917). Spencer and Gillen (1899), 651) referred to kuttakutta as a little

night hawk.

Dacelo gigas Bodd. Kookooburra—Occurs only in the southern portions of

the region with which we are now concerned. Picky Nu, Valentine 1886, 138;

kookark Pa, Le Souef and Holden 1886, 8; ngungana of the Adelaide tribe;

takkooka, korrookahkahka Ba, Teulon 1886, 208, 213.

Halcyon pyrrhopygius G. Kingfisher—Julu Nj, Berndt and Vogelsang

1941, 7.

Eurostopodus mysticalis Tenun, Nightjar—It has been stated in this paper

that kutta-kutta of the wilyaru legend of the Arabana people probably belongs to

this species to which the term night-hawk 1s sometimes applied. White (1917)

recorded its presence in the Eyrean region.

“Goatsucker” (probably the preceding species)—Kattaintya Pa, Schtirmann

1844, 17.

CUCULIFORMES

Cuckoo — Wirrukku Pa, Schtrmann 1844, 74. ? Cuculus inernatus or

Cacomantis flabelliformis,

Scathrops novae-hallandiae \.ath. Giant cuckoo, flood bird, channelbill,

Diamantina bird—Tabajura D, totem, Eylmann 1908, 167; Howitt (1904, 91-96)

reported tapaiuru, tapairu and tahaira, as a bat, a totemic animal for several Eyrean

tribes. Dunean-Kemp (1933, 267) recorded mukkundrie as the name of this bird

amongst Diamantina tribes and gave an account of the legend relating to it,

explaining why the bird was doomed to be a nestless harsh-voiced follower of

storms and flood-waters. Jn ancestral times Mukkundrie incited other birds to

mutiny, and in puvishment its species was banished to become a wanderer till it

became extinet. The demon spirit, Marmoo, to spite Nungeena, goddess of birds,

suggested to Mukkundric that it should overcome the difficulty of propagating by

laying its eggs in the nest of some other bird to be hatched. Marmoo was then

punished by being sent to earth as a crow, and it is the crow’s nest which the flood

bird now commonly chooses for its own egg-laying after ejecting the crow's eggs.

The chick is stated to reach the flying stage before the imposture is detected. The

crows then attack the chick and chase it from tree to tree until it reaches a hollow

tree or is killed.

DASSERIFORMES

Cherantoeca leucosterna G. White-breasted swallow —Tlorne and Aiston

1924, 119, referred to a white-breasted swallow as well as a dotterel associated

with a Wonkanguru rain-making ceremony, but reversed the two native names on

page 175. The terms are digidigellera and wee-er wee-erlerra; the former pro-

bably belongs to the swallow.

Porsana fluminea G. Spotted crake—Tampatampana D, T. Vogelsang

Wp, Llale and ‘Vindale 1925, 58; wirra-yuldu-ulidja, Wp, obtained by us in the

Northern Flinders Range.

285

Hylochelidon ariel G, Fairy martin—Tjuli-tjuli N, purda-muppa W ; names

obtained at Pandi, Tjuli-tjuli D (T. Vogelsang).

Hirundo neoxena G. Welcome swallow—Mulyamulyayapunie D, Gason

1879, 286, swallow ; mulya = mud, mourning cap ; the name of the bird has refer-

ence to the characteristically-shaped mud nest.

Rhipidura leucophrys Lath. Wagtail—Inderinderi Wp, obtained by us in the

Northern Flinders Ranges; thindriethindrie D, wagtail, Gason 1879, 286; pintie-

pintie W, Horne and Aiston 1924, 124. Rhipidura tricolor, woman’s bird; tindi-

tindi A, Howitt 1904, 789, probably a fly-catcher or wagtail; tindni tindri D,

wiltjililki Nj, Berndt and Vogelsang 1941, 10; nginda-nginda at Ooldea.

Petroica goodenovii Vig, Horsf, Red robin—Malitelita Wp, P. goodenovii,

Hale and Vindale 1925, 57. Choonda D, red-breasted robin, Gason 1879, 286;

jupi Nj, Berndt and Vogelsang 1941, 8 (robin redbreast); ngarkundinye Pa,

Schtirmanun 1844, 46, redbreast.

Robin—Jimbalumba, TTowitt 1904, 96, Australian robin. Perhaps Pyrrholac-

mus brunneus G.

Colluricincla harmonica Lath. Shrike-thrush—Anda-anda Wp, Hale and

Tindale 1925, 57,

Oreoica gutturalis Vig. Horsf. (syn. O. cristata Lewin). Bellbird. This bird

has already been referred to when mentioning the wilyaru ceremony (see under

“cagle”). Bakkubakku Pa, Schttrmann 1844, 1, It is kunbalunbala of the Aranda

and banbanballala of the Loritja (Strehlow 1908, 63).

Sphenostoma cristatum G. Crested wedge-bill—Koongkgarra (= nose

possessor) Dis, Duncan-Kemp 1933, 117.

Coracina novac-hollandiae Gmel—Tenatjeri N, pirri tjunka walir: W, names

obtained at Pandi.

Shrike—Palkerrintye Pa, Schitrmann 1844, 51.

Pomalostomus superciliosus Vig, Uorsf, Babbler—Inyula Wp, Hale and

Tindale 1925, 58; unulunula Wp, (onomatopocic) obtained by us in the Northern

Flinders Ranges.

Pomatostomus vuficeps Hartl Babbler

1925, 37.

Epthianura tricolor G. Crimson chat—Milyala kuppera W, obtained at Pandi.

The Aranda call it ninchi-lappa-lappa and consider that men who in ancestral times

were continually painting themselves red were changed into this scarlet-fronted

chat (Spencer and Gillen 1899, 652). Strehlow’s Aranda totem No, 8&1 (1908,

63), ninjalapallapalla is, no doubt, the same.

Ashbyia lovensis Ashby. Desert chat—Wee-icka DK, Duncan-Kemp 1933,

57 (yellow and brown gibber bird or paper-bag bird resembling the orange desert

chat), Onomatopocic name. Mrs. Dunean-Kemp told the local legend of the

Kalidgaworra and Dubbo Downs tribesmen [Mittaka]. In ancestral times the

huge dragon-lizards, Printhee [perenti of Central Australia, Varainus giganteus],

Kwoolcudee and Boolah-dee fought for possession of a woman, Wee-icka (white

flower), and fought so hard and dug the ground so much that the mountains fell

and covered the plain with stones (gibbers). White Flower died, so Printhee

(presumably the victor) was without a wife. He lived in a cavern, from which

he emerged regularly to raid the tribes and capture the most desirable women for

wives and tore to pieces those refusing to wed. Wee-icka became transformed

into the little gibber bird or desert chat which has to make its nest in a hole scraped

out in the stony soil, and its penetrating call, “wwee-icka wee-icka,” tells the tribes-

men that White Flower still lives amongst the gibbers. White (1917, 458) gave

Inyula Wp, Hale and Tindale

286

a brief account of the bird’s habits. In the lower Eyrean region the term gibber

bird is applied to the dotterel, Peltohyas australis (Morgan 1930, 267). Mr.

Vogelsang informed me that poothoopoothooka D, Gason 1879, 286, sparrow

[putuputuka] was the desert chat, and was termed locally a sparrow.

Lark (? Cinclorhamphus cruralis and C, mathezwsi, both reported by Morgan

1930, 272, to be common in flooded areas; ? Mirafra horsfieldi), derelja Nj.

Berndt and Vogelsang 1941, 7; thiewillagie D, Gason 1879, 286. T. Vogelsang

informed me that the latter (tiwilitja 1) was the diamond sparrow; it was so

recorded by Berndt and Vogelsang. Kutjikutjijiri D, Fry 1937, 206, a lark; kutji-

kutji D, Stirling and Waite 1919, toa 217, unidentified. Kulyunnu Pa, Schiir-

main 1844, 20 (native lark).

Malurus assimills North. Wren—Yuruyuruya Wp, Hale and Tindale

1925, 57. Kutji-kutji, kutjikutjijiri D (T. Vogelsang); recorded by Fry 1937,

206, as a lark.

Artainus personatus G, Woodswallow—-Ralpula Wp, Hale and Tindale

1925, 57. Warraka Pa, Schiirmann 1844, 69, swallow; warra (waru) = grey,

henee the name suggests a greyish swallow, e.g., Arlainus personatus,

Mvysantha flarigula G. Honey-eater—Madlaci-tana Wp, Hale and Tindale

1925, 58. Schtirmann 1844, 64, reported tyityapi Pa as the name of a “honey-

sucker” (tyl suggests tiwi = flower).

Wattle birds—Negarkarko, ngarkabukko Pa, Schiirmann 1844, 45; apparently

the two species, Anthochaera carunculata Shaw and A. chrysoptera Lath. Neyark-

ngarko is obviously onomatopoeic and resembles closely the call of the large wattle

bird, 4. cerunculata; presumably the other term applies to the smaller wattlebird.

Anthus australis Vieill, Pipit—Yatiworuna Wp, Hale and Tindale 1925, 57.

Taentopygia castanotis G. Zebra finch—lthi Wp, Hale and Tindale 1825, 57.

Zonaeginthus [Staganopleura| gutlatus Shaw. Diamond sparrow—Iti Nj,

tiwittja D, Berndt and Vogelsang 1941. Viwiltya, unidettified totem in southern

Evrean region, ILowitt 1904, 96, is obviously the same.

Passer domesticus. Mr, Vogelsang stated that the sparrow was called by the

Diert, tiwilitja pirna (tiwi — flower; pirna = large; tiwilitja = diamond sparrow),

i.e., a large kind of finch.

Corvus cecilae Math. and C. bennett: North, and in the southern part of the

region, C. coronoides Vig. Horsf. Curr’s correspondents (1886) supplied the fol-

lowing terms for crows: wokkoola A. Todd; wokkala A, Jacobs; wakilla A,

Warren and Iogarth; wackala N, Cornish; waucurla K, Kingsmill; wawkala W. Pp,

Gasou; woocalla Pa, Green; wawgala Bi, Curr; wakala Pp, Eglinton; worcala Ja,

Green; walkala Wp, Wills; wawkerlo Kg, Heagney; waukerlo Ku, Heagney ;

walkulla Nu, Valentine: wolko, koro wolko Wp, Phillipson. W ongara Pa,

Sawers; wornkarra Pa, Le Souef and Holden; wongala Pa, Beddome. Kowulka

Wa, Crozier; kaulka Wa, Dewhurst; kowilka N, Paull; kowulka Ya, Cornish —

D, Gason; kaoolika Ya, Salmon; kawolka D, Jacobs. Wathakur Wk, Myles.

Worgaritchee Te, Sullivan and Eglinton ; wakaretche Te, Foott; worga B, Sullivan ;

wagoo Wi, Dix; wakoo Ma, Reid; wako and warko of various Darling River

tribes; wokeri Kw, Anon; wakeri Ky, Machattie,

Other references are: kowulka D, Gason 1879, 286; kookunta Ka, Wells

1894, 520 (not eaten, p. 517); wukkalla A, Helms 1896, 316; wakla Wp, Hale

and Tindale 1925, 57; wakala Nj, wakla Wp, Berndt and Vogelsang 1941, 5;

wornkarra Pa, Schtirmann; wakerdi DK, Duncan-Kemp 1933, 114; kaualka D,

totem, Howitt 1885, 6; wakala A, Spencer and Gillen 1899, 60, 114; workerdi Ka,

287

Roth 1897, 50; wakerdi Pp, wakala Pp, Roth 1897, 39, 50; kawalka, kowulka D,

Fry 1937, 188, 278. We obtained the names kaua-ka N, and wakala W, at Pand1.

Howitt (1891) reported crow totems as follows: kaualka D (p. 38), wakalo An

(39), and wogarachi Ka (39) ; and in his book (1904) he recorded the following

totemic names: kaualka D (p. 91, 780, 783), N (94), Wo (95), wokula W (92),

wokalo An (93) wokala A (94), and warogatchi Kd (97). Several of the toas

(258, 395, 297 D, 197 Ya) have reference to Kawolka (Stirling and Waite 1919),

Mention has been made earlier of Wakerdi as a constellation (Duncan-Kemp

1933, 123); and of the legend relating to the crow and the flood bird, Sevthrops.

Other crows—Karruwogona Kd, small crow, Howitt 1904, 97 [Corvus

bennetti|; mena-naikara Nj, white-eyed crow, Berndt and Vogelsang 1941, 5

[Corus cecilae]; kawalka D, Corvus coronoides, Eylmann 1908, 167.

Strepera fuliginosa G. Black bell-magpie—Diralla Pa, Schitrmann 1844, 57

(black magpie).

Cracticus torquatus Lath. Grey butcher-bird—Audipi Wp, Hale and ‘Tindale

1925, 57.

Gyntnorhina tibicen Lath. Black-backed magpie—Wurukuli Wp, Hale and

Tindale 1925, 57; koorabaukoola D, magpie, Gason 1879, 286.

Gymnorhina hypoleuca G. (syn. C. leuconota). White-backed magpic —

Kurra Pa, Schiirmann 1844, 23 (magpie). Berndt and Vogelsang 1941, 7, men-

tioned bindi-garu Nj as the small black-backed magpie ; the use of the term “smal”

suggests that the bird was not Gymnorhina tibicen, but may have been the “Mur-

ray magpie,” Grallina cyanoleuca Lath, (syn. G. picata Lath.), or perhaps

Craticus torquatus Lath.

Grallina cyanoleuca Lath. Peewit—Mati-mati D (very short a), T. Vogel-

sang.

Unidentified birds—-Yellow-breasted bird, arku-cta Nj, Berndt and Vogel-

sang 1941, 4 [? Ptilotis penicillata], Stirling and Waite (1919) mentioned won-

patjara W, toa 320.

Unidentified birds whose Pangkala names were recorded by Schiirmann 1844:

irerinye, a species of sea bird (p. 8); kulla ita (19); kurdli ita (AIS) ; murrerinye

(36) [this term resembles murrara, ic., the black duck]; ngangkalla, any male

bird (44); ngannelli, water bird [term is almost the same as that for the musk

duck|; purperinye Pa (61), MS addition by Schiirmann is “? nightingate”

[perhaps the species may be Cinclorhamphus rufescens (uathewsi) or

C. cruralis| ; puttiperinye, putui = hair (62); tartatarta (63) ; tutturru, a sea bird

(tuttu == song) (63) [? sea-curlew, Numenius cyaneps|; yunyalla (87); yandu-

tyuru, sea bird (79); yupunnu, kangaroo bird (87) | Rhipidura leucophrys Ce.

tricolor) is suggested because of its common association with horses and cattle,

probably it was similarly associated with larger herbivorous marsupials before the

arrival of white men in Australia].

REPTILES

Snakes and lizards are caten and are not skinned before being roasted,

Pythons are especially appreciated, while venomous snakes may or may not be

eaten. The wilyaru ceremony of the Dier had for its object the procuring of a

good supply ef snakes and other reptiles (Gason 1879, 270; Howitt 1904, 798,

minkani ceremony, Minkani being apparently one af the Kadimarkara—a wonia

whose fossil remains are to be found in the yrean deltas}. Young people of the

Ngameni were not permitted to ear a fat snake (such being reserved for their

elders); the penalty for disobedicnce was the turning of the hair grey (Stirling

and Waite 1919, toa 55), Amongst the Pangkala, lizards were the proper food

for girls when pttherty was to be accelerated, and snakes for women to promote

288

fecundity (Schtirmann 1846; 1879, 220; Wilhelm: 1861, 176). Thootchoo

[tjutju| D, Gason, 1879, 304, ‘reptile or insect + tjuntju D, Fry 1937, 272. reptile,

florne and Aiston (1924, 137) reported that a charm (tharta, W) for protec-

tion against attack by a snake was worn at night around the forehead or waist.

Jt was made of hair smeared with ochre and grease mixed to form a stiff paste,

so that there were projecting knobs of ochre. This charm was supposed to give

warning by pricking the skin of the sleeper and thus awaken him if a snake or an

enemy “should invade his camp. These authors also reported (p. 161) that

amongst the Wenkanguru, after subincision, the fat of a venomous snake was

rubbed on the wound,

Wadimarkara is a term frequently used in the region, especially in connec-

tion with local legends. ‘These were supposed to be monsters resembling croco-

diles and the large fossil bones found in the area, as well as peculiarly formed

rocks, are regarded as being their remains. References to these are: Howitt and

Siebert 1903, 525, 532; Howitt 1904, 433, 800, 801; Stirling and Waite 1919,

toas 3, 6, 64, 89,

Gason probably over-estimated considerably the lengths of various snakes

when rceording their Dieri name, but Waite (1929, 183) ) pointed out the dif culty

in estnmating the lengths of living repliles, mentioning Ins own experience when

he carefully estimated the length of a snake moving across his own room and

found that his esiimate of 4 feet 6 inches was based on a reptile 3 feet 10 inches

long. or in other words, an authority in herpetology had over-estimated by at ti

25%. Gasou might be expected to make a greater error, perhaps 33° to 1006

/ 5 fo

In attempting to identify Gason's species use has been made of the wesetin:

tions by Lucas and Prost (1896), unghorn (1929) and Waite (19291: and also

of identifications of specimens 111 the South Australian Museun n T. Vogelsang,

sles was able to associate Dieri names with some of them.

OOPILIDIA

Snake —Curr’s correspondents (1886) recarded the following: wobma A

Todd — Ja, Green — k, singe wobna Wp, \Wills; wabma A, Warren -— Pa,

J.c Souet and Holden — Pa, Beddome; wabna Wp. Phillipson; wabina A, Warren

and Hogarth; wapma Pa, pes worl Wp, D, Gason: w ‘oma Ya, Cornish ;

worma Ntt, Valentine. Wincherta K, Kingsmill, Juno Pa, Reddome. Kirtoba

Ky, Machattie, Thoolperoo, thiagara Kg. licagney, Koorianurra Ku, Lleagney.

Titta A, Jacobs. Tippamakatu W? Jacobs. Wonungunic (carpet snake) N,

Cornish [apparently the same as warraguni A, WW, referred to later |. Parday Ya,

Salmon. kadi Ba. Curr, Turn Ma, Morten; turroo Wa, Dewhurst; thuru

Wa. Crozier; thora Ma, Reid: tooroo, Darling tribes, Anon; thore, Darl-

ing tribes, Tlaines. Tootheo N, Paull; tutjao D, Jacobs; tuehu Yu. Howitt

[tiutju]. Minga Kw, Anon. Goondarra Pp, Eglinton [koondara Pp, of Roth

1897]. Ngoothe Te, Sullivan and Eglinton. Yethe Wk, Myles; yelehi 2, Sullivan,

Moona \Wk, Myles — Te, Foott, Teulon (1886, 213) reported the names of

several kinds of unidentified snakes from the vicinity of Bourke, Darling River,

joneiataehiting that amongst the Barkindji mulkerry was another uame for tooroo

(snake).

Most of these terms must apply to the large python or carpet snake of the

dry iuterior, where it is commonly called woma or wommna, Waite (1917, 436;

1929, 203) was able to identify it definitely as ctspidites rainsayi Macleay,

Stirling and Waite (1919) referred to many toas relating to the woma or tjutju

D, K -— toas 9, 11, 34, 85, 159, 207. Wabma W p. Tale and Tindale 1925, 58

(woma, Alspidiies ramsayi); wamma Ka, Wells 1894, 519: woma, Iorne and

Ariston 1924, 29, 116, fig. 81, highly prized as food by the Wonkangur u; wabma

289:

Pa, Schitrmann 1844, 64 (diamond snake); woma D, Gason 1879, 285; woma,

Duncan-Kemp (1933, 111); womma Pp, koondara Pp (koo = foe bent),

ecneral term for snake, Roth 1897, $1, 34, 39); wama, woma D, Fry 1937, 284,

196; wuinnna A, 1), Lichns 1896, 316; woma LD, M. Ilowitt 1902, 405; 408 (\Won-

kanguru legend of its origin ) 5 bulu-buln D, W (young woma), M. Lowi 1902.

408 ; era, D, Gatti 1920, 118

The gigantic (lotemic) carpet snake of ancestral times was Cunmurra whose

activilies were commemorated in a stiake corroborce (Duncan-Kemp 1933, 215-

216). Reth (1897, 3, 153, 160) recorded it as Kanmare (Pittapitta), a huge

supernatural water- shake which was responsible for causing death by drawning.

This serpent migrated from one waterhole to another along a rainbow. It is

referred to briefly by Hambly 1936, 17. Reflerenee has just bcen made to Minkani,

the ancestral woma (Kadimarkara) of the Arabana tribe, Elowitt (1904), 801)

gave an account of the killing of the muramura, Woma, and its relation to certain

landmarks, meluding the mound sprigs of the region, Berndi and Vogelsang

(1941, 9) pers that amongst the gadjuri the mythological snake was akuru,

oa a small red snake associated with ir was habu-laru, Dunean-Kemp (1933,

279) reported Wun-yvel-la as a mythical black snake.

Tlowit! (1891) mentioned as totentic, woma D (p. 38) and waraguni Kd

(p. 39). In his later work (1904) he reported many names for the carpet snake

(totemic) amongst By ttvan iribes and, since they oc ccupy the same position in the

list of murdus of the Wararu Cor cor -esponding ) moiety, they relate 40 the same

species: woma D (p. 91, 873), N (64), Be (95); manga Yu (92); chirka Wo

(95); wadnangani W (92): w adnang: ui A (94); waranetiim ( Perkar for waran-

gum) Ke (97) 3 turu Wi (98); turre Mir (98). Spencer and Gillen (1899, 60,

114,657) reported wainna as an Arabana toten Cobma of the Aranda, Lc., p. 633);

and Evlmaun (1908, 167) recorded wounua as a Dieri murdu,

Python splotes variegatus. Carpet snake — Binarn Wp, totem, Hale and

Vindale 1925, 46,58. Mudlannu Pa, Seliirmann 1844, 34; warambini Pa, Sawers

1886, 132. Koorimara Pp, Roth 1897, 35 [may belony to some other spesics of

python, ¢c.y., Liasis; the term suggests koodianurra Ku, Heagney |.

Berndt and Vogelsang 1941, 9, reported mudlu Nj. woma D), aud binaru Wp.

as the carpet snake. It has already been mentioned that woma was applied ta

cispidies, Python variegatus is largely arboreal and has not been recorded from

the arid region to the north of the Finders Ranges. Mudlu and binaru are applied

to the latter species.

Acanthaphis antarctions Shaw, Death adder — Yalliri Pa, Sechtirmann

1844, 78.

Pseudechts porplivriacus Shaw, Biael sn Nurru Pa, Schiirmann 18-44,

41; womego Pa, Sawers 1886, 132 (the name suggests wanku or wonkoo of other

anthors). This identification is uneertam, at least for womego.

Netechis scutatus Peters. ‘Viger snake—Arkubi Nj, Berndt and Vogelsang

1941, 9.

Wip-aru—Gason 1879, 286, reported that wipparoo D, was applied to a long

thin black snake, shaded with other dark colours, about seven feet long, its bite

being followed by instant death. Hlelms (1896, 316) stated that wiparn A, D,

possessed a Hight grey-yellow belly. Sawers (1886, 132) recorded wiparoo Pa as

a yellow snake. Berndt and V ogelsane (1941, 9) mentioned wiperu Nj, wiparu D.

as the whip snake, but they also (p. 4) reported wiparu D, and apara Nj. as names

for the large adder. The latter name, if correctly applied. would refer to

Acanthophis antarcticus, a short thick broad-headed snake, ahout 30 inches long,

the other species, A. pyrrhus, being only 20 inches in maximum length. ITlale and

Tindale (1925, 58) reported appara as a lizard (Hinulia). Gatti (1930, 99)

290

considered that wiparu was a Dieri attempt to say vipera. The term viper is not

applied in Australia, as far as I know, to any Australian snake.

There are three species which may be indicated: Demansia teatilis Co>rown

snake, mallee snake, mulga snake) ; D. psanunophis (whip snake, saltbush snake) ;

and Pseudechis australis (mulga snake). Gason’s remarks regarding its highly

venomous character, if correct, would seem to exclude the second which is also

shorter than the other two, but he probably confused some of the characters

belonging to the three species. Mr. Vogelsang has recognised the species amongst

inuseum material; it is Demansia psammophis Schlegel.

Wirrawirrala D, Gason 1879, 286, a large, very venomous snake, 6 to 10 feet

long, with yellow belly. Vhe brown snake, Demansia textilis, is the species, though

dD, ‘psummophis and P. australis may also have a ye ellowish ventral surface,

Mr. Vogelsang informed me that the Dieri called the Birdsville region Wirra-

wirra, la== from, the name of the snake implying that it came down from ihe

Diamantina.

Marrakilla D, Gason 1879, 286, a large brown snake, about seven [cet long,

with a large head, very venomous and vicious. The snake is Pseudechis australis,

which Kinghorn (1929, 159) reported as venomous, vicious, and dangerous,

flattening its neck when angry. It closely resembles the brown snake in its

cilouration, but is relatively thicker and is rather more greciish above and greyish-

yellow below.

Wonkoo D, Gason 1879, 286, a light brown and grey snake, four to seven

feet long, venomous and very vicious, ‘Berndt and Vogelsang 1941, 9, stated that

wanku [> was a small snake. Sawers’ (1886, 132) womgo Pa, black snake, has a

similur name, as has also Schitrmaun’s warnko = wabma pulyo Pa (== small

snake). 1844, 69. Mr. Vogelsang informed me that wonku D, was a general name

for a small venomous snake, including the younger stages of those referred to earlier.

mtirling and Waite (1919) mentioned two toas 94 N and 185 D, wonkuturunt

[wonkutukuni]; ni == to, or in the direction of ; tuktu — back (turu = fire); and

the translation given (p. 126, 138) is “to the snake's back,” oe snake thus being

wonku, a name referred to earlier in this section.

Cindentilfied snakes—Several reptiles regarded by Gason as snakes are almost

certainly legless lizards (Pygopodidae}, though blind snakes , Typhlopidae, are a

possibility. I have listed most of them under ‘Pygopodidae,

Thandandiewindiewindie D, Gason 1879, 286, a small black venomous snake,

5 feet 6 inches long, with a small mouth. Thooua D, Gason 1879, 286 grey snake,

5 fect long, venomous; loona means greyish-white, the colour of crudely burnt lime

(CE. Vogelsang); perhaps the name applies to a young Pemansia psantimophis.

Korimora Kd, totem, brown snake, Howit 1891, 39; 1904, 97; if it is the brown

snake it is Demansia lextilis; if a brown Pygopodid, it probably would he

Faas burtonu or Dehna fraserit, Eyimann (1908, 167) reported tulku pirra pirra

D, totem, as a species of snake (tuku = back, pirra = flat and broad, T. Vogel-

sang); 1f a snake, then it may be Pseudcehis australis, Muni Pa, small black

snake, and nilteni Pa, a small species, Schiirmann 1844, 35, 39. Mulkunkoora D,

Gason 1879, 286, black and green spotted venomous snake, 5 feet ong, perhaps an

errencous description of the harmless Psexndodcliuia impar or Lialis burtoint,

Wells (1894, 521) reported tippa Ka, coola Ka, as snakes, and tundri-prilla

Ka, as a venomous species; he mentioned that wooti-1ina and yarra-gun-inna were

names of women, named after snakes (p. 519). The latter were presumably wooti

and yarraguni. The latter name is obviously the same as warraguni, carpet snake.

Tippa is probably the same as Jacobs’ titta A, and tippamakatu W? (pythons).

Coola Ckula) is probably Gason’s kooliclawirrawirra which seems to be a legless

lizard, Pseudodelina impar Fischer,

291

LACERTILIA

Gason (1879, 260) gave an account of the Dieri story of the creation of human

beings. The Muramura first made a number of small black lizards, the same kind

still to be seen under dry bark, and promised them power over all other creeping

things. Ile then altered their fect into fingers and toes and by means of his fore-

finger made the face into human form and then placed one of the lizards in a

standing position which it could not retain until the tail was cut off—thus the

human erect posture was attained. The sexes were then differentiated. Gason’s

remark indicates that it was a gecko, perhaps Peropus variegatus, moonkamoonka-

rilla of Gason (p. 285). Teichelmann and Schirmann (1933, 148) reported that

ainongst the Kaurna tribe tarro-tarro was the name of a species of lizard and also

of a fabulous person said to have made the male and female sexes. Schurmann.

when dealing with the Pangkala tribe, reported (1879, 241) that a small kind of

lizard, the male of which was called ibirri and the female waka, was believed to

have divided the scxes in the human species and that male natives tried to destray

the waka, while women vented their hatred on the ibirri. Schiirmann, in his earlier

work (1844, 5, 65), gave similar info~mation.

Geckonidac, frequently termed wood adders locally. Gyimnodactylus miliitsil

(milii) Bory St. Vine., aljen-nara Wp, Tale and Tindale 1925, 58.

Peropus variegatus D and B, mun-ka Wp, Hale and Tindale 1925, 58; Waite

1929, 85 (also reported as dtella); munka Nj, small wood adder, Berndt and

Vogelsany 1941, 4, must refer to the same species ; moonkamoonkarilla 1), small

black short-tailed lizard, generally found under bark, Gason 1879, 285, also helongs

probably to the same species. The species is also called pitji-la D (T. Vogelsang) ;

pitchi == bark, la = from, Pilta W, Howitt 1904, 784, a small lizard living under

bark may be cither Peropus variegatus or Gymiodactylus mulil,

Heteronota bynoei Gray—Tjupa-tjupa D (T, Vogelsang). Choopa D, Gason

1879, 285: tiuba-tiuba Ka, N, owitt 1904, 648; and tiubba-tiubba, Howitt 1904,

717, belong to the same species, and probably kupa Ya, Salmon 1886, 24, also.

The Kuyanni legend of the gecko, adno-artina and the dingo in ancestral times

(Horne and Aiston 1924, 128-129) has already been referred to earlier in this

paper, Gymnodactylus milii is a probable identification.

Mrs. Dunean-Kemp (1933, 274) referred to coora-bin Dk, the frog (or

barking) lizard, a gecko, which was regarded “as a harbinger of evil, incarnating

the tarkee (disembodied spirits) who are jealous of human beings in the flesh and

wander the earth on evil intent’; the tarkee having a place in stellar mythology

and occupying the black pit visible just below the Southern Cross. Gyimunodacty-

lus milli or perhaps Nephrurus laevis De Vis (illchiljera of the Aranda) are pos-

sible identifications.

Pygopodidae—Some of Gason’s spotted “snakes” are undoubtedly legless

lizards, all of which are harmless.

Pygopus lepidopus Lacep—Wandaru D, T. Vogelsang. Wandaroo 1), Gason

1879, 286, green and yellow snake, about 5 feet long, with very thick body, quite

harmless, with sleepy appearance. Its actual Iength is only 2 feet. Howitt (1904.

96) recorded wonduru as a large snake, totemic amongst the tribes of the lower

Diamantina and Warburton; he has previously (1891, 39) reported wanbura An,

as a snake totem, Kopula Kd, totem, a speckled brown snake, Howitt 1891, 39,

1904, 97; is prohably 17. lepidopis.

Koolielawirrawirra D, Gagon 1879, 286, a small harmless yellow and black

spotted snake, 3 feet long; probably a Pygopodid, Pseudodcla impar Fischer or

perhaps Lialis burtonii,

Kurawulieyackayackuna D, Gason 1879, 286, a flat-headed venomous snake.

292

4+ fect long, with green back and with velar spots of its body, Lialis burtonti is

a probable identification because of its colouration and its narrow, pointed, flat-

tened head. Mulkunkoora inay be Pseudodelina impar or Lialis burtonil,

Lialis burtonii—The species was recorded from the Eyrean region by Zietz

in 1917, and by Lucas and Frost (1896, 125) from the Mac donnell Ranges, The fol-

lowing references may beloug to the species. Kadapa N, slow worm, totem, Howitt

1904. Mithindie D, Gason 1879, 286, white and yellow spotted snake, about 3 feet

long, harmless; mithindi Ya. totem, Howitt 1904, 95, slow worm, occupying the

same position as kadapa in the list of Kararu totems, also spelt mitind: (p. 96) ;

miltind: D, snake, Hylmann 1908, 167; Teulon 1886, 213, reported meetindy Ba,

as a kind of snake.

Agamidae, jew lizards and allies; abundant in the region under consideration,

Amphibolurus barbatus Cuy. Frilled lizard—Kkadni Wp, Hale and Tindale

1925, 58; kudnu Nj, ardnu, Wp, frilled lizard, Berndt and Vogelsang 1941, 7

cardnu is Trachysaurus according to Hale and Vindale); kunnie D, Casen 1879,

285, jew lizard; kadni Ka, Wells 1894, 521, lizard, — D, Fry 1937, 190, 194 —

A, Helms 1896, 316, 4. barbatus; kadni T., Stirling and Waite 1919, teas 232,

307, lizard; kanni D, totem, Eylmann 1908, 167; kani D, Wry 1937, 284.

Towitt (1891, 39) recorded kadni An and kani Kd, frilled lizard, as totemic.

In = book (1904) he published many references to kani (which he identified as

a jew lizard, Amphibol: wus barbatus, p. 783), a tolemic lizard in the Matteri

shania kani Ya, iguana (p. 95), Yu. iguana (92), west and north-west from

Lake Evre (96, 7I6y3 ; kanmi Kd, frilled lizard (97): karni Wi, Mi, fried lizard

(98); kadni N, iguana (94). A ceremony associated with bartering was termed

kant-nura (mura = tail) because the tail of the lizard was used as a token in con-

nection with taking of a very young boy (also termed a kani-nura) from his

mother’s people to “those of his father and with his subsequent return (Llowitt

1904, 716-717), Kadno Pa, a yellow striped lizard, Schtrmann 1844, 9, may be

Aniplubolurus barbatus or A, muricdius, probably the former; the name is so

similar to those just given, and the species has two definite longitudinal bands of

lighter colour than the rest of the back: but they are not yellow.

Berndt and Vogelsang (1941. 7) reported kudnu Nj, and kadni D, Wop, as

the jew lizard, recording other names for the frilled lizard; these authors seem

to have confused three species, since Hale and ‘Tindale stated that ardnu was the

Wailpi name of Trachysaurus,

Aimphibolurus pictus Peters~-Wadiwaru 1. T. Vogelsang. waru = grey;

kucieworoo Gasou 1, 1879, 285, red-backed Jizard; kadiwaru D, Howitt 1o04,

717, — D, Fry 1937, 284 -- Ya, M. Howitt 1902, 411; itiati Nj, kadiwaru D,

Berndt and Vogelsang 1941, 7, small lizard,

Tvmpanocryptis cephalus Gtinther—Titjuri D. T. Vogelsang; thitthurie D,

Gason 1879, 285, small rough-skinned lizard. (thitti = ticklish, referring to the

prominent spines on the back of the species). Madakata kata D, TP. Vogelsang;

manakata kata Ka, N. Howitt 1904, 648; Mr. Vogelsang informed me that

Howitt’s name was incorrect; mada == stone, mana = mouth, kata = harsh noise,

its name referring to the sound it makes when moving under stones in the gibber

country.

Moloch herridus Gray—Naiari DK, Duncan-Kemp 1933, 63; same name

applied by the pee clan to the little black ant on w hich it feeds (p. 64);

habits deseribed 64-66. Mrs. Duncan-Kemp (p. 271-272) referred to the

place of these ° ‘sand! iil devils” in aboriginal stellar mythology. In ancestral times

these lizards were virgin women who kent to their own territory and, when gather-

ing food, protected themselves with dogs against possible molestation by men.

293

Wherever the naiaris rested they left babies behind them in the form of white

spirit stones, certain localities still being termed Naiar1 Waters, These offspring

were warned against speaking to men, since the latter would take them away if

they did. The leader of the ancestral men and a great hunter was Balleroo who

wanted these naiari women as his wives and endeavoured to hunt and trap them,

but the women fled to the sky, taking their own dogs with them, Balleroo followed

them there and can be seen at might with his white girdle (the Milky Way) chas-

ing the women (now the seven sisters of the Pleiades) but never catching them

as the latter reside in Karani, f.e., the women’s country. Later the naiaris were

changed into the little lizards, which are still voiceless because their mothers in

ancestral times had not permitted them to speak. Naiari ceremonies are performed

only by women.

Sciricidae

Hinulia fasciolata Ginther, appara Wp, Hale and Tindale 1925, 58.

Ablepharus boutonii Desjard., ngarupuruna Wp, Jlale and Tindale 1925, 58.

Trachysaurus rugosus Gray, wudlu, arnu Wp, Hale and Tindale 1925, 58;

alda Wp, sleepy lizard, Berndt and V ogelsang 1941, 7; kalla Pa, sleeping lizard,

Schiirmann 1844, 11; ngura-wordu-punnuna i, {lowitt 1904, 803 (nura = tail,

wordu == short); nurawordubununa D, Stirling and \Waite 1919, 109, 145, toas

130, 132, 134, 148, 183, 235, 263. ‘Lhe last two terms are the names of a

Muramura who figured in a certain legend (toa 233) described by TMowitt 1904,

803-806, part of his wanderings being perpetuated in the serpentine course of a

portion of Cooper’s Creek. Tle was one of the Nadimarkaras. The legend was

also given by Howitt and Siebert (1903, 528-531), the name being reporied as

nurawordubununa. The latter is the correct name since nura means a tall, while

ngura is a leg. Stirling and Waite, toa 235, tjutjunuraword wu, translated the

term as “to the stumpy crocodile’s “ail,” but tjutju means snake (or reptile} and

no crocodile possesses a stumpy tail (iura wordu). The regene eed tail of

Pygapus lepidapius is sometimes short and broad (Waite 1929, Ot, he. 64).

Viligua scincoides Shaw. Blue tongue—Karrenye Pa, Schttrmann 1844, 16,

“rating lizard.” 1t is presumed that “ratling’” means ratlin, the transverse bars

forming steps of a rope ladder and, if so, then the species would be a markedly

barred lizard such as Tiligua spp. or perhaps Eyernia cunningham or Iinulia

fausciolata. The bands are few and wide in Tiligua and least obvious in /gernia.

Narrenyerenye meaus biue or purple (Schiirmann 1844, 161) and the name of the

lizard no doubt refers to the blue tongue which Tilgua displays when on the

defensive.

Oimolepidota branchiale Cimth. —Womaloora 1) (= shining, and has refer-

ence to the appearance of the skin), T. eee Gason 1879, 285.

Hemiergis peronit Vitz—Oolaumni D, T. Vogelsang; Gason 1879, 285, lizard

with transparent skin, spotted ycliow and b (ate

Khodona bipes Viseher—Rulijandarra D, T. Vogetsang; kulehandarra D,

Gason 1879, 285, “lives under the ground and only appears above after heavy rains.

The natives describe if as venemous and affirm (that) its bite is certain death.

wherefore they are very frightened of it, and even avoid killing it from fear of its

poisoning their weapons.” It is, ef course, a harmless sand- burrower, Waite

(1929, 165) recorded it from Cooper's Creek.

Varanidae, “iguana” of authors, goauna.

a a

Varauus giganteus Gray, popular name in Central Australia is perentie or

sjonba, Waite 1929, 125; printhee Duncan-Kemp 1933, 57. The latter author

mentioned the legend of the desert chat and the perenti, termed karapara in her

district, parapara by the Pittapitta and paripara by the Karanya (Roth 18997, 37,

204

50). This has alre ‘ady been referred to in the present paper. Berndt and Vogel-

sang 1941, 6, were in error when stating that the large goanna, Varanus gouldi,

was pit intiD, Mr. V ogelsang informed me that the term, when used by the Dieri,

helonged to V. giganteus. Ti Aranda names for the latter are echunpa and

irrunpa (Spencer and Gillen 1899, 648, 651), though Lucas and Frost (1896, 134)

called it parenthie.

M. Howitt (1902, 412-413) published an Arabana legend which explained

the colour pattern and the habitat of the pirinti A, and of kapiri (1. gouldi), the

former now being restricted to the rocky or hilly region north of Oodnadatta, and

the latter to the more sandy country w here kulva (= kulva, native name for the

needle-bush, Hakea. leucopiera) occurs,

Varanus varius Shaw—Patara-muru D, T. Vogelsang. Patharamooroo D,

Gason 1879, 285, black iguana, reported as very rare in the Dicri region. Patara

== boxtree, Lucalyplis mucrotheca, or timber; muru = black: the attitude of this

very dark large species suggest'ng a small blackened branch of a tree.

Varanus gouldi Gray—This is the common “goanna” of the drier regions of

this State and is widely distributed in Australia, especially in the more sandy, tree-

less portions. Kopirri D, Gason 1879, 285, kaupirrie (p. 299). Howitt (1891)

reported as totems, kopiri D (p. 38), kopri. us 39), tura-guru Kd (39); and in

his later work (1904) recorded kapiri (96, og), kaperi (783), birnal Mi (98),

and turra-gurra Kd (97). Capirie A, en peice and Gallen 1899, 60; radna

Wp, Hale and Tindale 1925, 58. Kapiri D, A, W. M. Howitt 1902, 405, 406

(lace lizard), 408 (legend relating to its origin), 412-413 (Arabana legend explain-

ing distribution and colouration ) > kapiri, kaper1 D, Pry 1937, 196, 284; karpirri A,

Helms 1896, 316 (FV. gouldiz).

jerndt and Vogelsang 1941, 6, reported budua Nj, kapiri LD, for “goanna”;

and pirinti D, radna Wp for Faranus gould, Pirinti does not belong to

I’, gouldit but probably all the remaining four terms do, though in the Flinders

Ranges I’. variits may occur in addition to V, gould?; the term budna may possibly

belong to it. since the colouration of FV. varius resembles that of the parenti.

The special ceremonies (kaupirrie wima [wimma = song] of Gason 1879,

279; minkani of Howitt 1904, 798) associated with the increase in numbers of

woma and kapiri were referred to by these authors, Gason also reported that this

animal was regare ded as a conductor of lightning and that during a thunderstorm

it buried itself in the sand. If eaten by children, the latter, when they grew up,

would become grey or develop much hair on the breast. Berndt and Vogelsang

(Trans, Roy. Sr, S. Aust., 63, 1939, 171; Ree. S. Aust. Mus., 6, (4), 1941, 378)

referred to a Dieri rainanaking ceremony involving the rubbing of goanna fat into

the body of a boy in the belief that the grease would cause vapour to rise from the

body and form into a cloud from which rain would fall.

Roth (1897, 30) reported ‘that the smaller species of “iguana” was termed

saringara by the Pittapitta and Karanya tribes. Vrobably I’. gouldi was the lizard

so indicated. Howitt (1904, 95) mentioned karingara as a Yauorka totem, but

gave no indication regarding its identity. It oceupied a position amongst Matteri

murdts corresponding to niungalli Yu (p. 92, 446) and wompirka N (p. 94),

hoth termed lizards. Wells (1814, 521) recorded wump-pikka Ka as an “iguana.”

We can accordingly add all these terms to the list of names for FV. goitldi.

Unidentified lizards — Schtirmann (1844 ) recorded the following Pangkala

names of lizards: katyeti (p. 17); Mapa (53); yarrapalla, a small species (81)

(varra = quick—perhaps Hinulia sp. ); ibirri, “a small species of lizard said to

have separated the sexes: women call i¢ waka; whenever one of these little animals

makes its appearance it is usually the cause of merriment and jokes” (p. 5, 65);

it has been suggested earlier in this paper that the specics was one of the geckoes.

295

perhaps Peropus variegatus, In the wi-lu (curlew) legend, Schtirmann (1879)

imade no mention of lizards, though he referred to them (ibirri and waka) in the

next legend as indicated above. Wilhelmi (1861, 194; 1862, 34) altered that legend

by stating that the two youths became small lizards whose male was ibirri and

whose female was waka.

Gason (1879, 285) reported the Dieri name of a lizard which we have not

been able to identify: wakurrie, about three inches long, flat-headed | probably a

small gecko such as Diplodactylus vitlatus ; Teichelmann and Schirmann (1933,

150) recorded wakurri, Kaurna tribe, as a lizard].

AMPIUBIA

Frog —Gason (1879, 286) mentioned kulathirric D and thidnamtura 1) (thidna

= foot; mura = hand’) as an edible frog and toad respectively. Howitt stated

that amongst totem animals were tidnamara 1) (1885, 6; 1891, 38), orikomatu Nd

(1891, 39) and kurdmuri An. bullfrog, (1891, 39). In his later work (1904) he

referred to the following; tidnama D [? error for tidmamara] a small frog

(p. 91); tidmamara W (92), A (94). N (94), and tribes south-east from Pando,

ie, Lake Hope; kaladiri D (91, 783) 5 taralyu N (94); kutyarku Yu (92);

kuyarku Ya (95), apparently the same as kutyarku, since kuyalku Yu was men-

tioned as a bream (92); kelka A (94); orekomatu Kd (97), Kalatiri D, Gatti

1939, 116. Tinamara D, Fry 1937, 272. Green (1886, 126) reported ngerna Wp

[ngarna of other recorders]. Since kaladiri, kutvarku, yelka and kuyarku all

occupy similar positions in the lists of murdus of Eyrean tribes, as published by

Tlowitt (1904), they all probably refer to the same species of frog; while vidna-

mara, a small species, occupies a different position, though both groups of totems

belong to the Kararu moiety. Howitt was thus apparently referring to two

different species, a larger represented by kaladiri (kulathirrie of Gason), and a

smaller represented by tidnanara (thidnamura of Gason), Orekomatu, a totem

of a tribe along the Cooper much further to the east, occupied almost the same

position as kaladiri and probably refers to the same species. Eylmann (1908, 167}

mentioned tidnamara asa Dieri maddu. Berndt and Vogelsang (1941, 6) reported

waka Nj, kalatiri D, and ngar-na Wp. The last-named had already been recorded

by Hale and Tindale (1925, 58) as the Wailpi name for the waterhole frog, while

the large species from the sandhill country was stated to be valja; the latter

stored np water and thus permitted ils aestivation, but it was dug up by natives

and its stored water utilized in an emergency (p. 48). Spencer (1896a, 160-165 )

gave an account of the habits and published figures of the adult and tadpoles of

Chiroleptes platycephalus in Central Australia. ‘This water-holding frog, whose

habits Waite (1929, 246) described under Phractops platycephalus, toms its bur-

rows in the harder claypans rather than in the beds of sandy creeks, The latter

situation is not firm cnough for Chiroleptes but is the favoured habitat of the

rather large Limnodynastes ornatus Gray which burrows down into moist sand,

about a foot below the surface of tthe creek bed (Spencer 1896, 18-19, 42-43), and

though becoming swollen with absorbed water, it does not became so distended as

the former. Chiroleptes is especially adapted for survival in a dry environment

by its ability to store abundance of water in its body cavity and clsewhere, and to

burrow some distance down into the clayey soil where it can survive for months.

Limnodynastes was stated to he not so abundant as Chiroleptes or Hyla rubella.

Spencer pointed out that the fully-distended frog became nearly spherical and just

filled the cavity at the end of its burrow, the walls of the cavity being moist but

not wet. These frogs apparently breed very soon after rain or flood and pass

through the tadpole stage very rapidly.

The third species of frog which occurs commonly in waterholes is the sinall,

variously coloured, Hala rubella Gtinther, a description of the adult and larvae

296

from Central Australia being given by Speneer (1896, 170-172) who stated that,

alter rain, it was as common as. or commoner than, Chiroleptes. It measures little

more than an inch in length whereas Chiroleptes reaches 2°6 and /.. orndtus about

2 inches long. I[eleioporus pictus Peters also oceurs in Central Australia but is

much less common than the three mentioned. Its size is similar to that ot

LL, ornatis. Waite reterred to these species in his handbook on South Australian

reptiles and amphibians (1929), WKaladiri (and the other names which we have

associated with it) and valja are Chiroleptcs plutveephalus, and tidnamara and

ngarna belong to Hyla rubella, Schtirmann (1844, 16) mentioned karranna as a

angkala term for a frog, and in his MS. additions he reported itine as a species

of frog, and kulbi as a tadpole. Karrana is really the same as ngar-na (ononiat.)

and applies without doubt to local species of Tyla.

Duncan-Kemp (1933, 43) referred to the presence in the Diamantina region

of two kinds of edible frogs, a large grey-green lethargic species found aestivating

deep in the mud of dry creeks, and a very small ted- capped frog. The former

were stated to possess storage tanks in their abdomens and may be either

L. ernatus or (more probably) C. platyeephalus, Tadpoles were caught by hand

hy children and eaten alive (pp. 288).

Roth (1897, 50) mentioned that koo-yer-ko was the name of a frog amongst

the Karanya tribe; this is obviously the same as Howitt’s kuyarku or Fettt rarku

{onomat.) of the Yaurorka and Yarmruwunta. Ile reported (p. 38, 94) that there

were three edible frogs in the Diamantina region inhabited by the Pittapitta:

taralko, a large “bullfrog,” 44 to 5 inche ae koanpa, 35 inches; and nemaka

24 inches; a general term for auy small frog was neng-o. In addition there were

large greens sh frogs, ka-ti-loa (p. 94), which were apparently not eaten, but were

dug up from their burrows in har d ground with vam sticks or from sandy soil.

Katiloa was probably either Chiroleptes or Limnodynastes, or both, Nemaka may

have been Ayla rubella and tavalko may have been L. ormatity.

Linnodynastes dorsalis Gray (presumably the same species as that identified

hy Spencer 1896 as L. ornaius) was stated to be unchichera (totem) of the

Aranda. Strehlow (1908, 66) identified injitjera (Aranda), ngangi (Loritja), as

FHeleioporius pictus.

Dunean-Kemp (1933, 147) referred to “Wompoo, half bird, half frog, a

fantastic creature of swamp and brake,” to whom offerings of pituri wrapped in

a coolibah leaf, were placed in the fork of a tree overhanging the water.

Pisces

‘There are few definite identifications recorded. The chief general terms for

fish are kuya and paru. Curr (1886, 3) stated that Bulloo and Paroo. nanics of

two long rivers which flow ee tow vs the Darling, both mean fish, but apart

from a reference by ‘Todd (1886, 10) relating to Arahata territory, L cannot tnd

any other indication of bullog as a name for sh. In the Bullod region, Curr’s

lists give kuya and paru as the terms.

‘TELEOSTEL

Curr’s correspondents (1886) reported the following terms for fish: bulloo

w\. Todd. Paroo A, Warren and Hogarth, Todd, Warren — N, Paull — Ya.

Cornish — Yu Howitt — Wp, Phillipson. Puroo, ete. (each sort has its par-

ticular name), D. Gason. Koopi Pp, Eglinton; koppi Ky, Machattie. Kammoo

hi, Curr. Wongo Kw, Anon. Kooya Ya. Salmon — B, Sullivan — Pa, Sawers:

kooa Te, Sullivan and Eglinton — Ma Morton: kooia Wa. Crozier; kooyea Ja.

Green; kuya Pa, Le Souef and Eglinton — Wa, Dewhurst: queea Nu, Valentine;

gooya Kg, lleagney; gooia Te, Foott; guia Wk, Myles. Goombilla Ku, Kg

Jleagney. Worri A, Jacobs; warri¢ N, Cornish; morri [? error for worri] D,

297

Jacobs. Roth (1897, 31) listed ko-pe as a general term for fish aniongst the

Pittapitta; and koopa amongst the npighibudicite tribes [hence koopi and koppi

in Curr’s list}; koo (as a root stem) = water, Paru D, Fry 1937, 279.

Wells (1894) gave the following names for different fish, multa-multa,

mudlacoopa, paroo and warrie Ka, IE leanior and iower Diamantina. Ile mentioned

that fish fat was mixed with crushed seeds of nardoo [ngardu = sporocarps of

Morsilea Driimmondii| and then baked in hot ashes (p. 517). ‘The method of

using a large net made of native flax was mentioned (p. 518).

Gason (1879, 287, 301) stated that fish were few aud ummportant (as articles

of diet) in the Dieri country, being caught in the waterholes which could be

termed creeks or rivers only after tlonds had arrived in that re egion. lle gave

names of four kinds, parco (a small flat bony flsh), multhoomulthcoe (a fish weigh-

ing 3-34 Ibs.) ; moodlakoopa (a fish averaging 4 Ihs.); aud murkara (a large fish).

A net (iuintie), usually 60 feet long by 3 fect wide, and made from rushes, was

used for fishing (p. 289), He mentioned kurdicmurkara (p. 299): “a supposi-

tious large fish at the bottom of lakes and decp waters.” This fabulous creature,

kadi-matikara, regarded by others as some kind of reptile, fgured frequently in

the legends of the region (Howitt 1904, 433, 789; Stirling and Waite 1919, toa 3)

and is commemorated in Curdimurke, a railway station west of Lake Lyre.

tlowitt ee 38) mentioned as Diert murdus, kirapara (a bone-lish) and

Leia Guullet}. In his book (1904) he listed the following totem fish:

narkara D tp. 91), N (94); makara (7&3) apparently the same as markara;

ies Yu, Gresr (92) |kuyarku is termed a frog Ya on page 95, where it is

probably a misprint for kutyarku, a frog]; kirrhapara, kirhapara N (94, 96), not

identified but ihe term kirapara was used by him in 1891 for a “bone-fish” ; mudia-

kupa, no details BOF ugampuru Ya (95) [mame applied to a caterpillar Yu

(92) f: namba, bone-fish, Wi, Mi (98). He mentioned (448) as terms for fish,

paru D;kuva Ya, Yu; and stated (450) that kuyi-paua (paua = seed; fish seed)

was associated with the mortuary practices of some tribes, eg, Tangara (1.¢.,

Antalarinya).

Kkylmann (1908, 167) stated that the Dieri fish murdaus (maddu) were

markara (a large species) and kirapara, a kind called “red fish” by the natives.

He published an Aeration of the mesh of a Dieri fish ne

Same of the toas mentioned by Stirling and Waite (1919) referred to fish

(paru D) — toa 145, 281. Glassy stones (gypsum) served as fish charms (paru-

marda, marda == stone). Dried fish were pounded into a vis by the Dieri and

kept in that form for future use (p. 133). Markara A, D, a large species; mudla-

kupa A, D, a small fish (? bream), Helins 1896, 316,

Jlorne and Aisten (1924) mentioned that paroo W was the black bream

(Therapon spp.), and murakara was the perch or “yellow belly.” They stated

that the fibre string net was called wooroomarreo and the rush-made net, pmegara

W (p.62). The method of net-fishing was described (p. 63-64).

Berndt and Vogelsang (1941, 6) gave the terms guja Nj, paru D, for fish;

and witi-wala Nj for any kind of fish trap. At Pandi we obtaimed the terms

warti N. W, for perch (Therapon percoides and a smaller, paler species of the

same genus, ? T.aicolor) and makara N, W, for the “yellow belly,” Plectroplitcs

ambiguus (callop or tarki of the lower Murray River).

We can now attempt to identity the various Osh, The largest species is

Plectroplites ambiguus == makara. Mudlakupa (uudla = nose; kupa = young,

small, same term for child) is its young stage, according to T. Vogelsang, its name

being given on account of the shape of the anterior part of the head.

Several species of Therapon (Terapon) occur in the Diamantina and Cooper,

and these “breain” can be expected to be carried into the Eyrean region as a result

298

of floods. 1. percoides and T. unicolor are between 6 and 7 inches in length and

weigh about half a pound. T. welchi and 7. barcoo, trom Cooper’s Creek, are

8 and 54 inches respectively (McCulloch and Waite 1917, 472, 475), The latter

is allied to T. Ailli from Queensland streams, and the former to T. bidyana

(teheri, bidyan) of the Murray basin. The Pandi natives did not distinguish

between the two kinds of Therapon, wartri being applied to both, Multa-multa

is applied by the Dieri to Therapon spp. because these fish soon becoine soft

(multa) after death; they are the least favoured of all local fish (T. Vogelsang).

The ‘bone fish” of [lowitt (kirapara, ngamparu, namba) is the bony bream

which occurs sometimes very abundantly in streams and waterholes in Central

Australia. The species in the Finke and Eyrean regions is Chatoessus (= Nema-

talosa) horni (interpitna of the Aranda, Spencer and Gillen 1899, 650), Mr.

Vogelsang informs me that this species is ‘the commonest in the Dieri region where

it is called paru, this term being also a general one for fish, ‘Nematalosa erebr

(tukari) is common in the Murray basin.

Roth (1897, 96) stated that in the Georgina and some other creeks, aborigines

groped carefully in the mud and caught a kind of catfish. This was probably

Neosilurus hyrtlii, which has a wide distribution in Central Australia, but accord-

ing to T. Vogelsang is very rarely scen in the lower Cooper, even after floods.

Schtirmann (1844) recorded the Panekala terms for a large number of fish

(kuya) probably marme from Spencer’s Gulf and in most cases not at present

identifiable. Those mentioned in his MS additions are indicated by (MS)

Pityurnu, fish scale; winni, wiudi, fish hook, same word for an angle. Kuya hidni

was the name for Sleaford Mere because of the prevalence of fish there (p. 24)

Unidentified fish are: kadlayini (kadla— tail); kadlayini murra, a small

species; kakkaninye [kakka = head. hence presumably a large-headed fish,

perhaps a flathead. Platveephalus spp.1; kallalla; kanalla kuya, a freshwater fish

(MS) [there are very few creeks in the region; Galavrias attenuata is a possible

identification]; kandaleuru; karpatye or murtunya. a small blue fish; kurai

[?mullet, eg, AMfvaeus|; kuralbo, a small fish; minggatta; munyarra a small

species; murtunyu; nemi or yalluyu; welunnu; wirrinni; wornka; valleki, veril-

yell; vunnuyu.

The following names were also mentioned by Schiirmann (1844), and an

attempt is now made to identify the fish: kalunu, whiting [.Siflaqo bassensis or

perhans Sillaginades punctatus]; kumbarra, yvabmarra. groper [Achocrodus

gouldi| ; marrenye, snapper [Pagrosomus auratus]; murti, salmon [Arripis tritta]

ngaltai, barracouta | TAysites at]: pullamba, “a small crustaceous species of

fish,” also “porcupine grass” [the fish is probably Allomvetcrus jaculiferus, but

may be Diodon holocanthus ; the latter was reported by Waite to be rare in South

Australian waters, though its characteristic swim-bladder was often found on

beaches after rough weather]; purrelli, “hedgehog fish.” “any crustaceons species

of fish” [Atopomncterus nichthemerus. globe fish] ; wallilli, cod fish [ihe term cod

is applied to several species in South Australia; the Murray cod may be ruled out

as it is restricted to the Murray waters; a rock cod, Physiculis barbatus (belong-

ing to the Gadidae) occurs in our gulfs: the term rock cod is also used commonly

for some of the gurnards, more especially Scorpaena cruenta].

Fishing Jama D, Gatti 1903, 117; minda Nj, mindi Nj. jama D, Berndt

and Vogelsang (1941, 7); peerly Ya, Salmon 1886, 24. Met! 1ods for catching

fish: Bi, Fraser 1886. 378; Schitrmann 1846; 1879, 218; Wilhelmi 1861, 175;

1862, 15; Duncan-Kemp 1933, 121-122, 148, 150. The last- named author (p. 147)

referred to the drying and pulverising of fish obtained from permanent waterholes,

this crude “fish flour” being ground up alone with seed from a barley grass.

katoora, the latter being indicated by Roth (1879, 91) as Sporobolus actinocladus.

299

This fish-flour was used for ceremonial purposes, Roth also illustrated various

methods of using nets to catch fish (lig, 220-225).

ELASMOBRANCHIL

Sharks—Schiirmann (1844) reported the following Pangkala names of

sharks from Spencer Gulf: kadalyili (p. 9); konye (18); piri manka, dogfsh

(57) (piri = enough, manka = dots or scars); wolgarra (73). In a manuscript

addition to his vocabulary Schiirmann mentioned kattalyilli (apparently the same

as kadalyili) as a dogfish. Heterodontus philippi (portus-jacksoni) is commonly

called dogfish in the two South Australian gulfs, and is marked with several

obvious coloured lines or blotches. There are at least two other local sharks called

dogfish, and these are allied to the dogfish of European. waters—Squalus

fernandinus and (less commonly) Scymnorhinus licha, but these are not spotted

or striped. The term piri-manka suggests a shark with numerous spots, e.y., one

of the carpet sharks (Orectolobus spp.) or one of the small cat-sharks, Parascul-

lium spp. or Halaclurus spp. The last genus is regarded as a synonym of

Seyliorhinus. DPiri-ananka is more likely to be Sey/. vinccnt, while kadalyil may

be Squalus fernandinus.

Reference was made earlier in this paper to the probable error regarding

Zerndt and Vogelsang’s record of ngakula Nj as a whale, instcad of a shark,

nakudlo being the term applied to the latter by the neighbouring tribe along the

Murray River.

Rays- Minna Pa, a kind of stirgray, Schtirmann 1844, 32. In his MS addi-

tions he recorded karna as a stingray which attacked men with the spike on its

back [the species was Dasyatis brevicaudatus, a large form, armed with a long

caudal spine, and one which commonly enters shallow water. The latter is the

only true stingray likely to be met with by the aborigines whose fishing was done

by standing in shallow water, the other known South Australian stingrays being

inhabitants of deep water]. Amongst the other rays Bkely to be encountered by

them were Rhinodon philippi (shovel-nose ray), and the skate Maja australis.

Since the latter has spines along its middorsal line, it may be Schtrmann’s minna,

though it is not a stingray. The eagle ray, Myliobatis ienuicaudatus, 1s probably

not sufficiently common in shallow water for a native name to have been attached

to it by the Pangkala, Schtirmann, in his MS additions, mentioned pidnu Pa as

the “fiddler fish” [i.e., Trvgonorrhina fusciata].

ARTHROPODA

CRUSTACEA

Freshwater crayfish or yabbie—The small smooth-bodied crayfish of Aus-

tralian rivers and waterholes were generally regarded as belonging to one widely

distributed species, Parachaeraps bicarinatus Gray, while the larger spiny forms

from mainland streams were popularly called lobsters and identified as Astacopsis

serratus (Hale, Crustaceans of South Australia, Adelaide, 1927, 72-77). Miss

Ie. Clark studied these crustaceans from numerous Australian localities and showed

that there were mauy species included under those terms (Mem, Nat. Mus., Mel-

bourne, 10, 1936, 5-58; 12, 1941, 31-40). The yabbie from the arid regions was

determined as Cherax destructor Clark. These crustaceans are sought for as food

hy the aborigines.

Curr’s correspondents (1886) supplied the following names for lobster or

crayfish, but the two latter terms apply to only one kind (the yabbie) in the region

under review. Koonkideri A, Warren and Hogarth; koonkoodirri N, Paull;

kconkooderie N, Cornish; kurnkuderri D, Jacobs; kurukudirri (? error for kunkau-

dirri) A, Jacobs; kuniekundri D, Gason,; kidneykooderi Ya, Cornish. Buggila

JOU

Wk, Myles; boogah 2B, Suilivan; boagalli Wa, Crozier. Unde Kw. Anon.

Muracuru Wa, Crozier. Umpurra Wa, Dewhurst; thoombur Ku, Heagney ;

thernabun (?misspelt) Ke. Heagney. Thandoola Te, Sullivan and Eglinton.

Wolkoo Nu, Valentine. Nar raminyah Ya, Salmon. Thinta Te, Fouott. Kutera

Ma, Morton. Trunagi Ky, Machattie.

Other references are koonickoondie 1D, Gason 1879, 287 (same term used for

scorpion) ; koomta Ka, Wells 1894, 520. We received the term kunku-derri N, W,

at Pandi and were intormed that yabbies were always cooked before being eaten.

After cooking they were termed kunkuderri waina,

Spencer 1895, 60; ee 229, 244, referred to the presence of 4st “Opsis

bicarinatus Gliva-anima of the Aranda tribe = Cherar destructor) in waterholes

along the Finke, Macumba, ete., which drain into Lake Eyre, it Was much appre-

ciated as an article of food by the natives. Stirling (1896, 53) referred to rhe

relative edibility of the erayfish and the poe freshwater crab. The freshwater

eravlish (or crawfish) was termed by the Adelaide tribe kongula (Williams 1839;

1933, 60; Wyatt 1879; 1933, 30) or Somat (‘Veichemann and Schurmaun

1840; 1933, 108), Schiirmann (1844, 21) gave the same term, kunggullu, as the

abe: mngkala name for a craylish and a marine crab.

Parathelphusa transversa Martens, Freshwater crab—A small burrowing

species Gecurring ti streams and waterholes in the arid parts of Australia, and

capable of surviving through periods ot drought by living like the crayfish mn a

burrow a few feet below the suriace. It was ligured by Hale (Crustaceans of

S. Aust., 1, 1927, 154). Its use by the uatives on the Finke was reported by

Sehiize. Spencer (1896, 69; 18962, 229, 245) mentioned its Presid Hh the rivers

and creeks west and north-west of Lake Eyre. [t cecurs in the lower Diamantina,

where if is eaten raw: we reecived the term koranti N. Wy, for it. Berndt and

Vogelsang 1941, 5, reported jilaki Nj and kung-kutiri D as being a crab, but the

latter term is the same as that listed above as belor nging to the crayfish, Lorne

and Adsion’s reference (1924, 50) to treshwater arabe, six inches across and

eecupyving burrows containing cach a couple of gallons of water, must relate to

the crayfish, since the carapace of the crab is only an inch and a half in length.

The term “land crab” has been used in south-eastern Austratia, according to

Morris (Austral Enelish, 1698, 106). for the smallest kind of burrowing crayfish,

iingacus fosser, which las habits stnar to Parathelphusa and retains a small

quantity of water in the bottom of its burrow. The work of Smith and Schuster

(P2405. 1912, 144-127) and Miss Ellen Clark (Mem. Nat. Mus., Melhourne. 10,

1936, 37-54; 1; 1941, 37-40) has indicated that many species of lis and related

eonera oeewr in Australia. Mrs. Duncan-Kenyp (1933, 92) referred to holes

Formed by edible crabs and containing up to six quarts of clear water,

ARACT TEN TDA

scorpion—Rhunickoondie D, Gascon 1879, 287% (same term used for craytish) ;

katninunit D, Gatti 1930, 118. The habit of the local scorpion along Strzelecki

Creek was referred to by Waite (in Lea 1917,490). Mr. H. Womersiev informed

me that the species collected by Waite was Urodac us sp. Wattarna Pa, Schiir-

mam 1844, 17,

“Tarantula” spider—Murunkura D, Gason 1879, 287; — 1), Gatti 1903. 120.

Mr. Wormersley informed me that the so-called tarantulas of the Far North of

this State were Sparassidae, almost certainly species of Jsopeda. game (1917,

485) recorded three, f. doforosa, hiorni and gloriosa, collected by Waite ae rine thie

Fae {Expedition to the Cooper’s Creek. Hogg (Horn Exp. Rep. Zool Hp

340-342) recorded several species of the genus as having been taken ried el]

Coddnadatin and the Macdonnell Ranges, chiefly near the former locality. Mr.

Vogelsang informed me the Dieri term meant crawling, a crawling creature; mara

301

— hand, nkura = leg, referring to the use of both by a child when crawling.

Berndt and Vogelsang (1941, 9) reported that a trapdoor spider from the

adjuri territory was arambura, and marankara D, was stated to be the black

spider, but T. Vogelsang informed ce recently that the latter Dieri name was

sometinies used as a general term for spider but was more usually applied to the

trapdoor spider, ic., Gason’s “tarantula.” Schirmann (1844, 14) reported kara

Pa asa “tarantula” and kara yalga Pa, as a cobweb.

Latredectus hasselti, Black spider (‘red backed’ )—Gason 1879, 287,

reported that the “black spider” was kooniekounierilla, D. Rainbow (1°17, 485)

recorded it from Cooper’s Creek, and Logg (Horn Report, 2, 1896, 322. as

L. seclio) from the Maedonnell Ranges. Berndt and Vogclsang ( 1941, 9) reported

that spider web was waku-ngungura and that the black spider was waku Nj, and

marankara 1); but the latter was applied by Gason to a trap-door spider. We

received the name murra-ngura N. W, for Letradecinus at Pandi, where its bite

was stated to cause pain lasting all day. Perhaps mutta-na Ka, Wells (1894, 521).

a spider, may refer to the same species. Mrs. Duncan-Kemp (p. 270) reported

that the aborigines in her district applied a warmed poultice of mashed vine leaves

in cases of bites by this spider. T. Vogelsang mformed me that the red-backed

spider, kapara of the Diert, also ca led kana-jeri, .c., man-like, was connected with

some evil spirit. Children, especially the younger ones, were warned not to

touch it or tease it, otherwise the asseciated evil spirit might cause carious Torms

of dich and skin diseases or even death, and might poison edible plants and grubs,

or even the water, and thus bring abour starvation of the natives as well as bird life.

Other spiders—Pitchula D, Gason 1879, 287; pitjila D, T. Vogclsang, so

named because it lives under bark; pitji = bark, la = from: the same term was

applied to a gecko. Mutta-na a, Wells 1894, 521. Note DIX, a rather large.

grey-brown trapdoor spider with a pinkish tinge, a burrower in the sand-

hills. where it was preyed on hy goannas (karapara), Dunean-Kemp 1933,

62, ‘This spider is probably the same as that recorded by Roth (1897, 35, 5) as

ko-po of the Pittapitta, and kurra of the aranya tribe.

itel-—-\Wittcha D, Gason 1879, 282-283. A papular eruption which was

extremely irritating and very contag:ous, and made its appearance cach year, was

attributed by Gason to the general want of cl canliness and the presence oF so many

iiangy dogs. There is no eviderice to indicate whet!

her it was an impetigo or was

due to scabies. The former is much more probable and may be accentuated by

some seasonal dietary deficiency.

Mvyriaropa

Centipede—Thinga-thinga Ya, Salmon 1886, 24. Thiltharie D, Gason 1879,

287, a species reaching seven inches in length. Mr. Womersley suggests that this

may be Scolopendra subspiripes Leach, which is common in the drier parts of this

State. Jlale and Tindale (1925, 58) reported that all centipedes were termed

wange jer: by the Wailpi.

INSECTA

ORTIOPPERA

Grasshoppers—General term: pindrie D, Gason 1879, 287; wichirtka Wop,

Tlale and ‘Vindale 1925, 58; pitji-ilki Nj, pindri D, wichirika Wp, Berndt and

Vogelsang 1941, 6; nindabarrie Pa. Schtirmann 1844 (MS). Waite (1917, 418)

referred to two unusual locusts (Braelvtettir, igured by Lea 1917, pl. xxxiu,

fig. 1-3; and Eremobia) obtained in the Cooper's Creek region.

Thoradia mclanoptera, Mantis—-\Wulungara Wop, Hale and Tindale 1925, 58.

Mantis (pindie, mootna DK) are roasted on hot stones and eaten. Duncan-Kemp

1933, 61. Howitt 1891, 39, reported wadnamara An, insect, as a totem; wadna =

digging stick, mara == hand, so perhaps the insect may have been a mantis

302

(because of its stick-like raptorial limbs) or a cricket because of its digging feet.

In 1904, 92, he recorded wonamara W, as a caterpillar.

Cockroach—Irebilye Pa, Schtirmann 1844, 8.

ODONATA

Dragonfly—General term, witt witu Wp, Hale and Vindale 1925, 58; kuyur-

kuru Da, same term for stick and hornet. Schtirmann 1844, 24.

ANOPLURA and MALLOPHAGA

Pediculus humanus. Uouse-—~Pir-di Ka, Wells 1894, 521; this seems to be

the same term as that (purdie) given by Gason for a grub, Kudlu Pa, Schtr-

mann 1844, 18; kooleo Pa, Beddome 1886, 133; gudlu Nj, kata D, Berndt and

Vogelsang 1941, 7. Kata N, W (head and body lice) ; this term was obtained by

us at Pandi. Strehlow 1908, 67, recorded kulu (Loritja) and ita, itja (Aranda)

as terms for louse. We obtained the names kulu (Yankundjajara) and chita

(Pitjandjara) in the Musgrave Ranges. Kata D, Fry 1937, 198. Kutta 1), lice

ar vermin, Gason 1879, 299. Kuttanylpa D, lice or nits (presumably P. friemasus),

Gason 1879, 299; nulkunya Pa, nits or lice, Schtirmann 184+, 40,

Phthirius pubis, Pubic louse—The terms witja N, and i-da (ceda) W, were

obtained by us at Pandi.

Mallophaga on birds—Paia witja N, W (paia = bird), was the name given

at Pandi. Kurra D, Gason 1879, 299, vermin on animals. \Warulkati kata 1, emu

louse, Fry 1937, 198.

Itch, due to insects—Witja N, W, at Pandi; same word as Gason’s wittcha D.

HeEeMIPTERA

Cicada—Waldamburri Wp, Ifale and Tindale 1925, 58; wutninmera <A,

Spencer aud Gillen 1899, 60, 114 (totem).

Lerp (Psyllid) from Encalvptis oleosa, edible, owaree (au-ari) Wp, Cleland

and Johnston 1939, 176; the species was probably Spondvliaspis cucalypti Dobson.

Schtirmann (1844, 76) reported that worta pala was a “small obnoxious

insect” (worta = stump or stem); in view of the scanty information, it is not

possible to suggest any identification, unless it be some kind of plant bug,

COLEOPTERA

Pan beetle—Howitt (1904, 91) called the species Helaeus perforatus. ‘Vhis

Tenebrionid was reported by [lowitt (1904) as a totem animal. dokubirabira D

(p. 91), Yu (92), N (94). Ya (95). and amongst tribes north-easterly, and

easterly from Lake Perigundi along the Cooper (96). Helacus perforatus Latr.

is the type of the genus and was described from King George’s Sound, Western

Austraha, according to Masters (P.L.s., N.S.W., 11, 1886, 324). Macleay did

not mention it but stated that most known species occurred in Western, South and

Central Australia and were generally inhabitants of the dry, barren plains of the

far interior (PALS. N.SAV., 12, 1887, 514). Blackburn (Trans. Roy. Soc.

‘S. Aust., 23, (1), 1899, 35-41) referred to the various specics, including 7. per-

foratus and H, intertoris Macleay, the latter from Central Australia and from the

Darling River. Carter (P.L.S., N.S.AV., 35, 1910, 90), whose material was col-

lected at Perth, mentioned the distinguishing characters of H. perforatus. T.ea

(1917) referred to many species of the genus but mentioned only one.

H, interioris (p. 379, pl. xxxvi, fig. 79), as having been collected in the area by

the South Australian Museum Expedition, but the locality was not stated. Black-

burn (Horn. Exp. Rep., 2, 1896, 275) mentioned two species from the Finke

303

region, but neither of the two referred to above is included. It is almost certain

that Ilowitt?s dokubirabira was J/elaeus interioris, Pullipullilbi Pa, beetle,

pulli = fat, Schitirmann 1844, 60.

Coleopterous larvae—Many of these, more especially those of Iongicorns and

the larger buprestids, are caten. The various references usually do not distinguish

between larvae of beetles and of Tepidoptera; they have been collected into a later

part of this paper.

LEviInOPTERA

White butterfly, Delias aganippe ; arlevilivili Wp, Hale and Tindale 1925, 58.

Butterfly, kala-pinka-pinka N, W, term obtained at Pandi; pilyilye Pa,

Schtirmann 1844, 56.

Hawkmoth, Deilephila livornica, wulga Wp, Hale and Tindale 1925, 58.

Moth, mi-atta Ka, Wells 1894, 521.

Teara contraria, Bag moth— Caterpillar web, pang-a yakuta N, W, term

obtained at Pandi; yakuta N, W == bag. Yet-an-na Ka, Wells 1894, 519, = bag.

‘The common presence of the conspicuous webs or “bags” of this moth on the

twigs of Eucalyptus microtheca, Acacia spp, Cassia spp, but rarely on Eucalyptus

rostrata, was referred to by Spencer (Horn Exp, 1896, 44-46), who published an

illustration. We obtained the term wang-ga at Ooldea.

; HyMmENGPTERA

Native bee, stingless (? Trigona spp.), mit}ji-mitji Nj, muntju-rantju D, both

terms also applied to blowfly, muntju = fly, Berndt and Vogelsang 1941, 4.

Teulon (in Curr 1886, 206) mentioned a method used by the Barkinkji

(Darling River tribe) for tracking native bees (tintee-noora), Having caught a

bee which had settled, a tiny piece of down was attached to its back by using the

milky juice of a plant (Euphorbiaccae), and thus the insect would have its flight

retarded and would also be more easily seen by the pursuing native in search

of honey.

“Hornet,” kuyurkuru Pa, Schtirmann 1844, 24; same word for dragonfly or

stick, kuyuruku = slender,

Iridomyrmex spp. Pissant, urine ant—Wipa, ngari Wp, Hale and Tindale

1925, 58: kumburunye Pa, kumbu = urine, Schiirmann 1844, 20; moonnee,

Teulon 1886, 193.

Myrmecia forficata, Bulldog ant--Aldu Wp, Hale and Tindale 1925, 58;

ardu Nj, aldu Wp, Berndt and Vogelsang 1941, 4.

Black ant (? Camponolus spp.)—-Wipa Nj, mirka D, wipa Wp, Berndt and

Vogelsang 1941, 4; wipa Pa, ant, eddome 1886, 133; wipa Pa, Schiirmann 1844,

73: mirrka D, Gason 1879, 300; kadio Pa, a large black species, lion ant, Schtir-

mann 1844, 9 [probably intended for “ant lion” ({Teuroptera) |.

Other ants—Schiirmann (1844, 16) reported the following terms: Karrul-

yuru Pa; mita Pa, a species whose grubs are eaten (33); manya, mito pulyo

Pa, ant grub (27); bokalla, bokalla wipa Pa (3); kuyanna, “male grub” of the

mita ant, which is not edible and is separated from the female, bidlyo, by winnow-

ing (pp. 2, 24)-—this is probably the species of ant referred to in later paragraphs.

Berndt and Vogelsang (1941) mentioned the following: green ant |? Chalco-

ponera sp.], muni Nj; winged ant, wipa Nj, katjirin D; winged ant-hole, wipa-junta

Nj, wipa-wadlju Nj, karjiviri-minka D (minka D, wadlju Nj = hole). Stirling

and Waite 1919, 117, toa 22, W, indicated pijara as an ant-hill. Ant, paridan Wo;

ant path, paridi kadi Wo (adi = path or way), Jlowitt 1904, 792. Merri-ka Ka,

Wells 1894, 519 [same term as mirka]. Teeta, Duncan-Kemp 1933, 202; leaves

304

of a creeping plant (which Johnston and Cleland 1943, 171, suggested might be

Centipeda Cunnnghamti or a Chenopodium, 1941, 4) were placed around camps

to drive off these little black ants; the term naiari was applied to these ants, as

well as to Moloch horridus which feeds on them (p. 64).

Mrs. Duncan-Kemp (p. 117) also mentioned that native women collected

seed-food (munta) from ant nests. We observed a similar method at Macdonald

Downs, Central Australia. Wheeler described a harvesting ant, Monomorium

(Holcomyrmex) whitei from the Musgrave Ranges, and illustrated its “nests”

(Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust., 39, 115, 807,pl. Ixv). Schiirmann (1846; 1879, 214)

reported that large white grubs found sparingly in ant hills about September along

with the very numerous small red insects were eaten by the Pangkala after having

been sorted out by placing the mass (containing earth and insects) on a large piece

of bark (yuta) about 4 feet long and 8 to 10 inches wide. The material was thrown

up repeatedly and caught in the yuta, which was held in such a way that the

heaviest portion became sorted out towards one end, the lightest towards the other,

and the grubs in the middle part. These living grubs were then wrapped in a clean

dry grass and chewed and sucked until all nutriment was abstracted.

Cudmore (1894, 525) referred to a small horde which lived in the mallee

near Popiltah Lake, close to the border between South Australia and New South

Wales and just north of the Murray. This horde ate cats, presumably feral, and

black scrub kangaroos (Macropus melanops) but not rabbits. They also were

very fond of “white ants (or ants’ eges),” using a koolamon or sheet of bark about

2 feet long and 6 to 8 inches wide as a’ kind of sieve for shaking the ants.out from

the earth; the insects were then slightly roasted by placing the koolamon on the

hot ashes. Tindale (1941, 81) mentioned this small group of natives/as the Nanja

horde (Cudmore had stated that its leader was Nonnia) of the Maraura tribe,

which he stated had become extinct.

The two accounts do not quite agrce and there could be some doubt whether

the insects were termites or true ants. Mr. Womersley suggests that they are more

likely to be true ants, the white organisms being the puparia, Taken in conjunc-

tion with Schurmann’s remarks (1844, 2, 24) earlier in this section, it is practi-

cally certain that they all relate to the same kind of atit.

Melophorus inflatus. Honey ant—Iloney used by natives in mulga country

and commonly called “sugar bag” and ‘wild honey” (not to be confused with that

from native bees, Trigona spp., though the same term, according to Mrs. Duncan-

Kemp 1933, 96, is applied to both). Eerumba teeta DK, Duncan-Kemp 1933, 259,

teeta —= ant; nest described; habits p. 260; this name resembles the Aranda term,

yarumpa, mentioned by Spencer and Gillen 1899, 186, 657. Judging from a remark

by Mrs. Duncan-Kemp (/.c., p. 116) nooroo, the “‘bliubber-like parasitic ant” from

the sandhills is probably the same species. he same author (p, 76) mentioned

that natives mixed ant-honey with diluted nectar from bauhinias and permitted

the mixture ta ferment for eight or ten days to produce a semi-intoxicant.

Froggait (Horn “xp. Report, 2, 1896, 385-392) published an account of the

Central Australian species (under the old name, Camponotus), and Spencer

(1896, 87-88) referred to them. Roth (1897, 93) mentioned other methods of

finding honey by the Pittapitta, and stated that green ants were eaten by the

Mittakoodi.

DIPTERA

Mosquito—Curr’s correspondents (1886) supplied the following terms:

Kunnutyully Pa. Le Souef and Holden; ooinya A, Todd; ueni A, Warren and

Hogarth; kooinyee N, Paull; yoowinya N, Cornish. Koontee Ma, Morton; koonti

Wa, Crozicr; kunthi Kw, Anon; kondie Ma, Reid; koontie N, Paull —- D, Gason;

kunti D, Jacobs —- Ya, Cornish — Wa, Dewhurst; koonti Ya, Salmon; gunte Ky,

Machattie; coontee Wp, Phillipson; oontee Wp, Wills; oondee Wp, Phillipson.

305

Yoorie Wk, Myles; euric Te, Sullivan and Eglinton. Coolie-coolie K, Kingsiill ;

gooley-gooley Pa, Green; gooleyrr Ja, Green; volile Wp, Gason. Oonawilli B,

Sullivan; noonarully Te, Foott. Koioloro Pa, Beddome, Teepa A, Warren.

Tudinna A, Jacobs. Pirtipypu W?, Jacobs. Moorvonga Pp, Eglinton. Noka Kg.

Ku, Heagney; naka Bi, Curr. Nowwine Nu, Valentine; yuwunu Pa, Le Souef

and Holden.

Other references are koontie D, Gason 1879, 287; koonti Ka, Wells 1894,

521; kunnu-tyullu Pa, Schirmann 1844, 21. We received the names, kunti N,

and winje W, at Pandi.

Horne and Aiston (1924, 9-10) referred to the abundance of mosquitoes in

the vicinity of the lagoon at Mungeranie where, according to tradition, a moora,

wandering over the earth, came and camped there. The insects were so vicious

that he scratched his forehead (mung) until it was sore and to avoid further

attacks, sank into the ground—hence the name Mungeranie.

Teulon (1886, 190) mentioned that the Barkindji tribe protected themselves

by smoking fires and by daubing their bodies with fish grease.

Sand fly. ? Culicoides sp.—Dittaboobaritchana D, Gason 1879, 287 ; kalalballa

Pa, Schiirmann 1844, 10. We were informed that it was called pitta-puparitji N,

W, at Pandi. Gason (p. 303) referred to punga D, a small fly, hardly discernible,

but capable of inflicting a sting as painful as that of a wasp.

Blow fly, probably Neopollenia stygia and Calliphora augur, Yappo Wp,

Green 1886, 126; mitji-mitji Nj, muntju-runtju D, Berndt and Vogelsang 1941, 4

(same term as for a native bee, muntju = fly). We obtained the names koonka-

murra N, and murra-multa W, at Pandi. It was termed duboora on Yorke’s

Peninsula (Ktihn 1886, 145).

Fly—The following terms must relate especially to the very common trouble-

some small black bush-fy, Musca vetustissima, though some closely allied, but less

common, species would be included. These flies invade the eyes, nose, ears and

mouth and readily attack human sores, faeces and food, and are almost certainly

responsible for transmission of various disease-producing organisms.

Curr’s correspondents (1886) recorded the following names: Ooringoorie N,

Cornish; oringore A, Todd; gooingerri Ky, Machattie; wingeroo Wi, Dix;

wingorlo Ma, Reid; ngurrinhurri A, Jacobs. Moonchoo Ya, Cornish, D, Gason;

muncho Wp, Phillipson D, Jacobs; moonchow N, Paull; moondyoo Ya, Salmon;

moonthooan Kg, Heagney; moonan Ku, Heagney — Bi, Curr. Mokinga Te,

Foott; mooginger ‘Te, Sullivan and Eglinton; mogundhoo Wk, Myles. Yoorgoori

A, Warren and Hogarth. Yapoo Wp, Gason; yappoo Wp, Phillipson [same term

recorded above for blow fly| ; papou Nu, Valentine; buppa Pa, Green. Dritji W?,

Jacobs. Girmun D, Jacobs. Thumpara K, Kingsmill; yoombara Pa, Sawers;

yumbera Pa, Beddome; yumbarra Pa, Le Souef and Holden. Ulberu Wa,

Crozier — Ma, Morton; ilburroo Wa, Dewhurst. Mooki Pp, Eglinton. Mongi

Kw, Anon. Teulon (1886,213) mentioned wing-oroo and mokay as names for

the “eye-fly,” Barkindji tribe; the insect is Musea vetustissima,

Other terms recorded for a fly are yapu Wp, Tale and Tindale 1925, 58;

moonchoo Ka, Wells 1894, 520 — D, Gason 1879, 300; muntju D, Berndt and

Vogelsang 1941, 4. We received the names muntju N, murri-murri W, for Musca

vetustissima at Pandi, and munku for it at Ooldea, Yumbarra Pa, “common fly”

Schtirman 1844, 86, must refer to the latter also.

It is of interest to note that Spencer and Gillen (1899, 648) referred to

churinga amunga as a stone churinga (sacred engraved stone or piece of wood)

of the fly (amunga; manga of Strehlow 1908, 67, Aranda) totem, used for curing

gore eyes. When we were in the Macdonnell Ranges in 1929 we received the term

amunga for Musca vetustissima, which infests the eyes of those suffering from

conjunctivitis.

306

“tlorsefly” (probably Tabanidae)-—-Kunti Pa; pindapinda, a large species,

Schtirmann 1844, 21, 57, pinda= slow. Dumboola Ktthn 1886, 145. Yorke’s

Peninsula.

Flesh-fly (f Sercophaga spp.)—Kadlarti Pa, flesh-fly, maggot, Schtirmann,

1844, 9, kadla = tail, Perhaps the term applics to various blow flies possessing a

long ovipositor.

Flies, ? Hippoboscidac—Oruithomyia sp. seen on a cockatoo were termed paia

pulka N, W (paia = bird).

SIPHONAPTERA

Flea (human, presumably Pulea irritans)—Yelbi Pa, Schtirmann 1844, 83,

“natives declared that the Heas were an importation by the whites.” Koonka-

murra N, W, the same term as that given for a blow fly, was received by us at

Pandi as the name applied to a flea whether from man or some other mammal.

Teichelmann and Schtirmann (1933, 106) reported that the INaurna called the

[human] flea pindi kudlo (.e., European louse), the Adclaide natives maintaining

that the flea was introduced by the whites.

The Pitjandjara and Yankundajara natives in the Musgrave Ranges gave us

tildi as the term for flea; we observed Ctenocephalus canis and Echidnophaga

myrmecobit (a native species ) on dogs and rabbits there, and the latter on an

aborigine, i +5

Insect LARVAE

Many grubs or caterpillars are eaten, especially those from the larger moths

and beetles. Certain galls are also edible, e.g., mulga “apples” (Howitt 1904, 791,

Wo); the gall (cobboboo D) found on the boxtree, Eucalyptus mucratheca, (Gason

1879, 288).

The term witjcti or witchetty (Spencer and Gillen 1899, 423) is used widely

amongst whites for edible grubs. The native seems to have a special name for

each kind, as was indicated by Strehlow (1908). Tlale and Tindale (1925, 48)

stated that the Wailpi recognised three kinds of edible larvae—caterpillars of a

large moth, Aweutes, were obtained from the roots of the red gum (wera),

Eucalyptus rostrata; while larvae of different kinds of longicorn beetles were found

in the sapwood of the main trunk and upper branches. “They mentioned the name

verti Wp, and stated the Wailpi called Mount Padawurta Vertt warta and that

Padawurta was obviously a corruption of the term (p. 57), There is another

explanation, pa-di is a common term in the Eyrean region for grub and is the

same as ba-ti (given by Berndt and Vogelsang 1941, 6, as the Neadjuri word) or

bardee (ba-di) of the natives of the Adelaide plains (Teichelmann and Schiir-

mann 1933, 95); wurta means root or base of a trunk, or the thick end (Gason

1879, 306), ¢e.g., tidna wurta — thick end of a foot, t¢., the heel. WVerti warta

aud Padiwurta are thus two terms having the same meaning and appareritly re-

ferring to the grub-like shape of the peak. This edible grub, wai-api Wp, from

the roots of the red gum, was inentioned by Cleland and Johnston 1939, 176, but

the same term: (wyappi, yai-appi) was also obtained for seeds of trees (vappi =

fruit).

Other references are padi D, bulkara bati Ng, grubs from sandalwood, Berndt

and Vogelsang 1941, 6; mool-yi Ka, Wells 1894, °520; wakaree Ka, an edible grub

irom trees, Wells 1894, 517; purdie [pa-di] G, ¢ Jason 1879, 287, 303; paddi D,

Eylmann 1908, 167;; padi D, totem, ou itt 1891, 1388; jadna Nj, kali-bili-bili,

panga TD, Berndt and Vogelsang 1941, 3; kuy akinka D, grubs from gum trees,

M. Howitt 1902, 407 ; witchetty. grubs, pander Kemp 1933, 261. Johnston and

Cleland (1943, 154) mentioned that a striped edible grub (padi D, W) occurred

in the roots of Cassia. Mrs. Duncan-Kemp stated that parootra boonti was a small

white edible grub from the wild broombush [probably also a Cassia = boonti].

307

Howitt (1904) mentioned several names, all totemic: muluru (witchetty of

Spencer and Gillen) D (p, 91, 799), Ya (95); padi T (800), Wo (95) ; padinguru

Yu (92); paringoro Kd, small grubs from trees (97); wonamara W (92), A

(94) ; maruwali N (94) ; miri-miri, a maggot, T (800) ; ngampuru Yu (92), The

last-named was called a fish, Ya totem (p. 95); one of these must be an error.

Probably the latter is correct, since namba was called a bone-fish, Wilya tribe

(p. 98), and paru = fish. Padi D, Fry 1937, 204, grub from grass, is dried and

crushed or ground to a powder, this “grub flour” being termed paditurara. Schur-

mann (1844) reported the [following Pangkala names: batta, a kind of grub

(p. 2); kullilli, edible grub, of which four kinds were named, kulll numma,

kullilli patia, kullilli yako and kullilli yulko (p. 20); manna, a ground grub (36) ;

parti, grub, caterpillar (54) [same term, barti, bati, padi, used by tribes to the east

and north-east}.

MOLLUSCA

CEPHALOPODA

Nautilus (so called)—Dirra Pa, Schitrmann 1844, 57; same term for moon

and shell, probably because of the co‘our. The shell of the local paper nautilus,

Argonanta nodosa, is sometimes washed ashore on South Australian beaches, and

has been illustrated by Cotton, Handbook Mollusca $. Austr., 2, 1940, 464, fig. 450.

Cuttle fish—Yayardlu Pa, Schiirmann 1844, 83. Cotton (loc, cit.) has illus-

trated the gladius of the various species of Sepia recorded as occurring in South

Australian waters.

GASTROPODA

“Periwinkle” (from the Georgina, South of Bedourie), accishan Ky, Duncan-

Kemp 1933, 45. Probably specics of operetlate gastropods, Byihinella (Nato-

pala) or perhaps Plotiopsis, since the animals were stated to be snail-like, but with

a hard reddish flap over the front. Bithvnia australis and Melania balonnensis

(= Plotiopsis bal.), widely distributed Australian species, were collected by the

Lorn [xpedition (Tate 1896).

PELECYPODA

Centralhvria stuarti, Freshwater musscl—Usually termed Caio stuarti;

widely distributed in Central Austraia; much appreciated as food by the abori-

gines. Ioorie D, Gason 1879, 287, 289; kuri 1, Howitt 1904; koori Wa, Wells

1894, 521: kuri D, T, Stirling and Waite 1919, toa 38, 175, 201. Stones used for

cracking shell foad were called yerndoo DK (Duncan-Kemp 1933 48). Kuri D,

Fry 1937, 201, a flat piece of pearl shell [probably Melo or Meleagrina].

The shell may be pierced and polished and attached by means of a string

(spun from human hair) to the end of the beard, or suspended from the neck

(Gason 1879, 289) as an ornament. <t is also used to inaugurate the Diert circum-

cision ceremony (Gason, Le., 286; Howitt 1891, 72; 1904, 656), when the shell is

suspended around the neck of the one to be operated on. Such a shell was termed

coorictoorooka or kuri-turuka by the Wonkanguru (Tlorne and Aiston 1924, 47,

159). Instead of the local mussel, prepared pieces of marine shell, e.g., from the

pearl shell, Méeleagrina spp., or the large gastropod baler shell, Melo spp.

(Cymbium spp.), ate sometimes used. Horne and Aiston’s fig. 36 indicates part

of a baler shell. Spencer and Gillen (1899, 652) stated that such marine shells

were converted into magic articles, lonka-lonka of the Aranda. Howitt (1904,

714) mentioned seeing amongst the Yantruwunta, suspended from the neck, a

portion of a large univalve shell [? Jfe/o] said to have come from the north. It

is of interest to note that the great aboriginal trade route from north-western and

west-central Queensland to the Flinders Ranges passed through the Eyrean region,

Kopperamanna and Cowarie being very important trading centres before the white

occupation of the area. Along this route passed weapons, shiclds, stone axes, red

ochre, pitjuri and such shells as those of Melo and Meleagrina. Rerndt and Vogel-

308

sang (1941, 8) stated that pearl shell [ornament] was termed makil-a Nj and

kaldrati D,

Roth mentioned that Unio [C. stuarti] was a very common article of diet and

recorded several names applied to it by the Western Queensland tribes, the Pitta-

pitta and Wonkajera calling it tooroolka and toorooka respectively. Sanger (1883)

mentioned the use of these mussels (4noden) as articles of diet by the Dieri.

Fraser (in Curr, 1886, 378) stated that mussel shells, as well as flints, were

used (by the Biria tribe) as cutting implements. Machattie (1886, 367) reported

that these shells were utilised by the Karanya for scarring the arms and shoulders.

They were used by Eyrean tribes for scraping rushes [Cyperus spp.] to obtain

fibre for making rush string and nets (Horne and Aiston 1924, 62),

Gason (1879, 296) reported that the Dieri called the rainbow koorickirra;

kurikirra D, Gatti 1930, 101; no doubt because of the similarity to the iridescence

of the inner surface of the mussel shell (kirra = boomerang or curved object).

Berndt and Vogelsang (1941, 8) used the same Dieri term, kuri-kir-a, the Ngaduri

eyuivalent being guring-i and the Wailpi, wuranyi,

Ostrea angasi, Oyster—Yallarta Pa, Schiirmann 1844, 78. The name ts

obviously the same as Yalata, the township at Fowler’s Bay. It was stated by me

that that name was the native term for a mollusc resembling an oyster and occurring

abundantly as a fossil near the original homestead of Yalata, and that the term

probably applied to the cockle, Arca trapesia, which Tate recorded as a common

Tertiary fossil there (Johnston, Proc. Roy. Georgr. Soc. S. Aust., 42, 1941, 41).

Since Ostrea occurs also in the South Australian Tertiary, my earlier statement

must be corrected to apply to Ostrea.

Unidentified molluses—Schtirmanun (1844) mentioned the following Pang-

kala names: markalla, a shell (p. 28); metullu, “a species of shell fish”; metullu

pirra, a kind of shell [probably a white shell, pirra = moon or shell] (p. 31);

ngarnkidi, a kind of shell used for peeling roots (p. 46); yultunna, shell

(p. 86); kundo birra, large shells, spoon (p. 20) [apparently a shell which

was used by whites as a ladle or spoon, e.g., a scallop or cockle], Wilhelmi

(1861, 171) reported that the Pangkala carried in their kangaroo-skin bags

(nurti) a small shell which served as a drinking vessel.

ANNULATA

Leech (Hirudinea)—Mulu Pa, Schtirmann 1844, 34. The species is probably

Limnobdella australis, which readily attacks human beings.

NEMATODA

Nematodes which were being collected from the stomachs of wallabies in the

Flinders Ranges were termed bodlilkalli by the Wailpi. The term probably applies

to worms generally.

PORIFERA

Sponges—Schiirmann (1844, 59, 82) recorded pulballa and yarruru as Pang-

kala names for sponges (probably marine). He also stated that munu (p. 36)

was a venomous marine animal often found dead on the sea beach; perhaps the

Seyphozoon Coelenterate, Charybdea sp., may have been the organism, as it is

capable of inflicting severe stings if its tentacles should come in contact with people

bathing or swimming. It occurs at times in numbers in the two gulfs and has

been known to injure people there. PAy'salia is a possibility, but Charybdea is

more likely to be the culprit.

LITERATURE List

Anonymous 1886 in Curr 1886, 173

Basepow, H, 1925 The Australian Aboriginal. Adelaide

Beppome, H. L. 1886, in Curr 1886, 132-135

309

Bernpt, R. M., and Vocersana, T. 1941 Trans. Roy. Soc. S$. Aust., 65, 3-10

Browne, J. H. 1897 Trans. Roy. Soc, 8. Aust., 21, (2), 72-73

CAwrnorne, W. A. 1858 The legend of the Kupirri or the red kangaroo, etc.

Adelaide

CAWTUORNE, W. A. ?date The legend of Kuperree or the red kangaroo.

Edit I

CueLAnp, J. B., and Jounsron, T. HI. 1936-1938 Jour. Trop. Med. Hyg..

1936, 104-105; 1938, 26-27

CLeLann, J. B., and Jounsron, T, H. 1939 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 63,

172-179

Cornisu, W. H. 1886 in Curr 1886, 22-23 ; 28-29

Crozter, H. 1886 in Curr 1886, 152-155

Cupmorg, A. F. 1894 Rep. Aust. Assoc. Adv. Sci., 5, (1893), 524-526

Curr, EF. M. 1886 The Australian Race, etc., 2, Melbourne

Curr, E. M. 1886 in Curr 1886, 165-172; 230-231; 232-233

Curr, E. 1886 in Curr 1886, 384-385; 371-373

DewnHurst, E, 1886 in Curr 1886, 156-157

Dix, W. J. L. 1886 in Curr 1886, 176-177

Duncan-Kemp, A. M. 1933 Our sandhill country, Sydney

EyLMANN, E. 1908 Dic Eingeborenen der Kolonie Stidaustralien. Berlin

Fenner, F. 1936 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 60, 46-54

Fintavson, H. H. 1927 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 51, 363-377

Finztayson, H. H. 1930 ibid., 54, 177-180

Finuayson, If. H. 1931 ibid., 55, 161-162

Frnzayson, H. H, 1932 ibid., 56, 148-167; 168-171

Frinrayson, H. H. 1933 ibid., 57, 195-202

Fintayson, H. H. 1935 tbid., 59, 227-236

Finnayson, H. IH. 1936 ibid., 60, 157-161

Frntayson, H. H. 19362 The Red Centre. Sydney

Frntayson, H. H. 1939 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 63, 88-118; 348-354

Finuayson, Il. H. 1940 ibid., 64, 125-136

Foort, T. W. 1886 in Curr 1886, 34-35

Fraser, — 1839 Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., July, 113-114

FRASER, — 1840 A.M.N.H., 5, 61-62

Fry, H. K. 1937 Folklore, 48, 187-206; 269-287

Gason, S. 1874 The Dieyerie Tribe of Australian Aborigines. Adelaide. Re-

published in 1879 and 1886

Gason, S. 1879 The Manners and Customs of the Dieyeri Tribe of Austra-

lian Aborigines. In Woods 1879, 253-307

Gason, S. 1886 in Curr 1886, 44-105; 106-107 ; 122-123

Gatti, G. 1930 La lingua Dieri. Roma

Gitten, F. J. 1896 Horn Sci. Exped. Rep., 4, 161-186

Green, W. M. 1886 in Curr 1886, 124-125; 126-129

Grecory, J. W, 1906 The Dead Heart of Australia. London

Tare, H. M., and Trnnare, N. B. 1925 Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 3, (1), 45-60

Hamary, W. 1). 1936 Primitive Elunters of Australia. Field Mus, Nat. Hist.,

Chicago. Anthrop. leaflet 32. 59 pp.

Heacney, J. 1886 in Curr 1886, 380-381; 382-383

finnms, R. 1896 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 16, (3), 237-386

Horne, G., and Aiston, G. 1924 Savage Life in Central Australia. J.ondon

Howirr, A. W. 1886 in Curr 1886, 30-31

Howitt. A. W. 1885 Australian Group Relations. In Smithsonian Report for

1883. 28 pp.

Howirt, A. W. 1891 Jour. Anthrop. Inst., 20, 30-104

Howirr, A. W. 1901 Rep. Aust. Assoc. Adv. Sci., 8, (1900), 291-297

310

Howirr, A. W. 1904 The Native Tribes of South-east Australia. J.ondon

Tlowirr, A. W., and Siegert, O, 1903 Rep. Aust. Assoc. Adv. Sci., 9, (1902),

525-532

Howitt, M. E. 1902 Folk Lore, 13, 403-417 (also comments by Siebert)

IREDALE, T., and Troucuton, FE. 1934 A Check-list of the Mammals recorded

from Australia, Aust. Mus. Mem., 6, 122 pp.

Jacons, FE. 1886 in Curr 1886, 12-13; 14-15; 108-109

Jostnston, T. TL, and CLeLann, J. B. 1943 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 67, 149-173

Jonxs, F. Woon 1923-1925 The Mammals of South Australia, 1, 1923; 2, 1924;

3, 1925. Adelaide

Kancroryx, J, R. 1929 Snakes of Australia. Sydney

KinasMizy, J. W. 1886 in Curr 1886, 118-121

Kets, W. 1886 in Curr 1886, 143-147

Lea, A. M. 1917 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 41, 449-630

Le Brun, S. 1886 in Curr 1886, 140-142

le Sover, A. S., and Burreti, MW. 1926 Wild Animals of Australia. London

Le Souer, A. S., and Hotpex, R. W. 1886 in Curr 1886, 8-9

Lucas, A. H., and Frosr, C. 1896 Horn Sci. Exped. Rep., 2, 112-151

Macuartir, J. O., and Lirrve, J. S. 1886 in Curr 1886, 366-369

McLennan, A. 1886 in Curr 1886, 232-233

Matiew, J. 1899 Eaglehawk and Crow. London

Meyer, H. A. 1843) Vocabulary of a Language Spoken by the Aborigines ....

in the vicinity of Encounter Bay, etc. Adelaide

Mever, H. A. 1846 Manners and Customs of the Aborigines of the Encounter

jay Tribe. Adelaide

Meyer, H. A. 1879 in Woods 1879, 183-206. Same as Meyer 1846

Moortousr, M. 1846 A Vocabulary .... of the Murray River Language spoken

hy Natives of South Australia. ... Adelaide. Reprinted in Parkhouse

1935, 2, 1-47. Also some extracts in Curr 1886, 274-277

Morean, A.M. 1930 S, Aust. Ornithologist, 10, (8), 263

Morton, A. W. 1886 in Curr 1886, 158-161

Mytes, F. W. 886 in Curr 1886, 36-41

Parxuousse, PT. A. 1933-1935 Reprints and Papers relating to the Autochthones

of Australia, 1, 1933; 2, 1935. Adelaide. Reprint of Wyatt, pp. 16-56;

Williams, 57-70; Teichelmann and Schiirmann, 71-174; and of Moor-

house, 2, 1-47

Pact, W. f. 1866 in Curr 1886, 18-21

Pitittipson, N. FE. 1886 in Curr 1886, 112-115

Rarsaow, W. J. 1917 Trans. Roy. See. S. Aust., 41, 482-489

Retp, J. A. 1886 in Curr 1886, 178-181

Rorm, W. Ef. 1897 [Ethnological Studies amongst the North-west-central Queens-

land Aborigines, Brisbane

Roti, W. Te. 1901 Food, Search, Capture and Preparation, Bull. 3, North Old,

Ethnography. Brisbane

SanmMon, H.G. 1886 in Curr 1886, 24-27

Sancrr, FEF. B. 1883 American Naturalist, 17

Sawers, A. D. 1886 in Curr 1886, 130-132

ScitrmMann, C. W. 1844 A Vocabulary of the Parnkalla Language, ete. Ade-

laide. The Public Library, Adclaide, has a copy with MS additions by

Schurmann

SCHURMANN, CC. W. 1846 The Abariginal Tribes of Port Lincoln, ete. Ade-

laide. Republished in Woods 1879, 207-251

SPENCER, W. B. 1896 Horn Sci. Exp. Rep., 1, 1-136

Spencer, W. B. 1896a /bid., 2, 1-52; 152-175; 227-248

Spencer, W. L.. and Gitten, I’. J. 1899 The Native Tribes of Central Aus-

tralia. Jondon

311

Stirtinc, E. 1896 Horn Sci. Exp. Rep., 4, 1-160

Strr_inG, E., and Waite, E.R. 1919 Ree. S. Aust. Mus., 1, (2), 105-155

Srrentow, C. 1908 Die Aranda und Loritja-stamme in Zentral Australien.

Veroff. Stadt. Voélker-Mus., Frankfurt, 1, (2), 84 pp.

Surrivax, A. F. 1886 in Curr 1886, 42-43

Sutrivan, A. F., and Eorrnron, FE, 1886 in Curr 1886, 32-35

Taptin, G. 1874 The Narrinyerri, etc. Adelaide, Second Edit., 1878; Repub-

lished in Woods, 1879, 1-156

TeicHELMANN, C. G, and ScHtrmann, C. W. 1840 Outlines of a Grammar,

Vocabulary .... of the Aboriginal Language .... around Adelaide. Re-

printed in Parkhouse 1933, 71-174

Teuton, G. N. 1886 in Curr 1886, 186-223

Tinpare, N. B. 1940 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 64, 140-231

TinpaLte, N. B. 1941 Proc. R. Geog. Soc. 3. Aust., 42, 66-161

Topp, A. 1886 in Curr 1886, 10-11]

Troucuton, E. 1932 Aust. Zool., 7, (3), 219-236

Troccuton, FE. 1941 Furred Animais of Australia. Sydney

VALENTINE, J. C. 1886 in Curr 1886, 1386-139

Waire,.. R. 1917 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 41, 405-424 ; 429-440

Warts, FE. R. 1929 The Reptiles and Amphibians of South Australia. Adelaide

Warren, |. 1886 in Curr 1886, 110-112

Warren, J., and Hocarru, J. 1886 in Curr 1886, 16-17

Wetts, FH. 1894 Rep. Aust. Assoc. Adv. Sci., 5, (1893), 515-522

Wure, S.A. 1917 Trans. Roy. Sce. S. Aust., 41, 441-405

Witnetwsr, C. 1861 Trans. Roy. Soe. Viet., 5, (1860), 164-203

Wirwetmr, C, 1862 Manners and Customs of the Australian Natives, ete.,

43 pp. Melbourne. Same as 1861, and is essentially a republication of

Schitirmann 1846

Wirtrams, W. 1839 A Vocabulary of the Language of the Aborigines of the

Adelaide District, etc. Adelaide. Republished in Parkhouse, 1933, 57-70

Witrs, C, 1886 in Curr 1886, 186-187 ,

Woops, J. D. 1879 The Native Tribes of South Australia (Edited by Woods).

Adelaide. Includes Wyatt 1879; and republication of Taplin 1878;

Meyer 1846; Schtirmann 1846; and Gason 1874

Wryarr, W. 1879 Some account of the Manners... . of the Adelaide and En-

counter Bay Tribes... . In Woods 1879, 157-181; and in Parkhouse

1933, 16-56 |

Zrerz, F.R. 1917 Trans. Rov. Soc. S. Aust., 41, 469-472

THE AUSTRALIAN HOMOCLIME OF THE

ZONE OF NATURAL OCCURRENCE OF PARTHENIUM ARGENTATUM

By J. A. PRESCOTT, Waite Agricultural Research Institute

Summary

The desert plant guayule, Parthenium argentatum is a native of Mexico and of the "Big Bend"

country of Texas. From time to time it has become important as a source of rubber, and for some

years efforts have been made in the United States to grow the plant under cultivation, and

plantations have been established, particularly in California.

312

THE AUSTRALIAN HOMOCLIME OF THE

ZONE OF NATURAL OCCURRENCE OF PARTHENIUM ARGENTATUM

By J. A. Prescorr, Waite Agricultural Research Institute

| Presented 9 September 1943]

The desert plant guayule, Parthenium argentatum, is a native of Mexico and

of the “Big Bend” country of Texas. From time to time it has become important

as a source of rubber, aud for some years efforts have been made in the United

States to grow the plant under cultivation, and plantations have been established,

particularly in California.

The plant is a perennial shrub, native of a semi-arid region with a rainfall

of the order of 15 inches. Its edaphic requirements are relatively restricted to

well-drained localities. In view of the fact that Australia probably possesses

climatic zones parallel to both the natural habitat and the localities of ‘cultivation,

it has been thought of interest to attempt an assessment of the Australian regions

where climatic conditions similar to those of the natural habitat were likely to be

encountered. The main sources of information about the geographical distribu-

tion of guayule are to be found in Lloyd’s account for the Carnegie Institution of

Washington (1911) and in the accounts of the Russian workers Bukasoy (1930)

and Pissarev (1930). According to the Russian botanical expedition of 1925-

1926, the plant is found in the northern part of the State of San Luis Potosi,

together with the adjacent districts of the States of Coahuila and Nuevo Leon

and the eastern part of Durango, Lloyd gives in some detail the periphery of the

area concerned, and Pissarey gives a map which agrees broadly with the informa-

tion supplied by Lloyd. Lloyd suggests that 10 per cent. only of the area outlined

may actually carry guayule. The plant occurs over an altitude range of from 3,000

to 6,000 feet and rarely up to 7,000 feet. The lower altitudes occur at the northern

extremity of the zone in Texas and the higher altitudes on the Tropic of Cancer.

This association of increasing altitude with approach to the equator results in a

relatively narrow temperature range, With respect to detailed climatic informa-

tion, only for the Texan stations at the northern limit of the habitat are details

available (U.S. Yearbook of Agriculture, 1941). For the Mexican habitat the

Harvard climatic maps of North America (1936) are the most suitable. Informa-

tion regarding the soils of Mexico by Rodriguez and Brambila (1937), affords

some guide to the environment in so far as the major soil groups mapped are

related to climatic conditions.

Additional information of some considerable value is that given by Lloyd on

the plant communities to which guayule belongs. Lloyd describes the associations

which are dominated by guayule, and certain species of prickly pear are mentioned.

In view of the climatic studies on the spread of prickly pear in Australia

by Johnston (1924), the association of Opuntia megalarihra, O. Stenopetala,

O. microdasys and O, imbricata with Partheniuim argentatuim may afford a useful

guide to the probable Australian homoclime of its natural habitat. Of these.

Opuntia mucrodasys is stated by Johnston to be rather common in parts of the

Pilliga district of New South Wales. Dodd (1940) reports that a small patch at

Cuttabri was destroyed some years ago. O. imbricata, which also occurs in Aus-

tralia, has a wider geographical range than O. microdasys, and is therefore rather

less useful as an indicator plant,

In discussing the climatic requirements of a given species of plant it is neces-

sary to take into account temperature as well as rainfall factors, and in the follow-

ing analysis use has been made of the periodic constants of the temperature:

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 67, (2), 30 November 1943

313

annual mean, phase and amplitude as recently outlined (Prescott, 1943). For the

main zone, values for two only of these—mean temperature and ampltude—were

available, but for at least one locality in Texas, Fort Stockton, a full analysis was

possible. The rainfall regime is one of summer maximum with a very dry winter.

ft can be expected that guayule will grow in summer and be dormant in winter

in its native habitat.

Fig. 1 Maps of the climatic conditions in the zone of ‘natural occurrence of

Parthenium argentatum in the United States and Mexico. The vertical shading indicates

the area according to Lloyd, the horizontal shading according to Pissarev.

1 Annual rainfall, in inches.

2 July rainfall, in inches.

3 Mean annual temperature (°F).

4 Amplitude of temperature, calculated as half the range.

The data are taken from the Harvard Climatic Maps of North America.

The essential data on which the present analysis is based are given in a group

of six maps presented in fig. 1 and 2.

A more detailed examination of the rainfall data, given by the Harvard maps

for alternate months, indicates that along the eastern margin rather more than

70 per cent. of the rain falls in the summer and autumn months of June to

November, with probably as much as 90 per cent. falling in this period along the

western margin, ‘Uhe total annual rainfall has a range of from 10 to 20 inches.

The ratios of rainfall to saturation deficit calculated for the mid-summer

month July indicate conditions of a semi-arid nature. In Australia a ratio of

5 marks the approximate limit of arid conditions for any given month (Vrescott,

1936). The mean annual temperature of the zone varies from 61° EF. to 70° F.,

and the amplitude varies from 18° I’. in the north to 8° I. in the south.

‘The next step in the analysis was to superpose the two sets of lines represent-

ing mean temperature and amplitude on the map of the natural guayule zone as

given in fig. 1 (3) and (4). Each point of intersection gives a combination of

mean and amplitude which could in nearly all cases be matched in Australia, and

the corresponding point was plotted on a map of Australia. The temperature zone

of the natural habitat can thus be paralleled with respect to at least two charac-

teristics, and this is illustrated in fig. 4. There remains the search for parallel

rainfall conditions. The limits sought were those of Australian seasonal rainfall

of between 10 inches and 15 inches falling in the months November to April. The

appropriate combinations of rainfall and temperature are to be found to the north-

[UNITED STATES

LEE

ico" w

Fig. 2 Maps of the July climate and soil zones in the area of occurrence of

Parthenium argentatum in the United States and Mexico. The shading in the left-hand

diagram is as in Fig. 1. In this diagram are given the lines of equal value for the ratio

of rainfall to saturation deficit for the month of July. The right-hand map js compiled

from Mexican and United States sources and indicates the major soil zones of the area.

The continuous line represents the boundary according to Lloyd and the broken line

according to Pissarev.

‘Vhe soil zones are: (1) Black earths and rendzinas.

(2) Reddish-brown and chestnut soils.

(3) Grey, brown and red soils of arid regions.

(4) Shallow and stony soils.

The shallow and stony soils no doubt extend into zone (3) in Mexico.

315

west of the western slopes of New South Wales, extending into Queensland in the

general direction of Charleville and Blackall. In Table I are recorded the climatic

data for stations in this Australian region. The winter rainfall is higher than for

corresponding localities in Mexico and Texas and favourable conditions may

extend somewhat into the more arid regions.

‘TAuLe I

Criwatic DATA FOR STATIONS IN THE SUGGESTED AUSTRALIAN HoMOCLIME

or tur ZONE or NAturAL OcCURRENCE OF PARTHENIUM ARGENTATUM

Ratio of

Rainfall rainfall to

November Temperature saturation

to April Annual Mean Amplitude — deficit

ins. ins. oF, oF, for January

Goondiwindi whe w =14-9 24-8 67°5 13-8 65

Roma hs af a. 47 23-4 68-4 14:1 6°5

St. George ses wn 123 20-1 68-8 15:3 4-8

Bollon ne ay a Llel 18-1 68-8 15-1 4-1

Collarenebri rah a =109 18-5 68-5 15-3 3-4

Coonamble ee . 10-8 19-2 66°8 15-3 3°8

Gilgandra eit w= 12+2 22°7 63-2 15-1 4:7

Mungindi ave ae Ley 19-9 67-9 14-4 —

Walgett 9... nt w. 10-2 18-0 67 +7 15-9 3:8

Moree iu mer w. =13°4 22-9 67:5 14-8 5-0

Narrabri... me wu. «14-6 25-7 66:6 15:8 4:8

Gunnedah vad wv. 13-1 23-4 64-7 15°94 4-4

Tamworth 84 a 14-9 26°6 63°+2 14:2 6-0

Jerry's Plain sit a §=14°8 25-2 64-4 12-9 6°5

Dalkeith .... nul a 13:2 23-7 60-1 13°3 7:3

Mudgee... ace a =12:8 25-3 59-8 14-0 10-4

Dubbo Die Ws. a 11-5 22-0 63°7 15-4 6-1

Parkes ms at a. 10-4 21-1 63°7 14-3 45

Wellington Pe vee Pes 22-7 62-4 14-9 43

Marsden _.... ult .. 10-0 20-1 62:0 16-0 4-3

Confirmatory evidence may be obtained by examining the climatic records for

Texas. The data for Fort Stockton, Texas, may be regarded as of some

importance, as this station marks the northern limit of the zone. These are

given below:

Tartu IT

Crimatie DATA For Fort StTocw'ron, TEXAS

Jan. Feb, Mar. Apr. Mav June Jwy Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dee.

Temp. °F... -46°5 50-5 57-9 64-7 735 79-0 81-2 79-8 73-9 64-9 34-1 46-4

Rainfall Gns.) 00-47 0-64 0-47 1-04 1-69 1-54 1-87 1-77 2:37 1:36 0-76 0-69

Anuual rainfall... se ron aye a0 ... 14-66 inches

Seasonal rainfall—May to October... fafa ... 10:60 inches

Mean annual temperature 4 a4 it wa 64°49 TE,

‘Temperature phase (ag behind solar radiation) |... 23-8 days

Temperature amplitude .... soe ef hy we «175° FP.

We may now proceed to determine as nearly as possible an Australian homo-

clime for Fort Stockton. The highest temperature amplitude in Australia is just

over 16° F., so that an exact parallel is hardly to be found, but combinations of a

mean of 64:4’ F, with amplitudes of 15° F. and over are available. In view of the

fact that Fort Stockton has a summer rainfall, it is only on the eastern side of

Australia that an appropriate combination of rainfall and temperature is likely to

be found.

On the map of New South Wales, illustrated in fig. 3, are projected the

isopleths for appropriate climatic constants. An intersection of the lines for the

appropriate mean temperature and phase with an amplitude of 15° F. occurs near

316

Hillston, while there is a further series of approaches near Narrabri and Gunne-

dah. The intersection with the appropriate summer rainfall of 10°6 inches indi-

cates that the homoclime of Fort Stockton can be reasonably represented by an

area in the vicinity of Coonamble. The three last-named stations in New South

Wales occur within the zone of parallel temperature and moisture conditions as

given in fig. 4.

Finally, the evidence with respect to the recorded behaviour of prickly pear

in Australia was examined. A number of species of Opuntia appeared to be of

possible significance. These are Opuntia lindheimeri, O. streptacantha, O. pachona,

Fig. 3 Map of New South Wales on which are projected isopleths for the follow-

ing climatic characteristics approximating to those of Fort Stockton, Texas.

A Tenrperature phase: 23-8 days lag behind solar radiation.

B Temperature amplitude: 15° F,

C Mean annual temperature: 64-4° F,

D Warm season rainfall: 10°6 inches,

E Temperature amplitude: 16° F.

Australian localities sharing some of these characteristics are:

(1) Hillston, (2) Coonamble, (3) Narrabri, (4) Gunnedah.

The characteristics for the five stations concerned are:

Temperature Rainfall

Mean Ampili- Total Summer

annual tude Phase annual season

cs Sy days ins. ins.

Fort Stockton, Texas ... 64-4 17-5 23-8 14-7 10-6

Coonamble, N.S.W. .... 66-8 15-3 24-7 19-2 10-8

Narrabri, N.S.W. . 66°6 15-8 24-4 25-7 14-6

Gunnedah, N.S.W. wa O47 15-4 26:6 23-4 13-1

Hiliston, N.S.W. a 04-0 15-4 24-6 14-1 6-2

317

O. tomentosa, O. rufida, O. imbricata and O, microdasys. It has already been

indicated that O. microdasys is a rnember of some of the plant commiunities

dominated by Parthenium argentatwm and that this species of prickly pear has

established itself in the Pilliga country of New South Wales. This country hes

in the triangle between Coonamble, Gunnedah and Narrabri, localities which have

already becn noted as having climatic affinities with those of the Texan habitat of

iF = TOTES E =n pod

| | f fat}

AUSTRALIA

SCALE OF MILER

me n~

HOMOCLIMES OF NATURAL HABITAT

OF PARTHENIUM ARGENTATUM

WD eave marune SQ RAINFALL

rT al

crs

Fig 4 Illustrating the general features of the Australian homoclimes of the zone of

natural occurrence of Parthenium argentatum. The letters L, R, M, P. I and S indicate

the localities of recorded occurrences of species of Opuntia of the same or adjacent Ameri-

can zones. L: QO. ludheimeri; R: O. rufida; S: O. streptacantha; P: O. pachona;

1: O. imbricata; and M: O. microdasys.

guayule. Johnston (1924) suggests that O. microdasys would probably continue

to thrive northwards from the Pilliga, invading the western portion of the Darling

Downs and adjacent plains. He further suggests that this species and Q, imbricata

mentioned below are the two which would be most likely to spread in the region

having a rainfall between 10 and 20 inches, received very largely, but not entirely.

during summer. His conclusions are thus in keeping with the present conclusions

regarding guayule. The publication of Britton and Rose (1919) has been con-

sulted with respect to the other prickly pears of interest in this connection.

Of those which have become acclimatised in Australia, O. lindheimeri occurs

naturally in south-western Louisiana, south-castern Texas and Tamaulipas.

Mexico, on the more humid lowlands to the east of the zone of guayule. Several

clumps of this species are reported to be growing near Parachilna, South Australia.

O. streptacantha is very common on the Mexican tablelands, especially on the

deserts of San Luis Potosi. These deserts also form the southern-most range of

318

the habitat of Parthenium argentatum, O. pachona is closely related to O. strepta-

cantha and may be a race of that species. In Australia O. streptacantha is restricted

to Central Queensland, from Rockhampton west to Emerald and south towards

Camboon. It occurs in dense patches in the Dingo Blackwater section and in the

Banana district. O. pachona has been reported in the Moree district of New South

Wales, where a large plant was destroyed some years ago.

O. tomentosa is also a native of Central Mexico, but as it is a very widely

spread cultivated form, its original home is not recorded within narrow limits.

In Australia this species has become thoroughly acclimatised in an areca 240 miles

wide between Rockhampton and Emeraid.

O, rufida occurs in Texas and northern Mexico. The type locality, Presidio

del Norte, is within the zone of Parthenium argentatuim, Presidio has, however,

the low annual rainfall of 7°8 inches. O, rufida is said to occur in patches near

Blinman, South Australia.

Opuntia imbricata occurs from Central Colorado to Texas, New Mexico and

central Mexico. The plant is hardy in south-western Kansas. It obviously has

a wider range than many of the other species of Opuntia introduced into Aus-

tralia. It is one of the species associated with guayule in its native habitat. In

Australia it occurs at Warwick, Queensland, in several districts (Sofala, Mur-

rurundi, Warialda, Sconce) of New South Wales and in South Australia. These

stations are on the wetter side of the homoclime for guayule as given in fig. 4.

The information concerning the distribution of these species in Australia has been

entered on the map of fig. "4, The only reported occurrence which is difficult to

explain is that of O. lindhetmert at Blinman in South Australia.

SUMMARY

From an examination of the climatic data available for the Texan and

Mexican zones of occurrence of Parthentun argentatum (guayule), it is suggested

that the Australian homoclime, including temperature and seasonal rainfall condi-

tions, is to be found: in an area extending from the western slopes of New South

Wales in the general direction of Charleville and Blackall in Queensland. The

suggestion 1s supported by the recorded behaviour of certain species of Opuntia

iter eel

which have become established in Australia.

REFERENCES

Britton, N. [.., and Rose, J. N. 1919 The Cactaceae, 1, Carnegie Institute of

Washingion

Brooks, C. F., Connor, A. J., and others 1936 Climatic Maps of North America.

Harvard University.

Buxasov, S. M. 1930 Bull. Applied Rotany Supplement 47

Dopp, A. P. 1940 The Biological Campaign against Prickly Pear. Common-

wealth Prickly Pear Board. Lrisbane

Jounston, T, Harvey 1924 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 48, 269

Luovp, F. E. 1911 Guayule (Parthentian argentahm Gray) A rubber plant of

the Chihuahuan desert. Carnegie Institute of Washington. Publ. 139

Prssarty, V. FE, 1929-1930 Bull. Applied Botany, 24, No. 3, 3-84

Prescorr, J. A. 1936 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 60, 93

Prescott, J. A. 1943 Aust. Jour. Sctence, 5, 117

Ropricurz [.., and Bramprta, M. 1937 Un primer inteno para agrupar los suelos

de Mexico dentro de los grandes grupos del mundo, (A preliminary

classification of the Soils of Mexico). National Commission of Irriga-

tion. Mexico

Usiren States DEPARTMENT or AGRICULTURE 1941 Climate and Man. Year-

book of Agriculture

A NEW SPECIES OF LAGORCHESTES (MARSUPIALIA)

By H. H. FINLAYSON

Summary

Lagorchestes asomatus n. sp.

External characters unknown; size, judged by the skull of the aged type, considerably smaller than

in L. hirsulus, therefore the smallest of the genus.

319

A NEW SPECIES OF LAGORCHESTES (MARSUPIALIA)

By H. Fl. Fintayson

PLares XXXII] ann XXXIV

| Presented 9 September 1943]

Lagorchestes asomatus 11. sp.

Txternal characters unknown: size, judged by the skull of the aged type,

considerably smaller than in L. fursufus, and therefore the smallest of the genus.

The species, which is founded upon the cranial characters of a single aged

example of unknown sex, is sharply distinguished from other members of the

genus by its enormous auditory bullae, and the great reduction of the premaxilliary

region and the incisor dentition. It is nearest to the Central Australian forms ot

i. hirsutus Gould, with which species comparison is chiefly made in the ensuing

description,

Cranial form typically lagorchestine in its shortness and great breadth, and in

the extreme height of the skull posteriorly, leading to a characteristic rapidly

tapering, wedge-shaped outline. ‘The upper profile descends more abruptly from

the vertex to the nares and lambda, than in /ursitus,

Muzzle region shorter than in Airsutus and differing further in the

exaggerted lateral expansion of the proximal maxilliary portion, and the reduc-

tion both in width and depth of the distal premaxilliary segment. The nasals are

similar to those of firsutus but are narrower anteriorly and more expanded

posteriorly, though the later is by no means conmmensurate with the expansion of

the underlying muzzle. They terminate in a short, blunt point which over-

reaches the naso-premaxillary junction by only 2 mm. and coincides in dorsal view

with the gnathion below. The surtace of the nasals is almost flat throughout and

their junction with the walls of the muzzle sharp and angular, In lateral view

also the muzzle is very different from conspicillatus or hirsutus in its rapidly

tapering form, the depth at 1* being scarcely half that at the anteorbital foramen.

The infranasal spur is almost absent from the premaxillae.

The interorbital region with its cdges thin and sharp at the constriclion aud

tapering posteriorly more rapidly than in Airsutus, almost as in conspicillatus, The

constriction uarrower than in the central race of hirsutus but equalled by the

insular dorreac. The area is decidedly concave. but the hollow does not extend to

the posterior nasal region, as in the other species.

The zygomatic outline as secn from above is very broad, the ratio, greatest

breadth/basal length = °73 as in the widest skulis of conspicillatus. The anterior

and posterior angles about as in hirsutus, but the maximum width still more pos-

terior and the terminal posterior width markedly greater than the anterior , and the

shape correspondingly different and nearcr the average condition of Thylogate.

The individual zygomata are stouter than in /irsutus, especially the squamosal

element; the infrazygomatic process is equally large and is contributed chiefly by

the maxilla. On the wall of the orbit, the lacrymal 1s narrower.

The braincase much as in firsutits but its surface more rugose and pitted,

and the vault decidedly lower.

The occipital area is broad and low to a greater degree than in any of the

other species and resembles the Pefrogale condition at its maximum. The para-

occipital process upright, not recurved terminally as in hirsutus, and almost com-

Trans. Roy. Sec. S. Aust., 67, (2). 30 November 1943

]

320

pletely merging with the bulla anteriorly. Tympanic annulus very large and the

free margin of the mastoid curved forward parallel to its lower border.

In the palatal aspect the auterior foramina are longer than in hirsulus. The

palate is reduced anteriorly and is widest in its midlength. ‘here are two large

remiform vacuities, each 11x 5 mm. ca., extending io within 3 mm. of the posterior

margin and the space behind them is a'most complete, not multi-perforate as in

lursutus. Posterior and anterior nares both narrower and shallower.

The parapterygoid fossa very deep and well defined but reduced to a mere

erescentic sht hy the encroachment of the bullae; the ectopterygoid ridge unusually

well developed and thrust outwards almost at a right angle to the basicranial axis.

The alisphenoid bullae enormously inflated, more so than in any other member of

the sublamily, and in absolute size exceeded in the Macropodidae only by

B, lesueurtin the Potoroinac, The cubic capacities of the bulla in B, lesueuri, the

present species, and L. hirsifits, are in the approxiniate ratio 334: 236:81. and if

allowance is made for the small size of the skull of the new species, the disparity

between the first two volumes is considerably decreased.

The mandible presents an extreme phase of the lagorchestine trends towards

shortened horizontal body of the ramus and lengthened ascending portion, the

vertical height of the coronoid margin considcrably exceeding the leneth of the

body from the base of the coronoid to the incisor alveolus. Symphysis short and

inferior dental foramen very small as in hirsutus; masscteric foramen smaller;

condyle round and larger.

Deutition

Upper incisors remarkable for their very small size, the antero-posterior

leugth of the serics 5-3 mm. as against 7-7-5 mm. in hirsutus of similar wear: the

tecth much worn but apparently similarly proportioned and disposed in the pre-

maxillae. Canine about 2 mm. long. rooted just posterior to the suture and lying

nearly prone upon the diastemal margin and probably functionless. P+ an

extremely large tooth, 6°3 mm. long as against 4-°8-5-1 mm. in similarly worn

hirsutus,; too worn for the finer details of structure to be made out, but el carly of

the same general type as in conspicilains and hirsutus, e.g., parallel-sided, scarcely

wider posteriorly than distally, a well-marked talon and internal ledge running the

whole iength of the tooth, a fossette on its posterior margin, a blade showing

vestiges of four shallow vertical grooves externally and a continuous trenchant

edge lying buceal to the midline of the tooth. The forward drift of the cheels teeth

with advancing age (unusually marked in Layorchestes) reaches a maximum in

this species, DP! occupying a position nearly 4 mm, anterior to its point of eruption;

the P+-I* diastema is thereby reduced to 7 mm., litle more than the length of the

former tooth.

The molar rows are nearly as long as in the decidedly larger hirsutis skull,

and the individual teeth are somewhat heavier. The crown pattern, so far as it can

be made out, ts similar, but the tooth rows are more arched and the anterior mem-

bers project laterally beyond the alveolar margin to a much greater extent and their

outer cusps are plainly visible, in dorsal view projecting beyond the walls of the

muzzle. Both the latter features are probably accentuated by the age of the slcull

aud the forward drift of the cheek teeth, above mentioned.

The lower incisors are much reduced (though relatively Jess so than the

upper); narrow, delicate and nearly parallel-sided in their mid-course. Lower

PD, 4:9 mm.; without talon or ledge but with four shallow grooves on both sur-

faces, Lower molars much narrower than upper; relatively more so than in

hirsutus.

Dimensions

Greatest length, 65°8; basal length, 58:7; zygomatic breadth, 42-9; nasals:

length, 27-6; nasals: greatest breadth, 9-9; nasals: least breadth, 4:3; nasals:

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1943 Vol. 67, Plate XX XIII

Photo by H. H.

nlayson

ry, A, B, C—Dorsal, palatal, lateral aspects of skull of Lagorchestes asomatus sp. nov.

(x 1-lca.).

Fig. D—Lateral aspect of same with mandible in situ (x 1-1 ca.).

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1943 Vol. 67, Plate XXXIV

Photo by H. H. Finlayson

Fig. E, F—Anterior and posterior aspects of skull of Lagorchestes asomatus sp. nov.

(x 1:2 a.).

Fig. G, H—Lateral and posterior aspects of mandible of same (Gel 2ea:)s

321

overhang, 2°2; depth of muzzle“) 9-7; constriction, 9°6; palate: length, 36°7;

palate: breadth inside M2, 11-2; anterior palatal foramen, 4-0; diastema, 7-1;

bulla, 14:4 x 14-0; basicranial axis, 21:5: basifacial axis, 39°5; facial index, 183;

inandible: greatest length, 45-0; mandible: greatest breadth, 41°9; mandible:

greatest perpendicular height, 30-5; antero-posterior length of upper incisors

(worn), 3°3; Pt, 63 x 2°3; Ms!3, 13-2; Ms'+, 19-0; M4, 5:7 x 5:2; lower 1|,,

9-2 x 2-6.

Tyvpe—Aged skull of unknown sex. South Australian Museum Registered

Number, M3710. Collected by Michael Terry between Mount Farewell and Lake

Mackay in Central Australia, at longitude 129° 30’ east and latitude 22° 15’ south

approx. The animal was taken in the flesh, but only the skull preserved.

ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA (INCORPORATED).

Receipts and Payments for the Year ended September 30, 1943.

322

ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA (INCORPORATED)

Receipts and Payments for the Year endcd 30 September 1943

RECEIPTS PAYMENTS

£ wd. -£ Ss. ad £ sd £ sa

To Balance, Ist Oct. 1942 236 3 1 | By Transactions (Vol. 66, Pt. 2, and

, Subscriptions baie Ai 133 7 0 Vol. 67, Pt. 1)—

» Government Grant for Printing Ma ig led 310: ea

Printing, etc. .... 300 0 0 Illustrating 2. 2. ... 132 4 4

, Sale of Publications and Publishing .. .. .. 12 3 6

Reprints :— 574 17 1

University of Adelaide 55 11 8 , Reprints .. 2. 2... 77-15 10

Sundries ve ee eee = 29-10 8 7 |) Librarian v 35 14 0

7 85 2 4 - Library—Bookbinding of 58 0 0

» Use of Room... ..., : epee) » Sundries—

Iexchange Snes -~ 2 0 Lighting A ee 42 0

SSS 5 4 0 Printing, Postages and

» Interest — Transferred Stationery 29 2 7

from Endowment Petties, Bank Fee, etc. 417 6

Dati ii, ve Tye 196 12 8 Insurances 6 5 0

44.7 5

» Balances—30 Sep. 1943—

Savings Bank of S.A... 138 3 7

Bank of Aust. £27 9 1

Less Qut-

standing Chqs. 4 13 11

2215 2

Cash at Bank oo. 416 0

— 165 14 9

£956 9 1 £956 9 |]

ENDOWMENT FUND as at 30 September 1943

(CapitalStocks, etc., Face Value, £3,960; Cost, £5,821 4s. 10d.)

xs. d £ & do]. £s.d. £ 5s. d.

1942—_October 1 1943-—-September 30

To Balance— By Revenue Account ... 0... 196 12 8

Aust. Inscribed Stocks 5,762 0 0 » Balance—

Savings Bank of S.A. 36 6 1 Aust. Inscribed Stocks 5,812 0 6

5,798 6 1 Savings Bank of S.A. 9 4 10

» Capital Increment— | hee H3Y 410

Conversion of Stock .... 2218 9

» Intcrest—

Inscribed Stocks ... .... 190 11. 6

Savings Bank of S.A. 6 1 2

-—- 196 12 8 a eer

—_—— £6,017 17 6

£6,017 17° 6

Audited and found correct. We have verified the Government Stocks at the Registry of

Inscribed Stock, Adelaide, and the respective Bank Balances.

O, GLASTONBURY, F.A.LS., A.F.LA. | Hon. HERBERT M. HALE,

EF. M. ANGEL § Auditors Hon, Treasurer

Adelaide, 12 October 1943

AWARDS OF THE SIR JOSEPH VERCO MEDAL

LIST OF FELLOWS, MEMBERS, ETC.

AS ON 30 SEPTEMBER 1943

Those marked with an asterisk (*) have contributed papers published in the Society's Transactions.

Those marked with a dagger (+) are Life Members.

Any change in address or any other changes should be notified to the Secretary.

Note - The publications of the Society are not sent to those members whose subscriptions are in

arrear.

AWARDS OF THE SIR JOSEPH VERCO MEDAL

1929 Pror. WaLter Howcuin, F.G.S.

1930 Joun McC. Brack, A.L.S.

1931 Pror. Siz Dovctas Mawson, O.B.E,, D.Sc, B.E., FBS.

1933. Pror, J. Burton Cieranp, M.D.

1935 Pror. T. Harvey Jomnston, M.A., D.Sc,

1943. Hlernerr Womerstey, A.L.S., F.REES.

LIST OF FELLOWS, MEMBERS, ETC.

AS ON 30 SEPTEMBER 1943

Those marked with an asterisk (*) have contributed papers published in the Society's

‘Transactions. ‘Those marked with a dagger (7) are Life Members.

Any change in address or any other changes should be notified to the Secretary.

Note—The publications of the Society are not sent to those members whose subscriptions

are in arrear.

Date of -

Election Honorary FELLows.

1926. *Cuapman, F,, A.LS., “Hellas,” 50 Stawell Street, Kew E4, Victoria.

1894. *Wirson, Prof. J. T. M.D., Ch.M.,, F.R.S., Cambridge University, England.

FELLOWS.

1933, Avam, D, B., B.Agr.Sc., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide—Council,

1939-42: Vice-President, 1942-; Librarian, 1942-.

1927. *ALpERMAN, A. R., Ph.D. M.Sc. F.GS., Div. Econ. Chemistry, C.S.I.R., Box 4331,

G.P.O., Melbourne, Victoria—Council, 1937-42.

1931. Awnprew, Rev. J. R., 5 York Street, Henley Beach, S.A.

1935. *Anprewartua, H. G., M.Agr.Sc., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide.

1935. *Anprewarrua, Mrs. H. V., B.Agr.Sc, M.S., 29 Claremont Avenue, Netherby, S.A.

1929. Awncen, F. M., 34 Fullarton Road, Parkside, S.A.

1939. *AnceL, Miss L. M., M.Sc., University, Adelaide.

1936. Barren, Miss B. S., M.Sc., University, Adelaide.

1932, Becc, P. R., D.D.Se., L.D.S., Shell House, 170 North Terrace, Adelaide.

1939. *Brrnpt, R. M., 5 Prescott Terrace, Rose Park.

1028. Best, R. J. M-Sc, F.A.C.L, Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide.

1946. Brrcw, L. C, BAgr.Sc., M.Sc., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide.

1934. Brack, E. C., M.B., B.S., Magill Road, ‘Tranmere, Adelaide.

1907. *Bracx, J. M. A.L.S, 82 Brougham Place, North Adelaide—Verco Medal, 1930;

Council, 1927-1931; President, 1933-34; Vice-President, 1931-33.

1940, Bonyruon, Sir J. Lavincron, 263 East Terrace, Adelaide.

1923. Burvon, R. S., D.5c., University, Adelaide, S.A.

1922. *Campprnn, T. D. D.D.5c., D.Sc. Dental Dept. Adelaide Hospital, Adelaide—

Council, 1928-32, 1935, 1942-; Vice-President, 1932-34; President, 1934-35.

1929. Currstir, W., M.B., B.S., Education Department, Adelaide—Treasurer, 1933-8.

1895. *CreLAND, Pror. J. B., M.D. University, Adclaide— Verco Medal, 1933; Council,

1921-26, 1932-37; President, 1927-28; 1940-41; Vice-President, 1926-27, 1941-42.

1920. CieLanp, W. P., M.B., B.S., M.R.C.P., Dashwood Road, Beaumont.

1930. *Cotguuoun, T. T., M.Sc., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adclaide—Secretary,

1942-43.

1938. *Coxnon, H. T., S.A. Muscum, Adelaide.

1907. Cooxe, W. TT. D.&Se.. A.A.C.L, University, Adelaide—Council, 1938-41, Vice-

President, 1941-42.

1942. Coorer, H. M., 51 Hastings Street, Glenelg, S.A.

1929, *Cotton, B. C., SA. Museum, Adelaide.

1924. we Crespiony, Sir C. T. C., D.S.O., M.D., F.R.C.P., 219 North Terrace, Adelaide.

1937. *Crocxrr, R. L., M.Sce., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide — Secretary,

1943-

1929. *Davinson, Pror. J., D.Sc, Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adclaide—Council,

1932-35; Vice-President, 1935-37, 1938-39; President, 1937-38; Rep. Fauna and

Flora Board, 19406-.

1927, *Davirs, Pror. E. H., Mus.Doc., The University, Adclaide.

324

Date of

Election.

1941. *Dickinson, S. B., B.Sc., Mines Department, Flinders Street, Adelaide.

1930, Dix, E. V., Hospitals Department, Adclaide, S.A,

1932. Dunstoxe, H. E., M.B. B.S. J.P., 124 Payncham Road, St. Peters, Adelaide.

1921. Durror, G. H., B.Sc. 12 Halsbury Avenue, Kingswood, "Adelaide.

1931. Dwyer, J. M. M, 4 B.S., 25 Port Road, Bowden. (ALLE. abroad.)

1933. *EARDLEY, Miss C. B. Sc. Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide.

1902.

1938.

1917,

1935.

1927,

1923.

1932.

1935.

1919.

1927,

1935.

1939,

1925.

1910.

1930,

1933.

1904.

1934,

1922.

1939,

1927,

1933.

1924,

1928.

1942,

1918.

1910.

1921.

1939,

1933.

1939,

1922.

1930,

1938,

1931,

1938.

1922,

1933.

1932.

1923.

1939,

1929,

1905.

1938,

1926,

1943.

1934,

1929.

*Enourst, A. G., io re Street, Glencle, S.A.

*Evans, |, W., M.A., D.Se., Government Entomologist. Hobart, Tasmania.

*Pen~ner. CL A, E., [Se 42 Alexandra Av. Rose Park, Adelaide—Couneil, 1925-28;

President, 1930-31; Vice-President, 1928-30: Secretary 1924-25; Treasurer,

1932-33; Editor, peas

*TPENNER, FL J., M.B., . 42 Alexandra Avenue, Rose Park, (ALE. abroad.)

*EINLAYSON, H. H., 408 shal Street, North Adclaide—Council, 1937-40.

*Ery, H. K, D.S.O., M.D., B.S., B.Sc. F.R.A.C.P., Town Hall, Adelaide—Council,

1933-37; Vice- President, 1937- 38. 1939-40; President, 1938- 1939,

*Gizson, E. S. H,, nae 207 Cross Roads, Clarence Gardens, Adelaide.

+GLASTONRU RY, i. O. G, BA. MSc, Dip. Ed., Armament School, R.A.A.F., Hamil-

ton, Victoria.

fGrastonsury, O. A., Adelaide Cement Co., Grenfell Street, Adelaide.

Goprrey, F. K., Robert Street, Payneham, S.A,

+GOLDSACK, H., “Coromandel Valley.

Goong, J. R., " B.Agt. Se., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide. (A.LF.

abroad.)

+Gosse, J. H., Gilbert House, Gilbert Place, Adelaide,

+GRANT, Prov. Kerr, M.Sc., F. LP., University, Adelaide.

Gray, J. T., Orroroo, S.A.

GREAVES, HH, Director, Botanic Gardens, Adclaide.

GrirFitH, H. B., Dunrobin Road, Brighton, S.A.

GUNTER, Rev. H. A., 10 Broughton Street, Glenside, S.A.

*Harv, H. M,, Director, S.A. Museum, Adelaide—Council, 1931-34; Vice-

President, 1934- 36, 1937-38; President, 1936-37; Treasurer, 1938-,

Harvey Miss A. BA, Dequetteville Terr., Kent’ Town, Adelaide.

Hoven, Tre Hox. F. W,, B.Sce., Dequetteville Terrace, Kent Town, Adelaide.

Hosk1nG, H. C., B.A., 24 Northcote Terrace, Gilberton, Adelaide.

*HOSsFELp, P.S.. M.Se., 132 Fisher Street, Fullarton, S. ‘A,

Irouzp, P., Paes Burnside, S.A.

JENKINS, C. kk, eee eee it of Agriculture, St. George’s Terrace, Perth, W.A,

*JENNISON, —_ J. C. 7 Frew Street, Fullarton, Adelaide.

*Jounson, E. A. M. D.. M.R.CS., “Tarni Warra,” Port Noarlunga, S.A.

*JOHNSTON, Prov. T. i. M.A., D.Sc., University, Adelaide—Verco Medal, 1935;

Council, 1926-28, 1940-; Vice- President, 1928- 31; President, 1931-32; Secretary

1938-40; Rep. Fauna and Flora Board, 1932- 3S,

+KuAKHAR, H. M., Ph.D., M.B., F.R.G.S.. Khakar Buildings, C.P. Tank Road, Bom-

bay, India.

*KLEEMAN, A. W., M.Sc., University, Adelaide,

Leask, J. C., A.M.LE., 9 Buller Street. Prospect, S A.

Lennon, G, A. M.D. B.S., I-R.C.P., North Terrace, Adelaide. (CA.LF. abroad.)

*LoUWYCK, Rey. N. IL, 85 First Avenue, St. Peters, ‘Adelaide.

*Love, Rrv., J. R. B., M.C., D.C.M., M-A., Ernabella, via Oodnadatta, S.A,

+Lupprook ‘(Mas. W.V.), N. FL, MLA,. Elimatta Street, Reid, A.CT.

Maprern, C. B, B.D.S., D.D.Sc., Shell House, North Terrace, Adelaide.

*Manpricay, C. Ty M.A.. B. KE. D. Se., F.G.S., University of Adelaide—Council, 1929-33:

Vice- President, 1933-35, 1936- 37: President, 1935-36.

Macarry, Miss K. de B., B.A, B.Se., 19 Ashbourne Avenue, Mitcham, S.A.

Mann, E A., C/o Bank of Adelaide, Adelaide.

MARSHALL, j. C., Mageppa Station, Comaum, S.A.

Marsuarr, T. J., M.Agr.Sc., Ph.D., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide.

Martin, F. C., ALA., Teehties! High School, Thebarton, S.A,

*Mawson, Pror. Sr Doucras, O.B.E,. D.Sc. B.E., F.R.S.. University, Adelaide—

Verco Medal, 1931: President, 1924-25 - Vice-President, 1823-24, 1925-26;

Council, 1941-.

*Mawson, Miss P. M., M.Sc., University, Adelaide.

Mayo, Tue How. Mr. Justice, LL.B. K.C.. Supreme Court, Adelaide,

MeCartyy, Miss D. F., B.A. B.Se., 70 Halton Terrace, Kensington Park,

McCrovcnry, C. 1. BE. AM.LE. (Aust.), Town Hall, Adelaide,

McLAucnLIn, E., M.B,, BS., M.R.C.P.. 2 Wakefield Street, Kent Town. Adelaide.

325

Date of

Election.

1907. MeExrose, R. T., Mount Pleasant, S.A.

1939, Mrxcuam, V. H., Willaloo, via Hallett, 5.A.

1925, +Mitcuect, Pror. Sir W.. K.C.M.G., M.A., D.Sc. Fitzroy Ter. Prospect, SA.

1933. Muircuett, Progr. M. L., M.Se., University, Adclaide.

1938. Moornouse, F. W., M.Sc., Chief Inspector of Fisheries, Flinders Strect, Adelaide.

1940. Mortiock, J. A. T., 39 Currie Street, Adelaide.

1936, *Mountrorp, C. P., 25 First Avenue, St. Peters, Adelaide,

1930. Ocxenven, G. P., Public School, Norton’s Summit, S.A.

1913. *Ossorn, Pror. T. G. B., D.Se. University, Oxford, England-— Council, 1915-20,

1922-24; President, 1925-26; Vice-President, 1924-25, 1926-27.

1937, *PARKIN, L. W., MiA., B.Sc, c/o Nth. Broken Hill Ltd., Box 20 C, Broken Hill, N.S.W.

1929. Pautt, A. G., M.A., B. Sc. Eglinton Terrace, Mount Gambier.

1928. Puirrs, I. F, Ph.D., iAgeSt., c/o The Flax Production Committee, 409 Collins

Street, Melbourne, Victoria.

1926. *Prerr, C. S., D.Sc., Waite Institute (Private Mail Beg), Adelaide—Counceil, 1941-.

1925. *Prescort, Pror, J. A., D.Sc, A.1.C,, Waite Tnstitute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide—

Verco Medal, 1938; Council, 1927- 30, 1935-39; Vice-President, 1930-32; President,

1932-33.

1926. Prrcr, A. G. C.M.G.. M.A. Litt.D. F.R.G.S.. 226 Melbourne Strect, North Adelaide.

1942, Puestry, A. T., B. Ag.Se., M. Se. Waite Institute (Private Mail. Bag), Adelaide.

1937. *Rart, W. L., M. Se.. Medical School, University of Melbourne, Carlton N. 3, Victoria

1925. Ricuarnson, A. E. V., C.M.G., M.A. D.Sc., 314 Albert Street, East Melbourne.

1933. ScHNEIDER, M.,, MB. 3B. S., 175 North Terr., Adelaide.

1924. *Srenir, R. w. M.A, B.Sc., Assist. Govt., Geol., Flinders St. Adclaide—Secretary,

1930-35 ; Council, 1937- 38; Vice-President, 1938-39, 1940-41; President, 1939-40.

1925. *Srearp, E,, Nuriootpa, SA

1936. *Suearn, K., Fisheries Research Div. C.S.I.R., Cronulla, N.S.W.

1934. SuinxKrietp, R. C., Salisbury, 5.A.

1942, Stmmonns, H. W., 130 Fisher Street, Fullartort, S.A.

1938. *Simpsox, Mrs. E. R., M.Sc., Warland Road, Burnside.

1924. Srapson, F. N., Pirie Street, Adelaide.

1941, Sm irH, J. Lancrorp, B.Se., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide. (R.A.A.F.)

1942, Swowsatt, G. J., B.Sc, Walte Iustitute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide.

1941, Soutuceott, R. V., M.B., B.S., 12 Avenue Road, Unley Pork, S.A.

1936. Sourtwoop, A. R.. M.D., M.S. (Adel.), M.R.C.P., Wootoona Terr., Glen Osmond, S.A,

1936. *Spricc, R. C., B.Sc. (Hons,), “Delamere,” Delamere Avenue, Springheld.

1938. *Srepuens, C. G.. M.Sc, Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide.

1935. Srercxranp, A. G., M.Agr.Se., 11 Wootoona Terr., Glen Osmond, Adelaide.

1932. Swaw. D. C., MSc, Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adclaide — Secretary,

1940-42.

1934, Symons, I. G, Murray Street, Mitcham.

1929, *Tavtor, J. K., B.A. M.Sc., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide—Council,

1940-43.

1943. Trscu, J. E., B.Agr.Se.. 3 Mitchell Street, Myde Park,

1940. THuomson, J. M., 135 Military Road. Semaphore South.

1923. *frnnate, N. B, B.Sc. South Australian Museum, Adelaide--Secretary, 1935-36.

(RLA.A.F.)

1937. *Trumecr, Prov. H. C, 1.Sc., M.Agr.Sc., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag),

Adelaide.

1894. *Turner, A. J., M.D., F.R.E.S.. Dauphin Terr., Brisbane, Old.

1925. Turner, D. C., National Chambers, King William Street, Adelaide.

1933, Warxrey, A. B.A. B.Sc. PhD, Diy. Industrial Chemistry, C.S.1.R., Box 4331,

Melbourne. Victoria.

1912, *Warp, L. K., B.A, B.E., D.Se., Govt. Geologist, Flinders Street, Adelaide—

Council, 1924-27, 1933-35; President, 1928-30; Vice-President, 1927-28.

1941. *Warx, D. C., M.Agr.Sc.. Waite Institute (Private Majl Bag), Adelaide.

1942, Watson, R. H., Central Wool Committee Testing House, 572 Flinders Lane, Melb., C1,

1936. Watrrnousr, Miss L. M., 35 King Street, Brighton, S.A.

1939. Weepinc, Rev. B. J.. Hamlev Bridge. S.A.

1931. Wrson, C. E. C., M.B., B.S.. “Woodfield,” Fisher Street, Fullarton, Adelaide.

1938. *Wirsox, J. O., Animal Nutrition Laboratory, University, Adelaide.

1935, Wuwxter, Rev. M. T.. B.A. D.D., 20 Austral Terrace. Malvern, Adelaide.

1930. *Womersitey, H.. F.R.ES.. A.L.S.. Museum, Adelaide—Secretary, 1936-37; Editor,

1937-43; President, 1943-; Verco Medal, 1943,

1923. *Woonr, Prot. J. G. D.Sc. PhD. University. Adelaide—Council, 1938-40; Vice-

President, 1940-41; Rep. Fauna and Flora Board, 1940-; President, 1941-42.

GENERAL INDEX.

[Generic and specific names in italics indicate that the forms described are new to science. ]

326

GENERAL INDEX

{Generic and specific names in italics indicate that the forms described

are new to science. ]

Aboriginal Names and Utlization of the

Fauna in the Eyrean Region, Johnston, T.

H., (2), 244

Acacia gonophylla v.

(1), 37

Acanthocephala, No. 4; Australian, Johnston, }

T. H., and Best, E. W., (2), 226

Acanthocheilus quadridentatus, (1), 21

Acervulina sp., (1), 40

Agrostis, (1), 31

Alabidocarpus. (1), 11

Amerianna carinata, bouushenricus, (1), 147

efmericla bonushenricus, (1), 147

Aunphiblestrinm sp., (1), 39, 41

Amphistegina sp. (1), 40

Ancyvlidae, (1), 148

Andropogon, (1), 42, 43, inundatus, bomby-

cinus, Gryllus, (1), 43

Anomalina sp., (1), 40

Antedon sp., (1), 39

Aristida, (1), 45; Muelleri, Browniana, |

arenaria, latifolia v. minor, echinata, muri-

cata, calvcina v. strigosa, echinata v.

nitidula, capillifolia, striyosa, (1), 45;

nitidula, (1), 46

Ascarid Nematodes from Australian Marine

Fish: Seme, Johnston, T. H., and Mawson,

P. M., (1), 20

Assitninea tasmanica, (1), 148

Assitiucidae, (1), 148

Atopumelinac, (1), 13

Austrolima bassi, (1), 41

Austropeplea aruntalis, (1), 146

crassifolia, iteaphylla,

Austrochirus, (1), 11, 15: queenslandicus,

(1), 17

Austropyrgus nigra, (1), 144

Axe Head; An execptional Australian, |

Cooper, H. M., (2), 224

Bolivinopsis sp., (1), 40

Beddomena, (1), 144

3est, FE. W., and Johnston, T. T1., Australian

Acanthocephala No, 4, (2), 226

Bithyniidae, (1), 144

Biack, J. M., Additions to the Flora of South |

Australia, No. 41, (1). 36

Blake, S. T., Critical Notes on the Gramineae |

and Cyperaceae of South Attstralia with |

descriptions of new species, (1), 42

Bothriochloa, (1), 43; inundatus, Ewartiana,

intermedia, decipiens, ambigua, (1), 43

Brachiar a, practervisa, (1), 44

Bulbostylis barhata, turbinata, capillaris, (1), |

Bullinus brazieri, v. pallida, contortula, tenui-

striatus, (1), 146

Callanaitis cainozaica, (1), 41

Campylochirus chelopus, (1), 10

Capsularia marina, (1), 22

Carex chlorantha, fascicularis, Bichenoviana,

pumila, inversa, v. major, (1), 60

Carpenteria sp., (1), 40

Cellaria sp., (1), 41

Centrapala lirata, (1), 143

: Chapman, F., Notes on Fossiliferous Rocks

from Tertiary Outcrops to the South-west

of Coonalpyn, South Australia, (1), 39

i Chirodiscoides, (1), 11

Chirodiscus amplexans, (1), 10

Chrysopogon Gryllus, fallax, (1), 43

Cibicides Iohatulus, (1), 39, 40: ungerianus,

(1), 39, 41; haidingerii, (1), 39

Cladium capillaceum, (1), 54

Cladium procerum, (1), 57; Mariscus, lepto-

stachyum, chinense, jamaicense, g¢lomera-

tum rubiginosum, (1), 58; globiceps, punta-

tum, Gunnii, nudus, laxiflorum, tenax.

tetragonum, Huttonti, (1), 59; gracile,

(1), 60

Cleland, J. B.. and Johnston, T. H., Native

Names and Uses of Plants in the North-

eastern Corner of South Australia, (1),

149

Conispiculum, (2), 184

| Conodonts from Waterhouse Range, Central

Austratia, Crespin, I, (2), 231

i Contracaccum (Thynnascaris) legendrei, (1),

20; incurvum, (1), 21

Cooper, H. M., An exceptional Austral’an

Axe Head, (2), 224

Cotton, B. C., Australian Shells of the Family

Haltotidae, (2), 175

Cotten, B. C., More Australian Freshwater

Shells, (1), 143

iti confusa, striata, filosa, striatula, (1),

Coxiellidae, (1), 145

Crespin, [., Conodonts from Waterhouse

Range, Central Australia, (2), 231

Crisia scalaris, gracilis, (1), 41

_ Cucullanus heterodonti, (2), 187

' Cymbopogon, (1), 43; bombycinus, obtectus,

(1), 43

Cyperaceae of South Australia with descrip-

tions of New Species; Critical Notes on

the Graminae, and, Blake, S. T., (1), 42

Cyperus brevifolus, v. stellulatus, exaltatus,

y. minor, rotundus, victoriensis, bulbosus,

subulatus, vaginatus, gymmocaulos, v.

densiflorus, (1), 52; vaginatus, v. pseudo-

textilis, flabelliformis, congestus, clarus,

rutilans, alterniflorus, rigidellus, enervis v.

laxus, laevigatus, distachyus, Téragrostis,

sanguinolentus, vy. pauperata, (1), 53

' Danthonia, (1), 31

Dentalina ? obliqua, (1), 39

Deveuxia, (1), 51

Dichanthium, (1), 43

Discorbis sp., (1), 40; pileolus, (1), 41

Derothia sp., (1), 40

Digitaria, (1), 4

327

Eardley, C. M., An Ecological Study of the

Vegetation of Eight Mile Creek Swamp.

A Natural South Australian Coastal Fen

Formation, (2), 200

Echinocephalus spinosissimus, (2), 188

Eleocharis nigrescens, acictfaris, pusilla, gra-

cilis, multicaulis, (1)

Elphidium verriculatum,

mani, (1), 40

Enneapogon, (1), 48

Eponides repandus, (1), 39, 40; scabriculus,

1), 39, 41

Eragrostis japonica, (1), 48,50; Clelandi, (1),

49, sctifolia, infecunda, confertiflora, Ken-

nedyac, leptocarpa, parviflora, Basedawit,

(1), 39, 40; chap-

elongata, lacunaria, Barrelieri, falcata,

Dielsii, cilianensis, laniflora, eriopoda,

xerophila, australiensis, speciosa, pilosa,

Brownii, diandra, trichophylla, Rankingit,

(1), 50; v. Pritzelii, major, megastachya,

(1), 51

Eriachne Benthamii, selcranthoides, mucro-

nata, (1), 48, 49; v. clongata, v. vill-

culmis, ovata v. pedicellata, (1), 49

Eriochloa pseudoacrotricha, ramosa y. pscudo-

erotricha, annulata vy. acrotricha, (1), 43;

australiensis, longiflora, (1), 44

Eurychiroides, (1), 19

Euryzonus, (1), 19

Evans, J. W., Two interesting Upper Premian

Homoptera from New South Wales, (1),

Evaporation and Temperature; A Relation-

ship between, Prescott, J. A, (1), 1

Exohaliotis cyclohates, excavata, (2), 176

diphy tla,

Vimbristylis Neilsonii, ferruginea,

dichotoma, (1), 55

Fen Formation; An Ecological Study of the |

Johnston, T. Tf, Aboriginal Names and Util’-

Vegetation of Eight Mile Creek Swamp.

A Natural South Australian Coastal,

Eardley, C. M., (2), 200

Fen: The Pedology of a South Australian,

Stephens, C. G., (2), 191

Finlayson, H. H., A New Species of Lagor-

chestes (Marsupialia), (2), 319

Flora of South Australia, No. 41; Additions

to the, Black, J. M., (1), 36

Foleyella, (2), 184

Fossiliferous Rocks from Tertiary Outcrops

to the South-west of Coonalpyn, South

Australia; Notes on, Chapman, F.. (1), 39

Gabbia centralia, iredalii, affinis, relata, (1),

144

Gahnia sulcata, (1), 59; hystrix, (1), 60

Gahrliepia, (1), 136; rioi, rutila, (1). 158;

cetrata, ciliata, fletcheri, bengalensis, 136,

140

Glacidorbis, (1), 148

Glacilimnea, (1), 146

Globorotalia truncatulinoides, (1), 40

Glyceria ramigera, Fordeana, (1), 51

Glyptamoda aliciae, (1), 147

Glyptanisus atkinsoni, (1), 148

Gordiorhynchus hancrefti, (2), 226; falconis,

(2), 229

Gramineae and Cyperaccae of South Australia

with descriptions of New Species; Critical

Notes on the, Blake, S. T., (1), 42

Granitic Rocks of South-eastern South Aus-

tralia; Seme. Mawson, D., and Parkin,

L. W., (2), 233

Grevillea biternata, (1), 36

Grundlachia, (1), 148

Guntherana bipygalis, (1), 132

Guttulina sp., (1), 40

Gypsina globula, (1), 40

Haliotidac; Australian Shel!s of the Family,

Cotton, B. C., (2), 175

Haptosoma, (1), 11

Hastospiculum, (2), 84

Heaslip, W. G., and Womersley, H., The

Trombiculinae (Acarina) or Itch-mites

of the Austro-Malayan and Oriental Re-

gions, (1), 68

Helocharis, (1), 56; acicularis, halmaturina,

(1), 56

Helopus acrotrichus, (1), 43

Hemarthria uncinata, (1), 42

Horneria sp., (1), 41

Hydrococcus graniformis, granum, (1), 144

Hydrology of the Hundred of Belalie, County

Victoria, South Australia, and its Siguifi-

cance in Soil Conservation and Flood Con-

trol; The, Stevens, C. G., (1), 62

Hymenolobus alatis, (1), 36

idmonea semispiralis, (1), 41

Isachne australis, globosa, (1), 43

Iseilema, (1), 43

Isidonella brazieri, (1), 146; neweomli, stb-

inflata, eubida, (1), 147

| Ixalum inerme, (1), 45

zation of the Fauna in the Eyrean Region,

(2), 244

Johnston, T. H., and Best, EF. W., Australian

Acanthocephala, No. 4, (2), 226

Johnston, “‘f. H., and Cleland, J. B., Native

Names and Uses of Plants in the North-

eastern corner of South Australia, (1),

149

Johnston, T. TL, and Mawson, P. M., Re-

marks on some Nematodes from Austra-

lian Reptiles, (2), 183

Johnston, T. H., and Mawson, P. M., Some

Ascarid Nematodes from Australian Ma-

rine Tish, (1), 20

Johnston, T. H., and Mawson, P. M.. Some

Nematodes from Australian Flasmo-

branchs, (2), 187

Kyllingia, intermedia, brevifolia, (1), 52

Lahbidocarpinae, (1), 17

Labidocarpus, (1), 11, 17; recurvus, (1), 17

Lagorchestes asomatus, (2), 319

Lagorchestes (Marsupialia); A New Species

of, Finlayson, H. EH. (2), 319

Lampocarya tenax, (1), 59

Leeuwenhoekia australiensis, (1), 141

328

Lenamcria gibbosa, (1), 146; nitida, vandie- ,

mencusis, georgiana, pyramidata, attenuata,

queenslandica, beddomei, (1), 147

Lepidosperma concavum, congestum, laterale,

exaltatum, viscidum, tortuosum, semiteres,

canescens, fittiferme, (1), 56; macro-

phyllus, carphoides, (1), 57

Listrophoridae Canest. (Acarina) with Notes

on the New Genera; Australian Species

of, Womersley, H., (1), 10

Listrophorinae, (1), 18

Listrophoroides, (1), 11

Listrophorus, (1), 11, 18: gibbus, (1), 18

Lymnaea (Peplimnea), tasmanica, lutosa,

peregra, (1), 146

Lymnaeidae, (1), 145

Macdonaldius, (2), 184

Marginulina glabra, (1), 40

Marinouris, (2), 175; meleulus, roci, etholo-

gus, hargravesi, brazicri, scabricostata,

scalaris, rubicundus, tricostalis, emmac,

(2), 179

Marquesania, (1), 11, 15; expansa, (1), 15;

var, queenslandica, (1), 15

Mawson, D., and Parkin, L. W., Some Grani-

tic Rocks of South-eastern South Austra-

ha, (2), 233

Mawson, P. M., and Johnston, T. H., Re-

marks on some Nematodes from Austra-

han Reptiles, (2), 183

Mawson, P. M., and Johnston, T. H., Some

Ascarid Nematodes from Australian Ma-

rine Fish, (1), 20

Mawson, P. M., and Johnston, T. H., Same

Nematodes from Australian Elasmo-

branchs, (2), 187

Melaleuca eleutherostachya, (1), 37

Membranipora marginata, (1), 41

Miliola (Pentellina) sp., (1), 40

Monazite in South Australia; A New Occur-

rence of, Wilson, A. F., (1), 38

Mounting of Acarina and other small Arthro-

pods; A Modification of Berlese's Medium

for wie Microscopic, Womersley, H, (2),

181

Myocoptes, (1), 11; musculinus, (1), 13

Myocoptinae, (1), 13

Myotrombicula vespertilionis, (1), 99

Native Names and Uses of Plants in the

North-eastern Corner of South Australia,

Johnston, T. H., and Cleland, J. B., (1),

149

Notochlamys consobrina, (1), 41

Notopalena essingtonensis, (1), 143

Nematodes from Australian Elasmobrauichs ;

Some, Johnston, T. H., and Mawson, P.

M., (2), 187

Nematodes from Australian

marks on some, Johnston, T.

Mawson, P. M., (2), 183

Neolabidocarpus, (1), 11

Neoschongastia iiisfailensis, (1), 107, 108;

womersleyi, (1), 107, 109; petrogale, (1),

107, 111+ melomys, (1), 107, 110; muta-

bilis, (1), 107, 111; foliata, queenslandica,

edwardsi, (1), 187, 12; antipodianum, coo-

Re-

and

Reptiles ;

H,,

rongense, globulare, (1), 107, 114, hastata,

malayensis, lacunosa, impar, (1), 107, 116;

schitffneri, pseudoschuffneri, (1), 107, 117;

indica, debilis, lorius, rattus, (1), 108, 118:

heaslipi, (1), 108, 120; perameles, westrali-

ensis, trichosuri, dasycerci, (1), 108, 122;

shieldsi, /rirsti, (1), 108, 123; similis, der-

ricki, (1), 108, 123; guntheri, (1), 108,

126; smithi, phascoyale, (1), 108, 127;

cairnsensis, (1), 108, 128; ¥. yater?, (1),

108, 129

Notohaliotis, (2), 175; ruber, (2), 178;

improbula, (2), 176, 177: coccoradiatum,

conicopora, granti, gigantia, cunninghami,

(2), 177; enalirata, (2), 177

Notopala hanleyi, barretti, (1), 143

Oistodus laraptutinensis, (2), 231

Oppletora jukesi, (1), 147

Oswaldofilaria chlamydosauri, (2), 183

Ovinotis, (2), 179; dringi, (2), 180

Paltodus niadigant, (2), 232

Paludestrinidae, (1), 143

Panicum, (1), 42, 44

Pappephorum, (1), 48

Paraleptus australis, (2), 188

Paranisakis australis, (2), 190

Paraschéngastia dubia, backhousei, gal-

linarum, (1), 129, 130; yeomansi, retro-

cineta, (1), 130, 131

Parkin, L. W., and Mawson, D., Some Grani-

tic Rocks of Sauth-eastern South Austra-

lia, (2), 233

Parthenium argentatum; The Australian

Homoclhine of the Zone of Natural Occur-

rence of, Prescott, J. A., (2), 312

Paspalidium, (1), 44

Patellinella annectens, (1), 40

Permagra distincta, (1), 7

Permian Homoptera; Two interesting Upper;

from New South Wales, Evans, J. W.,

(1), 7

Permocephalus knighti, (1), 8

Pettancylus australicus, (1), 148

| Petterdiana, (1), 144

Pharyngodon kartana sp., (2), 186

Phiyctainophora sp., (2), 190

Phranntela, (1), 144

' Physaloptera gallardi, (2), 186

Plananisus isingi, (1), 148

. Planorbidae, (1), 48

Plectrachne Helmsii, bromoides, (1), 48

Plotiopsis, (1), 144; cenfralia, tatei, australis,

(1), 145

Poa cilianensis,

spitoca, 1), 51

ramigera, Fordeana, cae-

| Porina gracilis, (1), 39

Porrocaecum piscium, (1), 32

Potamopyrgus sp., petterdianus, legrandi, buc-

cinaides, (1), 144

Prescott, J. A., The Australian Homoclime of

the Zone of Natural Occurrence of Par-

theninwt argentalum, (2), 312

Prescott, J. A. A Relationship between

Evaporation and Temperature, (1), 1

Problancylus heddomei, eremius, (1), 148

Proleptus trygenorrhinac, (2), 187

Prosthorhynchus menurac, (2), 240

Pseudopotamis, (1), 144;

Pupiphryx cooma, (1), 144

supralirata, (1), 145

329

Vasmadora seredlensis, aperta, (1), 147

Tasmaniila, (1), 144

Teinotis, (2), 175

Tetraria capillaris, (1), 54

. Textularia sagittula, (1), 39; v. fistulosa,

Pyemantsus farms, scottianus, (1), 148

Quingucloculina sp., (1). 40; seminulum,

(1). 41

Retepora sp., (1), 39

Revisessor tasmanicus, (1), 144

Ripatania, (1), 144; queenslandica, (1), 145

Rotaha verriculata, (1), 40

Rottboellia compressa, (1), 42

Rulingia craurophylla, (1), 37

Sanhaliotis, (2), 178; alicna, howensis, han- |

levi, crebresculpta, dissona, squamata,

funcbris, astricta, (2), 178; elegans, (2),

179

Saurositus, (2), 184

Schismotis excisa, (2), 175

Schizocarpus, (1), 11

Schoenus humilis, nants, Carse:, laonocarpus, |

(1), 53; sculptus, Jatelamiuatus, Tepperi, |

breviculinis, discifer, subaphyllus, aphy!us,

q),

(1), > nudus,

Schdneastia oudemansi, (1), 102;

jamesei, biestowei, (1), 102, 103;

(1), 102, 104; blestowet v.

(1), 102, 103, taylori, vandersandei,

102, 106

Seirpus supinus.

54; rubiginosus, (1), 58

lacustris, validus, v.

productus, fluitans, v.

cajocarpus, setaceus,

australicusis,

(15, 45

nodasus,

lenticularis,

carpus, congruus,

hamulosus, aristatts,

Seenitila victoriae, alphena, (1), 148

Sermylasma, (1), 144; carbonata. (1), 145

Shells: More Australian Freshwater; Cotton,

B.C, (1), 143

Siemoidella sp., (1), 40

Sigmoilina sp. (1), 40

Simlimnea braziert, victeriac,

neglecta, gunnt, (1), 146

Smittiua tater, (1), 39

Sorghum, (1), 43

Spinifex, (1), 45; hirsutus, inerme, para~

doxus, (1), 45

Spiroloculina sp., (1), 40

Sporobolus Mitchellii, virginicus, v. pallidus,

capensis, indicus, Caroli, Lindlevi, (1),

Stenomelania, (1), 144; denisonensis, (1),

145

cle ae barhatus. capillaris, (1),

Stevens, C.

dred of Balalter County

servation and Flood Control, (1), 62

Stephens, C. G., The Pedology

Australian Fen, (2), 191

Stipa, (1), 51

Stipa pubescens, setmibarbata, (1),

Strongylus paronai, (2), 186

Sutherlandia craurophylla, (1), 37

Vvieta,

Rkatonis,

megapodius.

C1), :

taber-

stqeamidstaed maritimus, fluviatilis, (1), 54;

terrestris,

platy

cernuus,

enbaquatilis,

The Ilydrology of the Pies

Victoria, South

Australia and its Significance in Soil Con- |

of a South

Thamugacia,

Thiara,

Thiaridac, (1),

Tragus australianus,

(1), 41; sp. (1), 40

(2), 184; physignathi, (2),

(1), 144; amaruloidea, (1), 145

Lid

185

racemosus, (1), 45

ichobius,

(1), il

richoects, (1), 11

Trifoctlina tricarinata,

ite

(1), 40

viodia. (1), ee

Triraphis, (1),

Trombicula, (1 : an 82, 73+ keukenschrijveri,

(1), 73, 75; pallida, (1), 73, 75; munda,

(1). 73, 76; spicea, (1), 73, 78; acuscutel-

laris, (1), 73, 78; japonica, (1), 73, 79;

Trombicutinae

73, 79; densipilata, (1),

74,80: chiroplera, (1), 80; gliricolens, (1),

822 wale ee A 74, 83; issikil, (1), 74,

akamushi, (1), 74, 84: robusta, (1), 74,

bodensis, (1), 74, 84; fletcehert, C1),

74, 86; dehiensis, (1), 74, 87: vanderghin-

i, (1), 74, 87; corvi, (1), 74, 88; scutel-

is, €1), 74, 8&8; palpalis, €13, 74, 90;

intermedia, (1), 74, 90; rara, (1), 74, 90;

riod, (1), 74, 91; wichmanm, (1), 73, 91;

pater (1 ), 74. 82; ANE aH (1),

tier minor, (1), 74, 92, 98; hirsti, 1),

an ; v. deliensis, (1), 75, 94; v. hulo-

Siva (1), 75, 94; novac-hollandiae, (1).

73, U5, samboni, 1), 73, 95, 98: macropus,

(1), 73, 99: cervulicola, (1), 97; signata,

(1), 98; clogans, (1), 98; tindalei, (1), 99

(Acarina) or Ttch-imites of the

Austro-malayan and = Orieutal Regions ;

quadricnse, (1),

The, Womersley, H., and Heastip, W. G.,

(1), 68

Trombiculoides gateri, (1),

Urochlea. (1), 44

Valvatasma, (1), 144

Velleta cyvenepotamica, (1), 37

| Vilia | Andleys, (1), 48

' Viviparidac,

_ Walehia morobensis,

(1), 143

lewthwaitel,

enodis, (1),

134, 135; elabrum, (1), 134: turmalis,

rustica, (1), 134, 136

Wilson, A. FL. A New Occurrenee oi Mona-

Womersley, IT.,

Womersley, H

dite in South Austraha, (1), 38

Austrahan Species of Listro-

phoridae Canest. CAcarina) with Netes on

the New Gencra, (1), 10

A Madification of Berlese’s

Medium for the Microscopic Mounting of

Acarina and other small Arthropods, (2),

181

Womersiey, EL, and Heaslip, W. G.. The

Trombiculinae (Acarina) or Itch-mites of

the Austro-Malavan and Oriental Regions,

(1), 68

\ Zvgochloa, (1), 45; paradoxa, (1), 45

CONTENTS

PART I

Prescorr, J. A.: A Relationship between Evaporation and Temperature Ke

_ Evans, J. W.: Two interesting Upper Permian Homoptera from New. South Wales Fie

Womerstey, H.: Australian Species of AO eT Canest. (Acarina) with Notes on

the New Genera... G i :

Jonnston, T. H., and Mawson, P. M: Soe ‘need Nematodes from Retin At

; Marine Fish > : :

Brack, J. M.; Additions to ihe Flora of South ‘keatalia No. ‘4

WIzson, A. F.: A New Occurrence of Monazite in South Australia

_CHapman, F.: Notes on Fossiliferous Rocks from Tertiary ania to the South west

of Coonalpyn, South Australia .. a os Ose

Biake, S. T.: Critical Notes on the Gramineae anil Cyperaceae of South ‘Kustesita with

Descriptions of New Species

_ STEPHENS, C. G.. The Hydrology of the Sables 3 Bie: Cian Victoria, South

Australia, and its Significance in Soil Conservation and Flood Control . E

Womenrs.ey, H., and Heasiip, W. G.: The Trombiculinae pores: or Itch-mites of nae

‘Austro-Malayan and Oriental Regions .. :

‘Ciiabe: B. C.: More Australian Freshwater ‘Shells

Jounston, T. H., and Crexann, J. B.. Native Names and Uses of Plants i in ae Wah;

eastern corner of South Australia. Pye

PART ul

Corton, B. C.: acsipatcks Shells of the Family Haliotidae

Womenrstey, H.: A Modification of Berlese’s een for the Mieroseopic Moariias of

Acarina and other small Arthropods .. ap

Joneenin. T. H., and. see POM: Remarks on’ some Nematodes ous estat

les

Jounston, T. H., and ‘awe P. M: Sas Necaiodes pe in aeeliiaoe Mirnebranche

Sreruens, C, G.: The Pedology of a South Australian Fen se

Earpirey, C. M.: An Ecological Study of the Vegetation of Eight Mile Creek asi: A

Natural South Australian Coastal Fen Formation .. a cat,

Coorer, H. M.: An Exceptional Australian Axe Head .

- Jounston, T. H., and Best, E. W.: Australian Reise etialk No. 4

Cresrin, I.: Conodonts from Waterhouse Range, Central Australia ..

Mawson, D., and Parkin, L. W.: Some Granitic Rocks of South-eastern South Australia

Jounston, T. H.: Aboriginal Names and Utilization of the Fauna of the Eyrean Region

Prescort, J. A.: The Australian Homoclime of the Zone of Natural Occurrence of

Parthenium argentatum .. it mS we

FINLAYSON, H. H.: A New Sitges a ee (Maranpieliay <

BALANCE-SHEET

List or ratows

INDEX